Operating Manual
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Operating Manual as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 115,583
- Pages: 402
Operating Manual HB502510 Status B April 2006
Solartron® 7950 Flow Computer
Single Stream/Run Liquid Applications (2510)
Front Panel of the Solartron® 795x Series
Mobrey, Mobrey Measurement, and the Mobrey logotype are registered trademarks of Mobrey Limited. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Solartron is a registered trademark of Lloyd Instruments Limited, a subsidiary of Ametek, Inc. HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communications Foundation. All other marks are property of their respective owners.
www.mobrey.com
Mobrey pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The information contained in this document is, therefore, subject to change without notice. To the best of our knowledge, the information contained in this document is accurate. However, Mobrey cannot be held responsible for any errors, omissions or inaccuracies, or any losses incurred as result of them.
IMPORTANT NOTICE Because Mobrey is continuously improving its products, some of the menus which appear on your instrument’s display may not be exactly as illustrated and described in this manual. However, because the menus are simple and intuitive, this should not cause any major problems.
This manual is concurrent with embedded software version 502510, issue 4.20 (or higher)
Static precautions Some parts of the instrument (such as circuit boards) may be damaged by static electricity. Therefore, when carrying out any work which involves the risk of static damage to the instrument, the instructions show the following notice:
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
At such times you must wear an earthed wrist-strap to protect the instrument.
Safety information NOTE: This information applies only to those instruments which are mains-powered. Electricity is dangerous and you risk injury or death if you do not disconnect the power supplies before carrying out some of the procedures given in this manual. Whenever there is such a hazard, the instructions show a notice similar to the following: Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
You must heed any such warnings and make sure that, before you go any further: x All power leads are un-powered. x All power leads are disconnected from the equipment which you are working on unless the instructions tell you otherwise. x You obey any other common-sense precautions which may apply to your situation. If you obey these sensible precautions you can work on the equipment in complete safety.
Battery-backed Memory notice x 7950 and 7950 models manufactured since July 1998 feature an increased amount of battery-backed memory. The PCB Number and Status Number associated with this enhancement are as follows:79500502L (Status ‘L’ or later): 79500502G (Status ‘G’ or later): x As a result of that memory increase, it is essential that the Lithium Cell used for the battery backup is installed at all times (other than during replacement). 7950/7951 units will not power-up correctly if this battery is missing. (7955 and 7952 models are not affected) If it is necessary to run the units without batteries for Intrinsic Safety reasons, then the battery should be replaced with a shorting disk inserted in the battery holder. Please consult Mobrey for further advice. x Replace the battery when the "Low Battery" system alarm is indicated. The procedure is explained in this manual. (See Chapter 14)
Contents 1.
About this manual
1.1
1.1 1.2 1.3
What this manual tells you Who should use this manual Software versions covered by this manual
1.1 1.1 1.1
2.
Getting started
2.1
2.1 2.2 2.3
What this Chapter tells you How to use this Chapter 7950 Inputs 2.3.1 Overview of 7950 inputs 2.3.2 Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs 2.3.3 Orifice flowmeter inputs 2.3.4 Density transducer connections (SAFE AREA ONLY) 2.3.5 Viscosity transducer connections 2.3.6 mA-type temperature transmitter 2.3.7 PRT-type temperature transmitter 2.3.8 mA-type pressure transmitter 2.3.9 Status Input Connections
2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 2.11 2.13 2.15 2.17
2.4
7950 Outputs 2.4.1 Overview of 7950 outputs 2.4.2 Pulse Output Connections 2.4.3 Analogue Output Connections 2.4.4 Digital Output Connections
2.19 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22
2.5 2.6 2.7
Other 7950 Connections Where to find the 7950 connectors If you need help ...
2.23 2.23 2.28
3.
About the 7950
3.1
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
Background What the 7950 single-stream liquid turbine computer does Physical description of the 7950 Communications Typical installation Checking your software version
3.1 3.1 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.5
4.
Installing the system
4.1
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
What this chapter tells you Hazardous and non-hazardous environments Installation procedure Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule Step 2: Unpacking the instrument Step 3: Setting DIP switches Step 4: Fitting the 7950 Step 5: Making the external connections Step 6: Earthing the instrument Step 7: Connecting the power supply
4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.2 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.4 4.5
5.
The keyboard, display and indicators
5.1
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.8
What this Chapter tells you The layout of the front panel What the display shows How the keys work Using the keys to move around the menus Using the keys to view stored data Using the keys to edit information The 795x character set LED indicators Summary of key functions
5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.7 5.7 5.8
6.
The menu system
6.1
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
What this Chapter tells you What the menu system does How the menu system works A general example of part of a menu system
6.1 6.1 6.1 6.3
7.
Serial Communications and Networking
7.1
7.1 7.2 7.3
What this chapter tells you 7950/7951 Communication capabilities MODBUS from the 7950/7951 view-point 7.3.1 Introduction 7.3.2 Supported Commands 7.3.3 Floating Point Numbers 7.3.4 Word Swap Mode 7.3.5 Modbus addressing
7.1 7.1 7.3 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.2
7.4
Connecting the 795x to an RS-232/RS-485 Link 7.4.1 RS-232 (full duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections 7.4.2 RS-485 (half duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections
7.5 7.5 7.7
7.5
After Connecting the 795x… 7.5.1 General RS-232C/485 Port Configuration
7.8 7.6
7.5.2 RS-232 Configuration 7.5.3 RS-485 Configuration
7.6 7.9
7.6
795x Database access over a MODBUS network 7.6.1 Introduction 7.6.2 7950/7951 Database information: software parameters values 7.6.3 7950/7951 Database information: software parameter status 7.6.4 7950/7951 Database information: full attributes
7.10 7.10 7.12 7.13 7.16
7.7
Historical Alarm Log access over a MODBUS network 7.7.1 Introduction 7.7.2 Worked Examples 7.7.3 Worked Example Two
7.17 7.17 7.18 7.18
7.8
Historical Event Log access over a MODBUS network 7.8.1 Introduction 7.8.2 Worked Examples
7.22 7.22 7.23
7.9
Archive access over a MODBUS network 7.9.1 Introduction 7.9.2 Worked Examples
7.24 7.24 7.27
7A
Addendum A: Peer-To-Peer Communications
7a.1
7B
Addendum B: High-speed List Communications
7b.1
7C
Addendum C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7c.1
7D
Addendum D: ‘Intelligent Transmitter’ Monitor
7d.1
8.
Alarms and Events
8.1
8.1
Alarms 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 8.1.8 8.1.9 8.1.10
Alarm types Alarm indicators How alarms are received and stored Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log What the Alarm Status Display tells you What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log User-defined Alarms Alarm Logger Output (ALO) Alarm message list
8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.2 8.2 8.3 8.3 8.4 8.6 8.7
Introduction to 795x events Event indicators How events are received and stored Examining the Event Summary and the Event log What the Event Status Display tells you What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log
8.12 8.12 8.12 8.12 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.14
8.2.
8.3.
Events 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7
Enhanced Auditing 8.3.1 Audit User Events
8.15 8.15
8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5
Audit System Alarms Audit Control Attributes Audit Event Suppression Control: Automatic mode Audit Alarm Suppression Control: Automatic mode
8.16 8.17 8.19 8.21
9.
Additional facilities
9.1
9.1
Feature: Archiving 9.1.1 Introduction 9.1.2 Statistical information 9.1.3 Analysis of an archive 9.1.4 Configuration details 9.1.5 Re-sizing archive space 9.1.6 Operation details (Reporting) 9.1.7 Guided examples of archiving
9.1 9.1 9.2 9.2 9.8 9.13 9.14 9.17
9.2
Feature: PID Control 9.2.1 Overview 9.2.2 Configuration details
9.18 9.18 9.19
9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6
Feature: Printed Reports Selecting units and data formats Parameter alarm limits Fallback values and modes Units which the 795x can display
9.19 9.22 9.22 9.23 9.23
10.
Configuring using Wizards
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4
Introduction to Wizards Using Wizards Quick-view Guide ( Set-up Wizards ) Units Wizard selection
11.
Configuring without using Wizards
11.1
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9
What does this Chapter tell me? Quick-find Index A structured approach to configuring Reference page conventions Analogue inputs Digital inputs Pulse inputs Turbine flow Orifice flow metering (ISO 5167-1) + Orifice flow metering (AGA 3) + Orifice flow metering (HART) Coriolis flow metering Totalisers Prime ‘density loop’ fluid temperature Prime ‘viscosity loop’ fluid temperature Meter temperature ‘Density loop’ pressure
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.16 11.17 11.18 11.28 11.31 11.33 11.34 11.35 11.36
11.10 11.11 11.12 11.13 11.14 11.15
10.1 10.1 10.1 10.3 10.4
11.16 11.17 11.18 11.19 11.20 11.21 11.22 11.23 11.24 11.25 11.26 11.27 11.28 11.29 11.30 11.31 11.32 11.33 11.34 11.35
Meter pressure Header density API referred density 4x5 matrix referred density Meter density of known fluid Base density of known fluid Specific gravity / Degrees API Special equations Header ‘viscosity loop’ density Header viscosity Viscosity referral Base sediment & water measurements Net oil/water measurements Net oil/water flow rates and totals Live analogue outputs Interface detection Digital outputs Live pulse outputs Passwords and security Multi-page multi-view
11.37 11.38 11.44 11.45 11.46 11.47 11.48 11.49 11.50 11.52 11.55 11.57 11.59 11.65 11.73 11.74 11.77 11.78 11.79 11.82
12.
Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4
Viewing the data Checking the performance of the 795x Printed reports Giving your 7950 a tag number
12.1 12.5 12.7 12.10
13.
Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13.1
13.1 13.2
Cleaning the instrument Fault-finding
14.
Removal and replacement of parts
14.1
14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9
Front panel assembly Display Connector board Microprocessor board Screen and RFI conductive strips Terminal cover seal Gland plate seal Fuses Back-up battery
14.1 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11
15.
Assembly drawing and parts list
15.1
15.1 15.2
What the drawing and parts list tells you How to obtain spare parts
13.1 13.1
15.1 15.1
16.
Flowmeter proving
16.1
Not supported on the 7950.
17.
HART, SMART and the 7950
17.1
17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6
What this Chapter tells you Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7950 Connecting the 7950 to a HART network loop Configuring the 7950 to use a HART network loop Post configuration - viewing HART data SMART units of measurement
18.
BATCHING (TRANSACTION)
18.1
18.1
Standard batch operations 18.1.1 Batch operation types 18.1.2 Batch operation parameter reference 18.1.3 Example 1: Manual batch type trigger 18.1.4 Example 2: Timed batches 18.1.5 Example 3: Quantity batch with FDC – Single program loop 18.1.6 Example 4: Quantity batch with FDC – Pause and resume controls 18.1.7 Example 5: Daily batch 18.1.8 Printed report samples
18.1 18.1 18.2 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.11 18.13 18.14
18.2
Retrospective batch total calculations 18.2.1 Overview 18.2.2 Using retrospective calculations (on an archived record) 18.2.3 Using retrospective calculations (on the current batch record)
18.17 18.17 18.18 18.20
17.1 17.1 17.3 17.6 17.8 17.8
Appendices Appendix A
Glossary
A.1
Appendix B
Blank wiring schedule
B.1
Appendix C
Technical data for the 7950
C.1
Appendix D
Units and conversion factors
D.1
Appendix E
Data tables
E.1
Appendix F
Calculations
F.1
Appendix G
Certificate of Conformity
G.1
Quick-start Guide
Quick-start Guide If you want to...
Read....
x Find out what's in this manual
Contents pages
x Get started quickly
Chapter 2
x Get an overview of the instrument
Chapter 3 and Appendix C
x Understand how the menu system works
Chapter 6
x Make connections to the instrument
Chapters 2, 4 and Appendix C
x Install the instrument and set it up
Chapters 2, 4, 10 and 11
x Operate the instrument
Chapters 5 - 9 and 12
x Carry out routine maintenance
Chapter 13
x Trace and repair faults
Chapters 13 and 14
x Remove and replace parts
Chapters 14 and 15
x know about flowmeter proving
Chapter 16
x know about HART support
Chapter 17
x know about Batching support
Chapter 18
x Understand what a term means
Appendix A
795x Op Man / BC
Page Q.1
Quick-start Guide
Page Q.2
795x Op Man / BC
Chapter 1 About this manual
1. About this manual 1.1 What this manual tells you This manual tells you how to install, configure, operate and service the instrument. In addition, some information is given to help you identify and correct some of the more common faults which may occur. However, since repairs are done by changing suspected faulty assemblies, fault-finding to board component level is not covered. This manual assumes that all devices or peripherals to be connected to the 795x have their own documentation which tells you how to install and configure them. For this reason it is assumed that anything which you want to link to the 795x is already installed and working correctly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Since the instrument can be used for a wide variety of purposes, it is driven by software specially for your application. This manual gives information about the software which applies to your machine only. Throughout this manual the term '795x' is used to refer to all members of the 795x family (7950, 7951 and 7955).
1.2 Who should use this manual This manual is for anyone who installs, uses, services or repairs the 795x.
1.3 Software version covered by this manual The software version dealt with in this manual is given on the title page. Chapter 3 tells you how to find out what software is installed in your instrument.
795x (CH01/CB)
Page 1.1
Chapter 1 About this manual
Page 1.2
795x (CH01/CB)
Chapter 2 Getting started
2. Getting started 2.1 What this Chapter tells you This Chapter shows how to: x
Connect different types of instrumentation to a 7950.
x
Set the DIP switches in the 7950.
x
Select the appropriate software Wizard to configure the 7950.
2.2 How to use this Chapter This Chapter is designed to introduce the various types of inputs and outputs that the 7950 can support. Each type of connection (i.e. input-only or output-only) is represented by an easy to follow, self-contained worked example. Try one example at a time. After working through the examples that are appropriate, use the information in Chapter 3 to plan connections and then implement them in conjunction with the subsequent installation chapter.
Important Warnings!! 1. The 795X series is not intrinsically safe and, therefore, can only be used in officially designated safe (non-hazardous) areas. 2. All examples of connections in this manual are designed to be attempted in a non-hazardous area. 3. Hazardous area considerations are outside the scope of this manual. Always refer to installation documentation supplied by the manufacturer for their instrumentation.
Examples are organised as follows: x
Section 2.3 - for 7950 Inputs only
x
Section 2.4 - for 7950 Outputs only
Each worked example has a comprehensive set of instructions to establish a successful physical connection. Instructions also show how to select the correct software Wizard. Some types of connection require DIP switches to be set. These switches are located on the Connector Board and are accessible after removing the Terminal Cover (See Chapter 14). There is a block of four switches for deciding which of the first four Analogue Inputs will accept mA signals and which will accept PRT signals. The other block features one switch for selecting whether the ‘turbine power’ pins will provide either 8V or 16V from the 7950 isolated supply. Worked examples will always explain when there is a need to set a DIP switch. Note: x
DIP switches which are not shown in the diagrams have no effect on the field transmitter shown.
x
Where a field transmitter can be connected to more than one analogue input, the DIP switch setting depends on which input you have used.
Other sections in this chapter are as follows: x
Section 2.5 lists chapters that deal with connections that are more complex. (Page 2.23)
x
Section 2.6 contains 7950 pin designation lists for various hardware configurations. (Page 2.23)
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.1
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3 7950 Inputs 2.3.1 Overview of 7950 inputs This section features connections with external devices that provide only input signals to the 7950. Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples: x
Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs...............….....…................ Page 2.3
x
Orifice flowmeter inputs...............................….….................. Page 2.5
x
Density Transducer Connections (SAFE AREA ONLY)….... Page 2.7
x
Viscosity Transducer Connections …………..………………. Page 2.9
x
mA-type temperature transmitter..................................…..... Page 2.11
x
PRT-type temperature transmitter...........…..................….....Page 2.13
x
mA-type pressure transmitter....................….................….... Page 2.15
x
Status Input Connections...............................................….... Page 2.17
Use the <“Health Check”> menu system facility on the 7950 to monitor what is being input. Once located, select the particular type of input and then select the instance of that input to see what is happening.
Page 2.2
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.2 Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs Support is provided for wiring 1 flowmeter to the 7950: x
A 7950 can accept either single or dual pulse signal trains from each flowmeter. There are r signal pins for each pulse train.
x
Flowmeters can be powered by the turbine power supply pins on the 7950. These power pins are an isolated supply source - 8V or 16V (selectable by a DIP switch on the power supply board). The selected voltage applies to all turbine power pins.
Example: 1 turbine (pulse) flowmeter with dual pulse train outputs Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch
2. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, that is required by all the turbine flowmeters. This diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the flowmeter using the 795X isolated power source) Connect the flowmeter to the 7950
16V
8V
3. Wire the flowmeter terminals to the 7950. Refer to Table 2.3.1 for a list of applicable pins for this connection. Notice that each flowmeter terminal (wire) in the diagram below has a function label. The label identifies the appropriate pin in two groups of pins.
Figure 2.3.1: Connections for a Typical Dual Pick-up Turbine Flowmeter
Power supply unit
Turbine Power +
Table 2.3.1: Pin Connections for a Typical Turbine Flowmeter Connection label
Group #1
Group #2
Turbine Power +
PL8/1
PL8/5
Turbine Power -
PL8/4
PL8/8
Turbine signal 'A' +
Turbine Signal ‘A’ +
PL8/2
PL8/2
Turbine signal 'A' -
Turbine Signal ‘A’ -
PL8/3
PL8/3
Turbine Signal ‘B’ +
PL8/6
PL8/6
Turbine Signal ‘B’ -
PL8/7
PL8/7
Turbine Power -
Pickup 'A' Turbine
Turbine signal 'B' +
Pickup 'B'
Turbine signal 'B' -
Notes x
Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7950 pins applicable to the pickup nominated as ‘A’. These are labelled as: “Turbine Signal ‘A’ +”, “Turbine Signal ‘A’ -”.
x
Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The 7950) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
Turn on the power
7950 Op Man/CB
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Page 2.3
Chapter 2 Getting started (Instructions continued …) Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Flow meter” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Flow meter”. 11. Press the c-key to select “Turbine”.
Proceed with wizard
12. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions)
Page 2.4
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.3 Orifice flowmeter inputs Loop powered differential pressure cells can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7950. There are four analogue inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’ has a list of option boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs. The maximum number of DP cells supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 DP cells are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example: Two cells connected to analogue inputs 1 and 2. Cells are powered by 7950 (24V isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as shown on page below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 1 is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.2)
Connect the first Differential Pressure cell
3. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 2 is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.2) 4. Wire the first cell to Analogue Input ‘1’ Loop-powered 4-20mA differential pressure transmitter + -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) each identify one pin in Table 2.3.2. Analogue Input ‘1’ pins are listed under the “Input #1 Pins” column.
Figure 2.3.2: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example 4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
7950 Op Man/CB
PRT
Page 2.5
Chapter 2 Getting started
Table 2.3.2: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x Analogue Inputs Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
Analogue Power-
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
(Instructions continued…) Connect the second Differential Pressure cell
5. Wire the first cell to Analogue Input ‘2’
+ -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) each identify one pin in Table 2.3.2. Analogue Input ‘2’ pins are listed under the “Input #2 Pins” column. Turn on the power
6. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
7. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 8. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 9. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 10. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
11. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Flow meter” is shown. 12. Press the b-key to select “Flow meter”. 13. Press the d-key to select “Orifice”.
Proceed with wizard
14. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions)
Page 2.6
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.4 Density Transducer Connections (SAFE AREA ONLY) Support is provided for connecting up to 2 Liquid Density Transducers: x
A 7950 can accept frequency (periodic time) outputs from each Density Transducer. There are separate sets of pins for four periodic time inputs.
x
Each Density Transducer can be powered by using a specific set of pins on the 7950. These pins utilise the 7950’s isolated power supply.
Example: A 783x/784x Density Transducer with integrated PT100 sensor Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Density measurement connection
2. Wire the “Dens. Signal +” and “Dens. Signal -” connections to the 7950.
Additional wiring
3. Additional wiring is required on the 7950
Each density connection, shown in the diagram below, has a label. Use each label to reference the appropriate pin designation in Table 2.3.3.
(a) The chosen pin for “Dens. Signal -” must be wired to “Density Power -” (b) A resistor across two 7950 pins: “Dens. Power +” & “Dens. Signal +” 330 ohms
783x/784x
7950 (Klippon) Dens. Power+
PL9/1
Dens. Signal +
1
PL9/2 Dens. Signal -
2
PL9/3 PL9/4
PT100 THIS IS NOT USED FOR THIS EXAMPLE
Density measurement using Density input #1 pins
Dens. Power -
Figure 2.3.3: 783x/784x Liquid Density Transducer Connections
Dens. Signal + 7 8 9 10
POS+ 1 NEG- 2
Dens. Signal -
3 4
PRT Power +
PRT
5 6
11 12
PRT Signal + PRT Signal PRT Power -
7 8 9 10 11 12
7950 Op Man/CB
POS+ 1 NEG- 2
PRT
3 4 5 6
Page 2.7
Chapter 2 Getting started
(Instructions continued…) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the Wizard selection menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Txdr density” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Txdr density”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
Notes: x
Application use of these density inputs will depend on the particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The 7950) or the 7950 configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
x
Installation of a 783x/784x in a hazardous area is not covered in this Operating Manual. Always refer to documentation supplied with the Transducer for this information.
Table 2.3.3: Klippon Pin Connections - 7950 to 783x/784x Connection label
Pin Set #1
Pin Set #2
Dens. Power +
PL9/1
PL9/5
Dens. Signal +
PL9/2
PL9/6
Dens. Signal -
PL9/3
PL9/7
Dens. Power -
PL9/4
PL9/8
Note: See instructions for additional wiring requirements
Page 2.8
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.5 Viscosity Transducer Connections Support is provided for connecting up to 2 Viscosity Transducers: x
A 7950 can accept frequency (periodic time) outputs from each Viscosity Transducer.
x
Each Viscosity Transducer can be powered by using a reserved set of pins on the 7950. These pins utilise the 7950’s isolated power supply.
Example: An EMC compliant 7827 Density Transducer with integrated PT100 sensor Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Density measurement connection
2. Wire the 7827 connections to the 7950 as shown in Figure 2.3.4.
Optional temperature measurement
3. Wire the PRT connections to the 7950 as shown in Figure 2.3.4.
Each 7827 connection shown in Figure 2.3.5 has a label. Use each label to reference the appropriate pin designation in Table 2.3.4.
Each PT100 connection shown in Figure 2.3.5 has a label. Use each label to reference the appropriate pin designation in Table 2.3.4.
Figure 2.3.4: 7827 Viscosity Analyser and 7950 Connections 7827 (EMC Compliant)
Supply + Sig + Supply Integrated PT100 (EMC Compliant)
7950 (Klippon) Power +
PL10/1
Signal +
PL10/2
Power -
PL10/3
Signal PRT Power + PRT Signal +
PRT
Density Input #3 pins on the 7950
PRT Signal PRT Power -
PL10/4
PL13/1 PL13/2 PL13/3
PRT Input #3 pins on the 7950
PL13/4
Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the Wizard selection menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Viscosity” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Viscosity”.
Proceed with wizard
7950 Op Man/CB
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
Page 2.9
Chapter 2 Getting started
Notes: x
Application use of these density inputs will depend on the particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The 7950) or the 7950 configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
x
Installation of a 7827 in a hazardous area is not covered in this Operating Manual. Always refer to technical documentation supplied with the Transducer.
Figure 2.3.5: An EMC Compliant 7827 Viscosity Transducer with Connections PRT Power + PRT Power -
Visc. Power +
PRT Signal +
+ - + -
PRT Signal Visc. Power -
Visc. Signal + Visc. Signal -
Table 2.3.4: Pin Connections - 7950 to 7827 Connection label
Input #3
Input #4
Visc. Power +
PL10/1
PL10/5
Visc. Signal +
PL10/2
PL10/6
Visc. Signal -
PL10/3
PL10/7
Visc. Power -
PL10/4
PL10/8
PRT Power +
PL13/1
PL13/5
PRT Signal +
PL13/2
PL13/6
PRT Signal -
PL13/3
PL13/7
PRT Power -
PL13/4
PL13/8
Note: See instructions for typical wiring arrangements in a non-hazardous area
Page 2.10
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.6 mA-type temperature transmitter Loop powered temperature transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7950. There are 4 analogue inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’ has a list of option boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs. The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 transmitters are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example: 1 loop powered temperature transmitter connected to analogue input 3. It is powered by the 7950 (24V isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up
Set DIP switches as shown below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 3 is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.6)
Figure 2.3.6: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example
4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
Connect the field transmitter to the 7950
PRT
3. Wire the field transmitter to Analogue Input ‘3’ + -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) will each identify one pin in Table 2.3.5. Analogue Input ‘3’ pins are listed under the “Input #3 Pins” column.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.11
Chapter 2 Getting started
(Instructions continued…) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Temperature” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Temperature”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions) Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.23) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Table 2.3.5: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x Analogue Inputs Connection label
Page 2.12
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
Analogue Power-
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.7 PRT-type temperature transmitter PRT-type temperature transmitters can use any of the first four PRT (Analogue) Inputs on the 7950. There are 4 PRT Inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a PRT-type field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for PRT (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the PRT power pins are used.
Example: 1 PRT-type temperature transmitter connected to PRT Input ‘4’. It is powered by the 7950 (isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as shown below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 4 is set for PRT. (See Figure 2.3.7)
Figure 2.3.7: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example 4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
3. Wire the field transmitter to PRT Input 4. PRT Power + PRT
Connect the field transmitter to the 7950
PRT
Signal + Signal PRT Power -
The labels (e.g. “PRT Power+”) will each identify one pin in Table 2.3.6. PRT Input ‘4’ pins are listed under the “Input #4 Pins” column.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.13
Chapter 2 Getting started
(Instructions continued …) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Temperature” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Temperature”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions) Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.23) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Table 2.3.6: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x PRT Inputs Connection label
Page 2.14
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
PRT Power+
PL12/1
PL12/5
PL13/1
PL13/5
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
PRT Power-
PL12/4
PL12/8
PL13/4
PL13/8
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.8 mA-type pressure transmitter Loop powered pressure transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7950. There are 4 analogue inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’ has a list of option boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs. The number of pressure transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example: 1 loop powered pressure transmitter connected to Analogue Input ‘3’. It is powered by the 7950 (24V isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 Flow Computer is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as shown below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for Analogue Input ‘1’ is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.8)
Figure 2.3.8: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example
4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
Connect the field transmitter to the 7950
PRT
3. Wire the field transmitter to Analogue Input ‘3’ + -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) will each identify one pin in Table 2.3.7. Analogue Input ‘3’ pins are listed under the “Input #3 Pins” column.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.15
Chapter 2 Getting started (Instructions continued…) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the Wizard selection menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Pressure” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Pressure”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions) Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.23) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Table 2.3.7: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x Analogue Inputs
Page 2.16
Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
Analogue Power-
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.9 Status Input Connections Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to a 7950. 1. Power Supply (1a) Internal powered 795x status input (Internal power) notes:
795x +5V to 24V (Isolated supply) Status input 3.3k
Status input common 0V (Isolated supply)
Status input using internal voltage source
Always use an isolated voltage from the range 5V to 24V. There are only a few isolated voltage pins, on the rear panel of the 795x, that are suitable: (a) Density power (24V) (b) Turbine power (8V or 16V)
Circuit operation notes: A closed switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 1 An open switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 0
Isolated voltage Supply Pins These are listed in the following table: Choice
Power source
7950 Klippon (Power +)
7950 Klippon (Power -)
1st.
Density
PL9/1
PL9/4
2nd.
Density
PL9/5
PL9/8
3rd.
Turbine
PL8/1
PL8/4
th
Turbine
PL8/5
PL8/8
4 .
(1b) External powered (recommended) 795x status input (external power) notes:
795x +5V to +24V (external)
1. Use a voltage that falls within the range 5V to 24V. It is possible to use the same voltage source that is powering the 795x. In this case, the voltage requirement is 24V.
Status input
2. An isolated power source must be used to maintain status input isolation.
3.3k
Circuit operation notes: 0V (external)
Status input common
Status input using external voltage source
7950 Op Man/CB
A closed switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 1 An open switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 0
Page 2.17
Chapter 2 Getting started 2. Status Input Common Pin Choice
7950 Klippon
st
1 .
PL6/09
2nd.
PL6/10
3. Status Input Signal Pin
Page 2.18
Status Input
7950 Klippon
Default Function
1
PL6/1
None
2
PL6/2
None
3
PL6/3
None
4
PL6/4
None
5
PL6/5
None
6
PL6/6
None
7
PL6/7
None
8
PL6/8
None
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4 7950 Outputs 2.4.1 Overview of 7950 outputs This section feature connections with external devices that provide only output signals to the 7950. Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples: x x x
Pulse Output Connections.……..…………...... Page 2.20 Analogue Output Connections..…....……...... Page 2.21 Digital Output Connections....…………..…..... Page 2.22
Use the <“Health Check”> menu system facility on the 7950 to monitor what is being output. Once located, select the particular type of output and then select the instance of that output to see what is happening.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.19
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4.2 Pulse Output Connections Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made.
Figure 2.4.1: Wiring for pulse output 1 (for all 795X series) +5V to +40V 795X
Pulse output +ve
Relay
Pulse output 1
Pulse output common
Note: The +24V and 0V could be taken from a density supply or somewhere else on the instrument.
0V
1. Pulse Output Power (+ve) Pin There is one pin reserved for all pulse outputs… 7950 Klippon PL5/4
2. Pulse Output Common Pin There is one pin for all pulse outputs… 7950 Klippon PL5/8
3. Pulse Output Signal Pin There is one pin for each pulse output… Output Number
7950 Klippon
Default Parameter Output
1
PL5/5
None
2
PL5/6
None
3
PL5/7
None
Note: Refer to the configuration chapters for details on how to select parameters for output.
Page 2.20
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4.3 Analogue Output Connections Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made.
Figure 2.4.2: Analogue output wiring (for all 795X series)
795x Analogue Output Signal
Analogue Output Commmon
1. Analogue Output Common Pin There is a choice of pins for all of the Analogue Outputs… Choice
7950 Klippon
st
1 .
PL11/09
2nd.
PL11/10
2. Analogue Output Pins Output Number
7950 Klippon
Default Parameter Output
1
PL11/1
None
2
PL11/2
None
3
PL11/3
None
4
PL11/4
None
5*
PL11/5
None
6*
PL11/6
None
7*
PL11/7
None
8*
PL11/8
None
Note: Refer to the configuration chapters for details on how to select a parameter for output * Requires add-on (option) board 79506 to be fitted
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.21
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4.4 Digital Output Connections Status Output 1 Status Output 1 uses a relay with 2 contacts: 1: “Normally Open” pin PL5/1 OR “Normally Closed” pin PL5/3 2: Common pin PL5/2 This output functions as a ‘Watchdog’ for indicating the presence of at least one active alarm. For example, the NO contact is energised only if there is an alarm. Status Outputs 2 to ‘N’ Remaining Status Outputs are of the open-drain type. Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to the 7950: 1. Power Supply (a) External power (Recommended) Figure 2.4.3: A recommended approach to wiring a status outputs (#2 onwards) This diode protects 795x against reverse voltages
795x
External power supply provides voltage and current suitable for user selected relay.
Status output
0V from external power supply Status output common
2. Status Output Common Pin 7950 Klippon PL7/9 PL7/10
3. Status Output Signal Pins Status Output
x
Default Function
7950 Klippon
2
Limit Alarm Watchdog
PL7/2
3
Input Alarm Watchdog
PL7/3
4
User Alarm ‘X’ Watchdog
PL7/4
5
User Alarm ‘Y’ Watchdog
PL7/5
All other Status Outputs (#6, #7, etc) do not have a default function but may be allocated a function as part of configuring a feature. Refer to Chapters 8, 9 or 11 for relevant features.
Notes: x x
Page 2.22
Refer to Chapter 8 for information on changing settings for the Alarm Logger Output (Watchdog) feature. Refer to Chapter 11 for information on configuring a Status Output.
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.5 Other 7950 connections Serial Communications Turn to Chapter 7 for a full guide to Serial Communications involving the 7950. HART Communications Turn to Chapter 16 for a full guide to HART support on a 7950.
2.6 Where to find the 7950 connectors This section contains full lists of pin designations referred to in this Chapter. There is a separate table for each possible hardware configuration.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.23
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.1: Pin designations for a 7950 (D-type) without an option board fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
PL14
PL15
4
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Page 2.24
PL7
PL8 Turbine A Power +
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.2: Pin designations for a 7950 (D-type) with option board 79506 fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
4
PL7
Turbine A Power +
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
PL14
PL15
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
Analogue Power +
Analogue Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
Analogue Input 5 +
Analogue Input 7 +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
Analogue Input 5 -
Analogue Input 7 -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
Analogue Power -
Analogue Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
Analogue Output 5
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
Analogue Power +
Analogue Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
Analogue Output 6
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
Analogue Input 6 +
Analogue Input 8 +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
Analogue Output 7
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
Analogue Input 6 -
Analogue Input 8 -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
Analogue Output 8
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
Analogue Power -
Analogue Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
7950 Op Man/CB
PL8
Page 2.25
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.3: Pin designations for a 7950 (D-type) with option board 79507 fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
PL15
4
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
PL14
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
HART Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
HART Input 5 +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
HART Input 5 -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
HART Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
HART Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
HART Input 6 +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
HART Input 6 -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
HART Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Page 2.26
PL7
PL8 Turbine A Power +
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.4: Pin designations for a 7950 (Klippon) with all add-on boards fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
4
PL7
Turbine A Power +
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
PL14
PL15
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
HART/Analog Power +
Analogue Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
HART/Analog Input 5 +
Analogue Input 7 +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
HART/Analog Input 5 -
Analogue Input 7 -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
HART/Analog Power -
Analogue Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
Analogue Output 5
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
HART/Analog Power +
Analogue Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
Analogue Output 6
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
HART/Analog Input 6 +
Analogue Input 8 +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
Analogue Output 7
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
HART/Analog Input 6 -
Analogue Input 8 -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
Analogue Output 8
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
HART/Analog Power -
Analogue Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
7950 Op Man/CB
PL8
Page 2.27
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.7 If you need help... If you get into difficulties... If you get into difficulties when using the wizards, you can abandon the configuration and start again as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
From the menu, keep selecting NO (usually by pressing the c-key) or, if that option is not available: Press ENTER until you can start selecting NO. Carry on with (1) and (2) until you return to the wizards menu where you started. Start the worked example again. The configuration you abandoned is cleared from the instrument’s memory when you begin again.
If you don’t know where the keys are... Figure 2.7.1 shows how to find all the keys referred to in the worked examples.
Figure 2.7.1: Keys and indicators on the front panel S solartron UP ARROW
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
a
b
DOWN ARROW
c
+/-
0 d
CLR
EXP
ENTER
1 2
ALARM LIGHTS
MULTIVIEW
MENU
Figure 2.7.1 shows those keys referred to in the worked examples, plus some others you may use. Chapter 5 gives a full explanation of what all the keys do.
Page 2.28
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3. About the 7950 3.1 Background The 7950 was developed to meet the demand for a reliable, versatile, user-friendly and cost-effective instrument for liquid and gas metering. It has a Motorola 68332 32-bit microprocessor and surfacemounted circuit board components so that it is powerful, reliable and compact. 7950 features: x x x x x x
comprehensive I/O capabilities alarm and alarm history facilities a menu-driven, user-friendly interface for easy access to information NEMA 4X, IP65 enclosure ac or dc powered Serial ports for MODBUS network communications and printing.
3.2 What the 7950 single-stream liquid turbine computer does The 7950 single-stream liquid turbine computer is used specifically with liquid products and may use a number of types of flow meter (such as turbine, orifice or venturi meters) to measure parameters of interest.
The present issue of the liquid turbine software has support for connecting: x up to one flowmeter (turbine/orifice/coriolis) x up to two liquid density transducers - 7830, 7835, 7840 and 7845 models only x up to four PT100 or 0/4-20mA type temperature transmitters x up to two 0/4-20mA type static pressure transmitters x Stream Block valve and Prover valves In this application, the main purpose of the 7951 is to calculate flow rates and flow totals: x Indicated volume flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) x Indicated standard volume flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) x Gross volume flow rate and flow total x Gross standard volume flow rate and flow total x Mass flow rate and flow total {Coriolis mass meter - measurement from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Nett volume flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) x Corrected mass flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) It can also generate: x Line pressure (at the flow point) {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Prover inlet temperature and pressure {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Prover outlet temperature and pressure {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Line temperature (at the flow point) {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Density temperature (at the flow point) {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Line density {from a density transducer, HART Input or from generated base density}
7950 Op Man/BC
Page 3.1
Chapter 3 About the 7950
x Base density (from Solartron’ 4x5 Matrix method or from API method†) x Specific gravity from an analogue input x Meter factor (flowmeter proving or linearisation of a user-definable calibration curve) x CTL (Temperature correction factor) {from API referral} x CPL (Pressure correction factor) {from API referral} x CCF (Combined correction factor)
Other application features : x Batching x Retrospective calculations x Net oil/water calculations x Alarm summary and history log x Configuration log (available over serial communications only) x Event summary and history log x Special equation 1 x Special equation 2
NOTE : Chapter 21.2 from the September 1996 draft of the API standard has been used unless indicated with the symbol
†
This complies with section 11.2.1 11.2.2 of API standard (September 1996 draft copy)
Page 3.2
7950 Op Man/BC
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3.3 Physical description of the 7950 The 7950 is a wall-mounted instrument housed in a one-piece case. The upper part of the instrument has a panel on which are mounted the keyboard and display. Below this, and stepped back slightly, is a terminal cover which, when removed allows access to the electrical connectors on the connector board inside the instrument. All wiring enters the case from underneath, through the gland plate which has to be drilled for the purpose. The connector board is mounted vertically inside the back of the case. The microprocessor board is attached, by six screws and stand-offs, to the back of the keyboard and display. The upper and lower parts of the instrument are separated by a horizontal metal plate (the screen) which helps to protect the instrument against electro-magnetic interference.
The 7950 and its major assemblies 7950 Op Man/BC
Page 3.3
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3.4 Communications The 7950 can operate as a MODBUS slave. It can: x download a configuration from a PC, DCS, etc. x upload a configuration x monitor random locations in the 7950 x interrogate the alarm and data logger buffers x manipulate the alarm and data logger buffers x set random locations with new data x instigate printed reports.
3.5 Typical installation The diagram below illustrates a typical installation of a liquid turbine metering system that utilises the 7950 Flow Computer.
Serial comms.
795X FLOW COMPUTER
4-20mA outputs Pulse outputs Status outputs
Pulse 'A'
PRT or 4-20mA
4-20mA
T
P
Pulse 'B' Periodic Time
7835 Densitometer
Page 3.4
7950 Op Man/BC
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3.6 Checking your software version The 7950 is driven by pre-loaded software which differs according to the application for which the instrument is to be used.
PREFIX
DIGIT 1
DIGIT 2
DIGIT 3
DIGIT 4
HARDWARE PLATFORM
METERED PRODUCT
FLOW METER
STREAMS/ CHANNELS
SPECIAL
50, 51 or 55 for 7950, 7951 or 7955
1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
0-9
Gas Liquid Both Other
PREFIX
DIGIT 1
None Orifice Turbine Venturi Mass Multi
DIGIT 2
Single Dual etc... etc...
DIGIT 3
DIGIT 4
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION CODE
For example, in the case of a 7950 single stream gas turbine flow computer, the software configuration code is SW501210. You can find the software configuration code in several ways: x It is printed on a label inside the instrument. You can find it by removing the terminal cover. x It is written into the menu structure.
7950 Op Man/BC
Page 3.5
Chapter 3 About the 7950
Page 3.6
7950 Op Man/BC
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4. Installing the system 4.1 What this Chapter tells you This chapter gives you full instructions for installing the 7950. It does not go into detail about how to install any peripheral devices (such as transducers, computers or printers) which can be connected to the 7950. For this information you must refer to the documentation supplied with these items.
4.2 Hazardous and non-hazardous environments If all or part of an installation is in an area where there is the risk of fire or explosion, then barriers usually have to be wired into the circuit. However, some instruments (such as the Covimat) are explosion-proof and barriers are not, therefore, needed. You must follow the manufacturers instructions and safety recommendations fully.
4.3 Installation procedure Briefly, the procedure is: Step 1: Draw up a wiring schedule Step 2: Unpack the 7950 Step 3: Set the DIP switches Step 4: Fit the 7950 Step 5: Make all external connections Step 6: Earth the installation Step 7: Connect power supply The steps in the procedure are explained in the following sections.
4.4 Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule Before you make any connections, you must draw up a wiring schedule to help you identify wiring colours and make sure that you do not connect more items of any given type than you are allowed to. (If you are in doubt, check the specification in Appendix C.) A blank copy of a wiring schedule is given in Appendix B.
4.5 Step 2: Unpacking the instrument Remove the instrument from its packing and examine it to see if any items are loose or if it has been damaged in transit. Check that all items on the shipping list are present. If any items are missing or if the equipment is damaged, contact your supplier immediately for further advice. What should be supplied with the 7950:
7950 (CH04/CE)
x
Labels #1 - #20 for identifying the sockets
x
4-way free socket for DC input
x
3-way free socket for AC input
x
10-way free socket for I/O (13 off)
x
2 Amp and 1.25 Amp fuses (Note: these are spares)
x
An operating manual (this manual) Page 4.1
Chapter 4 Installing the system
Other items you must supply yourself: x
cable glands (if you want to use them)
x
fixings (such as screws and plugs) suitable for fixing the 7950 to a wall.
Note: If you have ordered optional, additional facilities (such as extra outputs) these are already installed in the machine.
4.6 Step 3: Setting DIP switches The 7950 is supplied with the DIP switches in these default settings: x
Turbine power:
8 VOLTS
x
Security switch:
NONSECURE
x
Input 1
PRT
x
Inputs 2-4:
4-20mA
Dip switches on the Connector Board
If you want to change these settings, do this as follows:: x
Security
The 7950 can work in a non-secure or securable mode. In non-secure mode, anyone can have access to the signal converter. In securable mode, access to many of the signal converter’s functions can be protected by a password. At this stage, setting the DIP switch only determines whether or not the instrument is capable of being protected because the actual setting of the security is carried out later when the instrument is configured.
x
PRT or analogue (420mA) inputs
There are four dip switches (one per channel) which determine whether the input to each channel is from a PRT or analogue (4-20mA) transmitter. Set each DIP switch as you require. Note:
You also have to configure the inputs. This is explained in Chapter 11.
When you have set the dip switches, replace the terminal plate. Note: The 7950 is always shipped from Mobrey with the security DIP switch set to non-secure.
Page 4.2
7950 (CH04/CE)
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4.7 Step 4: Fitting the 7950 Note:
You must not fit the 7950 where it may be subjected to extreme conditions or be liable to damage. The instrument is designed to comply with IP65 and Nema 4X standards. For further information about the environmental conditions within which it can operate, see Appendix C.
Mounting details for the 7950
1. Undo and remove the six screws which secure the gland plate to the underneath of the instrument. Remove the gland plate. 2. Drill whatever holes are required in the plate to allow the cables to enter the instrument. Do not replace the gland plate at this stage. 3. Drill a pilot hole in the wall. Then, using whatever fixings (such as wall plugs) are suitable for the type of wall, turn in a screw so that its head sticks out far enough so that the keyhole-shaped slot at the back of the case can fit over it. 4. Fit the instrument on the wall. 5. Undo the four screws and remove the terminal cover.
6. Mark through the two instrument mounting holes then take the instrument off the wall. 7. Drill holes for screws at the marked positions. The holes should be wide enough to take wall plugs if these are to be used. 8. If wall plugs are to be used, insert them into the holes. 9. Hang the instrument on the wall, insert the screws and tighten them sufficiently to hold the instrument in place. 10. Replace the terminal cover.
4.8 Step 5: Making the connections 1. Refer to the documentation supplied with the external equipment to see if you have to carry out any special procedures when connecting them to the 7950. Take special notice of any information about complying with EMC regulations. 2. Pass the cables through the holes in the gland plate then connect the sockets to the wiring using your schedule and the connection diagrams (in Chapter 2) to help you. 3. Check the wiring thoroughly against the schedule and wiring diagram. 4. Connect the sockets to the plugs on the connector board. 5. Replace the gland plate.
7950 (CH04/CE)
Page 4.3
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4.9 Step 6: Earthing the instrument NOTE:
Incorrect earthing can cause many problems, so you must earth the chassis and the electronics correctly. However, the way in which you do this depends almost entirely on the type of installation you have and the conditions under which it operates. Therefore, because these instructions cannot cover every possible situation, the manufacturers recommend that earthing procedures should only be carried out by personnel who are skilled in such work.
The Chassis of the 7950 must be earthed in all cases; both for safety reasons and to ensure that the installation complies with EMC regulations. Do this by connecting an earth lead from the stud on the gland plate to a local safety earth such as pipework or some other suitable metal structure.
Connector board
Internal earth lead Gland plate
Earth stud Chassis earth lead to external earth
Earthing the chassis of the 7950 In addition to earthing the chassis, you may have to make extra earth connections in some cases, depending on the installation requirements. Details of this are given in Appendix C.
Page 4.4
7950 (CH04/CE)
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4.10 Step 7: Connecting the power supply WARNING
NOTE:
Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
Mobrey recommend that power connections should not be made by anyone other than a properly-qualified electrician.
Follow these 5 steps: 1. Switch off and disconnect all power supplies to the instrument (if you haven’t already done so). 2. If you are using cable glands, insert one into the appropriate hole in the gland plate. 3. Pass the power cable through the cable gland. 4. Before going any further, re-check that the wiring is connected correctly. 5. The instrument can work on either 110-230V a.c. or from a d.c. supply. Make the power connection, as follows: x x
For a.c. power: Plug the power connector into plug PL1. For d.c. power: Plug the power connector into plug PL2.
Note that you can connect the 7950 to both the d.c. and a.c. supplies if you want a d.c. back-up in case the mains supply should fail. The instrument goes through the following Power On Self Test (POST) routine: x
The display shows a sequence of characters or patterns to prove that all elements of the display are working. There is a pause of five seconds between each change of pattern.
x
The program ROM is checked against a checksum. The display shows how the test is proceeding.
x
Critical data are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
x
The coefficients are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
x
The battery-backed RAM is checked. The display indicates progress.
x
Any saved programs are checked. The display shows the number of programs and their status. Note that, for a new machine, there are no stored programs.
x
If a battery is fitted, its condition is checked and reported.
Note that, when the power is switched on, alarm LEDs may light up. You can ignore these for the moment alarms are explained in Chapter 8. As long as the POST is completed satisfactorily, the 7950 is ready to be configured (see Chapters 10 and 11). If the POST fails to complete, switch off the power and check all connections and the DIP switch settings. Then re-connect the power supply. If the POST still fails to complete, switch off again and contact your supplier.
7950 (CH04/CE)
Page 4.5
Chapter 4 Installing the system
Page 4.6
7950 (CH04/CE)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5. The keyboard, display and indicators 5.1 What this chapter tells you This chapter tells you: x
How the front panel is laid out.
x
What the keys and indicators do.
x
What characters you can display.
5.2 The layout of the front panel Figure 5.2.1 shows the layout of the keyboard. The diagrams at the end of this chapter give a visual summary of what each of the keys do.
2
3
4
5
6
a Flow rates Flow totals Line density Base density / SG
1
b c d
1
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
CLR
7
EXP
2
8 16
15
14
13
12
9
11 10
1
Down-arrow
7
Enter
13
Print Menu
2
Up-arrow
8
Information Menu
14
Stream/Run Select
3
Multi-view display
9
Limit alarm LED
15
(Application specific)
4
Left-arrow
10
Input alarm LED
16
Security LED and lock
5
Right-arrow
11
System alarm LED
6
Back
12
Main Menu
Figure 5.2.1: The layout of the front panel
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.1
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5.3 What the display shows The display can show the following information: x
numerical data in floating point, exponent or integer formats
x
text descriptors
x
units of measurement (if applicable)
x
status of application parameters i.e. set, live, failed or fallback (if applicable)
x
alarm and event information
x
current time and date
x
stream (metering-run) identification numerically (if applicable)
5.4 How the keys work The keys let you: x
move around the menus
x
view data stored in the 795x
(VIEW mode)
x
edit the data.
(EDIT mode)
Some keys do different things according to where you are in the menu system. For example:
ENTER key
This key does nothing until you get into EDIT mode. After you have edited the data of application parameters, pressing ENTER accepts the changes and puts the 795x back into VIEW mode.
‘c’ key
When you move through the menu structure this selects any menu choice shown against the key. However, when in VIEW mode, pressing c lists the display units.
INFORMATION MENU key
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes you to a special menu providing information on alarms, events, flow status and 795x operating mode.
PRINT MENU
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing of reports.
The sections that follow tell you more about what the keys do and how you use them.
5.5 Using the keys to move around the menus A general tour of the menu system is provided in chapter 6. The keys, which you can use to move around the menu system, are:
Page 5.2
UP-ARROW
Moves the display up to the previous page of the menu. If there is no previous page, this does nothing.
DOWN-ARROW
Moves the display down to the next page of the menu. If there is no next page, this key does nothing.
‘a’ - ‘d’ keys
Each key selects the menu choice next to it. If there is no menu choice next to a key, that key does nothing.
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
BACK
Returns you to the previous step.
MAIN MENU
Moves you straight to the top-level menu.
INFORMATION MENU
Takes you to a special menu providing information on alarms, events, flow status and 795x operating mode.
PRINT MENU
Takes you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing of reports.
MULTI-VIEW (blank key, top)
You can define one or more display pages, each showing up to four items of data, lines of descriptive text, or both. Pressing MULTIVIEW shows the first display page you have defined. Use the arrow keys to page up and page down.
APPLICATION (blank key, bottom)
The use of this key is dependent on the functionality of application software. If this key is in use, it will be mentioned in later chapters.
Note: Keys other than those listed above have no effect.
5.6 Using the keys to view stored data When an application parameter screen is viewed after selection from the menu, the display is in VIEW mode.
Figure 5.6.1: Typical parameter screen (in VIEW mode) What the display shows Figure 5.6.1 shows a typical display when you view an application parameter screen. In VIEW mode, all information is right justified. Line 1
shows the parameter description. (Some words may be abbreviated.)
Line 2
shows the present value (or text for indirection type).
Line 3
shows the units (if any). This line is blank if there are no units.
Line 4
shows LIVE, SET, FB (FALLBACK) or FAIL to indicate the state of the present value shown in Line 2, where appropriate. These indications mean: LIVE The data shown is live data received from the transducer or transmitter connected to the 795x. SET
You have entered a fixed value for the data; this value does not change unless you change it or make it live.
FALLBACK
A fallback or default value has been used to obtain the value for the data.
FAIL
The input has failed.
Optionally, Line 4 may also show the parameter’s unique identification number (location ID), which is required when setting up certain features e.g. multi-view. You can display this information by using the ‘a’ key.
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.3
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
In VIEW mode, the keys that you can use are: ‘a’ key
On/off toggle for displaying the parameter’s identification (location ID). This is displayed to the left of the status indication on line 4 of the display.
‘b’ key
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can edit the data on line 2. The data is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
‘c’ key
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can select from a list of the units in which the data can be displayed. The units are left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
‘d’ key
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can select a status (Set or Live). The status is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
STREAM / RUN SELECT
If there is more than one stream (run) and there is a number on the far left of display line 4, this key will select another stream (run). The screen will be refreshed with attributes (value, units and status) for that stream (run).
BACK
Returns you to the previous step.
MAIN MENU
Takes you straight to the top-level menu.
5.7 Using the keys to edit information You can: x
edit text
x
select from a multiple-choice list
x
edit numerical information
x
edit the date and time.
5.7.1 Text editing Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to edit text are:
Page 5.4
LEFT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the left along the line of text you are editing.
RIGHT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the right along the line of text you are editing.
UP-ARROW
This key changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls forwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the character you want is displayed.
DOWN-ARROW
Changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls backwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the character you want is displayed.
0-9 keys
Each key enters a single digit.
‘b’ key
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press b to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: the ENTER key also does this.)
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
ENTER
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press the ENTER key to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (The b key also does this.)
CLEAR
This clears a line of text.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
PLUS / MINUS
Toggles between lower and upper case letters.
5.7.2 Multiple-choice selection Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to select from a multiple-choice list are:
UP-ARROW
Scrolls up through the available options.
DOWN-ARROW
Scrolls down through the available options.
‘b’ KEY
If editing the data (on display line 2) and you are satisfied with the change you have made, press b to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
‘c’ KEY
If editing the units and you are satisfied with the change you have made, press c to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
‘d’ KEY
If editing the status and you are satisfied with the change you have made, press d to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER
If you are satisfied with the change you have made, press the ENTER key to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode.
CLEAR
Restore the previous contents.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the BACK key to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
5.7.3 Numerical editing Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to edit numerical data are:
LEFT-ARROW
Erases the digit to the left of the cursor.
0-9 keys
Each key enters a single digit.
PLUS / MINUS
This changes the sign of the number. Pressing it repeatedly toggles between PLUS and MINUS.
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.5
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
DOT
Inserts a decimal point.
EXPONENT
Use this key if you want to show numbers in exponent form.
‘b’ key
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press the ENTER key. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: b also does this.)
CLEAR
Clears the line you are currently editing.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
Numerical entry When you type in a number the first digit appears at the left of the display and each successive digit is then positioned to the right of the one just entered. A number being entered over-types any existing number. Parameter identifiers (Location ID) These appear on the display in the same way as for numerical entry. However, when you accept the number (by pressing b or ENTER), the text descriptor of the application parameter appears on line 2 of the display.
5.7.4 Date and time editing The date and time are displayed in the format: dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm:ss. When you edit the date and time, the cursor moves to the right but skips the ‘:’ and ‘-’ characters. LEFT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the left.
RIGHT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the right.
0-9 keys
Each key enters a single digit.
‘b’ key
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press ENTER. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: b also does this.)
CLEAR
Restore the previous contents.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
The new date and time is validated – an invalid date and time is greeted with “Bad date/time” on-screen for a few seconds before the previous content is restored.
Page 5.6
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5.8 The 795x character set You can use any of the 96 characters shown below as part of your display.
Figure 5.8.1: The 795x character set
5.9 LED indicators Security Indicator
This LED shows the present security level of the system. x x x x
RED FLASHING - the instrument is at Calibration level RED - Engineer level: the instrument can be configured. ORANGE – Operator level: limits can be changed. GREEN - World level: no parameters can be changed.
Note: For more information about these, refer to Chapter 11.
1. Security Level LED
Figure 5.9.1: Alarm Indicators Alarm Indicators
These are the Input, System and Limit alarms. For more information about these, refer to Chapter 8: “Alarms and Events”.
1.
System alarm LED.
2.
Input alarm LED.
3.
Limit alarm LED.
Figure 5.9.2: Alarm Indicators 795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.7
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5.10 Summary of key functions The diagrams on the next two pages provide a visual summary of the function of each key when in various modes.
What the key does when...
Key
...moving around the menus
...in VIEW mode
...in one of the following EDIT modes: Text editing Multiple-choice editing Numeric editing Units editing Date & time editing
UP-ARROW Pages UP in a menu. (Does nothing if top page already shown.)
Selects which units to show on display
Scrolls through character set Scrolls through available options Does nothing
Pages DOWN in a menu. (Does nothing if last page already shown.)
Selects which units to show on display
Scrolls through character set Scrolls through available options Does nothing
Goes to the top menu
Goes to the top menu
Does nothing
Goes to the previous menu
Goes to the previous menu
Cancels changes and goes back to VIEW mode
Chooses line a from a menu
Toggles between: (1) location ID (2) nothing
Does nothing
Chooses line b from a menu
Goes to EDIT mode
Accepts changes and goes back to VIEW mode Does nothing
Chooses line c from a menu
Goes into units editing mode. (See UP & DOWN arrow keys)
Does nothing Accepts changes and goes back to VIEW mode
Chooses line d from a menu
Toggles between LIVE and SET (where appropriate)
Does nothing
Goes to alarm/event sub-menu
Goes to alarm/event sub-menu
Does nothing
Opens the print menu
Opens the print menu
Does nothing
Views the MULTIVIEW display you have defined
Views the MULTIVIEW display you have defined
Does nothing
DOWN-ARROW
MENU
BACK
'a' KEY a
'b' KEY b
'c' KEY c
'd' KEY
INFORMATION
PRINT
USER DISPLAY
(TOP blank key)
Summary of what the keys do - part 1 Page 5.8
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
What the key does when...
Key
...moving around the menus
...in VIEW mode
...in one of the following EDIT modes: Text editing Multiple-choice editing Numeric editing Units editing Date & time editing
BOTTOM blank key KEY NOT USED
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Accepts changes and goes back to VIEW mode
Does nothing
Does nothing
Moves the cursor LEFT Does nothing Erases the last digit
Does nothing
Does nothing
Moves the cursor RIGHT Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Deletes character at cursor Reverts to original selection Clears the line of numerals Restores previous contents
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing Inserts a decimal point
Does nothing
Does nothing
Change to upper or lower case Does nothing Changes the sign of a number
Does nothing
Does nothing
Insert space at cursor Does nothing Inserts the exponent
Selects another stream if there is more than one supported.
Does nothing
ENTER
LEFT
RIGHT
CLR
CLR DOT
PLUS/MINUS
+/EXP
EXP STREAM SELECT Does nothing 1 2
0-9 KEYS Do nothing
0
Do nothing
9
Enter a digit Do nothing
Summary of what the keys do - part 2
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.9
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
Page 5.10
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 6 The menu system
6. The menu system 6.1 What this Chapter tells you Before you can configure and operate the 795x instrument, you must have some understanding of how the menu system works. The menus are simple, logically-arranged and intuitive so they should present no problems to the average user. This chapter tells you how a typical menu structure is arranged. However, because instruments in the 795x family have different software according to the application for which they are being used, the descriptions given here is general so that it applies to any 795x instrument. Note: Chapter 12 features tables showing the menu system used in your application.
6.2 What the menu system does The menu system lets you: x x x x
Configure the 795x Operate it View data and settings stored in the 795x Edit data stored in the 795x
6.3 How the menu system works When you power-on the 795x instrument, the menu system appears immediately after the routine Power-OnSelf-Test (POST) is completed. If it is the first power-on since application software was installed, the Main Menu screen will appear, similar to the one shown in Figure 6.3.1. Otherwise, the 795x will display the last visited menu screen prior to powering off (or a power failure).
Figure 6.3.1: Main Menu Screen (Top-Level Menu)
Think of the menu system as having a tree-like structure which repeatedly branches to lower levels. The Main Menu screen (‘tree trunk’) in Figure 6.3.1 comprises four menu choices (‘branches’). Each menu choice has a text description (e.g. “Flow rates”) and a triangular icon to indicate the type of menu choice. A non-solid, triangular icon indicates the menu choice leads to a further menu (sub-branch), whereas a solid, triangular icon indicates the menu choice leads to an application software parameter screen (leaf). In addition, each menu choice is associated with a lettered key (a, b c or d). For example, a menu choice on display line 1 is always associated with the ‘a’-key. A menu choice on display line 2 is always associated with the ‘b’-key, and so on.
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Page 6.1
Chapter 6 The menu system
When you make a choice from the Main Menu, using the lettered keys, it leads you on to other, lower-level menus (branch levels 2, 3, and so on). Figure 6.3.2 shows how pressing the ‘a’-key will lead to a menu for “Flow rates”. Similarly, the ‘b’-key leads to a menu for “Flow totals”. Using the BACK key will return you to the previous menu, in this case the Main Menu.
Figure 6.3.2: Menu Choice Selection
Where a menu has more choices that can fit on to the display, it consists of two or more pages. Vertical arrow icons appear on the left-hand side of the display to indicate there are further pages. Figure 6.3.3 shows how you can scroll up or down between the pages by using the UP-ARROW and DOWNARROW buttons. These buttons will do nothing if there is no page to scroll to.
Figure 6.3.3: Pages of a Main Menu Page 6.2
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Chapter 6 The menu system
At the lowest levels in each branch of the menu system, there are software parameter screens (‘leaves’). Figure 6.3.4 shows how to get to the software parameter screen for Live/Set Meter temperature values. Application software parameter screens feature a solid, black, triangular shaped mark in the bottom-left corner of display line 4. In multiple-run (multi-stream) application software, there is a number to indicate which metering-run (stream) that the parameter attributes (value, units and status) is referring to. Note: Details about editing application software parameters can be found in Chapter 5.
Figure 6.3.4: Software Parameter Screen
Returning to the Main Menu again, there are several menu choices that are noteworthy as they are common to all application software versions. In addition, you’ll come across them in subsequent chapters. Figure 6.3.5 and Figure 6.3.6 provide an overview .
Leads to menus for viewing interim results of measurements and other calculations, Inputs, Outputs, etc. (See Chapter 12 for a full map)
Leads to a screen for entering a password to change security level. (See Chapter 11).
Leads to menus for editing measurement tasks for your installation. (See Chapters 8 - 11). Figure 6.3.5: Main Menu Choices – Common to all application software (Part One)
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Page 6.3
Chapter 6 The menu system
Leads to menus where you can view/edit the time and date, plus machine cycle timing.
Leads to a screen detailing the software version number.
Leads to a screen where you can view/edit text to identify the 795x instrument. Figure 6.3.6: Main Menu Choices – Common to all application software (Part Two)
All other menu choices on the Main Menu (e.g. “Flow rates”) are for operators to quickly find final measurements and other calculation results. Chapter 12 has tables showing these menus in more detail.
Page 6.4
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.
Serial Communications and Networking
7.1
What this chapter tells you This chapter is a comprehensive guide to serial RS-232/485 port communications with the 7950/7951 instrument. Since this subject area is vast, with countless reference books, the scope is restricted to the 795x point-of-view. Therefore, it has been assumed that the reader has a reasonable working knowledge of data communications and networking. A highly recommended reference for this chapter is: x The 1992 edition of “MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL REFERENCE GUIDE (PL_MBUS-300)”. Note: This chapter is not a guide to the MODBUS protocol
7.2
7950/7951 Communication Capabilities The 7950/7951 instrument has extensive facilities – ports and data services – to allow the communication of data with almost any device that has support for the Modicon MODBUS protocol. Communication ports and their associated standards are summarised in Table 7.2.1. Various data services are available through the ports and are introduced in Section 7.2.2. Table 7.2.1: 7950/7951 Communications Ports and Supported Standards
7.2.1
Serial Port One
Serial Port Two
Serial Port Three
RS-232C
RS-232C/485
RS-232C/485
MODBUS
MODBUS
MODBUS
Communication Ports Serial RS-232/485 Ports Two serial interface standards are supported by the 795x series – Serial RS-232C (full duplex) and Serial RS-485 (half duplex). They are software selectable if there is a choice for a particular port. RS-232C is the usual choice for a direct (point-to-point) network connection with only one device. Typically, it is utilised when transmitting printed reports to an ASCII compatible output device, such as a printer or a terminal. Another main use is the ‘Peer-to-Peer List’ data service that can regularly broadcast parameter values to another 7950/7951 instrument. Data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2. RS-485 is the choice when establishing a multi-drop network with two or more devices. This network allows both Master/Slave and Peer/Peer arrangements of devices and, subsequently, full availability of all data services. Data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2.
7.2.2
Data Services Table 7.2.2 lists the data services that are available through any serial RS232/485 port. Services are accessed by a half-duplex exchange of MODBUS – request and response - messages between the 7950/7951 instrument and another MODBUS device. Guided examples with the necessary message sequences to correctly access services are given later in Chapter 7 and in any extra pages that are inserted between Chapters 7 and 8.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.1
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Table 7.2.2: Data Services Availability (Master/Slave) Data Services
Available on Master/Slave
Database Access
Slave
x
Allow any (non-795x) MODBUS Master device to perform read/writes on an individual parameter in the database of a Slave
Historical Alarm Log
Slave
x
Retrieval of LIVE alarm information from the Historical Alarm Log. (Events are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
Historical Event Log
Slave
x
Retrieval of LIVE event information from the Historical Event Log. (Alarms are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
High Speed List 1 *
Slave
x
Allow non-795x MODBUS Master device to perform fast read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
High Speed List 2 *
Slave
x
Allow non-795x MODBUS Master device to perform fast read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
Archive Access
Slave
x
Retrieval of software parameter data from any of the data archives. (Archiving is explained in Chapter 9 of this manual)
Peer-to-Peer *
Master
x
Allow 795x MODBUS Master to perform read/writes on software parameters in the database of multiple 795x MOBUS slaves
Purpose of Data Service
* This application data service is fully explained in the extra pages between Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
Page 7.2
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.3
MODBUS from the 7950/7951 view-point
7.3.1
Introduction The Modicon MODBUS specification is designed to transfer data in 1-bit (coil) or 16-bit (register) blocks. This protocol has not been designed to deal with data, such as floating-point numbers, which require a minimum of 32-bit blocks. For this reason, every manufacturer of computer equipment that deals with this type of data must decide in which way the protocol should be extended. Consequently, many different implementations exist for the transfer of 32-bit floating-point data.
7.3.2
Supported Commands Members of the 795x series support four MODBUS functions: 1. Function 03 – Read multiple registers 2. Function 06 – Write single register 3. Function 16 – Write multiple registers Data stored within a 795x series instrument is represented by one or more 16-bit registers. Where registers contain a collection of bits, the 16-bit register is still used rather than individual bit (coil) access. The 795x series supports both single and multiple register access. Each port is configured individually to allow one type of register access. Multiple Register Access: ‘write’ command involving a 21-byte character string will specify 11 registers. Single Register Access:
7.3.3
‘write’ command involving the same character string will specify just 1 register.
Floating Point Numbers Floating-point values within the software parameter database are stored as 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) numbers. When requested over a MODBUS network link, a floating-point value is either encoded as a 32-bit IEEE (single-precision) number or encoded as a 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number. The precision level is individually selectable for each communication port.
7.3.4
Word Swap Mode Since Modicon did not define 32-bit data transfers, the order of transmission for (2 x 16-bit) words of a 32bit value is also not defined. The 795x series therefore provides the facility to choose whether the first or second word is the most significant. For 64-bit numbers, word swap places the second double-word as the most significant. This mode is individually selectable for each port. Figure 7.3.1: Word Ordering Examples
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.3
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.3.5
MODBUS Addressing Unlike most MODBUS devices, the 7950/7951 instrument can respond to more than one MODBUS address through a communication port. The base address of a MODBUS Slave is programmable and is used for accessing the database of software parameters. It is also possible to configure a 7950/7951 to allow access to further data services through virtual addressing – consecutive MODBUS addresses offset beyond the base address. You do not need to edit these virtual addresses because they are at fixed offsets beyond the programmed base address. The offsets are illustrated in Table 7.3.1. A virtual address becomes active when the corresponding data service is enabled. Note:
There can be different base addresses programmed for each individual port if you require it. However, the fixed address offsets still apply and will access exactly the same data service.
Table 7.3.1: Data Services and MODBUS Addressing MODBUS Addressing
Data Service
Address Offset
Base address (Base address) Virtual Address ‘1’
Software Parameter Database Peer-to-Peer Lists Historical Alarm & Event Log
+0 (+0) +1
Virtual Address ‘2’ Virtual Address ‘3’
High Speed List ‘1 High Speed List ‘2’
+2 +3
Virtual Address ‘4’
Data Archives
+4
Note: ‘Peer-to-Peer List’ functions also use the ‘Software Parameter Database’ service of a 795x MODBUS Slave
Page 7.4
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.4
Connecting the 795x to a RS-232/RS-485 Link This section is a reference with a table of grouped rear panel pins for each serial port and each physical layer interface.
7.4.1
RS-232 (full duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Port ‘1’) 7950 Com 1 Tx Com 1 Rx Com 0V
Function PL3/1 PL3/2 PL3/3
x x x
7951 Com 1 Tx Com 1 Rx Com 0V
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Function
SK1/2 SK1/3 SK1/5
x x x
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Port ‘2’) 7950 Com 2 Tx Com 2 Rx Com 0V Com 2 CTS Com 2 RTS Protect GND
Function PL3/5 PL3/6 PL3/7 PL3/8 PL3/9 PL3/4
7951 Com 2 Tx Com 2 Rx Com 0V Com 2 CTS Com 2 RTS
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send Frame (Chassis) protection Function
Sk2/2 Sk2/3 Sk2/5 Sk2/7 Sk2/8
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send
RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Port ‘3’) 7950 Com 3 Tx Com 3 Rx Com 0V Com 3 CTS Com 3 RTS Protect GND
Function PL4/1 PL4/2 PL4/3 PL4/4 PL4/5 PL4/8
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send Frame (chassis) protection
SK3/2 SK3/3 SK3/5 SK3/7 SK3/8
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send
7951 Com 3 Tx Com 3 Rx Com 0V Com 3 CTS Com 3 RTS
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Function
Page 7.5
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
A simple MODBUS network can consist of just two devices. They could be an IBM compatible PC and a 795x connected by a RS-232C ‘straight through’ cable.
Page 7.6
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking 7.4.2
RS-485 (half duplex) Rear Panel Connections This section is a reference with a table of grouped rear panel pins for each serial port and the RS-485 signalling standard. RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘1’) Note: There is no support for RS-485 on port one.
RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘2’) 7951 Com 2 Rx/Tx+ Com 2 Rx/TxCom 0V
Function SK2/1 SK2/9 SK2/5
Transmit/receive data + Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
Note: The 7950 does not support RS-485 or Port 2
RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘3’) 7950 Com 3 Rx/Tx+ Com 3 Rx/TxCommon Protect GND
Function PL4/6 PL4/7 PL4/3 PL4/8
7951 Com 3 Rx/Tx+ Com 3 Rx/TxCom 0V
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Transmit/receive data + Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Frame (chassis) protection Function
SK3/1 SK3/9 SK3/5
Transmit/receive data + Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
Page 7.7
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.5
After Connecting the 795x … This section explains how to proceed with configuring the communication parameters of the 795x instrument after all the wiring to external communication devices is completed, as guided in Section 7.4. RS-232: RS-485:
7.5.1
Complete Section 7.5.1 and then complete Section 7.5.2 Complete Section 7.5.1 and then complete Section 7.5.3
General RS-232C/485 Port Configuration This Section is for configuring basic communication parameters before moving on to the RS-232C and RS-485 configuration sections. Objective: Set-up the basic communication parameters for each serial port with an RS-232 (point-to-point) or RS-485 (multiple-drop) network connection. What to do here: Follow these instructions for each port:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”> 2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port. 3. Work through this menu data checklist: Menu Data Name Port Baud rates
(Note: Some localised menu searching is required)
Instructions and Comments x
Select a transmission rate that is compatible with other networked device(s)
Port Char Format
x
Select a character format that is compatible with for other networked device(s)
Port handshaking
x
Select the option descriptor of either “None”, “Xon/Xoff” or “CTS/RTS”
Port RS232 / 485
x
Select the serial interface standard for the network. Also, read Note B
Notes: A
On-screen menu data names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port.
B
Not all 795x communication ports have support RS-485. For further information, see page 7.1.
4. Repeat all previous steps for each RS-232/485 port that you intend to use. (End of instructions)
7.5.2
RS-232 Configuration This section is for completing the configuring of software parameters for a point-to-point communication link with another RS-232C device. Objective: Set-up the basic communication parameters for serial ports with an RS-232C connection. What to do here: Follow these instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”> 2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port with the RS-232C connection 3. Locate the menu data page with a descriptor of “Comms port owner” (or similar) 4. Select an option descriptor Select the option with “Printer” when the RS-232C device is an ASCII compatible output device, such as a printer. Otherwise, select either “Master” or “Slave”, depending on which data services are needed.
5. Test the RS-232C connection, perhaps by printing a report (End of instructions) Page 7.8
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.5.3
RS-485 Configuration This section is for completing the configuring of software parameters for serial ports with an RS-485 communication link into a multi-drop (MODBUS Master/Slave) network. Objective: Set-up the 795x to function as a MODBUS Slave through the port. This will allow for ‘remote’ accessing of various application data services by a MODBUS Master. What to do: Follow these instructions:
1.
Ensure that general port parameters have already been configured, as guided in Section 7.5.1.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”> 3. Select the sub-menu for a RS-485 port. 4. Work through the checklist of Menu Data List 7.5.1. (End of instructions)
Menu Data List 7.5.1: RS-485 Software Parameters Menu Data Name
Instructions and Comments
Notes?
Comms port owner
x
Select the option descriptor with “MODBUS Slave”
A
Port MODBUS mode
x
Select the transmission mode (as agreed for the Master)
A
MODBUS word order
x
Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master
A, C
MODB slave add
A, C, D
x
‘Set’ a value for the MODBUS base address of the port (slave)
P MODBUS Features
x
Select data services that are accessible by a Master (through this port)
A, B
Long reg access
x
Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master
A, C
MODB precision
x
Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master
A, C
Notes: A
On-screen menu data names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial RS-485 port
B
Table 7.5.1 shows how the multiple-choice option descriptors relate to enabling access to one or more data services through a port.
C
See page 7.3 for guidance.
D
The 795x Flow Computer can be MODBUS Slaves at different base addresses on each port. It is possible to have an identical base address on two or more ports when they are not connected to the same network.
Table 7.5.1: Virtual Slave Access - Enabling Codes A&E
HSL ‘1’
HSL ‘2’
DA
None
u
u
u
u
Alarm
9
u
u
u
Alarm + List1
9
9
u
u
Alarm+List1+List2
9
9
9
u
Alarm+L1+L2+L3
9
9
9
u
Alarm+L1+L2+L3+L4
9
9
9
u
Alarm + L1+L2+L3+L4+DL
9
9
9
9
Option Descriptors
Key: 9 = Enabled, A&E = Virtual Slave ‘1’, HSL = High Speed List Slave, DA = Data Archive Slave
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.9
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6
7950/7951 Database access over a MODBUS network This section demonstrates how a (non-795x) MODBUS Master can communicate with the software parameter database of a 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave.
7.6.1
Introduction There are several types of information that can be obtained from the software parameter database: 1. Parameter value (in base units of measurement) 2. Parameter value status. 3. Data size and data type attributes for a software parameter value. The 795x series uses a unique index called a location identification (ID) number. There is a unique ID number for every stored software parameter. The location ID number is not normally displayed, but pressing the ‘a’ key when a parameter page is displayed, will display the number on the fourth line. MODBUS registers are expressed as the location ID number minus 1. Therefore, a requesting device will ask for MODBUS register 16 in order to read the data of the software parameter with an ID of 17.
Notice Parameter attributes and location identification (ID) numbers of the database with your installed software is likely to be different to those used in these examples. For a full list of parameters, locate the ASCII text file with the filename extension ‘.MAN’ on your ‘FC CONFIG’ 2 installation disk.
A number of worked examples are provided for each information type. Every example features objectives, actions, and results. Adapt the examples to suit your requirements. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.6.2 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information. Some software parameters may have a “No access” security attribute and, therefore, be permanently unavailable. The response from a command to read such data is shown in Table 7.6.1.
Table 7.6.1: "No Access" to Data Response
2
Receive
0A
83
…
Meaning
Slv.
Err.
…
This is a useful PC based package, developed by Mobrey, for interacting with the 795x. It is supplied only when requested.
Page 7.10
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Table 7.6.2: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations
Meaning
Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number
DC
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.11
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.2
7950/7951 Database Information: Software Parameter Values Software parameter values are mapped within the first 10,000 registers of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read base density value from database location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read from MODBUS register 0786 Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
Receive
01
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
Result:
12
Reg. ID 44
00
02
64
4A
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
54
00
A0
D7
The Data
13
Chk. Sum
The data value part of the reply, 0x4454A000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the 3 floating-point number 850.50 (in Kg/m – base units).
Example 2: Write base density value of 850 Kg/m3 (base units) to location 0787 MODBUS Action: Write to MODBUS register number 0786 Transmit
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
12
Reg. ID 03
00
02
Reg. Cnt
12
Reg. ID
00
02
Reg. Cnt.
04
44
DC E1
54
80
00
IEEE 32-bit data value
53
6A
Chk. Sum
89
Chk. Sum
Result: Base density value changes. The 0x44548000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the floatingpoint number 850.00 (in Kg/m3 – base units). Example 3: Check on selected option descriptor of a multiple-choice list Objective: Check referral method selection for calculating Metering density. MODBUS Action: Read from MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
0E
4D
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
01
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
00
B8
16
F5
Chk. Sum 44
Chk. Sum
Result: x
The returned data value 0x0000 can be interpreted by looking at the following table: Value
Page 7.12
Meaning
0x0000
x
4x5 Matrix Referral selected
0x0001
x
API Referral selected
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.3
7950/7951 Database Information: Software Parameter Status Software parameter states are mapped within registers 30001 to 40000 of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read the status of location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 30786 (30000 offset + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
78
42
Reg. ID
00
01
3C
BE
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
01
84
Receive
01
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
79
Chk. sum
Result: The “00 01” indicates a ‘SET’ status. Refer to Table 7.6.4 (on page 7.13) for other states.
Example 2: Change the status of location 0787 MODBUS Action: Change status to ‘LIVE’ by writing to 0x0000 to register 30786 (30000 + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
78
Receive
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
42
Reg. ID 78
42
Reg. ID
00
01
02
Reg. Cnt.
DC
00
B9
01
Reg. Cnt.
00
00
The Data
51
75
Chk. sum
7D
Chk. Sum
Result: Status has changed to “Live”. (See Table 7.6.3 on page 7.13 for other states)
Table 7.6.3: Status Codes (Selection) Value
Selection
0x0000
x
Live state
0x0001
x
Set state
Table 7.6.4: Status Codes (Returned) Value
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
State Return
0x0000
x
Live
0x0001
x
Set
0x0002
x
Fail
0x0003
x
Fallback
0x00FF
x
No state
Page 7.13
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.4
7950/7951 Database Information: Size and Type of Software Parameter Value The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 20,001 to 29,999 of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read size and type of data available from location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 20786 (20000 offset + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
51
32
Reg. ID
Receive
01
03
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
07
00
01
35
39
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
04
B7
The Data
BB
Chk. Sum
Result: 2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x07 and 0x04 x x
0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – a 32-bit floating-point number 0x04 = 4 bytes needed to represent the floating-point value
Special Note: x For other data type and size codes, refer to Table 7.6.5 on page 7.15
Example 2: Read size and type of data available from location 1579 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 21,578 (20000 offset + 1579 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
54
4A
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
01
03
02
09
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
16
3F
B5
EC
Chk. Sum DA
Chk. Sum
Result: 2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x09 and 0x16 x x
Page 7.14
0x09 = Data Type Code 9 – Character String 0x16 = 22 bytes – length of character string in bytes
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Table 7.6.5: Interpreting Responses from Type 3 Requests Type of Data x x x x x x x x x x x x
Character Unsigned 8-bit integer Unsigned 16-bit integer Signed 16-bit integer Unsigned 32-bit integer Signed 32-bit integer 32-bit floating point number 64-bit floating point number Character String Multiple-choice (List) Option Location pointer Time and date
Size (Bytes)
Type (Code)
2 2 2 2 4 4 4 8 22 2 2 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Table 7.6.6: Unit of Measurement Category Codes Category Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Unit Category x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(No units) Temperature Pressure Differential Pressure Volume Standard Volume Mass Energy Density Standard Density Frequency Period Dynamic Viscosity Base Dynamic Viscosity Kinematic Viscosity Base Kinematic Viscosity Flow Factor Volume Rate Standard Volume Rate Mass Rate
Category Code 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Unit Category x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) Time Length Speed Fraction Saybolt Universal Saybolt Temperature Absolute Zero Temperature Offset General (Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) Expansion Coefficient Youngs Modulus Velocity
Page 7.15
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.5
7950/7951 Database Information: Full Attributes of a Software Parameter The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 40,001 to 49,999 of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read the full attributes of location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 40786 (40000 offset + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
9F
52
Reg. ID
Receive
01
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
04
00
02
4B
CE
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
07
08
01
The Data
BA
D0
Chk. Sum
Result: 4 bytes of data are returned in the reply: x x x x
0x04 = 4 bytes – required to store a 32-bit floating-point number 0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – software parameter value is a 32-bit floating-point number 0x01 = Status Code 1 – “Live” value state 0x08 = Unit of Measurement Category Code 9 – Density units
Special Note: x For interpreting other codes, refer to Table 7.6.5 (on page 7.15) and Table 7.6.6 (on page 7.15) x The reply data is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode
Page 7.16
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.7
Historical Alarm Log access over a MODBUS Network This section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master can access “LIVE” information from the Historical Alarm Log of a 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave. Refer to Chapter 8 if an explanation for the Historical Alarm Log is required.
7.7.1
Introduction Information from the Historical Alarm Log is available to a MODBUS Master through the register map of Virtual Address ‘1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning! It is not advisable to clear or accept alarms using the front panel while the Historical Alarm Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. Doing so could result in the MODBUS Master having an incorrect view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an alarm, (2) accepting that alarm and (3) clearing that alarm Every example features objectives, request/response sequences, and an explained result. Adapt the examples to suit your requirements. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.7.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
Table 7.7.1: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number
DC
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Meaning
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
Page 7.17
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.7.2
Worked Examples Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions. A base address of “01” has been assumed for or examples.
7.7.2.1 Example 1 (of 3) Objectives:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log Retrieve identification numbers for logged alarms Make information on a specific alarm available Get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three Accept the alarm that was selected in step three Clear the alarm that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Count alarms by reading MODBUS register 1,999 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
Receive
02
03
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
CF
Reg. ID 00
00
01
Reg. Cnt. 10
The Data
FD
B5
72
Chk. Sum 88
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that there are 16 (0x0010) alarms in the Historical Alarm Log.
Step 2 is to retrieve the identification number of the second oldest alarm MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 1 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
00
01
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
17
BC
D5
F9
Chk. Sum 4A
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the unique alarm ID is 0x0017 Note: Identification numbers of presently logged alarms are held in MODBUS registers 0 to 29 of the map for virtual address ‘1’. The first entry in the Alarm Historical Log is always at MODBUS register 1. For the purpose of this worked example, one alarm identification number is sufficient.
Step 3 is to make information on an alarm available. This is mandatory for remaining steps. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available on the second alarm Write alarm ID number, 0x0017, to MODBUS register 999 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
Reg. ID 03
E7
Reg.ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
B1
89
01
Reg. Cnt.
17
D6
79
Chk. Sum
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the selection has been made Page 7.18
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information is now available by reading MODBUS register 999 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
00
Reg. ID
01
34
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
BC
17
4A
Chk. Sum 4A
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the current alarm ID is confirmed to be 0x0017. Note: reply of 0x0000 indicates that no alarm has been selected
Step 4 is to get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three. To get information about another alarm, repeat step three but use another identification number. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text length by reading MODBUS register 2000 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
03
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
Result:
07
D0
Reg. ID
00
01
84
B4
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
12
B4
84
Chk. Sum
Reply data indicates that the alarm text length is 18 bytes (0x0012). At present, the length returned is always 18 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when asking for the text. Do not assume the length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain ASCII alarm text by reading MODBUS register 1011 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
F3
Reg. ID
00
09
75
88
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
Receive
02
03
12
53
69
6D
65
70
65
72
69
6F
64
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
‘T’
‘i’
‘m’
‘e’
‘p’
‘e’
‘r’
‘i’
‘o’
‘d’
Receive
6E
6F
20
63
61
6C
00
7C
EB
Meaning
‘n’
‘o’
‘c’
‘a’
‘l’
EOT
Result:
20
Chk. Sum
Reply data contains the base alarm message of “Timeperiod no cal”. See next action to find out the additional character following the base message.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text code and qualifier by reading MODBUS register 1010: Transmit
02
03
03
F2
00
02
65
8F
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg
ID
Reg
Cnt.
Chk
sum
00
0B
31
20
The
data
Receive
02
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
65
8F
Chk
sum
Result: 0x000B = A code for the alarm text – not to be confused with the alarm entry ID (from earlier) 0x31 = Represents ASCII character “1” – for metering-point/stream/channel one 0x20 = Alarm Type ‘2’ (2 = Present) + Alarm State ‘0’ (0 = Alarm Not Accepted) Other possible results… Type of alarm: “0”=Off, “1”=On, “2”=Present State of alarm: “0”=Not Accepted, “1”=Accepted 7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.19
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve time and date of selected alarm by reading MODBUS register 1009 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
F1
00
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
Receive
00
04
01
00
15
88
Chk. Sum
21
06
00
00
0D
00
0A
07
CE
00
1C
The Data 32
2D
The Data
Meaning
08
Reg. Cnt.
6B
Chk. Sum
Result: When viewing the Historical Alarm Log entry you would see “28-10-98 13:06:33” on the third line Special Notes: The order of date/time character strings in packets are unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
Step 5 is to accept the alarm that was selected in step three. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1004 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Result:
03
EC
Reg. ID 03
EC
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
C0
01
Reg. Cnt.
00
97
0C
Chk. Sum
4B
Chk. Sum
The alarm entry selected through register 999 has been accepted. Information, such as the base alarm message, remains available until another alarm entry is selected.
Step 6 is to clear the alarm that was selected in step three. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 1004 (0x3EC) Transmit
0B
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
0B
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
EC
Reg. ID 03
E7
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
C0
01
Reg. Cnt.
01
56
CC
Chk. Sum
4B
Chk. Sum
Result: x
Page 7.20
The alarm (selected through register 999) has been cleared. However, the conditions that caused the alarm may still be present and the same alarm would then be raised with a new identification number. Information such as the alarm text is now unavailable.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.7.2.2 Example 2 (of 3) Objective: Clear all alarms from the Historical Alarm Log MODBUS Action: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 2001 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
D1
Reg. ID 07
D1
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
50
01
Reg. Cnt.
01
17
E1
Chk. Sum
B7
Chk. Sum
Result: x
All alarms cleared. However, the conditions that caused the logged alarms may still be present and so the same alarms would be raised again, but with new identification numbers.
7.7.2.3 Example 3 (of 3) Objective: Retrieve abbreviated summary of the Historical Alarm Log MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 2010 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
D9
Reg. ID
Receive
01
03
06
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
00
00
03
D5
77
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
00
0E
00
The Data
10
00
59
86
Chk. Sum
Result: x
The reply data is interpreted as follows: 0x00 (Byte 1) = Number of system class alarms that have not been accepted = 0 0x00 (Byte 2) = Number of input class alarms that have not been accepted = 0 0x00 (Byte 3) = Number of limit class alarms that have not been accepted = 0 0x0E (Byte 3) = Total number of system class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 14 0x10 (Byte 5) = Total number of input class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 16 0x00 (Byte 6) = Total number of limit class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 0
Note: The reply data is a character string and is therefore unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.21
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.8
Historical Event Log access over a MODBUS network This section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master can access “LIVE” information from the Historical Event Log of a 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave. Refer to Chapter 8 if an explanation for the Historical Event Log is required.
7.8.1
Introduction Information from the Historical Event Log is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated with ‘Virtual Address 1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning! It is not advisable to clear or accept events using the front panel while the Historical Event Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. This could otherwise result in the MODBUS master having an in-correct view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an event, (2) accepting that event and (3) clearing that event Every example features objectives, actions, and a result analysis. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.8.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
Table 7.8.1: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number
DC
Page 7.22
Meaning
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.8.2
Worked Examples Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions. A base address of “01” has been assumed for our examples. Objectives:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Event Log Retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events Make information available on a specific event Get further information about the event that was selected in step three Accept/Clear the event that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many events are in the Historical Event Log. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 11,999 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2E
DF
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
96
7C
BC
EB
Chk. Sum 2A
Chk. Sum
Result: Returned data indicates that there are 150 (0x0096) events in the Historical Event Log.
Step 2 is to retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve ID number of the oldest event by reading register 10,000 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
27
10
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
D5
3C
8F
48
Chk. Sum BB
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the unique event ID is 0x02D5. Notes: Identification (ID) numbers of recorded events are available from MODBUS registers 10,000 to 10,149. The ID of the oldest recorded entry in the Historical Event Log is at register 10,000. For the purpose of our worked example, one event identification number is sufficient. In practice, all identification numbers would need to be retrieved and stored for repeating steps.
Step 3 is to make information available about a specific event. This is mandatory for remaining steps. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available for the first event Write the event identification number (i.e. 0x02D5) to MODBUS register 10,999 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2A
F7
Reg. ID 2A
F7
Reg. ID
00
01
02
02
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
B8
10
01
Reg. Cnt.
D5
EC
DA
Chk. Sum
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the selection has been made.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.23
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information for selected event is now available by read register 10,999 Transmit
02
03
2A
F7
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
03
02
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
D3
Chk. Sum
3C
D5
3D
BB
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the current event ID is confirmed to be 0x02D5.
Step 4 is to get further information about the event that was selected in step 3. To get information about another event, repeat step 3 but use another event identification number. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text length by reading MODBUS register 12,000 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2E
E0
Reg. ID
00
01
8C
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
03
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
FC
14
E7
Chk. Sum 4B
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the event text length is 20 bytes (0x0014). At present, the length returned is always 20 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when asking for the event text. Do not assume the event text length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text by reading MODBUS register 11,012 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
04
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
14
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
Receive
79
63
6C
6D
00
0A
8D
Reg. Cnt 41
DB
Chk. Sum
20
4F
2F
50
20
38
20
3A
AD
63
The Data... (mA O/P 8 cycle time) 65
20
74
69
6D
65
The Data…
Meaning
00
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data contains the ASCII encoded event text. It is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve location ID, event type, and event state by reading register 11,010 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
02
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
00
00
02
6C
1C
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
72
01
01
The Data
A9
78
Chk. Sum
Result: 0x0072 = Location ID 0114 1st. 0x01 = Type (0x00=Auto, 0x01=User, 0x02=Period) 2nd. 0x01 = State (0x00=Pending, 0x01=Accepted)
Page 7.24
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain date/time stamp for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,009 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
Receive
02
03
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
00
08
Receive Meaning
th
= 8 . (June)
01
Reg. ID
00
00
00
08
05
1B
Chk. Sum
04
33
00
= 4 seconds
= Thursday
1C
Reg. Cnt.
= 51 mins.
00
A0 th
= 160 . Day
84
00
09
= 9 hours
00
06
07
= June
D0
= 2000
82
Chk. Sum
Result: When viewing the Historical Event Log entry you would see “08-06-00 09:51:04” on the third line Special Notes: x The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event data for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,011 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
03
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
32
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
45
00
19
Reg. Cnt. 3B
80
7D
D7
Chk. Sum 00
…
The Data
80
53
Chk. Sum
Result: 453B8000 is an 32-bit IEEE number representing 3000.00 (Old = 3000.0) - ignore the other 46 bytes Special Notes: x x x
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode. You must use MODBUS function 3 irrespective of whether port is configured for single register access When the data part of the reply represents an option selection code, the code is in the first byte. You can retrieve option text by reading 22 bytes from registers 11,013 (old option ) and 11014 (new option)
Step 5 is to clear the selected event from Historical Event Log once all associated data has been retrieved MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write value of the clearance code (0x0001) to MODBUS register 11,004 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2A
FC
Reg. ID 2A
FC
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt 00
01
Reg. Cnt.
02
00
DC
The Data
C9
01
EC
9E
Chk. Sum
D2
Chk. Sum
Result: x
Event cleared from the Historical Event Log. All associated data is no longer accessible.
Special Notes: x x
If you wish to just accept the selected event, use the acceptance code 0x0000 To clear all events in the Historical Event Log, write any 16-bit value to MOBUS register 12,001
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.25
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.9
Archive access over a MODBUS network This Section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master can access archives of a 795x MODBUS Slave. Refer to Chapter 9 if an explanation of Data Archiving is required.
7.9.1
Introduction Information from Archives is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated with ‘Virtual Address 4’ (base address + offset of 4). Worked examples in Section 7.9.2 are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) selecting an archive by type, (2) selecting a snapshot in that archive and (3) retrieving values from that snapshot. Every example features objectives, actions, and a result analysis. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.8.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
Table 7.9.1: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address.
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception.
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers.
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written.
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number.
DC
Page 7.26
Meaning
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow.
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information.
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.9.2
Worked Examples Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions. A base address of “01” (for MODBUS) has been assumed for our examples. Objectives:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select an archive. Find out how many snapshots are stored in that archive. Select a snapshot within that archive. Retrieve values from that archive.
Step 1 is to select an archive by type and then, optionally, verify it has been selected. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Select the Interval Archive by writing 0x02 to MODBUS register number 999 Transmit
05
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
05
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
Reg. ID 03
E7
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
B0
01
Reg. Cnt.
02
31
86
Chk. Sum
3E
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the request was successful Special Note: x
Codes – 0x0000 (Alarm Triggered Archive), 0x0001 (Daily Archive), 0x0003 (Manual Trigger Archive)
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Verify the Archive selection by reading from MODBUS register number 999 Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
05
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
02
C8
35
FD
Chk. Sum 45
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply of 0x02 indicates that the Interval Archive was selected.
Step 2 is to find how many snapshots are stored in the selected archive MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 39,999 Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
9C
3F
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
05
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
9B
D2
Chk. Sum
07
Result: x
There are presently 7 (0x0007) snapshots in the selected archive.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.27
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Step 3 is to select a snapshot from the selected archive and then, optionally, verify it has been selected. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Select newest snapshot the Archive by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1000 Transmit
05
10
03
E8
00
01
02
00
00
B0
B8
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
Chk.
Sum
Receive
05
10
03
E8
00
01
80
3D
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk.
Sum
Result: x
Reply indicates that the request was successful.
Special Note: x x
This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system nd Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2 oldest snapshot), etc.
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check on snapshot selection by reading from MODBUS register number 1000 Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E8
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
05
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
00
49
05
FE
Chk. Sum 84
Chk. Sum
Result: x
Reply data 0x0000 indicates that the newest (latest) snapshot is selected.
Special Note: x x
This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system nd Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2 oldest snapshot), etc.
Step 4 is to retrieve the newest snapshot value from the first parameter programmed into the archive list. MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Retrieve first parameter attributes by reading MODBUS register 40000 Transmit
05
03
9C
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
05
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
40
Reg. ID 06
00
02
EA
0B
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
04
04
FF
The Data
BE
89
Chk. Sum
Result: x x x x
0x06 = Data Type ‘6’ – IEEE 32-bit floating-point value 0x04 = Data Size – Parameter value stored in 4 bytes 0xFF = Status – No Status Attribute 0x04 = Units of measurement group 4 – Volumetric units
Special Notes: x x
Page 7.28
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode. Other MODBUS registers: 40001 (= 2nd. listed parameter), 40002 (= 3rd. listed parameter), etc.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Retrieve value by reading MODBUS register 2000. Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
Receive
05
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
D0
Reg. ID
00
02
Reg. Cnt.
00
0D
46
The Data
C5
02
Chk. Sum 87
5C
32
Chk. Sum
Result: 3 x 0x000D4687 is the hexadecimal value for 870,023 (m )
Special Note: nd.
x Other MODBUS registers: 2001 (=2
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
listed parameter), 2002 (=3rd. listed parameter), etc.
Page 7.29
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Page 7.30
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘A’)
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM 7a.1
What is the purpose if this addendum? This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for peer-to-peer MODBUS network communications. To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this) The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (‘V’) key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen. Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”. Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen. Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”. Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level. Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
Page 7a.2
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS 7A.2
INTRODUCTION
FEATURE: 795X COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETERS USING PEER-TO-PEER LISTS What to do: x x
An overview is in Section 7a.2.1…………………….……………. Page 7a.3 A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7a.2.2…..…….. Page 7a.5
7A.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE? This feature is typically used when a ‘Header’ Flow Computer must send various measurements (e.g. pressure, temperature, etc.) over a MODBUS protocol network to one or more ‘Stream’ Flow Computers. The 795x Flow Computer network can be a mixture of members from the 795x series.
USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL In MODBUS protocol terms, a ‘Header’ Flow Computer is usually given the role of a MODBUS Master device. It has the responsibility for the peer-to-peer transmission of measurement values during every machine cycle. The ‘Stream’ Flow Computers are all MODBUS Slave devices and they are the recipients of peer-to-peer transmissions. When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature… A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters directly to the database of a single 795x Slave device. The two MODBUS devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting RS-232 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 2on page 7a.3. When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature… A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters to a maximum of sixteen 795x MODBUS slaves. The 795x MODBUS devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting the RS-485 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 3on page 7a.3 At present, peer-to-peer communications will operate through one serial port. Configuring another serial port of the ‘Header’ 795x to function as a Master device and connecting it to a duplicate MODBUS network will cause unpredictable results.
THE PEER-TO-PEER LISTS 1 On the 795x Master there are two peer-to-peer lists for compiling a collection of up to 40 measurement parameters (795x database locations) in total. The list is simply a look-up reference for the Master, when 2 preparing transmissions, and is programmed with database location IDs. Figure 7a.2.1 shows how an individual peer-to-peer list comprises of entries (menu data pages) for nominating from 1 up to 20 parameters. Each list entry requires a programmed source – a database location ID on the 795x Master device - and a programmed destination – a database location ID on the 795x Slave devices. Figure 7a.2.1 : Peer-To-Peer List Anatomy PEER-TO-PEER LIST (with practice values) Source "Indicated Volume Rate" "Actual Cycle Time"
1
2
Destination
(Location IDs) 661 01
256 (Off)
02
(Off)
20
03
(Location IDs) 661 01
662 (Off)
02
(Off)
20
03
"Indicated Volume Rate" "Gross Volume Rate"
These lists are wholly independent of the High Speed Lists that are set-up on one (or more) 795x MODBUS slaves for access by non-795x MODBUS Master devices. To find out the database location ID for any parameter, navigate the menu system to the applicable menu data page and then press the ‘a’ soft-key once. The 4-digit database location ID is then displayed on the fourth line of the LCD display.
Issue: AB
Page 7a.3
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
Each 795x Slave device is allocated one of the two lists. This is a user-selection and is made when defining slaves whilst setting up the 795x Master device. Once lists are programmed, peer-to-peer operations are commenced on the 795x Master by a selecting an “Enable” option (‘soft-command’) through a menu data page. For each correctly listed parameter, a value is then read from the database, incorporated into a MODBUS ‘write’ command message and transmitted from the 795x Master device to the database on designated 795x Slave devices. All peer-to-peer lists, in use, are processed in full during a single machine cycle. This is repeated once every cycle until peer-to-peer operations are stopped by a “disable” ‘soft-command’. In a network of two 795x Flow Computers – a Master device and a Slave device, the Master is able to detect all failures to communicate with the slave and it raises a system alarm. With one slave, every MODBUS (‘write’) command message is explicitly addressed and that solicits a response from that slave. The absence of a response after a period (of retries) is how the Master detects a failure3. In a network of multiple slaves, MODBUS ‘write’ command messages use an all-slave broadcast address, which does not solicit any response and, therefore, the Master does not detect a communication failure. In this case, the system alarm is not raised. When the system alarm can not be cleared without it re-appearing during the next machine cycle, there are continuous communication failures. It is advisable to temporarily halt peer-to-peer operations, clear all related alarms and investigate (and correct) the difficulty before resuming.
Figure 2: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS232 Arrangement MODBUS Commands
795x MODBUS Master Device
Logical Link
LIST ONE
DATABASE
P1
RS-232 LINK
P2
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 1
LIST TWO
Figure 3: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS485 Arrangement
795x MODBUS Master Device
P3
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 1
P2
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 2
P3
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 3
LIST ONE
DATABASE
P2
RS-485 LINK
LIST TWO
MODBUS Commands
3
Logical Link
This type of failure is normally the symptom of a faulty/unsuitable cable, incorrect set-up of communication parameters or the absence of a physical connection to a MODBUS network.
Page 7a.4
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
7a.2.2 Configuring and activation instructions Follow these instructions to configure and activate peer-to-peer communications…
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 4 connections is in Chapter 7. Several peer-to-peer arrangements are shown on page 7a.4.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS master device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select the menu for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network (2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some localised menu searching is required.
CONNECTING MORE THAN ONE SERIAL PORT TO THE A PEER-TO-PEER MODBUS NETWORK WILL CAUSE UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS
Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Menu Data *
Instructions and Comments
Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 P Modbus word order *** Port Modbus mode P MODB slave addr *** P Modbus features P long reg access ***
Select the option with “Modbus master” as the description Select a rate that is agreed for the 795x Master device and all the slaves devices Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network) Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable (wiring) supports “CTS/RTS” Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** Not applicable to the 795x Master device Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices. Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it. Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it. Choose either single register or multiple register formatted MODBUS commands
P MODB precision ***
Choose a precision option that is agreed for the Master and all the slaves devices
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network *** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
(2d) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to peer”> (2e) Program the peer-to-peer lists Menus: Peer List One:/…<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to Peer”>/<”Peer list 1”> Peer List Two: /…<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to Peer”>/<”Peer list 2”> When programming a list, it is very important to use the first available (unused) entry and to not leave gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list. Programming a valid location number for a source will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter descriptor. The destination does not do this because the edited location number stays displayed as the edited number. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded with a “*** ERROR ***” message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored. By default, destinations (location IDs) are automatically synchronised with the corresponding sources. This is ideal for when Flow Computers are running the same software release. However, the source and destination (IDs) do not have to be the same. For each list, there is a peer-to-peer configuration 4
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports before establishing the physical connections.
Issue: AB
Page 7a.5
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
INSTRUCTIONS
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
parameter,, to stop the synchronising action and enable IDs to be different. This feature allows 795x slave devices to run releases other software versions and still get updates from the Master device. Re-enabling the synchronising will immediately trigger the overwriting of all destination IDs with the source IDs, losing the destination IDs forever. Values go directly into the 795x database of a slave unless serial communications is prohibited. Security parameters for serial communications are found within <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”Security”>. (2f) Inform the 795x Master about all 795x slave devices on the network (Note: Start by programming details of your first slave using parameters within the “Device 1” menu) Menu Data * Slave device func ** Slv device port no ** Slv device address ** Device word swap Device precision Device peer list
Instructions and Comments Select the option with “Peer” as the description.
Select the serial port that is connected to same the network as the slave Use “0” if there are multiple slaves. Otherwise, use the address of the slave Not applicable to the 795x but may be needed by protocol listening devices Use a precision option that is the same as the 795x MODBUS Master Select the option that corresponds to one of the two peer-to-peer lists
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** Abbreviations: “Slv” = Slave, “func” = Function, “no” = number
3.
Program each remaining 795x to be a MODBUS slave device (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (3b) Select a menu that corresponds to the serial port that is connected to the RS-485 network (3c) Set-up basic communications parameters… Menu Data * Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format *** Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485
Instructions and Comments Select the option with “Modbus slave” as the description Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
P Modbus word order ***
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port Modbus mode
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
P MODB slave addr ***
Edit a value that does not conflict with other MODBUS network devices
P Modbus features ***
Not applicable to peer-to-peer operations
P long reg access ***
Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
P MODB precision ***
Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network *** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
4. Start peer-to-peer communications at the 795x Master device (4a) Navigate to: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”> (4b) Locate the menu data page with “Peer enable” on-screen (4c) Select the “Enable” soft-command (option) Once enabled, it is advisable to stop (deactivate) peer-to-peer communications prior to adjusting the communications set-up. Once changes have been made, re-enable the peer-to-peer function with step 4.
(End of instructions)
Page 7a.6
Issue: AB
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘B’)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM 7b.1
What is the purpose if this addendum? This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for HSL - High Speed List – communications over a MODBUS protocol network. To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this) The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (‘V’) key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen. Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”. Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen. Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”. Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level. Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
Page 7b.2
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION 7B.2
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
FEATURE: COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETER DATA USING HIGH-SPEED LISTS What to do here: x x x x
An overview is in Section 7b.2.1…………..…………………………….. Page 7b.2 A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7b.2.2………..……... Page 7b.9 A guided example in Section 7b.2.3……………………..…...………… Page 7b.12 Wonderware compatibility notes are in Section 7b.3………….……….. Page 7b.18
7b.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE? This feature is typically used when a MODBUS Master device 1 must get parameter data from a 795x series Flow Computer, where both are attached to the same MODBUS protocol network. High-speed list communications facilitate the quick collection and transmission of data from up to 300 usernominated parameters. This is achieved by using just a small quantity of MODBUS protocol messages. It would otherwise require an exchange of hundreds of messages. The 795x Flow Computer also helps by collecting all the data of nominated (listed) parameters from its’ database and keeping it ‘local’. This activity is completed during every machine cycle. Keeping parameter data ‘locally’ allows faster data access, allowing the 795x to service requests from a Master device as quickly as possible. Hence, the term of ‘high-speed lists’. There are two aspects to high-speed list communications: x x
the MODBUS protocol (network arrangements, communication parameters and message exchanges) a list of parameters (i.e. 795x database locations) and
Read about each aspect in the sections that follow this overview and then look at the setting-up instructions and the guided example. USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL In MODBUS protocol terms, the MODBUS Master device is likely to be a supervisory system. The Master device is responsible for acquiring parameter data through an exchange of MODBUS protocol messages with one ore more a MODBUS networked slave devices. The 795x Flow Computer is the MODBUS slave device, supporting RS-485 and RS-232 signalling standards. When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature… A Master device can request parameter data from one 795x slave device. The two MODBUS devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting RS-232 Standard. (See Figure 1 on page 7b.3) When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature… A Master device can request parameter data from one or more 795x slaves. The 795x MODBUS slave devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting the RS-485 Standard. (See Figure 2 on page 7b.4) Figure 1: High Speed List Overview (RS-232 Example) Read/Write Database Operations
795x MODBUS Slave Device High Speed List One
MODBUS Master Device
(Virtual Slave 2)
DATABASE
MODBUS Messages
P1
RS-232 LINK
P2
APPLICATION
High Speed List Two (Virtual Slave 3)
1
Direction of flow (HSL Data)
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between 795x Flow Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer Lists” feature.
Issue: AB
Page 7b.3
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Figure 2: High Speed List Overview (RS-485 Example)
MODBUS Master Device
Read/Write Operations
MODBUS Messages
APPLICATION Direction of flow (HSL Data) Serial Port
High Speed List 1
High Speed List 1
(Virtual Slave '2')
(Virtual Slave '2')
795x MODBUS Slave Device
DATABASE
P2
RS-485 Link
795x MODBUS Slave Device
DATABASE
P3
High Speed List 2
High Speed List 2
(Virtual Slave '3')
(Virtual Slave '3')
Figure 3: High Speed List Activity Within 795x Slave Devices
HIGH SPEED LIST ONE 795x MODBUS Slave Device LIST ONE
1 Loc ID: 0661
2 Loc ID: 0662
3 Loc ID: 0000
50 Loc ID: 0000
V S
V S
V S
V S
450.015 Live
448.011 Live
-
-
Copying Activity Every Cycle
DATABASE
LIST TWO
Loc ID: 0661
Loc ID: 0662
Loc ID: 0663
V S
V S
V S
450.015 Live
448.011 Live
-
795X DATABASE
Figure 4: Parameter List Block Organisation
HIGH-SPEED LIST ONE Indicated Volume flow rate Gross Volume flow rate
BLOCK A (Location IDs)
661 662 (Off) (Off)
01 02 03
50
BLOCK B (Location IDs)
0718 0595 1548
01
(Off)
50
02 03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Page 7b.4
HIGH SPEED LIST TWO
BLOCK C (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
(Off)
50
02 03
Prime Dynamic Viscosity Prime Kinematic Viscosity
BLOCK D (Location IDs)
2048 2111 (Off) (Off)
01 02 03
50
BLOCK E (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
(Off)
50
02 03
BLOCK F (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
(Off)
50
02 03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
THE HIGH-SPEED PARAMETER LIST On 795x slaves there are two individual lists 2 for nominating the parameters – labelled as “High-speed List 1” and “High Speed List 2” within the communications area of the menu system. Each list has the capacity for nominating up to 150 parameters, organised into three blocks of 50 parameters. Figure 4 on page7b.4 illustrates the three block structure for both lists. The figure shows that blocks are set-up on an individual basis. Parameters are nominated using their own unique database location identification (ID) number. Each entry in a block has a dedicated menu data page for editing in a location ID. The parameter list is primarily for the 795x slave device to extract data of specific parameters from its’ database during every machine cycle. All extracted data is stored ‘locally’ for faster and more efficient data access. It is then accessible only to a Master device by means of MODBUS ‘read’ command messages. Figure 3 on page 7b.4 illustrates the process. MODBUS ‘read’ command messages must be addressed to either virtual slave ‘2’ or virtual slave ‘3’ through any MODBUS slave configured port. Virtual slave addressing is explained in Chapter 7.
MODBUS Address
Information Available
Virtual Slave ‘2’
High-speed List One
Virtual Slave ‘3’
High-speed List Two
The register map at each virtual slave is initially in a pre-set format but it can be individually re-organised to suit applications on the Master device. There are several basic styles available for selection. Follow the links in Table 1 to get a graphical overview of default register maps for each basic style. You will also get to see how the blocks of a parameter list are linked to a register map.
Table 1: Links to graphical overviews of high-speed lists and register maps Styles
Graphical Representation
Old Style (Legacy) *
See Figure 5 on page 7b.6
Grouped
See Figure 6 on page 7b.7
Ungrouped
See Figure 7 on page 7b.8
* As found in 795x software released before the year 2000
2
These lists are wholly independent of the peer-to-peer lists that are set-up on a 795x MODBUS Master device.
Issue: AB
Page 7b.5
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Figure 5: Default Register Mappings for "Old Style" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped Start Register = 0 2051 - 10000 are unused
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
1
Values 50
10001
Location IDs
00 - 10 d 51 nuse u e r a
10050
20001
20050
1050
Location IDs 11050
Types and Sizes 21050
31001
Status 30050
40001
Values
21001
Types and Sizes
30001
1001 11001
Status 31050
41001
Full Attributes
Full Attributes
40050
22001 32001 42001
Values 2050
Location IDs 12050
Types and Sizes 22050
Status 32050
Full Attributes
41050
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
Block A
HIGH-SPEED LISTS VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
0 2001 200 d 1e 105 unus e r 12001 a
Block B
42050
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS Block D
2051 - 10000 are unused
1
Values 50
10001
Location IDs 20001 30001
0 100 51 - nused u are
10050
Types and Sizes 20050
Status 30050
40001
Block F
Full Attributes
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP) 1001
Values 11001
Location IDs 21001 31001
11050 21050
Status 31050
41001
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
2001 00 - 20 d 051 use 1050 1 re un 12001 a
Types and Sizes
Full Attributes 40050
Page 7b.6
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK D BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP) HSL-2 Grouped Start Register = 0
Block E
22001 32001
Values 2050
Location IDs 12050
Types and Sizes 22050
Status 32050
42001
Full Attributes 41050
42050
BLOCK D PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 6: Default Register Mappings for "Grouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped Start Register = 0
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) 0
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) 50
100
Values
Values 49
150
200
199
Status 499
600
Location IDs 249
350
Full Attributes
Types and Sizes 399
500
Status 549
650
Full Attributes
649
550 700
449
Status 599
Full Attributes
699
749
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
Block A
HIGH-SPEED LISTS VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
299
400
Types and Sizes 349
149
250
Location IDs
Types and Sizes 450
Values 99
Location IDs 300
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP)
Block B
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS Block D
HSL-2 Grouped Start Register = 0
Block E
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'E' S ECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
0
50
Values
450 600
Values 99
200
Location IDs 300
100
Values 49
150
Types and Sizes 349
Status 499
Full Attributes
350 500 650
149
250
Location IDs 199
Location IDs 249
Types and Sizes 399
Status 549
Full Attributes
649
Issue: AB
Block F
400 550 700
299
Types and Sizes 449
Status 599
Full Attributes
699
749
BLOCK D PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
Page 7b.7
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Figure 7: Default Register Mappings for "Ungrouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped Start Register = 0
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
0
250
500
Values
Values 49
50
300
Location IDs
Status 199
200
349
Full Attributes
Types and Sizes 399
400
Status 449
450
Full Attributes
249
650 700
649
Status 699
Full Attributes
499
749
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
Block A
HIGH-SPEED LISTS VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
599
600
Types and Sizes 149
150
Location IDs
350
Types and Sizes
549
550
Location IDs 99
100
Values 299
Block B
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS Block D
HSL-2 Grouped Start Register = 0
Block E
Block F
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER M AP)
BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
0
250
Values
150 200
Values 299
300
Location IDs 100
500
Values 49
50
99
Types and Sizes 149
Status 199
Full Attributes
350 400 450
549
550
Location IDs
Location IDs 349
Types and Sizes 399
Status 449
Full Attributes
249
Page 7b.8
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
600 650 700
599
Types and Sizes 649
Status 699
Full Attributes
499
749
BLOCK D PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
7b.2.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions Follow these instructions to configure and activate high-speed list communications:
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 3 connections is in Chapter 7.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select the menu that is appropriate for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network (2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some localised menu searching is required. Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Menu Data *
Instructions and Comments
Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 P Modbus word order *** Port Modbus mode P MODB slave addr *** P Modbus features P long reg access *** P MODB precision ***
Select the option with “Modbus slave” as the description Select a rate that is agreed for the Master device and all the 795x slaves devices Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network) Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable (wiring) supports “CTS/RTS” Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** Select an option that is compatible with the Master device Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices. Program the base address of this slave Select an option that includes “L1”/“List1” for HSL-1 and “L2”/“List2” for HSL-2 Choose to accept either the single or multiple register MODBUS command format Select a precision option that is compatible with the Master device
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network *** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
3. Program High Speed List ‘1’ (if applicable) (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus slave”> (3b) Select the menu that is appropriate for HSL-1 (3c) Program the configuration parameters for HSL-1, as guided in Menu Data List 2 Menu Data List 2: HSL-1 Configuration Parameters (Part One) Menu Data (as displayed)
Instructions and Comments
List 1 word order
x This selection overrides the serial port setting
List 1 block layout
x Select default register map organisation: “Old Style”, “Grouped” or “Ungrouped” *
L1 grouped start reg
x Program the number of the first register space for the complete register map **
* See pages 7b.6, 7b.7 and 7b.8 for a graphical view of the default register map for each selectable style
(3d) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block A’ (if applicable) Note: This step does not apply when the “Old Style” (legacy) register map layout is chosen in step 3c Table 2 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the existing register map in ‘Block A’. Alongside the descriptors are default settings for every selectable block layout style. 3
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports before establishing the physical connections.
Issue: AB
Page 7b.9
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is unsuitable for the application on the Master device. Table 2: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block A Menu Data (as displayed)
Default Start Registers (“Old Style” mapping)
Default Start Registers (“Grouped” mapping)
Default Start Registers (“Ungrouped” mapping)
L1A vals start reg L1A locs start reg L1A types start reg L1A status start reg
1 10001 20001 30001
0 150 300 450
0 50 100 150
L1A attrs start reg
40001
600
200
Note: Also see Table 3 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3e) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block B’ (if applicable) Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c Table 3 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the present register map of ‘Block B’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable block layout style. Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is unsuitable for the application on the Master device. Table 3: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block B Menu Data * (as displayed)
Default Start Registers (“Old Style” map)
Default Start Registers (“Grouped” map)
Default Start Registers (“Ungrouped” map)
L1B vals start reg
1001
50
250
L1B locs start reg L1B types start reg
11001 21001
200 350
300 350
L1B status start reg L1B attrs start reg
31001 41001
500 650
400 450
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3f) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block C’ (if applicable) Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c Table 4 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the present register map of ‘Block C’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable block layout style. Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is unsuitable for the application on the Master device. Table 4: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block C Menu Data * (as displayed)
Default Start Registers (“Old Style” map)
Default Start Registers (“Grouped” map)
Default Start Registers (“Ungrouped” map)
L1C vals start reg
2001
100
500
L1C locs start reg L1C types start reg L1C status start reg
12001 22001 32001
250 400 550
550 600 650
L1C attrs start reg
42001
700
700
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 3 for the default settings of other HSL-1 Blocks
Page 7b.10
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
(3g) Program the high-speed list with the location ID of each parameter to be made available to the Master Menu Data List 3 lists the descriptors of the menu data pages for programming the ‘Block A’ partition with location IDs of up to 50 parameters. The menu data pages are easily located within the 795x menu system under the <“Block A”> sub-menu. Menu Data List 3 : ‘BLOCK A’ Parameter Entries 1–50 Menu Data (as displayed)
Purpose
DBM list 1A ptr 1 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 1
DBM list 1A ptr 2 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 2
:
:
DBM list1A ptr 50 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 50
* Abbreviation: “ptr” = pointer (a programming term)
The menu data pages for programming entries in ‘Block B’ and ‘Block C’ are easily located within the menu system under the <“Block B”> and <“Block C”> sub-menus. It is good practice to start with ‘Block A’ before progressing to ‘Block B’. Likewise, start with ‘Block B’ before progressing to ‘Block C’. It is not necessary to fully utilise a block before using another. When programming in location identification numbers (IDs), it is very important to use the first available (unused) entry and to not leave gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list. (See Figure 8)
Figure 8: Correct and Incorrect Programmed Parameter Lists
HIGH SPEED LIST '1'
HIGH SPEED LIST '1'
(Programmed Correctly) BLOCK A (Location IDs) "Indicated Volume Rate" "Gross Volume Rate"
661 662 (Off) (Off)
01
BLOCK B (Location IDs)
03
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
50
(Off)
50
03
0718 0595 1548
01
50
(Off)
02
(Programmed Incorrectly)
02
BLOCK A (Location IDs)
BLOCK C (Location IDs)
02 03
"Indicated Volume Rate" "Gross Volume Rate"
(Off) = Unused Entry
661 (Off) 662 (Off)
01
BLOCK B (Location IDs)
01
03
50
(Off)
50
03
50
(Off)
02
BLOCK C (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
0718 (Off) 0595
01 02
02 03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Programming in a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded with a “** ERROR **” message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
4. Program High Speed List ‘2’ (if it is to be used ) Repeat steps 3a to 3g but this time it is for configuring HSL-2.
(End of instructions)
Issue: AB
Page 7b.11
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
GUIDED EXAMPLE
7b.2.3 Guided Example: Accessing a HSL over a MODBUS network This section is a practical guide to collecting parameter data from a 795x MODBUS Slave through the high-speed list feature. For this guided example, High-speed List ‘1’ (HSL-1) has been used.
What to do here:
1. Review the 795x slave configuration Menu Data List 4 and Menu Data List 5, both on page 7b.13, show configuration details for this guided example. These checklists should be used in conjunction with the “Instructions” section on page 7b.9. MODBUS feature settings for the serial port have been chosen especially to obtain the MODBUS message sequences that are shown later. For a full list of configuration parameters for serial communications, please refer to the “Instructions” section on page 7b.9. For the purpose of this guided example, instructions assume that the Master device is already set-up.
2. Review the MODBUS message sequences MODBUS message sequences aim to show the best approach to accessing high-speed list parameter data through a MODBUS register map at a virtual slave address. For this guided example, the “Old Style” default register map has been used. Every example features an objective, an action and a result… Objective(s) For an example, the objective could be to read a value from two listed parameters. Action(s) Actions consist of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device. Expected replies from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values. Table 5 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the message. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
3. Experiment Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements
Table 5 : Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviation
Meaning
Slv.
Virtual slave address. It is 0x03 for this guided example.
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers requested
Reg. ID
MOBUS register number
DC
Page 7b.12
Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
GUIDED EXAMPLE
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Menu Data List 4: HSL-1 Set-up for Guided Example Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Comment
List 1 word order List 1 block layout L1 grouped start reg DBM list 1A ptr 1 DBM list 1A ptr 2 DBM list 1A ptr 3 DBM list 1B ptr 1 DBM list 1B ptr 2 DBM list 1B ptr 3 DBM list 1B ptr 4 DBM list 1B ptr 5 DBM list 1C ptr 1
“Modbus default” “Old-style” 0 0661 0662 0000 0773 0772 0779 0778 0000 0000
The register map for this example is shown in Figure 9. ID is for Indicated Volume flow rate ID is for Gross Volume flow rate ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block A ID is for integer part of the Indicate Volume flow total ID is for fractional part of the Indicate Volume total ID is for integer part of the Gross Volume flow total ID is for fractional part of the Gross Volume flow total ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block B ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block C
Notes: 1. Metering totals are stored in the database in two parts. There is one database location for the integer part and one database location for the fractional part. They are usually not displayed within the menu system. When communicating totals over MODBUS, transmit both the integer and fractional values. All totals displayed within the menu system are also database locations. However, they are not suitable for transmission. 2. Abbreviations: “L1” = ‘High-speed List 1’, “reg” = register, “DBM” = Database Manager, “ptr” = pointer 3.
Location identification numbers (IDs) and descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later software release
Menu Data List 5: Serial Port Set-up for Guided Example Menu Data *
Value/Option
Comms port owner P Modbus word order Port Modbus mode P MODB slave addr P Modbus features P long reg access P MODB precision
“Modbus slave” Modbus default “RTU” 1 “Alarm+List1+List2” “Single register” “Single”
Comments
x x x x
This is the base slave address Enables virtual slaves 1, 2 and 3 Request 1 register per parameter Require 32-bit floating-point values
* Location descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later software release
Figure 9: Register Map for Guided Example 1 HIGH-SPEED LISTS
HIGH-SPEED LIST HSL BLOCKS
HSL ONE Block A
HSL TWO
Block C
HSL-1 BLOCK A
HSL 1 BLOCK B
HSL 1 BLOCK C
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (REGISTER MAP)
1
Values 50
10001
Location IDs 20001 30001 40001
10050
Types and Sizes 20050
Status 30050
Full Attributes 40050
Issue: AB
Block B
1001 00 d - 10 51 nuse u e r 11001 a 21001 31001 41001
Values Location IDs
2001 00 - 20 d 051 use 1050 1 re un 12001 a 11050
Types and Sizes 21050
Status 31050
Full Attributes 41050
22001 32001 42001
Values 2050
Location IDs 12050
Types and Sizes 22050
Status 32050
Full Attributes 42050
Page 7b.13
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
GUIDED EXAMPLE
MODBUS MESSAGE SEQUENCES: 4 All transmit and receive sequences , shown here, demonstrate use of default word ordering, single precision (32-bit) data representation and ‘single register’ formatted commands. Transmitted messages are addressed to the second virtual slave (base slave address + 2) for access to the “Old style” default register map of High-speed List 1. (1a)
Objective: Read values from all of the parameters listed in High-speed List One (HSL-1) Action 1 of 3: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’) 3 Values expected in the reply are 3600.125 and 3546.123, both in base units of m /hour. Transmit Meaning
03
03
00
01
00
02
94
29
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive Meaning
03
03
08
45
61
02
00
45
5D
A1
F8
D7
88
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Data
Chk
sum
Result: x 45610200 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3600.125 (in base units of m3/hour) x 455DA1F8 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3546.123 m3/hour Note: When using the single register mode, the number of registers to be read is the same as the number of parameters to be read from the associated block. This happens to be two for ‘Block A’ in this example.
Action 2 of 3: Read four registers starting from MODBUS register 1001 (Values Section, ‘Block B’) Transmit Meaning
03
03
03
E9
00
04
94
5B
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk.
sum
Receive Meaning
03
03
10
46
18
3C
00
3F
19
0A
B1
46
15
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Receive Meaning
F4
00
3E
E3
40
94
24
24
Data
…
The
Data
…
…
Chk.
Sum
Result: 1st. Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction) x 46183C00 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9743 (in base units of m3/hour) x 3F190AB1 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.59781936 (in base units of m3/hour) nd 2 . Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction) 3 x 4615F400 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9597 (in base units of m /hour) x 3EE34094 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.44385207 (in base units of m3/hour)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for volume categorised data.
Action 3 of 3: Read 1 register starting from MODBUS register 2001 (Values Section, ‘Block C’) Transmit Meaning
03
03
07
D1
00
01
D4
A5
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive Meaning
03
83
02
61
31
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
Chk
sum
Result: Response indicates that there are no parameters listed in ‘Block C’ 4
The MODBUS message sequences were all tested using the direct communication feature of Mobrey’s free-of-charge “FC-Config” software utility. You can find it on the Mobrey web site at www.Mobrey.com
Page 7b.14
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS (1b)
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Objective: Write new fixed values to the two known parameters listed under ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One Block A Entry 1
Decimal Value (Before Update)
Decimal Value (After Update)
Block A Entry 2
Decimal Value (Before Update)
Decimal Value (After Update)
IV rate
0
3664
GV rate
0
3712
Abbreviations: “IV” = Indicated Volume, “GV” = Gross Volume
Action 1 of 1: Write values to two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’) x 45650000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3664 x 45680000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3712 Transmit
03
10
00
01
00
02
08
45
65
00
00
45
68
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Transmit
00
4C
7E
Meaning
Data
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
10
00
01
00
02
11
EA
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Result: x Indicated Volume and Gross Volume rates are updated with new fixed values. Notes: 3 x The new parameter values are expected by the slave device to be in base measurement units of m /hour. To find out the base units for other parameter categories, turn to Chapter 9.
(2a)
Objective: Read the location IDs of the first three ‘entry’ configuration parameters of Block B Block A Entry 1
Loc. ID
Block A Entry 2
Loc. ID
Block A Entry 3
Loc. ID
DBM list 1B ptr 1
2459
DBM list 1B ptr 2
2460
DBM list 1B ptr 3
2461
Action 1 of 1: Read three registers starting from MODBUS register 11001 (Loc. IDs Section, ‘Block B’) Transmit
03
03
2A
F9
00
03
DC
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
06
09
9B
09
9C
09
9D
59
1B
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
data
…
The
Data
…
Chk
sum
Result: x 099B is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2459 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 1”> x 099C is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 2”> x 099D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 3”> Note: 2AF9 (Reg. ID) is the hexadecimal representation for 11001
Issue: AB
Page 7b.15
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
GUIDED EXAMPLE (2b)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Objective: Add an entry to ‘High-speed List 1’ via the parameter list of Block C Action 1 of 1: Write the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”> into the database location of <”DBM list1C ptr 1”> (ID: 2509) x 09CC is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2508 – the MODBUS address for <”DBM list1C ptr 1”> x 029D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 0669 – the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”> Transmit
01
10
09
CC
00
01
02
02
9D
EE
55
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
Chk
Sum
Receive
01
10
09
CC
00
01
C2
6A
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Note: x At present, the remote manipulation of a parameter list is achieved through the register map for the 795x database (at the base slave address). See Chapter 7 for further examples of accessing the database.
(3a)
Objective: Read data type and size of a value from all parameters listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 20001 (Types Section, ‘Block A’) Transmit
03
03
4E
21
00
02
82
CB
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
04
07
04
07
04
9A
B5
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
…
Chk
Sum
Result: x 0704: “07” = 32-bit floating-point data type, “04” = 4 bytes for representing the value Note: x See Table 7 on page 7b.17 when interpreting other codes for the data type and size
(4a)
Objective: Read value status from each parameter listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 30001 (Status Section, ‘Block A’) Transmit
03
03
75
31
00
02
8E
2A
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
04
00
01
00
00
88
33
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
…
Chk
Sum
Result: There are four bytes of parameter data returned: 0x0001 and 0x0002 x x
0x0001 = “Set” value status 0x0000 = “Live” value status
Note: For the interpretation of other codes, refer to Table 6 on page 7b.17.
Page 7b.16
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Table 6: Codes for all returned states Value *
State Return
0x0000
x
Live
0x0001
x
Set
0x0002
x
Fail
0x0003
x
Fallback
0x00FF
x
No state
* All values in this table are hexadecimal numbers
Table 7: Interpreting Data from Type and Size Requests Database Location Type x x x x x x x x x x x x
Character Unsigned 8-bit integer Unsigned 16-bit integer Signed 16-bit integer Unsigned 32-bit integer Signed 32-bit integer 32-bit floating-point number 64-bit floating-point number Character String Multiple-choice (List) Option Location pointer Time and date
Size (Bytes) *
Type (Code)
2 2 2 2 4 4 4 8 22 2 2 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
* All values in this column are decimal numbers
Issue: AB
Page 7b.17
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
WONDERWARE COMPATIBILITY NOTES 7b.3
Using Wonderware’s Modbus I/O Server With High-Speed Lists Background The MODBUS specification glances over the concept of different address ranges containing different data types (and only those types in that range), and therefore using different MODBUS command numbers to manipulate the data. The specification goes on to say that ‘It is perfectly acceptable, and very common, to regard all four tables as overlaying one another, if this is the most natural interpretation on the target machine in question’. While individual manufacturers have mostly banded their data somewhat, but in smaller bands that do not fit this ‘four-table’ approach, Wonderware’s software has stuck to the separate address range method rigidly. For some individual manufacturers it has knowledge of, it has allowed them to specify their own arrangements, and will honour them; without that, you must use absolute addressing, ® which relies on the different command numbers for different ranges. Because Solartron flow computers only support commands 3 and 16 covering the whole range of 0 – 65535, absolute addressing cannot be used; up until now, none of the other manufacturers’ implementations could be used either.
Now With the flexibility of the new high-speed lists, it is now possible to get most important data by simulating one of the other manufacturers. In the future, Wonderware will support Mobrey’s 795x Series directly. For now, here is how you can read floating-point data types and long integers (totals in their most accurate representation) using Wonderware:
1. Configure the communications parameters on the 795x// /<Modbus parameters>/<Slave features> Ö “Alarm+L1+L2+Dlog” (recommended) /<Modbus parameters>/ Ö “Single register” /<Modbus parameters>/ Ö “Single precision” ///<Modbus slave> /<Word order> Ö “Modbus default” / Ö “Grouped” (recommended) / Ö 7001 (required for compatibility reasons) /<Word order> Ö “Modbus default” / Ö “Grouped” (recommended) / Ö 15001 (required for compatibility reasons) With this arrangement floating-point values can be read from ‘high-speed list 1’ and long integers read from ‘high-speed list 2’. If you need to be able to read ‘floats’ and ‘longs’ from the same high-speed list, you will need to choose the “Ungrouped” style of register map and re-organise the start registers for each block section as appropriate. You will not be able to read ‘floats’ and ‘longs’ from within the same block, as they require different address ranges.
2. Configure Wonderware’s Modbus I/O server: (2a) Configure the “Topic Definition” - choose a name such as “Solar2510L1” (2b) Select the MODBUS slave address - the base address + 2 (for high-speed list 1) (2c) Select “Omni” as the ‘Slave device type” – Omni’s arrangement is the only one currently which can be used with the 795x series (2d) Repeat for 2a – 2c for ‘High-speed List 2’ (if applicable) You should now be able to use the I/O server via, for example, In Touch.
Page 7b.18
Issue: AB
16-BIT COMMUNICATIONS (GOULD LIST) (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM C)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C 16-bit Communications (Gould List) 7C.1 Overview Chapter 7C is a guide to the software support for 16-bit only MODBUS protocol communications, which utilises the Gould List in this 795x menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>//<”MODBus slave”>/<”Gould list”>. This feature is required when a MODBUS Master 1 is to exchange 16-bit 2 data with one or more 795x Flow Computers operating as a MODBUS Slaves, where all are attached to the same MODBUS network.
16-bits (Word)
=
1 Byte
1 Byte
=
8 bits
8 bits
Figure 1: 16-bits Note: For MODBUS network topologies and terminal connections, refer to main Chapter 7.
7C.1.1
Groundwork On the 795x Flow Computer, integer and floating-point values of parameters (locations) are represented by 16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits, depending on the data type of the value – see Table 1 and Figure 2 (below). Note: Data representation theory is outside the scope of this guide – refer to a data communications book.
32-bits (2 Words)
=
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
64-bits (4 Words)
=
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
Figure 2: 32-bits and 64-bits
16-bit communications is unsuitable for accessing a value that is a character string (11x16-bits) or a value that is a time and date (8x16-bits) – they are therefore not included in Table 1 or this guide. Table 1: 795x Data types Data Type
Size
Unsigned 8-bit integer
16-bits
x
Unsigned 16-bit integer
16-bits
x
Signed 16-bit integer
16-bits
x
x
Unsigned 32-bit integer
32-bits
x
Signed 32-bit integer
32-bits
x
32-bit floating point number *
32-bits
x
64-bit floating point number *
64-bits
x
Multiple-choice (List) Option
16-bits
Location pointer
16-bits
x
* Floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on serial port option.
1
2
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between 795x Flow Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer” communications feature.
16 binary bits e.g. 01010101 01010101
Page 7C.2
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.2
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
795x 16-bit communication features 795x 16-bit communications allows a MODBUS Master to: x
read a 16-bit value – the full value – from a 16-bit parameter (location) – Multiple Register Access
x
read a 16-bit value from any 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Mult. Reg. Access
x
read a full value from a 32-bit of 64-bit parameter (location) – Single Register Access
x
3 write a 16-bit value – the full value – to a 16-bit parameter (location) – Multiple Register Access
x
write a 16-bit value to any 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Mult. Reg. Access
x
write a full value to a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Single Register Access
The ‘16-bit value’ may be scaled (x10, x100 or x1000) before transmission to the MODBUS Master and descaled (y10, y100 or y1000) before being saved to an application parameter (location). This optional feature is explained in Section 7C.1.9. In addition, serial port parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications – see Section 7C.1.13 for details of their effect.
7C.1.3
16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access Figure 3 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit segments. When using Multiple Register Access, each segment is a Gould Register that can be individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List.
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bit Parameter (Database Location)
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
Gould Register
Gould Register
64-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 3: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access It follows then that the Gould Register access for a 32-bit (or 64-bit) parameter is slightly different to accessing a 16-bit parameter. In Figure 4, a 16-bit value is written, as a full value, to the only 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 16-bit parameter. Similarly, a whole value can be read from the same Gould Register.
MODBUS Master
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
Application
16-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Figure 4: Accessing the full value of a 16-bit parameter in one step 3
The 795x will prevent writing to parameters (locations) dedicated to incremental totals, such as the Corrected Volume flow total.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.3
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
In Figure 5, a 16-bit value is read from the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 32-bit parameter. A further message (request) is required to read to the second 16-bit segment (Gould Register). With values from both segments retrieved, the full value can be assembled by the MODBUS Master. The same principle applies to 64-bit parameters, except there are four of the 16-bit segments. Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 795x Gould List is set-up appropriately. MODBUS Master
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value (Read first 16-bit segment)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Application
MODBUS Master
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value (Read final 16-bit segment)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Application
Figure 5: Accessing a full value of a 32-bit parameter in two steps
7C.1.4
16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access Figure 6 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit segments. When using Single Register Access, all 16-bit segments – the full value – equate to one Gould Register that can be individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List. Therefore, reading a Gould Register will retrieve the full value, irrespective of the parameter data type. Similarly, a full value can be written to the Gould Register. Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 795x Gould List is set-up appropriately.
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bit Parameter (Database Location)
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
64-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 6: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access
Page 7C.4
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.5
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List On the 795x Flow Computer, the Gould List comprises menu entries for nominating up to 50 Gould Registers. Each list entry requires user-entered details, which include: x x x x
a user-nominated address for the Gould Register (e.g. 40001) the unique 4-digit location identification number of the associated parameter (e.g. Loc ID: 0144) Word Offset – 0, 1, 2 or 3 – for selecting a 16-bit segment of the parameter value (if applicable) Scaling factor – x10, x100, x1000 or none – for scaling/de-scaling the 16-bit data being exchanged
The 795x Gould List can be set-up for Multiple Register Access or Single Register (or a mixture if using more than one serial port.) Figure 7 shows an example 795x Gould List set-up for Multiple Register Access. There are 3 entries populated with user-entered details. Gould List entries 1 and 2 are set-up for accessing the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40001) and final 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40002) of a 32-bit parameter (location), perhaps a flow rate. Since the full value of parameter 0144 is represented in 32-bits, the Word Offset option must be used to select which 16-bit segment is associated with the nominated Gould Register address. Word Offset 0 selects first 16-bit segment. Word Offset 1 selects the final 16-bit segment. (Word Offset 2 and 3 are applicable only for a 64-bit parameter.) Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing a 16-bit parameter, but there is a deliberate mistake. The Word Offset is 1, which is incorrect since there is no second 16-bit segment in a 16-bit parameter. Likewise, Word Offsets 2 and 3 would also be incorrect as there are no third and fourth segments. To correct the error, Word Offset 0 must be selected. Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory default settings. Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 795x Gould List – do not skip entries in the 795x Gould List. GOULD LIST
1
DATABASE
Gould Reg:
40001
Location ID:
0144
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
No scaling
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
Location ID: 0144
DATABASE
GOULD LIST
2
Gould Reg:
40002
Location ID:
0144
Word Offset:
1
Scaling: 3
459.21 32-bit
No scaling
Gould Reg:
50001
Location ID:
1429
Word Offset:
1
Scaling:
Value Data Size
No scaling
Location ID: 1429 Value Data Size
50 Gould Reg:
0
Location ID:
Off
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
0 16-bit
No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 7: 795x Gould List (Multiple Register Access)
(May 2003)
Page 7C.5
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Figure 8 shows an example 795x Gould List set-up for Single Register Access. Again, there are 3 entries populated with user-entered details. Gould List entry 1 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40001. Since the full value of parameter 0144 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0. Gould List entry 2 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40002. Again, since the full value of parameter 0167 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0. Since Gould Register 40001 and 40002 have addresses in sequence and are in consecutive entries, they can both be read at the same time. Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing the full value – a single 16-bit segment – of Gould Register 50001. Again, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0. Gould Register 40002 and 50001 are in consecutive entries but the addresses are not in sequence; they cannot both be read at the same time. Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory defaults. Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 795x Gould List – do not skip entries in the 795x Gould List.
GOULD LIST
1
DATABASE
Gould Reg:
40001
Location ID:
0144
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
No scaling
Location ID: 0144 Value
459.21
Data Size
32-bit
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
DATABASE
GOULD LIST
2
Gould Reg:
40002
Location ID:
0167
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
No scaling
Location ID: 0167 Value
3
Data Size
Gould Reg:
50001
Location ID:
1429
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
2359.54 32-bit
No scaling Location ID: 1429 Value
50 Gould Reg:
Data Size
Location ID:
Off
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
0
0 16-bit
No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 8: 795x Gould List (Single Register Access)
Page 7C.6
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.6
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List: Gould Register Addressing The address of a Gould Register can be edited to be any number in the range 0 to 65535 (0x0000 to 0xFFFF), as long as it is unique in the Gould List. Attempts to enter an address outside this range will be responded to with an “** ERROR **” message, onscreen for a few seconds, and the original setting is then restored. When accessing more than one Gould Register at a time, the user-entered addresses must be in sequence (e.g. 1300, 1301, etc) and in consecutive entries in the Gould List. When accessing one Gould Register at a time, the addresses of consecutive entries in the Gould List do not have to be in sequence (e.g. 1300, 1400, etc.)
7C.1.7
Gould List: Parameters (Locations) To find the unique identification number of a parameter (location), navigate to the parameter screen and press the A-key to display the number.
7C.1.8
Gould List: Word Offset Word Offset settings in the Gould List are only applicable when using Multiple Register Access (rather than using Single Register Access). With Multiple Register Access, each Gould Register equates to a 16-bit segment of data. Therefore, you select the segment that will equate to the register. Word Offset 0 The Gould Register is mapped to the only 16-bit segment of a 16-bit parameter value or it is mapped to the first 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value. Word Offset 1 The Gould Register is mapped to the second 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value. Word Offset 2 The Gould Register is mapped to the third 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value. Word Offset 3 The Gould Register is mapped to the fourth 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value. Examples can be found in Section 7C.3. Note: With Single Register Access, each Gould Register equates to the whole value (all 16-bit segments).
7C.1.9
Gould List: Scaling Factor The scaling factor, 10, 100 or 1000, is effective only when accessing floating-point values. If selected for a Gould Register, the factor is applied, therefore converting it into a whole number (integer) before or transmitted or vice versa if being saved. If no scaling factor is to be applied, select “No Scaling” – this is the factory default for each Gould List entry. The purpose of this feature is for systems that cannot handle float conversions – they may ask for temperature x 100 (as an integer). You cannot get scaled values as a floating-point value. Practical examples can be found in Section 7C.3.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.7
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.10 MODBUS Message Exchanges The MODBUS Master can access more than one Gould Registers in one request. To access the registers, it must transmit a read or write MODBUS protocol message addressed to the 795x MODBUS slave. The slave will then reply with a MODBUS protocol message. Note: Write messages can be broadcast to all 795x MODBUS slaves with a MODBUS slave address of 0. Gould registers can be accessed through any serial port configured to be a MODBUS slave and the Gould List access is enabled by the port MODBUS feature parameter. (Full configuration details are in Section 7C.2.)
7C.1.11 Read Message Format (Single or Multiple Gould Register Access) Figure 9 shows the MODBUS function 03 command format. Practical examples, showing other Read messages and responses, can found in Section 7C.3. Slave Address
Function
G. Reg. (H.O.)
G. Reg. (L.O.)
# Of Reg. (H.O.)
# Of Reg. (L.O.)
EC
LRC
06
03
9C
41
00
02
X
X
Figure 9: MODBUS message for reading from Gould Registers 40001 and 40002 Slave Address – On the 795x, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default) Function – 03 (0x03) is the function code for MODBUS read messages. G. Reg. – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal) # of Reg. – Specify number of Gould Registers to be read, e.g. 0002 (Decimal and Hexadecimal) EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
7C.1.12 Write Message Format (Single or Multiple Gould Register Access) Figure 10 shows the MODBUS function 16 command format. Practical examples, showing other Write messages and responses, can found in Section 7C.3.
Slave Add.
Funct.
G. Reg. (H.O.)
G. Reg. (L.O.)
06
10
9C
41
Quantity
00
02
Byte Count 04
16-bit data
(H.O.)
(L.O.)
16-bit data
(H.O.)
(L.O.)
EC
LRC
X
X
Figure 10: MODBUS message for writing to Gould Registers 40001 and 40002 Slave Address – On the 795x, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default) Function – 16 (0x10) is the function code for MODBUS write messages. Gould Register – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal) Quantity – Specify number of Gould Registers to be write to, e.g. 2 for 40001 (0x9C41) and 40002 (0x9C42) Byte Count – Specify number of bytes of data e.g. 0x02 for a 16-bit value, 0x04 for two 16-bit values, etc. 16-bit data – Up to fifty 16-bit IEEE values, dependent on Quantity field EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
Page 7C.8
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.1.13 Serial port parameters (locations) Each serial port has parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications. The 795x Flow Computer has support for both Single Register Access and Multiple Register Access. Each serial port is configured to allow one type of register access. Multiple Register Access: With this type of access, each Gould Register equates to a single 16-bit segment. Therefore, to read a 32bit value, two Gould Registers are required. Similarly, to read a 64-bit value, four Gould Registers are required. Single Register Access: With this type of access, each Gould Register equates to all the 16-bit segments required for a full value. Therefore, to read a 16-bit value, 32-bit value or 64-bit value, only one Gould Register is required. <MODBUS Word Order> The 795x Flow Computer provides the facility to choose the Word (double-byte) ordering of data fields in MODBUS messages. This feature is individually selectable for each serial port. Figure 11 shows the effect of the Default Order option and Word Swap option for single-precision (32-bit) and double-precision (64-bit) values. For 64-bit values, the second double Word is the most significant. SINGLE PRECISION
Default Order
Word Swap
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
42 C2
3F 0D
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
3F 0D
42 C2
DOUBLE PRECISION
Default Order
Word Swap
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
WORD '3' (16 Bits)
WORD '4' (16 Bits)
40 58
47 E1
9B 90
EA 9E
WORD '4' (16 Bits)
WORD '3' (16 Bits)
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
EA 9E
9B 90
47 E1
40 58
Figure 11: Word Ordering Examples
Floating-point values (e.g. flow rates) are made available as a 32-bit IEEE (single-precision) number or as a 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number. The precision level is individually selectable for each serial port.
Each incremental total can be read as two separate 32-bit integers or as a single floating-point value, depending on the option selected. The format is individually selectable for each serial port. When a flow total value (e.g. 2983.54) is to be read as a 32-bit integer, there is one parameter (location) with the “2953” and another parameter (location) with the “54”. When a flow total value (e.g. 2983.54) is to be read as a floating-point value, there is just one parameter (location) with the “2953.54”.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.9
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions Follow these instructions to configure and activate 16-bit communications on the 795x Flow Computer: 1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers and MODBUS Maste device are already interconnected to form a 4 MODBUS network. (Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring is in the main Chapter 7.) 2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the MODBUS network. (2c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 2. (Some localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.) 3. Configure entries in the Gould List (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”MODBus slave”> (3b) Select this menu: <“Gould list”> (3c) Configure each list entry, as guided in Table 3. Start with configuring Entry 1, then configure Entry 2, and so forth. Avoid skipping an entry, since the list is terminated by a location ID of 0. (End of instructions) The MODBUS Master can read and write to the Gould Registers.
4
To avoid the risk of flow computer restarts, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports before establishing the physical connections.
Page 7C.10
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Table 2: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Parameter * (Database Location) Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 *** Port Modbus mode P Modbus word order
Instructions and Comments Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus slave”.
Factory Default Setting “MODBUS slave”
Select a rate that will be the same for the MODBUS Master device and all 795x MODBUS slave devices. Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network). If unsure, keep the factory default.
“19200” “8 bits none 1 stop”
Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable supports “CTS/RTS”. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
“None”
Select signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
“RS 232”
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices. (If unsure, keep the factory default.) Select an option that is compatible with the Master device. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
P MODB slave add
Edit the Base Slave Address of this slave.
P Modbus features
Select the multiple-choice option that includes “Gou“ (Gould)
P long reg access
Choose single or multiple Gould Register access.
“RTU” “Modbus default” 1 “None” “Multiple registers”
P MODB total format
Select how total values are to be transmitted – either 32-bit integers or as a single/double-precision floating-point value.
“32-bit integer”
P MODB precision
Select the accuracy of all floating-point values for this serial port: single-precision (32-bits) or double-precision (64-bits).
“Single”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port. ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”. *** Parameter is not applicable to Serial Port One since it is for RS-232 devices only. Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
Table 3: Gould List Entry Parameters (Locations) Parameter * (Database Location) List1 Gould reg List1 mapped loc **
Instructions and Comments Enter a numeric address for the Gould Register e.g. 40001. Enter the unique identification number (Loc ID) of the parameter (location) to be mapped to the Gould Register.
List1 Word Offset
If using multiple register access and mapped parameter has a 32-bit/64-bit value, select the 16-bit segment of the value to be accessed.
List1 scale factor
If the 16-bit data is a floating-point number, it can be scaled into an integer (x10, x100 or x1000) just before transmission to the MODBUS Master. Similarly, it can be de-scaled before saving it.
Factory Default Setting 0 Off “Word Offset 0”
“No scaling”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the list entry. ** Entering a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded to with a “** ERROR **” message appearing briefly, and the original setting is then restored. Abbreviation used: “reg” = register, “loc” = location
(May 2003)
Page 7C.11
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3 Guided Examples This section is a practical guide to accessing Gould Registers of a 795x MODBUS Slave through the Gould List feature. What to do here: 1.
Ensure that the 795x Flow Computer is suitably configured as guided in Section 7C.2.
2.
Follow examples from Table 4 or Table 5. In the examples, MODBUS message sequences aim to show the how to read from Gould Registers and write to Gould Registers. Every example features an objective, an action and a result Objective(s) For an example, the objective could be to read a 16-bit parameter value. Action(s) Actions consist of one or more MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device. Expected responses from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values. Table 6 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the message. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. Note: Values are communicated in base units, which may not be the same as the displayed units – see Table 7.
3.
Experiment Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements.
Table 4 : Summary of examples (reading from Gould Registers) Example Number
Totals format
Precision
Word Order
Register Access
Scaling
Access Beyond Value
Consecutive Registers
Page
1
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
14
2
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
No
15
3
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
Yes
Yes
16
4
X
Single
Default
Multiple
x100
No
Yes
17
5
X
Single
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
18
6
X
Double
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
19
7
X
Double
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
20
8
Integer
Single
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
21
9
Integer
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
22
10
Fl. point
Double
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
23
Table 5: Summary of examples (writing to Grould Registers) Example Number
Totals format
Precision
Word Order
Register Access
Scaling
Access Beyond Value
Consecutive Registers
Page
1
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
24
2
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
25
3
X
Single
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
26
4
X
Single
Default
Multiple
x100
No
Yes
27
5
X
Single
Default
Single
x100
No
Yes
28
Page 7C.12
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Table 6: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Response Sequences Abbreviation Slv.
Meaning Base Slave Address +5. It is 0x06 for the examples.
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
Function code. E.g. 03 = Read Gould Register(s)
Reg. Cnt
Quantity of Gould Registers
Reg. ID
Gould Register number
D.C.
Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
Data
Data byte
EC & LRC
Calculated checksum, which is two bytes at the end
Table 7: Base units of measurement Category
(May 2003)
Base units
Temperature
Deg. C
Pressure
bar abs
Differential pressure
mbar
Density
kg/m
Frequency
Ps
3
Fraction
Time
seconds
Flow factor
pulse/m
Volume total
m
Base volume total
std m
3
3
Mass Total
kg
Energy Total
MJ
3
Mass rate
g/min
Volume rate
m3/hour
Energy rate
MJ/hour
Energy value (mass)
MJ/kg
Energy value (volume)
MJ/m3
Base volume rate
Std m3/hour
Length
m
Dynamic viscosity
cP
Absolute zero
Deg.C
Velocity
m/s
Orifice Coeffient
PPM/Deg.C
Page 7C.13
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.1
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 1 Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves reading two Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to get the two lots of 16-bit data. Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 D.C.
42 Data
0C Data
00 Data
00 Data
58 EC
88 LRC
Result x 420C0000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 420C is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300 and 0000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301
Page 7C.14
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.2
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 2 Note: This is an error response example, which is a variation of Example 1. Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers No
This is similar to example 1, except Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive entries in the Gould List. Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 795x Flow Computer.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Multiple Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 40001 = 0144 (Corrected volume flow rate) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
83 Fn.
02 D.C.
71 Chk
30 sum
Result x An error reponse (code 83) is given since Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.15
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.3
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 3 Note: This is an error response example, which is a variation of Example 1. Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value Yes
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This is similar to Example 1, except there is an attempt to read beyond Gould Register 1300 and 1301 by using the Word Offset 2 option and Word Offset 3 option. Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 795x Flow Computer, since the parameter does not have a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 2” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 3” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response
06
83
02
71
30
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
EC
LRC
Result x
Page 7C.16
An error response (code 83) is given since parameter does not have a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.4
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 4 Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling Yes
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example, which is a variation of Example 1, involves reading scaled (x100) values from two Gould Registers 1300 and 1301.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “Int (value x 100)”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “Int (value x 100)”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 D.C.
00 Data
00 Data
0D Data
AC Data
88 EC
1E LRC
Result x 00000DAC is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3500.0 (in base units of qC)
(May 2003)
Page 7C.17
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.5
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 5 Objectives: x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666), a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value.
x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666) and Corrected Volume Rate (loc. ID: 0144), which both have 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point values. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly, and unlike previous examples, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get the full value (all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves: x Reading the whole temperature value from a single Gould Register – Action 1 x Reading whole values of temperature and flow rate from two consecutive Gould Registers – Action 2 Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, single-precision. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1: = 1305 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “No scaling” Gould List Entry 2: = 1306 = 0144 (Meter temperature) = “No scaling” Action 1 Read whole temperature value from Gould Register 1305 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
19 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
54 EC
B6 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 DC
42 Data
0C Data
00 Data
00 Data
58 EC
88 LRC
Result x The data, 420C0000, is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35) x 0000 is the final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0) Action 2 Read Gould Registers 1305 and 1306 Transmit
06
03
05
19
00
02
54
B6
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 DC
42 Data
0C Data
00 Data
00 Data
42 Data
20 Data
00 Data
00 Data
D3 EC
F8 LRC
Result x The data, 420C0000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part. 35); the 0000 that follows final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0) x The data, 42200000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour) x 4220 is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1306; the 0000 is the other segment
Page 7C.18
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.6
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 6 Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) which has a 64-bit (double-precision) floatingpoint value. Totals format X
Precision Double
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Scaling None
Access Beyond Value No
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves reading four Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to get four lots of 16-bit data. Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access and doubleprecision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1302 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 2” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 4:
= 1303 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 3” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 D.C.
40 Data
41 Data
80 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
EC
LRC
Result x 404180000000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 4041 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300, 8000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301, and so forth.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.19
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.7
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 7 Objectives: x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666), a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666) and Corrected Volume Rate (loc. ID: 0144), which both have 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point values. Totals format X
Precision Double
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly for this example, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all four 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves: x Reading the whole temperature value from one Gould Register – Action 1 x Reading whole values of temperature and flow rate from two consecutive Gould Registers – Action 2 Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, double-precision. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1: = 1305 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “No scaling” Gould List Entry 2: = 1306 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “No scaling” Action 1: Read whole temperature value from Gould Register 1305 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
19 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
54 EC
B6 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 DC
40 Data
41 Data
80 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
C5 EC
57 LRC
Result x 4041 8000 0000 0000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x The first 8 bytes of data, 4041 8000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35) x The last 8 bytes of data, 0000 0000, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0) Action 2: Read Gould Registers 1305 and 1306 Transmit
06
03
05
19
00
02
14
B7
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
10 DC
40 Data
41 Data
80 Data
00 Data
00 Data
Response Meaning
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
60 EC
99 LRC
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
40 Data
44 Data
Result x 4041 8000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 4042 0000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour)
Page 7C.20
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.8
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 8 Objectives: x
Read Indicated Volume total in 32-bit integer format. Totals format Integer
Word Order Default
Precision X
Register Access Multiple
Scaling None
Access Beyond Value No
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly for this example, Multiple Register Access is used – more than one Gould Register is required to get a full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is required. This example involves reading two whole integer values, requiring four Gould Registers. Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1 and Multiple Register Access. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1400 = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) * = “Word Offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1401 = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) * = “Word Offset 1” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1402 = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) * = “Word Offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 4:
= 1403 = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) * = “Word Offset 1” = “No scaling”
* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory. Action 1: Read Gould Registers 1400 - 1403 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
78 ID
00 Reg.
04 Cnt.
C5 EC
6B LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
10 DC
45 Data
09 Data
A0 Data
00 Data
3F Data
7D Data
0B Data
5C Data
51 EC
09 LRC
Result x x x x
3 4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m ) The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0) 3 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m ) The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for volumetric values.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.21
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.9
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 9 Objectives: x
Read Indicated Volume total in 32-bit integer format. Totals format Integer
Word Order Default
Precision X
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves reading two whole integer values from two Gould Registers. Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1 and Single Register Access. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1400 = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) * = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1401 = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) * = “No scaling”
* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory. Action 1: Read whole value from Gould Registers 1400 and 1401 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
78 ID
00 Reg.
02 Cnt.
45 EC
69 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 DC
45 Data
09 Data
A0 Data
00 Data
3F Data
7D Data
0B Data
5C Data
51 EC
09 LRC
Result x x x x
4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m3) The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0) 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m3) The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for the value.
Page 7C.22
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.10 Gould List Read Access: Example 10 Objectives: x
Read Indicated Volume total (Loc. ID: 0167) as a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value. Totals format Fl. Point
Precision Double
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Scaling None
Access Beyond Value No
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all four 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves reading the whole double-precision value from one Gould Register. Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, double-precision. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1: = 1400 = 0167 (Indicated Volume total) = “No scaling” Action 1: Read whole value from Gould Register 1400 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
78 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
05 EC
68 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 DC
40 Data
A7 Data
4F Data
14 Data
44 Data
35 Data
79 Data
DD Data
84 EC
52 LRC
Result x x x
3
40A7 4F14 4435 79DD is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2983.54 (in base units of m ) The first 8 bytes of data, 40A7 4F14, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2983) The last 8 bytes of data, 4435 79DD, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the fractional part to 8 decimal places)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for the value.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.23
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.11 Gould List Write Access: Example 1 Objective: Write 35.5 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) floatingpoint value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves writing to two consecutive Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to write two separate 16-bit values (35 and 5). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Write “35” (420E, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1300. Write “5” (0000, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1301 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
02
04
42
0E
00
00
A3
CF
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
00 Reg.
02 Cnt.
00 EC
B7 LRC
Result x
Page 7C.24
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.12 Gould List Write Access: Example 2 Objectives: 1. Write 50.2 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. 3 2. Write 3600.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves writing to four consecutive Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to write four 16-bit values (50, 2, 3600 and 0). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1302 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 4:
= 1303 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Write “50” (4248 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300 and “2” (CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301 Write “360” (43B4 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1302 and “0” (0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1303 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
04
08
42
48
CC
CD
43
B4
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
00 Reg.
04 Cnt.
80 EC
B5 LRC
Transmit
00
00
E9
1E
Meaning
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
Result x
(May 2003)
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 4 (0x04) indicate success.
Page 7C.25
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.13 Gould List Write Access: Example 3 Objectives: 1. Write 50.2 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. 3 2. Write 3600.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This is a variation of Example 2. Importantly, Single Register Access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves writing whole single-precision values to two Gould Registers.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1: = 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “No scaling” Gould List Entry 2: = 1301 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “No scaling” Action Write “50.2” (4248CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300 Write “360.0” (43B40000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
02
08
42
48
CC
CD
43
B4
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
00 Reg.
02 Cnt.
00 EC
B7 LRC
Transmit
00
00
09
01
Meaning
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
Result x
Page 7C.26
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.14 Gould List Write Access: Example 4 Objectives: 3 1. Write 36000.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling x100
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Multiple Register Access is to be used, two Gould Registers are required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. two 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is required. This example involves writing whole single-precision values – 36000.0 and 0.0 – to two Gould Registers.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Multiple Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 0” = “Int (value x 100)”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Actions 1. Write “36000.0” (470C in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1300 2. Write “0.0” (A000 in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1301 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
02
04
47
0C
A0
00
7A
C3
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response
06
10
05
14
00
02
00
B7
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Result x
(May 2003)
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 02 (0x02) indicates success.
Page 7C.27
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.15 Gould List Write Access: Example 5 Objectives: 3 1. Write 36000.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling x100
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Single Register Access is to be used, only one Gould Register is required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is not used. This example involves writing a whole single-precision value, 36000.0, to a Gould Register.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Single Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1: = 1300 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Int (value x 100)” Action Write “36000.0” (470C A000 0000 0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
01
04
47
0C
A0
00
7A
F0
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
40 EC
B6 LRC
Result x
Page 7C.28
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 0001 (0x01) indicates success.
(May 2003)
‘INTELLIGENT TRANSMITTER’ MONITOR (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM D)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D ‘Intelligent’ Transmitter Monitor 7D.1 Overview Chapter 7D is a guide to accessing process variables and diagnostic data from an ‘intelligent’ transmitter. The transmitter must have a communication port that supports RS-485 MODBUS® communications. Data read or written by the 795x Flow Computer can be in integer or floating-point format. When a floatingpoint value is read, it can be ‘forwarded’ to user-specified target parameter (database location). In addition to this forwarding process, a floating-point value can be automatically re-scaled into alternative units. ® The monitoring feature operates with ‘intelligent’ transmitters, such as the Micro Motion Series 2000 (multivariable) digital transmitter (liquid) and Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter (gas). ® In the case of the Micro Motion digital transmitter, it may require some pre-configuring. This is explained in Section 7D.2, along with a step-by-step procedure.
7D.1.1
Transmitter Monitor features Features: x
Monitor on/off selection switch
x
Polling method selection
x
Polling interval selection
x
Up to 32 registers for accessing 16-bit integer data of transmitter variables (and other data)
x
Up to 16 registers for accessing floating-point data of transmitter variables (and other data)
x
Forwarding of floating-point data to target parameters (database locations) with optional re-scaling *
x
Support for accessing registers in Message Blocks, as used by Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter
x
Input alarm, “Modb fail slv” raised upon occurrence of communication error or time-out ** * An Input alarm, “Modb bad target”, is raised if target parameter is not in fixed list of parameters (Table 1, page 7D-4). ** The alarm message includes slave identification number (1-16) and activity (“R” – read failed or “W” – write failed).
7D.1.2
Where is the Transmitter Monitor in the 795x menu system? Figure 1 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu, and includes the keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu. Apart from this menu, basic details of a 795x serial port must also be configured. The menus for this task are located in the COMMUNICATIONS menu. Note: The full setting-up procedure is in Section 7D.3.
x3
Configure
a x5
Other parameters
a
Communications
b
Modbus master
c
Transmitter monitor
a
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 2510 at time of publication.
Figure 1: Navigation to the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu
Page 7D-2
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7D.1.3
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
What is in the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu? Figure 2 shows a map of the menu and gives a briefing on the main elements. A more detailed explanation of each element follows the diagram, pages 7D-3 to 7D-6. Note: The full setting-up procedure is included in Section 7D.3.
Polling menu leading to screens for configuring poll method and polling interval.
Monitor on/off selection screen.
Poll method Poll interval
Monitor enable Disable Transmitter Monitor menu
Enable/disable Polling Registers Message blocks
b d
a
Further menus for detailing up to 32 Registers to handle variables with integer values.
c
a
Message Message Message Message x7
Message Message Message Message
block block block block
block block block block
1 2 3 4
29 30 31 32
Int registers Float registers b
x7
Further menus for detailing up to 16 Registers to handle variables with floating-point values.
Message blocks menu leading to screens for detailing up to 32 message blocks.
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 2510 at time of publication.
Figure 2: TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu map
Monitor On/Off Switch options are “Enable” or “Disable”. x
“Enable” – switches the Monitor on
x
“Disable” – switches the Monitor off
Monitor Polling Polling method options are “Optmize” (factory default) or “1 poll/reg”: x
“Optmize” – monitor will read registers at successive addresses in single poll
x
“1 poll/reg” – monitor will read a single register at a time, working through listed registers one-by-one
The factory default setting for the interval between polling is 2.0 seconds. This can be edited to be any period you require in whatever time units are selectable (seconds, minutes, hours, etc). If a value of 0.0 is entered, the polling is constant, but could affect cycle times.
(May 2003)
Page 7D-3
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Integer Register List Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail as follows: x
Value – If “Live”, integer value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
x
Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7D.1.4)
x
Register address – Enter full MODBUS register address of the transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
x
Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7D-5 for details)
x
Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7D-5 for details)
Note: Forwarding and re-scaling support is not offered for integer values.
Floating-point Register List Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail as follows: x
Value – If “Live”, raw value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
x
Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7D.1.4)
x
Register address – Enter the full MODBUS register address of a transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
x
Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7D-5 for details)
x
Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7D-5 for details)
x
Target location – Enter location ID of parameter (Table 1), to which is forwarded the raw/post-scaled value
x
Unit – Enter a code from Table 2 to identify units of Value. (If not listed, ignore and use Scale factor)
x
Scaling factor – If needed, enter a multiplier factor to scale the raw value into base units for forwarding. If Value is in units that are not listed in Table 2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, use Scaling factor to re-scale the forwarded value into base units. The setting for Unit is then ignored. If Value is in units that are listed in Table 2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, select only the correct unit code for Unit and ensure that Scaling factor is set to 0.
Table 1: Allowed target parameters (database locations) Parameter
Location ID
Line temperature
720
Line pressure
594
Prover inlet temperature
730
Prover outlet temperature
739
Prover inlet pressure
604
Prover outlet pressure
613
Density A temperature
749
Density B temperature
759
Header pressure
1543
Base density
354
Density A
288
Density B
306
Note: Attempts to enter any other location ID for Target Location will result in an input alarm, “MODB bad target”.
Page 7D-4
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
Table 2: Codes for Unit parameter Code
Temperature
Pressure
Density
0
“Deg.C” (B)
“bar abs” (B)
“g/cc”
1
“Deg.F”
“Pa abs”
“g/litre”
2
“Kelvin”
“kPa abs”
g/m3”
3
“Ohms”
“MPa abs”
“kg/cc”
4
“Deg.R”
“psia”
“kg/litre”
5
(No units)
“kg/cm2 abs”
“kg/m3” (B)
6
(No units)
“bar gauge”
“tonnes/m3”
7
(No units)
“Pa gauge”
“oz/in3”
8
(No units)
“kPA gauge”
“oz/ft3”
9
(No units)
“MPa gauge”
“oz/barrel”
10
(No units)
“psig”
“oz/gallon (UK)”
11
(No units)
“kg/c2 gauge”
“oz/gallon (US)” “lb/in3”
12
(No units)
(No units)
13
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/ft3”
14
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/barrel”
15
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/gallon (UK)”
16
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/gallon (US)”
17
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/ft3”
18
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/barrel”
19
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/gallon (UK”
20
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/gallon (US)”
(B) = Base units
Message Block List The Daniel Senior Sonic™ transmitter is different to the Micro Motion® transmitter because it has registers grouped into blocks. In the operation manual for models 3400/3410/3420 (April 1998), there are 32 blocks of registers. Each block has a particular purpose and features multiple registers. For example, there is a Message Block 12 that has registers 350 - 398 for reading 48 calculation results, all floating-point values. On the 795x Flow Computer, the 795x Message Block List will allow read or write access to any part of any Message Block on the Daniel transmitter. Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail an access: x
Start register – address of first register in Daniel Message Block (e.g. 350, for Message Block 12)
x
Byte size – enter size of Daniel Message Block in bytes: ((End register - Start register +1) x 2)
x
Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value
As an example, consider reading register 392 (flow rate) from Daniel Message Block 12. The details to set-up on the 795x Flow Computer are as follows: 1. Edit an entry in the Floating-point Register List x
Value – Ensure status is “Live” to see raw flow rate value from transmitter. *
x
Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7D.1.4)
x
Register address – Not applicable when accessing Daniel Message Blocks.
x
Message block – Select “Message Block 12”
x
Byte offset – Select register to be accessed, 392, by entering an offset = (392 - 350) x 2 = 84
x
Target location – Not applicable for this example.
x
Unit – Not applicable for this example.
x
Scaling factor – Not applicable for this example. * When a value is “Set”, the value is written to the register. However, if the register is read-only, as in this case, the Daniel transmitter will accept it but the register value will simply not be changed.
(May 2003)
Page 7D-5
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
2. Edit entry (record) 12 of Message Block List x
Start register – enter a value of 350
x
Byte size – enter size of message block in bytes = [398 - 350 + 1) x 2] = 98
x
Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value (see note below)
The correct setting for Number of items will depend on the configuration of the 795x serial port and the transmitter, in respect of data type and data size (16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits) of the value involved. When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and single-precision (32-bit) floating-point values, enter a value of 2 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value. When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and double-precision (64-bit) floating-point values, enter a value of 4 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value. When the 795x serial port is configured for single-register access, simply enter a value of 1.
7D.1.4
How to set-up a Slave Device record A part of setting up the Transmitter Monitor is selecting a Slave Device record. The Slave Device record informs the 795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Master) of what MODBUS slave it is going to be talking to and what communication settings it requires. Figure 3 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the SLAVE DEVICES menu, with the keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu. With the 795x Flow Computer acting as the MODBUS Master, as in this case, a MODBUS Slave Device record must be detailed as follows: x
Device function – Select “Transmitter” option.
x
Port number – Select the 795x serial port connected to the transmitter.
x
Slave device address – Enter numerical MODBUS address of the transmitter.
x
Word ordering – Keep “Modbus default” (factory default), unless transmitter requires Word swap.
x
Precision – Select “single” if accessing floating-point values that are 32-bit or “double” if 64-bit.
x
Slave MODBUS commands – Select ‘Offset’ or ‘Full’ addressing method, as appropriate for transmitter.
x
Other record details are not applicable.
Note: The setting-up procedure is included in Section 7D.3.
x3
Configure
a x5
Other parameters
a
Communications
b
Modbus master
c
Slave devices
c
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 2510 at time of publication.
Figure 3: Navigation to the SLAVE DEVICES menu Page 7D-6
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
7D.2 Preparing a Micro Motion® digital transmitter The following procedure is for preparing a Micro Motion® digital transmitter, Series 2000 multivariable, for ® MODBUS digital communications with the 795x Flow Computer. This procedure requires a serial cable, a RS232/RS485 converter and Micro Motion’s ProLink II TM transmitter configuration software on a PC. Note: Installation, operation, maintenance, etc. and safety instructions for the transmitter are outside the scope of this supplement and Flow Computer literature. For these details, refer to product literature of the transmitter. In addition, PC requirements for running ProLink II TM are outside the scope of this supplement and Flow Computer literature. Since the Series 2000 transmitter has a universal service port that supports other communication ® protocols, it must be configured to enable RS-485 MODBUS communications. In addition to enabling this protocol, the baud rate must be changed from 38400 to 19200. (The minimum for the transmitter is 1200.) Procedure: 1.
Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, interconnect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to terminals 7 and 8 on the transmitter via the converter. RS485 Converter Pin No: 2 7
MicroMotion Transmitter Terminal No: 7 8 TM
2.
Start the program ProLink II
3.
Using Prolink II, establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu. Select the options, as shown below, and then click on the "Connect" button. Note: This procedure might have to be repeated, as some RS232/RS485 converters do operate properly at the baud rate of 38400. Protocol: Select “Universal Service Port”. COM Port: Select “COM 1” (for PC port COM1).
4.
Using ProLink II, configure the communication port of the transmitter To do this: x x x x
Select the menu Select the tab labelled "485 Comm" Select the options shown below Click on “Apply” – repeat this until there are no error messages.
Protocol: Select “Modbus RTU” Parity: Select “None” Baud Rate: Select “19200” Stop Bits: Select “1”
(May 2003)
Page 7D-7
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
TM
5.
Terminate the program ProLink II
6.
Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, connect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to terminals 5 and 6 on the transmitter. RS485 Converter Pin No. 2 7
7.
MicroMotion Transmitter Terminal No. 6 5
TM
Using Prolink II , establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu. Select options, as shown below, and then click on the "Connect" button. Protocol: Modbus: Select “RTU (8-bit)” Baud Rate: Select “19200” Parity: Select “None” Connect via Address/Tag: Select “Address/Tag 1” COM Port: Select “COM 1” Stop Bits: Select “1” TM
8.
Using Prolink II , ensure process variables (e.g. Density) can be viewed through the menu
9.
Terminate the program ProLink II TM.
Page 7D-8
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
7D.3 Configuring the 795x Flow Computer Follow these instructions to configure and activate the Monitor on the 795x Flow Computer: 1. Using a suitable cable, connect a 795x serial port to the transmitter. Note: For details of the 795x serial ports that support RS485, refer to main Chapter 7. Serial Port Pin No. (Rx/Tx+) (Rx/Tx-)
Micro Motion® Transmitter Terminal No. 5 6
2. Program the 795x Flow Computer to be a MODBUS Master device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the transmitter. (2c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 3. (Some localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.) (2d) Navigate to: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”> (2e) Configure the parameters, as shown in Table 4. (2f) Navigate to this sub-menu: <”Slave devices”> (2g) Select a Device menu (e.g. <”Device 1>) (2h) Configure the parameters, as shown in Table 5. 3. Program and activate the Monitor on the 795x Flow Computer (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Transmitter monitor”> (3b) Configure the <Mon poll method> and <Mon poll interval> parameters. (3c) Navigate to the MESSAGE BLOCK menu (if applicable to transmitter) (3d) Select the first available message block menu (e.g. MESSAGE BLOCK 1 menu) (3e) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7D-5 (3f) Repeat Steps 3c to 3e for all other message blocks to be detailed (3g) Navigate to the INT REGISTERS menu (if applicable) (3h) Select the first available register menu (e.g. INT REGISTER 1 menu) (3i) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7D-4 (3j) Repeat Steps 3g to 3i for all other integer registers to be detailed (3k) Navigate to the FLOAT REGISTERS menu (if applicable) (3l) Select the first available register menu (e.g. FLOAT REGISTER 1 menu) (3m) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7D-4 (3n) Repeat Steps 3k to 3m for all other integer registers to be detailed (3o) Configure <Monitor enable> parameter to show “Enable” (End of instructions)
(May 2003)
Page 7D-9
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Table 3: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Parameter * (Database Location) Comms port owner Port Baud rate
Factory Default Setting
Instructions and Comments Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus master”.
“MODBUS slave”
Keep the factory default, unless transmitter using lower baud rates.
Port char format
Keep the factory default, unless transmitter using another format.
Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 ***
“19200” “8 bits none 1 stop”
Keep the factory default setting.
“None”
Select the RS485 signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
“RS 232”
Port Modbus mode
Keep the factory default setting.
“RTU”
P Modbus word order
Keep the factory default setting.
“Modbus default”
P MODB slave add
(Not applicable)
1
P Modbus features
(Not applicable)
P long reg access
Keep the factory default setting, unless using single-register access.
“None” “Multiple registers”
P MODB total format
(Not applicable)
“32-bit integer”
P MODB precision
(Not applicable)
“Single”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port. ** A 795x may perform unexpected ‘restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”. *** Parameter is not applicable to serial ports that support RS-232 only. Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
Table 4: MODBUS Master details Parameter (Database Location) Length of timeout
Factory Default Setting
Instructions and Comments Keep the factory default setting.
“0.5 second”
Keep the factory default setting. *
No of retries
“3 retries”
* If attempts to communicate with a slave are unsuccessful and exceed the maximum retries, an input alarm, “Modb failed slv”, is raised. The number of the slave 1 - 16 is given in the alarm message together with “R” (read failed) or “W” (write failed). Abbreviation used here: “No” = number
Table 5: Slave device details Parameter * (Database Location) Slave device func
Factory Default Setting
Instructions and Comments Select “Transmitter” from the multiple-choice list.
“None”
Slv device port no
Select the 795x serial port that is connected to the transmitter.
Slv device address
Edit the numeric MODBUS address of the transmitter.
Device word swap
Keep the factory default, unless transmitter requires Word swap
Device precision Slv modb commands
Keep the factory default, unless floating-point value is 64-bit. ®
Select “3,4, 16 addr offset” option for a Micro Motion Transmitter **
“Comms port 1” 0 “Modbus default” “Single” “3, 16 full addr”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the slave device being detailed. ** The “offset” option applies where transmitters automatically add an offset (e.g. 40000) to get a register address specified in a received MODBUS request. For transmitters that do not do this and require a full address, keep the factory default. Abbreviations used: “func” = function, “Slv” = Slave, “no” = number, “modb” = Modbus
Page 7D-10
(May 2003)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8. Alarms and Events 8.1 Alarms 8.1.1 Alarm types The types of alarms which are detected and recorded are: System alarms, caused by one or more of: x x x x x
Power failure Battery low (if a battery is fitted) Watchdog RAM checksum failure ROM checksum failure.
Input alarms, caused by one or more of: x x x
Failure of analogue inputs Failure of density transducers Incorrect data has been entered.
Limit alarms, caused by one or more of: x x
Limits which you have set Limits defined by the system.
These always result in two alarms - one when the change first happens and another when the system returns to its normal state.
8.1.2 Alarm indicators The 795x has three LED indicators (one each for Input, System and Limit Alarms) to show alarm status. Ö Each alarm indicator can be in one of three states: Off
The system is working normally.
Flashing
An alarm has been received but has not yet accepted.
On
been
All alarms has been accepted but not yet cleared. The conditions which caused the alarms in the first place may still exist.
SYSTEM ALARM
INPUT ALARM
LIMIT ALARM
Alarm indicators on the front panel
8.1.3 How alarms are received and stored When a new alarm is received, the appropriate indicator LED on the front panel starts flashing. If the indicator is already flashing because of a previous alarm, it continues to do so. If the indicator is already ON (steady), it starts to flash. Information about alarms is stored in two logs: x
The Alarm Status Display
This gives: (1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Alarm Log (2) an indication of the current status of the system.
x
The Historical Alarm Log
This contains an individual entry for every alarm stored in the log.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.1
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
The Historical Alarm Log can store up to 30 entries. When a new alarm is received, one of two things can happen: If the Historical Alarm Log is NOT full : An entry for the new alarm is simply added to the list. If the Historical Alarm Log is full : It depends on how the system is set up: Either (1) the oldest entry is deleted and the new one is added to the top of the list, or (2) the new alarm is discarded. In either case, the Status Display is updated automatically.
8.1.4 Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log Press the INFORMATION button If you want to examine the Alarm Status Display or the Historical Alarm Log. x
To bring up the Alarm Status Display, select the Alarm Summary option.
x
To bring up the first entry in the Historical Alarm Log, select the Alarm History option.
Figure 8.1.1: How to get to the alarm log
a
V
Alarm Summary Alarm History Event Summary Event History
The Alarm Status Display
b c
a
d
V
Summary: System Input Limit
Live New 03 04 00 00 00 04
(Typical display)
b c d
The Historical Alarm Log a b c
V
(Typical entry)
d
To other entries (if any) in the Historical Alarm Log
8.1.5 What the Alarm Status Display tells you A typical Alarm Status Display is shown in the Figure 8.1.1. The display lists, for each type of alarm (System, Input or Limit), the number of alarms which are live and new. x x
New alarms are alarms which have been received but not yet accepted. Live alarms are alarms which refer to conditions which are still active.
An example of a live alarm is when there is a fault in the system. This produces two alarms - one when the fault first occurs (‘ON’) and the second when it is put right (‘Off’). If only the first alarm of the pair has been received, the alarm is said to be live because the condition still exists.
Page 8.2
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
The number of live alarms tells you how many faults are still active. If you look at the Historical Alarm Log this tells you more about these faults.
8.1.6 What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you The diagram, below, shows the function of the relevant keys, and what is on the display. Figure 8.1.2: A typical entry in the log
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one. Alarm is either ‘ON’ (fault occurrence) or ‘OFF’ (fault cured). Type of alarm. Indicates alarm not accepted. Accept this alarm. Extra identifier to qualify the alarm description. Clear this alarm entry Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised. Identifies a metering-run (stream) (This feature is not applicable to single-stream software) 10. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one. 11. Scroll DOWN through the entries. 12. Description of alarm. 13. Scroll UP through the alarm entries. 14. Clear all alarm entries.
Each alarm has its own entry in the Historical Alarm Log which tells you: x
Type of alarm Whether it is a System alarm, Input alarm or Limit alarm and if the alarm is ‘on’ or ‘off’.
x
Extra identifier for the alarm This is not always shown for every entry but, where it is shown, it could be one of the following: x
A digit
This indicates the channel number on which the fault occurred.
x
A letter
H and L are for high and low Limit alarms, S is for a step alarm.
x
Date and time The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
x
Acceptance indication This is only shown for those entries which have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the indicator disappears.
x
Other entries indication An up-arrow symbol shows that there are entries before the present one, a down-arrow symbol shows that there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it is last, there is no down-arrow.
x
Description of the alarm This is an abbreviated description of the alarm and should be sufficient to help you trace the cause of the problem. A full list of all alarm messages and what they mean, are listed on page 8.3.
8.1.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log To clear all the alarm entries in the Historical log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical Alarm Log, zeroes the entries in the Status Display and sets all LED indicators to OFF.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.3
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.8 User-defined Alarms There are several types of user-defined alarms :User-defined Alarms
1st page
User Alarm Type 1: ‘Measurement’ Limit Alarm
8.4
User Alarm Type 2: ‘Comparison’ limit alarm
8.5
8.1.8.1 User Alarm Type 1: ‘Measurement’ Limit Alarm Two user limit alarms (nominated as ‘X’ and ‘Y’) are available for monitoring values of any parameters that do not have low/high alarm limits. Configuring involves:
1. Editing the identification number of the parameter (menu page) to be monitored by the 795x. 2. Editing values for the high and low limits. IMPORTANT NOTICE Mobrey recommend using the 795x set-up Wizard, “Alarms”, when configuring these alarms. Wizards are described in Chapter 10.
x
Configuration task (“Limit Alarm X” or “Limit Alarm Y”) Follow these instructions if you want to configure without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to the menu page of the parameter to be monitored and then press the ‘a’ soft-key once to display the parameter identification (ID) number. Make a note of that number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”> 3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.1 Table 8.1.1: User Limit Alarm Parameters Parameter *
Instructions and Comments
User alarm ptr.
x
Edit the value to be the ID number of the parameter to be monitored. The number will be replaced with the associated data name if the parameter exists. Note: Default setting is 0000 (“Off”) - not in use
User alarm HI lmt
x
‘Set’ the maximum allowed value for the selected parameter.
User alarm LO lmt
x
‘Set’ the minimum allowed value of the selected parameter.
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination.
x
Summary The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms is shown in this menu: <“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”>. Alarms ‘X’ and ‘Y’ each have a dedicated digit: ‘0’ = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted ‘1’ = Alarm active
Page 8.4
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.8.2 User Alarm Type 2: ‘Comparison’ limit alarm Two user comparison alarms (nominated as ‘A’ and ‘B’) are available for comparing values of two parameters and raising an alarm when the difference is outside a ‘Set’ limit. Configuring involves:
1. Editing the identification numbers of the two parameters to be monitored 2. Editing a value for the comparison limit
IMPORTANT NOTICE Mobrey recommend using the 795x set-up Wizard, “Alarms”, when configuring these alarms. Wizards are described in Chapter 10.
x
Configuration task (“Comparison Alarm A” or “Comparison Alarm B”) Follow these instructions if you want to configure without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to the menu pages of the two parameters to be compared. Use the ‘a’ soft-key to display the parameter identification (ID) number. Make a note of each ID number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”> 3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.2
Table 8.1.2: User Comparison Alarm Parameters Parameter *
Instructions and Comments x
Edit the value with the ID number of the first parameter to be used in the comparison. The number will be replaced with the associated parameter name (if the parameter exists). Note: Default setting is 0000 (“Off”) - not in use
x
Edit the value line with in the ID number of the second parameter to be used in the comparison. The number will be replaced with the associated parameter name (if parameter exists).
Comp alarm ptr1
Comp alarm ptr2
Note: Default setting is “Off”. (i.e. not in use) x Comp alarm limit
‘Set’ the maximum allowed difference between values of the two parameters without needing to raise an alarm. Note: Default limit is 0 – feature is switched off
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination
x
Summary The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are shown in this menu:<“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”> Alarms ‘A’ and ‘B’ each have a dedicated digit: ‘0’ = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted ‘1’ = Alarm active
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.5
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.9 Alarm Logger Output (ALO) Status Outputs 1 to 5 are dedicated to indicating the presence of active alarms. By default, the ALO is enabled and pre-configured as shown in Table 8.1.3. Table 8.1.3: ALO Default Set-up Digital Output
Default Function
Status Output 1
x
Indicate System Alarms only
Status Output 2
x
Indicate Limit Alarms only *
Status Output 3
x
Indicate Input Alarms only
Status Output 4
x
Indicate User Limit Alarm ‘X’
Status Output 5
x
Indicate User Limit Alarm ‘Y’
* User Comaprison Alarms ‘A’ and ‘B’ are also indicated
ALO Re-configuration Options ALO use of the first three Status Outputs can be re-configured at any time by changing the selected alarm grouping. Parameters for making a change are found within the menu system. To change the alarm grouping…
1. 2.
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”Alarms”>/<”Alarm logger”> Locate parameters as identified in Table 8.1.4 and change the alarm grouping option to suit your requirements. Available options are summarised in Table 8.1.5. Table 8.1.4: ALO Configuration Parameters Parameter (as displayed)
Purpose of Configuration Parameter
Alarm output 1
x
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 1
Alarm output 2
x
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 2
Alarm output 3
x
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 3
Table 8.1.5: Alarm Grouping Options Option
Purpose of option
None
x
Do not indicate presence of any alarms *
System
x
Indicate System alarms only
Input
x
Indicate Input alarms only
Limit
x
Indicate Limit alarms only
Any
x
Include System, Input and Limit alarms.
System Input
x
Indicate System alarms and Input alarms
System Limit
x
Indicate System alarms and Limit alarms
Input Limit
x
Indicate Input alarms and Limit alarms
* This does not free up the digital (status) output for another function
Notes: 1. For further information on Digital (Status) Outputs, refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix ‘C’. 2. The presence of active User-defined Comparison Alarms (‘A’, ‘B’, etc.) are indicated by Status Outputs nominated to include Limit Alarms.
Page 8.6
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.10 Alarm Message List * Alarm can be cleared immediately Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
4x5 Oil dens fail
Input
Oil density (by 4x5 referral) can not be calculated. Check all associated parameters. Extra Message Character: “P” = Prime measurement, “M” = Metering measurement
5167 orif dia lmt
Limit
Orifice diameter is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
5167 pipe dia lmt
Limit
Pipe diameter is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Alarm total limit
Limit
Alarm condition total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
API Oil dens fail
Input
Oil density (by API referral) can not be calculated. Check all associated parameters. Extra Message Character: “P” = Prime measurement, “M” = Metering measurement
Archive format *
System
Archive formatting operation unsuccessful. Check all size associated parameters.
Archive too small *
System
Insufficient space for archiving. Check all size associated parameters.
Base BSW limit
Limit
BSW % at base conditions is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Base den API fail
Input
API referral calculation for base density was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11. Extra Message Character: “F” = Forward referral stage, “R” =Reverse referral stage
Base dens limit
Limit
The Base Density measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Battery failed
System
What the “ON” alarm message means
Configuration has been lost. Replace the battery as instructed in Chapter 14.
Battery low
System
Brooks:10 run lmt *
Limit
Maximum number of prove runs restored to 10 runs - the maximum allowed for Brooks Compact Proving
BSW comp limit
Limit
(A#B) The calculated difference between BSW measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Comparison limit
Limit
General user-defined limit alarm. Extra Message Character: “A” = User Alarm ‘A’, “B” = User Alarm ‘B’
Database corrupt *
System
Corruption occurred but has been fixed automatically. Always seen when software has just been installed. Check all configured parameters If seen at any other time.
DBM bad chksum *
System
There has been an unrecoverable memory checksum failure. The Flow Computer will need to be re-configured. Extra Message Character: ‘V’ = Volatile (RAM), ‘N’ = Non-volatile (FRAM)
DBM bad triple *
System
Corruption of the database in a memory area occurred but there has been an automatic recovery. (‘0’ is often seen after installing new release of same software version) Extra Message Character: ‘0’ = RAM copy, ‘1’=1st. non-volatile memory copy, ‘2’=2nd. Non-volatile memory copy, ‘3’ = Padding, ‘!’ = Beyond repair / Re-configure Flow Computer
Dens 4x5 fail
Input
Metering Density by 4x5 matrix referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Dens API fail
Input
Metering Density by API referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Density cal fail
System
Dens comp limit
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Limit
Replace the battery as instructed in Chapter 14. (Configuration is safe for moment)
Calibration of Time Period Input unsuccessful. Extra Message Character: = Time Period Input ‘1’, “2” = Time Period Input ‘2’, etc.
“1”
(A#B) The calculated difference between density measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Page 8.7
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…)
* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
Dens press limit
Limit
‘Density loop’ pressure measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Dens temp A limit
Limit
‘Density loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘A’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Dens temp B limit
Limit
‘Density loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘B’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Dens txdr calc
Input
A density (transducer) measurement channel value has a “Fail” status. Check the physical connections with the transducer and use the “Health check” menu to monitor the associated Time Period Input. Extra Message Character: “A” = Density ‘A’, “B” = Density ‘B’
Dens txdr limit
Limit
The prime density measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Diff press limit
Limit
Differential pressure measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
What the “ON” alarm message means
DLG list non-real *
Input
Archive parameter lists only allow parameters with floating-point values.
Dynamic visc calc
Input
A dynamic viscosity measurement channel value has a “Fail” status. Check the physical connections with the transducer and use the “Health check” menu to monitor the associated Time Period Input. Extra Message Character: “A” = Dynamic Viscosity ‘A’, “B” = Dynamic viscosity ‘B’
Dyn visc compare
Limit
(A#B) The calculated difference between measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Dyn visc limit
Limit
Dynamic viscosity measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Gross std vol lmt
Limit
Gross Standard Volume flow rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Gross vol limit
Limit
Gross Volume flow rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
GSV total limit
Limit
Gross Std. Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
GV total limit
Limit
Gross Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
HART input fail
Input
A HART Input parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving information from a HART protocol transmitter. Check the HART network loop connection and monitor the HART Input using the “Health Check” menu. Extra Message Character: “1” = HART Input ‘1’, “2” = HART Input ‘2’, … , “8” = HART Input ‘8’
HSL addr conflict
System
Ind std vol limit
Limit
Indicated Standard Volume flow rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
ISO5167 beta lmt
Limit
Beta ratio is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard.
ISO5167 ReD limit
Limit
Reynolds number is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard.
ISV total limit
Limit
Indicated Standard Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
Page 8.8
High Speed List address conflict due to a HSL block overlapping. Extra Message Character: “A” = Block ‘A’, “B” = Block ‘B’, … , “F” = Block ‘F’
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…)
* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
IV total limit
Limit
Indicated Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
Kin visc compare
Limit
(A#B) The calculated difference between measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Kin visc limit
Limit
Kinematic viscosity measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
mA input cal fail
Input
Calibration of mA (Analogue) Input unsuccessful. Extra Message Character: = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
mA input failed
Input
mA input no cal
System
What the “ON” alarm message means
“1”
An Analogue Input channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving valid signals from a loop-powered transmitter. Check physical connections and monitor the input using the “Health Check” menu. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’ Analogue Input not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
“1”
mA out cal fail
System
Calibration of mA (Analogue) Output unsuccessful. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Output ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Output ‘2’, etc.
mA output failed
Output
An Analogue Output channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. There is a hardware problem with the Flow Computer. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Output ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Output ‘2’, etc.
mA output no cal
System
Analogue Output not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Output ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Output ‘2’, etc.
Mass limit
Limit
Mass rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Mass total limit
Limit
Mass flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
Mass water% limit
Limit
Percentage of ‘water’ in oil/water mix (by mass) is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Meter BSW limit
Limit
BSW % at metering conditions is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Meter press limit
Limit
The metering pressure measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Meter temp limit
Limit
The metering temperature measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
MODB slave clash
System
Serial Port configuration conflicts with the configuration of another port Extra Message Character: “1” = Serial Port ‘1’, “2” = Serial Port ‘2’, etc.
Oil SG limit
Limit
Specific gravity of the metered oil is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Orif ISO5167 lmt
Limit
The ISO 5167 Standard calculation was unsuccessful. Check all Orifice System parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Peer target fail
System
PID input error
Input
Peer-to-peer communication failed. Extra Message Character: <MODBUS Slave device number> Set-up problem. Check the indicated PID configuration parameter. Extra Message Character: “I” = PID Input parameter value must be a floating-point number “S” = PID Setpoint parameter value must be a floating-point number.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.9
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…) Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
Power fail *
System
Prime BSW limit
Limit
Prover abort
* Alarm can be cleared immediately What the “ON” alarm message means
The Flow Computer has been without electrical power for a period of time. Examine the date and time stamp of the “ON” and “OFF” messages for the outage period. The prime BSW measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit Proving session stopped. Extra Message Character: “I” = Initialisation problem, “I” = Pre-run problem, ”L” = Leak detected “c” = All prove runs completed, “S” = Stream information missing ”s” = Stabilisation not achieved, “p” = Target Plenum pressure is outside alarm limits
Prover in press
Limit
The pressure at the Prover inlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover in temp
Limit
The temperature measurement value for fluid at the Prover inlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover limit
Limit
Proving parameter out of limits. Extra Message Character: “F” = Flow rate, “T” = Temperature, “P” = Pressure, “M” = Meter factor “e” = Proving Error (Missing Pulses)
Prover out temp
Limit
The temperature measurement value for fluid at the Prover outlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover out press
Limit
The pressure at the Prover outlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover timeout
Limit
‘Displacer’ failed to reach a detector switch within a programmed (SET) time limit. Extra Message Character: “S” = Start sensor, “E” = End sensor
Prt input failed
Input
An Analogue Input channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving valid signals from a RTD/PRT field transmitter. Check physical connections and monitor the input using the “Health Check” menu. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
Prt no cal
System
Analogue Input not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
“1”
Pulse out limit
Limit
Qty batch overrun
System
Batch has overrun by an amount that has exceeded a ‘programmed (SET) limit.
Qty batch running
System
An attempt has been made to start a different type of batch whilst a quantity-based batch is in progress. Extra Message Character: ”T” = Timed batch, “M” = Manual triggered batch
Qty batch start
System
Quantity batch could not be started. Extra Message Character: “F” = Flow not halted. There must be no flow before starting Flow Delivery Control, “R” = Quantity batch already running
Retro calc fail
System
Retrospective calculation attempted but was unsuccessful Extra Message Character: ”F” = Batch archive empty or record not found, “U” = Update to existing record failed, “W” = Unable to write new record to batch archive
SG limit
Limit
Specific gravity measurement is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
SpEqu1 calc fail
Input
Incorrect set-up of Special Equation ‘1’ has caused it to fail.
SpEqu2 calc fail
Input
Incorrect set-up of Special Equation ‘2’ has caused it to fail.
Page 8.10
The frequency of pulses issued through a Pulse Output has reached the maximum rate. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…)
* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
StdVol water% lmt
Limit
% of ‘water’ in oil/water mix (by standard volume) is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Strainer blocked *
Input
Blockage detected (by Live Input). Check Strainer.
Timeperiod failed
Input
A Periodic Time Input channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving frequency signals from a transmitter. Check physical connections and monitor the input using the “Health Check” menu.
What the “ON” alarm message means
Extra Message Character: “1” = Time Period Input ‘1’, “2” = Time Period Input ‘2’, etc. Timeperiod glitch *
Input
A series of anomalous transmitter readings has occurred. Adjust the setting of the glitch filter parameter that is associated with the Density or Viscosity transducer.
Timeperiod no cal
System
Periodic Time Input not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Time Period Input ‘1’, “2” = Time Period Input ‘2’, etc.
Turb err-dev calc
Input
An ‘error percentage’ could not be obtained from the linearisation of a calibration curve. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
Turb freq limit
Limit
A calculated pulse frequency has exceeded the programmed (SET) upper limit Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
Turb K-factor err
Input
A ‘K Factor’ could not be obtained from the linearisation of a calibration curve profile. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
Turb limit failed
Limit
Missing pulse count has exceeded a programmed (SET) upper limit.
Turb pcent failed
Input
The percentage of missing pulses in respect of counted pulses during a cycle has exceeded a programmed (SET) upper limit.
Extra Message Character: “1” = Pulse Input ‘1’, “2” = Pulse Input ‘2’, etc.
Extra Message Character: “1” = Pulse Input ‘1’, “2” = Pulse Input ‘2’, etc. Turbine no cal
System
Turb visc curve
Input
A ‘K Factor’ could not be obtained from the linearisation of a calibration curve profile. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
User alarm
Limit
General user-defined limit alarm. Extra Message Character: “X” = User Alarm ‘X’, “Y” = User Alarm ‘Y’
Valve failed
Input
No response from a valve controller. Extra Message Character: “1” = Prover Inlet, “2” = Prover Outlet, “3” = Stream Block, “4” = 4-way Diverter
Valve timeout
Input
No response from a valve controller within expected time limit. Extra Message Character: “1” = Prover Inlet, “2” = Prover Outlet, “3” = Stream Block, “4” = 4-way Diverter
Visc 4x5 fail
Input
Metering Kinematic Viscosity by 4x5 matrix referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Visc ASTM fail
Input
Metering Kinematic Viscosity by ASTM D341 referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Visc dens calc
Input
A ‘Viscosity loop’ density measurement channel value has a “Fail” status. Check the physical connections with the Viscosity transducer and configuration parameters. Use the “Health check” facility menu to monitor the associated Time Period Input. Extra Message Character: “A” = Viscosity Loop Density ‘A’, “B” = Viscosity Loop Density ‘B’
Visc density
Input
The prime ‘Viscosity Loop’ measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Visc temp A limit
Limit
‘Viscosity loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘A’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Visc temp B limit
Limit
‘Viscosity loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘B’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
A Pulse (Turbine) Input is not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Pulse Input ‘1’, “2” = Pulse Input ‘2’, etc.
Page 8.11
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.2 Events 8.2.1 Introduction to 795X events The 795X keeps a record of important system changes in an Event Log. This is very similar, in concept, to the alarm log, but the nature of the information kept is different. Event details that can be viewed in the event log: x x
Changes to the status of pre-determined† data that affects calculations Changes to the value of data pre-determined data that affects calculations.
Event details that can be seen only in a printout of the event log: x x
Messages from hardware diagnostics Download of a configuration completed.
8.2.2 Event indicators Unlike alarms, there are no event indicators on the front panel of the 795x.
8.2.3 How events are received and stored Information about events is stored in two logs: x
Event Status Display
This gives: (1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Event Log (2) an indication of the current status of the system.
x
Historical Event Log
This contains an individual entry for every event stored in the log.
There is enough room, in the historical event log, to store up to 150 event records. When a new event is received, one of two things can happen: If the event log is NOT full : A new event record is simply added If the event log is full : The event configuration data, Event full action, has two options, “Replace” and “Ignore”, for determining how to deal with a new event when the event log is full. (See Table 8.2.1)
Table 8.2.1: Event Full Action - Available Options <Event full action> Option Replace Ignore
Purpose of Option Always overwrite the oldest event in the event log Always discard a new event when the event log is full
Note: The default action is “Replace”
†
This can not be changed. The list of auditable data is fixed.
Page 8.12
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.2.4 Examining the Event Summary and the Event Log Press the INFORMATION button If you want to examine the Event Status Display or the Historical Event Log. x
To bring up the Event Status Display, select the Event Summary option.
x
To bring up the first entry in the Historical Event Log, select the Event History option. Figure 8.2.1: How to get to the event log
The Event Status Display a
V
Alarm Summary Alarm History Event Summary Event History
a b c d
V
Summary: Act Live Auto 003 004 User 150 150 Periodic 000 000
(Typical display)
b c d
The Historical Event Log a b c
V
(Typical entry)
d
To other entries (if any) in the Historical Event Log
8.2.5 What the Event Status Display tells you A typical Status Display is shown in the diagram (below). It lists, for each type of event (Auto, User or Periodic) the numbers of alarms which are active and live. x x
Active events are events which have been received but not yet accepted. Live events are events which refer to conditions which are still active.
The number of live events tells you how many of them are still active. If you look at the Historical Event Log this tells you more about these events.
8.2.6 What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you Figure 8.2.2 shows the function of the relevant keys, and what is on the display. Figure 8.2.2: A typical entry in the Historical Event Log
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Key to figure: 1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one. 2. Location identifier. 3. Type of event. 4. Indicates alarm not accepted. 5. Accept this alarm. 6. Event description. 7. Clear this alarm entry 8. Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised. 9. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one. 10. Scroll DOWN through the entries. 11. Scroll UP through the alarm entries. 12. Clear all alarm entries.
Page 8.13
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
Each event has its own entry in the Historical Event Log which tells you: x
Type of event Whether it is Auto, User or Periodic and on or off. Type
x
What it means
Auto
Changes made by the 795x application software.
User
Changes made by the keypad or done over serial communications.
Periodic
This event type is not used at present.
Date and time The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
x
Acceptance indication This is only shown for those entries which have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the indicator disappears.
x
Other entries indication An up-arrow shows that there are entries before the present one, a down-arrow shows that there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it is last, there is no down-arrow.
x
Description of the event This is an abbreviated description of the event but should be sufficient to help you trace the reason for it. A full alarm message listing starts on page 8.7.
x
Old value and new value Pressing the RIGHT-ARROW key displays another screen with the old and new values of data (Figure 8.2.3). Press the LEFT-ARROW (or the RIGHT-ARROW) key for the previous display to re-appear.
Figure 8.2.3: Old value and new value screen
8.2.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log To clear all the event entries in the Historical Event log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical Event Log and zeroes the entries in the Event Status Display.
Page 8.14
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3 Enhanced Auditing There is an optional enhanced auditing facility for recording user initiated changes to the 795x Flow Computer software parameters that have an influence on the metering results. This enhanced feature is the result of an essential requirement from North Sea Practices and the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI). This feature allows a 795x series Flow Computer to continuously monitor and report on changes to existing SET values, changes to option selections and changes to several parameter attributes (value status and individual audit control settings). The facility will report changes by recording Audit User Events and Audit System Alarms that will enable the back-calculation of fiscal values and account for changes that have occurred.
8.3.1 Audit User Events All generated events are stored in the Historical Event Log, as fully explained in Section 8.2. Audit events are either sub-classed as “USER” triggered or “AUTO” triggered. An example of a “USER” event is the act of manually changing a software parameter status to be “SET” instead of “LIVE”. An example of an “AUTO” triggered event is the 795x automatically changing a software parameter status to “Fail” when a live input source fails. Every event has a date and time for the occurrence, an on-screen location descriptor and a summary of the change. This information is divided into four pages, as seen in Figure 8.3.1. Use the ARROW keys, as shown, to navigate around the pages. To enable Audit User Events… x x x x x
Naviage to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”> Locate the parameter page with “Attribute display” Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list Locate the parameter page with “Audit inactive locs” Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list Figure 8.3.1: Example of Audit Event pages from Historical Log
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.15
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.2 Audit System Alarms All generated alarms are stored in the Historical Alarm Log, as fully explained in Section 8.1. Auditing Control alarms are sub-classed as “SYSTEM” alarms. An Audit Control alarm is normally raised whenever the value status attribute of a parameter is changed to “Set”. This alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “ON” on the first display line. A subsequent value status change, from “SET” to “LIVE”, to “FB” or to “FAIL” will then raise a matching system alarm. That matching alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “OFF” on the first display line. To enable Audit System Alarms… x
Naviage to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
x
Locate the parameter page with “Attribute display”
x
Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list
x
Locate the parameter page with “Audit active locs”
x
Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list Figure 8.3.2: Example of Audit System Alarm pages from Historical Log
Figure 8.3.3 shows how the Audit Control alarm message can appear in one of two optional formats. To change format… x
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
x
Locate the parameter page with “DB loc alarm text” as the descriptor
x
Select an option descriptor from the multiple-choice list
x
Any change is activated for the next 795x machine cycle
Figure 8.3.3: Optional Formats for Alarm Control Message
Page 8.16
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.3 Audit Control Attributes Each 795x Flow Computer software parameter has two independent, programmable attributes for adjusting how the auditing of it operates. Adjustments can be determined either by the 795X (in automatic mode) or by the user (in manual mode). Select a method by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Auditing attrib ctrl”> parameter page, located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameter”> menu.
By default, Audit Control attributes are not accessible in the menu system. To make them accesible, follow these steps: x x x
Naviage to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”> Locate the menu data page with “Attribute display” Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list
Note: This action also automatically enables the auditing control functions (if not already enabled by the software parameters and <”Audit unactive locs”>).
Figure 8.3.4 shows where to find Audit Control attributes. Navigate to any parameter page and then use the DOWN-ARROW and UP-ARROW key switch between pages.
Figure 8.3.4: Typical parameter page showing all attributes
(1) Auditing Alarm Suppression Control (2) Auditing Event Suppression Control (3) Security Level required for editing
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.17
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
The programmable attributes are:
1. Auditing Event Suppression Control (Audit/No Audit) When the automatic mode is in use… Critical “USER” events, such as a “LIVE” to “SET” status change, are never suppressed. They always appear in the Historical Event Log. Less critical “USER” events, such as a valve command selection, can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Audit”. However, be aware that the 795x Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Event Suppression Control” section on the next page. Note: An “AUTO” (795X triggered) event is never suppressed. When the default manual mode is in use… A “USER” event can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Audit”.
2. Auditing Alarm Suppression Control (Alarm/No Alarm) When the automatic mode is in use… The “SET” audit alarm can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Alarm”. However, be aware that the 795x Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Alarm Suppression Control” section on the next page. When the default manual mode is in use… The “SET” audit alarm can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Alarm”.
There is a third attribute on the same page, which can also be edited. This is the security level (e.g. “Engineer”) that is required to make changes to the software paramater. The parameter <"Secure all locations"> results in the required security level of all parameters being set to programmer, except those that are “super user”.
Security levels are as explained in Chapter 11. The exception to this is the “Super User” security level, which is not selectable and is not attainable by anyone apart from the 795x Flow Computer itself. Note: The existing setting for each Audit Control attribute is displayed within the menu system and is also available for retrieval by an external Modbus networked device. (See Chapter 7)
Page 8.18
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.4 Audit Event Suppression Control: Automatic Mode Under automatic mode, adjustments to the setting of the Audit Event Suppression Control attribute are in accordance with a built-in logic table. Table 8.3.1 shows: (a) the impact on the “Audit” or “No Audit” setting when using the front panel keyboard (or Modbus protocol communications) to manipulate the value status of a software parameter. (b) when a “USER” event is generated as the result of a user initiated action. (c) when an “AUTO” event is generated as the result of a 795X initiated action. Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Attribute control”> parameter page, located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.3.1: Logic for 795X changes to attribute settings and if events are recorded Value Status Change
Attribute Setting (Before Change)
Attribute Setting (After Change)
USER Event on change?
AUTO Event on change?
Live to Set
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Live to Set
Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Live to FB
No Audit
No Audit
No
Yes
Notes?
Live to FB
Audit
Audit
No
Yes
Live to Fail
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Alarm raised instead Alarm raised instead
Live to Fail
Audit
Audit
No
No
Fail to Set
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Fail to Set
Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Fail to Live
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Alarm raised instead
Fail to Live
Audit
Audit
No
No
Alarm raised instead
FB to Set
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
FB to Set
Audit
Audit
Yes
No
FB to Live
No Audit
No Audit
No
Yes
FB to Live
Audit
Audit
No
Yes
Set to Live
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Set to Live
Audit
No Audit
Yes
No
Set to Fail
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Set to Fail
Audit
No Audit
Yes
No
Set to FB
No Audit
No Audit
No
Yes
Set to FB
Audit
No Audit
Yes
Yes
Read Table Note A
Table Notes: A
A “USER” event is generated for a “SET” to “LIVE” action by the user. An “AUTO” event is generated for the “Live” to “FB” action by the 795X.
B
Selecting an alternative unit of measurement (for display) is recorded as a “USER” event even with a “No Audit” setting.
C
An event is recorded for all user initiated changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting. Table 8.3.2 shows if an event is logged when a user makes changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting without changing the value or value status.
D
Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”
E
Changing a ‘Set’ value to another ‘Set’ value is always recorded as a “USER” event. Table 8.3.3 shows if an event is recorded when the value status (e.g. “SET”) is not changed but the value does change or an option is selected from a multiple-choice list.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.19
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
Table 8.3.2: Logic for recording an event when the attribute setting is changed Value Status
Attribute Setting (Before)
Attribute Setting (After)
USER Event on change?
AUTO Event on change?
(Any) (Any)
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Audit
No Audit
Yes
No
Table 8.3.3: Logic for recording events when a value/option selection changes Value Status
Action to trigger an event
Attribute Setting
USER Event on change?
AUTO Event on change?
Set
Edit new value
Audit
Yes
No
Set
Edit new value
No Audit
Yes
No
Live
Value fluctuates
Audit
No
No
Live
Value fluctuates
No Audit
No
No
FB
FB value edited
Audit
No
No
FB
FB value edited
No Audit
No
No
Fail
Value fluctuates
Audit
No
No
Fail
Value fluctuates
No Audit
No
No
(None)
Select new option
Audit
No
No
(None)
Select new option
No Audit
No
No
Key:- FB = Fallback state
Page 8.20
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.5 Audit Alarm Suppression Control: Automatic Mode Under automatic mode, adjustments to the setting of the Audit Alarm Suppression Control attribute are in accordance with a built-in decision table. Table 8.3.4 shows: (a)
the impact on the “Alarm” or “No Alarm” setting when using the front panel keyboard (or a Modbus protocol command) to manipulate the value status.
(b)
when an “ON” flagged SYSTEM alarm is raised as the result of a user initiated action.
(c)
when an “OFF” flagged SYSTEM alarm is raised as the result of a user initiated action.
Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Attribute control”> parameter page, located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.3.4: Logic for 795X changes to attribute settings and if an alarm is recorded Attribue Setting (Before Change)
Attribute Setting (After Change)
Alarm raised on change?
Live to Set
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live to Set
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
Live to FB
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live to FB
Alarm
Alarm
No
Live to Fail
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live to Fail
Alarm
Alarm
No
Fail to Set
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Fail to Set
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
Fail to Live
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Fail to Live
Alarm
Alarm
No
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Value Status
FB to Set
Notes?
Read Note B
Read Note B
FB to Set
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
FB to Live
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
FB to Live
Alarm
Alarm
No
Set to Live
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Set to Live
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (OFF)
Read Note A
Set to Fail
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Read Note C
Set to Fail
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (OFF)
Read Note A
Set to FB
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Set to FB
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (OFF)
Read Note B
Read Note A
Table Notes: A
The 795x will also raise a matching “ON” alarm if one does not already exist in the Historical Alarm Log. This is normal and allows the system alarm to be cleared in the normal manner.
B
The 795x will raise a matching “OFF” alarm if the Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting is then changed to “No Alarm”. This is matching alarm is normal and allows the system alarm to be cleared in the normal manner.
C
The 795x will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “ON” flag.
D
The 795x will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “OFF” flag. This alarm can be cleared in the normal manner.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.21
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Table Notes continued…) E
Table 8.3.5 shows what happens when changes are made to the Audit Alarm Suppression Control attribute setting without changing the value or (value) status. Table 8.3.5: Logic for determining if an alarm is generated when the “Alarm” or “No “Alarm” setting is changed Value Status
Attribute: Alarm (Before)
Attribute: Alarm (After)
Alarm Raised?
Set Set
No Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
Alarm
No Alarm
Fail
Yes (OFF)
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Fail
Alarm
No Alarm
No
FB
No Alarm
Alarm
No
FB
Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Live
Alarm
No Alarm
No
F
Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”.
G
A “USER” classed event is generated for all user initiated changes to the “No Alarm” or “Alarm” setting. Table 8.3.6 shows if an event will appear in the Historical Event Log when a user makes changes to the Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting without changing the value or value status. Table 8.3.6: Logic for determining if an event is generated when the “Alarm” or “No alarm” setting is changed
Page 8.22
Value Status
Audit Event Control Setting
Audit Alarm Ctrl Setting (Before)
Audit Alarm Ctrl Setting (After)
USER Event on change?
(Any)
Audit
No Alarm
Alarm
Yes
(Any)
Audit
Alarm
No Alarm
Yes
(Any)
No Audit
No Alarm
Alarm
No
(Any)
No Audit
Alarm
No Alarm
No
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.
Additional facilities
9.1
Feature: Archiving
9.1.1
Introduction The 795x series can perform data logging to generate historical records – archives - of parameter data. The archived data can be retrieved on-demand and displayed within the menu system. It can also be printed out as a report and retrieved by MODBUS (protocol) networked devices. Values from user-selected parameters can be statistically prepared (e.g. average, maximum, etc.) according to user requirements. Statistical results are recorded at intervals that are defined by the type of data logging. Each logging type has a separate archive with a 20-parameter capacity and the ability to keep statistics from the past. There are five types of data logging available:
1. Interval Statistical results are automatically recorded in an “Interval Log” archive at a user-selected time-span. An interval can be as short as a 795X machine cycle or as long as twelve hours. A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first interval.
2. Daily Statistical results are automatically recorded in a “Daily Log” archive at the same time each day (i.e. 24-hour intervals). A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first 24-hour period.
3. Manual Statistical results are recorded in a “Manual Log” archive only when triggered manually from the front panel or over serial communications. The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of data logging.
4. Alarm Statistical results are recorded in an “Alarm Snapshot Log” archive whenever an alarm is raised or is removed. (This is separate from the Alarm History log). The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of data logging.
5. Batch Transaction Batching data is automatically recorded in a “batch” archive every time a transaction is completed. This type of archiving does not need any configuring apart from adjustments to the archive size. Chapter 18 is dedicated to Batching. Note that the “Statistical information” section (starting on page 9.2) and “configuring details” section (starting on page 9.8) do not apply to batch transaction archiving. All the types can operate in parallel if required. The size of an archive is finite but flexible enough to allow re-sizing by hand. Re-sizing actions cause all previously recorded values to be lost forever and should be done prior to data logging commencing. Archives can be selectively viewed on screen and printed out as a report. Printouts of reports can also occur automatically after new statistical results have been archived. Associated parameters (database locations) can be manipulated or retrieved by MODBUS networked device.
Important notice! The two sections that follow should be read and understood before embarking on the configuration task. It is also advisable to try out at least one of the worked examples.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.1
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.2
Statistical Information The following statistical options are available you…
1.
Average This calculates the average of a parameter value sampled every 795X machine cycle. The resulting average is ready for whenever it is to be recorded to an archive.
2.
Difference This calculates the difference between the latest sampled parameter value and the result that was last copied to an archive. A result is ready for whenever it is to be recorded to an archive.
3.
Maximum This results in the largest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being copied to an archive.
4.
Minimum This results in the smallest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being copied to an archive.
5.
None This results in the very latest sampled parameter value being copied to an archive.
9.1.3
Analysis of an archive This section explains: x x
archive space and how it can change how new statistical data is added to an archive
Archive space and how it changes Each archive has a default amount of memory space in the 795x. The initial amount is the same for each archive. Dimensions for archive memory space are in terms of depth and width. x
Depth
Depth corresponds to the quantity of parameter values that can be kept.
x
Width
Width corresponds to the total number of bytes required to store a single value from every nominated parameter. (See Table 9.1.1)
Table 9.1.1: Bytes Required for all Database Location Types Width (bytes)
Data Type
1
Selection code for an option descriptor in a multiple-choice list
4
A database location without a status attribute (i.e. Set or Free) where the value (e.g. 1.25) is automatically generated by a measurement task. This does not include totals.
5
A data location with a status attribute (i.e. Set or Free) where the value (e.g. 1.25) may be generated by a measurement task.
8
Totals only. For example, Indicated Volume Flow Total
16
Dates and/or times.
21
Text only.
Available memory space for increasing the size of an archive can be viewed by pressing the PRINT MENU key and then selecting the menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”>/<“Spare arch. memory”>. It is very important to carefully plan the set-up of all archive space before data logging commences. Otherwise, be prepared for inevitable data loss when making changes or setting up other archives at a later stage.
Page 9.2
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Archive space can be change as follows: Action
Effects on associated archive
Extent of data loss
Parameter added to nomination list
Width increases. Depth decreases to compensate.
Associated archive
Parameter removed from list.
Width decreases. Depth increases to compensate.
Associated archive
Space increase granted
Depth increases.
All archives
This is best illustrated in the following sequence of diagrams involving one archive:(2) Archive after adding another parameter:-
(1) Archive with an initial depth of 8 and a list with 1 defined parameter:-
Parameter 2 = Time and date
Parameter 1 = Line temperature Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1 Width=4
Statistic entry 2
Parameter 2
Width=4
Width=16
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 3 :
Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1
:
Depth = 5
Statistic entry 3
Depth = 8
:
:
Statistic entry 7
:
:
:
Statistic entry 5
Statistic entry 8
The last available record
The last available record
Diagram notes: (a) Parameters shown here are defined with a data location number. An archive can have a maximum of 20 parameters. (b) The width value of a parameter is dependent on the type of data location. It is not displayed. (c) Depth is affected by the total width of parameters. Depth will therefore vary from the example shown here.
(3) Archive after requesting room to allow 9 entries for each parameter. Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1
Width=20
Statistic entry 2 :
Width=4
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 3 :
(4) Archive after removing parameter 2 from list
Statistic entry 3 :
:
:
Depth=9
Depth=9
:
:
Statistic entry 7
Statistic entry 8
Statistic entry 8
Statistic entry 9
Statistic entry 9
The last available record The last available record
Adding new statistics to an archive Several questions can be asked about adding new statistics to an archive… Q1. How are they inserted? Q2. What happens when all records of statistic results are full? The answers to these questions are provided in the exaples that follow.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.3
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
(a) Fixed time-span data logging This is described with two sequences of diagrams. Sequence 1: Archive is not full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to an empty archive. Notice how older statistics are pushed downwards.
Fixed time-span of data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
T1 = 8s
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T2 = 8s
Record: (1)14.53 (2)1.0130
T3 = 8s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T4 = 8s
T5
Diagram notes: (a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span. "Daily" type logging operates in the same way except T1=24 hours, T2=24 hours, etc. (b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined.
(1) Archive state after 8 seconds Newest and oldest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
:
Statistic entry 1
(d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation. (e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
Statistic entry 2 Statistic entry 3 :
:
(f) Data logging continues beyond T5 until disabled.
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
(2) Archive state after 24 seconds Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
14.53
1.0130
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
:
:
:
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
Page 9.4
Oldest statistic at present
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Sequence 2: Archive is full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have to be lost to make space for new statistics. Fixed time-span data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
T1 = 8s
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T2 = 8s
Record: (1)14.53 (2)1.0130
T3 = 8s
Record: (1)14.51 (2)1.0130
T4 = 8s
Record: (1)15.0 (2)1.0129
T5 = 8s
Record: (1)15.1 (2)1.0128
T6 = 8s
Record: (1)15.2 (2)1.0127
T7 = 8s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T8 = 8s
T9
(1) Archive state after 48 seconds Diagram notes:
Newest statistic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.51
1.0130
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
Statistic entry 6
(b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined. (d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation.
Oldest statisitic at present
The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
(2) Archive state after 56 seconds Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.2
1.0127
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.50
1.0133
:
:
Statistic entry 6
The last possible record for a statisitc
795x Op Man/DB
14.55 is now lost
(f) Data logging continues beyond T9 until disabled.
1.0132 is now lost
Page 9.5
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
(b) Variable time-span data logging This is described with two sequences of diagrams. Sequence 1: Archive is not full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to an empty archive. Notice how older statistics are pushed downwards. Variable time-span data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T1 = 8s
T2 = 16s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T3 = ?s
T4
Diagram notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is shown here with two completed timespans. Third time-span is unknown until an alarm is raised (or cleared) or logging is next triggered manually by a user. (b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined.
(1) Archive state after 8 seconds Newest and oldest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 1
(d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation. (e) T0 is when this data logging first began.
Statistic entry 2 Statistic entry 3 :
:
:
:
:
(f) Data logging continues beyond T4 until disabled.
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc with this archive
(2) Archive state after 24 seconds Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
:
Statistic entry 3 :
:
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
Page 9.6
Oldest statistic at present
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Sequence 2: Archive is full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have to be lost to make space for new statistics. Variable time-span data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
T1 = 6s
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T2= 7s
Record: (1)14.53 (2)1.0130
T3 = 9s
Record: (1)14.51 (2)1.0130
T4 = 5s
T5 = 8s
Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.51
1.0130
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
Statistic entry 6
T6 = 12s
Record: (1)15.2 (2)1.0127
T7 = 8s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T8 = ?s
T9
(a) "Alarm" and "Manual" type data logging are both represented with multiple variable time-spans. (b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined. (d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation.
Oldest statisitic at present
The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
Record: (1)15.1 (2)1.0128
Diagram notes:
(1) Archive state after 48 seconds
:
Record: (1)15.0 (2)1.0129
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
(2) Archive state after 56 seconds Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.2
1.0127
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
:
:
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
795x Op Man/DB
14.55 is now lost
(f) Data logging to archive continues beyond T9 until disabled.
1.0132 is now lost
Page 9.7
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.4
Configuration details Use the following table to find the instructions for configuring an archiving activity. It is advisable to try out an example before embarking on the configuration task. Configuration task
1st. Page
x
Interval Archiving
9.9
x
Daily Archiving
9.10
x
Manual Archiving
9.11
x
Alarm (snapshot) Archiving
9.12
x
Re-sizing of archives
9.13
Note: Batch archiving does not require any configuring because it is automatically ready for any transactions that take place. Only re-sizing of the archive needs to considered, as guided in Section 9.1.3.
Page 9.8
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Configuration task: “Interval logging” Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list, (ii) ‘Set’ a start date/time, (iii) ‘Set’ a fixed interval and (iv) enable this data logging type. Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 1. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Interval log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (a) (b) (c)
5.
Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.1 for further guidance) Repeat (4b) with the next entry until all parameters have been nominated.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.2.
Menu Data List 9.1.1: First Entry Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose
Int list loc 1
x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
Int list action 1
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “Int” = Interval, “loc” = location
Menu Data List 9.1.2: Configuration Parameter Checklist of Interval Archiving Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose
Interval start time
x
‘Set’ the date and time for start of the first interval period.
Interval time
x
Select the interval frequency.
Interval log/print
x
Options: (1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (2) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Interval Archiving Notes: 1. The interval type of data logging operates independently of the other types. 2. Intervals are always synchronised to the 795x calendar clock. For example, a 10-second interval will first occur on the minute rollover and then re-occur every multiple of 10 seconds. An interval start time that is not divisible by the interval will effectively be delayed to the next multiple of the interval. 3. Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
1
The location identification of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.9
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Configuration task: “Daily” logging details Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list, (ii) ‘Set’ a start date/time and (iii) enable this data logging type Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 2. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (4a) Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. (4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.3 for further guidance) (4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.4.
Menu Data List 9.1.3: Daily Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List Menu Data * (as displayed)
Daily list loc 1 Daily list action 1
Purpose of Parameter x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “Loc” = Location
Menu Data List 9.1.4: Daily Archive Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Daily start time
x
‘Set’ the date and time for commencement of the first 24 hour period
Daily report
x
Options: (3) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (4) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Daily Archive Notes: A Daily type data logging can operate independently of the others.
2
B
A period that falls within an adjustment for daylight saving will be 24 +/- 1 hour.
C
Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Page 9.10
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Configuration task: “Manual” logging details Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list and (ii) enable this data logging type Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 3. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (4a) Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. (4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.5 for further guidance) (4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.6.
Menu Data List 9.1.5: Manual Trigger Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Manual snap loc 1
x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
Manual snap act 1
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “snap” = snapshot, “loc” = location, “act” = action
Menu Data List 9.1.6: Manual Trigger Archive Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed) Manual log/print
Purpose of Parameter x
Options: (1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (2) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Manual Trigger Archive Notes: A The trigger for manual type data logging is activated by selecting a soft-command at the menu data page with “Trigger manual log” as the parameter label. It is found under: <“Archives”>/<“Trigger manual log”>.
3
B
Manual type data logging operates independently of the others.
C
Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.11
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Configuration task: “Alarm” (snapshot) logging details Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list and (ii) enable this data logging type Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 4. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (4a) Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. (4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.7 for further guidance) (4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.8.
Menu Data List 9.1.7: Alarm Triggered Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Alarm snap loc 1
x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
Alarm snap action 1
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “snap” = snapshot, “loc” = location
Menu Data List 9.1.8: Alarm Triggered Archive Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed)
Log/print on alarm
Purpose of Parameter x
Options: (1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (2) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Alarm-Trigger Archive Notes: A Alarm type data logging can operate independently of the others. B Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
4
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Page 9.12
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.5
Re-sizing Archive Space
Important notices! 1. Adding a parameter to a data logging list causes all recorded statistics to be immediately lost from the associated target archive. Other archives are not affected by this. 2. Removing a parameter from a data logging list causes all recorded data to be immediately lost from the associated target archive. Other archives are not affected by this. 3. Increasing or decreasing space will result in all recorded data being lost from all archives.
Re-size Instructions:
1. Press the PRINT-MENU key 2. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”> 3. Check how much spare archive memory is available Note: If the spare archive memory is reported as 0 bytes and archiving has not been in use, format the archives and then re-check the reported value
4. Re-size archives according to your requirements x
The following are ‘re-size’ menus:(1) “Alarm log” – Alarm Trigger Archive re-sizing (2) “Manual log” – Manual Trigger Archive re-sizing (3) “Daily log” – Daily Archive resizing (4) “Interval log” – Interval Archive resizing (5) “Transactions log” – Batch Archive re-sizing
Each ‘re-size’ menu features two menu data pages. One menu data page is for requesting an increase or decrease to the depth – i.e. the maximum number of values per parameter that can be presently stored in the associated archive. The other menu data page shows the maximum number allowed at present. To request more space for an archive… (4a) ‘Set’ a new value in the appropriate ‘request’ parameter (4b) Confirm the request for more space by selecting the "Format” soft-command (option descriptor) through the menu data page with “Format all archives”. Warning!
795x Op Man/DB
Increasing or decreasing space will cause all recorded values to be lost from all archives. Use the ‘max snaphot’ menu data page to check on the result of a request.
Page 9.13
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.6
Operation details (Reporting) Operations involve selective viewing and printing out of the archives.
Viewing Archives Recorded values can be viewed on the 795x display. No configuration is required for this feature. Follow the self-contained instructions that are provided below.
How to view the Interval Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Interval trig log”> 2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many values (per parameter) are available from previous elapsed intervals.
3. There are menu data pages (database locations) for displaying a previously recorded value for every listed (nominated) parameter. For example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the “Intvl snap value 1” menu data location. By default, the most recently recorded values from the last interval can be seen. The “Select snapshot” menu option is for selecting another elapsed interval. For example, snapshot ‘1’ is for showing the oldest interval of recorded values. Selecting a ‘snapshot’ that does not yet exist will always cause all the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” option.
How to view the Daily Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Daily log”> 2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many values (per parameter) are available from previous 24-hour periods.
3. There are menu data pages (database locations) for displaying a previously recorded value for every listed (nominated) parameter. For example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the “Daily snap value 1” menu data page. By default, only the most recently recorded values from the previous 24-hour period can be seen. Use the “Select snapshot” menu option to select another 24 hour period. For example, snapshot ‘1’ is for showing the very first 24-hour period of recorded values. Selecting a snapshot (i.e. 24-hour period) that does not yet exist will always cause all the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” option.
How to view the Manual Trigger Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Manual log”> 2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many recorded values (per parameter) are available.
3. There are menu areas for viewing previously recorded values for each listed parameter. Look for the numerous “Snap item value” sub-menus. By default, only the most recently recorded values from the last trigger can be seen. Use the “Select snapshot” menu option to select and display recorded values from previous triggers. For example, edit a value of 1 to retrieve the oldest snapshot. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will cause all of the most recent recorded statistics to be re-displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” menu option.
Page 9.14
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
How to view the Alarm Trigger Archive
1.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Alarm log”>
2.
Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many recorded values (per parameter) are available.
3.
There are a number of menu data pages for viewing previously recorded values for all listed parameters. Look for the numerous “Snap item value” sub-menus. By default, only the recorded values since the last alarm can be seen. The “Select snapshot” menu option is for selecting and displaying recorded values from previous new alarm occurrences. For example, editing a value of ‘1’ will select the oldest set of values. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will always cause the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4.
The date and time, of when the presently displayed values were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” option.
How to view the Batch Archive
1.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Transaction log”>
2.
Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the <“Num snaps stored”> menu option. The menu data page shows how many batch transactions were recorded.
3.
There are a number of menu data pages for viewing previously recorded values for all listed parameters. Look for the numerous “Snap item value” sub-menus. By default, recorded values since the last alarm can be seen. The “Select snapshot” menu option is for selecting and displaying recorded values from previous batch transactions. For example, editing a value of ‘1’ will select the oldest set of values. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will always cause the most recent recorded statistics to be selected and then displayed
Printing Archives (through a configured serial port) Archives can printed out in several ways:
1.
Method: On-demand (1a) From outside the <“Archives”> menu This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU soft-key and then select the “Print report” menu option. Now choose a report by selecting from the multiple-choice of options. Option (as displayed)
Purpose of option
Interval log
x
Printout the ‘Interval’ archive as a report.
Daily log
x
Printout the ‘Daily’ archive as a report.
Manual log
x
Printout ‘Manual’ archive as a report.
Alarm log
x
Printout ‘Alarm’ (Snapshot) archive as a report.
(1b) From inside the <“Archives”> menu This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU soft-key and then the follow instructions. Instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”> 2. Select a menu that is name-associated with the archive 3. Select the “Print snapshot” menu option 4. Select the “Print” soft-command option (value)
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.15
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
2.
Method: Automatic Printed Report Archiving can be configured to automatically printout a report whenever data is archived. Interval archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Interval log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Daily archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Manual archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Alarm archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Alarm log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Batch archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Transaction log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option
All methods require a Serial Communications Port to be set-up for printing. Printouts are transmitted through the serial port that is configured exclusively for connection to a printer.
Page 9.16
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.7
GUIDED EXAMPLES OF ARCHIVING Guided Example 1 Objective: (i) Set-up 795x to record the average of line pressure measurements on a daily basis This guided example involves configuring the “Daily log” archive to record (snapshot) the average of all pressure readings during a 24-hour period. It is assumed that the measurement task is already set-up. Instructions:
1. Add the parameter to the “Daily log” archive list (1a) (1b) (1c) (1d) (1e) (1f)
Press the PRINT-MENU soft-key Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Configure list”>/<“Entry 1”> Select the “Pointer” menu option – this displays a menu data page with “Daily list loc 1” Press the ‘b’ soft-key and then type in the database location ID for the pressure parameter Confirm the edited location ID by pressing the ENTER soft-key Select the <“Action”> menu and then change the menu data page option selection to “Averaging”
2. ‘Set’ an initial date and time (2a) Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“start time”> (2b) Press the ‘b’ soft-key and then edit a date and time for the commencement of the first 24-hour period Notes: x The 795X date and time is displayed within menu system. Look inside this menu: <”Time”> x A date of ‘zero’ is the same as specifying the present calendar date. x A time of ‘zero’ is the same as specifying the present time.
3. Activate the data logging activity (3a) Select menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Enable / Disable”> (3b) Choose an option as guided in the table Option (as displayed)
Purpose of option
Log data only
x
Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. No printed report following archive
Log and print data
x
Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. Print a report following archive. *
* A serial port should be configured for connection to a ‘printer’
4. Check on the data logging after 24 hours Results are best viewed on a connected printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program. Alternatively, results can be viewed within the menu system. (4a) Select the menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Daily log”> (4b) Select various menu data pages… Menu Data Page (as displayed)
795x Op Man/DB
Purpose
Num daily snapshots
x
The number of snapshots per parameter inside the “Daily log” archive.
Daily snap, 0=latest
x
View selection: 0 = recent snap, 1 = oldest snap, 2 = 2nd oldest snap, etc.
Daily snap value 1
x
Selected view of a value from the parameter listed under “Entry 1”.
Daily snapshot time
x
Shows the date and time of the last daily snapshot.
Page 9.17
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.2
Feature: PID Control Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) is a control algorithm for efficiently attaining and then maintaining a LIVE measurement parameter at a user-supplied target (or ‘set-point’) value. PID control is available for controlling one measurement parameter.
WARNING! EXPERT KNOWLEDGE OF PID IS ESSENTIAL TO MAKE USE OF THIS FEATURE 9.2.1
Overview Closed-loop PID Control The implemented PID algorithm will continuously check on the difference between a target (‘set-point’) measurement value and the latest LIVE value of a nominated measurement. Whenever the difference is unacceptable, an adjustment – to narrow the difference - is derived from a three-term equation, as seen below. A calculated adjustment value – or PID output value - is checked against any enabled safeguards before being made available in a database location. Once the PID output value is freely available, it can be transmitted to an external system through any analogue output. That action should result a process change to narrow the difference. This routine is repeated every cycle until the difference is within acceptable limits.
i § · §K · K c * ¨e i T * K i e k ¨ d ¸ * e i e i 1 ¸ ¨ ¸ © T ¹ © ¹ k 0
m i
Proportional Term
¦
Integral Term
Deriviative Term
Where: m i
= Control output (for steering measurement towards a set-point) {Menu Data: <“PID Output”>}
Kc
= Proportional gain factor {Menu Data: <“PID Gain”>}
Ki
= Integral time constant (‘Reset’ rate) {Menu Data: <“PID Integral act”>}
Kd
= Derivative time constant {Menu Data: <“PID Derivative act”>}
e i
= Difference between set-point and measurement (i.e. the ‘error’) at cycle i {No Menu Data Page}
e i 1 = Difference between set-point and measurement (i.e. the ‘error’) from previous cycle {No Menu Data Page} e k
= The error over k cycles for 0 d k d i {No Menu Data Page}
T
= Elapsed time since measurement value last sampled for PID algorithm {No Menu Data Page}
Notes:
(1) Variables K c , K i and K d can be edited through pages within the 795x menu system. (2) In practice, the first order difference term, (e(i) - e(i-1)), is very susceptible to noise problems. In most practical systems this term is replaced by the more stable, higher order equation: 'e = ( e(i) + 3*e(i-1) - 3*e(i-2) - e(i-3) ) / 6
Page 9.18
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Open-loop PID Control With this method, the aim is for the PID output value itself to be driven towards a user-supplied target (set-point) output value. The measurement ‘set-point’ has no purpose.
Whenever there is a calculated difference, an adjustment – to narrow the difference - is derived from the threeterm equation seen earlier. However, the calculated ‘error’ terms are based on the difference between the “LIVE” PID output value and a “SET” target (user) PID output value. The calculated adjustment value – PID output value - is checked against two safeguards before being made available in a database location. Once the PID output value is freely available, it can be transmitted to an external system through any analogue output. That action should result a process change to gradually narrow the difference. This routine is repeated every cycle until the difference is within acceptable limits.
9.2.2
Configuration details Instructions:
1.
2.
3.
Set-up the “LIVE” measurement that is to be controlled x
All the configuration reference pages for measurements are located in Chapter 11.
x
Ensure that the location identification number 5 of the measurement (to be controlled) is noted
Set-up PID control x
Review the schematic (Figure 9.2.1) in conjunction with the associated parameters (Menu Data List 9.2.1)
x
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”PID Control”> and then work through all the associated parameters, setting values and selecting options as necessary.
x
Check on the idle system time to see if the cycle time needs to be increased. [MENU: <”Time”>]
Configure a live analogue output to transmit a PID output value During every machine cycle, the analogue output will need to transmit a PID output value to whatever external system can initiate a process change (e.g. a valve controller increasing flow). The PID output value is either: x
an adjustment for the “LIVE” measurement to reach a target (set-point) measurement value or
x
an adjustment for the PID output value itself to reach a target (set-point) value, also indirectly affecting the “LIVE” measurement. [Note: The measurement set-point is not used in this case]
A guide to the analogue output parameters and settings is listed in Menu Data List 9.2.2 (on page 9.20)
Figure 9.2.1: PID Control - Schematic of Blocks and Parameters Status check decides the set-point used
SETPOINT (for PID output) 16 4
SETPOINT (for measurement)
2
"LIVE" MEASUREMENT
1
OR
Calculate 'Error'
5
6
PID Algorithm
3 8
5
7
10 PID Output
11
12
ARW Limit Check
13 PID Output
14
Check Ramp Limit
"LIVE" Adjustment Value (%)
15
mA Output
9
This number can be found by examining the ‘.man’ text file that is present on the media of Mobrey’s free FC-Config PC tool. The ‘.man’ file is unique for every software release. Contact Mobrey if you require a copy of the file and/or FC-Config. Alternatively, locate the data page within the menu system and then use the ‘a’-key to toggle the display of the number on or off.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.19
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Menu Data List 9.2.1: PID Control Parameters Menu Data (as displayed)
Index
Default Setting
-
PID Enable
1
PID Setpoint ptr
2 3 4
PID Error type
5
PID Gain
0.0
6
PID Integral act
0.0
7
PID Deriviative act
0.0
8
PID Range max
0.0
Notes?
“Disable” (“PID Setpoint”)
A
PID Setpoint
0.0
(A)
PID Input ptr
0000 (“Off”)
B
“Single error”
C
9
PID Range min
10
PID ARW
11 12
0.0 “Disable”
D
PID ARW HI limit
0.0 (%)
(D)
PID ARW LO limit
0.0 (%)
(D)
13
PID Ramp limit
14
PID Ramp Gradient
“Ramp limit off”
E
5.0 (%)
(E)
15
PID Output *
0.0
F:1, G
16
PID User Output *
0.0
F:2, G
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List 9.2.2: Analogue Output '1' Parameters (Guide for PID Control Set-up) Menu Data (as displayed)
Example Value or Option Setting
mA output 1 ptr list
“User”
mA 1 param val @100%
(<”PID Range max”> Value)
x
See Menu Data List 9.2.1
mA 1 param val @0%
(<”PID Range min”> Value)
x
See Menu Data List 9.2.1
mA output 1 type
(4-20mA or 0-20mA)
x
Select suitable mA range
mA output 1 source
(<”PID Output”>)
x
ID for <”PID Output”>
mA output 1 value *
(LIVE Value)
x
Values from <”PID Output”>
Comments x
Essential option
Analogue Output ‘1’ has been used here as a guide to setting-up
Notes: (for Menu Data List 9.2.1) A By default, this configuration parameter is usually programmed with the database location ID of the parameter <“PID Setpoint”>. However, any database location with a floating-point value could be identified - programmed in - as the parameter supplying the set-point (target) value. An input alarm is raised if the ‘value’ of the identified ‘set-point’ parameter is not a floating-point value. PID control is then temporarily deactivated until the alarm is clearable when a more suitable parameter is identified. B
This configuration parameter must be programmed with the database location ID of the measurement parameter that is to be controlled. It must be a parameter with a floating-point value. An input alarm is raised if the ‘value’ attribute of the measurement parameter is not a floating-point data type. PID is then temporarily deactivated until the alarm is clearable when a suitable parameter is identified.
Page 9.20
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities (Notes continued…) C
The “Simple Error” option will calculate the ‘error’ as simply the difference between the setpoint value and the measurement value. However, the “Complex Error” option will provide a more stable ‘error’ value. The error is derived from the following expression: 'e = (e(i) + 3*e(i-1) - 3*e(i-2) - e(i-3) ) / 6
D
Safeguard feature. See Section 9.2.4 on page 9.21.
E
Safeguard feature. See Section 9.2.3 on page 9.21.
F:1 For the closed-loop method you must change the status of <”PID Output”> and <”PID User Output”> to both be “Live”. Calculated adjustment values will then be displayed by both parameters. F:2 For the open-loop method you need to SET a value for the <”PID User Output”> parameter. The status of the <”PID Output”> parameter must be “LIVE”. G
Set-up any analogue output to transmit a value of the <”PID Output”> parameter. This database location ID is 1288. Configure the analogue output to utilise the ‘user parameter’ option. Refer to Chapter 11 for applicable configuration reference pages. Analogue output connections are as guided in Chapter 2.
9.2.3
Ramp-limit Safeguard Many systems implement a limiter on the maximum rate of change to the PID output value. This has a similar effect to an engine rev-limiting device. However, this PID safeguard prevents physical devices from being damaged through unnecessary adjustments. The ramp-limit is specified in degrees, representing the angle the output makes with the horizontal on a graph. The time axis resolution is therefore critical to the significance of this parameter. A limit of zero degrees would make output ramping impossible and a limit of 90 degrees or greater would allow maximum ramping. With the open-loop PID control method, the ramp-limit checks are mandatory and are applied every cycle. However, programming a zero degree angle will inhibit this safeguard.
PID Ouput (%)
Figure 9.2.2: Ramp-Limit safeguard illustration
Y
X2< Y
X1
X1< Y
X2
Time
PID Output (Tangent)
Ramp Limit Gradient
Y
PID Output (Angle) Xn
9.2.4
Ramp Limit (Angle) Y
Anti-Reset-Windup Safeguard Practical systems stop the summation of error terms if the PID output value is outside a user-specified boundary. This limiting of the error summation is commonly referred to as Anti-reset-windup (ARW). When ARW is enabled, ARW limiting is applied to every output value from the PID calculation before it is saved in the 795x database. The ARW limit boundary is specified as a low and high percentage of the full-scale (maximum) PID output value. With the open-loop PID control method, the ARW boundary checks are mandatory and are applied every cycle. However, a zero percent boundary will inhibit ARW limiting. Figure 9.2.3 demonstrates ARW in action, complemented with example settings as shown in Table 9.2.1.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.21
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Figure 9.2.3: Anti-reset-windup (ARW) in action PID OUTPUT varying as process changes
Process change (e.g. pump fixed)
ARW is limiting output % (e.g. minimum flow) 100
LOW
PID OUTPUT (%)
90
HIGH
ARW Boundary
ARW Boundary
HIGH
Process change (e.g. Pump failure) ARW is limiting output % (e.g. maximum flow)
5
LOW
0
TIME
Table 9.2.1: ARW Associated Parameters Menu Data ** (as displayed)
Example Setting
PID Range max
100.0
x
The maximum – full-scale - PID output value
PID Range min
0.0
x
The minimum allowed PID output value
PID ARW
“Enable”
x
Activate ARW boundary checking
PID ARW HI limit
100.0 (%)
x
% of for upper ARW boundary
Comment
PID ARW LO limit
0.0 (%)
x
% of for lower ARW boundary
PID Output *
(“Live” Value)
x
“LIVE” Adjustment value (%) for the mA output
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
** Parameters are located within this menu: <”Configure”>/<”PID control”>
Page 9.22
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.3
Selecting units and data formats You can select the units which it displays the data, as well as the formats in which the data is displayed. You can choose the units and formats for: x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Volume flow rate Volume flow total Standard volume flow rate Standard volume flow total Mass flow rate Mass flow total Density Temperature Pressure ‘K’ factor Time period Kinematic viscosity Base kinematic viscosity Dynamic viscosity
A full list of the units (metric and imperial) is given at the end of this chapter. Note that, if you change the units, the values are converted automatically to reflect the change.
9.4
Parameter Alarm Limits You can set limits for some parameters so that an alarm is generated if the limits are exceeded. There are four types of limit: x
High limit:
The highest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated.
x
Low limit:
The lowest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated.
x
Step limit:
The greatest allowable step between successive values before an alarm is generated.
x
Comparison limit:
The greatest allowable step between values from two or more channels without an alarm
The parameters, and the types of limit that you can set for them, are: x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Mass flow rate: Gross volume flow rate: Net volume flow rate: Sediment and Water Meter density: Density ‘A’ & ‘B’ Base density Meter temperature: Meter pressure: Prover Inlet temperature Prover outlet pressure Prover Inlet pressure Prover outlet temperature Alarm X and Y: Alarm ‘A’ and ‘B’ Indic. Std. volume flow rate: Gross Std. volume flow rate:
795x Op Man/DB
high and low high and low high and low high and low high, low and step Comparison high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low. Comparison high and low high and low
Page 9.23
Chapter 9 Additional facilities x x x
9.5
Turbine frequency Dynamic viscosity Kinematic viscosity
high High, low and comparison High and low
Fallback values and modes A fallback value is used as a temporary substitute for a parameter if a live input (i.e., the transducer, transmitter or wiring), which is normally used to calculate the parameter, should fail. A fallback must have one of the following modes: x
None
The system uses whatever value is available for the parameter regardless of whether or not the live input has failed.
x
Last good value
The system uses, for the parameter, the last value prior to failure.
x
Fixed value
The system uses whatever fixed value you have specified for the fallback.
You can set fallback values for:
9.6
x
Metering density
x
Base density
x
Metering temperature
x
Prover inlet temperature
x
Prover outlet temperature
x
Prover inlet pressure
x
Prover outlet pressure
x
Metering pressure
x
Densitometer pressure
x
Sediment & Water percentage
Units which the 795X can display The 795X can display data values with many different units of measurement, as listed in Table 9.6.1 on page 9.25. However, when communicating with other devices, the data is always sent using the base units. In Table 9.6.1, the following definitions are used: x
Base units
x x
The 795X transmits all data in base units (when using a MODBUS link). Data values in the 795X database are stored in base units for calculations.
x
Default units:
x
Units which the 795X displays unless you choose an alternative.
x
Other units:
x
Units which you can choose instead of the default.
Note that many of the abbreviations used in the tables are defined in the glossary.
Page 9.24
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Table 9.6.1: Supported units of measurement
Parameter Category
Base units (Comms. & Calculations)
Default units (on-screen)
Temperature
Deg. C
Deg. C
Deg. F
Kelvin
Ohms
bar abs
Pa abs psia kPa guage kg/cm2
KPa abs bar guage MPa guage
MPa abs Pa guage psig
m3 x E3 ft3 barrel cc
m3 x E6 100ft3 gallon (UK) litres
in3 MM ft3 gallon (US)
Std m3 x E3 Std ft3 Std barrel Norm cc Norm m3 x E3 Norm ft3 Norm barrel Std cc tonne oz g
Std m3 x E6 Std 100ft3 Std gallon (UK) Norm litres Norm m3 x E6 Norm 100ft3 Norm gallon (UK) Std litres ktonne lb
Std. in3 Std MM ft3 Std gallon (US) Norm m3 Norm in3 Norm MM ft3 Norm gallon (US)
tonnes/m3 oz/barrel lb/in3 lb/gallon (UK) tons/barrel g/cc kg/cc
oz/in3 oz/gallon (UK) lb/ft3 lb/gallon (US) tons/gallon(UK) g/litre
oz/ft3 oz/gallon (US) lb/barrel tons/ft3 tons/gallon (US) g/m3 kg/cm2
Pressure
Volume
bar abs
m3
m3
Standard Volume
Std m3
Std m3
Mass (Total)
kg
kg
Density
kg/m3
kg/m3
3
3
Base density
kg/m
kg/m
Time
s (seconds)
s (seconds)
Frequency
Hz
Hz
‘K’ Factor
pulse/m3
pulses/m3
Dynamic Viscosity
cP
cP
Kinematic Viscosity
cSt
cSt
Base Kinematic Viscosity
cSt
cSt
Other units available for on-screen (as displayed)
kg/litre
As density min us kHz pulse m/s
hour ms pulse/ns pulse/s
day
pulse/in3 litre/pulse ft3/pulse Pa.s Reyn mm2/s ft2/s mm2/s in2/s
pulse/ft3 m3/pulse pulse/cc kgf.s/m2 slug/fts cm2/s
cc/pulse in3/pulse pulse/litre P lbf.s/ft2 m2/s
cm2/s ft2/s
m2/s
Mass rate
kg/hour
kg/hour
Mass units / time units
Volume rate
m3/hour
m3/hour
Volume units / time units
Standard volume rate
m3/hour
m3/hour
Volume units / time units
795x Op Man/DB
Mtonne ton
pulse u/s pulse/min
Page 9.25
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Page 9.26
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
10. Configuring using Wizards 10.1 Introduction to Wizards Mobrey recommends that you use software Wizards to configure the 795x for your installation. Wizards are easy to use facilities that will take a user through all the data locations and decisions that are required to satisfy the requirements of a measurement task. There are individual wizards available for each measurement task. For example there is a “Pressure” wizard for configuring line pressure and atmospheric pressure. To fully configure a 795X, it is very likely that several measurement tasks are required and, therefore, several wizards will need to be used. It is often more efficient to use a “full set-up” wizard. This wizard can guide users through setting up more than measurement task. Section 10.3 has a “Quick-view” guide (table) for finding out what wizards are available and what can be achieved with them. Section 10.4 features a special wizard for selecting a standard for units of measurement.
10.2 Using Wizards Although wizards are easy to use, some preparation is still required. Use the following check-list to prepare. Ensure that: x
All physical connections to the rear panel have been completed. If this is not the case, refer to Chapter 2 (Getting Started) and Chapter 3 (About the 795X) for details of supported connections.
x
Front panel keyboard buttons and the menu system are familiar. Chapters 5 and 6 are provided to assist with this. It might be a good idea to bookmark the summary of keys in Chapter 5 for quick reference.
x
Identification numbers of important result data are written down. These numbers will be required for configuring facilities such as analogue outputs. There are two ways to find out data location numbers:
1
(1)
Examine the “.man” file that is supplied on the FC-Config1 media or
(2)
Locate the data within the menu system and then press the ‘a’ key to display the unique identification number on line 4. (Pressing the ‘a’-key toggles the number display on or off.)
x
Calibration certificates (and supporting data sheets) for all field instrumentation are available.
x
there is a comprehensive list of all the 795x input and output connections that are being used and a list of the measurement tasks that are required.
A free PC utility developed by Mobrey. Available on request.
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Page 10.1
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
Starting a Wizard from the front panel is easy. Follow these instructions: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key. Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears. Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option. Step 4: Press the ‘a’-key twice so that “Setup Wizard” appears on line one of the display. Do not worry about what line two is presently displaying. Step 4: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the wizard selection process. Step 5: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available wizards (on line two). Step 6: Press the ENTER key twice to select and then start a wizard that was named is on-screen. Once a Wizard is started, follow the prompts to supply the information it asks for and then, if necessary, use Chapter 11 and the menu system to edit the resulting configuration to match your exact needs. Wizard interactions involve several keys: a, b, c ,d keys
Answer a question (e.g. “Yes” or “No”) or used for normal data location editing
ENTER key
Confirm a selection or edited setting (e.g. new value), move on to next prompt
< key
Go back to a previous important decision prompt.
After completing a Wizard, the screen with “Setup Wizard” re-appears. Further wizards can then be selected in the same way as before. Note that it is not necessary for the “None” option to be selected before proceeding to other 795X work.
Page 10.2
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
10.3 Quick-view Guide (Set-up Wizards) Wizards
Measurement Tasks
Comments
Full Setup
x
Multiple measurement tasks
Skip the tasks that are not applicable.
Flow meter
x x
Frequency (Turbine Flow) ‘Meter factor’ and ‘K factor’
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Flow rate
x x x x x
Gross Volume flow rate Indicated Standard Volume flow rate Gross Standard Volume flow rate Nett Standard Volume flow rate Mass rate
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Txdr density
x x x
Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Prime Transducer Density
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Base Density
x
Base density (API or 4x5 Matrix Referral)
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Meter Density
x
Meter Density
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Txdr viscosity
x
Transducer Viscosity
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Referred viscosity
x
Referred Viscosity
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Specific gravity
x
Specific Gravity
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Temperature
x x x
Meter temperature Density temperature ‘A’ Density temperature ‘B’
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Pressure
x
Metering-run Pressure
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Sediment & Water
x
BSW Percentage
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Special calc.
x
Special Equation Type 1
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Analog outputs
x
mA signal outputs
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Pulse outputs
x
Pulse outputs
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Alarms
x
User alarms
Chapter 8 is about alarms.
Multi view
x
Multi-page multi-view (key display)
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Communications
x x x
Printer Modbus Slave Modbus Master
Chapter 7 is a full guide to 7950/7951 Communications
Prover
x
Prover and Proving Details
See Chapters 16A and 16B for proving support
PID setup
x
PID Controls
Refer to Chapter 9
Batch setup
x
Batching transactions
Refer to Chapter 18
HART inputs
x
Live inputs from SMART type transmitters
Chapter 17 is a full guide to HART support
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Page 10.3
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
Strainer input
x
Strainer input
See Chapters 16A and 16B.
Retro batch calc
x
Retrosepective batch calculation
Refer to Chapter 18
Reset
x
Full reset
Use this with caution!!
Initialise
x
Clear all user programming to defaults
Use this with caution!!
10.4 Units Wizard Selection Follow these instructions to select a standard for the units of measurement: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key. Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears. Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option. Step 4: Press the blue key that is alongside this description: “Units wizard”‘ Step 5: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the selection process. Step 6: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available options (see map below). Step 7: Press the ENTER key twice to select the standard that is named is on-screen.
Units wizard (Selection) Choose option Metric Imperial SI
Choosing this will not do anything. Use scroll up/down keys to move through the wizard options. "Metric" "Imperial"
Exit Wizard
"SI"
Units Wizard Selection
Page 10.4
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11. Configuring without using Wizards 11.1
What does this Chapter tell me? This Chapter is a configuration reference for those who are reasonably experienced with configuring a 795x series computer. It is also useful for those who provide technical support. It is primarily organised for a structured approach to configuring - the live inputs, the calculations and the live outputs - after the first power-on with V2510 software installed. For those of you in a support role, a ‘quick-find’ index is provided. Use the index to find the reference pages required for configuring or trouble-shooting a measurement task. If you are not experienced, return to Chapter 10 (Wizards) unless directed here by someone providing support. Not all features are covered in this Chapter. For example, configuring for HART communications and for flowmeter proving is a complex task and therefore kept in separate chapters. There are additional features in Chapters 7, 8, 9 and 18.
Quick-find Index........................................... 11.2 A structured approach to configuring........... 11.3 Reference Page Conventions...................... 11.5 Reference information................................. 11.6+
Rounding Compliance Statement Liquid Flow Computer software complies with the API standard for rounding down the floating-point values of live density and base density referral measurements. The rounding procedure is also applied to all inputs to the referral calculations (e.g. temperature) and auxiliary outputs from the referral calculations (e.g. CTL). Relevant sections in the standard are API 12.2 and API 11.1 VOL X.
By default, rounding is inactive. It can be activated for the next cycle by navigating to the configuration menu and then editing the multiple-choice option. When active, we recommend you change the displayed measurement units of associated parameters to metric units
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.1
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.2
Quick-find Index Use Table 11.2.1 to quickly find the pages that are of interest.
Table 11.2.1: Quick-Find Index Category
Flow Metering System
x x x x x x
Analogue Inputs (mA and RTD/PT100) Digital (Status) Inputs Pulse Inputs Turbine/PD Orifice (GP) Coriolis
11.06 11.07 11.08 11.09 11.16 11.28
Totalising
x
Metering-run Totals
11.31
Viscosity Measurement System
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
‘Density Loop’ Fluid Temperature ‘Viscosity Loop’ Fluid temperature Meter Fluid Temperature ‘Density Loop’ Pressure Meter Pressure Header Density API referral (header Î base and base Î run) 4x5 referral (header Î base and base Î run) Known fluid meter density (GPA, IUPAC, etc.) Known fluid base density (GPA, IUPAC, etc.) Specific gravity Degrees API Special Equation Header ‘viscosity loop’ density Header viscosity Referred viscosity
11.33 11.34 11.35 11.36 11.37 11.38 11.44 11.45 11.46 11.47 11.48 11.48 11.49 11.50 11.52 11.55
BS&W
x
Prime selected Header BS&W analyser channels
11.57
Net Oil/Water
x x x
Percentages of oil (by volumes and mass) Percentages of ‘water’ (by volumes & mass) Net flow rates and totals (for oil and ‘water’)
11.59 11.59 11.65
Interface Detection
x x
Product detection system Product totals
11.74
7950/7951 Security
x x x x x
Analogue Outputs Digital (Status) Outputs Pulse Outputs Passwords and security levels Security level fallback
11.79
Multi-view
x
Multi-view display
11.82
Live Inputs
Temperature
Pressure
Density Measurement System
Live Outputs
Page 11.2
1st. Page
Measurement Task
11.73 11.77 11.78
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.3
A structured approach to configuring Preparation will help ensure that configuration work progresses smoothly. At this stage, it is expected that all the connections have already been made to the 795x Flow Computer. If possible, check on this by asking the relevant authority. Familiarity with the front panel keyboard and menu system is also expected. Work through the preparation and configuration stages that are listed below.
11.3.1 Preparation stage 1. Ensure that all of the information needed is at hand:x
A plan of the pipeline layout.
x
A summary of instrumentation connected to the 795x Flow Computer, providing inputs or expecting outputs. Include the type of logical connections made to the rear panel of the 795x Flow Computer. (e.g. “a mA type pressure transmitter wired to analogue input 3”)
x
Calibration certificates of connected instrumentation
x
Operational data (e.g. minimum and maximum flow rates)
x
A summary of core measurements to be set-up (e.g. flow rates, flow totals, density, etc.) (It may be useful to look in Chapter 3 and browse through this Chapter).
x
Identification numbers of data that is important (This is only for configuring multi-page multi-view and analogue outputs that can require the input of a location number).
x
A plan of what is required from additional features (e.g. Batching, Archiving, etc.) (It may be useful to look in Chapter 9 and browse through this Chapter).
2. Read the information on conventions used. 3. Browse through the rest of this Chapter and see how the reference pages are organised. (End of preparation stage)
11.3.2 Configuration stage 1. Get the 795x Flow Computer into the Programmer security level. (Turn the security key to the far right or type in the “Programmer” password to change security level). 2. Set the display contrast, display formats and the system cycle time. x
Display contrast may be quite dim when first powering on the 795x Flow Computer with new software. Look in the <“configure”>/<“Additional features”> menu for the appropriate menu and then change the setting to suit the environment.
x
Display formats are important when decimal places of results are critical. They are categorised under general headings (e.g. temperature, pressure, etc.). Look in the <“configure”>/<“Additional features”> menu for the appropriate menu and then change the settings if the defaults are not appropriate. Units of measurement can be changed also.
x
The machine cycle time is dependent on how much work the 795x Flow Computer is performing. Examine the idle cycle time indicator in the <“Health Check”> menu to see if the cycle time needs to be increased or decreased.
DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS UNDER THE CALIBRATION MENUS. SETTINGS ARE MADE BY SPECIALIST CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AT THE FACTORY.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.3
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
3. Configure the live (transmitter) inputs to get raw readings from instrumentation. x x
HART Inputs Analogue Inputs
All reference information is in Chapter 17. Turn to page 11.6
4. Set-up the calculation processes. Pulse inputs, flowmeter details, flow rates, sediment & water, flow totals, temperature, pressure, density, specific gravity, degrees API, viscosity, Batching and special equation type one. 5. Configure the live outputs. x x
Analogue Outputs Pulse Outputs
Turn to page 11.73 Turn to page 11.78
6. Multi-view Multi-page display (User key 1) 7. Alarms and Events (All reference information is in Chapter 8) 8. Serial communications ports (All reference information is in Chapter 7) 9. Set-up 795x Flow Computer security Set passwords for security levels and set-up the optional security fallback feature. (If not using the security key, change to the Engineer security level for the remainder of the configuration work). (End of configuration stage)
Page 11.4
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.4
Reference Page Conventions Most reference pages consist of: x x x x
A short bullet-point list of measurements that can be set-up A drawing of the process showing key blocks and how data interacts Menu references A list of menu data associated with the process drawing
Other reference pages consist of a brief explanation but no diagram. Menu references and a list of menu data are always present. Menu reference notation A notation has been used as a much shorter method of explaining how to move from the present menu to another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen. Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”. Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen. Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”. Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level. Note: Menus may vary to other software versions and releases.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.5
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.5 ANALOGUE INPUTS Features:
(Note: Rear panel pin connection information is located in Chapter 2)
Analogue Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) and 7951 (D-Type or Klippon) without option board 6 x RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) x mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) Analogue Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) with option board 6 x RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) x mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 10) Analogue Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) and 7951 (Klippon) with option board 6 x RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) x mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 8) What to do: This reference page will assist when configuring basic data for all analogue channels that are being used. After each analogue channel is set-up, check that a “Live” reading - a percentage by default - is being displayed by the corresponding menu data page. A “Fail” status indicates an absent or failed transmitter. Later reference pages will expect all instrumentation to be already wired to the 795x and expect there to be a live reading. Configuring a measurement task will then involve setting range (scaling) information and selecting the appropriate analogue channel as the source.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Analog inputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Analog inputs”>
Menu Data list:
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Analogue Channel (and signal types)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Analogue Input 1 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA)
Input channel 1 * Analog input1 type mA input 1 ave type Input channel 2 * Analog input2 type mA input 2 ave type Input channel 3 * Analog input3 type mA input 3 ave type Input channel 4 * Analog input4 type mA input 4 ave type Input channel 5 * Analog input5 type mA input 5 ave type
Analogue Input 2 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA) Analogue Input 3 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA) Analogue Input 4 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA) Analogue Input 5 (mA only)
Analogue Channel (and signal types) Analogue Input 6 (mA only) Analogue Input 7 (mA only) Analogue Input 8 (mA only) Analogue Input 9 (mA only) Analogue Input 10 (mA only)
Menu Data (as displayed) Input channel 6 * Analog input6 type mA input 6 ave type Input channel 7 * Analog input7 type mA input 7 ave type Input channel 8 * Analog input8 type mA input 8 ave type Input channel 9 * Analog input9 type mA input 9 ave type Input channel 10 * Analog input10 type mA input 10 ave type
Abbreviation used: "ave" = average
1
There is a DIP switch block on the processor board for deciding if this is a mA-type input or a RTD/PT100-type input.
Page 11.6
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.6 DIGITAL INPUTS Features:
(Note: Rear panel pin connection information is located in Chapter 2)
Digital Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) x Status input channels 1 to 8 Digital Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) x Status input channels 1 to 8 (without option board 6 fitted) or x Status input channels 1 to 16 (with option board 6 fitted) Digital Inputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) x Status input channels 1 to 6 What to do: This reference page will assist when configuring parameters for all the Status Input channels that are being used. No digital inputs have a default function. However, they can be allocated a function when setting up proving related functions and/or when requiring any of the following: Remote Print
Transmit a current report through a serial port that is configured for connection to a printer. Selection of the input is made using menu data: <”Remote print Din”>
Maintenance-mode
Attempt a switch to “maintenance-mode” from the “normal” mode. Selection of the input is made using menu data: <”Maint mode req Din”>. (To succeed in changing mode, this function requires the Flow Computer to be in a “Flow Stop” state).
In the <“Health Check”> menu there is a Status Input sub-menu. It contains a menu data page with a series of digits on the second display line. Each digit indicates the present state of an individual input.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Status inputs”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“IO physical alloc”> and (3) <”Health check”>/<"Inputs">/<”Status inputs”> Menu Data List: Digital In Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6
Menu Data (as displayed) DIN 1 logic level DIN 1 mode level DIN 2 logic level DIN 2 mode level DIN 3 logic level DIN 3 mode level DIN 4 logic level DIN 4 mode level DIN 5 logic level DIN 5 mode level DIN 6 logic level DIN 6 mode level
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Digital In Channel 7 8 9 10 11 12
Menu Data (as displayed) DIN 7 logic level DIN 7 mode level DIN 8 logic level DIN 8 mode level DIN 9 logic level DIN 9 mode level DIN10 logic level DIN10 mode level DIN11 logic level DIN11 mode level DIN12 logic level DIN12 mode level
Digital In Channel 13 14 15 16
Menu Data (as displayed) DIN13 logic level DIN13 mode level DIN14 logic level DIN14 mode level DIN15 logic level DIN15 mode level DIN16 logic level DIN16 mode level
Abbreviation used: "DIN" = Digital Input
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.7
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.7 PULSE INPUTS Features:
(Note: Rear panel pin connection information is located in Chapter 2)
7950 (Klippon): x Pulse Input 1 – for use by a pulse based volumetric flowmeter 7951 (Klippon): x Pulse Input 1 – for use by a pulse based volumetric flowmeter 7951 (D-Type): x Pulse Input 1 – for use by a pulse based volumetric flowmeter x Pulse Input 2 – for use by Master Meter Proving feature What to do: Use this reference page to configure the basic live input data for any of the channels. The reference pages for configuring further flow metering details will expect the instrumentation to be already wired to the 7950/7951 and expect the “Live” pulse frequency. Master Meter Proving is described in Chapter 16. After each channel is set-up, check on the pulse frequency that is being indicated by the <”Flow meter frequency”> parameter. Use the Health Check menu to view other diagnostic information such as a missing pulse counter. Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Inputs”>/<“Pulsed flow inputs”> (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flow meter”>/<”Turbine/PD details”> (3) <“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>/<“Pulse inputs”> Menu Data List:
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Pulse Channel (and allocation)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse Input 1 (Flowmeter)
Flow meter frequency * PIN 1 input type PIN 1 error limit Pulse input 1 value Err Pulse ip 1 value PIN 1 sample time
Notes?
Pulse Channel (and allocation)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse Input 2 (Master Meter)
Prover turb freq * PIN 2 input type PIN 2 error limit Pulse input 2 value Err Pulse ip 2 value PIN 2 sample time
B A C
Notes? B A C
Abbreviation used: "PIN" = Pulse Input Notes: A
The programmed error limit for missed pulses is not applicable unless there are dual pickup pulse trains being received by the Flow Computer.
B
The pulse frequency is calculated using the following equation: P Using: F t Where: F is the pulse frequency P
is the number of pulses accumulated over elapsed time ‘t’ {Health Check parameter is <Err Pulse ip N value> where ‘N’ identifies the pulse input}
t
is the elapsed time (in seconds) since the previous pulse count was used in this calculation. {Health Check parameter is where ‘N’ identifies the pulse input}
Each live pulse input is read every 100ms. Accumulated pulses are then displayed every machine cycle. C
Counter for missing (error) pulses during the present machine cycle. There is also a totaliser for accumulating the number of missing pulses from each cycle.
Page 11.8
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.8 TURBINE/PD FLOW Measurements and Features Supported: x x
Indicated Volume and Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point 4 x Flowmeter calibration curve options Figure 11.8-1: Turbine/PD Flow Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”><“Turbine/PD details”>/<”Main turbine/PD”> (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> and (3) <“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Flowmeter inputs”>/<”Turbine”> Menu Data List: Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 : 15 16 : 25 26 : 35 36 : 45 46 : 55
Menu Data (as displayed) Flow meter frequency * Turb freq HI lmt Flow stop threshold Meter curve type Meter curve points Error% / Kfactor 1 : : : Error% / Kfactor 10 Flow/freq 1 : : Flow/freq 10 Curve1 K at Q1 : : : Curve1 K at Q10 Curve2 K at Q1 : : : Curve2 K at Q10 Curve3 K at Q1 : : : Curve3 K at Q10
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
Index
A
56 : 65 66 : 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 n 82 83 84 : 95 96 97
B
Menu Data (as displayed) Curve4 K at Q1 : : : Curve4 K at Q10 Frequency Q1 : : Frequency Q10 Curve 1 visc LO lmt Curve 2 visc LO lmt Curve 3 visc LO lmt Curve 4 visc LO lmt Curve 4 visc HI lmt Hysteresis Meter kinematic visc * Turb curve selected Polynomial degree Polynomial coeff a0 : : : Polynomial coeff a10 Flowmeter K factor * Indicated vol rate *
Notes?
(B)
Page 11.9
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TURBINE/PD FLOW
CONFIGURATION
(Menu data list continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed) Meter factor * Gross volume rate * Gross vol HI lmt
98 99 100
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
Index
(B)
101 102 -
D
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes: A Refer to Section 11.7 on page 11.8 for details of configuring this parameter. B
Notes?
Gross vol LO lmt Rate flowstop action Flow meter
D C
(X) – Indirectly mentioned in note
There are four turbine calibration options supported: (1) “Turbine correction” (Default) A ‘K-factor’ is linearised, once every machine cycle, from a user-programmable calibration curve. The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is a single SET value. They may then be updated by a proving session, by product detection or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see Figure 11.8-2 on page 11.10. (2) “Turbine conversion” The ‘Meter Factor’ (MF) is calculated, once every machine cycle, by a relative error (percentage) correction process. The ‘K-factor’ is a single SET value. They may then be updated by a proving session, by product detection or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see page 11.11. (3) “4 x (K v Freq)” (Viscosity Corrected Flow) A ‘K-factor’ is interpolated, once every machine cycle, from one of four programmable calibration curves. Curve selection is determined by the present viscosity range. The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is a SET value. Also, see Figure 11.8-3 on page 11.11 (4) “UCC polynomial” (Viscosity Corrected Flow) The ‘K-factor’ is a single SET value. A ‘Meter Factor” (MF) is calculated, once every machine cycle, using the polynomial equation from Section 3.3.3.2 of the ISO 4124:1994(E) International Standard. Parameters to be programmed into the Flow Computer are the pre-generated factors (a0, a1, etc.) for an established curve fit and the polynomial degree. (Viscosity measurements must also be set-up). This method is for when using some turbines, such as helecoidal two-blade turbine meters, to meter multiproduct oils or meter products where large viscosity variations can occur. Full details of the method are provided in the ISO 4124:1994(E) International Standard. Proving sessions can overwrite either a ‘Meter Factor’ value or the ‘K-factor’ value. It is dependent on how proving is configured and if the prove session is successful. Product detection can also overwrite a ‘Meter Factor’ (MF) value and/or the ‘K-factor’ value – see page 11.74.
C
By default, the Flow Computer calculates and displays live flow rates under a ‘Flow stop’ condition, even when there is negligible flow. However, displayed rates can be forced to zero by selecting the option descriptor with “Zero flow rates”. (Calculations using a flow rate value as an input will always get zero values during ‘Flow stop’)
D
Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ limits programmed (SET) with a zero value if an alarm limit check is not required.
Figure 11.8-2: ‘K Factor’ v Pulse Frequency Calibration Curve Figure 11.8-2 shows an example of a calibration curve profile with 4 points programmed. The lowest frequency on curve is point (F1, Kf1). This point corresponds to the <“Flow/freq 1”> menu data page value and the <“Error% / Kfactor 1“> menu data page value respectively. Highest frequency on curve is point (F4, Kf4). This point corresponds to <“Flow/freq 4”>, <“Error% / Kfactor 4“>. Point (FM, Kfm) corresponds to a live pulse frequency and a resulting ‘K Factor’. Page 11.10
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
TURBINE/PD FLOW
Figure 11.8-3: 4 x ‘K- factor’ v Pulse Frequency Calibration Curves (Viscosity Corrected Flow)
Quad curve profiles. A curve is selected by checking the metering-run kinematic viscosity value against range limits for each curve. Lowest frequency on curve 1 is point (F1, Kf1). This corresponds to <“Frequency Q1”> menu data and <“Curve 1 K at Q1”> menu data respectively. Highest frequency on curve 1 is point (F5, Kf5). This corresponds to <“Frequency Q5”> menu data and <“Curve 1 K at Q5”> menu data respectively. Point (FM, Kfm) corresponds to a live pulse frequency and a resulting ‘K Factor’ from the selected curve.
For the purpose of this example, C3 is the selected curve with the Meter Kinematic Viscosity value falling in the appropriate range for that curve. The Flow Computer re-checks the range every machine cycle. Hysteresis can be used with the viscosity ranges to avoid frequent switching between two curves.
‘Meter Factor’ from Flow versus Error Percentage Calibration Curve Turbines are supplied with a calibration certificate that describes the actual flow rates against percentage error in readings by a test meter. Table 11.8.1: Example of Certificate Data Flow rate (m3/h) Error %
400 0.11
280 0.17
160 0.06
100 -0.24
The raw data on the certificate has to be turned into turbine corrected values by the Flow Computer. To do this, a single curve profile must be set-up in the following way: Menu Data (as displayed) Meter curve type Meter curve points Flow/freq 1 Flow/freq 2 Flow/freq 3 Flow/freq 4 Error% / Kfactor 1 Error% / Kfactor 2 Error% / Kfactor 3 Error% / Kfactor 4
Value or Option “Turbine conversion” “4 curve points” 100 160 280 400 -0.24 0.06 0.17 0.11
Please note that this is an example and that only data from the calibration certificate of the turbine should be entered into the Flow Computer.
Turbine corrected values are not displayed within the menu system but the calculations used are as follows:
Vt
§ Va * E a ¨¨ © 100
· ¸¸ Va ¹
Et
Vt * Va * 100 Va
Where: Vt
= Corrected volume from test turbine
Va
= Actual volume (e.g. 100 from the above data)
Et
= Corrected percentage error in test turbine reading
Ea
= Actual error in Vt reading (e.g. -0.24 from the above data)
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.11
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TURBINE/PD FLOW
CONFIGURATION
The calculations use the SET curve profile data to get a modified curve. Table 11.8.2: Example Modified Curve with Turbine Corrected Values Flow rate (m3/h) Error %
400.44 0.1098
280.476 0.1697
160.096 0.05996
99.76 -0.241
With a ‘Live’ (or SET) indicated volume flow rate an error percentage can be linearised from the modified curve. The error percentage is then used to adjust the present ‘Meter Factor’ value.
Page 11.12
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
ADDITIONAL FLOW RATES
Measurements and Features Supported:
x x x
Indicated standard volume flow rate at the metering point Gross standard volume flow rate at the metering point Mass flow rate at the metering point Figure 11.8-4: Additional Turbine Flow Rates Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (2) <“Flow rates”>, (3) <“Density”> and (4) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
97 98 99 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
Menu Data (as displayed)
Indicated vol rate * Meter factor * Gross volume rate * Rate flowstop action CTL CPL Meter density * Base density value * Dens calc sel VCF * CCF *
Notes?
A
Index
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118
Menu Data (as displayed)
Ind std vol rate * Ind std vol HI lmt Ind std vol LO lmt Gross std vol rate * Gross std vol HI lmt Gross std vol LO lmt Mass rate * Mass rate HI limit Mass rate LO limit
Notes?
B B B B B B
Notes: A By default, the Flow Computer calculates and displays actual live flow rates under a ‘Flow stop’ condition, even when there is negligible flow. However, displayed rates can be forced to zero by selecting the option descriptor with “Zero flow rates”. (Calculations using a flow rate value as an input will always get zero values during ‘Flow stop’) B
Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ limits programmed (SET) with a zero value if an alarm limit check on the associated rate is not required.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.13
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TURBINE/PD FLOW METERING
EQUATION LIST
Equation List: Equation TU#1: Indicated Volume flow rate
· ¸ * 3600 ¸ ¹
Using:
QIV
§ f = ¨¨ ©Kf
Where:
QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {Menu Data: <”Indicated vol rate”>}
f
= Flowmeter (pulse) frequency (pulse/sec)…...…. {Menu Data: <”Flow meter frequency”>}
Kf
= ‘K factor’ (pulses per m3)…………..…………….. {Menu Data: <”Flowmeter K factor”>}
Equation TU#2: Gross Volume flow rate
Using:
QGV
= QIV * MF
Where:
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate (m3/hour)………....…… {Menu Data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {See Equation TU#1}
MF
= Meter Factor………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter factor”>}
Equation TU#3: Volume Correction Factor
Using:
VCF
= CTL * CPL ........………….…………….………..... (API)
Or:
VCF
§ U = ¨¨ © UB
Where:
VCF
= Volume correction factor…………………...……. {Menu Data: <”VCF”>}
CTL
= API temperature correction factor…….…..……. {Menu Data: <”CTL”>}
CPL
= API pressure correction factor……..……………. {Menu Data: <”CPL”>}
And:
U UB
· ¸ ...................…….………………………...... (4x5) ¸ ¹
= Fluid density at a metering-point…….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>} = Fluid density at base conditions….….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Base density value”>}
(Note: The equation choice is linked to the selected method for density referral)
Equation TU#4: Combined Correction Factor
Using:
CCF
= CTL * CPL * MF …………………...…………....... (API)
Or:
CCF
· § U = ¨¨ * MF ¸¸ .......………………………………....... (4x5) U ¹ © B
Where:
VCF
= Volume correction factor…………………...……. {Menu Data: <”CCF”>}
CTL
= API temperature correction factor…….…..……. {Menu Data: <”CTL”>}
CPL
= API pressure correction factor……..……………. {Menu Data: <”CPL”>}
MF
= Meter Factor………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter factor”>}
And:
U UB
= Fluid density at a metering-point…….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>} = Fluid density at base conditions….….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Base density value”>}
(Note: The equation choice is linked to the selected method for density referral)
Page 11.14
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
TURBINE/PD FLOW METERING
(Equation List continued…) Equation TU#5: Indicated Standard Volume flow rate
Using:
QISV
= QIV * VCF
Where:
QISV
= Indicated Standard Volume flow rate…...……… {Menu Data: <”Ind std vol rate”>}
QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {See Equation TU#1}
VCF
= Volume correction factor…………………...……. {See Equation TU#3}
Equation TU#6: Gross Standard Volume flow rate
Using:
QGSV = QIV * CCF
Where:
QGSV = Gross Standard Volume flow rate……….……… {Menu Data: <”Gross std vol rate”>} QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {See Equation TU#1}
CCF
= Combined correction factor…………………..…. {See Equation TU#4}
Equation TU#7: Mass flow rate
Using:
QM
= QGV * U
Where:
QM
= Mass flow rate (kg/hour)……………...………….. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate (m3/hour)………....…… {See Equation TU#2}
U
= Fluid density at a metering-point…….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.15
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.9 ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1 2) Measurements and Features Supported: x Prime Selected Differential Pressure – across the flowmeter x Mass Rate at the metering point - from ISO 5167-1 (this page), HART Input (Page 11.18) or AGA 3 (Page 11.17) x Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point – turn to page 11.18
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter inputs”>/<“Orifice”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (5) <“Density”>/<”Meter run density”>, (6) <“Pressure”>/<”Meter run pressure”>, (7) <”Temperature”>/<“Meter run temperature”> and (8) <“Health check”>/<”Flow meter details”>/<”Orifice”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Menu Data (as displayed) Flow meter DP cell 1 input src DP cell 2 input src DP cell 3 input src DP cell 4 input src DP cell 5 input src Diff press HI 100% Diff press HI 0% Diff press MED 100% Diff press MED 0% Diff press LO 100% Diff press LO 0% Diff press config Diff press HI switch Diff press LO switch Diff press cal error Diff press cal time DP deviation limit DP input alarms Diff press range Diff press HI lmt DP flow stop limit Diff press FB type Diff press FB value Diff press value * Orifice type
Notes? A A A A A
B C C D D E F G
Menu(2)
Index 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 t P -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Orif pipe diameter Orifice diameter Header dynamic visc * Orifice isentropic Pipe expans coeff Orif expans coeff Orifice cal temp Orif tapping code Venturi type Orif discharge coeff Orif expandability Orif vel of approach Reynolds number Orif corr pipe dia Corr orif diameter Orifice beta Pressure loss Pressure ratio Mass rate K factor Meter density * Mass rate * Orif mass flow calc Meter temperature * Meter pressure * Rate flowstop action Flow status
L
J J J
H
I I
Notes are on page 11.19. 2
Standards used: ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd.1:1998(E). Refer to the Standard for details of restrictions.
Page 11.16
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (AGA 3 3) Measurements and Features Supported:
x x x
Prime Selected Differential Pressure across the flowmeter Mass Rate at the metering point - from AGA 3 or from ISO 5167 (Page 11.16) or from a HART Input (Page 11.18) Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point - See Page 11.18 Figure 11.9-1: Orifice Flow (AGA 3) Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter inputs”>/<“Orifice”> (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (5) <“Density”>/<”Meter run density”>, (6) <“Pressure”>/<”Meter pressure”> (7) <”Temperature”>/<“Meter run temperature”> and (8) <“Health check”>/<”Flow meter details”>/<”Orifice/PD”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Menu Data (as displayed)
Flow meter DP cell 1 input src DP cell 2 input src DP cell 3 input src DP cell 4 input src DP cell 5 input src Diff press HI 100% Diff press HI 0% Diff press MED 100% Diff press MED 0% Diff press LO 100% Diff press LO 0% Diff press config Diff press HI switch Diff press LO switch Diff press cal error Diff press cal time DP deviation limit DP input alarms Diff press range Diff press HI lmt DP flow stop limit Diff press FB type Diff press FB value Diff press value *
Notes?
A A A A A
B C C D D E F G
Index
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 t P -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Orif pipe diameter Orifice diameter Header dynamic visc * Orifice isentropic Pipe expans coeff Orif expans coeff Orifice cal temp Orif tapping code Orif discharge coeff Orif expandability Orif vel of approach Reynolds number Orif corr pipe dia Corr orif diameter Orifice beta Orif mass K factor Meter density * Mass rate * Orif mass flow calc Meter temperature * Meter pressure * Rate flowstop actions Flow status
Notes?
L
J K J
H
I I
Menu(2)
Notes are on page 11.19.
3
Standard used: AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition). Refer to the Standard for details of restrictions.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.17
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (HART) Measurements Supported:
x x
Mass Rate at the metering point - from a HART Input or from ISO 5167 (Page 11.16) or from AGA 3 (Page 11.17) Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point
Figure 11.9-2: Orifice Flow (HART) Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> (2) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”> (3) <”Base density/SG”>/<”Base density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
-
Flow meter
7
Mass rate *
1
Mass rate HART chl
8
Rate flowstop action
I
2
Orif mass flow calc
9
Gross volume rate *
**
3
Mass rate HI limit
UBase
Base density value *
4
Mass rate LO limit
-
5
Mass rate FB type
6
Mass rate FB value
Notes are on page 11.19.
I
Flow status
** See “Extra Information” Section
Extra Information:
Calculation: Gross Volume flow rate Use:
QGV
Where: QGV Qm
§ ¨ Qm =¨ ¨U © Meter
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
= Gross Volume flow rate..……….. {Menu Data: <”Gross volume rate”>} = Mass flow rate……………………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
U Meter = Metering density…………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
Page 11.18
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART) Notes: (for “Orifice Flow Metering” pages) A
By default, every 'P measurement channel is configured to use the transmitter wired to Analogue Input ‘1’. Reconfigure 'P measurement channels to use other live inputs by editing the source selection menu data. A cell can be connected to any available analogue input or even attached to a HART network loop. If using HART, any unique HART (protocol) address can be given to a cell. (Refer to Chapter 17 for HART coverage) Do not be concerned about the effect of an unused cell input without a “None” option descriptor selected. A selected configuration - cell arrangement - code informs the 795x of the cell inputs to read and processed.
B
Table 11.9.1 shows a selection of configuration codes (option descriptors) for the more likely ‘pay’ and ‘check’ cell arrangements. Other combinations involving 5 cells can be selected. Table 11.9.1: Selection Codes, Cell Arrangements and Pressure Range Switching Configuration Code
Range Selection?
H=DP:1
‘Pay’ Cell #1 - always the primary - covers a high pressure range.
No
H=DP:12
‘Pay’ Cell #1 and ‘Check’ Cell #2 cover exactly the same high range.
No
H=DP:1 L=DP:2
‘Pay’ Cell #1 covers the high range. ‘Pay’ Cell #2 covers the low range.
Yes
H=DP:12 L=DP:3 H=DP1 M=DP2 L=DP3 H=DP:12 L=DP:34 H=DP:1p23 L=DP:4p5
C
Cell Arrangement
Cell #1 (‘Pay’) and Cell #2 (‘Check’) cover exactly the same high range. Cell #3 (‘Pay’) covers the low pressure range. Cell #1 (‘Pay’) used for high pressure range. Cell #2 (‘Pay’) used for medium range. Cell #3 (‘Pay’) used for low pressure range. Cells #1 (‘Pay’) and #2 (‘Check’) cover the high pressure range. Cells #3 (‘Pay’) and #4 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range. Cells #1 (‘Pay’), #2 (‘Check’) and #3 (‘Check’) cover the high range. Cells #4 (‘Pay’) and #5 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
‘LO switch’ is a low point marker in terms of a percentage 4 of the presently selected pressure range. A 795x calculated DP value, resulting from this programmed (SET) percentage, is the boundary at which primary use of a ‘pay’ DP Cell is automatically switched to another ‘pay’ DP Cell with a lower range. This switch will provide measurements that are more accurate. ‘HI Switch’ is a high point marker in terms of a percentage of the presently selected pressure range. A 795x calculated DP value, resulting from this programmed (SET) percentage, is the boundary at which primary use of a ‘pay’ DP Cell is automatically switched to another ‘pay’ DP Cell with a higher range. This switch will provide measurements that are more accurate.
D
Optional feature: ‘Calibration error’ (i.e. limit) Checks. x
<“Diff press cal error“> is the alarm limit for the maximum difference in differential pressure measurements between a selected (prime) DP Cell and the next suitable (prime) DP Cell. An alarm is raised if the limit is exceeded for longer than a period as SET by <“Diff press cal time”>. (Not enabled when limit is SET to 0).
E
Deviation refers to difference in differential pressure measurements between ‘Master’ (or ‘Pay’) DP Cell and any ‘Check’ DP Cells.
F
Automatic selection of a ‘higher’ range DP Cell can cause a mA input failure alarm to be raised even though the transmitter has not actually failed. The cause of this alarm is the mA signal from a ‘lower’ range cell exceeding 111% of the 20mA analogue input range as the cell continues to measure beyond it’s effective range. This alarm condition remains until the lower range cell is re-selected. <“DP inputs alarm”> gives the option of suppressing the alarm under this particular situation. By default, there is no suppression.
G
Identifies the range - low, medium or high - of the selected primary ‘pay’ DP Cell. (Read-only data value).
H
The “Reynolds Number” calculation is iterative and requires a previous value for the mass flow rate. This is the reason for showing the mass rate by an Orifice calculation block.
4
Alternative units, such as particles per million, may be shown on-screen.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.19
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART) Notes continued… I
The <“Flow status”> page is located within the INFORMATION soft-key menu. It shows if the Flow Computer considers there to be either normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe. x
Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“DP flow stop limit”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. <“Flow status”> will show “Flow stopped”. However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”> menu data.
x
In the case of an Orifice System, the DP value must be greater than the setting of <“DP flow stop limit”> for normal flow. <“Flow status”> will then show “Flowing”.
J
Support for the use of other primary DP devices is made possible with the ability to programme (SET) values for the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient. For this software feature, these values can be programmed (SET) to a known value only by using the “Flow Meter” Wizard.
K
The liquid expansibility factor has a fixed value of 1.
L
See “Prime Viscosity” reference pages, starting on page 11.52.
Page 11.20
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS Equation List: The equations that follow are common to both ISO 5167-1:1991, ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 and AGA 3 standards unless otherwise stated. Refer to the appropriate Standard for information on any restrictions not listed here.
Support for the use of other primary DP devices is made possible with the ability to ‘Set’ values for the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient. For this software feature, these values can be programmed (SET) to a known value only by using the “Flow Meter” Wizard. Equation OR#1: Mass flow rate The mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
Using:
§ GP · Qm = K * ¨ * U ¸ * 3600 © 1000 ¹
Where: Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)...……….............................. {Menu Data: <“Mass rate”>} K
= Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor............…..……….................... {See Equation OR#2}
GP
= Differential pressure measurement (in mbar)…….….... {Menu Data: <“Diff press value”>}
U
= Density of measured fluid.........................……….......... {Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
Equation OR#2: Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor
Using:
K
Where: K
= C * E * H * d2 * N1 = Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor.................……….................... {Menu Data: <“Orif mass k factor”>}
C E
= Discharge coefficient..........................………................ {See equations OR#9a to OR#9d} = Velocity of approach factor.......................…….…......... {See Equation OR#5}
H
= Liquid expansibility factor = 1...................……….......... {Menu Data: <”Orif expandability”>}
d'
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.....………..... {See Equation OR#3a}
N1
= S*
S
= 3.141592654.........................................………............. {Actual constant used}
2 * 10 5 * 1000 = 0.0003512407367 ……….. 4
{Actual constant used}
Equation OR#3: Correction for area expansion of the orifice and pipe
Using:
d'
Where: d'
Using:
>
@
= d * 1 t t c * Eo * 10 6 …………….……………..….
OR#3a
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion……….......... {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>}
d
= Orifice diameter at calibration temperature ‘tc’……….... {Menu Data: <“Corr orif diameter”}
t
= Temperature at the metering-run..................………..... {Menu Data: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc
= Orifice calibration temperature....................………....... {Menu Data: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
Eo
= Orifice expansion coefficient.......................………....... {Menu Data: <“Orif expans coeff”>}
D'
= D * 1 t t c * EP * 10 6 ………………………..……..
Where: D'
>
@
OR#3b
= Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion........……..….... {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>}
D
= Pipe diameter at calibration temperature ‘toc’..….…..... {Menu Data: <“Orifice diameter”>}
t
= Temperature at the metering-run.................……..…..... {Menu Data: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc
= Orifice plate calibration temperature...........………........ {Menu Data: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
EP
= Pipe expansion coefficient.........………......................... {Menu Data: <“Pipe expans coeff”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.21
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS (Equation List continued…) Equation OR#4: Diameter ratio
d' D'
Uses:
E
=
Where:
E
= Beta ratio (no units)…………………….………………. {Menu Data: <“Orifice beta”>}
d'
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion………........ {Menu Data: <“Corr orif diameter”>}
D'
= Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion......…….….... {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>}
Equation OR#5: Velocity of approach factor
1 2
Using:
E
= 1 E4
Where:
E
= Velocity of approach factor..............…………............. {Menu Data: <“Orif vel of approach”>}
E
= Diameter ratio........................................…………....... {See Equation OR#4}
Equation OR#6a: (ISO 5167) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient
Using:
Red
§ Q · § 4 * 106 ·¸ = ¨ m ¸*¨ © 3600 ¹ ¨© S * D'*P ¸¹
Where:
Red
= Reynolds number............………….......................... {Menu Data: <“Reynolds number”>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate from previous cycle….…................. {See Equation OR#1}
S
= 3.141592654...................................………….......... {Actual constant used}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)………....... {See Equation OR#3b}
P
= Dynamic viscosity................………......................... {Menu Data: <“Meter dynamic visc”>}
Equation OR#6b: (AGA3) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient
Using:
Red
§ Q · § 4 * 106 ·¸ = N2 * ¨ m ¸ * ¨ © 3600 ¹ ¨© D'*P ¸¹
Where:
Red
= Reynolds number....................………...................... {Menu Data: <“Reynolds number”>}
N2
= 1273239.5.....................................………................ {Actual constant used}
Qm
= Mass flow rate from previous cycle…...................... {See Equation OR#1}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)………....... {See Equation OR#3b}
P
= Dynamic viscosity...................................………...... {Menu Data: <“Meter dynamic visc”>}
Equation OR#7a: STOLZ (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for Orifice Plate
x Basic Equation Component Use:
C1
Where: C1
E
§ 106 · ¸ = 0.5959 0.312 * E2.1 0.184 * E8 0.0029 * E2.5 * ¨ ¨ Red ¸ © ¹ = Basic equation component
0.75
= Diameter ratio......................…………......................... {See Equation OR#4}
R ed = Reynolds number.............................………................ {See Equation OR#6a}
Page 11.22
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS (Equation List continued…)
x For Corner Tappings only Use:
C
= C1
Where: C C1
x
For D and D/2 tappings only Use:
C
Where: C
x
= C1 0.039 * E4 * 1 E4
0.015839 * E 1
3
= Discharge coefficient...........………......................... {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
C1
= Basic equation component...........………................ {See above}
E
= Diameter ratio...................………............................ {See Equation OR#4}
For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is larger than 58.62mm Use:
C
Where: C
x
= Discharge coefficient...................……….................... {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>} = The basic equation component........………............... {See above}
= C1 0.039 * E4 * 1 E4
1
§ 0.85598 3 · ¨ *E ¸ D' © ¹
= Discharge coefficient..................……….................. {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
C1
= Basic equation component.............………............... {See above}
E
= Diameter ratio..............................………................. {See Equation OR#4}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)..…..……... {See Equation OR#3b}
For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is less than or equal to 58.62mm Use:
§ 2.286 4 · C = C1 ¨ * E ¸ * 1 E4 © D' ¹
1
§ 0.85598 3 · ¨ *E ¸ D' © ¹
Where: C = Discharge coefficient.....……….................................. {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>} C1 = Basic equation component.......………....................... {See above}
E = Diameter ratio.................................……....…….......... {See Equation OR#4} D' = Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)……..…....... {See Equation OR#3b} Equation OR#7b: (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for a Venturi tube
C = 0.984 when there is an ‘as cast’ convergent section where: 100mm d D t 800mm 0.3 d E t 0.75 2 * 105 d Red t 2 * 106 C = 0.995 when there is a machined convergent section where: 50mm d D t 250mm 0.4 d E t 0.75 2 * 105 d Red t 1 * 106 C =0.985 when there is a rough welded sheet iron convergent section where:200mm d D t 1200mm 0.4 d E t 0.7 2 * 105 d Red t 1 * 106
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.23
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS Equation OR#7c: (AGA3) Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate
Refer to part 4 of AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition) for details of the Reader-Harris/Gallagher equation.
Equation OR#7d: (ISO 5167-1:1998) Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate
Equation Terms and Menu Data:
C
= Discharge coefficient……………………………………...………… {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion).....……………….……... {See Equation OR#3b}
E
= Diameter ratio....................……………………............................. {See Equation OR#4}
R ed = Reynolds number..........................……………………................. {See Equation OR#7a}
Refer to section 8.3.2.1 of the ISO 5167-1:1991(E)/Amd.1:1998(E) Standard for details of the ReaderHarris/Gallagher equation.
Equation OR#8: Pressure ratio
P2 P1
Use:
PR =
Where:
PR = Pressure ratio...............................…………............... {Menu Data: <“Pressure ratio”>} P1
= Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)...…..……...... {No Menu Data}
= P PLoss * 10 3 P2
= Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar).……...…... {No Menu Data} = P1 GP
And:
P
= Pressure measured at the metering-run……...…....... {Menu Data: <“Meter pressure”>}
PLoss = Pressure loss (in Bar)..........………..…...................... {Menu Data: <“Pressure loss”>} = GP * 1.3 1.25 * E
Equation OR9: Gross Volume flow rate
Use:
QGV
§ ¨ Qm =¨ ¨U © Meter
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
Where:
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate..………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Gross vol rate”>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate…………………………..………………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
UMeter = Metering density……………………………...…………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
Page 11.24
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE V-CONE EQUATIONS Listed equations OVC#1 to OVC#5 are formulated from the standard flow equations as published by McCrometer, the V-Cone manufacturer. The remaining equations (OVC#6 to OVC#9) are provided for completeness and comply with the ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 Standards. Equation OVC#1: Mass flow rate The mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
Using:
Qm =
S * 4
§
· * E2 ¸ ¸ * GP * Cf * H * 3600 * Fa 4 ¸ © 1 E ¹
2 * g * U * ¨¨¨ D c
2
Where: Q m = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............……......……........... {Menu Data: <“Mass rate”>} gc
= Dimensional conversion constant = 1…….………...….. {Actual constant used}
U
= Density of measured fluid (in Kg/m3).........………..........{Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
D
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected…..…….. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
E
= Meter beta (diameter) ratio (no units)……...………..… {See Equation OVC#4b}
GP
= Differential pressure measurement (in Pa)…….…….... {Menu Data: <“Diff press value”>}
Cf
= Flow coefficient of the meter (no units)…………...……. {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
H
= Liquid expansibility factor = 1 (no units)…......……....... {Actual constant used}
Fa
= Meter thermal expansion factor…………………...…….. {See Equation OVC#2}
Note: The flow coefficient is not calculated when using a V-Cone meter. It is necessary to locate Cf on the calibration certificate and then ‘Set’ a value. Equation OVC#2: Thermal expansion factor (Fa) If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are the same…
Use:
Fa
Where: Fa
= 1 2 * DPE * t 528 ……………….……….……..……. OVC#2a = Meter thermal expansion factor………..…….………….. {No Menu Data}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Menu Data} t
= Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)….……… {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>}
If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same… 2
Use:
Fa
Where: Fa
1 4 2
D' *E' * 1 E ……………..…………………….. OVC#2b = 1 E' D * E 2
1 4 2
2
2
= Meter thermal expansion factor………..………...……… {No Menu Data}
D'
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..…. {See Equation OVC#4a}
D
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected…..…….. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
E'
= Beta ratio, corrected dimensions (no units)…….……… {See Equation OVC#3a}
E
= Beta ratio, uncorrected dimensions (no units)…...….… {See Equation OVC#3b}
Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio 1
Use:
E'
Where: E'
ª § d'2 ·º 2 = «1 ¨ 2 ¸» ………………….………..………………….. OVC#3a «¬ ¨© D' ¸¹»¼
= Meter beta ratio (no units)………….….……….………... {Menu Data: <“Orifice beta”>}
d'
= Cone outside diameter, corrected for expansion…...…{See Equation OVC#4b}
D'
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..….{See Equation OVC#4a}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.25
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE V-CONE EQUATIONS (Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio) 1
Use:
ª § d2 ·º 2 = «1 ¨ 2 ¸» ………………………………..……....………OVC#3b «¬ ¨© D ¸¹»¼
E
Where: E
= Meter beta ratio (no units)……….…………….……….... {No Menu Data}
d
= Cone outside diameter, uncorrected for expansion…... {Menu Data: <“Orifice diameter”>}
D
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion……... {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
Equation OVC#4: Corrections for thermal expansion of V-Cone If the expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same…
Use:
= D D * D * t tc ……………………..………….…….. OVC#4a
D'
Where: D' D
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……....… {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>} = Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Menu Data}
Use:
t tc
= Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)………….. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>} = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)..………. {Menu Data: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
d'
= d d * D * t t c ………………………..………...…….. OVC#4b
Where: d' d
= Cone outer diameter, corrected for expansion….…..… {Menu Data: <“Corr orif diameter”>} = Cone outer diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Menu Data: <“Orifice diameter”>}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Menu Data}
t tc
= Operating temperature(in degrees Rankine)……….….. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>} = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)…..……. {Menu Data: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
Equation OVC#5: Velocity of approach
Use:
E
§ 4 * QV = ¨¨ 2 © S*D
· ¸¸ ¹
Where:
E
= Velocity of approach factor………………….….……… {Menu Data: <”Orif vel of approach”>}
D
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
And:
§Q · Q V = ¨¨ m ¸¸ * 3600 © U ¹
Where:
Q V = Volume rate (in m3/second)…………………………….{No Menu Data} Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)……………………………. {See Equation OVC#1} U
= Density of measured fluid (in Kg/m3).........…...…........{Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
Equation OVC#6: Reynolds number
D * E * U
Use:
Red =
Where:
Red = Reynolds number……………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Reynolds number”>} E
Page 11.26
P
= Velocity of approach factor………………………..…… {See Equation OVC#5}
D
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
P
= Dynamic viscosity………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter dynamic visc”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE V-CONE EQUATIONS Equation OVC#7: Pressure ratio
P2 P1
Use:
PR =
Where:
PR = Pressure ratio...............................…………............... {Menu Data: <“Pressure ratio”>} P1
= Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)...…..……...... {No Menu Data}
= P PLoss * 10 3 P2
= Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar).……...…... {No Menu Data} = P1 GP
And:
P
= Pressure measured at the metering-run……...…....... {Menu Data: <“Meter pressure”>}
PLoss = Pressure loss (in Bar)..........………..…...................... {Menu Data: <“Pressure loss”>} = GP * 1.3 1.25 * E
Equation OVC#8: Mass rate ‘K factor’ Qm
Using:
K
=
Where:
K
= Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor........................…...……....... {Menu Data: <“Mass rate k factor”>}
GP * U
Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............……...…............... {Menu Data: <“Mass rate”>} GP
= Differential pressure (in Bar).......………….………..... {Menu Data: <“Diff pressure value”>}
U
= Density of measured fluid (in Kg/m3).......………........ {Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
Equation OR9: Gross Volume flow rate
Using:
§ ¨ Qm QGV = ¨ ¨U © Meter
Where: QGV Qm
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
= Gross Volume flow rate..………………………………..{Menu Data: <”Gross vol rate”>} = Mass flow rate…………………………..………………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
UMeter = Metering density……………………………...…………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.27
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.10 CORIOLIS FLOW METERING Measurements and Features Supported:
x x x
Mass flow rate - from a Coriolis mass flowmeter or mA/Hart Input Gross Volume flow rate Gross Standard Volume flow rate
Note: When a Coriolis meter is configured to output a frequency representing volume rather than mass, you must use the Turbine/PD Flow metering support.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>/<”Coriolis meter”> (3) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (4) <”Flow rates”>, (5) <“Density”>/<”Meter run density”> (6) <”Density”>/<”Base density”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
24
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
-
Flow meter type
1
Mass rate input type
E
:
2
Mass rate HART chl
A
33
Error% / Kfactor 10
3
Mass rate 0% value
34
Flowmeter K factor *
4
Mass rate 100% value
35
Meter factor *
5
HART mass rate fact
B
36
Ind Mass Rate HI lmt
C C
Error% / Kfactor 1 :
:
:
6
Mass rate HI limit
C
37
Ind Mass Rate LO lmt
7
Mass rate LO limit
C
38
Indicated mass rate
8
Mass rate *
39
Meter density *
9
Meter freq HI limit
40
Gross vol HI lmt
C
10
Flow stop threshold
41
Gross vol LO lmt
C
11
Meter freq *
12
Meter curve type
13
Meter curve points
14 :
23
Flow/freq 1 :
Flow/freq 10
G
42
Gross vol rate *
43
Gross std vol HI lmt
C
44
Gross std vol LO lmt
C
45
Gross std vol rate *
46
CCF *
47
Base density *
48
Flow rate action
D (D) F
Notes are listed on the next page
Page 11.28
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
CORIOLIS FLOW METERING
Notes: Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. A Analogue Input…..….…… Turn to reference page 11.6 HART Input……….……….Turn to Chapter 17 B
This factor location is for converting the Flow Computer scaled mass rate value into units of Kg per hour. By default, the factor has a value of 1.00; this setting assumes that the flowmeter converted the measured mass rate from units of Kg per hour into a mA value.
C
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
D
See “Volume Correction Factor” references in the Equation List section. [MENU(3)]
E
A Coriolis mass flow meter is a resonating tube device that will distort proportionately to the rate of fluid mass flowing through it. The relationship of mass flow to the distortion for the meter is characterised to produce a k-factor in pulse/mass or mass/pulse units. The signal output will generally be in the form of a pulse frequency signal, although a current 4-20mA output may also be available. The Coriolis meter may also be configured to output a signal representative of volume. In this case the flow computer will handle the meter signal output in the same way as a single pulse input turbine signal. Unlike turbine signals ‘error checking’, (IP252), will not be carried out on the mass flow input signal. However, similar to the turbine linearisation, the flow computer allows the user to define a mass flow linearisation curve across a flow range. The curve will define the error deviation against flow or K-factor against frequency in terms of mass units. The linearisation calculation will automatically account for mass or volume type units based on the meter type selected by the user during configuration.
F
By default, the 7955 calculates, for display purposes only, the actual live flow rates under a ‘Flow stopped’ condition, even when there is negligible flow. However, display can be forced to show zero flow by selecting the multiple-choice option with “Zero flow rates”. (Calculations using a flow rate will always use a zero value during a “Flow Stop” condition)
G
There following calibration curve options for Coriolis flow metering are supported: (1) Conversion (K v Hz) A ‘K-factor’ is interpolated, once during every machine cycle, from a user-programmable calibration curve. The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is a fixed (SET) value. A SET MF value can still be updated by a proving session, by product detection, or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see Figure 11.8-2 on page 11.10. (2) Correction (% v flow”) (Default Option) The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is calculated, once during every machine cycle, by a relative error (percentage) correction process. The ‘K-factor’ is a fixed (SET) value. They may then be updated by a proving session, by product detection or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see page 11.11. Proving sessions can overwrite either a ‘Meter factor’ value or the ‘K factor’ value. It is dependent on how proving is configured and if the prove session is successful. (See Chapter 16) Product detection can also overwrite a ‘Meter factor’ (MF) value and/or the ‘K factor’ value.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.29
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CORIOLIS FLOW METERING
EQUATION LIST
Equation List: Equation CFM#1: Gross Volume flow rate
Using:
QGV
§ ¨ Qm =¨ ¨U © Meter
Where:
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate…….……….……….. {Menu Data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate……………………...…………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
UMeter = Metering density………………...……………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
Equation CFM#2: Gross Standard Volume
Using:
QGSV = QGV * VCF
Where:
QSGV = Gross Standard Volume flow rate...……….. {Menu Data: <”Gross std vol rate”>} QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate..…………………….. {See Equation CFM#1}
VCF = Volume Correction Factor…………….…….. {See Equation CFM#3}
Equation CFM#3: Volume Correction Factor The equation used is dependent on the selected method for density referral - API Standard or 4x5 Matrix
Using:
VCF = CTL * CPL …………………………….…….... (API)
Or:
§U VCF = ¨¨ Meter © UBase
Where:
VCF = Volume Correction Factor…………….…….. {Menu Data: <”VCF”>}
· ¸ ...……………………………........... (4x5) ¸ ¹
CTL
= Correction for temperature effects on fluid… {Menu Data: <”CTL”>}
CPL
= Correction for pressure effects on fluid…… {Menu Data: <”CPL”>}
UMeter = Metering density………………...……………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>} UBase = Base density…………………….……………. {Menu Data: <”Base density value”>}
Page 11.30
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.11 TOTALISERS 7950/7951 totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over counter: Flow Total............... 5 x flow rate based totals for a metering-point. Each total is enabled by configuring the associated meter-run flow rate. Alarm Total……...… 1 x user total for a metering-point. This is for totalling of either a flow rate or missing pulses from a dual pickup flowmeter. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm. Error Pulse Total…. 1 x error pulse total for a metering-point. This is for totalling of missing pulses from a dual pickup flowmeter. This totaliser function is permanently enabled.
Further separation of a total is made by the flow computer mode: x
Normal mode (Standard) total This total is frozen whilst flow computer is in maintenance mode.
x
Maintenance mode total This total is frozen whilst the flow computer is in the normal operating mode.
Figure 11.11-1: Totaliser Blocks and Parameters
Extra Information: (1) For information on configuring pulse output channels, turn to page 11.78. (2) Net Oil and Net ‘Water’ totalisers are shown on page 11.65. Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisation”>/<”Standard”> (2) <”Flow rates”> (3) <“Flow totals”>/<”Meter run totals”> (4) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> (5) INFORMATION (‘i’-key) Menu
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data Lists: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Indicated vol rate *
Gross volume rate *
Ind volume total Ind vol increment Ind vol rollover Ind vol inhibit Maint IV total Maint IV inc
Gross vol total Gross vol inc Gross vol rollover Gross vol inhibit Maint GV total Maint GV inc
Ind std vol rate * Ind std vol total Ind std vol inc Ind std vol roll Ind std vol inhibit Maint ISV total Maint ISV inc
Gross std vol rate * Gross std vol total Gross std vol inc Gross std vol roll Gross std vol inh Maint GSV total Maint GSV inc
Mass rate * Mass total Mass increment Mass rollover Mass inhibit
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
8 9 10 11 12 13
Alarm total src ptr Alarm increment Alarm total Alarm rollover Err pulse ip 1 value Main turb errors
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Notes?
Index
E C B B
14 15 16 17 -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Main turb err roll Maint turb error Maint turb err inc Operating mode Flow status Flow meter
?
A
C D
Maint mass total
Maint mass inc Notes?
C
G (A)
Page 11.31
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TOTALISERS
CONFIGURATION
Notes: A
Indicated Volume measurements are not available when Orifice metering is selected.
B
Missing (or error) pulses are not counted unless the volumetric pulse flowmeter has dual pick-ups wired to the Flow Computer and the pulse input channel is configured accordingly.
C
By default, rollover (to zero) limits are pre-set to a very large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limits are sufficient for the metering application.
D
This optional totaliser parameter is for freezing the flow total whilst there is an active alarm. Also, read note E.
E
The alarm totaliser can be configured to continue totalling of a single parameter whilst there is an active alarm.
F
An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle. (a) Orifice or Coriolis Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu. (b) Turbine Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’ – the period that pulses were accumulated for calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value is available for viewing within the <”Health check”> feature menu. Editing an increment value has no effect.
G
There are two flow computer modes to be aware of: 1. Normal-mode In this mode, a standard total (e.g. “Ind volume total”) can increment. The corresponding maintenance-mode total (e.g. “Maint IV total”) will never increment. 2. Maintenance-mode In this mode, a maintenance-mode total can increment. The corresponding standard total will never increment. A mode can be selected only when the flow computer is in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state. For information on how the flow computer can be in a ‘flow stopped’ state, refer to the <”Flow status”> menu data notes on the flow metering pages: Turbine Flow.….. Page 11.9 Orifice Flow…..... Page 11.16 Coriolis Flow.….. Page 11.28
Page 11.32
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.12 PRIME ‘DENSITY LOOP’ FLUID TEMPERATURE Measurements Supported:
x x x
(Also, see page 11.38 for use of these measurements)
‘Density loop’ fluid temperature ‘A’ ‘Density’ loop fluid temperature ‘B’ Prime selected ‘density loop’ fluid temperature Figure 11.12-1: Prime ‘Density Loop’ Temperature Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Temperature”>/<“Densitometer temp”>, (2) <“Temperature”>/<“Dens temperature”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Header dens”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Menu Data (as displayed)
Dens temp A source Dens temp A @ 100% Dens temp A @ 0% Dens temp A HI lmt Dens temp A LO lmt Dens temp A FB type Dens temp A FB val Dens temp A offset Density A temp * Dens temp B source Dens temp B @ 100% Dens temp B @ 0%
Notes?
Index
A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B B C C D
Menu Data (as displayed)
Dens temp B HI limit Dens temp B LO limit Dens tempB FB type Dens tempB FB val Dens temp B offset Density B temp * Header txdr dens sel Prime dens temp * Prime dens temp FB
Notes?
B B C C D E, (F) (F) F
Notes: (X) – indirect reference in note X A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the value of the associated measurement.
C
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
D
Optional parameter for on-line correction to the LIVE associated measurement
E
See “Density” pages for use of this configuration parameter.
F Fallback value replaces the LIVE prime value when the prime density selection process (page 11.38) results in the fallback condition. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.33
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.13 PRIME ‘VISCOSITY LOOP’ FLUID TEMPERATURE Measurements Supported:
x x
(Also, see page 11.52 for use of these measurements)
‘Viscosity loop’ fluid temperature ‘A’ and temperature ‘B’ Prime ‘viscosity loop’ fluid temperature Figure 11.13-1: Prime 'Viscosity Loop' Temperature Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List:
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Temperature”>/<“Viscometer temp”>, (2) <“Temperature”>/<“Visc temperature”> and (3) <“Configure”>/<“Viscosity”>/<“Header viscosity”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Menu Data (as displayed)
Visc A temp source Visc A temp @ 100% Visc A temp @ 0% Visc A temp high lmt Visc A temp low lmt Visc A temp step lmt Visc A temp FB type Visc A temp FB value Visc A temp offset Visc A temperature * Visc B temp source Visc B temp @ 100%
Notes?
Index
A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B B C D D
A
Menu Data (as displayed)
Visc B temp @ 0% Visc B temp high lmt Visc B temp low lmt Visc B temp step lmt Visc B temp FB type Visc B temp FB value Visc B temp offset Visc B temperature * Header visc select Prime visc temp * Prime visc temp FB
Notes?
B B C D D
F, (G) (G) G
Notes: A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
E
Optional parameter for on-line correction to the LIVE associated measurement
F
See “Viscosity” reference pages for use of this configuration parameter.
G
Fallback value replaces the LIVE prime value when the prime viscosity selection process (page 11.38) results in a fallback condition.
Page 11.34
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.14 METER TEMPERATURE Measurement Supported:
x
(Also, see pages 11.44 - 45 for use of meter temperature)
Fluid temperature at the metering point Figure 11.14-1: Metering Temperature Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Temperature”>/<“Meter temperature”> and (2) <“Temperature”>/<“Meter run temp”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
A
6
Meter temp LO limit
B
7
Meter temp step lmt
C
1
Meter temp input chl
2
Meter temp @ 100%
3
Meter temp @ 0%
8
Meter temp FB type
D
4
Meter temp offset
E
9
Meter temp FB value
D
5
Meter temp HI limit
B
10
Meter temperature *
Notes: A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limit with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle.
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
E
Optional parameter for on-line correction to the LIVE associated measurement
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.35
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.15 ‘DENSITY LOOP’ PRESSURE Measurement Supported:
x
‘Density loop’ pressure Figure 11.15-1: 'Density Loop' Pressure Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Pressure”>/<“Header pressure”> and (2) <“Pressure”>/<“Dens pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
A
6
Dens press step lmt
1
Density pressure src
2
Dens press 100% val
7
Dens press FB type
3
Dens press 0% val
8
Dens press FB val
4
Dens press HI lmt
B
9
Density pressure *
5
Dens press LO lmt
B
Notes?
C D (D)
Notes: A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
Page 11.36
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.16 METER PRESSURE Measurement Supported:
x
Pressure at the metering point Figure 11.16-1: Metering Pressure Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Pressure”>/<“Meter run pressure”> and (2) <“Pressure”>/<“Meter run pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
A
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
1
Meter press source
6
Meter press step lmt
C
2
Meter press 100% val
7
Meter press FB type
D
3
Meter press 0% val
8
Meter press FB val
4
Meter press HI lmt
B
9
Meter pressure *
5
Meter press LO lmt
B
(D)
Notes: Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. A Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle.
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.37
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.17 HEADER DENSITY Measurements Supported:
x x x
(Note: These measurements are also available when measuring viscosity)
Density ‘A’ – from a liquid density transducer or a 7827 5 viscosity analyser) Density ‘B’ – from a liquid density transducer, a 7827 viscosity analyser, a mA Input or a HART Input Prime selected density – from Density ‘A’ or ‘B’ or Fallback facility)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Time period inputs”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<“Header dens”> and (4) <“Density”>/<“Header density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1a 1b 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 1 * Time period input 1b * Time period 1 type Dens 1 glitch limit Dens meter 1 K0 Dens meter 1 K1 Dens meter 1 K2 Density 1 correct Dens meter 1 K18 Dens meter 1 K19 Dens meter 1 K20a Dens meter 1 K20b Dens meter 1 K21a Dens meter 1 K21b Dens meter 1 type Dens meter 1 VOS Dens meter 1 offset Dens meter 1 factor Density A value * Header den comp lmt Density B calc sel
Notes?
Index
A A A
21a 21b 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
C
C
B
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 2 * Time period input 2b * Time period 2 type Dens 2 glitch limit Dens meter 2 K0 Dens meter 2 K1 Dens meter 2 K2 Density 2 correct Dens meter 2 K18 Dens meter 2 K19 Dens meter 2 K20a Dens meter 2 K20b Dens meter 2 K21a Dens meter 2 K21b Dens meter 2 type Dens meter 2 VOS Dens meter 2 offset Dens meter 2 factor DensB Ain/HART src Density B @ 100% Density B @ 100%
Notes?
C
C
F
The Mobrey 7827 does not measure fluid density as accurately as a Mobrey 783x or 784x liquid density transducer. Density measurements from a 7827 also require a correction for viscosity effects if the fluid viscosity exceeds 100cP.
Page 11.38
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
HEADER DENSITY
(Menu data list continued…) Index
41 42 43 44 45 46
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Density B value * Header txdr dens sel Density HI limit Density LO limit Header dens FB type Header dens FB val
Index
47 48
D E E
tA tB PDensity
Menu Data (as displayed)
Header density * Head analog dens * Density A temp * Density B temp * Density pressure *
Notes?
G
Notes: A The “Density” option (value) is for when the density ‘A’ measurement involves a liquid density transducer. Live transducer values will appear in the <“Time period Input 1”> menu data page (location).
The “7827” option (value) is for when the density ‘A’ measurement involves a Mobrey 7827 viscosity analyser. Live 7827 values will appear in the <“Time Period Input 1b”> menu data page (location) instead of the <“Time Period Input 1”> menu data page (location). (Chapter 2 features time period input and analogue input rear panel connections) B
This alarm limit checking can be switched off by setting a large enough density value that will always greater than the difference between density ‘A’ and density ‘B’ measurements.
C
Various combinations of corrections to density can be selected, as shown in Table 11.17.1. Table 11.17.2 then shows the availability of selected corrections when using different types of transducer.
D
Select a logic table to be used by the Flow Computer to perform prime header density channel re-selection. (For details, turn to the “Prime Header Density Re-selection Procedure” section on page 11.37)
E
High and low alarm limits are applied to the selected prime density value. These limits are not checked when both limits are programmed (SET) to zero.
F
Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 16
G
This measurement can be used by the Product Detection feature. (See “Interface Detection” page 11.74) Table 11.17.1: Menu data option descriptors for selecting corrections Option Descriptor (as displayed)
Correction: Temperature
Correction: Pressure
Correction: VOS
Correction: Viscosity
None
U
U
U
U
Temp
9
U
U
U
Press
U
9
U
U
VOS
U
U
9
U
Temp press
9
9
U
U
Temp VOS
9
U
9
U
Press VOS
U
9
9
U
Temp press VOS
9
9
9
U
Table 11.17.2: Availability of Corrections to Density (by transducer) Transducer Type
Temperature Effects
Pressure Effects
Viscosity Effects
VOS Effects
7827
9
U
U
U 9 9
783x/784x
9
9
U
1762
9
9
U
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.39
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
HEADER DENSITY
CONFIGURATION
Prime Header Density Re-Selection Procedure In the event of a density input channel (e.g. density ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the Flow Computer will perform a re-selection procedure for obtaining a prime density value from an alternative source. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected logic decision table to determine where now to get the prime value. Table 11.17.3: Logic table for the “Automatic A” configuration option. (Density ‘A’ is preferred) Key: Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ A#B (Comp) Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Density A = Density ‘A’, Out of Limit Out of Limit Out of Limit InputFailed InputFailed Selected B = Density ‘B’, Yes Yes Yes No No FB FB = Fallback Yes Yes No No No A Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 11.17.4: Logic table for the “Density A” configuration option Ö
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Density ‘A’ Out of Limit No No Yes Yes
B B A A B A FB FB B B B FB B B FB A FB A FB A FB A FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB
Notes: 1. The “Automatic B” configuration option uses the same logic table except Density ‘B’ is the preferred channel.
This preference reverses the A and B selection in the last column of this table. 2. “Out of limit” columns 1 and 2 are concerned with the HI or LO alarm limits. 3. “Input failed” columns are concerned with ‘Live’ inputs.
Density ‘A’ Input Failed No Yes No Yes
Prime Density Selected A FB FB FB
Key: - A = Density ‘A’, B = Density ‘B’, FB = Fallback Table 11.17.5: Logic table for the “Density B” configuration option Ö
Density ‘B’ Out of Limit No No Yes Yes
Density ‘B’ Input Failed No Yes No Yes
Prime Density Selected B FB FB FB
Key: - A = Density ‘A’, B = Density ‘B’, FB = Fallback
Page 11.40
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
HEADER DENSITY
Density Equation List (Menu data listed is for channel ‘A’. Menu data for channel ‘B’ is shown in the menu data listed on page 11.38)
IMPORTANT NOTICE Density measurements from a Mobrey 7827 are supported. However, the density corrections for viscosity effects and VOS effects are not yet available in software version 2510. The viscosity effect correction is normally required for fluids with a viscosity that exceeds 100cP. For further information on these corrections, refer to the 7827 Technical Manual.
Equation DE#1a: Uncorrected density from a Mobrey 783x/784x liquid density transducer
Using:
Uu
= K 0 K1*W K 2*W2
Where:
Uu
= Density (uncorrected)………………………………………. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K 0 = Transducer calibration factor K0…………………………… Menu Data: <”Density1 K0”> K1
= Transducer calibration factor K1…………………………… Menu Data: <”Density1 K1”>
K 2 = Transducer calibration factor K2…………………………… Menu Data: <”Density1 K2”> W
= Periodic time from transducer (Ps)………………………... Menu Data: <”Time Period Input 1”>
Equation DE#1b: Uncorrected density from a Mobrey 7827 liquid viscosity transducer
Using:
Uu
= K 0 K1*WB K 2*WB2
Where:
Uu
= Density (uncorrected)………………………………………. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K 0 = Transducer calibration factor K0…………………………... Menu Data: <”Density1 K0”> K1
= Transducer calibration factor K1………………….……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K1”>
K 2 = Transducer calibration factor K2….……………………...... Menu Data: <”Density1 K2”> W B = Periodic time from transducer (Ps)………………………... Menu Data: <”Time Period Input 1b”>
Equation DE#2: Density corrected for temperature effects This equation corrects a density measurement for the temperature effect on the metalwork of the transducer when operated away from the calibration temperature.
Using:
Ut
= Uu * >1 K18 * t tb K19 * t tb @
Where:
Ut
= New density (temperature corrected)…………….…….… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
Uu
= Density without temperature correction…………………... Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K 18 = Transducer calibration factor K18………………………..... Menu Data: <”Density1 K18”> K 19 = Transducer calibration factor K19…….……………………. Menu Data: <”Density1 K19”> t = ‘Density loop’ temperature…………..………………….…. Menu Data: <”Density A temp”> tb = Transducer calibration temperature (always 20qC)...…… (Not displayed in menu)
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.41
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
HEADER DENSITY
EQUATION LIST
Note: Menu data listed is for channel ‘A’. Menu data for channel ‘B’ is shown in the menu data listed on page 11.38 Equation DE#3: Density corrected for pressure effects This equation corrects a density measurement for the pressure effect on the metalwork of the transducer when operated away from the calibration pressure.
Using:
UP
= U * 1 K 20 * P Pb K 21 * P Pb
Where:
UP
= New density (pressure corrected)…….………………… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
U
= Density without pressure correction……………..…...… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
P
= ‘Density loop’ pressure…………….……………….……. Menu Data: <”Header dens press”>
Pb
= Transducer calibration pressure (always 1 bar Abs.).… (Not displayed in menu)
K 20
= K 20 A K 20B * P PB ……………………...…………… (Not displayed in menu)
K 21
= K 21A K 21B * P PB …………………………………… (Not displayed in menu)
And:
Where:
K 20 A = Transducer calibration factor K20A……………..……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K20a”> K 20B = Transducer calibration factor K20B……………..……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K20b”> K 21A = Transducer calibration factor K21A……………..……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K21a”> K 21B
= Transducer calibration factor K21B………………..…….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K21b”>
Equation DE#4: Density corrected for VOS effects [NOT AVAILABLE TO 7827 USERS] This equation corrects a density measurement for the VOS effect of the measured liquid compared to the VOS effect on the calibration liquid at the same conditions.
Using:
2· § § ¨ ¨ K vos ·¸ ¸ 1 ¨¨ ¨ W * VOS ¸ ¸¸ C¹ © ¹ Uv = U * © 2· § § · K ¨ ¨ vos ¸ ¸ ¨¨1 ¨ W * VOS ¸ ¸¸ A ¹ © ¹ ©
Where:
Uv
= New density with VOS correction………..……………… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
U
= Density without VOS correction………..……………….. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
W
= Periodic time from transducer (Ps)……………………... Menu Data: <”Time Period Input 1”>
VOS A
= VOS (velocity of sound) of measured liquid…………… Menu Data: <” Density1 VOS”>
VOSC
= VOS (velocity of sound) of calibration liquid.………….. See Equation DE#5
K vos
= Value automatically selected from a built-in table…….. (Not displayed in menu)
Table 11.17.6: KVOS values for Equation DE#4
Page 11.42
Transducer
KVOS
1762
28500
7830/7840
35900
7835/7845
19800
7826
67800
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
HEADER DENSITY
Note: Menu data listed is for channel ‘A’. Menu data for channel ‘B’ is shown in the menu data listed on page 11.38
Equation DE#5: VOS (velocity of sound) effects of calibration fluid This equation is for generating a factor for the VOS effect on the calibration liquid under present flow conditions. It is used in association with Equation DE#4.
Using:
VOSC = K vos1 K vos2 * U K vos3 * U2 K vos 4 * U3
Where:
VOSC = New VOS (velocity of sound) of calibration fluid……….... (Not displayed in menu) U
= Density without VOS correction……………………..……. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K vos1 = Value from column 2 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu) K vos2 = Value from column 3 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu) K vos3 = Value from column 4 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu) K vos 4 = Value from column 5 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu)
Table 11.17.1: KVOS values for Equation DE#5 Transducer
KVOS1
KVOS2
KVOS3
KVOS4
1762
1157
0
0
0.000000343
7830/7840
214.91
0.15941
0.0025398
-0.0000014169
7835/7845
214.91
0.15941
0.0025398
-0.0000014169
7826
230.915
0.126713
0.00255082
-0.0000014164
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.43
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.18 API REFERRED DENSITY (Note: The alternative density referral method is on page 11.45)
Measurements Supported:
x x
Base density by API referral calculation Meter density direct from prime density or by API referral calculation
(1) General Crude Oil (2) General Products (3) User-defined K0, K1
API Standard Compliance API Std 2540, Chapter 11.1 Tables 23A & 24A, 53A & 54A (SG range is 0.6610 to 1.076) API Std 2540, Chapter 11.1 Tables 23B & 24B, 53B & 54B (SG range is 0.6535 to 1.076) API Std 2540, Chapter 11.1 Tables 24C, 54C Figure 11.18-1: API Referred Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Menu Data (as displayed)
Header density * Dens calc sel Dens Base temp cond Base press value Equilibrium press API product select API range select API User K0 API User K1 Base density value * CTLd CPLd API alpha d->b API compress F d->b
Notes?
Index
E D
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
CTL CPL API compress F b->m API alpha b->m Meter dens/visc sel Meter density * Base dens HI limit Base dens LO limit Meter temperature * Prime dens temp * Density pressure * Meter pressure *
C
A B
Notes: A
See “Prime Density Loop Fluid Temperature” reference pages, starting with page 11.33
B
See “Density Loop Pressure” reference pages, starting with page 11.36
C
Select the “Calculation” option descriptor unless your intention is to by-pass the referral calculations
D
This parameter allows the selection of a density referral standard. (Select the “API” option). [MENU(2)]
E
Referral calculations require prime density to be within the range of 350 to 1074 Kg/m3
Page 11.44
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.19 4X5 MATRIX REFERRED DENSITY (Note: The alternative density referral method is on page 11.44)
Measurements Supported:
x x
Base density by Mobrey referral calculation Meter density direct from prime density or by Mobrey referral calculation Figure 11.19-1: 4x5 Matrix Referred Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Menu Data (as displayed)
Header density * Dens calc sel Density matrix T0 Density matrix T1 Density matrix T2 Density matrix T3 Density matrix T4 Density matrix R00 Density matrix R01 Density matrix R02 Density matrix R03 Density matrix R10 Density matrix R11 Density matrix R12 Density matrix R13 Density matrix R20 Density matrix R21 Density matrix R22 Density matrix R23 Density matrix R30
Notes?
D
Index
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Density matrix R31 Density matrix R32 Density matrix R33 Density matrix R40 Density matrix R41 Density matrix R42 Density matrix R43 Density K40 Density K41 Base density value * Base dens HI limit Base dens LO limit Meter dens/visc sel Meter density * Dens Base temp cond Base press value Meter temperature * Prime dens temp * Density pressure * Meter pressure *
C
A B
Notes: A See “Prime Density Loop Fluid Temperature” reference pages, starting with page 11.33. B
See “Density Loop Pressure” reference pages, starting with page 11.36.
C
Select the “Calculation” option descriptor unless your intention is to by-pass the referral calculations.
D
This parameter allows the selection of a density referral standard. (Select the “4x5 Matrix” option). [MENU(2)]
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.45
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.20 METER DENSITY OF KNOWN FLUID Measurements Supported:
x
(For the equivalent meter density measurement, see the next page)
Base Density of a known fluid by referral calculation Standards Compliance NGL/LPG Ethylene Ethylene Propylene
GPA Technical Publication TP25, Tables 24E & 23E IUPAC API 2565 Chapter 11.3.2.1 API 2565 Chapter 11.3.3.2
(SG range is 0.495 to 0.637)
Figure 11.20-1: Known Fluid Base Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
(E)
7
Equilibrium press
1
Header dens *
2
Meter dens/visc sel
C
8
Base dens method
3
Base temperature
MENU(5)
9
Base dens HI limit
4
Base press value
MENU(6)
10
Base dens LO limit
5
Prime dens temp *
A
11
Base density value *
6
Density pressure *
B
Notes?
MENU(6) D
Notes: A
Observed temperature. See configuration reference page 11.33
B
Observed pressure. See configuration reference page 11.36
C
Select the “Calculation” option (value) unless there is a need to by-pass the density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
D
Select a referral calculation for each metering-point. [MENU(2)]
E
API (Std 2540) referral is performed for a generalised product where the Header density is within the range of 3 350 to 1074 Kg/m . (Header density information starts on page 11.38).
Page 11.46
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.21 BASE DENSITY OF KNOWN FLUID Measurements supported:
x
(For the equivalent base density measurement, see previous page)
Meter Density of a known fluid - direct from Header or by referral calculation Standards Compliance NGL/LPG Ethylene Ethylene Propylene
GPA Technical Publication TP25, Tables 24E & 23E IUPAC API 2565 Chapter 11.3.2.1 API 2565 Chapter 11.3.3.2
(SG range is 0.495 to 0.637)
Figure 11.21-1: Meter Density - Known Fluid - Blocks and Parameters (1x4x1)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
1
Base density *
(E)
6
Meter pressure *
B
2
Dens Base temp cond
MENU(5)
7
Base dens method
D
3
Base press value
MENU(6)
8
Meter dens/visc sel
C
4
Equilibrium press
MENU(6)
9
Meter density *
5
Meter temperature *
A
Notes: A
Observed temperature. See configuration reference page 11.33.
B
Observed pressure. See configuration reference page 11.36.
C
Select the “Calculation” option (value) when using density referral calculation.
D
Select a referral calculation for each metering-point. [MENU(2)]
E
API (Std 2540) referral is performed for a generalised product where the Header density is within the range of 350 to 1074 Kg/m3. (Base density information starts on page 11.46)
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.47
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.22 SPECIFIC GRAVITY / DEGREES API Measurement Supported:
x
Specific gravity for the measured fluid Equation DE#6: Specific gravity of measured fluid UBase U Water
Using:
SG
=
Where:
SG
= Specific gravity of measured fluid
UBase
= Base density of measured fluid
U Water = Base density of water
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Specific gravity”> and (2) <“Density”>/<”Base density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
1
Base density value *
A
4
SG HI limit
C
2
Water density (SG) *
B
5
SG LO limit
C
3
SG value *
Notes: A
Turn to pages 11.44 - 45 for base density measurement support.
B
Turn to “Net Oil/Net Water” reference pages for details.
C
Optional alarm limits for specific gravity values.
Measurement Supported:
x
Degrees API for measured fluid Equation DE#7: Degrees API for measured fluid
141.5 131.5 SG
Using:
API $ =
Where:
API $ = Degrees API SG = Specific gravity
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Density”><”Degrees API”> and (2) <“Configure”>/<“Specific gravity”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1
Menu Data (as displayed)
Degrees API *
Notes?
Index
2
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
SG value *
Notes: (Nothing Applicable)
Page 11.48
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.23 SPECIAL EQUATIONS Feature:
x
Special Equation Type One
Although this special equation can be used for any purpose, the typical application is for calculating, for example, Degrees Brix for non-linear products. Equation SPE#1: Special Equation Type One
Using:
R
Where:
§ a * b X * c ) · ¸ A B¨ ¨ d* e Y * f ¸ © ¹
A, B
=
Constants
a-f
=
Pointers
X. Y
=
Constants
R
=
Result
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Special equations”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Term
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Term
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
R
Special equation 1 *
N/A
General constant 1
C
A
Special eq 1 const A
N/A
General constant 2
C
B
Special eq 1 const B
N/A
General constant 3
C
X
Special eq 1 const X
N/A
General constant 4
C
Y
Special eq 1 const Y
a
Special eq 1 ptr a
B
b
Special eq 1 ptr b
B
c
Special eq 1 ptr c
B
d
Special eq 1 ptr d
B
e
Special eq 1 ptr e
B
f
Special eq 1 ptr f
B
Special eq 1 name
A
N/A Notes: A
A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to give the calculation a meaningful name. Changing the default text will alter the on-screen description of the menu data for term R.
B
Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term. Identification numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then pressing the ‘a’-key. Re-press the ‘a’-key to remove the number from the display. With this type of menu data the word “off” is seen when not in use.
C
There is a collection of unused data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided for defining constants that could be identified as equation terms ‘a’, ‘b’, etc.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.49
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.24 HEADER ‘VISCOSITY LOOP’ DENSITY Measurements Supported:
(Note: These measurements are available only when measuring viscosity)
‘Viscosity loop’ Fluid Density ‘A’ (direct from a Mobrey 7827 6 viscosity analyser) ‘Viscosity loop’ Fluid Density ‘B’ (direct from a Mobrey 7827 viscosity analyser) Header ‘viscosity loop’ density (from density ‘A’ or ‘B’ or fallback)
x x x
Figure 11.24-1: Viscosity Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>/<”Viscometer 3”>/<”Density data”> and <”Viscometer 4”>/<”Density data”> (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Time period inputs”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Header visc dens”>, (4) <“Density”>, (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 tA (Visc) 25
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 3b * Visc meter A K0 Visc meter A K1 Visc meter A K2 Visc meter A correct Visc meter A K18 Visc meter A K19 Density3 txdr type Visc meter A VOS Visc meter A offset Visc meter A factor Visc A Density * Visc A temperature * Header visc select
Notes?
Index
A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 TB (Visc) 26
E
D
C
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 4b * Visc meter B K0 Visc meter B K1 Visc meter B K2 Visc meter B correct Visc meter B K18 Visc meter B K19 Density4 txdr type Visc meter B VOS Visc meter B offset Visc meter B factor Visc B Density * Visc B temperature * Visc header density *
Notes?
B
E
D
Notes: A Live periodic time values, representing fluid density, from a connected Mobrey 7827 viscosity transducer appear in the <“Time Period Input 3b”> menu data page (location) instead of <“Time Period Input 3”>. B
Live periodic time values, representing fluid density, from a connected Mobrey 7827 viscosity transducer appear in the <“Time Period Input 4b”> menu data page (location) instead of <“Time Period Input 4”>.
C
This parameter is also used when configuring the prime selection of header viscosity measurements. [MENU(3)] Refer to Table 11.24.3 on page 11.51 for the selection logic of header ‘viscosity loop’ density.
D
Optional correction to density. A value for the VOS effect has to be programmed into the Flow Computer. For information about velocity of sound effects on fluid density measurements, refer to the handbook supplied with the transducer.
6
The Mobrey 7827 does not measure fluid density as accurately as a 783x or 784x liquid density transducer. Density measurements from a 7827 may require a correction for viscosity effects if the fluid viscosity is in excess of 100cP.
Page 11.50
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
HEADER ‘VISCOSITY LOOP’ DENSITY
(Notes continued…) E
Various combinations of corrections to density can be selected and applied, as shown in Table 11.24.1. Table 11.24.2 then shows the suitability of corrections when using the 7827. Table 11.24.1: Viscosity Loop Density Correction Options Option Descriptor (as displayed)
Correction: Temperature
Correction: VOS
Correction: Pressure
Correction: Viscosity
None
U
U
U
U
Temp
9
U
U
U
Press
U
U
U
U
VOS
U
9
U
U
Temp press
9
U
U
U U
Temp VOS
9
9
U
Press VOS
U
9
U
U
Temp press VOS
9
9
U
U
Table 11.24.2: Applicable Corrections to Density from a 7827 Transducer Type
Temperature Effects
Viscosity Effects
VOS Effects
7827
9
U
U
Table 11.24.3: Logic table for Prime Viscosity Density Selection Prime Selection: Header Viscosity *
Visc Density ‘A’ Live Input Fail ?
Visc Density ‘B’ Live Input Fail ?
Header ‘Viscosity Loop’ Density
“Viscosity A”
No
No
C
“Viscosity A”
No
Yes
C
“Viscosity A”
Yes
No
FAIL
“Viscosity A”
Yes
Yes
FAIL
“Viscosity B”
No
No
D
“Viscosity B”
No
Yes
FAIL
“Viscosity B”
Yes
No
D
“Viscosity B”
Yes
Yes
FAIL
Fallback
No
No
FB
Fallback
No
Yes
FB
Fallback
Yes
No
FB
Yes
Yes
FB
Fallback
“C” = Density ‘C’ (Viscosity density channel ‘A’) “D” = Density ‘D’ (Viscosity density channel ‘B’) “FAIL” = No Alternative Source FB = Fallback * Monitor selection by viewing <”Header Dyn visc sel”> menu data page
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.51
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.25 HEADER VISCOSITY Measurements:
x x
(Note: These measurements are also available whilst measuring ‘viscosity loop’ density)
Dynamic Viscosity ‘A’ & ‘B’, Header dynamic viscosity Kinematic Viscosity ‘A’ & ‘B’, Header kinematic viscosity Figure 11.25-1: Header Viscosity Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Health Check”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Time period inputs”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Viscosity”>/<”Header viscosity”>, (4) <“Viscosity”>/<”Header viscosity”> Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Page 11.52
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 3 * Time period input 3b * Q factor visc A * Visc A calib ranges Visc A ultra-low V0 Visc A ultra-low V1 Visc A ultra-low V2 Visc A u-low scale Visc A low V0 Visc A low V1 Visc A low V2 Visc A low scale Visc A medium V0 Visc A medium V1 Visc A medium V2 Visc A medium scale Visc A high V0 Visc A high V1 Visc A high V2 Visc A high scale Visc A Hysteresis Visc A ultra-low lmt Visc A UL-L switch Visc A L-M switch Visc A M-H switch Visc A high range Dynamic visc A * Visc A current range Visc glitch filter
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
B
Index
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 4 * Time period input 4b * Q factor visc B * Visc B calib ranges Visc B ultra-low V0 Visc B ultra-low V1 Visc B ultra-low V2 Visc B u-low scale Visc B low V0 Visc B low V1 Visc B low V2 Visc B low scale Visc B medium V0 Visc B medium V1 Visc B medium V2 Visc B medium scale Visc B high V0 Visc B high V1 Visc B high V2 Visc B high scale Visc B Hysteresis Visc B U-low limit Visc B UL-L switch Visc B L-M switch Visc B M-H switch Visc B high range Dynamic visc B * Visc B current range Dyn visc comp limit
Notes?
B
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
HEADER VISCOSITY
(Menu Data List continued…) Index
59 60 61 62 63 64 65
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
66 67 68 69 70 71 72
Dyn visc HI limit Dyn visc LO limit Kin visc HI limit Kin visc LO limit Viscosity FB type Dyn visc FB value Kin visc FB value
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Visc header density * Kinematic visc A * Kinematic visc B * Header visc select Header kin visc * Header dynamic visc * Header Dyn visc sel
A
Notes: The selected option also controls the prime selection of a ‘viscosity loop’ density measurement channel. A B
A brief guide to the Hysteresis mechanism is shown below.
Hysteresis Guide The Flow Computer can use hysteresis to select a calibrated range for the transducer; even if programmed ranges have some overlap. Range identification, even without use of hysteresis, allows the Flow Computer to use the most appropriate set of factors for calculations.
The V0, V1 and V2 factors for each calibrated range are found on the transducer certificate. For further information on calibration ranges, refer to the Technical Manual that was supplied with the transducer. Hysteresis also avoids continuous switching between calibration ranges when the dynamic viscosity is fluctuating around a calibration range boundary. Example: Calibration Range Identification Consider 1% hysteresis with Viscosity Transducer ‘A’ calibrated for low, medium and high ranges. Work through the numbered calculations with reference to the diagram and table of configuration details associated with hysteresis.
Dynamic Viscosity (cP) No Calibration Range (Fail) SA SB
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Visc A ultra-low lmt
1 cP
Ref.
Calculated Boundary Values
-
-
Visc A UL-L switch
10 cP
SD
9.9 cP, 10.1 cP
Visc A L-M switch
100 cP
SC
99 cP, 101 cP
Visc A M-H switch
1000 cP
SB
990 cP, 1010 cP
12500 cP
SA
-
low, med,high
-
-
1%
-
-
Visc A high range Visc A calib ranges Visc A hysteresis
High Range A1
Hysteresis Band
B1
Medium Range SC
A2
Calculated Hysteresis Points
Hysteresis Band B2 Low Range
SD
No Calibration Range (Fail)
A
Hysteresis · § Zone High * ¨ 1 ¸ © 100 ¹
B
Hysteresis · § Zone Low * ¨ 1 ¸ © 100 ¹
Calculations: 1
Hysteresis boundary point calculations for switching between the medium and high calibration ranges.
A1
1 · § S B * ¨1 ¸ © 100 ¹
B1
1 · § S B * ¨1 ¸ 100 © ¹
A1
1000 * 0.99
B1
1000 * (1.01)
A1
990
B1
1010
Results x Switch to high range from medium range at just over 1010 cP. x Switch to medium range from high range at just under 990 cP. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.53
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION 2
HEADER VISCOSITY
Hysteresis point calculations for switching between medium and low viscosity calibration ranges.
A2
1 · § SC * ¨1 ¸ 100 ¹ ©
B2
1 · § SC * ¨1 ¸ 100 © ¹
A2
100 * 0.99
B2
100 * 1.01
A2
99
B2
101
ResultsSwitch to medium range from low range at just over 101 cP. x Switch to low range from medium range at just under 99 cP. 3
Hysteresis point calculations for changes switching low and ultra-low viscosity calibration ranges: Without an ultra-low calibration range set-up, dynamic viscosity ‘A’ data shows “Fail” on the status line when the calculated value goes below 9.9 cP. The low range remains selected. Once a fail status is shown, dynamic viscosity ‘A’ must go above 10.1 cP to become “Live”.
4
Hysteresis point calculations for changes around the upper limit of the high viscosity calibration range: The dynamic viscosity ‘A’ menu data shows “Fail” on the status line when the calculated value goes above the high limit - 12,500 cP in the example. The high range remains selected. Once a “fail” status is shown, the dynamic viscosity ‘A’ measurement value must fall below the high limit (12,500 cP) to become “Live” again.
Viscosity Equation List: (Note: Menu data shown is for the viscosity measurement channel ‘A’. For channel ‘B’ parameters, see page 11.52)
Equation VISC#1: Quality factor from a Mobrey 7827 liquid viscosity analyser For an example, menu data shown is for viscosity analyser 1.
Using:
1
Q =
ª§ W «¨ A «¨© W B ¬ Where:
· ¸¸ ¹
0.5
§W ¨¨ B © WA
· ¸¸ ¹
0.5 º
» » ¼
Q
= Quality factor of transducer (no units)….……...……... {Menu Data: <”Q factor visc A”>}
WA
= Time period ‘A’ of 7827 (Ps)………..….….….……...… {Menu Data: <”Time period input 3”>}
WB
= Time period ‘B’ of 7827 (Ps)………..….…….……..…. {Menu Data: <”Time period input 3b”>}
Equation VISC#2: Fluid dynamic viscosity
1 · § 1 · § V0 ¨ V1* 2 ¸ ¨ V2* 4 ¸ Q ¹ © Q ¹ ©
Using:
K
=
Where:
K
= Fluid dynamic viscosity (cP)…………………………….{Menu Data: <”Dynamic visc A”>}
V0 = 7827 calibration factor V0……..…………...…………… {Menu Data:} * V1 = 7827 calibration factor V1…………….………………… {Menu Data: } * V2 = 7827 calibration factor V2…………..……..…………… {Menu Data: } * Q
= Quality factor (no units)…………………..…..………... {Menu Data: <”Q factor visc A”>} * The Flow Computer automatically uses values for V0, V1 and V2 from a selected calibrated range.
Page 11.54
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.26 VISCOSITY REFERRAL Measurements Supported:
x
x
Kinematic viscosity of fluid at base conditions
Kinematic viscosity of measured fluid at the metering point
Figure 11.26-1: Viscosity Referral Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Viscosity”>/<”Referred viscosity”> and <”Base kin viscosity”>, (2) <“Viscosity”>/<”Header viscosity”> (3) <”Temperature”> and (4) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Meter run density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index 70 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
Menu Data (as displayed) Header kin visc * Prime visc temp * Meter temperature * Visc Base temp cond Absolute zero ASTM temperature T1 ASTM viscosity @T1 ASTM temperature T2 ASTM viscosity @T2 ASTM curve1 T1 ASTM curve1 T2 ASTM curve1 visc @ T1 ASTM curve1 visc @ T2 ASTM curve2 T1 ASTM curve2 T2 ASTM curve2 visc @ T1 ASTM curve2 visc @ T2 ASTM curve3 T1 ASTM curve3 T2 ASTM curve3 visc @ T1 ASTM curve3 visc @ T2 ASTM curve4 T1 ASTM curve4 T2 ASTM curve4 visc @ T1 ASTM curve4 visc @ T2
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Notes?
Index
A D E
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121
B
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
4x5 curve temp T0 4x5 curve temp T1 4x5 curve temp T2 4x5 curve temp T3 4x5 curve temp T4 4x5 curve1 visc @T0 4x5 curve1 visc @T1 4x5 curve1 visc @T2 4x5 curve1 visc @T3 4x5 curve1 visc @T4 4x5 curve2 visc @T0 4x5 curve2 visc @T1 4x5 curve2 visc @T2 4x5 curve2 visc @T3 4x5 curve2 visc @T4 4x5 curve3 visc @T0 4x5 curve3 visc @T1 4x5 curve3 visc @T2 4x5 curve3 visc @T3 4x5 curve3 visc @T4 4x5 curve4 visc @T0 4x5 curve4 visc @T1 4x5 curve4 visc @T2 4x5 curve4 visc @T3 4x5 curve4 visc @T4
Page 11.55
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
VISCOSITY REFERRAL
CONFIGURATION
(Menu Data List continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
122
Visc referral method
123
Meter dens/visc sel
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
124
Base kinematic visc *
C
125
Meter kinematic visc *
Notes?
Notes: Value must exceed 2 cSt for the referral calculation to be performed correctly. Turn to page 11.52 for full A information on configuring this viscosity measurement. B
This parameter value is pre-set to -273.150 (qC). [MENU(3)]
C
Choose the “Calculation” option when you require a referral of Header Viscosity to metering and/or base conditions. The alternative option, “Transducer”, is for when meter kinematic viscosity is to be the same as Header viscosity. [MENU(4)] Warning! This parameter has a direct affect on the density referrals.
D
Turn to page 11.34 for full configuration information. [MENU(3)]
E
Turn to page 11.35 for full configuration information. [MENU(3)]
Page 11.56
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.27 BASE SEDIMENT & WATER MEASUREMENTS (As used in “Net Oil/Net Water Measurements”)
Measurements Supported:
x x x
BSW Analyser Input ‘A’ - from a mA Input BSW Analyser Input ‘B’ - from a mA Input Header BSW Analyser Input Figure 11.27-1: BS&W Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List:
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>/<”Header BSW”>/<”Head BSW analyser”> (2) <“Sediment & Water”>/<”Header BSW”>/ <”Head BSW analyser”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
A
9
Header BSW comp limit
D
1
BSW A input chl
2
BSW A pcent @ 100%
10
Header BSW select
B
3
BSW A pcent @ 0%
11
Header BSW HI limit
C
4
BSW A value *
12
Header BSW LO limit
C
5
BSW B input chl
13
BSW FB type
6
BSW B pcent @ 100%
14
BSW FB value
7
BSW B pcent @ 0%
15
Header BSW analyser *
8
BSW B value *
16
Header BSW selected
A
MENU(2)
Notes: Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live mA input channel has been completed. (Page 11.6.) A B
Nominate a logic decision table to be used by the Flow Computer whenever performing a prime measurement selection. (Also, see page 11.60)
C
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
D
Optional alarm limit. Programme it with a zero value to avoid a comparison of the two BSW measurement channels.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.57
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
BASE SEDIMENT & WATER MEASUREMENTS
CONFIGURATION
PRIME SELECTION PROCEDURE In the event of a BSW measurement channel (‘A’ or ‘B’) failing or returning to a live state, the Flow Computer immediately attempts to select an alternative measurement channel for the prime value. The selection procedure simply involves evaluating a user-nominated logic decision table, resulting in a new prime selection.
Table 11.27.1: "Auto BSW A" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
A A B FB A A B FB
Table 11.27.2: "Auto BSW B" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
B A B FB B A B FB
Table 11.27.3: "BSW A" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
A A FB FB A A FB FB
Table 11.27.4: "BSW B" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW
Page 11.58
A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
B FB B FB B FB B FB
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.28 NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS Oil/Water Mix Calculations: The “BSW Input Present” Method
(Turn to pages 11.61 and 11.63 for other options)
OPTION ONE is suitable when: (a) there is a mA type field transmitter providing percentage of ‘water’ (Base Sediment and Water) values, (b) the density of the ‘water’ at base conditions is calculated by the Flow Computer, (c) the density of the oil at base conditions is a known fixed value and (d) the density of the mixture is measured Prime (Indicated) Measurements: x % of oil by volume (calculated) x % of ‘water’ by volume (Live or fixed value) x Density of oil and density of water (calculated) x % of oil by mass (calculated) x % of ‘water’ by mass (calculated) Base Measurements: x Density of oil at base conditions (fixed value) x Density of water at base conditions (calculated)
Metering (Line) Measurements: x Base Sediment and Water percentage (calculated) x % of oil by gross volume (calculated) x % of water by gross volume (calculated) x % of oil by standard volume (calculated) x % of water by standard volume (calculated) x Density of oil at metering conditions (calculated) x Density of water at metering conditions (calculated)
Figure 11.28-1: Net Oil/ Water Calculations (“BSW Input Present” option)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Net oil/water dens”> (3) <”Configure”>/<”Base density”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”> and (5) <“Temperature”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Menu Data (as displayed)
Perform net calcs Net calcs type Header BSW analyser * Header volume oil% Header BSW% Base density oil Dens calc sel Prime density oil * Line density oil * Header density * Prime density water * Water dens const A Water dens const B
Notes?
Index
A B E, J MENU(1)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
C
D E
Menu Data (as displayed)
Base den water (net) * Line density water * Mass water% * Mass oil% * BSW mass% LO limit BSW mass% HI limit Meter BSW% * Meter volume oil% Meter BSW LO limit Meter BSW HI limit Std volume oil% Std volume water% * BSW std vol% LO lmt
Notes?
E E E H H E H H
H
See next page for continued menu data list and applicable notes. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.59
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS (Menu Data List continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
OPTION ONE * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
25
BSW std vol% HI lmt
H
27
Meter temperature *
26
Prime dens temp *
F
28
Dens Base temp cond
Notes?
G
Notes: By default, net flow calculations are not enabled. [MENU(4)] A B
Ensure that the “Water dens calc” multiple-choice option descriptor is selected. [MENU(4)]
C
Changing the selection of the referral method will also directly affect the configuration for the Meter Density and Base Density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
D
Refer to “Header Density” reference pages for details of configuring to get live values. (Page 11.38)
E
The Flow Computer does not differentiate between pure water, a water based solution or water with an impurity.
F
Refer to the “Density Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.33)
G
Refer to the “Meter Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.35)
H
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
I
A fixed value must be programmed (SET) into the Flow Computer. [MENU(2)]
J
Refer to Section 11.27 reference pages for details of configuring this live measurement.
Page 11.60
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
OPTION TWO
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS
Oil/Water Mix Calculations: The “BSW Calculated” Method
(Turn to pages 11.59 and 11.63 for other options)
OPTION TWO is suitable when: (a) the percentage of ‘water’ (Base Sediment and Water) is not provided by a mA transmitter but is calculated, (b) the density of the ‘water’ at base conditions is a known fixed value, (c) the density of the oil at metering-run conditions is a known fixed value and (d) the density of the mixture is measured Prime (Indicated) Measurements: x % of ‘water’ by volume (calculated) x % of oil by volume (calculated) x Density of the oil (calculated) x Density of the water (calculated) x % of oil by mass (calculated) x % of water by mass (fixed value)
Metering (Line) Measurements: x Base Sediment and Water percentage (calculated) x % of oil by gross volume (calculated) x % of water by gross volume (fixed or calculated) x % of oil by standard volume (calculated) x % of water by standard volume (fixed/ or calculated) x Density of oil at line conditions (fixed or calculated)
Base Measurements: x Density of oil at base conditions (fixed value) and Density of water at base conditions (fixed value) Figure 11.28-2: Net Oil/Water Calculations (“BSW Calculated” option)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Net oil/water dens”>, (3) <”Configure”>/<”Base density”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”> and (5) <“Temperature”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Menu Data (as displayed)
Perform net calcs Net calcs type Base density oil Dens calc sel Line density oil * Prime density oil * Header density* Base den water (net) * Water dens const A Water dens const B
Notes?
Index
A B C D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E C, F
Menu Data (as displayed)
Prime density water * Header volume oil% Header BSW% Prime BSW LO limit Prime BSW HI limit Line density water * Mass oil% Mass water% BSW mass% LO limit BSW mass% HI limit
Notes?
F F I I F
I I
See next page for continued menu data list and associated notes.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.61
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS (Menu Data List continued…) Index
19 20 21 22 23 24
Menu Data (as displayed)
Meter BSW% Meter volume oil% Meter BSW LO limit Meter BSW HI limit Std volume water% Std volume oil%
OPTION TWO * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Notes?
Index
F
25 26 27 28 29
I I
F
Menu Data (as displayed)
BSW std vol% LO lmt BSW std vol% HI lmt Prime dens temp * Meter temperature * Dens Base temp cond
Notes? I I
G H
Notes: By default, net flow calculations are not enabled. [MENU(4)] A B
Ensure that the “BSW calculated” multiple-choice option descriptor is selected. [MENU(4)]
C
A fixed value must be programmed into the 795X.
D
Changing the selection of the referral method will also directly affect the configuration for the Meter Density and Base Density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
E
Refer to “Header Density” reference pages for details of configuring to get live values. (Page 11.38)
F
The Flow Computer does not differentiate between pure water, a water based solution or water with an impurity.
G
Refer to the “Density Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.33)
H
Refer to the “Meter Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.35)
I
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
Page 11.62
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
OPTION THREE
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS
Oil/Water Mix Calculations: “Missing Oil Base Density” option
(Turn to pages 11.57 and 11.61 for other options)
OPTION THREE is suitable when: (a) there is a mA type field transmitter providing percentage of ‘water’ (Base Sediment and Water) values, (b) the density of the oil at base conditions is calculated by the Flow Computer, (c) the density of the ‘water’ at base conditions is a known fixed value and (d) the density of the oil/water mix is measured Prime (Indicated) Measurements:
Metering (Line) Measurements:
x x x x x
x x x x x x
% of oil by volume (calculated) % of ‘water’ by volume (Live or fixed value) Density of oil and density of water (calculated) % of oil by mass (calculated) % of ‘water’ by mass (calculated)
Base Measurements: x Density of oil at base conditions (calculated) x Density of water at base conditions (fixed value)
% of oil by gross volume (calculated) % of ‘water’ by gross volume (calculated) % of oil by standard volume (calculated) % of water by standard volume (calculated) Density of oil at metering conditions (calculated) Density of water at metering conditions (calculated)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Net oil/water dens”>, (3) <”Configure”>/<”Base density”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”> and (5) <“Temperature”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Menu Data (as displayed)
Perform net calcs Net calcs type Header BSW analyser * Header volume oil% Header BSW% Base density oil Dens calc sel Prime density oil * Line density oil * Header density* Prime density water * Water dens const A Water dens const B
Notes?
Index
A B E, J
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C
D E
Menu Data (as displayed)
Base den water (net) * Line density water * Mass water% * Mass oil% * BSW mass% LO limit BSW mass% HI limit Meter BSW% * Meter volume oil% Meter BSW LO limit Meter BSW HI limit Std volume oil% Std volume water% * BSW std vol% LO lmt
Notes?
I ,E E E H H E H H
H
See next page for continued menu data list and associated notes. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.63
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS (Menu Data List continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
OPTION THREE * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
25
BSW std vol% HI lmt
H
27
Meter temperature *
26
Prime dens temp *
F
28
Dens Base temp cond
Notes?
G
Notes: By default, net flow calculations are not enabled. [MENU(4)] A B
Ensure that the “Oil dens calc” multiple-choice option (descriptor) is selected. [MENU(4)]
C
Changing the selection of the referral method will also directly affect the configuration for the Meter Density and Base Density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
D
Refer to “Header Density” reference pages for details of configuring to get live values. (Page 11.38)
E
The Flow Computer does not differentiate between pure water, a water based solution or water with an impurity
F
Refer to the “Density Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.33)
G
Refer to the “Meter Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.35)
H
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
I
A fixed value must be programmed into the Flow Computer
J
Refer to Section 11.27 reference pages for details of configuring this live measurement. (See page 11.57)
Page 11.64
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.29 NET OIL /NET ‘WATER’ FLOW RATES AND TOTALS Measurements Supported:
x x x
Net ‘Water’ Volume flow rate and totals Net ‘Water’ Standard Volume flow rate and totals Net ‘Water’ Mass flow rate and totals
x x x
Net Oil Volume flow rate and totals Net Oil Standard Volume flow rate and totals Net Oil Mass flow rate and totals Note: Ensure that Net Oil/Net Water Measurements, Flow Rates and Flow Totals are already configured.
Figure 11.29-1: Net ‘Water’ Flow Rates and Metering-run Totals
Figure 11.29-2: Net Oil Flow Rates and Metering-run Totals
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.65
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL /NET ‘WATER’ FLOW RATES AND TOTALS Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisation”>/<”Standard”>, (3) <“Health check”>/<”Totals”>, (4) <“Flow totals”>/<”Net oil & Water”> and (5) <”Sediment & water”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Menu Data (as displayed)
Meter BSW% * Gross volume rate * Water vol rate * Water volume roll Water volume inhibit Water volume inc Water volume total Maint NV water inc Maint NV water total Line density water * Base den water (net) * Water std vol rate * Water std vol roll Water std vol inhib Water std vol inc Water std vol total Maint NSV water inc Maint NSV water totl Water mass rate * Water mass roll Water mass inhibit Water mass inc Water mass total Maint NM water inc Maint NM water total Operating mode Rate flowstop action Meter volume oil% Oil vol rate *
Notes?
C B A B A
C B A B A C B A B A D
Index
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Oil vol HI limit Oil vol LO limit Oil volume roll Oil vol inhibit Oil volume inc Oil volume total Maint NV oil inc Maint NV oil total Line density oil * Base density oil * Oil std vol rate * Oil std vol HI limit Oil std vol LO limit Oil std vol roll Oil std vol inhibit Oil std vol inc Oil std vol total Maint NSV oil inc Maint NSV oil total Oil mass rate * Oil mass HI limit Oil mass LO limit Oil mass roll Oil mass inhibit Oil mass inc Oil mass total Maint NM oil inc Maint NM oil total Flow status
E E C B A B A
E E C B A B A E E C B A B A D
Notes: A A total is the integration of a specific parameter value (e.g. metering-run flow rate) over a period of time. The Flow Computer updates a total with an increment value every cycle - See Note B. [MENU(4)] B
An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle. [MENU(3)] (a) Orifice or Coriolis Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu. (b) Turbine Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’ – the period that pulses were accumulated for calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value is available for viewing within the <”Health check”> feature menu. Editing an increment value has no effect.
C
By default, rollover (to zero) limits are SET to a very large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is sufficient for the metering application. [MENU(2)]
Page 11.66
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ FLOW RATES AND TOTALS D
There are two Flow Computer modes to be aware of… 1. Normal mode In this mode, a main total, e.g. <”Water volume total”>, can increment. The twinned maintenance-mode total, e.g. <”Maint NV water total”>, will never increment. 2. Maintenance mode In this mode, a maintenance-mode total, e.g. <”Maint NV water total”>, can increment. The twinned normalmode total, e.g. <”Water volume total”>, will never increment. A mode can be selected only when the Flow Computer is in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state. See flow metering reference pages for parameters involved in establishing a ‘Flow stopped’ state. [INFORMATION (SOFT-KEY) MENU]
E
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement. [MENU(1)]
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.67
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
EQUATION LIST
(Note: Listed equations do not conform to a Standard unless otherwise stated)
Net oil and water equations:
Equation NC#1: Net Oil Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NVOil
Where: NVOil
= Q GV *
Oil%Line 100
= Net Oil Volume flow rate…………………….……..………. {Menu data: <”Oil vol rate”>}
Q GV
= Gross Volume flow rate……………………….………….… {Menu data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
Oil%Line
= Percentage of oil at the metering point ………….……..... {See Equation NC#7b}
Equation NC#2: Net ‘Water’ Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NVWater
Where: NVWater Q GV
= Q GV *
Water %Line 100
= Net Oil Volume flow rate………………………..……... {Menu data: <”Water vol rate”>} = Gross Volume flow rate……………………….…….…. {Menu data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
Water %Line = Percentage of water in mix at the metering point….... {See Equation NC#8c}
Equation NC#3: Net Oil Standard Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NSVOil
Where: NSVOil
= NVOil *
ULine Oil UBase Oil
= Net Oil Standard Volume flow rate………..…..………….. {Menu data: <”Oil std vol rate”>}
NVOil
= Net Oil Volume flow rate………..……....…………...…….. {See Equation NC#1 on page 11.68}
ULine Oil Base U Oil
= Density of the oil at the metering point….……......……… {Menu data: <”Line density oil”>} = Density of the oil at base conditions……………. ……..... {Menu data: <”Base density oil”>}
Equation NC#4: Net ‘Water’ Standard Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NSVWater = NVWater *
ULine Water UBase Water
Where: NSVWater = Net ‘Water’ Standard Volume flow rate….…..…..………. {Menu data: <”Water std vol rate”>} NVWater
= Net ‘Water’ Volume flow rate………..……..……...…….... {See Equation NC#2 on page 11.68}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point……....……… {See Equation NC#9c on page 11.71}
UBase Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions …………..…..... {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71}
Equation NC#5: Net oil Mass Flow Rate
Using:
NMOil = NVOil * ULine Oil
Where: NMOil = Net oil mass flow rate……………….…………………………… {Menu Data: <”Oil mass rate”>} NVOil = Net Oil Volume flow rate…………….………………………….. {See Equation NC#1 on page 11.68} ULine = Density of the oil at the metering point…..…….……………… {Menu data: <”Line density oil”>} Oil
Page 11.68
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
Equation NC#6: Net Water Mass Flow Rate At the metering point:
Using:
NM Water = NVWater * ULine Water
Where: NM Water = Net water mass flow rate……….……………………..…… {Menu Data: <”Water mass rate”>} NVWater
= Net ‘water’ volume flow rate…..…………………….…….. {See Equation NC#2 on page 68}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point…..…..……… {See Equation NC#9c on page 11.71}
Equation NC#7: Percentage of oil by volume Prime Input:
Using:
Oil%Prime
= (100 - Water %Head )………………………..………. NC#7a
Where: Oil%Prime
= Indicated percentage of oil in mix…….………….…. {Menu data: <”Header volume oil%”>}
Water %Prime
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ in mix,………….….. {See Equation NC#8 on page 11.69}
At the metering point:
Using:
Oil%Line
Where: Oil%Line
= (100 - Water %Line )…………………………..……….. NC#7b = Percentage of oil in mix at the metering point….….… {Menu data: <”Meter volume oil%”>}
Water %Line = Percentage of ‘water’ in mix at the metering point….. {See Equation NC#8c on page 11.70}
Equation NC#8: Percentage of ‘water’ by volume Note: This measurement is also known as BSW - ‘Base Sediment and Water’. Prime Input:
Equation NC#8a is applicable when either the “Water dens calc” option or the “Oil dens calc” option is selected. Using:
Water %Prime
Where: Water %Prime
§ BSW %Max BSW %Min · = ¨¨ * BSW %Raw ¸¸ BSW %Min ...NC#8a 100 © ¹
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ in mix.…….……….. {Menu Data: <”Header BSW%”>}
BSW %Raw
= Reading from transmitter……………...…………….. {Menu Data: <”BS&W value”>}
BSW %Max
= Maximum percentage from transmitter…………….. {Menu Data: <”BS&W pcent @ 100%”>}
BSW %Min
= Minimum percentage from transmitter…...………… {Menu Data: <”BS&W pcent @ 0%”>}
Equation NC#8b is applicable when the “BSW Calculated” option is selected. Using:
Water %Prime
Where: Water %Prime
=
U U
Prime Mix Prime Water
UPrime Oil UPrime Oil
* 100 …………………………..…… NC#8b
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ flowing…………….. {Menu Data: <”Header BSW%”>}
UPrime Mix
= Indicated density of the oil/water mixture……..……. {Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>} **
UPrime Oil
= Indicated density of the oil………...…………………. {Menu Data: <”Prime density oil”>} *
UHead Water
= Indicated density of the ‘water’……...……….…….... {See Equation NC#9 on page 11.70}
* This is a SET (fixed) value when using the “BSW Calculated” option. For other options, see Equation NC#16 on page 11.72. ** Refer to “Density” reference pages for information on configuring this parameter.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.69
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS Net oil and water equations continued…
EQUATION LIST
(Listed equations do not conform to a Standard unless otherwise stated)
(Equation NC#8 continued…) Note: This measurement is also known as ‘Base Sediment and Water’. At the metering point:
Using:
Water %Line
Where: Water %Line
And:
Where:
=
U U
Prime Mix Line Water
ULine Oil ULine Oil
* 100 …………..………..…….….….… NC#8c
= Percentage of ‘water’ flowing at the metering point ... {Menu Data: <”Meter BSW%”>}
ULine Oil
= Density of the oil at the metering point ……….……… {Menu Data: <”Line density oil”>}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point ……….…. {See Equation NC#9c on page 11.71}
UPrime Mix
=
Line 100 * ULine Oil * U Water
100 * U Mass% Line Oil
Oil
Line * ULine Oil Mass% Oil * U Water
ULine Oil
= Density of the oil at the metering point.……..….….…. {Menu Data: <”Line density oil”>}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point…..………. {Menu Data: <”Line density water”>}
Mass% Oil
= Percentage of oil (by mass) at the metering point ..… {See Equation NC#11 on page 11.71}
Equation NC#9: Water Density Prime Input:
Equation NC#9a is applicable when either the “Water dens calc” option or the “Oil dens calc” option is selected. Using:
UPrime Water =
100 * U
Prime Mix
UPrime Oil
Water %Head
U
Prime …………………………….....… NC#9a Oil
Where: UPrime Water = Indicated density of the ‘water’…………..…………….….…….. {Menu Data: <”Prime density water”>} UPrime Mix = Indicated density of the oil/water mixture…………….….……… {Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>} UPrime = Indicated density of the oil……………………………………….. {See Equation NC#16 on page 11.72} Oil
Equation NC#9b is applicable when the “BSW Calculated” option is selected. Using:
Base UPrime Water = U Water A * Gt B * Gt * Gt ……………………………….… NC#9b
Where: UPrime Water = Indicated density of the ‘water’…………..………………….. {Menu Data: <”Prime density water”>} UBase Water = Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions…………………… {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71} A = Water density constant ‘A’………………………..………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const A”>} B = Water density constant ‘B’………………………..………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const B”>} Gt = t Prime t base
And: Where:
t Prime = Temperature of the oil/water mixture at the ‘density loop’…{Menu Data: <”Prime dens temp”>} t Base = Temperature of the oil/water mixture at base conditions.... {Menu Data: <”Dens Base temp cond”>}
Page 11.70
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
Net oil and water equations continued… (Listed equations do not conform to a Standard unless otherwise stated)
(Equation NC#9 ‘Water’ Density continued…) At the metering point:
Using:
Base ULine Water = U Water A * Gt B * Gt * Gt …………………..………...…… NC#9c
Where: ULine Water = Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point…..…………….. {Menu Data: <”Line density water”>} UBase Water = Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions…………………… {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71} A = ‘Water’ density constant ‘A’…………………..….………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const A”>} B = ‘Water’ density constant ‘B’……………………...………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const B”>} And: Where:
Gt = t Line t base t Line = Temperature of the oil/water mixture at a Metering-Run…. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>} t Base = Base temperature…………………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Dens Base temp cond”>}
At base conditions:
Equation NC#9d is applicable when the “Water dens calc” option is selected. (Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions must be a SET (fixed) value if not using the “Water dens calc” option) Using:
Prime UBase Water = U Water A * Gt B * Gt * Gt ………………………..……
NC#9d
Where: UBase Water = Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions..………………….. {Menu Data: <”Base den water (net)”>} UPrime Water = Indicated density of the ‘water’.……………………………… {See Equation NC#9a or NC#9b} A = ‘Water’ density constant ‘A’…………………….……………. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const A”>} B = ‘Water’ density constant ‘B’…………………….……………. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const B”>} And: Where:
Gt = t Prime t base t Prime = Prime temperature of the oil/water mixture………..………. {Menu Data: <”Prime dens temp”>} t Base = Base temperature…………………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Dens Base temp cond”>}
Equation NC#10: Percentage of mass (‘water’)
Using: Where:
* 100
Prime UPrime UPrime Water * U Mix Oil
Mass% Water
=
Mass% Water
= Percentage of ‘water’ (by mass) flowing…………. {Menu Data: <”Mass water%”>}
ULine Mix
*
UPrime Water
UPrime Oil
UPrime Water
= Indicated density of the ‘water’…………….……… {See Equation NC#9a or NC#9b}
UPrime Mix
= Indicated density of the oil/water mixture….…….. {Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>}
UPrime Oil
= Density of the oil mixture at the Header…..……… {Menu Data: <”Prime density oil”>}
Equation NC#11: Percentage of mass (‘oil’)
Using:
Mass% Oil
= 100 Mass% Water
Where:
Mass% Oil
= Percentage of mass for oil flowing in system..……{Menu Data: <”Mass oil%”>}
Mass% Water
= Percentage of mass for ‘water’ flowing…………… {See Equation NC#10 on page 11.71}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.71
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
EQUATION LIST
Equation NC#12: Percentage of standard volume (‘water’) 100
Using:
StdVol% Water
Where:
StdVol% Water
§ § Mass% · § ·· UBase ¨ Oil ¸ ¨ Water ¸¸ 1 ¨¨ * ¨ ¸ Base ¨ Mass% Water ¸ ¸¸ ¨ U Oil ¹¹ ¹ © ©© = Percentage of the ‘water’ (by Standard Volume).. {Menu Data: <”Std volume water%”>}
Mass% Oil
= Percentage of the oil (by Mass)…………………… {See Equation NC#11 on page 11.71}
Mass% Water
= Percentage of the ‘water’ (by Mass).…………….. {See Equation NC#10 on page 11.71}
=
UBase Oil
= Density of the oil at base conditions…………....... {Menu data: <”Base density oil”>}
UBase Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions …………{See Equation NC#9d}
Equation NC#13: Percentage of standard volume (oil)
Using:
StdVol% Oil
= 100 StdVol% Water
Where:
StdVol% Oil
= Percentage of the oil (by Standard Volume)……. {Menu Data: <”Std volume oil%”>}
StdVol% Water
= Percentage of the ‘water’ (by Standard Volume).. {See Equation NC#12 on page 11.72}
Equation NC#14: Specific gravity for the oil
Using:
SG Oil
§ UBase = ¨ Oil ¨ U Base © Water
Where:
SG Oil
= Specific gravity for the oil………………………….. {Menu data: <”Oil specific gravity”>}
UBase Oil
= Density of the oil at base conditions…………....... {Menu data: <”Base density oil”>}
UBase Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions ………… {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71}
· ¸ ¸ ¹
Equation NC#15: Degrees API (oil)
Using:
API$Oil
§ 141.5 · ¸ 131.5 = ¨¨ ¸ © SG Oil ¹
Where:
API$Oil
= Degrees API for the oil………………………………{Menu Data: <”Oil degrees API”>}
SG Oil
= Specific gravity for the oil……………………...……{See Equation NC#14 }
Equation NC#16: Oil Density Calculation (prime) This calculation is applicable when the “Oil dens calc” option is selected. All other options use a SET (fixed) value for the indication density of the oil (in a mixture).
U
Prime Mix
UPrime Water * 100 UPrime Water 100 BSW %
Using:
UPrime Oil
=
Where:
UPrime Oil
= Indicated oil density……………..…………..……….{Menu Data: <”Prime density oil ”>}
UPrime Mix
= Indicated density of the oil/water mixture………….{Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>} *
UPrime Water
= Indicated density of the ‘water’…………….……… {See Equation NC#9a}
Water %Prime
Page 11.72
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ in mix.…….…...... {Menu Data: <”Header BSW%”>} * Refer to “Density” reference pages for information on configuring this parameter.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.30 LIVE ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Feature:
x
Analogue Outputs supported by the 7950 and 7951: mA output channels 1 to 4 (without option card) or mA output channels 1 to 8 (with option card)
What to do: Use this reference page to find out how to configure the analogue output channels that are to transmit values to external devices once every machine cycle. By default, no parameters are pre-allocated to the analogue outputs. After configuring, check that a satisfactory live reading is displayed by the <mA output value> menu data page. Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Outputs”>/<“mA outputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/ <”Outputs”>/<“mA outputs”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Analogue Channel (and signal types)
Analogue Output 1 (mA only)
Analogue Output 2 (mA only)
Analogue Output 3 (mA only)
Analogue Output 4 (mA only)
Menu Data (as displayed)
mA output 1 value * mA output 1 ptr list mA 1 param val @100% mA 1 param val @0% mA output 1 type mA output 1 filter mA output 1 source mA output 2 value * mA output 2 ptr list mA 2 param val @100% mA 2 param val @0% mA output 2 type mA output 2 filter mA output 2 source mA output 3 value * mA output 3 ptr list mA 3 param val @100% mA 3 param val @0% mA output 3 type mA output 3 filter mA output 3 source mA output 4 value * mA output 4 ptr list mA 4 param val @100% mA 4 param val @0% mA output 4 type mA output 4 filter mA output 4 source
Analogue Channel (and signal types)
Analogue Output 5 ** (mA only)
Analogue Output 6 ** (mA only)
Analogue Output 7 ** (mA only)
Analogue Output 8 ** (mA only)
Menu Data (as displayed)
mA output 5 value * mA output 5 ptr list mA 5 param val @100% mA 5 param val @@ 0% mA output 5 type mA output 5 filter mA output 5 source mA output 6 value * mA output 6 ptr list mA 6 param val @100% mA 6 param val @0% mA output 6 type mA output 6 filter mA output 6 source mA output 7 value * mA output 7 ptr list mA 7 param val @100% mA 7 param val @0% mA output 7 type mA output 7 filter mA output 7 source mA output 8 value * mA output 8 ptr list mA 8 param val @100% mA 8 param val @0% mA output 8 type mA output 8 filter mA output 8 source
Note: ** Requires option card to be fitted and <”Available channels”> parameter edited to show a value of “8” A The <mA output source> menu data is for selecting a parameter that is not readily available with the normal <mA output ptr list> menu data. It is necessary to select the “USER” option descriptor for <mA output ptr list> and then program <mA output source> with the parameter’s unique identification number.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.73
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.31 INTERFACE DETECTION Features:
x x
Product Detection (using measurement zoning – Meter run density, Base density, SG, Header mA density or qAPI) Product Totals (Gross Volume, Gross Standard Volume and Mass totals for up to 20 products) Figure 11.31-1: Interface Detection Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Product Detect”>, (2) <“Density”>, (3) <“Flow rates”>, (4) <“Flow totals”>/<“Product totals”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
1
Meter run density *
17
Prod1 dens Txdr FB
2
Base density *
18
Product time delay
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SG Value * Head analog dens * Degrees API * Product zone type Band hysteresis Product 1 name Product 1 Band HI Product 1 Band LO Prod1 MF Prod1 K factor Prod1 dens calc sel Prod1 API product Prod1 API range Prod1 Prime dens FB
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Current Product ID * Product totalisation Gross vol rate * Product 1 GV total Gross std vol rate * Product 1 GSV total Mass rate * Product 1 Mass total Non-Band product ID Product auto config Reset totalisers Meter curve type
B I A A A A, E, F A, E, F A, E A, E A, E A, E
Notes? A, E C D D D D G H (E)
Notes: A maximum of 20 product profiles can be defined. To illustrate, the Menu Data listed above (8 – 17) is the A profile for product one. Profiles of other products are not shown in the schematic or list for reasons of clarity. Each product profile has a corresponding set of product totals – see Menu Data items 22, 24 and 26. B
This is for fluid density measurements from a mA-type field transmitter at the header. Values are used as advanced notification of a product change. (Also, see note ‘C’ and configuration details on page 11.38)
C
This is a programmable period for allowing a product change at header instrumentation to reach the metering point. Product switching should not occur until the fluid reaches the metering point. (Also, see note ‘B’)
D
Product totalising can be switched on and off with this parameter. If switched off, increments for product totals are discarded. If switched on, the Flow Computer will calculate increments and then update the appropriate set of product totals.
Page 11.74
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION E
INTERFACE DETECTION
This data is a part of the Automatic Product Configuration feature. The programmed (SET) value can be copied to the relevant prime parameter whenever the product is detected. For example, the value for <“Prod1 MF”> would overwrite the value of the <“Meter factor”> parameter as soon as Product #1 is detected, but only if the ‘Meter Factor’ is not being linearised. Similarly, the value for <“Prod1 K factor”> would overwrite the value of the <“Flowmeter K Factor”> parameter as soon as Product #1 is detected, but only if the ‘K-factor’ is not being linearised. (N.B. See earlier flow metering pages for use of <“Meter Factor”> and <“Flowmeter K Factor”>)
F
Retrospective total calculations can be performed to compensate for changes to the ‘Meter Factor’ or the ‘K-factor’. Specify the volume to be considered when correcting totals.
G
One set of product totals can be allocated to all fluids that are outside the defined product bands. High and low band data in the selected product profile are not applied.
H
Enables or prevents the overwriting of parameters with ‘override’ values from the profile of a detected product. (Also, see note ‘E’)
I
Selecting a new zone type will automatically re-select the appropriate base units of measurement for data listed in all 20 product profiles.
Example: Density zoning with 4 defined products (i.e. 4 back-to-back bands)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Reference in Picture
Product 1 Band High
DF
Product 1 Band Low
DE
Product 2 Band High
DE
Product 2 Band Low
DD
Product 3 Band High
DD
Product 3 Band Low
DC
Product 4 Band High
DA
Product 4 Band Low
D0
x
Product 1 totals increment between time T1 and T2.
x
Product 2 totals increment between time T2 and T3.
x
Product 3 totals increment between time T3 and T4.
x
Product 4 totals do not increment.
x
“Non-product” totals increment between times T0 to T1 and T4 to TN.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.75
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
INTERFACE DETECTION
CONFIGURATION
Example: Using Hysteresis
Hysteresis overcomes the difficulties when product bands overlap.
Menu Data (as displayed)
Figure Ref.
SET Value
Hysteresis Calc. Value
Product 1 Band High
DA
1000
1010.00
Product 1 Band Low
DB
795
802.95
Product 2 Band High
DB
795
787.05
Product 2 Band Low
DC
595
600.95
-
1%
-
Band hysteresis
1. Hysteresis point calculations when product one is current detected product:
x x x
A1
1 · § D A * ¨1 ¸ 100 ¹ ©
B1
1 · § DB * ¨1 ¸ © 100 ¹
A1
1000 * 0.999
B1
790 * 1.01
A1
990.0
B1
802.95
Switch (up) to product 1 from product 2 at just over 802.95 Kg/m3. Switch (up) to non-product takes place at just over 1010 Kg/m3. Switch (down) to product 1 from non-product is at exactly 1000 Kg/m3. (The 990 Kg/m3 point is ignored)
2. Hysteresis band calculations when product two is current detected product:
x
A2
1 · § DB * ¨1 ¸ 100 ¹ ©
B2
1 · § D C * ¨1 ¸ 100 © ¹
A2
795 * 0.99
B2
595 * 1.01
A2
787.05
B2
600.95
Switch (down) to product 2 from product 1 at just under 787.05 Kg/m3.
Page 11.76
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.32 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Features:
x
Digital Outputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) Status output channels 1 to 8
x
Digital Outputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) Status output channels 1 to 8 (without option board 6 fitted) or Status output channels 1 to 16 (with option board 6 fitted)
x
Digital Outputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) Status output channels 1 to 6
What to do: This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the Status Output channels that are being used. Later tasks will expect this menu data to be already configured.
By default, several Status Outputs are reserved for the Alarm Logger Output feature. (See Chapter 8) The remaining outputs are available for use as listed in Chapter 3. In the <“Health Check”> menu there is a Status Output sub-menu. It contains a menu data page with a series of nd. digits on the 2 display line. Each digit indicates the present state of an individual output. Ö
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Outputs”>/<“Status outputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<”Outputs”>/<“Status outputs”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Status O/P Channel
Menu Data (as displayed)
Status O/P Channel
Menu Data (as displayed)
Status O/P Channel
Menu Data (as displayed)
1 2 3 4
Status out 1 logic Status out 2 logic Status out 3 logic Status out 4 logic
7 8 9 10
Status out 7 logic Status out 8 logic Status out 9 logic Status out 10 logic
13 14 15 16
Status out 13 logic Status out 14 logic Status out 15 logic Status out 16 logic
5 6
Status out 5 logic Status out 6 logic
11 12
Status out 11 logic Status out 12 logic
General Note: Digital Outputs 1 to 3 are permanently reserved for use by the Alarm Logger Output feature seen in Chapter 8. A This is why there is a permanent “XXX” seen in the first three digits of <“Status out [1-16]”>.
Digital Outputs 4 to 16 are not pre-allocated to a Flow Computer feature. They are mainly used by the support for flowmeter proving, as guided in Chapter 16
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.77
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.33 LIVE PULSE OUTPUTS Features:
x
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) Pulse Output channels 1 to 3
x
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) Pulse Output channels 1 to 5
x
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) Pulse Output channels 1 to 3
What to do: Use this page to configure basic information for the pulse output channels. A channel can be set-up to transmit each increment to a normal mode total as a pulse train, suitable for an external counter.
The individual pulse has a significance that equates to a certain mass or volume in the units of measurement already selected for the rate. As an example, consider a flow total increasing at a steady rate of one gallon every second and significance that is programmed with a value of six, representing six gallons. This would result in a single pulse being transmitted every 6 seconds.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Outputs”>/<”Pulse outputs”>
Menu Data List:
** Channel is available on a 7951 with the D-Type rear panel
Pulse Output Channel Pulse Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse output 1 src Pulse output 1 sig Pulse output 2 src Pulse output 2 sig Pulse output 3 src Pulse output 3 sig
Pulse Output Channel Pulse Output 4 ** Pulse Output 5 **
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse output 4 src Pulse output 4 sig Pulse output 5 src Pulse output 4 sig
General Notes: A
By default, parameters are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs.
B
If the pulse frequency exceeds 10Hz (10 complete pulses per second), a ‘reservoir’ is used to keep a count of the excess. Always SET a large enough pulse significance to avoid this occurring; if there is an excess, increase the significance value and wait for things to calm down again. Alternatively, all reservoirs can be cleared immediately by selecting the “Clear” command through the <“Clear pulse outputs”> parameter.
C
Pulses are transmitted at evenly calculated intervals within the ‘window’ of a machine cycle. As the actual machine cycle time always varies, the calculated interval between pulses will vary even when the value from the Pulse Output Source (e.g. a flow rate) has not changed – see Figure 11.33-1. 0.525s
1.05 Seconds (Actual Cycle Time)
0.6s
1.2 Seconds (Actual Cycle Time)
Figure 11.33-1: Examples of pulse output distribution (for two machine cycles)
Page 11.78
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.34 PASSWORDS AND SECURITY This sub-section explains how the 795x can set-up to restrict access to facilities. Securable and non-secure modes: The Flow Computer can work in a non-secure or securable mode. In non-secure mode, anyone can have access to any of the facilities. In securable mode, access to facilities can be protected by passwords. Changing security mode: 7950 instrument only If you want the 7950 in securable mode, set the DIP switch on the Connector/Power Supply board to SECURABLE (if you didn’t do this when you installed the instrument).
Figure 11.34-1: Where to find the security DIP switch on the 7950
Changing security mode: 7951 instrument only In the 7951 and 7955 instruments, you change the security mode by using the key switch on the front of the instrument. The instruments are normally securable but, when you insert the key and turn it clockwise, this changes the mode to non-secure. You can only withdraw the key in the vertical (securable) position.
Figure 11.34-2: The security lock on the 7951 instrument LED
LOCK
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.79
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
PASSWORDS AND SECURITY Passwords and Security Levels A password system restricts access to its facilities to those people with certain levels of authority. There are four levels of Flow Computer security:
x x x x
Calibration Engineer Operator World
(also referred to as the “Programmer” security level)
(anyone other than those listed above).
The table below lists what facilities each of these groups can access. Access levels, and what they can have access to Facilities available Calibration
Engineer
Operator
World
Programmable parameters except security codes
YES
YES
All data or functions which don’t affect results of calculations
NO
Security codes
YES
NO
NO
NO
Programming facilities
YES
YES
NO
NO
Calibration facilities
YES
NO
NO
NO
How the security LED appears
RED flashing
RED
ORANGE
GREEN
Setting or changing a password (security level code) 1. Firstly, use the routine <“Enter Password”> menu data page for entering the password to change to the required “Calibration” (Programmer) security level. 2. From this menu, make a selection appropriate for the password (Programmer, Engineer, Operator or World) you want to define or change, then type in a password of up to 20 characters. You can clear an existing password by pressing the CLR key. You can also have the same password for more than one security level. This would give you access to the facilities of all the levels covered by that password.
Feature: Keyboard Security Fallback (Optional) The present security level for information access through the keyboard can be automatically changed to “World” access after a user-defined period has elapsed without use of the keyboard. Use of the keyboard during that period causes the ‘lockout’ timer to be re-started. Security level changes can still be made at any time in the normal way (as explained earlier) but they will re-start the timer.
By default, this security feature is not active. To activate, the length of time for the period must be programmed (SET) to a value more than zero. Passwords to change security level are as already defined. x
Configuration task: Enable keyboard security fallback Follow these instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“User interface”> 2. Locate the “Security timeout” menu data page and then programme (SET) a value for the time-out period. It is not advisable to programme a time of less than 15 seconds. (End of configuration task)
To de-activate this feature, programme (SET) the “Security timeout” parameter with a value of zero.
Page 11.80
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
PASSWORDS AND SECURITY Feature: Communications Security Fallback (Optional) Virtual slave access through the serial port can be blocked after a period has elapsed without use. Writing a communications password to database location 3187 is then the only way to un-block the serial port. Using the serial communication link during the period causes the ‘lockout’ timer to be re-started.
By default, this feature is not active. To activate it, the length of time must be programmed (SET) to a value of more than zero. A communications password should be also programmed rather than keep the default one. x
Configuration task: Enable communications security fallback Follow these instructions: 1. Change security level to “Calibration” (i.e. flashing red security LED) 2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“Communications”> 3. Locate the <“Comms secure timeout”> menu data page and then programme (SET) a value for the time-out. 4. (Optional) Locate the <“Comms password”> menu data page and then programme a new password. (End of configuration task)
To de-activate this feature, SET the value of the <“Comms secure timeout”> parameter to zero.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.81
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.35 MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW What is Multi-View? Multi-View (often referred to as the “User Display”) is a single-key activated display that you can define to show whatever information you want. It consists of one or more pages with the four lines on each page comprising of either or both of:
x x
Text (such as the name of a parameter), at the left of the line. A value for a parameter, at the right of the line.
You can change the configuration of a Multi-View display whenever you wish. An example of a typical multi-view display is shown below. How to get into Multi-view To see the first Multi-view display page, press the MULTI-VIEW key (i.e. the TOP blank key). A multi-view display page looks like the example below.
Figure 11.35-1: A typical Multiview display
Use the DOWN-ARROW key to page down through other multi-view displays. The message “Invalid MultiView Page” appears to indicate that no further pages are defined. Use the UP-ARROW to reverse through the display pages. Configuring Multi-view Follow this procedure for configuring Multi-view: Step 1: Decide what text you want to display You almost certainly want each line of the Multiview display to show the name (possibly in an abbreviated form) of a parameter whose value you want to display. Bear in mind that:
x
Text cannot exceed 11 characters.
x
The display leaves a space between the text and value.
x
The value is displayed as a number without any units. You may wish to include the units as part of the text.
Step 2: Find the location IDs of the parameters 1. In the menu system, find the parameter you want. 2. Press the ‘a’-key to display the location identification number. 3. Note down that number. 4. Repeat this for the other parameters.
Page 11.82
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
Step 3: Open the Multi-view configuration menu Look for the Multi-view configuration data within the following menu: <“Configure”>/<“Multi-view”> Step 4: Entering the text and location ID for each line 1. Select whichever page (1 - 5) you want to configure. 2. Select whichever line (1 - 4) you want to configure. 3. Enter the text you require. 4. Enter the parameter (location ID) you require. Note that after the location ID is entered, the display changes to show the name of the parameter. Step 5: Set the text width The text width is the number of characters you want the text to occupy. If you want to set the text width:
1. Go to the Text width menu. 2. Edit the value
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.83
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
Page 11.84
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12. Routine operation (Data Maps) 12.1
Viewing the data The diagrams on the following pages show that part of the menu structure which you use to carry out routine tasks such as checking results or changing units of measurement.
12.1.1
Data Map: Flow rates and totals…………………………………… 12.2
12.1.2
Data Map: Density, Base density and Specific Gravity….…….12.3
12.1.3
Data Map: Viscosity………………………………………….……….. 12.4
12.1.4
Data Map: Temperature and pressure……………………………. 12.5
12.1.5
Data Map: Smaller topics…………………………….…...…………. 12.6
795x Op Man/BD
Page 12.1
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.1
Data Map: Flow rates and totals
Flow rates and total have the following menu structure for routine work: Main Menu Flow rates o
Flow totals o
Page 12.2
Level #2
Level #3
Indicated vol rate
o
Indicated vol rate
Gross volume rate
o
Gross volume rate
Ind std vol rate
o
Ind std vol rate
Gross std vol rate
o
Gross std vol rate
Mass rate
o
Mass rate
Net oil/water rate
o
Level #4
Oil vol rate o
Oil vol rate
Oil std vol rate o
Oil std vol rate
Oil mass rate o
Oil mass rate
Water vol rate o
Water vol rate
Water std vol rate o
Water std vol rate
Water mass rate o
Water mass rate
VCF
o
VCF
CCF
o
CCF
Ind volume total
o
Ind volume total
Gross volume total
o
Gross vol total
Ind std vol total
o
Ind std vol total
Gross std vol total
o
Gross std vol total
Mass total
o
Mass total
Net oil & water
o
Oil vol total o
Oil vol total
Oil std vol total o
Oil std vol total
Oil mass total o
Oil mass total
Water vol total o
Water vol total
Water std vol total o
Water std vol total
Water mass total o
Water mass total
Alarm total
o
Alarm total
Turbine errors
o
Main turb Errors
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.2
Data Map: Density, Base density and Specific Gravity
Density, Base density and Specific Gravity have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu Density o
Level #1 Prime density
o
Prime txdr density
Prime dens select
o
Prime den selected
Meter density
o
Meter density
Densitometer
o
Prime txdr density
Viscometer
API referral
o
o
o
Prime txdr density
Selected density
o
Prime den selected
Density A
o
Density A value
Density B
o
Density B value
Visc prime density
o
Visc prime density
Selected viscomtr
o
Prime Dyn visc sel
Visc A density
o
Density C value
Visc B density
o
Density D value
Compress F
o
API compress F b->m
Alpha
o
API alpha b->m
CTL
o
CTL
CPL
o
CPL
o
Degrees API
o
Net oil/water dens
o
Base oil density
o
Base density oil
Base water density
o
Base den water (net)
Prime oil density
o
Base density
o
Specific gravity
o
Prime oil density
Prime water dens
o
Prime density water
Meter oil dens
o
Line density oil
Meter water dens
o
Line density water
Oil SG
o
Oil specific gravity
Oil degrees API
o
Oil degrees API
Prime dens HI lmt
o
Density HI limit
Prime dens LO lmt
o
Density LO limit
Base density value
o
SG Value
Water density
o
Water density (SG)
API referral
o
Compress F
o
API compress F d->b
o
Alpha
o
API alpha d->b
o
CTL
o
CTLd
o
CPL
o
CPLd
o
Base dens limits
o
Base dens HI limit
o
Base dens LO limit
o
SG HI limit
o
SG LO limit
o
Limits
o
795x Op Man/BD
Level #3
Degrees API
Prime dens limits
Base density / SGo
Level #2
SG limits
o
Page 12.3
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.3
Data Map: Viscosity
Viscosity measurements have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu Viscosity o
Level #1 Prime viscosity
Selected viscomtr
Level #2 o o
Viscosity A
Viscosity B
Page 12.4
Level #3
Dynamic
o
Prime dynamic visc
Kinematic
o
Prime kinematic visc
Dynamic
o
Dynamic visc A
Kinematic
o
Kinematic visc A
Q factor
o
Q factor visc 3
Range
o
Visc 3 current range
Dynamic
Prime dyn visc sel
o
Dynamic visc B
Kinematic
o
Kinematic visc B
Q factor
o
Q factor visc 4
Range
o
Visc 4 current range
Meter kin viscosity
o
Meter kinematic visc
o
Base kin viscosity
o
Base kinematic visc
o
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.4
Data Map: Temperature and pressure
Temperature and pressure measurements have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu
Level #1
Temperature o
Level #2
Meter temperature o
Meter temperature
Dens temperature o
Prime dens temp
o
Prime dens temp
Density A temp
o
Density A temp
Density B temp
o
Density B temp
Prime visc temp
o
Prime visc temp
Visc temperature o
Prover temperatureo
Selected viscomtr
o
Prime Dyn visc sel
Visc A temperature
o
Visc A temperature
Visc B temperature
o
Visc B temperature
Prover inlet temp
o
Prover inlet temp
Prover outlet temp
o
Prover outlet temp
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Base temperature o
Base temperature
Absolute zero o
Absolute zero
Limits o
Meter temperature
Step limit
o
Density A temp
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Density B temp
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Prover inlet temp Prover outlet temp Viscosity temp A
Viscosity temp B
Pressure
o
Meter pressure o
Meter pressure
Dens pressure o
Density pressure
o o
o
Base pressure o
Base press value
Equilibrium press o
Equilibrium press
Prover pressure o
Prover inlet press
o
Limits o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Step limit
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Step limit
o
Prover inlet press
Prover out press
o
Prover outlet press
Prv plenum press
o
Plenum press value
Meter pressure
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Step limit
o
Prover Inlet press Prover out press
795x Op Man/BD
Level #3
o o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Page 12.5
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.5
Data Map: Smaller topics
Smaller topics have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu
Level #1
Special equations o
Special eq 1 value
Sediment & Water o
Prime BSW
Level #2 Special equation 1 o
Prime BSW%
o
Prime BSW%
o
Prime volume Oil%
o
Prime volume oil%
o
Prime BSW analyser
o
Prime BSW limits Base BSW
Meter run BSW
o
Prime BSW value
o
BSW prime selected
o
BSW A value
o
BSW B value
o
Prime BSW HI limit
o
Prime BSW LO limit
o
Mass water%
o
Mass water%
Mass oil%
o
Mass oil%
Water mass% limits
o
Water mass% HI lmt
o
Water mass% LO lmt
o
Std vol water%
o
Std vol oil%
o
Std volume oil%
o
Water SVol% HI lmt
o
Water SVol% LO lmt
o
Water std vol% lmt
Std volume water%
Meter BSW%
o
Meter BSW%
Meter volume oil%
o
Meter volume oil%
Meter BSW limit
o
Meter BSW HI limit
o
Meter BSW LO limit
o
Meter CSW
o
Meter CSW% Password
o
Enter password
Time
o
Time and date
o
Time and date
Set cycle time
o
Target cycle time
Actual cycle time
o
Actual cycle time
System idle time
o
Idle cycle time
Page 12.6
Level #3
o
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.2
Checking the performance of the 795x machine If you want to check that the external connections are working properly, the facility can help you. It shows, for each external connection: x x x x
the name of the input or output the value of the data the units for the data whether the data is live or set
If the data is live but the value appears to be unusually high or low, this may be because the external connection is not working properly.
12.2.1
Data Map: Health check
The feature has the following menu structure: Main Menu Health check o
Level #1 Inputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Level #2 o
Analog inputs
Level #3 o
Analog input 1
o
Analog input 2
o
:
Time period inputs
Flow meter inputs
o
:
o
mA input 10
:
o
Time period input 1
o
Time period input 2
o
Time period input 3
o
Time period input 4
o
7827 period I/P 1b
o
7827 period I/P 2b
o
7827 period I/P 3b
o
7827 period I/P 4b
o
Turbine
o
o o
Status in [1-16]
o
Pulse inputs
o
Pulse input 1
o
Pulse input 2
o
HART board status
o
HART 1 value
o
HART 2 value
o
o
:
mA outputs
o
795x Op Man/BD
o
: o
Status
o
DP value
o
mA Output 1
o
mA Output 2
o
: Status outputs
:
HART 8 value Strainer input
o
o
Status inputs
HART inputs
Outputs
Orifice
:
:
o
mA Output 8
o
Status out [1-16]
Page 12.7
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps) Health Check Menu Structure Main Menu
(Part 2 of 2) Level #1
Level #2
Flow meter details
Turbine
Orifice
Totals
o
Standard increment
Maintenance
User Alarms
Page 12.8
o
Level #3 o
o
o
o
Flow meter freq
o
Meter factor
o
K factor
o
Pulse error count
o
Beta
o
Discharge coeff
o
Expand factor
o
Vel of approach
o
Reynolds number
o
Corr pipe diameter
o
Corr orif diameter
o
Press loss value
o
Mass rate K factor
o
Pressure ratio
o
Ind vol total
o
Gross volume total
o
Ind std vol total
o
Gross std vol total
o
Mass total
o
Net oil & water
o
Turbine errors
o
Alarm total
o
Totals
o
Increments
o
Alarm state: ABXY
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.3
Printed reports This section explains how a member of the 795x series can print a variety of sytem reports.
12.3.1
Types of report There are a variety of printed reports to choose from. Report name (as displayed)
Content of report
Current report
This shows settings and values of up to 20 data locations that have been set-up in a user-defined list. (Refer to Chapter 9 for a guide to this report)
Alarm report
Contents of the Historical Alarm Log and attributes of up to 20 user-nominated parameters.
Event report
Contents of the Historical Event Log and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters.
Config report
Application configuration details and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters.
Current QTR
Current batch transaction record and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters. (See “Batching” in Chapter 18)
Previous QTR
Previous batch transaction record and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters. (See “Batching” in Chapter 18)
Prover report
General Proving Session Report. (See Chapter 16 for a sample print-out)
Brooks prove rpts Alarm log Manual log Daily log Interval log
Brooks Compact Proving Session Report The “Alarm” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving) The “Manual” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving) The “Daily” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving) The “Interval” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving)
Reports can be enhanced to include header and footer information. (See PRINT MENUs: <”Header & footer”> and <”Define reports”>)
12.3.2
Printing a report Reports have to be printed out individually. Each print request involves selecting a report name (description) from a fixed list of all reports. The contents of that report is then transmitted through a serial communications port that has been set-up for connection to an ASCII compatible output device. The “World” security level prevents everyone from requesting a report to be printed. However, all other security levels can be used to request any of the reports that are listed above. To find out about how to change security level, refer to the “Password and Security” section in Chapter 11.
How to print a report using the front panel keyboard Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that at least one serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program. (Note: The set-up on the output device outside the scope of this Operating Manual)
2. Press the PRINT MENU key 3. Navigate to this menu: <“Print report”> 4. Edit the option (value) to be one of the report descriptions from the fixed list 5. Watch the report appear either on the ASCII output device. 795x Op Man/BD
Page 12.9
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
How to print a report by other methods Method #1: ‘Remote’ Print via MODBUS A MODBUS networked device can directly manipulate database locations of the 795x machine. With this method, a MODBUS ‘write’ command message can be used to write a report identification code to the parameter <”Print”>. The identified report is then be transmitted as normal.
Chapter 7 features worked examples of supported MODBUS commands that can be very easily adapted for this purpose. It will be necessary to know the location number of “Print Report” for part of the command sequence. This can be done by pressing the PRINT MENU key, searching the menu structure and then, once found, pressing the ‘a’ soft-key.
Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that a serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program. (Note: The set-up on the output device outside the scope of this Operating Manual)
2. Transmit a MODBUS write command to the 795x machine. Report Identification Codes are as shown Table 12.3.1.
3. Watch the report appear either on the ASCII output device.
Table 12.3.1: Report Selection Codes Value
Page 12.10
Report Selected
0
"None"
1
"Current report"
2
"Alarm report"
3
"Event report"
4
"Config report"
5
"Current QTR"
6
"Previous QTR"
7
"Prover report"
8
“Brooks prove rpts”
9
"Alarm log"
10
"Manual log"
11
"Daily log"
12
"Interval log"
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
(How to print a report by other methods continued…) Method #2: ‘Remote’ Print via Digital (Status) Input By default, Status Input 4 can be used by an external system to request a printout of the “Current” report. Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that a serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program (Note: The set-up on the output device outside the scope of this Operating Manual)
2. Ensure that the Status Input 4 is suitably wired to the external system that will activate it It is possible to modify attributes of a digital (status) input: (a) Logic sense: Choose between “Positive Logic” (default) or “Negative Logic” (b) Mode: Choose between “Non latched” (default) or “Latched” Configuration parameters are under: <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Status Inputs”> (or similar)
3. Test by activating the digital (status) input. It is possible to allocate this remote print function to another digital (status) input but care is needed to avoid clashes with the prover requirements (See Chapter 16) and the digital input allocated to selecting maintenance-mode. (Menu: <“Configure”>/)
12.3.3
Some typical reports (a) “Current” report with two user-nominated parameters
CURRENT REPORT ================ Report printing time: 21/02/2000 15:26:29 Tag number
HB5X2510
Software Version
2510 Iss 4.00
Indicated vol rate
200.000 m3/hour SET
Ind volume total
4039565.849
m3
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
(b) “Alarm” report with one alarm
ALARM LOGGER REPORT ====================== Report printing time: 21/02/2000 15:28:00 Tag number
HB5X2510
Software Version
2510 Iss 4.00
21/02/2000 13:30:31 OFF * Power fail SYSTEM 20/02/2000 17:17:39 ON * Power fail SYSTEM ******************** END OF REPORT ********************
795x Op Man/BD
Page 12.11
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
(c) “Event” report with two events
EVENT LOG REPORT ================ Report printing time: 21/02/2000 15:43:44 Event List: ---------14/02/2000 16:46:25 USER, Input channel 1 * New: 0.000 % SET Old: 25.000 % SET 14/02/2000 16:45:30 USER, BSW pcent @ 100% * New: 100.000 % Old: 0.000 % ---------Tag number
HB5X2510
Software Version
2510 Iss 4.00
Power fail time
20/02/2000 17:17:39
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
12.4
Giving your 795x instrument a tag number If you have more than one 795x you may want to give each instrument a tag number so that, in printed reports for example, you know which one the report refers to. To allocate an identifier…
1. Select the option on the Main Menu. 2. Press the ‘b’ soft-key. (The cursor shifts to the left of the screen) 3. Key in the identifier you want. (This over-types any existing identifier) 4. Press the ‘b’ soft-key again. (The new details shift back to the right of the display).
Page 12.12
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13. Routine maintenance and fault finding 13.1 Cleaning the instrument You can use a cloth or sponge and water clean the outside of the instrument. Do not use caustic cleaning agents or abrasive materials.
13.2 Fault finding Although the instrument is designed to be extremely reliable it is possible that faults may arise at some time or another. The fault-finding charts show the most likely faults and explain how to trace their causes and put them right. If you cannot cure a fault yourself, contact your supplier or the manufacturers for help. NOTE:
This chapter does not deal with faults caused by incorrect configuration of the instrument. If you want to find out more about configuration, refer to Chapters 10 and 11.
Using the Health Check The 795x Health Check facility provides a method of displaying a variety of measurement parameters, including time period inputs, analogue inputs and status inputs and outputs. This can be used as a diagnostic aid if the system seems to be faulty.
795x (CH13 /BC)
Page 13.1
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
PROBLEM: A reading from a transmitter is not displayed
Has it ever been displayed ?
NO
Check the field wiring against the wiring schedule
Is the transmitter's field wiring correct ?
Wire the transmitter up according to the wiring schedule
YES
YES
The field wiring is faulty
Is the transmitter receiving power from the 795x ?
NO
NO
795x's Connector/ Power Supply Board is probably faulty
Change the Connector Board
NO
The transmitter or its configuration is probably faulty
Refer to the transmitter's manual for more information.
NO
Correct the configuration
Replace the field wiring to the transmitter
YES
Is the transmitter sending current to the 795x ?
YES Is the 795x configured correctly ?
YES The 795x's input circuit is probably faulty
Replace the 795x's Connector/Power Supply Board
Fault-finding chart 1: No reading from a transmitter
Page 13.2
795x (CH13 /BC)
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
Take great care during this procedure because the power supply must be ON when you carry it out.
PROBLEM: The display is blank
Is the power to the 795x ON ?
NO Turn the power ON
YES
Has the fuse in the 795x blown ?
YES
NO
Adjust the voltage so that it is within spec
YES
NO
Is the security LED on the 795x lit ?
Is the 795x's supply voltage within spec ?
NO
Replace the fuse by one of the correct rating
795x's Connector/ Power Supply Board is probably faulty
Replace the 795x's Connector/Power Supply Board
The 795x's Display Module is probably faulty
Replace the 795x's Display Module
YES
Fault-finding chart 2: The display is blank
795x (CH13 /BC)
Page 13.3
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
Page 13.4
795x (CH13 /BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14. Removal and replacement of parts 14.1 Front panel assembly Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
1. Referring to the diagram, undo the six captive screws which attach the front panel assembly to the case. Lift the assembly away to the limits of its connecting cables.
Top of 7950
Ribbon cable connectors (2 off)
Microprocessor board
Display
Keyboard
Captive fixing screws (6 off)
Removing the front panel assembly
2.
Release the two connectors and unplug the ribbon cables from the back of the assembly. The assembly is now free.
3. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal. Note that the ribbon cable to the connector board must be routed so that it does not come into contact with the circuit board otherwise there may be electrical interference. A suggested method for routing the cable is shown in the diagram below.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.1
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
Side view of 7950 Suggested routing for the ribbon cable to the connector board
Page 14.2
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.2 Display Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
1. Remove the Front panel assembly as explained in Section 14.1. 2. Undo and remove the six pan-head screws and crinkle washers which secure the microprocessor board to the front panel assembly. Lift the microprocessor board away to the limits of the cables. 3. Disconnect the keyboard cable and display cable Keyboard cable connector
SIDE VIEW
Display fixing nuts (4 off)
Display cable connector
Microprocessor board fixing screws (6 off)
SIDE VIEW
Display
Keyboard
Captive fixing screws (6 off)
Removing the display 4. Undo and remove the four nuts and washers which secure the display to the assembly. Lift the display away and unplug the ribbon cable. The display is now free. 5. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.3
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.3 Connector board Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
1. Remove the front panel assembly as described in Section 14.1. 2. Undo the four screws which secure the terminal cover. Lift the terminal cover away. connector board fixing screws (4 off)
Front panel assembly
Screen fixing screws (2 off) Screen Front panel fixing screws (6 off)
Terminal cover
Connector board
Terminal cover fixing screws (4 off)
Removing the connector board
3. Undo and remove the two screws which fix the screen into position. Slide the screen forwards out of its location. 4. Undo and remove the four screws and washers which fix the connector board to the case (note that one of these secures the earth lead). Remove the connector board from the case. 5. Replace all components in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14.4
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.4 Microprocessor board Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
Keyboard cable connector
SIDE VIEW
Display cable connector
Microprocessor board fixing screws (6 off)
SIDE VIEW
Display
Keyboard
Captive fixing screws (6 off)
Removing the microprocessor board
1. Remove the front panel assembly as described in Section 14.1. 2. Undo and remove the six pan-head screws and crinkle washers which secure the microprocessor board to the front panel assembly. Withdraw the board to the limits of the ribbon cables. 3. Unplug the two ribbon cables from the circuit board. The microprocessor board is now free. 4. Replace all components in the reverse order of removal.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.5
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.5 Screen and RFI conductive strips Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding. RFI screening is provided by: x
A conductive rubber strip compressed between the back of the connector board and the instrument housing.
x
A conductive strip on the front of the connector board. This item is part of the circuit board itself and cannot be removed.
x
A metal screen which presses on to the conducting strip on the front of the connector board and is attached by two screws to the instrument housing. The screen divides the top and bottom of the housing.
x
A conductive rubber strip around the edge of the instrument housing, behind the front panel assembly.
NOTE:
These components are essential if the instrument is to comply with CE approval. They must be replaced if they are damaged. Do not remove them under any other circumstances.
Note that the silicon tubing inside the terminal cover and gland plate are not conductive and are not part of the RFI screening. Remove the screen and conductive strips as follows: 1. Remove the front panel assembly as described in Section 14.1. 2. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location inside the front edge of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 3. Remove the connector board as described in Section 14.3. You have to remove the screen as part of this operation. 4. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location across the back of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 5. Replace all items in the reverse order of their removal but note the following:
Page 14.6
x
Before re-fitting the seal behind the front panel assembly, apply a small amount of Loctite clear silicon adhesive to the groove.
x
Do not apply adhesive to the strip across the back of the signal converter.
x
Do not stretch either of the conducting strips when re-fitting them.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
Removable conductive strip (around inside of front panel)
Front panel assembly Connector board Front panel fixing screws (6)
Screen fixing screws (2)
Non-removable conductive strip
Removable conductive strip
Terminal cover Screen Terminal cover fixing screws (4)
RFI screen and conductive strips
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.7
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.6 Terminal cover seal Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
NOTE:
This seal is essential if the instrument is to achieve IP and Nema ratings. They must be replaced if they are damaged. Do not remove it under any other circumstances.
S
solartron instrumen ts
7
8
4
5
1
2
9
a
6
V b
V
3
c
+/-
0 d
CLR
EXP
1 2
LINK 1
Terminal cover seal
Removing the terminal cover seal
1. Undo and remove the four screws around the edge of the terminal cover. Lift the cover away. 2. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location inside the front edge of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 3. When re-fitting the seal (or when fitting a new one) apply about 12 beads of Loctite silicone clear adhesive into the groove, then push the seal into the groove. Take care not to stretch the seal.
Page 14.8
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.7 Gland plate seal Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
1. Undo and remove the six screws around the edge of the terminal cover. Lift the cover away. 2. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location inside the front edge of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 3. When re-fitting the seal (or when fitting a new one) apply about 12 beads of Loctite silicone clear adhesive into the groove, then push the seal into the groove. Take care not to stretch the seal.
Gland plate seal
Removing the gland plate seal
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.9
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.8 Fuses Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
1. Make sure that the power supply is off. 2. Undo and remove the four screws which secure the terminal cover, then remove the terminal cover.
Fuse for plug PL1 (mains)
Fuse for plug PL2 (D.C.)
LINK 1
PL1 (mains)
PL2 (D.C.)
Fuse holders on the connector board
4. The fuses are located in holders on the connector board. Use a small screwdriver to undo the cap on the fuse-holder, then remove the cap together with the fuse. 5. Pull the fuse out of the cap and insert another one of the correct rating. 6. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14.10
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.9 Back-up battery Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding. 1. Ensure that the unit is disconnected from all power supplies. 2. Ensure that a new CR2430 battery and a thin edged, non-conductive implement are within easy reach. 3. Undo the six captive screws which attach the front panel assembly to the case. 4. Carefully lift the front panel assembly away from the case. 5. Undo the yellow and green Earth lead from the panel. Do not undo the connecting ribbon cables. 6. Locate the back-up battery on the Processor Board.
Ribbon cable
Battery holder
Part of Processor Board
Clip/contact
Battery
7. Referring to the diagram [in Section 14.9], use a non-conductive implement to gently lever the battery upwards from near the rear of the clip. As soon as the battery lifts up a small amount, gently ease the battery in a horizontal direction away from the holder and the clip. Keep the battery in contact with the clip.
DO NOT LIFT UP THE CLIP MORE THAN NECESSARY TO MOVE THE BATTERY. 8. Keep the battery in contact with the clip until you are prepared to insert a new one. When the clip loses contact with the battery, there is a maximum of 10 seconds before all configuration and database information is lost. 9. Once prepared, remove existing battery and then slide the new one under the clip and into the holder observing the polarity symbols. Complete this action within 10 seconds. 10. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.11
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
Page 14.12
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
15. Assembly drawing and parts list 15.1 What the drawing and parts list tell you The drawing and parts list show those parts of the 7950 which you can obtain as spares. To identify an item: 1. Find the item on the appropriate assembly drawing 2. Note the Item Number by the side of it. 3. look up the Item Number on the parts list. The parts list tells you: x x x
the Part Number for the item a description of the item the quantity of the item that appears on the drawing.
15.2 How to obtain spare parts You can obtain spare parts from the supplier from whom you bought the instrument or from the manufacturers (Mobrey). In either case, you must state on your order:
7950 (CH15/AD)
x
your name, address and telephone or fax number
x
a description of the parts you want
x
the part numbers of the items you are ordering
x
the quantity of each item.
Page 15.1
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
See Note 3
6 off each
11
10
8
17
2
+
15
2 off each 10
1
8
3 5
4 2 off each 10
8
14
12 7
8
9 6
4 off each
10
8
4 off each
13
+ 15
See Note 3
16
NOTES
10
8
6 off each
13
+ 15
See Note 3
1. The diagram is not to scale. 2. Some features have been omitted for clarity. 3. Apply a small amount of Loctite silicon adhesive (Item 15) to the items indicated.
Diagram for identifying and ordering spares
Page 15.2
7950 (CH15/AD)
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
Item no.
Part number
Description
Quantity
1
79503700
Housing
1
2
79500200
Front panel assembly
1
3
79501203
Display assembly
1
4
79500502
Microprocessor board assembly (with CR2430 Lithium battery.)
1
5
79500501
Connector board assembly
1
6
79503705
Screen
1
7
412011280
Spacer 3.6mm ID x 9.5mm long
4
8
411129010
M3 crinkle washer
4+6+2+2+4
9
410031010
M3 hexagonal nut
4
10
406803060
M3 x 6 pan head screw
6+2+2+4
11
79503710
Key panel seal
1
12
79503701
Terminal cover
1
13
429501050
Silicone tubing, 3.0mm OD
1.5m
14
429502300
Nickel/silicone tubing 3.2mm OD
0.3m
15
830005650
Loctite silicon adhesive, clear
as required
16
79503703
Gland plate
1
17
79503708
15-way flexible cable
1
7950 (CH15/AD)
Page 15.3
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
Page 15.4
7950 (CH15/AD)
Chapter 16 Liquid Flowmeter Proving
16. Flowmeter Proving This feature is not supported by the 7950 Flow Computer.
795- Op Man/AA
Page 16.1
Chapter 16 Liquid Flowmeter Proving
Page 16.2
7950 Op Man/AA
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17. HART, SMART and the 7950 17.1 What this Chapter tells you This Chapter is a comprehensive guide for understanding how the 7950 can be set-up for digital communications with “SMART” † type field transmitters.
Important Notice This Chapter is only relevant to 7950’s with the “HART” add-on board installed. Contact Mobrey for up-to-date details of 7950 upgrade options.
17.2 Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7950 A special add-on board‡ is installed inside the 7950 before this facility is enabled. This board provides all the necessary hardware and firmware support for the 7950 to communicate as a Current Input Device (Primary Master) on two separate networks (two-wire 4-20mA loops) of “SMART” field transmitters (Slaves).
Warning!! Each network loop must have no more than five “SMART” field transmitters connected at any one time. Exceeding this number will damage add-on boards. The following “safe area only” diagram shows two HART network loops with the maximum number of “SMART” field transmitters connected. In practice, far fewer transmitters are used. Take note of the warnings - above and below. Section 17.3 has details of external wiring involving the 7950. T1
a HART 1 Value 0.125 Live
T2
T3
T4
T5
T4
T5
HART Channel 1
b
HART Channel 2
c d
T1
T2
T3
Warning!! Connecting up “SMART” transducers has to be done with great care. Poweringup more than one ‘point-to-point’ configured transmitter on a HART network loop can produce an electrical current (20mA per transmitter) that can damage the 7950.
†
‡
A “SMART” transmitter is said to be intelligent because it contains a microprocessor that provides extra functionality. This may take various forms, such as on-board calculations, handling multiple sensors, combining types of measurement, measurement integrity indicators, and so forth. “SMART” is also used for the ability to re-use existing field wiring. Mobrey part number is 79507
7950 Op Man/AB
Page 17.1
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
The communications standard for each network loop is the HART§ Protocol**. A full technical discussion of this standard is outside the scope of this operating manual. There is a detailed discussion of the HART protocol in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”. However, particularly important aspects involving the 7950 are covered in later section as they are needed. Application Software is able to request data from dynamic variables that are kept and maintained by a “SMART” transmitter. These dynamic variables can be thought of as being very much like 7950 type data locations. Four dynamic variables per “SMART” field transmitter can be requested. A total of eight dynamic variables can be input to the 7950. Configuration details concentrate on setting up the 7950 to obtain up to eight (the maximum) measurement values.
795x HART Inputs
HART Transmitter
HART Transmitter
Variables
Variables
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Third
Third
Fourth
Fourth
Address = 1
Address = 9
HART 1 HART 2
HART network loop 1 HART 3 HART 4 HART 5 HART 6
§
HART network loop 2
HART 7
HART Transmitter
HART Transmitter
HART 8
Variables
Variables
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Third
Third
Fourth
Fourth
Address = 1
Address = 8
This is an acronym for “Highway Addressable Remote Transducer”. HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication foundation.
**
Implementation conforms to revision 5.5 of the HART protocol specification.
Page 17.2
7950 Op Man/AB
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17.3 Connecting the 7950 to a HART network loop This section covers installation issues for analogue input wiring involving the 7950. 17.3.1
7950 Electrical connections and impedance requirements HART connections use analogue inputs 5 and 6 for HART network loops 1 and 2 respectively. The HART add-on board provides the hardware support for these two additional analogue inputs.
795x 24V d.c. (Isolated supply)
+
"SMART" Field Transmitter
Analogue input Signal +
Active impedance
Note: To ensure reliable operation, it is good practice to ground the 0V d.c. isolated supply at one point.
100 Ohms
Analogue input Signal 0V d.c. (Isolated supply)
“SMART” Analogue input on the HART add-on board (Internally powered)
Every analogue input on the 795x utilises a internal 100: current sense resistor. The circuitry for the “SMART” analogue inputs (on the HART add-on board) use a 100: current sense resistor in series with an active impedance. The total impedance is then sufficient for reliable operations at HART signal frequencies, while minimising the d.c. voltage drop across the 795x terminals. This allows a sufficient voltage at the field transmitter even when powered through I.S. Barriers (or Isolators).
Parameter notes: 1. At d.c., the voltage drop at the maximum current of 22mA is 3.4V 2. Minimum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 330: 3. Maximum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 480:
HART network loop 1 (Analogue input 5): Pin function 24V d.c. (isolated supply) Analogue input signal + Analogue input signal 0V d.c. (isolated supply)
7950 Op Man/AB
Klippon Pin no. PL14/1 PL14/2 PL14/3 PL14/4
Klippon Pin Designation Analogue power + Analogue input 5 + Analogue input 5 Analogue power -
Page 17.3
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
HART network loop 2 (Analogue input 6): Pin function 24V d.c. (isolated supply) Analogue input signal + Analogue input signal 0V d.c. (isolated supply) 17.3.2
Klippon Pin no. PL14/5 PL14/6 PL14/7 PL14/8
Klippon Pin Designation Analogue power + Analogue input 6 + Analogue input 6 Analogue power -
Frequency-shift keying The HART protocol uses the American “Bell 202” standard frequency-shift keying (F.S.K.) method to mask a digital signal on to analogue wiring.
Important Notice The “HART” add-on board can be used with the “Extra I/O” add-on board at the same time. This combination provides 2 off Analogue inputs 5 and 6. However, the F.S.K. signal produces random errors on the analogue signal which affect the normal accuracy (See Appendix ‘C’). Mobrey strongly recommend that analogue inputs, being used for HART loop inputs, should only be used for HART communications.
17.3.3
Cable choice and the 65Ps rule There is a standard “65Ps” rule that determines the maximum length of cable that can be used for reliable operation of the HART network loop . Step 1: Add up all the resistance in the network loop. x 7950 current sense resistance - this is equivalent to 350: with the HART add-on board. x I.S. Barrier or Isolator x Cable Step 2: Find out the total cable capacitance Step 3: Multiply the total resistance by the total cable capacitance. The resulting value must be less than 65Ps. Mobrey can provide multi-pair cable that has a maximum capacitance of 115 pF/m. The following table shows the recommended maximum cable lengths for typical HART network loops with this cable. No. of slaves 1 1 1 2 2
Page 17.4
Loop resistance No Barrier 150: 300: No Barrier 150:
Max. Cable length 1171m 884m 713m 1136m 846m
7950 Op Man/AB
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950 (Table continued from previous page) No. of slaves 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
Loop resistance 300: No Barrier 150: 300: No Barrier 150: 300: No Barrier
Max. Cable length 673m 1101m 807m 633m 1067m 769m 593m
150:
1032m 730m
300:
553m
Table notes: 1. Cable length calculations take into account the 350: resistance from a 7950 with the HART Board. 2. It is assumed that a 150: I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 185: 3. It is assumed that a 300: I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 340: A discussion of cable choices can be found in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”.
Important Notice: Field transmitters in hazardous areas Always follow wiring instructions provided by manufacturers of the field transmitters.
7950 Op Man/AB
Page 17.5
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17.4 Configuring the 7950 to use a HART network loop Two methods are provided for configuring with the key-pad (on the front panel). Do not use the second method unless you are experienced with configuration using the menus. 17.4.1
Configuring by using the software wizard (Recommended) This sub-section covers step-by-step instructions for using a software wizard to configure a 7950 that has the following set-up: Example 1 x A HART network loop with one “SMART” static pressure field transmitter is attached to analogue input 5. The objectives of this example are: - to set a multi-drop address - get static pressure from the fourth dynamic variable (on the transmitter) into the first HART data location dedicated to holding input values - allocate the first HART data location to the Line pressure calculation Go to the wizard selection menu
1. Press the MENU key so that page 1 of the main menu appears. 2. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until the “Configure” main menu option is displayed. 3. Press the ‘d’ key to select the “Configure” option 4. Press the ‘a’ key twice.
Select the Hart inputs wizard
5. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through a list of wizards. 6. Press the ‘b’ key when “Hart inputs” appears on the display.
Select the 7950 “HART” data location
7. Press the ‘d’ key to answer “yes” to the prompt.
Choose the HART network loop
8. HART 1 PhyLinkNo is set to “HART link 1” by default. This example involves HART network loop 1 (aka HART link 1) so there is no need to change the setting. However, If anything other than “HART link 1” is shown: x Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options. x Press the ‘b’ key when “HART link 1” is displayed. 9. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Choose the address of the “Field transmitter”
10. Press the ‘b’ key 11. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “HART address 5” is shown. 12. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 13. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Page 17.6
7950 Op Man/AB
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
Choose the fourth dynamic variable
14. Press the ‘b’ key 15. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “Fourth variable” is shown. 16. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 17. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Choose the type of dynamic variable
18. Press the ‘b’ key 19. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “Static press (G)” is shown. 20. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 21. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Put the field transmitter on-line
22. Press the ‘b’ key 23. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “On line” is shown. 24. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 25. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Monitor the response from issuing the online/off-line command,
26. Watch the response message. It should cycle from “None” to “Configured” in less than a minute. Note : The response “SMART error” may appear if there is there is a problem with the HART network loop. 27. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Change status to get live values from the field transmitter
28. Press the ‘d’ key 29. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “Live” is shown. 30. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection. Live static pressure values (gauge units) should now be displayed. 31. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Skip remaining questions
32. Press the ‘c’ key to answer “no” to the prompt. 33. Repeat step 32 until the “Hart inputs” wizard is completed.
Allocate the HART data input location`
34. Use the “Pressure” wizard to make data location HART value 5 the source for the Line pressure calculation. Note: During the “Pressure” wizard, Line press input chl should be set to “HART input 5”
7950 Op Man/AB
Page 17.7
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17.5 Post configuration - viewing HART data This sub-section provides a complete check-list of all the data locations associated with checking information returning from HART network loops. Task 1 : Checking the results Step 1: Find this menu : <“Health check”>/<”HART Inputs”> Step 2: Look at data shown in this check-list Data name (as displayed)
Instructions
HART 1 value HART 2 value : : : HART 7 value HART 8 value HART software ver HART no. of phy links HART status
Values from sixteen dynamic variables
HART board firmware identification. This shows the number of HART network loops. Default setting is “None” This shows a digit for each of the HART data location inputs: Digit = ‘0’ - Input is not configured (not in use) Digit = ‘1’ - Input is configured (in use) Digit = ‘2’ - Input configuration failed due to an error Default state is 00000000
17.6 SMART units of measurement Support is provided for a sub-set of the SMART units of measurement Temperature 1. Deg.C. 2. Deg.F 3. Kelvin
Density 1. g/cc 2. g/m3 3. lb/gallon (UK) 4. lb/ft3 5. Kg/litre 6. g/litre 7. lb/in3
Pressure 1. In WG 2. mm WG 3. Bar 4. mBar 5. Pa 6. MPa 7. In HG
Mass rate 1. g/sec 2. g/Min 3. h/Hour 4. Kg/sec 5. Kg/Min 6. Kg/day 7. Tonnes/Min 8. Tonnes/Hour 9. Tonnes/Day 10. Lb/sec 11. Lb/Hour 12. Lb/Day
Note : Data values received in un-supported measurement units are displayed without units of measurement - line 3 of the display is blank. However, calculations that use this data always assume the default units of measurement. For temperature data, this would be “Deg.C”.
Page 17.8
7950 Op Man/AB
18. BATCHING (TRANSACTIONS) This chapter explores the 795x support for Standard Batch Operations and optional Retrospective Calculations.
18.1 Standard Batch Operations Batch operations comprise transactions and recording of product transfers and conditions over a defined period. The records kept are the current transaction in progress and the previous (last) completed transaction. Additionally, the transaction can be archived. Both the current and previous records may be printed out on-demand or automatically on transaction completion. The archived transaction maybe viewed or printed later when required. These records are called ‘Batch Transaction Records’ but may sometimes be referred to as ‘Quantity Transaction Records’ (QTR) and typically contain the normal totalisers, start/stop time/date and conditions, together with weighted averages.
18.1.1
Batch Operation Types The Flow Computer offers 4 types of batch operation: (1) Daily This type of batch commences at a programmed (SET) hour – known as the contract hour. The duration is 24 hours at all times, unless the calendar clock is adjusted. Batches are back-to-back and therefore have to be halted on-demand by a menu-based soft-command selection. (2) Timed This type of batch commences when a programmed (SET) date and time matches that of the Flow Computer calendar clock. Time is the primary parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a batch is a fixed, user-programmed period. Batches are always back-to-back and have to be halted on-demand by a menu-based soft-command selection or by the BOTTOM-BLANK front panel key. (3) Manual Trigger This type of batch is started by selecting a menu ‘soft-command’. User- intervention is the essential parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a batch is therefore entirely dependent on when the “Halt” soft-command is selected. Batches are not back-to-back unless softcommands are issued in quick succession. Alternatively, the BOTTOM-BLANK front panel key can start and stop a batch. (4) Programmed Quantity This type of batch is more sophisticated than previous types. A chain of 6 back-to-back batches can be set-up, each batch with parameters for programming the quantity to deliver, optional delivery rate, and start method. The chain can be linked such that it is continuously repeated. An individual quantity-based batch transaction can commence either by: (i)
menu-based soft-command selection,
(ii)
starting at a pre-set date and time or
(iii) starting immediately after being enabled. This type is more sophisticated than the previously mentioned types. A chain of 6 back-to-back batches can be set-up, each batch with parameters for programming the quantity to deliver, the optional delivery rate and start method. The chain can be linked such that it is continuously repeated. Product flow is the essential parameter for completing a batch. The batch is complete when a pre-set quantity of the measured product has been delivered – quantity is in terms of mass flow, gross volume flow or net volume flow.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.1
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
Simple flow control is available by means of automatically opening and closing a stream block valve at the start and end of a quantity batch. The subject of “Valve Control and Monitoring” is dealt with in Chapter 16 – some configuration is required. An alternative option is for the 795x series Flow Computer to continuously control the rate of product flow, thus giving a more precise delivery of the product during each batch transaction. Flow Delivery Control (FDC) features an auto-configured PID algorithm that can manipulate a proportionally controlled valve 1. After a flow-controlled batch is underway, the user can adjust the deliverable quantity, abort batches, or pause/resume the batch. System alarms flag events, such as completion or approaching end of batch.
Table 18.1.1: Availability of Optional Features Batch Type
Pause/Resume?
Qty Adjustment?
Over-spill limit?
Daily
No
No
No
Timed
No
No
No
Manual
No
No
No
Quantity (FDC)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Quantity (w/o FDC)
No
No
No
Abbreviation used: “FDC” = Flow Delivery Control, “w/o” = without
1
The Flow Control Valve is expected to be independent of the valves used during a proving session.
18.2
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.2
Batch Operation Parameter Reference This section is a reference for all the parameters associated with batch transaction operations. Figure 18.1.1: Batching Operation Parameters Points To Observe 1.
Only one type of batch operation can operate at any one time. A batch type is exclusively selected at that moment of being enabling by a menu-based soft-command e.g. “Run”. This action also halts an existing batch transaction.
2.
There are menu system areas for viewing the records of the previous and current batch transactions. (Menu: <“Batching”>)
3. The transaction record of a completed batch is automatically archived. (See “Archiving” section in Chapter 9)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Batching”> and (2) <“Batching”> Menu Data List (1 of 2): Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Menu Data (as displayed) Batch start time Timed batch duration Batch time enable Manual batch enable Qty unit-type select Qty batch enable Qty batch pause Batch status Batch qty delivered Batch qty remaining Starting program ID Current program ID Batch manual trigger Adjust batch qty Modified batch qty Prog1 quantity Prog1 flow rate Prog1 start type Prog1 start time Prog1 name Prog1 next program Qty overrun limit PID flow control
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
H, J H, J A H, I, J G E E
K L (L)
D F (E),M, Q
Associated notes follow the next menu data list.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Index 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 -
Menu Data (as displayed) Flow ramp limit Trickle flow rate Meter run max flow Daily contract hour Daily batch enable Batch auto print Meter density * Base density * Degrees API * Meter factor * Flowmeter K factor * BS&W value * CTL CPL Meter temperature * Meter pressure * Base density oil Degrees API oil Meter kinematic visc * Flow status Operating mode
Notes? (M) (M) (M) H, J L
(F) B
(X) - Mentioned in note X
18.3
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Menu Data List (2 of 2): Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
CURRENT BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD
42a 43a 44a 45a 46a 47a 48a 49a 50a 51a 52a 53a 54a 55a 56a 57a 58a 59a 60a 61a 62a 63a 64a 65a 66a 67a 68a 69a 70a 71a 72a 73a 74a 75a 76a 77a 78a 79a 80a 81a 82a 83a 84a 85a 86a 87a 88a 89a 90a 91a 92a 93a 94a 95a 96a 97a 98a 99a 100a 101a 102a 103a
Batch ticket number Batch status Product name Program name Batch start time Start meter temp Start meter press Start meter dens Start IV total Start GV total Start ISV total Start GSV total Start mass total Start NV oil total Start NSV oil total Start NM oil total Start NV water total Start NSV water tot Start NM water total Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Oil vol total Oil std vol total Oil mass total Water vol total Water std vol total Water mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors Current IV total Current GV total Current ISV total Current GSV total Current mass total Current NV oil total Current NSV oil tot Current NM oil total Current NV water tot Current NSV water total Current NM water tot Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Current date/time Current meter temp Current meter pres Current meter dens
O R C: 7 C: 2 C: 3 C: 8 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C:11 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 2 C: 3 C: 8 C: 9 C:10 C:12 C:11 C:11 C: 5 C: 5 C: 4 C: 4 C: 6 C: 6 C: 7 C: 1 C: 2 C: 8
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
PREVIOUS BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD
42b 43b 44b 45b 46b 47b 48b 49b 50b 51b 52b 53b 54b 55b 56b 57b 58b 59b 60b 61b 62b 63b 64b 65b 66b 67b 68b 69b 70b 71b 72b 73b 74b 75b 76b 77b 78b 79b 80b 81b 82b 83b 84b 85b 86b 87b 88b 89b 90b 91b 92b 93b 94b 95b 96b 97b 98b 99b 100b 101b 102b 103b
Batch ticket number Batch status Product name Program name Batch start time Start meter temp Start meter press Start meter dens Start IV total Start GV total Start ISV total Start GSV total Start mass total Start NV oil total Start NSV oil total Start NM oil total Start NV water total Start NSV water tot Start NM water total Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Oil vol total Oil std vol total Oil mass total Water vol total Water std vol total Water mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors Close IV total Close GV total Close ISV total Close GSV total Close mass total Close NV oil total Close NSV oil tot Close NM oil total Close NV water tot Close NSV water total Close NM water tot Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Batch end date/time Batch end meter temp Batch end meter pres Batch end meter dens
O
“IV” = Indicated Volume, “ISV” = Indicated Standard Volume, “GV” = Gross Volume, “GSV” = Gross Standard Volume, “NV” = Net Volume, “NSV” = Net Standard Volume, “NM” = Net Mass, “av” = average, “dens” = density, “pres” = pressure
18.4
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Notes: A
By default, gross volume is the selected unit of measurement for monitoring product flow during a quantitybased batch transaction. Alternative units of measurement for selection are net volume and mass.
B
Batch transactions require the 795x Flow Computer to be operating in “Normal” mode. [‘i’ soft-key menu]
C:
Use Table 18.1.2 to help identify the initial data source for batch transaction record parameters
Table 18.1.2: Batch Transaction Record - Parameter Source Reference Ref. No.
Source Category
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Normal mode (Main/Standard) total Metering Temperature Metering Pressure API Referral % Water (by Standard Volume) Net Oil/’Water’ Calculations 795x Calendar Clock Metering density Base density API Degrees Flow Metering Viscosity
D
This is for chaining one batch transaction program to another batch transaction program. The “None” option is for ending the chain.
E
Due to the mechanics of batching, the delivered quantity may exceed the pre-set quantity. However, this over-spill can be minimised by using the Flow Delivery Control option. Over-spill is not filtered out of batch records. (Also, see Note F) Over-spill due to 795x Flow Computer timing is minimised to the delay from the method of recording values at some time during a machine cycle.
F
Limit alarm threshold for monitoring the over-spill of a batch. An over-spill outside the (upper) limit will raise a “Qty batch overrun” alarm. It can be cleared when there the batch is completed and there is a ‘flow stop’ state. This alarm limit check will not operate unless Flow Delivery Control is active and the programmed threshold is greater than zero. (Also, see Note E)
G
Pause and resume controls are available when running a quantity-based batch transaction with active Flow Delivery Control. The “pause” ‘soft-command’ allows a live adjustment to the deliverable quantity. Adjustments take effect immediately upon resumption of the batch. (See Table 18.1.1 for availability of other batch features)
H
Activating another batch type will immediately terminate all existing batch activities. There are termination exceptions: x
A quantity batch cannot be stopped without using the “halt” ‘soft-command’ (of <“Qty batch enable”>). Otherwise, attempts to enable another batch type will fail and result in a “Qty batch running” INFO class system alarm. This INFO alarm can be accepted and cleared at any time.
x
A quantity batch (with active Flow Delivery Control) cannot be enabled unless the Flow Computer is in a ‘flow stopped’ state. Otherwise, attempts will fail and result in a “Qty batch start F” INFO class system alarm. This alarm can be accepted and cleared at any time.
I
A quantity batch with a manual trigger must first be enabled with <“Qty batch enable”> and then triggered by <“Batch manual trigger”>. Further triggering may be needed if other chained programs use a manual start.
J
Terminating a running batch will leave both current and previous batch records with identical values until a new batch is started.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.5
Chapter 18 Batch Operations K
Target flow rate for achieving the “maintain” state during a quantity batch. This parameter is not applicable unless using the FDC (Flow Delivery Control) feature. (See Table 18.1.1 for availability of FDC)
L
Enable or prevent an automatic printout of the batch report immediately on completion of a batch. A serial communication port will need to be configured for a connection to an ASCII compatible printer.
M
A quantity type batch can use the 795x software based PID algorithm to manipulate a proportional valve and therefore control the product delivery rate. The “PID” option for this parameter will auto-configure most PID parameters apart from the gain, the integral and the derivative. (See “PID” reference pages in Chapter 9) Associated Flow Delivery Control Parameters: x
<“Trickle flow rate”>
This will specify the minimum flow rate for the automated closing stage of a batch. A default value of 0 forces the 795X to assume the ‘trickle’ is 2% of the value programmed (SET) for <“Meter run max flow “>.
x
<“Flow ramp limit”>
This will override the limit that appears within the PID configuration menu.
x
<“Meter run max flow”>
This is a capping limit for the rate of flow.
The “Simple open & close” option for this parameter will cause the Flow Computer to open both the Stream Block Valve and the Flow Control Valve at the start of a batch, and close them both at the end of the batch. With this option there is no control over the product delivery rate. The “Off” option for this parameter is for when the Flow Computer does not control valves. N
Pause a quantity-based batch, SET a new deliverable quantity and then resume the batch. (Requires FDC.)
O
This parameter cannot be reset to zero on-demand but will rollover to zero after exceeding 4.95 billion.
P
Weighted averaging uses the Gross Volume flow rate.
Q
If using PID Control (Flow Delivery Control) or the ‘simple open and close’ method, it is necessary for the Flow Computer to auto-control valves. Set-up details are as guided in the “Valve Control and Monitoring” section of Chapter 16. It is also necessary to select a pre-built map of status I/O assignments – maps are listed in Chapter 16. To check on and select an I/O assignment: x x
R
18.6
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Prover”>/<”Common prv details”>. Locate the <prover I/O assignment> (or similar) parameter and edit as necessary.
For details, turn to the “Interface Detection” reference pages in Chapter 11.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.3
Guided Example 1: Manual Trigger Type Batch This example demonstrates how a manually triggered type is configured, commenced by a menu-based ‘soft-command’ and completed on-demand by another ‘soft-command’. Adapt the example to be applicable to your installation. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.2 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows single-shot batches, each varying in duration and, consequently, the quantity delivered. They are totally unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. The Flow Computer does not control product flow. Figure 18.1.2: Manual Triggered Batch Type
Operation Events:
1 Flow rate increases independently of Flow Computer. 2 Operator uses the “Run” soft-command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B1 starts immediately, with the batch status changing to “In progress”
3 Batch B1 continues and product flow remains stable until ‘Tank A’ approaches full capacity. 4 Flow rate decreases independently of Flow Computer. 5 Batch B1 completes when the operator selects the “Halt” soft-command. The batch status then changes from “In progress” to “Complete”.
6 Batch B2 does not start yet. There is a wait until ‘Tank B’ is ready. 7 Flow rate increases independently of Flow Computer. 8 Operator uses the “Run” soft-command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B2 starts immediately, with the batch status changing to “In progress”
9 Batch B2 continues and product flow remains stable until ‘Tank B’ approaches full capacity. 10 Flow rate decreases independently of Flow Computer. 11 Batch B2 completes when the operator selects the “Halt” soft-command. Associated Parameter List:
(The menu navigation list is on page 18.3)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Comment
Manual batch enable *
“Run”
x
Soft-command for enabling and triggering batch
Batch status **
(See “Operation Events”)
x
Useful for monitoring the batch operation.
* “Halt” option is the soft-command for completing a batch and also deselecting the batch type ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.7
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.4
Guided Example 2: Timed Batches This example demonstrates how the timed batch type is configured, commenced at a programmed date and time, and halted on-demand. Adapt the example to be applicable to your installation. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.3 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows a series of back-to-back batches, each programmed to last 300 seconds. The first batch commences - triggers - when the 795x calendar clock matches a programmed (SET) date and time, “12-03-2002 08:00:00”. Timed batch operations are totally unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. Batch Bn is interrupted 200 seconds after starting, following the selection of a “halt” soft-command. Figure 18.1.3: Timed Batches
Operation Events:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Configure associated parameters in the order as listed in the table below. Wait for the 795x calendar clock to match the trigger date and time. Trigger occurs on 12th March 2002 at 8 o’clock in the morning. Batch B1 starts immediately. Batch B1 completes after 300 seconds and batch B2 starts immediately. Batch B2 completes after a further 300 seconds and batch B3 starts immediately. Batch B3 completes after a further 300 seconds. Batches continue … Later on, batch Bn starts. After 200 seconds, the “halt” soft-command is selected. Batch Bn ends immediately but it is still considered to be complete - the batch status shows “complete”.
10 To resume this timed batch operation, program a new date and time, adjust the duration if necessary and then re-select the “Run” soft-command.
Associated Parameter List:
(The menu navigation list is on page 18.3)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Timed batch duration
300.0 (s)
x
300 seconds per batch.
Batch time enable
“Run”
x
Soft-command for enabling the timed batch type.
Batch start time *
12-03-2002 08:00:00
x
Trigger for 1st.batch is 12th March 2002 at 8am.
Batch status **
In Progress Ù Compete
x
Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
Comment
st
* “00-00-0000 00:00:00” = Start 1 batch immediately after editing duration and using “Run” soft-command ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
Configuration Option: The date element of <”Batch start time“> is optional. It can be “00-00-00” if commencing with the first batch on the present day. The time element must always be specified since “00:00:00” is midnight.
18.8
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.5
Guided Example 3: Quantity Batch with FDC - Single Program Loop This example demonstrates how a quantity batch program can be chained to itself such that it is continually repeated until halted on-demand. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.4 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows the same quantity batch program (BP1) repeated twice. Batch program BP1 is configured with various details (see Table 18.1.3), including a requirement to start the batch transaction with a soft-command. The first batch transaction is started by the “Run” (manual trigger) soft-command whilst the Flow Computer is in a ‘flow stopped state’. Flow Delivery Control is then responsible for delivering the pre-set quantity, with minimal over-spill, and ending the batch. The duration of this batch transaction can vary and this is due to varying flow conditions. After the first batch transaction is complete, quantity-type batching remains enabled. The subsequent batch transaction (batch program BP1) is triggered manually by the operator at a convenient time. The batch can be repeated any number of times until the “halt” (enable/disable) soft-command is selected, when no more quantity batching is needed. Directly associated parameters are listed in Table 18.1.3 on page 18.10. All other parameters, such as the Gross Volume flow rate, are identifiable from the reference information in Section 18.1.2. Figure 18.1.4: Quantity Batch with FDC - Repeated Program
Operation Events:
1 Quantity batch operation type enabled when the “Run” (enable/disable) soft-command is selected. 2 Flow is reduced by some means - on-line or off-line valve control - and falls below the programmed (SET) ‘flow stop’ threshold. The Flow Computer is then in a ‘flow stopped’ state.
3 4 5 6 7
The first batch (BP1) starts immediately when the “Run” (manual trigger) soft-command is selected. Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (in batch program ‘1’) Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until 98% of the pre-set quantity is delivered Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to match the programmed trickle rate (in batch program ‘1’) Batch stops when all the pre-set quantity is delivered. Quantity batch status displays “Idle”.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.9
Chapter 18 Batch Operations (Operation Events continued…)
8 9 10 11 12 13
The second batch (BP1) starts immediately when the “Run” (manual trigger) soft-command is selected. Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (in batch program ‘1’). Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until 98% of the pre-set quantity is delivered. Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to match the programmed trickle rate (in batch program ‘1’). Batch stops when all the pre-set quantity is delivered. Quantity type batching is deactivated (disabled) by selecting a “halt” (enable/disable) soft-command.
Table 18.1.3: Directly Associated Parameter List (of Example 3) Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Qty unit-type select
(Any “volume” option)
x
Either “Gross Volume” or “Net Volume”
PID flow control
“PID”
x
Activate Flow Delivery Control (FDC)
Flow ramp limit
100%
x
FDC Parameter: 100% = Allow any ramp-up rate
Trickle flow rate
120 m3/hour
x
FDC Parameter: Minimum flow rate for end of batch.
Meter run max flow
400 m3/hour
x
FDC Parameter: Maximum flow rate at any time
Oty overrun limit
0 m3
x
0 = No over-spill limit check
Starting program ID
“Program 1”
x
Chain begins with Batch Program ‘1’
Prog1 quantity
1000 m3
x
Deliverable quantity excluding adjustments and over-spill.
Prog1 flow rate
200 m3/hour
x
Target rate to be maintained by FDC for majority of batch.
Prog1 start type
“Manual start”
x
Manual trigger required.
Prog1 name
“Test Prog 1”
x
Free-form text of up to 20 characters.
Prog1 next program
“Program 1”
x
Chain ends with Batch Program ‘1’. This forms the loop.
Qty batch enable
“Run”
x
Enable the batch operation type. (1st. batch requires trigger)
Batch manual trigger *
“Run”
x
The Trigger for each programmed manual batch
Batch status **
In Progress Ù Compete
x
Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
Batch status ***
(See Operation Events)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty delivered
(Increasing as delivered)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty remaining
(Decreasing as delivered)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Comment
* ‘Halt’ option is the soft-command for stopping the program loop ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
18.10
*** Viewed from within the “Batching” configuration menu
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.6
Guided Example 4: Quantity Batch with FDC - Pause and Resume Controls This example demonstrates how a batch can be paused for a period and then resumed. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.5 gives a graphical overview of this example. It shows a single-shot quantity batch (BP2) that is paused mid-way for a period of time ‘tI’ and then resumed until the pre-set quantity is delivered. Batch program BP1 is configured with various details (see Table 18.1.4), including a requirement to start the batch transaction with a soft-command. The duration of this batch transaction can vary due to varying flow conditions. Directly associated parameters are listed in Table 18.1.4 on page 18.12. All other parameters, such as the Gross Volume flow rate, are identifiable from the reference information in Section 18.1.2.
Figure 18.1.5: Quantity Type Batch with FDC - Pause/Resume Control
Operating Events:
1 Quantity batch operation type enabled when the ‘Run’ (enable/disable) soft-command is selected 2 Flow is reduced by some means - on-line or off-line valve control - and falls below the programmed (SET) ‘flow stop’ threshold. The 795x Flow Computer is then in a ‘flow stopped’ state
3 Batch BP2 starts immediately when the ‘Run’ (manual trigger) soft-command is selected 4 Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (from batch program ‘2’) 5 Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until the ‘Pause’ soft-command is selected 6 Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to achieve a ‘flow stopped’ state 7 Batch BP2 resumes when the ‘Resume’ soft-command is selected 8 Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (of batch program ‘2’) 9 Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until 98% of the pre-set quantity is delivered 10 Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to match the programmed trickle rate (of batch program ‘2’) 11 Batch BP2 stops when all the pre-set quantity is delivered 12 Quantity type batching is deactivated (disabled) by selecting a ‘halt’ (enable/disable) soft-command
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.11
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Table 18.1.4: Directly Associated Parameters (for Example 4) Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Qty unit-type select
(Any “volume” option)
x
Either Gross Volume or Net Volume units of measurement
PID flow control
“PID”
x
Activate Flow Delivery Control (FDC)
Flow ramp limit
100%
x
FDC Parameter: 100% = Allow any ramp-up rate
Trickle flow rate
120 m3/hour
x
FDC Parameter: Minimum flow rate for end of batch.
3
Comment
Meter run max flow
500 m /hour
x
FDC Parameter: Maximum flow rate at any time
Oty overrun limit
0 m3
x
0 = No over-spill limit check
Starting program ID
“Program 2”
x
Chain begins with Batch Program ‘1’
Prog2 quantity
1500 m3
x
Deliverable quantity excluding adjustments and over-spill
Prog2 flow rate
400 m3/hour
x
Target rate to be maintained by FDC for majority of batch
Prog2 start type
“Manual start”
x
Manual trigger required
Prog2 name
“Test Prog 2”
x
Free-form text of up to 20 characters
Prog2 next program
“None”
x
No more links in this batch program chain
Qty batch enable
“Run”
x
Soft-command for enabling the quantity batch type
Batch manual trigger *
“Run”
x
The trigger soft-command for a programmed manual batch
Qty batch enable
“Pause” Ù “Resume”
x
Pause/Resume soft-commands for mid-way through batch
Batch status **
“In Progress” Ù “Compete”
x
Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
Batch status ***
(See Figure 18.1.5)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty delivered
0 Ö 1500 + Over-spill
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty remaining
1500 Ö 0
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
* “Halt” option is the soft-command for stopping the program loop ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
18.12
*** Viewed from within the “Batching” configuration menu
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.7
Guided Example 5: Daily Batch This example demonstrates how the daily batch operates. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.6 gives a graphical overview of this example. It shows two back-to-back batches, each batch lasting 24 hours. The first 24-hour batch B1 commences - triggers - when the “Run” soft-command is selected. The batch operation is totally unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. Batch B1 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. The second batch B2 then commences automatically. Batch B2 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. However, this time a “Halt” soft-command is selected by the operator and prevents more batches. Figure 18.1.6: Daily Batch
Operation Events:
1 Flow rate is controlled independently of Flow Computer. 2 Operator uses the “Run” soft-command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B1 starts immediately, with the batch status changing to “In progress”
3 4 5 6. 7.
Batch B1 continues and product flow remains stable until 24 hours have elapsed. Batch B2 commences immediately without any operator intervention. Batch B2 completes after 24 hours have elapsed. Operator selects the “Halt” soft-command at the same time that the batch completes. The batch status then changes from “In progress” to “Complete”.
Associated Parameter List:
(The menu navigation list is on page 18.3)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Daily contract hour
“0800”
x
Select “0800” as contract hour.
Control
“Run”
x
Soft-command for starting the 24-hour batches.
Control
“Halt”
x
Soft-command for stopping the 24-hour batches
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Comment
18.13
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.8
Printing Batch Reports Batch reports can output by using one of several methods:
1. Method: On-demand This feature requires no configuration apart from setting up an RS232C port, as guided in Chapter 7. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU key and then select the “Print report” menu option. Now choose a report by selecting from the multiple-choice options. Table 18.1.5 shows the relevant options for the batch reports. The report format can be seen on pages 18.15 and 18.16. Table 18.1.5: Descriptors for Printed Batch Reports Option (as displayed)
Purpose of option
“Current batch”
x
Printout the “Current” batch (transaction) record in a report format
“Previous batch”
x
Printout the “Previous” batch (transaction) record in a report format
2. Method: Automatic Printed Report The Flow Computer can be configured to automatically printout a report on completion of a batch transaction. Activation instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”><”Batching”>/<”Batch report print”> 2. Select the “On” option All methods require a RS232C communications port to be set-up for connection to a printer or other ASCII compatible output device. Printed reports are transmitted in an ASCII format through the port configured exclusively for this type of connection. When a batch report is first printed, it is stamped with “ORIGINAL”. All subsequent printouts of the same report will be stamped with “DUPLICATE”. However, the “current” batch report is stamped with “DUPLICATE” only if the report values have not changed.
18.14
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
Figure 18.1.7: "Current Batch" Printed Report BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD ======================== Operators signature: ............. Report printing time: XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX Original/duplicate XXXXXXXXX Tag number Batch ticket number Batch revision Previous revision
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X X
Batch status Product name Program name
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Batch base temp Batch base pressure Batch equilib press
X.XXX Deg.C X.XXX bar abs X.XXX bar abs
Batch open/close parameters --------------------------Batch start time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Current date/time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Start meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Current meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Start meter press X.XXX bar abs Current meter pres X.XXX bar abs Start meter dens X.XXX g/cc Current meter dens X.XXX g/cc Batch open/close Cumulative Totals ---------------------------------Start IV total X.XXX m3 Current IV total X.XXX m3 Start GV total X.XXX m3 Current GV total X.XXX m3 Start ISV total X.XXX std m3 Current ISV total X.XXX std m3 Start GSV total X.XXX std m3 Current GSV total X.XXX std m3 Start mass total X.XXX kg Current mass total X.XXX kg Batch Totals -----------Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
m3 m3 std m3 std m3 kg
Quantity Batch Details ---------------------Batch program ID XXXXXXXXXX Batch request qty X.XXX m3 Modified batch qty X.XXX m3 Weighted Averages ----------------Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av CCF Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Batch av water bdens
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Deg.C bar abs kg/m3 kg/m3 cSt pulse/m3
% % kg/m3 kg/m3
Alarm Counts -----------Alarms during batch X If alarm count is not zero, refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.15
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Figure 18.1.8: "Previous Batch" Printed Report BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD ======================== Operators signature: ............. Report printing time: XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX Original/duplicate XXXXXXXXX Tag number Batch ticket number Batch revision Previous revision
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X X
Batch status Product name Program name
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Batch base temp Batch base press Batch equilib press
X.XXX Deg.C X.XXX bar abs X.XXX bar abs
Batch open/close parameters --------------------------Batch start time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Batch end date/time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Start meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Batch end meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Start meter press X.XXX bar abs Batch end meter pres X.XXX bar abs Start meter dens X.XXX g/cc Batch end meter dens X.XXX g/cc Batch open/close Cumulative Totals ---------------------------------Start IV total X.XXX m3 Close IV total X.XXX m3 Start GV total X.XXX m3 Close GV total X.XXX m3 Start ISV total X.XXX std m3 Close ISV total X.XXX std m3 Start GSV total X.XXX std m3 Close GSV total X.XXX std m3 Start mass total X.XXX kg Close mass total X.XXX kg Batch Totals -----------Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Quantity Batch Details ---------------------Batch program ID Batch request qty Modified batch qty
XXXXXXXXXX X.XXX X.XXX
Weighted Averages ----------------Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av CCF Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Batch av water bdens
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
m3 m3 std m3 std m3 kg
Deg.C bar abs kg/m3 kg/m3 cSt pulse/m3
% % kg/m3 kg/m3
Alarm Counts -----------Alarms during batch X If alarm count is not zero, refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
18.16
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.2 Retrospective Batch Total Calculations The 795x Flow Computer can re-calculate batch totals by applying updated values of key parameters. It then transmits a report through an appropriately configured serial port.
IMPORTANT It is advisable to first concentrate on the configuration and operation of standard batching (Section 18.1) and archiving (Chapter 9) before using any of the retrospective calculation options.
18.2.1
OVERVIEW Retrospective calculations can use new user-supplied values of key parameters to re-calculate the batch totals and update data of any archived batch record. An archived batch record is located, updated with new batch totals and re-archived. A revision number is included in the batch record for distinguishing it from the original batch record. This type of update is activated by selecting a “Yes” soft-command. (See Section 18.2.2 on page 18.18) Alternatively, retrospective calculations can be performed whilst a batch is in progress. In this case, the update can be activated by answering the acceptance prompt following a successful proving session. Batch totals in the current batch (transaction) record are then updated using a new ‘K factor’ or ‘Meter factor’ from the session. No other update parameters are considered. On completion of the batch, the current batch record is archived, as the original, in the normal way. (See Section 18.2.3 on page 18.20) Table 18.2.1 has a full list of update parameters for supplying new values. Not all update parameters can be applied together. For example, where both the ‘K’ factor and ‘Meter factor’ update parameters have both been edited, the retrospective calculations apply only the most recently edited update parameter. Update parameters are applied in a fixed order as shown in Table 18.2.2. The “Quantity Transaction Record” printed report is an output of the revised batch record. It does not explicitly indicate differences between the original batch record and the revised batch record. Samples can be seen in Section 0, starting on page 18.14. Automatic printing of the batch report can be deactivated by navigating the menu data page with <”Batch auto print”> and then selecting the “Off” option
Table 18.2.1: Update Parameters of Retrospective Calculation UPDATE PARAMETER
DIRECT IMPACT OF UPDATE
CONDITION OF USE FOR UPDATE
Meter factor
x
Gross Volume flow rate
x
Newer value than the ‘K Factor’ update value
K factor
x
Indicated Volume flow rate
x
Newer value than the ‘MF’ update value
%Water (std vol) *
x
Net ‘Oil’/’Water’ calculations
x
Net ‘Oil’/’Water’ calculations must be enabled
Base density *
x
Degrees API
x
Newer value than qAPI update value
Degrees API *
x
Base density
x
Newer value than Base density update value
* Not used when performing retrospective calculations whilst a batch is in progress
Table 18.2.2: Priorities for Applying Update Parameters ORDER OF APPLICATION
UPDATE PARAMETER
1st.
<“Meter factor”> or <“K factor”> *
nd
2 .
<”BSW base”>
3rd.
<”Base density”> or <”Degrees API”> *
* See Table 18.2.1 for explanation of parameter choice 795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.17
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.2.2
USING RETROSPECTIVE CALCULATIONS (ON ARCHIVED BATCH RECORDS) This sub-section is an instructional guide to using retrospective calculations on any archived batch (transaction) record. Instructions assume that a batch has already been completed and archived. It is useful if a serial port is configured for and then connected to an ASCII compatible printer or PC running terminal software.
Activation Instructions:
1
Navigate to this menu data page: <”Password”>/<”Enter password”> and then enter the password for the “Engineer” security level. (See Chapter 11 for reference pages on security levels and passwords)
2
Navigate to this menu: <”Batching”>/<”Retro calculations”>/<”Select batch”>
3
Select an archived batch (transaction) record: (a) Nominate a primary search-key type….………….…… {Menu data page: <”Selection type”>} This is for the auto-location of an archived batch record. Options are either searching the batch archive by ticket number or by archive record number (b) Edit a value for the primary search-key…...…………... {Menu data page: <”Batch ID”>} Identify a sub-set of archived batch records by entering either an existing ticket number or an archived record number, as appropriate for the nominated primary search-key type (c) Edit a value for the secondary search-key………...….. {Menu data page: <”Batch revision”>} Reduce the sub-set to a single archived batch record by editing a revision number that is a match for one of the archived batch records. Use zero if requiring the original (unmodified) batch record Searches are automatically performed after editing the revision number and after editing the ticket/batch record reference number. Failed searches result in an INFO SYSTEM alarm being raised, which can be accepted and cleared from the Historical Alarm Log at any time.
4
Verify that the archived batch (transaction) record to be updated has been located At present, it is necessary to look in the Batch (Transaction) Archive menu system area… (a) Press the PRINT MENU key (b) Navigate to this menu: <”Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Transaction log”>/<”View snapshot”> (c) Browse through the displayed data to see if it is the correct batch record (d) Return to Step 2 if the batch record has not been located.
5
Program values into the update parameters (a) Press the MAIN MENU key (b) Navigate to this menu: <”Batching”>/<”Retro calculations”>/<”Retro values”> (c) Work through the list of update parameters in Table 18.2.3. Ignore the update parameters that are not relevant to your configuration or are of no interest. Table 18.2.3: Check-list for Batch Update Parameters UPDATE PARAMETER
MENU DATA (AS DISPLAYED)
‘Meter factor’ or ‘K factor’
<”Meter factor”> or <”K factor”>
% Water (by Std. Volume)
<”BSW base”>
Base density or qAPI
<”Base density”> or <”Degrees API”>
Note: Some localised menu searching is required
Note: Retrospective calculations are not performed unless a minimum of one update parameter has been edited since Step 2. Initial values for the update parameters are automatically copied from the auto-located archived batch record. 18.18
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
(Instructions continued…)
6
Select the scope of the retrospective calculation (a)
7
Locate the menu data page with “Retro calc type” as the descriptor
(b)
Select the option with either “All of batch” or “Part of batch”
(c)
When the “part of batch” option is selected, navigate to the menu data page with “Retro calc qty type”. Edit a quantity to establish the scope of all updates.
Activate the retrospective calculation (a)
Locate the menu data page with “Recalculate” as the descriptor
(b)
Select the option with “Yes”.
Calculations are performed quickly and are normally completed within one machine cycle. The batch (transaction) record is updated with revised values and then re-archived with the same ticket/archive record reference number and a new revision number.
8
View the modified batch transaction record Options: (a)
View from Batch (Transaction) Archive menu system area x x x
(b)
Press the PRINT MENU key Navigate to: <”Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Transaction log”>/<”View snapshot”> Browse through the displayed data to see if it is the correct batch record
View from printed report
(End of Activation Instructions)
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.19
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.2.3
USING RETROSPECTIVE CALCULATIONS (ON THE CURRENT BATCH RECORD) This is a guide to activating retrospective calculations on near completion of a successful proving session, whilst a batch is still in progress.
Activation Instructions: The following instructions assume that a successful prove session has occurred and a new factor has just been accepted for use in subsequent fiscal flow calculations…
1 Figure 18.2.9 shows the screen prompt that follows acceptance of a new ‘K factor’ or ‘Meter factor’. This is the opportunity to perform retrospective calculations with the newly accepted flow factor. (a) Press a blue, lettered key that is alongside the option you require. Use Table 18.2.4 to decide which option to select. Figure 18.2.9: "Apply to Batch?" Screen
Table 18.2.4: "Apply to Batch?" Options Option
Purpose of Option
No
Do not perform retrospective calculations - continue with Step 3
Part
Re-calculate recent part of flow for all current batch total retrospectively - continue with Step 2
All
Re-calculate all product flow for each current batch total retrospectively - continue with Step 3
2 Figure 18.2.10 shows the prompt that appears after selecting the “Part” (‘c’ key) option from Step One. Specify the ‘part of batch’ as a quantity in the units of measurement displayed. This will be a value in either volumetric or mass units, depending on the configuration for quantity-type batch operations. (a)
Press the ‘c’ key to start the editing process
(b)
Edit a value using the numeric keypad
(c)
Press the ‘c’ key to confirm the edited value. Figure 18.2.10: "Enter batch quantity to adjust" screen
3 Continue with the prompts until the menu system re-appears. Retrospective calculations then take place (if activated by Step 1) instantly and are completed within one machine cycle, therefore having a negligible effect on the live batch transaction recording. 18.20
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Appendix A Glossary
Appendix A Glossary
A ADC
See Analogue to digital converter
Address
A number which uniquely identifies a location.
Alarm
An indicator which shows when a failure has occurred. Alarms are classified as System, Input or Limit.
API
American Petroleum Institute
Analogue input
An input where information is received in analogue form.
Analogue output
An output from which information is transmitted in analogue form.
Analogue to digital converter
A circuit that converts analogue voltages or currents into digital (usually binary) numbers which can then be processed by computers. The digital signal gives the amplitude of the analogue signal at a particular instant. See also Digital to analogue converter.
AUI
Short for Attachment Unit Interface, the portion of the Ethernet standard that specifies how a cable is to be connected to a transceiver that plugs into a 15-pin socket
B Bar
5 2 A unit of pressure. 1 bar = 10 Nm .
Base condition
Base or Standard Conditions give the volume which would have been transferred if the temperature were at a pre-defined figure. The actual values for base temperature and pressure vary from country to country.
Base density
Density of a fluid measured under base conditions.
British Thermal Unit
The energy required to raise the temperature of one pound of water through one degree Fahrenheit.
BTU
See British Thermal Unit.
C Calibrate
795x (APPX-A/AE)
To assess the performance of an item of equipment against that of another one whose accuracy is known.
Page A.1
Appendix A Glossary
Calibration certificate
Each transducer is calibrated before it leaves the factory. The details (together with the transducer’s serial number) are recorded on a Calibration Certificate.
Calibration constant
Among the information given on the calibration certificate are some constants (unique to that transducer) which compare the transducer’s actual performance against a standard. The signal converter must know these constants before it can calculate accurate results. The constants are designated: K0, K1, K2, and so on.
Calorific value
The energy content of a substance (usually a gas).
Chassis earth
In a large installation where the chassis and instrumentation are earthed separately, this is the “dirty” earth to which instrument chassis are connected.
Checksum
In data transmission, a checksum is a number which is added to a string of data and whose value is related to that data. It is used to check that the data has been transmitted accurately.
Connector
The part of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one device to another. Most connectors are either male (containing one or more exposed pins) or female (containing holes in which the male connector can be inserted).
Configuration
1. The setting up of an instrument (by entering data, setting fallback values, setting alarms, and so on) so that it works according to your requirements. 2. The method by which transducers and other inputs and outputs are physically connected to the 7950 Signal Converter
Conventional pipe prover
This has a volume between detectors that permits a minimum accumulation of 10,000 direct (unaltered) pulses from the meter under test.
Covimat
A rotational viscometer produced by Mobrey.
Crystal factor
A multiplying factor which accounts for the difference between the actual frequency of a particular crystal and its theoretical frequency.
CV
See Calorific value
D DAC
See Digital to analogue converter
Damping
Suppressing the oscillations in a vibrating body or medium.
Degree API
Used in the petroleum industry to describe the density of petroleum products. A degree API is given by: o 141.5/(SG at 60 F) - 131.5
Values lie within the range -1 to +101, the larger the number the lighter the oil.
Page A.2
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix A Glossary
Degree Baume
A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Degree Brix
A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Density
The measured density of the fluid in a pipeline.
Differential pressure
The difference in pressure at two points in a pipeline.
Digital to analogue converter
A circuit that converts digital signals into analogue equivalents. See also Analogue to digital converter.
Download
To send data or programs to another (usually subsidiary) instrument. (Opposite of Upload).
DP
See Differential pressure
E EMC
Electro-Mechanical Compatibility
Event
A change in the system operation. Events may be caused by the user (such as setting a parameter or changing the security) or by alarms (if, for example, a fallback is invoked when the system fails).
External connection
A generic term which covers: inputs, outputs, power supplies and serial communications; in short, anything connected to the 7950.
F Fallback mode
A description of the system when it is using a Fallback value.
Fallback value
A value used as a temporary substitute for a parameter when a live input which is used to calculate the parameter fails.
Flow computer
An instrument which monitors flow rates and densities of gases and liquids. It does this by communicating with transmitters such as pressure, temperature, level, flow, density and analytical instruments. These measurements are then corrected for temperature, pressure and velocity of sound.
FS
Full scale.
Full composition
The composition of a gas used in calculating energy and compressibility.
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Page A.3
Appendix A Glossary
H Hazardous area
An area where there is a risk of fire or explosion.
Health check
a check that all inputs and devices connected to the 795x are operating normally.
Hg
The chemical symbol for the element Mercury.
Historical log
A log of every alarm received by the 795x.
Hub
A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are commonly used to connect segments of a LAN. A hub contains multiple ports. When a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets. A passive hub serves simply as a conduit for the data, enabling it to go from one device (or segment) to another. So-called intelligent hubs include additional features that enables an administrator to monitor the traffic passing through the hub and to configure each port in the hub. Intelligent hubs are also called manageable hubs.
I Instrumentation earth
In a large installation where the instrumentation and chassis are earthed separately, this is the “clean” earth to which the instrumentation is connected.
Interrogate
To ask another part of a system to supply information.
J J
See Joule.
Joule
2 The unit of work. 1J = 1N/m .
Jumper
A metal bridge that closes an electrical circuit. Typically, a jumper consists of a plastic plug that fits over a pair of protruding pins. Jumpers are sometimes used to configure add-on (option) boards. By placing a jumper plug over a different set of pins, you can change a board's parameters.
K K-factor
The K-factor relates the output from a flow meter to a specific set of units. For volume output meters such as turbines, it is often quoted as pulses per meter cubed.
Kinematic viscosity
The ratio of the dynamic viscosity of a fluid to its density.
Page A.4
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix A Glossary
L LED
See Light-emitting diode.
Light-emitting diode
A diode which light up when current flows through it. LED’s are usually used as indicator lights on instruments.
Limit
Limits are upper and lower values between which a measured parameter is expected to be. If the parameter is outside these limits, it can trigger an alarm if you have set the system to do so.
Live
A value is live if it can be altered automatically as a result of some internal calculation or transducer input. (See also: Set.)
Location
An area of computer memory where data is stored. Information can be written to it from the keyboard, a remote computer, or automatically by the sensors.
Location ID
A number which uniquely identifies a location.
M Mass flow rate
The rate at which a given mass of fluid flows through a transducer.
MAU
Short for Media Access Unit, an Ethernet transceiver
MODBUS/TCP
MODBUS/TCP is a variant of the MODBUS family of simple, vendorneutral communication protocols intended for supervision and control of automation equipment. Specifically, it covers the use of MODBUS messaging in an ‘Intranet’ or ‘Internet’ environment using the TCP/IP protocols. The most common use of the protocols at this time are for Ethernet attachment of PLC’s, I/O modules, and ‘gateways’ to other simple field buses or I/O networks.
Mode
The operational state of the instrument.
Monitor
To keep a constant check on the status of a system or process.
Multiples of numbers
T M m
Multiview
A user-defined display which can show up to four lines of information of your choice. Typically, each line comprises text (such as a parameter name) and a value for the parameter.
tera mega milli
12
10 106 -3 10
G k P
giga kilo micro
109 103 -6 10
P Pa
795x (APPX-A/AE)
See Pascal.
Page A.5
Appendix A Glossary
2
Pascal
The unit of force. 1 Pa = 1N/m
Percent mass
The percentage that the mass of a substance has compared to the total mass for a mixture of substances of which it is a part.
Periodic time
The duration of one cycle of a wave-form, equal to the inverse of the frequency.
Platinum resistance thermometer
A highly-accurate thermometer, based around a coil of very pure platinum wire, which is extremely stable over time. It can be used instead of an analogue input to the signal converter or flow computer.
POST
See Power-on self test.
Power-on self test
A standard routine which an item of equipment goes through when it is powered up to make sure that it is operating correctly. The progress of the test is usually shown on the instrument display.
Protect ground
Another name for Chassis earth.
PRT
See Platinum resistance thermometer.
Pressure
The measured pressure of the fluid in the pipeline.
Primary variable
A variable (such as time or distance) which is directly measured.
psi
Pounds per square inch. Imperial units of pressure.
Pulse output
An output of single pulses, sent to equipment such as pulse summators or electro-mechanical totalizers.
PV
See Primary variable
R Radio frequency interference
Interference from sources which transmit at radio frequencies; that is, frequencies in the range of about 100kHz to about 300GHz.
Reynolds number
A dimensionless constant given by Where:
Re
vl
Q
Uvl P
v
= fluid viscosity L = length Q = kinematic viscosity U = density
RFI
See Radio frequency interference
RS-232
An international standard for serial data transmission. It specifies voltage levels, timing and control.
Page A.6
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix A Glossary
S Saybolt viscosity
A viscosity measured using methods developed by the Saybolt company. It is obtained by timing how long the fluid takes to flow out of a cup through a hole of known size. The viscosity is expressed in units of time.
Security code
A code or password which a user must key in before being allowed access to all or part of a system.
Sensor
Another name for a transducer.
Set
A value is SET if it is keyed in by the user and does not change unless the user changes it. (See also: Live.)
Set-up routine
A procedure for setting up or configuring a system.
SG
See Specific gravity
Signal converter
A device which converts one signal into another. Its main use is in quality measurement systems such as brewing where the output is used by a control or monitoring system.
Specific gravity
The mass per unit volume of a fluid.
Standard condition
See Base condition
Status
The condition of part of a system; for example, whether it is on, off, and so on.
Status display
A display which summarises the contents of the Historical log and gives an indication of the current status of the system.
T TCP/IP
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, the suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones being TCP and IP. TCP/IP is built into the UNIX operating system and is used by the Internet, making it the de facto standard for transmitting data over networks. Even network operating systems that have their own protocols, such as Netware, also support TCP/IP.
Temperature
The measured temperature of the fluid in the pipeline.
Temperature correction
Mobrey transducers are designed to work at 20°C. A correction must be applied when working at other temperatures.
Text descriptor
Text which you can enter into the signal converter. Typically, this is a parameter name when you configure Multiview.
Therm
Unit of heat. 1 therm is the heat required to raise 1000 pounds of water through 100°F.
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Page A.7
Appendix A Glossary
Transducer
A device which converts a physical quantity (such as temperature or pressure) to a voltage or some other electrical quantity that can be measured and analysed.
U Upload
To receive data or programs from another instrument. (Opposite of Download).
V Viscosity
In a liquid, the resistance to that force which tends to make the liquid flow.
Volume flow rate
The rate at which a given volume of fluid flows through the system.
VOS
Velocity of Sound
W Wizard
One of the “standard” configurations whch you can select instead of configuring the 795x from scratch. You can edit the resulting configuration to meet your requirements.
Wobbe index
A measure of the amount of heat released by a gas burner of constant orifice. It indicates the quality of the gas and is given by the expression
VU
1 2
Where:
V
= the gross calorific value in BTU per cubic foot at STP
U = specific gravity.
Page A.8
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
795x (APPX-B /AC)
Page B.1
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.2
795x (APPX-B /AC)
795x (APPX-B /AC)
Name
External connections Type
Wiring schedule
Connector & pin no.
Pin Pin
Barrier Connector & pin no.
795x Instrument Wiring colour
Signal
Comments
Sheet of
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.3
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.4
795x (APPX-B /AC)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950 C.1
C.2
What this Appendix contains x
List of different types of connections you can make to 7950
x
Technical Specification
x
Connection diagrams and tables
x
Earthing arrangements
External connections You can make the following types of external connections to the 7950: x
x
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Analogue
Inputs from devices which monitor continuously changing parameters and transmit analogue signals. These include: x
PRTs (PT100)
x
temperature transducers (0/4-20mA)
x
pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
x
differential pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
x
viscosity transducers (E.g. Solartron Covimat (0/420mA)
x
calorimeters (0/4-20mA).
Pulse
Inputs from devices which transmit information as pulses. For example, a turbine (or positive displacement) flowmeter.
Time period
Inputs from devices where the frequency of the transmitted signal is related to the parameter being measured. These include: x
density transducers (Solartron 7835 or 7826)
x
base density transducers
x
viscosity transducers (Solartron 7827).
Status
One of two levels, to show the state of some part of the system, such as whether a valve is open or closed.
Analogue
Outputs from the signal converter to those devices (such as chart recorders) which require analogue outputs (0/4-20mA).
Pulse
For equipment such as pulse summators or electromechanical totalizers (open collector).
Status
Outputs to equipment whose status is to be changed as, for example, an output which opens or closes a valve (open drain).
Page C.1
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
x
x
Page C.2
For receiving and sending information to other devices linked to 7950. These include:
Serial communications
Power supplies
x
Printers
x
Host computers
x
Master or slave 7950s, chromatographs, etc.
Inputs
a.c and d.c.
Outputs
d.c. only. These provide power within the 7950 and to some other external devices such as transducers.
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.3
Maximum number of external connections The table below lists the maximum number of external connections which you can make to a single 7950.
Type of connection
Maximum number Standard
Additional with Option card
Klippon
Klippon
Analogue
4
4
Pulse
1
0
Time period
4
0
Status
8
0
Analogue
4
4
Pulse
3
0
Status
8
0
RS232
2
0
RS232/485
1
0
Inputs
Outputs
Serial communications
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Page C.3
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.4
Specification
General Environmental
EMC
Operating temperature
0 to +50 deg. C
Storage temperature
-20 to +70 deg. C
Relative humidity
Up to 90% non-condensing
Vibration
Instrument subjected to resonance frequencies ranging from 10Hz to 200Hz at 1g over a 10 hour period
Bump
BS 2011 test Eb
Emissions
EN 50081-1: 1992 (Light industrial environment)
Immunity
EN 50082-2: 1995 (Industrial environment)
Safety
BS EN 61010-1 (1993)
Enclosure
NEMA4X IP65
Dimensions
Height
320mm
Width
300mm
Depth
130mm
Weight
4.5kg approx.
External connections
Type
Page C.4
Klippon multi-way connector system for all signals - located in a cabling compartment. The compartment uses a gland plate for cable access.
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Inputs Analogue
Pulse
Time period
Status
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
4-20mA input accuracy
o o ±0.008% of full scale at 25 C ± 0.001%/ C
4-20mA input resolution
Better than 4 parts per million
PT100 accuracy
o o o ±0.05ºC ±0.01 C/ C (for -50 to 170 C)
PT100 resolution
Better than 0.02ºC
PT100 energisation
<1mA average (Meets BS1904 & IEC751, <1mW in the PT100)
Long term drift
<20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours, subsequently far less
Quantity
4 off, each selectable as PT100 or 4-20mA
Scan time
60ms per channel
Options
Option card for additional 4-20mA inputs: Klippon-type rear panel: 4 off
Frequency range
DC to 5kHz (dual pulse train) or 10kHz (single pulse train); minimum pulse width 125Ps
Input trigger level
0.5V or 2.0V RMS (1.2V or 4.0V p-p) (software configurable)
Quantity
1 (software configurable as single or dual pulse turbine)
Options
None
Range
100ms to 5000ms
Accuracy
±30nS
Resolution
2ns at 1kHz for 1-second sample
Input trigger level
0.5V or 2.0V (software selectable)
Quantity
4
Options
None
Type
Polled
Trigger voltage
5V to 24V. Opto-isolated
Poll period
Maximum 250ms
Quantity
Klippon-type rear panel: 6 off D-type rear panel: 16 off
Options
None
Page C.5
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Outputs Analogue
Base board device accuracy (12-bit)
±0.075% of full scale (24mA)
Base board device resolution
1 part in 3500
Long term drift
<20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours, subsequently far less
Quantity
4
Update time
0.1s minimum, software dependent
Options
Option card for an extra 4 x 16-bit devices
Special Notice
1. The maximum load impedance that the analogue outputs can drive is 1K Ohms. This must include any barrier impedance and the load itself.
±0.0075%/ oC
2. Analogue outputs are “Active Loops”. (Active loops are powered by the device providing the current output. “Passive loops” are powered externally, usually by the device receiving the current) Pulse
Status
Prover interface (can be used as extra status inputs)
Page C.6
Output type
Open-collector Darlington drivers
Maximum current
200mA per output at 24V with maximum 50% duty
Maximum frequency
10Hz
Quantity
3
Options
None
Type
Output 1 uses relay (24V DC / 30V AC @ 250mA maximume), all other open drain (100mA each @ 24V)
Update rate
Software controlled
Quantity
8
Options
None
Type
Fleeting contact ball detectors
Minimum pulse width for detection
10mS
Quantity
2
Options
None
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Communications Serial communications
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
SMART transmitter communications
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Number of loops
None on base board
Options
2 loops of Rosemount HART using analogue inputs 5 and 6
Hardware facilities Keyboard interface
Display
Real-time clock
Battery monitor
Alarm annunciation
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Number of keys
30
Key scan time
2ms
Debounce
14ms
Options
None
Number of lines
4
Characters per line
20
Backlight
LED, continuously powered
Contrast
software selectable, temperature compensated
Options
None
Accuracy
Better than 1 second per day
Power
Replaceable Lithium button cell
Options
None
Type
ADC, indicates battery condition
Options
None
Quantity
3 (one each for Input, System or Limit alarms)
Type
Red LED
Operation
Flash indicates new alarm condition. Steady indicates accepted alarm.
Options
None
Page C.7
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Security
Options
1. DIP Switch in connection area 2. Software code Bi-colour LED on the front panel: 1. RED: Not secured 2. GREEN: Secured 3. ORANGE: Part-secured None
Program storage
1 Mbyte FLASH, field upgradeable
Data storage
768 Byte battery-backed. Lithium battery (CR2430) life is typically 2 years if instrument is un-powered, and 5 years if powered.
Mechanisms Indicator
Memory
16kB FRAM non-volatile store for calibration data Options
None
Power Supplies DC Input
21V-30V dc. 25W maximum
AC Input
90V-265V ac. 45-65Hz 25W maximum
Output
Page C.8
General instrumentation energisation
1 x 24V nominal at 400mA
Turbine energisation
Switchable voltages of 8V or 16V, current limited to 60mA
DAC energisation
Isolated 25V output at 200mA
Options
None
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.5
Connections 1
PL1 3 1
PL2 4 1
PL3
10 1
PL4
10 1
PL5
10
L N E
Status input 1 Status input 2 Status input 3 Status input 4 Status input 5 Status input 6 Status input 7 Status input 8 Status input common Status input common
1
PL6
E E OV +24V Tx 1 Rx 1 Common Protect Ground Tx 2 Rx 2 Common Rts 2 Cts 2 Protect Ground
10
1
PL11
10
1 Status output 2 Status output 3 Status output 4 Status output 5 Status output 6 Status output 7 Status output 8 Status output common Status output common
PL7
Tx 3 Rx 3 Common Rts 3 Cts 3 Rx/Tx 3a Rx/Tx 3b Protect Ground Ground Ground
10
Turbine A power + Turbine A input + Turbine A input Turbine A power Turbine B power + Turbine B input + Turbine B input Turbine B power Ground Ground
1
PL8
NO Alarm Common Alarm NC Alarm Pulse output +ve Pulse output 1 Pulse output 2 Pulse output 3 Pulse output common Ground Ground
10
Density 1 power + Density 1 input + Density 1 input Density 1 power Density 2 power + Density 2 input + Density 2 input Density 2 power Ground Ground
1
PL9
10
1
PL12
10 1
PL13
10 1
PL14
10
Density 3 power + Density 3 input + Density 3 input Density 3 power -
1
Density 4 power + Density 4 input + Density 4 input Density 4 power Ground Ground
PL10
10
1
PL15
10
Analogue output 1 Analogue output 2 Analogue output 3 Analogue output 4 Analogue output 5 Analogue output 6 Analogue output 7 Analogue output 8 Analogue output common Analogue output common PRT 1 power + PRT 1 signal + PRT 1 signal PRT 1 power PRT 2 power + PRT 2 signal + PRT 2 signal PRT 2 power Ground Ground PRT 3 power + PRT 3 signal + PRT 3 signal PRT 3 power PRT 4 power + PRT 4 signal + PRT 4 signal PRT 4 power Ground Ground Analogue power + Analogue input 5 + Analogue input 5 Analogue power Analogue power + Analogue input 6 + Analogue input 6 Analogue power Ground Ground Analogue power + Analogue input 7 + Analogue input 7 Analogue power Analogue power + Analogue input 8 + Analogue input 8 Analogue power Ground Ground
Part of the connector board
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 3 PL1
Pin 4 PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
PL7
PL8
Pin 10 PL9 PL10 PL11 PL12 PL13 PL14 PL15
7950 connections
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Page C.9
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.6 Earthing In addition to earthing the chassis, (described in Chapter 5), you may have to make extra earth connections in some cases, depending on the installation requirements. The types of connection can be split into three groups, each of which has different earthing requirements. The groups are: Group 1 (non-isolated power supply):
Serial communications ports Pulse outputs Status outputs
Group 2 (isolated power supply):
Status inputs
Group 3 (isolated power supply):
Analogue inputs Frequency inputs Analogue outputs
The diagrams on the next two pages shows you how to earth the external connections.
Page C.10
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
PL15
10 Analogue power -
PL14
10 Analogue power -
PL13
Analogue inputs
10 PRT power -
Group 3 Connect external earths as you require.
10
PL12
PRT power -
PL10
10 Density 4 power Density 3 power -
PL9
10 Density 2 power -
Frequency inputs
Density 1 power -
PL8
Internal isolated supply
10 Turbine B power Turbine A power -
Internal isolated supply
PL11
Analogue outputs
10
Group 2 10
Opto-isolator common only
PL7
10
Status output common
Status outputs
10
Pulse output common
Pulse outputs
Group 1 Chassis and instrumentation are earthed together unless you cut Link 1.
Status inputs
PL6
10
Opto-isolator common only. No earthing is required.
PL5
Protect ground
PL4
10 Common
Protect ground
PL3
Serial communications ports
10 Common
Link 1
Chassis earth
PL1 E N L
Earth stud
Power supplies
PL2
AC power
E E 0V +24V
DC power
Earthing arrangements for the 7950
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Page C.11
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Earthing requirements for group 1 connections only In general, the earthing arrangements are different for large and small installations. (A small installation may possibly consist of just one instrument.) x
If the 7950 is part of a large installation with separate earths for chassis and instrumentation: In this case you may (depending on the overall system requirements) earth the 7950 chassis and instrumentation separately by cutting the link on the connector board.
x
If the 7950 is on its own or in a small installation with one common earth for chassis and instrumentation: In this case you must leave the link intact so that the chassis and instrumentation are earthed to the same point. LINK 1
LINK 1
Where to find the link on the connector board
Earthing requirements for group 2 connections only The status inputs do not have to be earthed because the circuitry contains only opto-electrical components.
Earthing requirements for group 3 connections only These depend on what sort of installation you have and the environment in which it operates. You therefore have to decide what earthing arrangements you need. It is likely that this group has to be earthed at a zener barrier earth. For further information, refer to the documentation for the external devices which are connected to the installation.
Page C.12
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix D Units and conversion factors
Appendix D Units and conversion factors The figures in the following table are taken from BS 350: Part 1: March 1974. Parameter Length
Mass
Density
Imperial units
Metric equivalent
1 inch
25.4 mm
1 foot
0.3048 m
1 lb
0.45359237 kg
1 ton
1016.05 kg
1 lb/ft3
16.0185 kg/m3
1 lb/gal
99.7763 kg/m3
1 lb/US gal
119.826 kg/m3
2
Pressure
1 lb/in
68.9476 mbar
1 atm
1.013250 bar
1 MPa
10 bar 10-5 bar
1 N/m o
1 mm Hg (0 )
1.33322 x 10-3 bar
1 in Hg (0o)
33.8639 x 10-3 bar
1 in3
16.8371 cm3
1 ft Volume or capacity
Volume flow
Mass flow
Energy
Temperature
3
0.0283168 m3
1 gal
4.54609 dm3
1 US gal
3.78541 dm3
1 US barrel
0.158987 m3
1 ft3/min
40.776 m3/day
1 gal/min
6.5463 m3/day
1 lb/hr
10.886 kg/day
1 ton/hr
1016.05 kg/hr
1 BTU
1.05506 kJ
1 kWh
3.6 MJ
1 therm
105.506 MJ
o
(1.8 x oC) + 32
F
0.1 Pa s
1P Viscosity (dynamic)
Viscosity (kinematic)
795x (APPX-D /AC)
2
1 lbf/(ft s) or 1 pdl s/ft
1.48816 Pa s
1 slug/(ft s) or 1 lbf s/ft2
47.8803 Pa s
1 St
2 1 cm /s
1 ft2/s
9.29030 dm2/s
Page D.1
Appendix D Units and conversion factors
Page D.2
795x (APPX-D /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
Appendix E Data tables E.1 The tables Note: The equations used to derive these tables are given in Section E.2.
Density/temperature relationship of crude oil Density (kg/m3)
Temp.(°C) 60
738.91
765.06
791.94
817.15
843.11
869.01
894.86
920.87
946.46
55
742.96
768.98
794.93
820.83
846.68
872.48
898.24
923.95
949.63
50
747.00
772.89
798.72
824.51
850.25
875.94
901.80
927.23
952.82
45
751.03
776.79
802.50
828.17
853.81
879.40
904.96
930.50
956.00
40
755.05
780.68
806.27
831.83
857.36
882.85
908.32
933.76
959.18
35
759.06
784.57
810.04
835.48
860.90
886.30
911.67
937.02
962.36
30
763.06
788.44
813.79
839.12
864.44
889.73
915.01
940.28
965.53
25
767.05
792.30
817.54
842.76
867.97
893.16
918.35
943.52
968.89
20
771.03
796.18
821.27
846.38
871.49
896.59
921.68
946.77
971.85
15.556
774.56
799.57
824.59
849.60
874.61
899.62
924.63
949.64
974.65
15
775.00
800.00
825.00
850.00
875.00
900.00
925.00
950.00
975.00
10
778.95
803.83
828.72
853.61
878.50
903.41
928.32
953.23
978.15
5
782.90
807.65
832.42
857.20
882.00
906.81
931.62
958.45
981.29
0
786.83
811.46
836.12
860.79
885.49
910.21
934.92
959.66
984.42
Density/temperature relationship of refined products Density (kg/m3)
Temp.(°C) 60
605.51
657.32
708.88
766.17
817.90
868.47
918.99
969.45
1019.87
55
610.59
662.12
713.50
769.97
821.49
872.00
922.46
972.87
1023.24
50
615.51
666.91
718.11
773.75
825.08
875.53
925.92
976.28
1026.60
45
620.49
671.68
722.71
777.53
828.67
879.04
929.38
979.69
1029.96
40
625.45
676.44
727.29
781.30
832.24
882.56
932.84
983.09
1033.32
35
630.40
681.18
731.86
785.86
835.81
886.06
938.28
986.48
1038.67
30
635.33
685.92
736.42
788.81
839.37
889.56
939.72
989.87
1040.01
25
640.24
690.63
740.96
792.55
842.92
893.04
943.16
993.26
1043.35
20
645.13
695.32
745.49
796.28
846.46
896.53
846.58
996.63
1046.68
15.556
649.46
699.48
749.50
799.59
849.61
899.61
949.62
999.63
1049.63
15
650.00
700.00
750.00
800.00
850.00
900.00
950.00
1000.00
1050.00
10
654.85
704.66
754.50
803.71
853.53
903.47
953.41
1003.36
1053.32
5
659.67
709.30
758.97
807.41
857.04
906.92
956.81
1006.72
1056.63
0
664.47
713.92
763.44
811.10
860.55
910.37
960.20
1010.07
1059.93
The two tables above are derived from equations in the Revised Petroleum Measurement Tables (IP 200, ASTM D1250, API 2540 and ISO R91 Addendum 1).
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Page E.1
Appendix E Data tables
Platinum resistance law (To DIN 43 760) °C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
-220
10.41
-120
52.04
-20
92.13
80
130.89
180
168.47
-210
14.36
-110
56.13
-10
96.07
90
134.70
190
172.16
-200
18.53
-100
60.20
0
100.00
100
138.50
200
175.8
-190
22.78
-90
64.25
10
103.90
110
142.28
220
183.17
-180
27.05
-80
68.28
20
107.79
120
146.06
240
190.46
-170
31.28
-70
72.29
30
111.67
130
149.82
260
197.70
-160
35.48
-60
76.28
40
115.54
140
153.57
280
204.88
-150
39.65
-50
80.25
50
119.40
150
157.32
-140
43.80
-40
84.71
60
123.24
160
161.05
-130
47.93
-30
88.17
70
127.07
170
164.76
3
Density of ambient air (in kg/m ) at a relative humidity of 50% Air Pressure
Air Temperature (°C)
(mb)
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
900 930
1.122 1.159
1.105 1.142
1.089 1.125
1.073 1.109
1.057 1.092
1.041 1.076
1.025 1.060
960
1.197
1.179
1.162
1.145
1.128
1.111
1.094
990
1.234
1.216
1.198
1.180
1.163
1.146
1.129
1020
1.271
1.253
1.234
1.216
1.199
1.181
1.163
3
Density of pure water (in kg/m to ITS - 90 Temperature Scale) Temp °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0
999.840 999.940 999.972 999.940 999.848 999.699 999.497 999.244 998.943 998.595
20
998.203 997.769 997.295 996.782 996.231 995.645 995.024 994.369 993.681 992.962
40
992.212 991.432 990.623 989.786 988.922 988.030 987.113 986.169 985.201 984.208
60
983.191 982.150 981.086 980.000 978.890 977.759 976.607 975.432 974.237 973.021
80
971.785 970.528 969.252 967.955 966.640 965.305 963.950 962.577 961.185 959.774
100
958.345
Page E.2
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
Velocity of Sound in Liquids The values for a selection of fluids are given below. You can obtain further details from reference books such as Tables of Physical and Chemical Constants and some Mathematical Functions by G W C Kaye and T H Laby. Liquid
Temperature (t °C)
Velocity of Sound ( c ) ms-1)
Acetic acid Acetone Amyl acetate Aniline Benzine
20 20 29 20 20
1173 1190 1173 1656 1320
Rate of Change ( Gc / Gt ms-1K1 ) ----4.5 ----4.0 -5.0
Blood (horse)
37
1571
----
Butyl acetate
30
1172
-3.2
Carbon disulphide
25
1142
----
Carbon tetrachloride
20
940
-3.0
Chlorine
20
850
-3.8
Chlorobenzene
20
1290
-4.3
Chloroform
20
990
-3.3
Ethanol amide
25
1724
-3.4
Ethyl acetate
30
1133
-3.9
Ethyl alcohol
20
1162
-3.6
Formic acid
20
1360
-3.5
Heptane
20
1160
-4.5
n-Hexane
30
1060
----
Kerosene
25
1315
-3.6
Menthol
50
1271
----
Methyl acetate
30
1131
-3.7
Methyl alcohol
20
1121
-3.5
Methylene Chloride
25
1070
----
Nitrogen
-189
745
-10.6
Nonane
20
1248
----
Oil (castor)
19
1500
-4.1
Oil (olive)
22
1440
-2.8
Octane
20
1197
----
Oxygen
-186
950
-6.9
n-Pentane
20
1044
-4.2
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Page E.3
Appendix E Data tables
n-Propyl acetate
26
1182
----
Toluene
20
1044
-4.2
Turpentine
25
1225
----
Water (distilled)
10
1447.2
----
20
1482.3
----
30
1509.1
----
50
1542.5
----
-4
1430.2
----
00
1449.5
----
05
1471.1
----
15
1507.1
----
25
1534.7
----
22
1352
----
Water (sea)
o-Xylene
Page E.4
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
E.2. Equations used to derive data tables
Density/temperature relationship The density/temperature relationship is:
Ut
U 15 exp> D 15 ' t 1 0.8D 15 ' t @
where:
Ut
= density at line temperature t°C (kg/m3)
U 15
= density at base temperature 15°C (kg/m3)
't
= t°C -15°C (i.e. t - base temperature)
D 15
= tangent thermal expansion coefficient per °C at base temperature 15°C
Tangent thermal expansion coefficient The tangent thermal expansion coefficient differs for each of the major groups of hydrocarbons. It is obtained from the equation:
K 0 K1U15
D 15
U152
where K 0 and K1 are API factors which are obtained from the table: Density Range
Product
K0
K1
3
(kg/m ) Crude Oil
771 - 981
613.97226
0.00000
Gasolines
654 - 779
346.42278
0.43884
Kerosines
779 - 839
594.54180
0.00000
Fuel Oils
839 - 1075
186.96960
0.48618
Product compressibility The definition of compressibility used to develop the table in Section 1 of the IP Petroleum measurement Manual is the isothermal secant compressibility, defined by the equation:
E
795x (APPX-E /AC)
1 ª wV1 wV2 º « » V0 ¬ P1 P2 ¼ T
Page E.5
Appendix E Data tables
where
V0
= isothermal secant compressibility at t t T = volume of liquid at atmospheric pressure
wV1
= change in volume from
V0 to V1
wV2
= change in volume from
V0 to V2
V1 & V2
= volumes at pressures P1 and P2 , respectively
P1 & P2
= gauge pressure readings (Bar)
E
For practical purposes, when the liquid volume changes from
V0 to V1 as the gauge pressure
changes from zero (atmospheric) to P1 , the above equation is simplified to:
E
1 ª wV1 º « » V0 ¬ P1 ¼ T
ISO Document TC 28/SC3/N248, (Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use) gives the following equations relating E to the compressibility data:
log e C
1.38315 0.00343804T 3.02909 log e U 0.0161654T log e U
and
E
C u 10 6 u bar 1
where:
T
= oil temperature in °C
r
= oil density in kg/litre at 15°C
The new equation (from the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 11.2.1M) gives (after converting to units of kg/m and bar):
4
E 10 e where:
§ 0.87096 u106 4 .2092 u t u103 · ¨ 1.62080 0.00021592 u t ¸ U 215 U 215 © ¹
bar 1
T
= temperature in °C
r15
= density (in kg/m3) at 15°C and at atmospheric pressure
This equation is valid for the density range of 638 kg/m3 to 1074 kg/m3. For a density range of 350 kg/m3 to 637 kg/m3 refer to Chapter 11.2.2M in the API Manual.
Page E.6
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
Velocity of sound in liquids The velocity of sound in dilational waves in unbound fluids is given by: 1
c
E a U 2
where:
795x (APPX-E /AC)
c
= velocity of sound
Ea U
= adiabatic compressibility = density
Page E.7
Appendix E Data tables
Page E.8
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Appendix F Calculations and theory Liquid viscosity measurement This is obtained from the equation:
K
V V · § V ¨ V0 12 24 ¸ © Q Q ¹
Where:
K
=
Fluid dynamic viscosity (cP)
V
=
Viscosity scaling factor
V0
=
Viscosity coefficient from calibration certificate
V1
=
Viscosity coefficient from calibration certificate
V2
=
Viscosity coefficient from calibration certificate
Q
=
Transducer quality factor
Kinematic viscosity This is obtained from the equation:
Q
K V
u
Where:
K
U
u 1000 u U
Q K
=
Kinematic viscosity
=
Fluid dynamic viscosity (cP)
V K
=
Viscosity scaling factor
=
Density scaling factor
U
=
Line density
Saybolt viscosity This is obtained from the equation:
S. V .
ª
>1.0 0.000061 t 100 @ u «4.6324Q «¬
Where:
795x Op Man / BB
º 1.0 0.03264Q » 3930.2 262.7Q 23.97Q 2 1.646Q 3 u 10 5 »¼
t
=
Temperature in oF
Q
=
Kinematic viscosity in cSt.
Page F.1
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Liquid density This is obtained from the equation:
U
K
0
Where:
K1W B K 2 W B 2
U
=
Uncorrected density (kg/m3
K0
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K1
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K2
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
WB
=
Periodic time B (PS)
Correction for operating temperatures other than 20oC This is obtained from the equation:
Ut
U>1 K18 t 20 @ K19 t 20
Where:
U
=
Uncorrected density (kg/m3
U1
=
Density corrected for temperature
K18
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K19
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
t
=
Line temperature in oC
Correction for high fluid viscosity This is obtained from the equation:
UQ
Where:
Page F.2
ª
K
K º
U t « K 20 212 224 » Q Q ¼ ¬ UQ
=
Density corrected for viscosity
Ut
=
Density corrected for temperature
K 20
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K 21
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K 22
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
Q
=
Averaged quality factor of transducer.
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Density/temperature relationship Correction factors in the revised API-ASTM-IP petroleum measurement tables are based on the equation:
Ut U 15
>
@
exp D 15 ' t 1 0.8D 15 ' t
Where:
Ut
=
Density at line temperature toC
U 15
=
Density at base temperature 15oC
't
=
Line temperature-base temperature
D 15
=
Tangent thermal expansion coefficient per oC at base temperature 15oC
The tangent thermal coefficient differs for each of the major groups of hydrocarbons. It is obtained from the equation:
K 0 K1 u U 15
D5
U 2
15
Where:
D 15
=
Density at line temperature toC
U 15
=
Density at base temperature 15oC
K0
=
API factor
K1
=
API factor
Density/pressure relationship Isothermal secant compressibility is defined by the equation:
E
1 § GV1 · ¸ ¨ V0 © P1 ¹
Where:
E
=
Isothermal secant compressibility at temperature toC
GV1
=
Change of volume from V0 to V1
P1
=
Gauge pressure reading (P-1.103) bars
The correlation equation for E from the available compressibility data is:
log e C Where:
1.38315 0.00343804t 3.02909 log e U 0.0161654t log e U
E
=
Cx10-5 bar
t
=
Temperature in oC
U
=
U15
= oil density at 15oC (kg/litre).
1000 795x Op Man / BB
Page F.3
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Special calculation equation 1 The equation is:
R
ª a b Xc A B« «¬ d e Y f
Where:
º » »¼
R A, B a- f
=
Extra functions result
=
Constants
=
Pointers
X, Y
=
Constants
Special calculation equation 2 The equation is:
R
e
A Bt Ct 2
Where:
R A , B ,C
=
Result of special calculation 2
=
Constants
t
=
Pointer
Special calculation equation 4 The equation is: V 50
ª § t 273.155 · º ½ 19.2 ®33.5 log10 * log10 K av 0.85 «A log10 * ¨ ¸ ¾ © 50 273.155 ¹ »¼ ¿ ¬ ¯
>
Where:
Vt
t
=
Line temperature
K av
=
Average kinematic viscosity
A
=
User-defined constant (it has a default value of 118)
ª« V3350. 5E º» ½ »° °° ««10 »° ¼ ¬ 10 ¾ 0.85 ® ° ° °¿ °¯
Where:
Page F.4
@
E
=
User-defined constant
Vt
=
Viscosity at temperature t
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Dynamic Viscosity The dynamic viscosity ( K ) of a Newtonian fluid is given by:
K W u dv / dr
W = shearing stress between two planes parallel with the direction of flow
where:
dv / dr = velocity gradient at right angles to the direction of flow.
The dimensions of dynamic viscosity are M L-1 T-1 and the SI unit is Pascal seconds (Pa s).
Dynamic Viscosity The kinematic viscosity ( Q ) is the ratio of the dynamic viscosity to the density
U
The dimensions of kinematic viscosity are L2 T-1 and the SI unit is square metres per second (m2/s).
795x Op Man / BB
Page F.5
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Page F.6
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
795x (APPX-G/AE)
Page G.1
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
Page G.2
795x (APPX-G/AE)
Operating Manual
Solartron® 7950 Flow Computer
Mobrey Measurement 158 Edinburgh Avenue, Slough, Berks, UK, SL1 4UE T +44 (0) 1753 756600 F +44 (0) 1753 823589 [email protected] www.mobrey.com Mobrey SA-NV Mobrey GmbH Mobrey SA Mobrey sp z o o Mobrey AB
Belgium Deutschland France Polska Sverige
tel: 02/465 3879 tel: 0211/99 808-0 tel: 01 30 17 40 80 tel: 022 871 7865 tel: 08-725 01 00
© 1997 - 2006, Mobrey. The right is reserved to amend details given in this publication without notice.
HB502510 Status B April 2006
Solartron® 7950 Flow Computer
Single Stream/Run Liquid Applications (2510)
Front Panel of the Solartron® 795x Series
Mobrey, Mobrey Measurement, and the Mobrey logotype are registered trademarks of Mobrey Limited. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Solartron is a registered trademark of Lloyd Instruments Limited, a subsidiary of Ametek, Inc. HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communications Foundation. All other marks are property of their respective owners.
www.mobrey.com
Mobrey pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The information contained in this document is, therefore, subject to change without notice. To the best of our knowledge, the information contained in this document is accurate. However, Mobrey cannot be held responsible for any errors, omissions or inaccuracies, or any losses incurred as result of them.
IMPORTANT NOTICE Because Mobrey is continuously improving its products, some of the menus which appear on your instrument’s display may not be exactly as illustrated and described in this manual. However, because the menus are simple and intuitive, this should not cause any major problems.
This manual is concurrent with embedded software version 502510, issue 4.20 (or higher)
Static precautions Some parts of the instrument (such as circuit boards) may be damaged by static electricity. Therefore, when carrying out any work which involves the risk of static damage to the instrument, the instructions show the following notice:
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
At such times you must wear an earthed wrist-strap to protect the instrument.
Safety information NOTE: This information applies only to those instruments which are mains-powered. Electricity is dangerous and you risk injury or death if you do not disconnect the power supplies before carrying out some of the procedures given in this manual. Whenever there is such a hazard, the instructions show a notice similar to the following: Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
You must heed any such warnings and make sure that, before you go any further: x All power leads are un-powered. x All power leads are disconnected from the equipment which you are working on unless the instructions tell you otherwise. x You obey any other common-sense precautions which may apply to your situation. If you obey these sensible precautions you can work on the equipment in complete safety.
Battery-backed Memory notice x 7950 and 7950 models manufactured since July 1998 feature an increased amount of battery-backed memory. The PCB Number and Status Number associated with this enhancement are as follows:79500502L (Status ‘L’ or later): 79500502G (Status ‘G’ or later): x As a result of that memory increase, it is essential that the Lithium Cell used for the battery backup is installed at all times (other than during replacement). 7950/7951 units will not power-up correctly if this battery is missing. (7955 and 7952 models are not affected) If it is necessary to run the units without batteries for Intrinsic Safety reasons, then the battery should be replaced with a shorting disk inserted in the battery holder. Please consult Mobrey for further advice. x Replace the battery when the "Low Battery" system alarm is indicated. The procedure is explained in this manual. (See Chapter 14)
Contents 1.
About this manual
1.1
1.1 1.2 1.3
What this manual tells you Who should use this manual Software versions covered by this manual
1.1 1.1 1.1
2.
Getting started
2.1
2.1 2.2 2.3
What this Chapter tells you How to use this Chapter 7950 Inputs 2.3.1 Overview of 7950 inputs 2.3.2 Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs 2.3.3 Orifice flowmeter inputs 2.3.4 Density transducer connections (SAFE AREA ONLY) 2.3.5 Viscosity transducer connections 2.3.6 mA-type temperature transmitter 2.3.7 PRT-type temperature transmitter 2.3.8 mA-type pressure transmitter 2.3.9 Status Input Connections
2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 2.11 2.13 2.15 2.17
2.4
7950 Outputs 2.4.1 Overview of 7950 outputs 2.4.2 Pulse Output Connections 2.4.3 Analogue Output Connections 2.4.4 Digital Output Connections
2.19 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22
2.5 2.6 2.7
Other 7950 Connections Where to find the 7950 connectors If you need help ...
2.23 2.23 2.28
3.
About the 7950
3.1
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
Background What the 7950 single-stream liquid turbine computer does Physical description of the 7950 Communications Typical installation Checking your software version
3.1 3.1 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.5
4.
Installing the system
4.1
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
What this chapter tells you Hazardous and non-hazardous environments Installation procedure Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule Step 2: Unpacking the instrument Step 3: Setting DIP switches Step 4: Fitting the 7950 Step 5: Making the external connections Step 6: Earthing the instrument Step 7: Connecting the power supply
4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.2 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.4 4.5
5.
The keyboard, display and indicators
5.1
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.8
What this Chapter tells you The layout of the front panel What the display shows How the keys work Using the keys to move around the menus Using the keys to view stored data Using the keys to edit information The 795x character set LED indicators Summary of key functions
5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.7 5.7 5.8
6.
The menu system
6.1
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
What this Chapter tells you What the menu system does How the menu system works A general example of part of a menu system
6.1 6.1 6.1 6.3
7.
Serial Communications and Networking
7.1
7.1 7.2 7.3
What this chapter tells you 7950/7951 Communication capabilities MODBUS from the 7950/7951 view-point 7.3.1 Introduction 7.3.2 Supported Commands 7.3.3 Floating Point Numbers 7.3.4 Word Swap Mode 7.3.5 Modbus addressing
7.1 7.1 7.3 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.2
7.4
Connecting the 795x to an RS-232/RS-485 Link 7.4.1 RS-232 (full duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections 7.4.2 RS-485 (half duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections
7.5 7.5 7.7
7.5
After Connecting the 795x… 7.5.1 General RS-232C/485 Port Configuration
7.8 7.6
7.5.2 RS-232 Configuration 7.5.3 RS-485 Configuration
7.6 7.9
7.6
795x Database access over a MODBUS network 7.6.1 Introduction 7.6.2 7950/7951 Database information: software parameters values 7.6.3 7950/7951 Database information: software parameter status 7.6.4 7950/7951 Database information: full attributes
7.10 7.10 7.12 7.13 7.16
7.7
Historical Alarm Log access over a MODBUS network 7.7.1 Introduction 7.7.2 Worked Examples 7.7.3 Worked Example Two
7.17 7.17 7.18 7.18
7.8
Historical Event Log access over a MODBUS network 7.8.1 Introduction 7.8.2 Worked Examples
7.22 7.22 7.23
7.9
Archive access over a MODBUS network 7.9.1 Introduction 7.9.2 Worked Examples
7.24 7.24 7.27
7A
Addendum A: Peer-To-Peer Communications
7a.1
7B
Addendum B: High-speed List Communications
7b.1
7C
Addendum C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7c.1
7D
Addendum D: ‘Intelligent Transmitter’ Monitor
7d.1
8.
Alarms and Events
8.1
8.1
Alarms 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 8.1.8 8.1.9 8.1.10
Alarm types Alarm indicators How alarms are received and stored Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log What the Alarm Status Display tells you What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log User-defined Alarms Alarm Logger Output (ALO) Alarm message list
8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.2 8.2 8.3 8.3 8.4 8.6 8.7
Introduction to 795x events Event indicators How events are received and stored Examining the Event Summary and the Event log What the Event Status Display tells you What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log
8.12 8.12 8.12 8.12 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.14
8.2.
8.3.
Events 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7
Enhanced Auditing 8.3.1 Audit User Events
8.15 8.15
8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5
Audit System Alarms Audit Control Attributes Audit Event Suppression Control: Automatic mode Audit Alarm Suppression Control: Automatic mode
8.16 8.17 8.19 8.21
9.
Additional facilities
9.1
9.1
Feature: Archiving 9.1.1 Introduction 9.1.2 Statistical information 9.1.3 Analysis of an archive 9.1.4 Configuration details 9.1.5 Re-sizing archive space 9.1.6 Operation details (Reporting) 9.1.7 Guided examples of archiving
9.1 9.1 9.2 9.2 9.8 9.13 9.14 9.17
9.2
Feature: PID Control 9.2.1 Overview 9.2.2 Configuration details
9.18 9.18 9.19
9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6
Feature: Printed Reports Selecting units and data formats Parameter alarm limits Fallback values and modes Units which the 795x can display
9.19 9.22 9.22 9.23 9.23
10.
Configuring using Wizards
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4
Introduction to Wizards Using Wizards Quick-view Guide ( Set-up Wizards ) Units Wizard selection
11.
Configuring without using Wizards
11.1
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9
What does this Chapter tell me? Quick-find Index A structured approach to configuring Reference page conventions Analogue inputs Digital inputs Pulse inputs Turbine flow Orifice flow metering (ISO 5167-1) + Orifice flow metering (AGA 3) + Orifice flow metering (HART) Coriolis flow metering Totalisers Prime ‘density loop’ fluid temperature Prime ‘viscosity loop’ fluid temperature Meter temperature ‘Density loop’ pressure
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.16 11.17 11.18 11.28 11.31 11.33 11.34 11.35 11.36
11.10 11.11 11.12 11.13 11.14 11.15
10.1 10.1 10.1 10.3 10.4
11.16 11.17 11.18 11.19 11.20 11.21 11.22 11.23 11.24 11.25 11.26 11.27 11.28 11.29 11.30 11.31 11.32 11.33 11.34 11.35
Meter pressure Header density API referred density 4x5 matrix referred density Meter density of known fluid Base density of known fluid Specific gravity / Degrees API Special equations Header ‘viscosity loop’ density Header viscosity Viscosity referral Base sediment & water measurements Net oil/water measurements Net oil/water flow rates and totals Live analogue outputs Interface detection Digital outputs Live pulse outputs Passwords and security Multi-page multi-view
11.37 11.38 11.44 11.45 11.46 11.47 11.48 11.49 11.50 11.52 11.55 11.57 11.59 11.65 11.73 11.74 11.77 11.78 11.79 11.82
12.
Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4
Viewing the data Checking the performance of the 795x Printed reports Giving your 7950 a tag number
12.1 12.5 12.7 12.10
13.
Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13.1
13.1 13.2
Cleaning the instrument Fault-finding
14.
Removal and replacement of parts
14.1
14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9
Front panel assembly Display Connector board Microprocessor board Screen and RFI conductive strips Terminal cover seal Gland plate seal Fuses Back-up battery
14.1 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11
15.
Assembly drawing and parts list
15.1
15.1 15.2
What the drawing and parts list tells you How to obtain spare parts
13.1 13.1
15.1 15.1
16.
Flowmeter proving
16.1
Not supported on the 7950.
17.
HART, SMART and the 7950
17.1
17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6
What this Chapter tells you Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7950 Connecting the 7950 to a HART network loop Configuring the 7950 to use a HART network loop Post configuration - viewing HART data SMART units of measurement
18.
BATCHING (TRANSACTION)
18.1
18.1
Standard batch operations 18.1.1 Batch operation types 18.1.2 Batch operation parameter reference 18.1.3 Example 1: Manual batch type trigger 18.1.4 Example 2: Timed batches 18.1.5 Example 3: Quantity batch with FDC – Single program loop 18.1.6 Example 4: Quantity batch with FDC – Pause and resume controls 18.1.7 Example 5: Daily batch 18.1.8 Printed report samples
18.1 18.1 18.2 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.11 18.13 18.14
18.2
Retrospective batch total calculations 18.2.1 Overview 18.2.2 Using retrospective calculations (on an archived record) 18.2.3 Using retrospective calculations (on the current batch record)
18.17 18.17 18.18 18.20
17.1 17.1 17.3 17.6 17.8 17.8
Appendices Appendix A
Glossary
A.1
Appendix B
Blank wiring schedule
B.1
Appendix C
Technical data for the 7950
C.1
Appendix D
Units and conversion factors
D.1
Appendix E
Data tables
E.1
Appendix F
Calculations
F.1
Appendix G
Certificate of Conformity
G.1
Quick-start Guide
Quick-start Guide If you want to...
Read....
x Find out what's in this manual
Contents pages
x Get started quickly
Chapter 2
x Get an overview of the instrument
Chapter 3 and Appendix C
x Understand how the menu system works
Chapter 6
x Make connections to the instrument
Chapters 2, 4 and Appendix C
x Install the instrument and set it up
Chapters 2, 4, 10 and 11
x Operate the instrument
Chapters 5 - 9 and 12
x Carry out routine maintenance
Chapter 13
x Trace and repair faults
Chapters 13 and 14
x Remove and replace parts
Chapters 14 and 15
x know about flowmeter proving
Chapter 16
x know about HART support
Chapter 17
x know about Batching support
Chapter 18
x Understand what a term means
Appendix A
795x Op Man / BC
Page Q.1
Quick-start Guide
Page Q.2
795x Op Man / BC
Chapter 1 About this manual
1. About this manual 1.1 What this manual tells you This manual tells you how to install, configure, operate and service the instrument. In addition, some information is given to help you identify and correct some of the more common faults which may occur. However, since repairs are done by changing suspected faulty assemblies, fault-finding to board component level is not covered. This manual assumes that all devices or peripherals to be connected to the 795x have their own documentation which tells you how to install and configure them. For this reason it is assumed that anything which you want to link to the 795x is already installed and working correctly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Since the instrument can be used for a wide variety of purposes, it is driven by software specially for your application. This manual gives information about the software which applies to your machine only. Throughout this manual the term '795x' is used to refer to all members of the 795x family (7950, 7951 and 7955).
1.2 Who should use this manual This manual is for anyone who installs, uses, services or repairs the 795x.
1.3 Software version covered by this manual The software version dealt with in this manual is given on the title page. Chapter 3 tells you how to find out what software is installed in your instrument.
795x (CH01/CB)
Page 1.1
Chapter 1 About this manual
Page 1.2
795x (CH01/CB)
Chapter 2 Getting started
2. Getting started 2.1 What this Chapter tells you This Chapter shows how to: x
Connect different types of instrumentation to a 7950.
x
Set the DIP switches in the 7950.
x
Select the appropriate software Wizard to configure the 7950.
2.2 How to use this Chapter This Chapter is designed to introduce the various types of inputs and outputs that the 7950 can support. Each type of connection (i.e. input-only or output-only) is represented by an easy to follow, self-contained worked example. Try one example at a time. After working through the examples that are appropriate, use the information in Chapter 3 to plan connections and then implement them in conjunction with the subsequent installation chapter.
Important Warnings!! 1. The 795X series is not intrinsically safe and, therefore, can only be used in officially designated safe (non-hazardous) areas. 2. All examples of connections in this manual are designed to be attempted in a non-hazardous area. 3. Hazardous area considerations are outside the scope of this manual. Always refer to installation documentation supplied by the manufacturer for their instrumentation.
Examples are organised as follows: x
Section 2.3 - for 7950 Inputs only
x
Section 2.4 - for 7950 Outputs only
Each worked example has a comprehensive set of instructions to establish a successful physical connection. Instructions also show how to select the correct software Wizard. Some types of connection require DIP switches to be set. These switches are located on the Connector Board and are accessible after removing the Terminal Cover (See Chapter 14). There is a block of four switches for deciding which of the first four Analogue Inputs will accept mA signals and which will accept PRT signals. The other block features one switch for selecting whether the ‘turbine power’ pins will provide either 8V or 16V from the 7950 isolated supply. Worked examples will always explain when there is a need to set a DIP switch. Note: x
DIP switches which are not shown in the diagrams have no effect on the field transmitter shown.
x
Where a field transmitter can be connected to more than one analogue input, the DIP switch setting depends on which input you have used.
Other sections in this chapter are as follows: x
Section 2.5 lists chapters that deal with connections that are more complex. (Page 2.23)
x
Section 2.6 contains 7950 pin designation lists for various hardware configurations. (Page 2.23)
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.1
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3 7950 Inputs 2.3.1 Overview of 7950 inputs This section features connections with external devices that provide only input signals to the 7950. Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples: x
Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs...............….....…................ Page 2.3
x
Orifice flowmeter inputs...............................….….................. Page 2.5
x
Density Transducer Connections (SAFE AREA ONLY)….... Page 2.7
x
Viscosity Transducer Connections …………..………………. Page 2.9
x
mA-type temperature transmitter..................................…..... Page 2.11
x
PRT-type temperature transmitter...........…..................….....Page 2.13
x
mA-type pressure transmitter....................….................….... Page 2.15
x
Status Input Connections...............................................….... Page 2.17
Use the <“Health Check”> menu system facility on the 7950 to monitor what is being input. Once located, select the particular type of input and then select the instance of that input to see what is happening.
Page 2.2
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.2 Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs Support is provided for wiring 1 flowmeter to the 7950: x
A 7950 can accept either single or dual pulse signal trains from each flowmeter. There are r signal pins for each pulse train.
x
Flowmeters can be powered by the turbine power supply pins on the 7950. These power pins are an isolated supply source - 8V or 16V (selectable by a DIP switch on the power supply board). The selected voltage applies to all turbine power pins.
Example: 1 turbine (pulse) flowmeter with dual pulse train outputs Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch
2. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, that is required by all the turbine flowmeters. This diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the flowmeter using the 795X isolated power source) Connect the flowmeter to the 7950
16V
8V
3. Wire the flowmeter terminals to the 7950. Refer to Table 2.3.1 for a list of applicable pins for this connection. Notice that each flowmeter terminal (wire) in the diagram below has a function label. The label identifies the appropriate pin in two groups of pins.
Figure 2.3.1: Connections for a Typical Dual Pick-up Turbine Flowmeter
Power supply unit
Turbine Power +
Table 2.3.1: Pin Connections for a Typical Turbine Flowmeter Connection label
Group #1
Group #2
Turbine Power +
PL8/1
PL8/5
Turbine Power -
PL8/4
PL8/8
Turbine signal 'A' +
Turbine Signal ‘A’ +
PL8/2
PL8/2
Turbine signal 'A' -
Turbine Signal ‘A’ -
PL8/3
PL8/3
Turbine Signal ‘B’ +
PL8/6
PL8/6
Turbine Signal ‘B’ -
PL8/7
PL8/7
Turbine Power -
Pickup 'A' Turbine
Turbine signal 'B' +
Pickup 'B'
Turbine signal 'B' -
Notes x
Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7950 pins applicable to the pickup nominated as ‘A’. These are labelled as: “Turbine Signal ‘A’ +”, “Turbine Signal ‘A’ -”.
x
Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The 7950) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
Turn on the power
7950 Op Man/CB
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Page 2.3
Chapter 2 Getting started (Instructions continued …) Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Flow meter” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Flow meter”. 11. Press the c-key to select “Turbine”.
Proceed with wizard
12. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions)
Page 2.4
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.3 Orifice flowmeter inputs Loop powered differential pressure cells can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7950. There are four analogue inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’ has a list of option boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs. The maximum number of DP cells supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 DP cells are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example: Two cells connected to analogue inputs 1 and 2. Cells are powered by 7950 (24V isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as shown on page below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 1 is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.2)
Connect the first Differential Pressure cell
3. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 2 is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.2) 4. Wire the first cell to Analogue Input ‘1’ Loop-powered 4-20mA differential pressure transmitter + -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) each identify one pin in Table 2.3.2. Analogue Input ‘1’ pins are listed under the “Input #1 Pins” column.
Figure 2.3.2: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example 4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
7950 Op Man/CB
PRT
Page 2.5
Chapter 2 Getting started
Table 2.3.2: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x Analogue Inputs Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
Analogue Power-
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
(Instructions continued…) Connect the second Differential Pressure cell
5. Wire the first cell to Analogue Input ‘2’
+ -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) each identify one pin in Table 2.3.2. Analogue Input ‘2’ pins are listed under the “Input #2 Pins” column. Turn on the power
6. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
7. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 8. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 9. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 10. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
11. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Flow meter” is shown. 12. Press the b-key to select “Flow meter”. 13. Press the d-key to select “Orifice”.
Proceed with wizard
14. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions)
Page 2.6
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.4 Density Transducer Connections (SAFE AREA ONLY) Support is provided for connecting up to 2 Liquid Density Transducers: x
A 7950 can accept frequency (periodic time) outputs from each Density Transducer. There are separate sets of pins for four periodic time inputs.
x
Each Density Transducer can be powered by using a specific set of pins on the 7950. These pins utilise the 7950’s isolated power supply.
Example: A 783x/784x Density Transducer with integrated PT100 sensor Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Density measurement connection
2. Wire the “Dens. Signal +” and “Dens. Signal -” connections to the 7950.
Additional wiring
3. Additional wiring is required on the 7950
Each density connection, shown in the diagram below, has a label. Use each label to reference the appropriate pin designation in Table 2.3.3.
(a) The chosen pin for “Dens. Signal -” must be wired to “Density Power -” (b) A resistor across two 7950 pins: “Dens. Power +” & “Dens. Signal +” 330 ohms
783x/784x
7950 (Klippon) Dens. Power+
PL9/1
Dens. Signal +
1
PL9/2 Dens. Signal -
2
PL9/3 PL9/4
PT100 THIS IS NOT USED FOR THIS EXAMPLE
Density measurement using Density input #1 pins
Dens. Power -
Figure 2.3.3: 783x/784x Liquid Density Transducer Connections
Dens. Signal + 7 8 9 10
POS+ 1 NEG- 2
Dens. Signal -
3 4
PRT Power +
PRT
5 6
11 12
PRT Signal + PRT Signal PRT Power -
7 8 9 10 11 12
7950 Op Man/CB
POS+ 1 NEG- 2
PRT
3 4 5 6
Page 2.7
Chapter 2 Getting started
(Instructions continued…) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the Wizard selection menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Txdr density” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Txdr density”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
Notes: x
Application use of these density inputs will depend on the particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The 7950) or the 7950 configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
x
Installation of a 783x/784x in a hazardous area is not covered in this Operating Manual. Always refer to documentation supplied with the Transducer for this information.
Table 2.3.3: Klippon Pin Connections - 7950 to 783x/784x Connection label
Pin Set #1
Pin Set #2
Dens. Power +
PL9/1
PL9/5
Dens. Signal +
PL9/2
PL9/6
Dens. Signal -
PL9/3
PL9/7
Dens. Power -
PL9/4
PL9/8
Note: See instructions for additional wiring requirements
Page 2.8
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.5 Viscosity Transducer Connections Support is provided for connecting up to 2 Viscosity Transducers: x
A 7950 can accept frequency (periodic time) outputs from each Viscosity Transducer.
x
Each Viscosity Transducer can be powered by using a reserved set of pins on the 7950. These pins utilise the 7950’s isolated power supply.
Example: An EMC compliant 7827 Density Transducer with integrated PT100 sensor Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Density measurement connection
2. Wire the 7827 connections to the 7950 as shown in Figure 2.3.4.
Optional temperature measurement
3. Wire the PRT connections to the 7950 as shown in Figure 2.3.4.
Each 7827 connection shown in Figure 2.3.5 has a label. Use each label to reference the appropriate pin designation in Table 2.3.4.
Each PT100 connection shown in Figure 2.3.5 has a label. Use each label to reference the appropriate pin designation in Table 2.3.4.
Figure 2.3.4: 7827 Viscosity Analyser and 7950 Connections 7827 (EMC Compliant)
Supply + Sig + Supply Integrated PT100 (EMC Compliant)
7950 (Klippon) Power +
PL10/1
Signal +
PL10/2
Power -
PL10/3
Signal PRT Power + PRT Signal +
PRT
Density Input #3 pins on the 7950
PRT Signal PRT Power -
PL10/4
PL13/1 PL13/2 PL13/3
PRT Input #3 pins on the 7950
PL13/4
Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the Wizard selection menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Viscosity” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Viscosity”.
Proceed with wizard
7950 Op Man/CB
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
Page 2.9
Chapter 2 Getting started
Notes: x
Application use of these density inputs will depend on the particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The 7950) or the 7950 configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
x
Installation of a 7827 in a hazardous area is not covered in this Operating Manual. Always refer to technical documentation supplied with the Transducer.
Figure 2.3.5: An EMC Compliant 7827 Viscosity Transducer with Connections PRT Power + PRT Power -
Visc. Power +
PRT Signal +
+ - + -
PRT Signal Visc. Power -
Visc. Signal + Visc. Signal -
Table 2.3.4: Pin Connections - 7950 to 7827 Connection label
Input #3
Input #4
Visc. Power +
PL10/1
PL10/5
Visc. Signal +
PL10/2
PL10/6
Visc. Signal -
PL10/3
PL10/7
Visc. Power -
PL10/4
PL10/8
PRT Power +
PL13/1
PL13/5
PRT Signal +
PL13/2
PL13/6
PRT Signal -
PL13/3
PL13/7
PRT Power -
PL13/4
PL13/8
Note: See instructions for typical wiring arrangements in a non-hazardous area
Page 2.10
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.6 mA-type temperature transmitter Loop powered temperature transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7950. There are 4 analogue inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’ has a list of option boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs. The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 transmitters are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example: 1 loop powered temperature transmitter connected to analogue input 3. It is powered by the 7950 (24V isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up
Set DIP switches as shown below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 3 is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.6)
Figure 2.3.6: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example
4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
Connect the field transmitter to the 7950
PRT
3. Wire the field transmitter to Analogue Input ‘3’ + -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) will each identify one pin in Table 2.3.5. Analogue Input ‘3’ pins are listed under the “Input #3 Pins” column.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.11
Chapter 2 Getting started
(Instructions continued…) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Temperature” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Temperature”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions) Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.23) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Table 2.3.5: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x Analogue Inputs Connection label
Page 2.12
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
Analogue Power-
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.7 PRT-type temperature transmitter PRT-type temperature transmitters can use any of the first four PRT (Analogue) Inputs on the 7950. There are 4 PRT Inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a PRT-type field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for PRT (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the PRT power pins are used.
Example: 1 PRT-type temperature transmitter connected to PRT Input ‘4’. It is powered by the 7950 (isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as shown below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 4 is set for PRT. (See Figure 2.3.7)
Figure 2.3.7: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example 4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
3. Wire the field transmitter to PRT Input 4. PRT Power + PRT
Connect the field transmitter to the 7950
PRT
Signal + Signal PRT Power -
The labels (e.g. “PRT Power+”) will each identify one pin in Table 2.3.6. PRT Input ‘4’ pins are listed under the “Input #4 Pins” column.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.13
Chapter 2 Getting started
(Instructions continued …) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Temperature” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Temperature”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions) Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.23) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Table 2.3.6: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x PRT Inputs Connection label
Page 2.14
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
PRT Power+
PL12/1
PL12/5
PL13/1
PL13/5
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
PRT Power-
PL12/4
PL12/8
PL13/4
PL13/8
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.8 mA-type pressure transmitter Loop powered pressure transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7950. There are 4 analogue inputs on a 7950 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’ has a list of option boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs. The number of pressure transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3.
IMPORTANT NOTICE There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to an analogue input) will determine the function. Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters: x
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue input used)
x
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example: 1 loop powered pressure transmitter connected to Analogue Input ‘3’. It is powered by the 7950 (24V isolated supply). Follow these instructions to work through the example: Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7950 Flow Computer is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as shown below
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for Analogue Input ‘1’ is set for mA. (See Figure 2.3.8)
Figure 2.3.8: 7950 series DIP switch block for guided example
4
D
3
C
2
B
1
A
4-20mA
Connect the field transmitter to the 7950
PRT
3. Wire the field transmitter to Analogue Input ‘3’ + -
Analogue Power + Signal + Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. “Analogue Power+”) will each identify one pin in Table 2.3.7. Analogue Input ‘3’ pins are listed under the “Input #3 Pins” column.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.15
Chapter 2 Getting started (Instructions continued…) Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Go to the wizards menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you aren’t there already). 6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu. 7. Press the c-key to select “Configure”. 8. Press the a-key twice to go to the Wizard selection menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the option list until “Pressure” is shown. 10. Press the b-key to select “Pressure”.
Proceed with wizard
11. Proceed with Wizard. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to Wizards.
(End of instructions) Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.23) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Table 2.3.7: Klippon Pin Connections for 4 x Analogue Inputs
Page 2.16
Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
PL14/1
Signal +
PL12/2
PL12/6
PL13/2
PL13/6
Signal -
PL12/3
PL12/7
PL13/3
PL13/7
Analogue Power-
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
PL14/4
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.3.9 Status Input Connections Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to a 7950. 1. Power Supply (1a) Internal powered 795x status input (Internal power) notes:
795x +5V to 24V (Isolated supply) Status input 3.3k
Status input common 0V (Isolated supply)
Status input using internal voltage source
Always use an isolated voltage from the range 5V to 24V. There are only a few isolated voltage pins, on the rear panel of the 795x, that are suitable: (a) Density power (24V) (b) Turbine power (8V or 16V)
Circuit operation notes: A closed switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 1 An open switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 0
Isolated voltage Supply Pins These are listed in the following table: Choice
Power source
7950 Klippon (Power +)
7950 Klippon (Power -)
1st.
Density
PL9/1
PL9/4
2nd.
Density
PL9/5
PL9/8
3rd.
Turbine
PL8/1
PL8/4
th
Turbine
PL8/5
PL8/8
4 .
(1b) External powered (recommended) 795x status input (external power) notes:
795x +5V to +24V (external)
1. Use a voltage that falls within the range 5V to 24V. It is possible to use the same voltage source that is powering the 795x. In this case, the voltage requirement is 24V.
Status input
2. An isolated power source must be used to maintain status input isolation.
3.3k
Circuit operation notes: 0V (external)
Status input common
Status input using external voltage source
7950 Op Man/CB
A closed switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 1 An open switch produces a digital signal that represents a value of 0
Page 2.17
Chapter 2 Getting started 2. Status Input Common Pin Choice
7950 Klippon
st
1 .
PL6/09
2nd.
PL6/10
3. Status Input Signal Pin
Page 2.18
Status Input
7950 Klippon
Default Function
1
PL6/1
None
2
PL6/2
None
3
PL6/3
None
4
PL6/4
None
5
PL6/5
None
6
PL6/6
None
7
PL6/7
None
8
PL6/8
None
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4 7950 Outputs 2.4.1 Overview of 7950 outputs This section feature connections with external devices that provide only output signals to the 7950. Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples: x x x
Pulse Output Connections.……..…………...... Page 2.20 Analogue Output Connections..…....……...... Page 2.21 Digital Output Connections....…………..…..... Page 2.22
Use the <“Health Check”> menu system facility on the 7950 to monitor what is being output. Once located, select the particular type of output and then select the instance of that output to see what is happening.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.19
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4.2 Pulse Output Connections Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made.
Figure 2.4.1: Wiring for pulse output 1 (for all 795X series) +5V to +40V 795X
Pulse output +ve
Relay
Pulse output 1
Pulse output common
Note: The +24V and 0V could be taken from a density supply or somewhere else on the instrument.
0V
1. Pulse Output Power (+ve) Pin There is one pin reserved for all pulse outputs… 7950 Klippon PL5/4
2. Pulse Output Common Pin There is one pin for all pulse outputs… 7950 Klippon PL5/8
3. Pulse Output Signal Pin There is one pin for each pulse output… Output Number
7950 Klippon
Default Parameter Output
1
PL5/5
None
2
PL5/6
None
3
PL5/7
None
Note: Refer to the configuration chapters for details on how to select parameters for output.
Page 2.20
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4.3 Analogue Output Connections Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made.
Figure 2.4.2: Analogue output wiring (for all 795X series)
795x Analogue Output Signal
Analogue Output Commmon
1. Analogue Output Common Pin There is a choice of pins for all of the Analogue Outputs… Choice
7950 Klippon
st
1 .
PL11/09
2nd.
PL11/10
2. Analogue Output Pins Output Number
7950 Klippon
Default Parameter Output
1
PL11/1
None
2
PL11/2
None
3
PL11/3
None
4
PL11/4
None
5*
PL11/5
None
6*
PL11/6
None
7*
PL11/7
None
8*
PL11/8
None
Note: Refer to the configuration chapters for details on how to select a parameter for output * Requires add-on (option) board 79506 to be fitted
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.21
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.4.4 Digital Output Connections Status Output 1 Status Output 1 uses a relay with 2 contacts: 1: “Normally Open” pin PL5/1 OR “Normally Closed” pin PL5/3 2: Common pin PL5/2 This output functions as a ‘Watchdog’ for indicating the presence of at least one active alarm. For example, the NO contact is energised only if there is an alarm. Status Outputs 2 to ‘N’ Remaining Status Outputs are of the open-drain type. Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to the 7950: 1. Power Supply (a) External power (Recommended) Figure 2.4.3: A recommended approach to wiring a status outputs (#2 onwards) This diode protects 795x against reverse voltages
795x
External power supply provides voltage and current suitable for user selected relay.
Status output
0V from external power supply Status output common
2. Status Output Common Pin 7950 Klippon PL7/9 PL7/10
3. Status Output Signal Pins Status Output
x
Default Function
7950 Klippon
2
Limit Alarm Watchdog
PL7/2
3
Input Alarm Watchdog
PL7/3
4
User Alarm ‘X’ Watchdog
PL7/4
5
User Alarm ‘Y’ Watchdog
PL7/5
All other Status Outputs (#6, #7, etc) do not have a default function but may be allocated a function as part of configuring a feature. Refer to Chapters 8, 9 or 11 for relevant features.
Notes: x x
Page 2.22
Refer to Chapter 8 for information on changing settings for the Alarm Logger Output (Watchdog) feature. Refer to Chapter 11 for information on configuring a Status Output.
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.5 Other 7950 connections Serial Communications Turn to Chapter 7 for a full guide to Serial Communications involving the 7950. HART Communications Turn to Chapter 16 for a full guide to HART support on a 7950.
2.6 Where to find the 7950 connectors This section contains full lists of pin designations referred to in this Chapter. There is a separate table for each possible hardware configuration.
7950 Op Man/CB
Page 2.23
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.1: Pin designations for a 7950 (D-type) without an option board fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
PL14
PL15
4
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Page 2.24
PL7
PL8 Turbine A Power +
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.2: Pin designations for a 7950 (D-type) with option board 79506 fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
4
PL7
Turbine A Power +
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
PL14
PL15
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
Analogue Power +
Analogue Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
Analogue Input 5 +
Analogue Input 7 +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
Analogue Input 5 -
Analogue Input 7 -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
Analogue Power -
Analogue Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
Analogue Output 5
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
Analogue Power +
Analogue Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
Analogue Output 6
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
Analogue Input 6 +
Analogue Input 8 +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
Analogue Output 7
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
Analogue Input 6 -
Analogue Input 8 -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
Analogue Output 8
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
Analogue Power -
Analogue Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
7950 Op Man/CB
PL8
Page 2.25
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.3: Pin designations for a 7950 (D-type) with option board 79507 fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
PL15
4
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
PL14
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
HART Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
HART Input 5 +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
HART Input 5 -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
HART Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
HART Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
HART Input 6 +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
HART Input 6 -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
HART Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Page 2.26
PL7
PL8 Turbine A Power +
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started Table 2.6.4: Pin designations for a 7950 (Klippon) with all add-on boards fitted
Pin
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
1
L
E
Tx 1
Tx 3
NO Alarm
Status Input 1
2
N
E
Rx 1
Rx 3
Common Alarm
Status Input 2
Status Output 2
Turbine A Input +
3
E
0V
Common
Common
NC Alarm
Status Input 3
Status Output 3
Turbine A Input -
+24V
Protect Ground
RTS 3
Pulse Output +ve
Status Input 4
Status Output 4
Turbine A Power -
5
Tx 2
CTS 3
Pulse Output 1
Status Input 5
Status Output 5
Turbine B Power +
6
Rx 2
Rx/Tx 3a
Pulse Output 2
Status Input 6
Status Output 6
Turbine B Input +
7
Common
Rx/Tx 3b
Pulse Output 3
Status Input 7
Status Output 7
Turbine B Input -
8
RTS 2
Protect Ground
Pulse O/P Common
Status Input 8
Status Output 8
Turbine B Power -
9
CTS 2
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
10
Protect Ground
Ground
Ground
Status I/P Common
Status o/p Common
Ground
4
PL7
Turbine A Power +
Pin
PL9
PL10
PL11
PL12
PL13
PL14
PL15
1
Density 1 Power +
Density 3 Power +
Analogue Output 1
PRT 1 Power +
PRT 3 Power +
HART/Analog Power +
Analogue Power +
2
Density 1 Input +
Density 3 Input +
Analogue Output 2
PRT 1 Signal +
PRT 3 Signal +
HART/Analog Input 5 +
Analogue Input 7 +
3
Density 1 Input -
Density 3 Input -
Analogue Output 3
PRT 1 Signal -
PRT 3 Signal -
HART/Analog Input 5 -
Analogue Input 7 -
4
Density 1 Power -
Density 3 Power -
Analogue Output 4
PRT 1 Power -
PRT 3 Power -
HART/Analog Power -
Analogue Power -
5
Density 2 Power +
Density 4 Power +
Analogue Output 5
PRT 2 Power +
PRT 4 Power +
HART/Analog Power +
Analogue Power +
6
Density 2 Input +
Density 4 Input +
Analogue Output 6
PRT 2 Signal +
PRT 4 Signal +
HART/Analog Input 6 +
Analogue Input 8 +
7
Density 2 Input -
Density 4 Input -
Analogue Output 7
PRT 2 Signal -
PRT 4 Signal -
HART/Analog Input 6 -
Analogue Input 8 -
8
Density 2 Power -
Density 4 Power -
Analogue Output 8
PRT 2 Power -
PRT 4 Power -
HART/Analog Power -
Analogue Power -
9
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
10
Ground
Ground
Analog O/P Common
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
7950 Op Man/CB
PL8
Page 2.27
Chapter 2 Getting started
2.7 If you need help... If you get into difficulties... If you get into difficulties when using the wizards, you can abandon the configuration and start again as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
From the menu, keep selecting NO (usually by pressing the c-key) or, if that option is not available: Press ENTER until you can start selecting NO. Carry on with (1) and (2) until you return to the wizards menu where you started. Start the worked example again. The configuration you abandoned is cleared from the instrument’s memory when you begin again.
If you don’t know where the keys are... Figure 2.7.1 shows how to find all the keys referred to in the worked examples.
Figure 2.7.1: Keys and indicators on the front panel S solartron UP ARROW
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
a
b
DOWN ARROW
c
+/-
0 d
CLR
EXP
ENTER
1 2
ALARM LIGHTS
MULTIVIEW
MENU
Figure 2.7.1 shows those keys referred to in the worked examples, plus some others you may use. Chapter 5 gives a full explanation of what all the keys do.
Page 2.28
7950 Op Man/CB
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3. About the 7950 3.1 Background The 7950 was developed to meet the demand for a reliable, versatile, user-friendly and cost-effective instrument for liquid and gas metering. It has a Motorola 68332 32-bit microprocessor and surfacemounted circuit board components so that it is powerful, reliable and compact. 7950 features: x x x x x x
comprehensive I/O capabilities alarm and alarm history facilities a menu-driven, user-friendly interface for easy access to information NEMA 4X, IP65 enclosure ac or dc powered Serial ports for MODBUS network communications and printing.
3.2 What the 7950 single-stream liquid turbine computer does The 7950 single-stream liquid turbine computer is used specifically with liquid products and may use a number of types of flow meter (such as turbine, orifice or venturi meters) to measure parameters of interest.
The present issue of the liquid turbine software has support for connecting: x up to one flowmeter (turbine/orifice/coriolis) x up to two liquid density transducers - 7830, 7835, 7840 and 7845 models only x up to four PT100 or 0/4-20mA type temperature transmitters x up to two 0/4-20mA type static pressure transmitters x Stream Block valve and Prover valves In this application, the main purpose of the 7951 is to calculate flow rates and flow totals: x Indicated volume flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) x Indicated standard volume flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) x Gross volume flow rate and flow total x Gross standard volume flow rate and flow total x Mass flow rate and flow total {Coriolis mass meter - measurement from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Nett volume flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) x Corrected mass flow rate and flow total (Pulse flow meter only) It can also generate: x Line pressure (at the flow point) {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Prover inlet temperature and pressure {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Prover outlet temperature and pressure {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Line temperature (at the flow point) {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Density temperature (at the flow point) {from HART Input or Analogue Input} x Line density {from a density transducer, HART Input or from generated base density}
7950 Op Man/BC
Page 3.1
Chapter 3 About the 7950
x Base density (from Solartron’ 4x5 Matrix method or from API method†) x Specific gravity from an analogue input x Meter factor (flowmeter proving or linearisation of a user-definable calibration curve) x CTL (Temperature correction factor) {from API referral} x CPL (Pressure correction factor) {from API referral} x CCF (Combined correction factor)
Other application features : x Batching x Retrospective calculations x Net oil/water calculations x Alarm summary and history log x Configuration log (available over serial communications only) x Event summary and history log x Special equation 1 x Special equation 2
NOTE : Chapter 21.2 from the September 1996 draft of the API standard has been used unless indicated with the symbol
†
This complies with section 11.2.1 11.2.2 of API standard (September 1996 draft copy)
Page 3.2
7950 Op Man/BC
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3.3 Physical description of the 7950 The 7950 is a wall-mounted instrument housed in a one-piece case. The upper part of the instrument has a panel on which are mounted the keyboard and display. Below this, and stepped back slightly, is a terminal cover which, when removed allows access to the electrical connectors on the connector board inside the instrument. All wiring enters the case from underneath, through the gland plate which has to be drilled for the purpose. The connector board is mounted vertically inside the back of the case. The microprocessor board is attached, by six screws and stand-offs, to the back of the keyboard and display. The upper and lower parts of the instrument are separated by a horizontal metal plate (the screen) which helps to protect the instrument against electro-magnetic interference.
The 7950 and its major assemblies 7950 Op Man/BC
Page 3.3
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3.4 Communications The 7950 can operate as a MODBUS slave. It can: x download a configuration from a PC, DCS, etc. x upload a configuration x monitor random locations in the 7950 x interrogate the alarm and data logger buffers x manipulate the alarm and data logger buffers x set random locations with new data x instigate printed reports.
3.5 Typical installation The diagram below illustrates a typical installation of a liquid turbine metering system that utilises the 7950 Flow Computer.
Serial comms.
795X FLOW COMPUTER
4-20mA outputs Pulse outputs Status outputs
Pulse 'A'
PRT or 4-20mA
4-20mA
T
P
Pulse 'B' Periodic Time
7835 Densitometer
Page 3.4
7950 Op Man/BC
Chapter 3 About the 7950
3.6 Checking your software version The 7950 is driven by pre-loaded software which differs according to the application for which the instrument is to be used.
PREFIX
DIGIT 1
DIGIT 2
DIGIT 3
DIGIT 4
HARDWARE PLATFORM
METERED PRODUCT
FLOW METER
STREAMS/ CHANNELS
SPECIAL
50, 51 or 55 for 7950, 7951 or 7955
1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
0-9
Gas Liquid Both Other
PREFIX
DIGIT 1
None Orifice Turbine Venturi Mass Multi
DIGIT 2
Single Dual etc... etc...
DIGIT 3
DIGIT 4
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION CODE
For example, in the case of a 7950 single stream gas turbine flow computer, the software configuration code is SW501210. You can find the software configuration code in several ways: x It is printed on a label inside the instrument. You can find it by removing the terminal cover. x It is written into the menu structure.
7950 Op Man/BC
Page 3.5
Chapter 3 About the 7950
Page 3.6
7950 Op Man/BC
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4. Installing the system 4.1 What this Chapter tells you This chapter gives you full instructions for installing the 7950. It does not go into detail about how to install any peripheral devices (such as transducers, computers or printers) which can be connected to the 7950. For this information you must refer to the documentation supplied with these items.
4.2 Hazardous and non-hazardous environments If all or part of an installation is in an area where there is the risk of fire or explosion, then barriers usually have to be wired into the circuit. However, some instruments (such as the Covimat) are explosion-proof and barriers are not, therefore, needed. You must follow the manufacturers instructions and safety recommendations fully.
4.3 Installation procedure Briefly, the procedure is: Step 1: Draw up a wiring schedule Step 2: Unpack the 7950 Step 3: Set the DIP switches Step 4: Fit the 7950 Step 5: Make all external connections Step 6: Earth the installation Step 7: Connect power supply The steps in the procedure are explained in the following sections.
4.4 Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule Before you make any connections, you must draw up a wiring schedule to help you identify wiring colours and make sure that you do not connect more items of any given type than you are allowed to. (If you are in doubt, check the specification in Appendix C.) A blank copy of a wiring schedule is given in Appendix B.
4.5 Step 2: Unpacking the instrument Remove the instrument from its packing and examine it to see if any items are loose or if it has been damaged in transit. Check that all items on the shipping list are present. If any items are missing or if the equipment is damaged, contact your supplier immediately for further advice. What should be supplied with the 7950:
7950 (CH04/CE)
x
Labels #1 - #20 for identifying the sockets
x
4-way free socket for DC input
x
3-way free socket for AC input
x
10-way free socket for I/O (13 off)
x
2 Amp and 1.25 Amp fuses (Note: these are spares)
x
An operating manual (this manual) Page 4.1
Chapter 4 Installing the system
Other items you must supply yourself: x
cable glands (if you want to use them)
x
fixings (such as screws and plugs) suitable for fixing the 7950 to a wall.
Note: If you have ordered optional, additional facilities (such as extra outputs) these are already installed in the machine.
4.6 Step 3: Setting DIP switches The 7950 is supplied with the DIP switches in these default settings: x
Turbine power:
8 VOLTS
x
Security switch:
NONSECURE
x
Input 1
PRT
x
Inputs 2-4:
4-20mA
Dip switches on the Connector Board
If you want to change these settings, do this as follows:: x
Security
The 7950 can work in a non-secure or securable mode. In non-secure mode, anyone can have access to the signal converter. In securable mode, access to many of the signal converter’s functions can be protected by a password. At this stage, setting the DIP switch only determines whether or not the instrument is capable of being protected because the actual setting of the security is carried out later when the instrument is configured.
x
PRT or analogue (420mA) inputs
There are four dip switches (one per channel) which determine whether the input to each channel is from a PRT or analogue (4-20mA) transmitter. Set each DIP switch as you require. Note:
You also have to configure the inputs. This is explained in Chapter 11.
When you have set the dip switches, replace the terminal plate. Note: The 7950 is always shipped from Mobrey with the security DIP switch set to non-secure.
Page 4.2
7950 (CH04/CE)
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4.7 Step 4: Fitting the 7950 Note:
You must not fit the 7950 where it may be subjected to extreme conditions or be liable to damage. The instrument is designed to comply with IP65 and Nema 4X standards. For further information about the environmental conditions within which it can operate, see Appendix C.
Mounting details for the 7950
1. Undo and remove the six screws which secure the gland plate to the underneath of the instrument. Remove the gland plate. 2. Drill whatever holes are required in the plate to allow the cables to enter the instrument. Do not replace the gland plate at this stage. 3. Drill a pilot hole in the wall. Then, using whatever fixings (such as wall plugs) are suitable for the type of wall, turn in a screw so that its head sticks out far enough so that the keyhole-shaped slot at the back of the case can fit over it. 4. Fit the instrument on the wall. 5. Undo the four screws and remove the terminal cover.
6. Mark through the two instrument mounting holes then take the instrument off the wall. 7. Drill holes for screws at the marked positions. The holes should be wide enough to take wall plugs if these are to be used. 8. If wall plugs are to be used, insert them into the holes. 9. Hang the instrument on the wall, insert the screws and tighten them sufficiently to hold the instrument in place. 10. Replace the terminal cover.
4.8 Step 5: Making the connections 1. Refer to the documentation supplied with the external equipment to see if you have to carry out any special procedures when connecting them to the 7950. Take special notice of any information about complying with EMC regulations. 2. Pass the cables through the holes in the gland plate then connect the sockets to the wiring using your schedule and the connection diagrams (in Chapter 2) to help you. 3. Check the wiring thoroughly against the schedule and wiring diagram. 4. Connect the sockets to the plugs on the connector board. 5. Replace the gland plate.
7950 (CH04/CE)
Page 4.3
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4.9 Step 6: Earthing the instrument NOTE:
Incorrect earthing can cause many problems, so you must earth the chassis and the electronics correctly. However, the way in which you do this depends almost entirely on the type of installation you have and the conditions under which it operates. Therefore, because these instructions cannot cover every possible situation, the manufacturers recommend that earthing procedures should only be carried out by personnel who are skilled in such work.
The Chassis of the 7950 must be earthed in all cases; both for safety reasons and to ensure that the installation complies with EMC regulations. Do this by connecting an earth lead from the stud on the gland plate to a local safety earth such as pipework or some other suitable metal structure.
Connector board
Internal earth lead Gland plate
Earth stud Chassis earth lead to external earth
Earthing the chassis of the 7950 In addition to earthing the chassis, you may have to make extra earth connections in some cases, depending on the installation requirements. Details of this are given in Appendix C.
Page 4.4
7950 (CH04/CE)
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4.10 Step 7: Connecting the power supply WARNING
NOTE:
Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
Mobrey recommend that power connections should not be made by anyone other than a properly-qualified electrician.
Follow these 5 steps: 1. Switch off and disconnect all power supplies to the instrument (if you haven’t already done so). 2. If you are using cable glands, insert one into the appropriate hole in the gland plate. 3. Pass the power cable through the cable gland. 4. Before going any further, re-check that the wiring is connected correctly. 5. The instrument can work on either 110-230V a.c. or from a d.c. supply. Make the power connection, as follows: x x
For a.c. power: Plug the power connector into plug PL1. For d.c. power: Plug the power connector into plug PL2.
Note that you can connect the 7950 to both the d.c. and a.c. supplies if you want a d.c. back-up in case the mains supply should fail. The instrument goes through the following Power On Self Test (POST) routine: x
The display shows a sequence of characters or patterns to prove that all elements of the display are working. There is a pause of five seconds between each change of pattern.
x
The program ROM is checked against a checksum. The display shows how the test is proceeding.
x
Critical data are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
x
The coefficients are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
x
The battery-backed RAM is checked. The display indicates progress.
x
Any saved programs are checked. The display shows the number of programs and their status. Note that, for a new machine, there are no stored programs.
x
If a battery is fitted, its condition is checked and reported.
Note that, when the power is switched on, alarm LEDs may light up. You can ignore these for the moment alarms are explained in Chapter 8. As long as the POST is completed satisfactorily, the 7950 is ready to be configured (see Chapters 10 and 11). If the POST fails to complete, switch off the power and check all connections and the DIP switch settings. Then re-connect the power supply. If the POST still fails to complete, switch off again and contact your supplier.
7950 (CH04/CE)
Page 4.5
Chapter 4 Installing the system
Page 4.6
7950 (CH04/CE)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5. The keyboard, display and indicators 5.1 What this chapter tells you This chapter tells you: x
How the front panel is laid out.
x
What the keys and indicators do.
x
What characters you can display.
5.2 The layout of the front panel Figure 5.2.1 shows the layout of the keyboard. The diagrams at the end of this chapter give a visual summary of what each of the keys do.
2
3
4
5
6
a Flow rates Flow totals Line density Base density / SG
1
b c d
1
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
CLR
7
EXP
2
8 16
15
14
13
12
9
11 10
1
Down-arrow
7
Enter
13
Print Menu
2
Up-arrow
8
Information Menu
14
Stream/Run Select
3
Multi-view display
9
Limit alarm LED
15
(Application specific)
4
Left-arrow
10
Input alarm LED
16
Security LED and lock
5
Right-arrow
11
System alarm LED
6
Back
12
Main Menu
Figure 5.2.1: The layout of the front panel
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.1
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5.3 What the display shows The display can show the following information: x
numerical data in floating point, exponent or integer formats
x
text descriptors
x
units of measurement (if applicable)
x
status of application parameters i.e. set, live, failed or fallback (if applicable)
x
alarm and event information
x
current time and date
x
stream (metering-run) identification numerically (if applicable)
5.4 How the keys work The keys let you: x
move around the menus
x
view data stored in the 795x
(VIEW mode)
x
edit the data.
(EDIT mode)
Some keys do different things according to where you are in the menu system. For example:
ENTER key
This key does nothing until you get into EDIT mode. After you have edited the data of application parameters, pressing ENTER accepts the changes and puts the 795x back into VIEW mode.
‘c’ key
When you move through the menu structure this selects any menu choice shown against the key. However, when in VIEW mode, pressing c lists the display units.
INFORMATION MENU key
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes you to a special menu providing information on alarms, events, flow status and 795x operating mode.
PRINT MENU
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing of reports.
The sections that follow tell you more about what the keys do and how you use them.
5.5 Using the keys to move around the menus A general tour of the menu system is provided in chapter 6. The keys, which you can use to move around the menu system, are:
Page 5.2
UP-ARROW
Moves the display up to the previous page of the menu. If there is no previous page, this does nothing.
DOWN-ARROW
Moves the display down to the next page of the menu. If there is no next page, this key does nothing.
‘a’ - ‘d’ keys
Each key selects the menu choice next to it. If there is no menu choice next to a key, that key does nothing.
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
BACK
Returns you to the previous step.
MAIN MENU
Moves you straight to the top-level menu.
INFORMATION MENU
Takes you to a special menu providing information on alarms, events, flow status and 795x operating mode.
PRINT MENU
Takes you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing of reports.
MULTI-VIEW (blank key, top)
You can define one or more display pages, each showing up to four items of data, lines of descriptive text, or both. Pressing MULTIVIEW shows the first display page you have defined. Use the arrow keys to page up and page down.
APPLICATION (blank key, bottom)
The use of this key is dependent on the functionality of application software. If this key is in use, it will be mentioned in later chapters.
Note: Keys other than those listed above have no effect.
5.6 Using the keys to view stored data When an application parameter screen is viewed after selection from the menu, the display is in VIEW mode.
Figure 5.6.1: Typical parameter screen (in VIEW mode) What the display shows Figure 5.6.1 shows a typical display when you view an application parameter screen. In VIEW mode, all information is right justified. Line 1
shows the parameter description. (Some words may be abbreviated.)
Line 2
shows the present value (or text for indirection type).
Line 3
shows the units (if any). This line is blank if there are no units.
Line 4
shows LIVE, SET, FB (FALLBACK) or FAIL to indicate the state of the present value shown in Line 2, where appropriate. These indications mean: LIVE The data shown is live data received from the transducer or transmitter connected to the 795x. SET
You have entered a fixed value for the data; this value does not change unless you change it or make it live.
FALLBACK
A fallback or default value has been used to obtain the value for the data.
FAIL
The input has failed.
Optionally, Line 4 may also show the parameter’s unique identification number (location ID), which is required when setting up certain features e.g. multi-view. You can display this information by using the ‘a’ key.
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.3
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
In VIEW mode, the keys that you can use are: ‘a’ key
On/off toggle for displaying the parameter’s identification (location ID). This is displayed to the left of the status indication on line 4 of the display.
‘b’ key
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can edit the data on line 2. The data is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
‘c’ key
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can select from a list of the units in which the data can be displayed. The units are left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
‘d’ key
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can select a status (Set or Live). The status is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
STREAM / RUN SELECT
If there is more than one stream (run) and there is a number on the far left of display line 4, this key will select another stream (run). The screen will be refreshed with attributes (value, units and status) for that stream (run).
BACK
Returns you to the previous step.
MAIN MENU
Takes you straight to the top-level menu.
5.7 Using the keys to edit information You can: x
edit text
x
select from a multiple-choice list
x
edit numerical information
x
edit the date and time.
5.7.1 Text editing Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to edit text are:
Page 5.4
LEFT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the left along the line of text you are editing.
RIGHT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the right along the line of text you are editing.
UP-ARROW
This key changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls forwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the character you want is displayed.
DOWN-ARROW
Changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls backwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the character you want is displayed.
0-9 keys
Each key enters a single digit.
‘b’ key
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press b to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: the ENTER key also does this.)
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
ENTER
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press the ENTER key to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (The b key also does this.)
CLEAR
This clears a line of text.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
PLUS / MINUS
Toggles between lower and upper case letters.
5.7.2 Multiple-choice selection Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to select from a multiple-choice list are:
UP-ARROW
Scrolls up through the available options.
DOWN-ARROW
Scrolls down through the available options.
‘b’ KEY
If editing the data (on display line 2) and you are satisfied with the change you have made, press b to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
‘c’ KEY
If editing the units and you are satisfied with the change you have made, press c to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
‘d’ KEY
If editing the status and you are satisfied with the change you have made, press d to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER
If you are satisfied with the change you have made, press the ENTER key to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode.
CLEAR
Restore the previous contents.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the BACK key to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
5.7.3 Numerical editing Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to edit numerical data are:
LEFT-ARROW
Erases the digit to the left of the cursor.
0-9 keys
Each key enters a single digit.
PLUS / MINUS
This changes the sign of the number. Pressing it repeatedly toggles between PLUS and MINUS.
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.5
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
DOT
Inserts a decimal point.
EXPONENT
Use this key if you want to show numbers in exponent form.
‘b’ key
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press the ENTER key. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: b also does this.)
CLEAR
Clears the line you are currently editing.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
Numerical entry When you type in a number the first digit appears at the left of the display and each successive digit is then positioned to the right of the one just entered. A number being entered over-types any existing number. Parameter identifiers (Location ID) These appear on the display in the same way as for numerical entry. However, when you accept the number (by pressing b or ENTER), the text descriptor of the application parameter appears on line 2 of the display.
5.7.4 Date and time editing The date and time are displayed in the format: dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm:ss. When you edit the date and time, the cursor moves to the right but skips the ‘:’ and ‘-’ characters. LEFT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the left.
RIGHT-ARROW
Moves the cursor to the right.
0-9 keys
Each key enters a single digit.
‘b’ key
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press ENTER. The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: b also does this.)
CLEAR
Restore the previous contents.
BACK
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
The new date and time is validated – an invalid date and time is greeted with “Bad date/time” on-screen for a few seconds before the previous content is restored.
Page 5.6
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5.8 The 795x character set You can use any of the 96 characters shown below as part of your display.
Figure 5.8.1: The 795x character set
5.9 LED indicators Security Indicator
This LED shows the present security level of the system. x x x x
RED FLASHING - the instrument is at Calibration level RED - Engineer level: the instrument can be configured. ORANGE – Operator level: limits can be changed. GREEN - World level: no parameters can be changed.
Note: For more information about these, refer to Chapter 11.
1. Security Level LED
Figure 5.9.1: Alarm Indicators Alarm Indicators
These are the Input, System and Limit alarms. For more information about these, refer to Chapter 8: “Alarms and Events”.
1.
System alarm LED.
2.
Input alarm LED.
3.
Limit alarm LED.
Figure 5.9.2: Alarm Indicators 795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.7
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5.10 Summary of key functions The diagrams on the next two pages provide a visual summary of the function of each key when in various modes.
What the key does when...
Key
...moving around the menus
...in VIEW mode
...in one of the following EDIT modes: Text editing Multiple-choice editing Numeric editing Units editing Date & time editing
UP-ARROW Pages UP in a menu. (Does nothing if top page already shown.)
Selects which units to show on display
Scrolls through character set Scrolls through available options Does nothing
Pages DOWN in a menu. (Does nothing if last page already shown.)
Selects which units to show on display
Scrolls through character set Scrolls through available options Does nothing
Goes to the top menu
Goes to the top menu
Does nothing
Goes to the previous menu
Goes to the previous menu
Cancels changes and goes back to VIEW mode
Chooses line a from a menu
Toggles between: (1) location ID (2) nothing
Does nothing
Chooses line b from a menu
Goes to EDIT mode
Accepts changes and goes back to VIEW mode Does nothing
Chooses line c from a menu
Goes into units editing mode. (See UP & DOWN arrow keys)
Does nothing Accepts changes and goes back to VIEW mode
Chooses line d from a menu
Toggles between LIVE and SET (where appropriate)
Does nothing
Goes to alarm/event sub-menu
Goes to alarm/event sub-menu
Does nothing
Opens the print menu
Opens the print menu
Does nothing
Views the MULTIVIEW display you have defined
Views the MULTIVIEW display you have defined
Does nothing
DOWN-ARROW
MENU
BACK
'a' KEY a
'b' KEY b
'c' KEY c
'd' KEY
INFORMATION
USER DISPLAY
(TOP blank key)
Summary of what the keys do - part 1 Page 5.8
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
What the key does when...
Key
...moving around the menus
...in VIEW mode
...in one of the following EDIT modes: Text editing Multiple-choice editing Numeric editing Units editing Date & time editing
BOTTOM blank key KEY NOT USED
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Accepts changes and goes back to VIEW mode
Does nothing
Does nothing
Moves the cursor LEFT Does nothing Erases the last digit
Does nothing
Does nothing
Moves the cursor RIGHT Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Deletes character at cursor Reverts to original selection Clears the line of numerals Restores previous contents
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing Inserts a decimal point
Does nothing
Does nothing
Change to upper or lower case Does nothing Changes the sign of a number
Does nothing
Does nothing
Insert space at cursor Does nothing Inserts the exponent
Selects another stream if there is more than one supported.
Does nothing
ENTER
LEFT
RIGHT
CLR
CLR DOT
PLUS/MINUS
+/EXP
EXP STREAM SELECT Does nothing 1 2
0-9 KEYS Do nothing
0
Do nothing
9
Enter a digit Do nothing
Summary of what the keys do - part 2
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB)
Page 5.9
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
Page 5.10
795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)
Chapter 6 The menu system
6. The menu system 6.1 What this Chapter tells you Before you can configure and operate the 795x instrument, you must have some understanding of how the menu system works. The menus are simple, logically-arranged and intuitive so they should present no problems to the average user. This chapter tells you how a typical menu structure is arranged. However, because instruments in the 795x family have different software according to the application for which they are being used, the descriptions given here is general so that it applies to any 795x instrument. Note: Chapter 12 features tables showing the menu system used in your application.
6.2 What the menu system does The menu system lets you: x x x x
Configure the 795x Operate it View data and settings stored in the 795x Edit data stored in the 795x
6.3 How the menu system works When you power-on the 795x instrument, the menu system appears immediately after the routine Power-OnSelf-Test (POST) is completed. If it is the first power-on since application software was installed, the Main Menu screen will appear, similar to the one shown in Figure 6.3.1. Otherwise, the 795x will display the last visited menu screen prior to powering off (or a power failure).
Figure 6.3.1: Main Menu Screen (Top-Level Menu)
Think of the menu system as having a tree-like structure which repeatedly branches to lower levels. The Main Menu screen (‘tree trunk’) in Figure 6.3.1 comprises four menu choices (‘branches’). Each menu choice has a text description (e.g. “Flow rates”) and a triangular icon to indicate the type of menu choice. A non-solid, triangular icon indicates the menu choice leads to a further menu (sub-branch), whereas a solid, triangular icon indicates the menu choice leads to an application software parameter screen (leaf). In addition, each menu choice is associated with a lettered key (a, b c or d). For example, a menu choice on display line 1 is always associated with the ‘a’-key. A menu choice on display line 2 is always associated with the ‘b’-key, and so on.
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Page 6.1
Chapter 6 The menu system
When you make a choice from the Main Menu, using the lettered keys, it leads you on to other, lower-level menus (branch levels 2, 3, and so on). Figure 6.3.2 shows how pressing the ‘a’-key will lead to a menu for “Flow rates”. Similarly, the ‘b’-key leads to a menu for “Flow totals”. Using the BACK key will return you to the previous menu, in this case the Main Menu.
Figure 6.3.2: Menu Choice Selection
Where a menu has more choices that can fit on to the display, it consists of two or more pages. Vertical arrow icons appear on the left-hand side of the display to indicate there are further pages. Figure 6.3.3 shows how you can scroll up or down between the pages by using the UP-ARROW and DOWNARROW buttons. These buttons will do nothing if there is no page to scroll to.
Figure 6.3.3: Pages of a Main Menu Page 6.2
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Chapter 6 The menu system
At the lowest levels in each branch of the menu system, there are software parameter screens (‘leaves’). Figure 6.3.4 shows how to get to the software parameter screen for Live/Set Meter temperature values. Application software parameter screens feature a solid, black, triangular shaped mark in the bottom-left corner of display line 4. In multiple-run (multi-stream) application software, there is a number to indicate which metering-run (stream) that the parameter attributes (value, units and status) is referring to. Note: Details about editing application software parameters can be found in Chapter 5.
Figure 6.3.4: Software Parameter Screen
Returning to the Main Menu again, there are several menu choices that are noteworthy as they are common to all application software versions. In addition, you’ll come across them in subsequent chapters. Figure 6.3.5 and Figure 6.3.6 provide an overview .
Leads to menus for viewing interim results of measurements and other calculations, Inputs, Outputs, etc. (See Chapter 12 for a full map)
Leads to a screen for entering a password to change security level. (See Chapter 11).
Leads to menus for editing measurement tasks for your installation. (See Chapters 8 - 11). Figure 6.3.5: Main Menu Choices – Common to all application software (Part One)
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Page 6.3
Chapter 6 The menu system
Leads to menus where you can view/edit the time and date, plus machine cycle timing.
Leads to a screen detailing the software version number.
Leads to a screen where you can view/edit text to identify the 795x instrument. Figure 6.3.6: Main Menu Choices – Common to all application software (Part Two)
All other menu choices on the Main Menu (e.g. “Flow rates”) are for operators to quickly find final measurements and other calculation results. Chapter 12 has tables showing these menus in more detail.
Page 6.4
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.
Serial Communications and Networking
7.1
What this chapter tells you This chapter is a comprehensive guide to serial RS-232/485 port communications with the 7950/7951 instrument. Since this subject area is vast, with countless reference books, the scope is restricted to the 795x point-of-view. Therefore, it has been assumed that the reader has a reasonable working knowledge of data communications and networking. A highly recommended reference for this chapter is: x The 1992 edition of “MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL REFERENCE GUIDE (PL_MBUS-300)”. Note: This chapter is not a guide to the MODBUS protocol
7.2
7950/7951 Communication Capabilities The 7950/7951 instrument has extensive facilities – ports and data services – to allow the communication of data with almost any device that has support for the Modicon MODBUS protocol. Communication ports and their associated standards are summarised in Table 7.2.1. Various data services are available through the ports and are introduced in Section 7.2.2. Table 7.2.1: 7950/7951 Communications Ports and Supported Standards
7.2.1
Serial Port One
Serial Port Two
Serial Port Three
RS-232C
RS-232C/485
RS-232C/485
MODBUS
MODBUS
MODBUS
Communication Ports Serial RS-232/485 Ports Two serial interface standards are supported by the 795x series – Serial RS-232C (full duplex) and Serial RS-485 (half duplex). They are software selectable if there is a choice for a particular port. RS-232C is the usual choice for a direct (point-to-point) network connection with only one device. Typically, it is utilised when transmitting printed reports to an ASCII compatible output device, such as a printer or a terminal. Another main use is the ‘Peer-to-Peer List’ data service that can regularly broadcast parameter values to another 7950/7951 instrument. Data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2. RS-485 is the choice when establishing a multi-drop network with two or more devices. This network allows both Master/Slave and Peer/Peer arrangements of devices and, subsequently, full availability of all data services. Data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2.
7.2.2
Data Services Table 7.2.2 lists the data services that are available through any serial RS232/485 port. Services are accessed by a half-duplex exchange of MODBUS – request and response - messages between the 7950/7951 instrument and another MODBUS device. Guided examples with the necessary message sequences to correctly access services are given later in Chapter 7 and in any extra pages that are inserted between Chapters 7 and 8.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.1
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Table 7.2.2: Data Services Availability (Master/Slave) Data Services
Available on Master/Slave
Database Access
Slave
x
Allow any (non-795x) MODBUS Master device to perform read/writes on an individual parameter in the database of a Slave
Historical Alarm Log
Slave
x
Retrieval of LIVE alarm information from the Historical Alarm Log. (Events are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
Historical Event Log
Slave
x
Retrieval of LIVE event information from the Historical Event Log. (Alarms are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
High Speed List 1 *
Slave
x
Allow non-795x MODBUS Master device to perform fast read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
High Speed List 2 *
Slave
x
Allow non-795x MODBUS Master device to perform fast read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
Archive Access
Slave
x
Retrieval of software parameter data from any of the data archives. (Archiving is explained in Chapter 9 of this manual)
Peer-to-Peer *
Master
x
Allow 795x MODBUS Master to perform read/writes on software parameters in the database of multiple 795x MOBUS slaves
Purpose of Data Service
* This application data service is fully explained in the extra pages between Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
Page 7.2
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.3
MODBUS from the 7950/7951 view-point
7.3.1
Introduction The Modicon MODBUS specification is designed to transfer data in 1-bit (coil) or 16-bit (register) blocks. This protocol has not been designed to deal with data, such as floating-point numbers, which require a minimum of 32-bit blocks. For this reason, every manufacturer of computer equipment that deals with this type of data must decide in which way the protocol should be extended. Consequently, many different implementations exist for the transfer of 32-bit floating-point data.
7.3.2
Supported Commands Members of the 795x series support four MODBUS functions: 1. Function 03 – Read multiple registers 2. Function 06 – Write single register 3. Function 16 – Write multiple registers Data stored within a 795x series instrument is represented by one or more 16-bit registers. Where registers contain a collection of bits, the 16-bit register is still used rather than individual bit (coil) access. The 795x series supports both single and multiple register access. Each port is configured individually to allow one type of register access. Multiple Register Access: ‘write’ command involving a 21-byte character string will specify 11 registers. Single Register Access:
7.3.3
‘write’ command involving the same character string will specify just 1 register.
Floating Point Numbers Floating-point values within the software parameter database are stored as 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) numbers. When requested over a MODBUS network link, a floating-point value is either encoded as a 32-bit IEEE (single-precision) number or encoded as a 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number. The precision level is individually selectable for each communication port.
7.3.4
Word Swap Mode Since Modicon did not define 32-bit data transfers, the order of transmission for (2 x 16-bit) words of a 32bit value is also not defined. The 795x series therefore provides the facility to choose whether the first or second word is the most significant. For 64-bit numbers, word swap places the second double-word as the most significant. This mode is individually selectable for each port. Figure 7.3.1: Word Ordering Examples
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.3
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.3.5
MODBUS Addressing Unlike most MODBUS devices, the 7950/7951 instrument can respond to more than one MODBUS address through a communication port. The base address of a MODBUS Slave is programmable and is used for accessing the database of software parameters. It is also possible to configure a 7950/7951 to allow access to further data services through virtual addressing – consecutive MODBUS addresses offset beyond the base address. You do not need to edit these virtual addresses because they are at fixed offsets beyond the programmed base address. The offsets are illustrated in Table 7.3.1. A virtual address becomes active when the corresponding data service is enabled. Note:
There can be different base addresses programmed for each individual port if you require it. However, the fixed address offsets still apply and will access exactly the same data service.
Table 7.3.1: Data Services and MODBUS Addressing MODBUS Addressing
Data Service
Address Offset
Base address (Base address) Virtual Address ‘1’
Software Parameter Database Peer-to-Peer Lists Historical Alarm & Event Log
+0 (+0) +1
Virtual Address ‘2’ Virtual Address ‘3’
High Speed List ‘1 High Speed List ‘2’
+2 +3
Virtual Address ‘4’
Data Archives
+4
Note: ‘Peer-to-Peer List’ functions also use the ‘Software Parameter Database’ service of a 795x MODBUS Slave
Page 7.4
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.4
Connecting the 795x to a RS-232/RS-485 Link This section is a reference with a table of grouped rear panel pins for each serial port and each physical layer interface.
7.4.1
RS-232 (full duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Port ‘1’) 7950 Com 1 Tx Com 1 Rx Com 0V
Function PL3/1 PL3/2 PL3/3
x x x
7951 Com 1 Tx Com 1 Rx Com 0V
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Function
SK1/2 SK1/3 SK1/5
x x x
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Port ‘2’) 7950 Com 2 Tx Com 2 Rx Com 0V Com 2 CTS Com 2 RTS Protect GND
Function PL3/5 PL3/6 PL3/7 PL3/8 PL3/9 PL3/4
7951 Com 2 Tx Com 2 Rx Com 0V Com 2 CTS Com 2 RTS
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send Frame (Chassis) protection Function
Sk2/2 Sk2/3 Sk2/5 Sk2/7 Sk2/8
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send
RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Port ‘3’) 7950 Com 3 Tx Com 3 Rx Com 0V Com 3 CTS Com 3 RTS Protect GND
Function PL4/1 PL4/2 PL4/3 PL4/4 PL4/5 PL4/8
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send Frame (chassis) protection
SK3/2 SK3/3 SK3/5 SK3/7 SK3/8
Transmit data Receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Clear to send Request to send
7951 Com 3 Tx Com 3 Rx Com 0V Com 3 CTS Com 3 RTS
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Function
Page 7.5
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
A simple MODBUS network can consist of just two devices. They could be an IBM compatible PC and a 795x connected by a RS-232C ‘straight through’ cable.
Page 7.6
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking 7.4.2
RS-485 (half duplex) Rear Panel Connections This section is a reference with a table of grouped rear panel pins for each serial port and the RS-485 signalling standard. RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘1’) Note: There is no support for RS-485 on port one.
RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘2’) 7951 Com 2 Rx/Tx+ Com 2 Rx/TxCom 0V
Function SK2/1 SK2/9 SK2/5
Transmit/receive data + Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
Note: The 7950 does not support RS-485 or Port 2
RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘3’) 7950 Com 3 Rx/Tx+ Com 3 Rx/TxCommon Protect GND
Function PL4/6 PL4/7 PL4/3 PL4/8
7951 Com 3 Rx/Tx+ Com 3 Rx/TxCom 0V
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Transmit/receive data + Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground) Frame (chassis) protection Function
SK3/1 SK3/9 SK3/5
Transmit/receive data + Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
Page 7.7
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.5
After Connecting the 795x … This section explains how to proceed with configuring the communication parameters of the 795x instrument after all the wiring to external communication devices is completed, as guided in Section 7.4. RS-232: RS-485:
7.5.1
Complete Section 7.5.1 and then complete Section 7.5.2 Complete Section 7.5.1 and then complete Section 7.5.3
General RS-232C/485 Port Configuration This Section is for configuring basic communication parameters before moving on to the RS-232C and RS-485 configuration sections. Objective: Set-up the basic communication parameters for each serial port with an RS-232 (point-to-point) or RS-485 (multiple-drop) network connection. What to do here: Follow these instructions for each port:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”> 2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port. 3. Work through this menu data checklist: Menu Data Name Port Baud rates
(Note: Some localised menu searching is required)
Instructions and Comments x
Select a transmission rate that is compatible with other networked device(s)
Port Char Format
x
Select a character format that is compatible with for other networked device(s)
Port handshaking
x
Select the option descriptor of either “None”, “Xon/Xoff” or “CTS/RTS”
Port RS232 / 485
x
Select the serial interface standard for the network. Also, read Note B
Notes: A
On-screen menu data names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port.
B
Not all 795x communication ports have support RS-485. For further information, see page 7.1.
4. Repeat all previous steps for each RS-232/485 port that you intend to use. (End of instructions)
7.5.2
RS-232 Configuration This section is for completing the configuring of software parameters for a point-to-point communication link with another RS-232C device. Objective: Set-up the basic communication parameters for serial ports with an RS-232C connection. What to do here: Follow these instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”> 2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port with the RS-232C connection 3. Locate the menu data page with a descriptor of “Comms port owner” (or similar) 4. Select an option descriptor Select the option with “Printer” when the RS-232C device is an ASCII compatible output device, such as a printer. Otherwise, select either “Master” or “Slave”, depending on which data services are needed.
5. Test the RS-232C connection, perhaps by printing a report (End of instructions) Page 7.8
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.5.3
RS-485 Configuration This section is for completing the configuring of software parameters for serial ports with an RS-485 communication link into a multi-drop (MODBUS Master/Slave) network. Objective: Set-up the 795x to function as a MODBUS Slave through the port. This will allow for ‘remote’ accessing of various application data services by a MODBUS Master. What to do: Follow these instructions:
1.
Ensure that general port parameters have already been configured, as guided in Section 7.5.1.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”> 3. Select the sub-menu for a RS-485 port. 4. Work through the checklist of Menu Data List 7.5.1. (End of instructions)
Menu Data List 7.5.1: RS-485 Software Parameters Menu Data Name
Instructions and Comments
Notes?
Comms port owner
x
Select the option descriptor with “MODBUS Slave”
A
Port MODBUS mode
x
Select the transmission mode (as agreed for the Master)
A
MODBUS word order
x
Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master
A, C
MODB slave add
A, C, D
x
‘Set’ a value for the MODBUS base address of the port (slave)
P MODBUS Features
x
Select data services that are accessible by a Master (through this port)
A, B
Long reg access
x
Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master
A, C
MODB precision
x
Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master
A, C
Notes: A
On-screen menu data names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial RS-485 port
B
Table 7.5.1 shows how the multiple-choice option descriptors relate to enabling access to one or more data services through a port.
C
See page 7.3 for guidance.
D
The 795x Flow Computer can be MODBUS Slaves at different base addresses on each port. It is possible to have an identical base address on two or more ports when they are not connected to the same network.
Table 7.5.1: Virtual Slave Access - Enabling Codes A&E
HSL ‘1’
HSL ‘2’
DA
None
u
u
u
u
Alarm
9
u
u
u
Alarm + List1
9
9
u
u
Alarm+List1+List2
9
9
9
u
Alarm+L1+L2+L3
9
9
9
u
Alarm+L1+L2+L3+L4
9
9
9
u
Alarm + L1+L2+L3+L4+DL
9
9
9
9
Option Descriptors
Key: 9 = Enabled, A&E = Virtual Slave ‘1’, HSL = High Speed List Slave, DA = Data Archive Slave
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.9
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6
7950/7951 Database access over a MODBUS network This section demonstrates how a (non-795x) MODBUS Master can communicate with the software parameter database of a 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave.
7.6.1
Introduction There are several types of information that can be obtained from the software parameter database: 1. Parameter value (in base units of measurement) 2. Parameter value status. 3. Data size and data type attributes for a software parameter value. The 795x series uses a unique index called a location identification (ID) number. There is a unique ID number for every stored software parameter. The location ID number is not normally displayed, but pressing the ‘a’ key when a parameter page is displayed, will display the number on the fourth line. MODBUS registers are expressed as the location ID number minus 1. Therefore, a requesting device will ask for MODBUS register 16 in order to read the data of the software parameter with an ID of 17.
Notice Parameter attributes and location identification (ID) numbers of the database with your installed software is likely to be different to those used in these examples. For a full list of parameters, locate the ASCII text file with the filename extension ‘.MAN’ on your ‘FC CONFIG’ 2 installation disk.
A number of worked examples are provided for each information type. Every example features objectives, actions, and results. Adapt the examples to suit your requirements. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.6.2 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information. Some software parameters may have a “No access” security attribute and, therefore, be permanently unavailable. The response from a command to read such data is shown in Table 7.6.1.
Table 7.6.1: "No Access" to Data Response
2
Receive
0A
83
…
Meaning
Slv.
Err.
…
This is a useful PC based package, developed by Mobrey, for interacting with the 795x. It is supplied only when requested.
Page 7.10
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Table 7.6.2: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations
Meaning
Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number
DC
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.11
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.2
7950/7951 Database Information: Software Parameter Values Software parameter values are mapped within the first 10,000 registers of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read base density value from database location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read from MODBUS register 0786 Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
Receive
01
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
Result:
12
Reg. ID 44
00
02
64
4A
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
54
00
A0
D7
The Data
13
Chk. Sum
The data value part of the reply, 0x4454A000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the 3 floating-point number 850.50 (in Kg/m – base units).
Example 2: Write base density value of 850 Kg/m3 (base units) to location 0787 MODBUS Action: Write to MODBUS register number 0786 Transmit
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
12
Reg. ID 03
00
02
Reg. Cnt
12
Reg. ID
00
02
Reg. Cnt.
04
44
DC E1
54
80
00
IEEE 32-bit data value
53
6A
Chk. Sum
89
Chk. Sum
Result: Base density value changes. The 0x44548000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the floatingpoint number 850.00 (in Kg/m3 – base units). Example 3: Check on selected option descriptor of a multiple-choice list Objective: Check referral method selection for calculating Metering density. MODBUS Action: Read from MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
0E
4D
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
01
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
00
B8
16
F5
Chk. Sum 44
Chk. Sum
Result: x
The returned data value 0x0000 can be interpreted by looking at the following table: Value
Page 7.12
Meaning
0x0000
x
4x5 Matrix Referral selected
0x0001
x
API Referral selected
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.3
7950/7951 Database Information: Software Parameter Status Software parameter states are mapped within registers 30001 to 40000 of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read the status of location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 30786 (30000 offset + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
78
42
Reg. ID
00
01
3C
BE
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
01
84
Receive
01
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
79
Chk. sum
Result: The “00 01” indicates a ‘SET’ status. Refer to Table 7.6.4 (on page 7.13) for other states.
Example 2: Change the status of location 0787 MODBUS Action: Change status to ‘LIVE’ by writing to 0x0000 to register 30786 (30000 + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
78
Receive
01
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
42
Reg. ID 78
42
Reg. ID
00
01
02
Reg. Cnt.
DC
00
B9
01
Reg. Cnt.
00
00
The Data
51
75
Chk. sum
7D
Chk. Sum
Result: Status has changed to “Live”. (See Table 7.6.3 on page 7.13 for other states)
Table 7.6.3: Status Codes (Selection) Value
Selection
0x0000
x
Live state
0x0001
x
Set state
Table 7.6.4: Status Codes (Returned) Value
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
State Return
0x0000
x
Live
0x0001
x
Set
0x0002
x
Fail
0x0003
x
Fallback
0x00FF
x
No state
Page 7.13
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.4
7950/7951 Database Information: Size and Type of Software Parameter Value The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 20,001 to 29,999 of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read size and type of data available from location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 20786 (20000 offset + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
51
32
Reg. ID
Receive
01
03
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
07
00
01
35
39
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
04
B7
The Data
BB
Chk. Sum
Result: 2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x07 and 0x04 x x
0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – a 32-bit floating-point number 0x04 = 4 bytes needed to represent the floating-point value
Special Note: x For other data type and size codes, refer to Table 7.6.5 on page 7.15
Example 2: Read size and type of data available from location 1579 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 21,578 (20000 offset + 1579 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
54
4A
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
01
03
02
09
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
16
3F
B5
EC
Chk. Sum DA
Chk. Sum
Result: 2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x09 and 0x16 x x
Page 7.14
0x09 = Data Type Code 9 – Character String 0x16 = 22 bytes – length of character string in bytes
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Table 7.6.5: Interpreting Responses from Type 3 Requests Type of Data x x x x x x x x x x x x
Character Unsigned 8-bit integer Unsigned 16-bit integer Signed 16-bit integer Unsigned 32-bit integer Signed 32-bit integer 32-bit floating point number 64-bit floating point number Character String Multiple-choice (List) Option Location pointer Time and date
Size (Bytes)
Type (Code)
2 2 2 2 4 4 4 8 22 2 2 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Table 7.6.6: Unit of Measurement Category Codes Category Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Unit Category x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(No units) Temperature Pressure Differential Pressure Volume Standard Volume Mass Energy Density Standard Density Frequency Period Dynamic Viscosity Base Dynamic Viscosity Kinematic Viscosity Base Kinematic Viscosity Flow Factor Volume Rate Standard Volume Rate Mass Rate
Category Code 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Unit Category x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) Time Length Speed Fraction Saybolt Universal Saybolt Temperature Absolute Zero Temperature Offset General (Not Used) (Not Used) (Not Used) Expansion Coefficient Youngs Modulus Velocity
Page 7.15
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.6.5
7950/7951 Database Information: Full Attributes of a Software Parameter The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 40,001 to 49,999 of the MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7950/7951 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume the 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”. Notes: x x
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be different to those used in these examples. All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read the full attributes of location 0787 MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 40786 (40000 offset + 0787 - 1) Transmit
01
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
9F
52
Reg. ID
Receive
01
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
04
00
02
4B
CE
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
07
08
01
The Data
BA
D0
Chk. Sum
Result: 4 bytes of data are returned in the reply: x x x x
0x04 = 4 bytes – required to store a 32-bit floating-point number 0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – software parameter value is a 32-bit floating-point number 0x01 = Status Code 1 – “Live” value state 0x08 = Unit of Measurement Category Code 9 – Density units
Special Note: x For interpreting other codes, refer to Table 7.6.5 (on page 7.15) and Table 7.6.6 (on page 7.15) x The reply data is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode
Page 7.16
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.7
Historical Alarm Log access over a MODBUS Network This section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master can access “LIVE” information from the Historical Alarm Log of a 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave. Refer to Chapter 8 if an explanation for the Historical Alarm Log is required.
7.7.1
Introduction Information from the Historical Alarm Log is available to a MODBUS Master through the register map of Virtual Address ‘1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning! It is not advisable to clear or accept alarms using the front panel while the Historical Alarm Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. Doing so could result in the MODBUS Master having an incorrect view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an alarm, (2) accepting that alarm and (3) clearing that alarm Every example features objectives, request/response sequences, and an explained result. Adapt the examples to suit your requirements. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.7.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
Table 7.7.1: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number
DC
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Meaning
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
Page 7.17
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.7.2
Worked Examples Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions. A base address of “01” has been assumed for or examples.
7.7.2.1 Example 1 (of 3) Objectives:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log Retrieve identification numbers for logged alarms Make information on a specific alarm available Get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three Accept the alarm that was selected in step three Clear the alarm that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Count alarms by reading MODBUS register 1,999 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
Receive
02
03
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
CF
Reg. ID 00
00
01
Reg. Cnt. 10
The Data
FD
B5
72
Chk. Sum 88
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that there are 16 (0x0010) alarms in the Historical Alarm Log.
Step 2 is to retrieve the identification number of the second oldest alarm MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 1 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
00
01
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
17
BC
D5
F9
Chk. Sum 4A
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the unique alarm ID is 0x0017 Note: Identification numbers of presently logged alarms are held in MODBUS registers 0 to 29 of the map for virtual address ‘1’. The first entry in the Alarm Historical Log is always at MODBUS register 1. For the purpose of this worked example, one alarm identification number is sufficient.
Step 3 is to make information on an alarm available. This is mandatory for remaining steps. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available on the second alarm Write alarm ID number, 0x0017, to MODBUS register 999 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
Reg. ID 03
E7
Reg.ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
B1
89
01
Reg. Cnt.
17
D6
79
Chk. Sum
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the selection has been made Page 7.18
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information is now available by reading MODBUS register 999 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
00
Reg. ID
01
34
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
BC
17
4A
Chk. Sum 4A
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the current alarm ID is confirmed to be 0x0017. Note: reply of 0x0000 indicates that no alarm has been selected
Step 4 is to get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three. To get information about another alarm, repeat step three but use another identification number. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text length by reading MODBUS register 2000 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
03
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
Result:
07
D0
Reg. ID
00
01
84
B4
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
12
B4
84
Chk. Sum
Reply data indicates that the alarm text length is 18 bytes (0x0012). At present, the length returned is always 18 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when asking for the text. Do not assume the length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain ASCII alarm text by reading MODBUS register 1011 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
F3
Reg. ID
00
09
75
88
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
Receive
02
03
12
53
69
6D
65
70
65
72
69
6F
64
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
‘T’
‘i’
‘m’
‘e’
‘p’
‘e’
‘r’
‘i’
‘o’
‘d’
Receive
6E
6F
20
63
61
6C
00
7C
EB
Meaning
‘n’
‘o’
‘c’
‘a’
‘l’
EOT
Result:
20
Chk. Sum
Reply data contains the base alarm message of “Timeperiod no cal”. See next action to find out the additional character following the base message.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text code and qualifier by reading MODBUS register 1010: Transmit
02
03
03
F2
00
02
65
8F
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg
ID
Reg
Cnt.
Chk
sum
00
0B
31
20
The
data
Receive
02
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
65
8F
Chk
sum
Result: 0x000B = A code for the alarm text – not to be confused with the alarm entry ID (from earlier) 0x31 = Represents ASCII character “1” – for metering-point/stream/channel one 0x20 = Alarm Type ‘2’ (2 = Present) + Alarm State ‘0’ (0 = Alarm Not Accepted) Other possible results… Type of alarm: “0”=Off, “1”=On, “2”=Present State of alarm: “0”=Not Accepted, “1”=Accepted 7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.19
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve time and date of selected alarm by reading MODBUS register 1009 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
F1
00
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
Receive
00
04
01
00
15
88
Chk. Sum
21
06
00
00
0D
00
0A
07
CE
00
1C
The Data 32
2D
The Data
Meaning
08
Reg. Cnt.
6B
Chk. Sum
Result: When viewing the Historical Alarm Log entry you would see “28-10-98 13:06:33” on the third line Special Notes: The order of date/time character strings in packets are unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
Step 5 is to accept the alarm that was selected in step three. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1004 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Result:
03
EC
Reg. ID 03
EC
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
C0
01
Reg. Cnt.
00
97
0C
Chk. Sum
4B
Chk. Sum
The alarm entry selected through register 999 has been accepted. Information, such as the base alarm message, remains available until another alarm entry is selected.
Step 6 is to clear the alarm that was selected in step three. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 1004 (0x3EC) Transmit
0B
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
0B
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
EC
Reg. ID 03
E7
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
C0
01
Reg. Cnt.
01
56
CC
Chk. Sum
4B
Chk. Sum
Result: x
Page 7.20
The alarm (selected through register 999) has been cleared. However, the conditions that caused the alarm may still be present and the same alarm would then be raised with a new identification number. Information such as the alarm text is now unavailable.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.7.2.2 Example 2 (of 3) Objective: Clear all alarms from the Historical Alarm Log MODBUS Action: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 2001 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
D1
Reg. ID 07
D1
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
50
01
Reg. Cnt.
01
17
E1
Chk. Sum
B7
Chk. Sum
Result: x
All alarms cleared. However, the conditions that caused the logged alarms may still be present and so the same alarms would be raised again, but with new identification numbers.
7.7.2.3 Example 3 (of 3) Objective: Retrieve abbreviated summary of the Historical Alarm Log MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 2010 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
D9
Reg. ID
Receive
01
03
06
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
00
00
03
D5
77
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
00
0E
00
The Data
10
00
59
86
Chk. Sum
Result: x
The reply data is interpreted as follows: 0x00 (Byte 1) = Number of system class alarms that have not been accepted = 0 0x00 (Byte 2) = Number of input class alarms that have not been accepted = 0 0x00 (Byte 3) = Number of limit class alarms that have not been accepted = 0 0x0E (Byte 3) = Total number of system class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 14 0x10 (Byte 5) = Total number of input class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 16 0x00 (Byte 6) = Total number of limit class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 0
Note: The reply data is a character string and is therefore unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.21
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.8
Historical Event Log access over a MODBUS network This section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master can access “LIVE” information from the Historical Event Log of a 7950/7951 MODBUS Slave. Refer to Chapter 8 if an explanation for the Historical Event Log is required.
7.8.1
Introduction Information from the Historical Event Log is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated with ‘Virtual Address 1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning! It is not advisable to clear or accept events using the front panel while the Historical Event Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. This could otherwise result in the MODBUS master having an in-correct view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an event, (2) accepting that event and (3) clearing that event Every example features objectives, actions, and a result analysis. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.8.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
Table 7.8.1: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number
DC
Page 7.22
Meaning
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.8.2
Worked Examples Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions. A base address of “01” has been assumed for our examples. Objectives:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Event Log Retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events Make information available on a specific event Get further information about the event that was selected in step three Accept/Clear the event that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many events are in the Historical Event Log. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 11,999 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2E
DF
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
96
7C
BC
EB
Chk. Sum 2A
Chk. Sum
Result: Returned data indicates that there are 150 (0x0096) events in the Historical Event Log.
Step 2 is to retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve ID number of the oldest event by reading register 10,000 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
27
10
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
02
03
02
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
D5
3C
8F
48
Chk. Sum BB
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the unique event ID is 0x02D5. Notes: Identification (ID) numbers of recorded events are available from MODBUS registers 10,000 to 10,149. The ID of the oldest recorded entry in the Historical Event Log is at register 10,000. For the purpose of our worked example, one event identification number is sufficient. In practice, all identification numbers would need to be retrieved and stored for repeating steps.
Step 3 is to make information available about a specific event. This is mandatory for remaining steps. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available for the first event Write the event identification number (i.e. 0x02D5) to MODBUS register 10,999 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2A
F7
Reg. ID 2A
F7
Reg. ID
00
01
02
02
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
B8
10
01
Reg. Cnt.
D5
EC
DA
Chk. Sum
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the selection has been made.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.23
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information for selected event is now available by read register 10,999 Transmit
02
03
2A
F7
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
03
02
02
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
D3
Chk. Sum
3C
D5
3D
BB
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the current event ID is confirmed to be 0x02D5.
Step 4 is to get further information about the event that was selected in step 3. To get information about another event, repeat step 3 but use another event identification number. MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text length by reading MODBUS register 12,000 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2E
E0
Reg. ID
00
01
8C
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
03
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
FC
14
E7
Chk. Sum 4B
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data indicates that the event text length is 20 bytes (0x0014). At present, the length returned is always 20 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when asking for the event text. Do not assume the event text length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text by reading MODBUS register 11,012 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
04
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
14
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
Receive
79
63
6C
6D
00
0A
8D
Reg. Cnt 41
DB
Chk. Sum
20
4F
2F
50
20
38
20
3A
AD
63
The Data... (mA O/P 8 cycle time) 65
20
74
69
6D
65
The Data…
Meaning
00
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply data contains the ASCII encoded event text. It is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve location ID, event type, and event state by reading register 11,010 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
02
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
00
00
02
6C
1C
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
72
01
01
The Data
A9
78
Chk. Sum
Result: 0x0072 = Location ID 0114 1st. 0x01 = Type (0x00=Auto, 0x01=User, 0x02=Period) 2nd. 0x01 = State (0x00=Pending, 0x01=Accepted)
Page 7.24
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain date/time stamp for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,009 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
Receive
02
03
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
00
08
Receive Meaning
th
= 8 . (June)
01
Reg. ID
00
00
00
08
05
1B
Chk. Sum
04
33
00
= 4 seconds
= Thursday
1C
Reg. Cnt.
= 51 mins.
00
A0 th
= 160 . Day
84
00
09
= 9 hours
00
06
07
= June
D0
= 2000
82
Chk. Sum
Result: When viewing the Historical Event Log entry you would see “08-06-00 09:51:04” on the third line Special Notes: x The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event data for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,011 Transmit
02
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2B
03
Reg. ID
Receive
02
03
32
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
45
00
19
Reg. Cnt. 3B
80
7D
D7
Chk. Sum 00
…
The Data
80
53
Chk. Sum
Result: 453B8000 is an 32-bit IEEE number representing 3000.00 (Old = 3000.0) - ignore the other 46 bytes Special Notes: x x x
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode. You must use MODBUS function 3 irrespective of whether port is configured for single register access When the data part of the reply represents an option selection code, the code is in the first byte. You can retrieve option text by reading 22 bytes from registers 11,013 (old option ) and 11014 (new option)
Step 5 is to clear the selected event from Historical Event Log once all associated data has been retrieved MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write value of the clearance code (0x0001) to MODBUS register 11,004 Transmit
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
02
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
2A
FC
Reg. ID 2A
FC
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt 00
01
Reg. Cnt.
02
00
DC
The Data
C9
01
EC
9E
Chk. Sum
D2
Chk. Sum
Result: x
Event cleared from the Historical Event Log. All associated data is no longer accessible.
Special Notes: x x
If you wish to just accept the selected event, use the acceptance code 0x0000 To clear all events in the Historical Event Log, write any 16-bit value to MOBUS register 12,001
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.25
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.9
Archive access over a MODBUS network This Section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master can access archives of a 795x MODBUS Slave. Refer to Chapter 9 if an explanation of Data Archiving is required.
7.9.1
Introduction Information from Archives is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated with ‘Virtual Address 4’ (base address + offset of 4). Worked examples in Section 7.9.2 are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) selecting an archive by type, (2) selecting a snapshot in that archive and (3) retrieving values from that snapshot. Every example features objectives, actions, and a result analysis. Objective For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific parameter. Action(s) This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS Master. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. Table 7.8.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
Table 7.9.1: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviations Slv.
The MODBUS slave base address.
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception.
Fn.
MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers.
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written.
Reg. ID
MODBUS Register number.
DC
Page 7.26
Meaning
Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow.
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information.
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.9.2
Worked Examples Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions. A base address of “01” (for MODBUS) has been assumed for our examples. Objectives:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select an archive. Find out how many snapshots are stored in that archive. Select a snapshot within that archive. Retrieve values from that archive.
Step 1 is to select an archive by type and then, optionally, verify it has been selected. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Select the Interval Archive by writing 0x02 to MODBUS register number 999 Transmit
05
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
05
10
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
Reg. ID 03
E7
Reg. ID
00
01
02
00
Reg. Cnt.
DC
The Data
00
B0
01
Reg. Cnt.
02
31
86
Chk. Sum
3E
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply indicates that the request was successful Special Note: x
Codes – 0x0000 (Alarm Triggered Archive), 0x0001 (Daily Archive), 0x0003 (Manual Trigger Archive)
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Verify the Archive selection by reading from MODBUS register number 999 Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E7
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
05
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
02
C8
35
FD
Chk. Sum 45
Chk. Sum
Result: Reply of 0x02 indicates that the Interval Archive was selected.
Step 2 is to find how many snapshots are stored in the selected archive MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 39,999 Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
9C
3F
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
05
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
9B
D2
Chk. Sum
07
Result: x
There are presently 7 (0x0007) snapshots in the selected archive.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Page 7.27
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Step 3 is to select a snapshot from the selected archive and then, optionally, verify it has been selected. MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Select newest snapshot the Archive by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1000 Transmit
05
10
03
E8
00
01
02
00
00
B0
B8
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
Chk.
Sum
Receive
05
10
03
E8
00
01
80
3D
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk.
Sum
Result: x
Reply indicates that the request was successful.
Special Note: x x
This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system nd Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2 oldest snapshot), etc.
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check on snapshot selection by reading from MODBUS register number 1000 Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
03
E8
Reg. ID
00
01
Reg. Cnt.
Receive
05
03
02
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
The Data
00
49
05
FE
Chk. Sum 84
Chk. Sum
Result: x
Reply data 0x0000 indicates that the newest (latest) snapshot is selected.
Special Note: x x
This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system nd Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2 oldest snapshot), etc.
Step 4 is to retrieve the newest snapshot value from the first parameter programmed into the archive list. MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Retrieve first parameter attributes by reading MODBUS register 40000 Transmit
05
03
9C
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Receive
05
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
40
Reg. ID 06
00
02
EA
0B
Reg. Cnt.
Chk. Sum
04
04
FF
The Data
BE
89
Chk. Sum
Result: x x x x
0x06 = Data Type ‘6’ – IEEE 32-bit floating-point value 0x04 = Data Size – Parameter value stored in 4 bytes 0xFF = Status – No Status Attribute 0x04 = Units of measurement group 4 – Volumetric units
Special Notes: x x
Page 7.28
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode. Other MODBUS registers: 40001 (= 2nd. listed parameter), 40002 (= 3rd. listed parameter), etc.
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Retrieve value by reading MODBUS register 2000. Transmit
05
03
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
07
Receive
05
03
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
DC
D0
Reg. ID
00
02
Reg. Cnt.
00
0D
46
The Data
C5
02
Chk. Sum 87
5C
32
Chk. Sum
Result: 3 x 0x000D4687 is the hexadecimal value for 870,023 (m )
Special Note: nd.
x Other MODBUS registers: 2001 (=2
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
listed parameter), 2002 (=3rd. listed parameter), etc.
Page 7.29
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
Page 7.30
7950/51 2510 (Ch07/FB)
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘A’)
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM 7a.1
What is the purpose if this addendum? This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for peer-to-peer MODBUS network communications. To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this) The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (‘V’) key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen. Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”. Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen. Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”. Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level. Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
Page 7a.2
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS 7A.2
INTRODUCTION
FEATURE: 795X COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETERS USING PEER-TO-PEER LISTS What to do: x x
An overview is in Section 7a.2.1…………………….……………. Page 7a.3 A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7a.2.2…..…….. Page 7a.5
7A.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE? This feature is typically used when a ‘Header’ Flow Computer must send various measurements (e.g. pressure, temperature, etc.) over a MODBUS protocol network to one or more ‘Stream’ Flow Computers. The 795x Flow Computer network can be a mixture of members from the 795x series.
USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL In MODBUS protocol terms, a ‘Header’ Flow Computer is usually given the role of a MODBUS Master device. It has the responsibility for the peer-to-peer transmission of measurement values during every machine cycle. The ‘Stream’ Flow Computers are all MODBUS Slave devices and they are the recipients of peer-to-peer transmissions. When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature… A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters directly to the database of a single 795x Slave device. The two MODBUS devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting RS-232 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 2on page 7a.3. When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature… A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters to a maximum of sixteen 795x MODBUS slaves. The 795x MODBUS devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting the RS-485 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 3on page 7a.3 At present, peer-to-peer communications will operate through one serial port. Configuring another serial port of the ‘Header’ 795x to function as a Master device and connecting it to a duplicate MODBUS network will cause unpredictable results.
THE PEER-TO-PEER LISTS 1 On the 795x Master there are two peer-to-peer lists for compiling a collection of up to 40 measurement parameters (795x database locations) in total. The list is simply a look-up reference for the Master, when 2 preparing transmissions, and is programmed with database location IDs. Figure 7a.2.1 shows how an individual peer-to-peer list comprises of entries (menu data pages) for nominating from 1 up to 20 parameters. Each list entry requires a programmed source – a database location ID on the 795x Master device - and a programmed destination – a database location ID on the 795x Slave devices. Figure 7a.2.1 : Peer-To-Peer List Anatomy PEER-TO-PEER LIST (with practice values) Source "Indicated Volume Rate" "Actual Cycle Time"
1
2
Destination
(Location IDs) 661 01
256 (Off)
02
(Off)
20
03
(Location IDs) 661 01
662 (Off)
02
(Off)
20
03
"Indicated Volume Rate" "Gross Volume Rate"
These lists are wholly independent of the High Speed Lists that are set-up on one (or more) 795x MODBUS slaves for access by non-795x MODBUS Master devices. To find out the database location ID for any parameter, navigate the menu system to the applicable menu data page and then press the ‘a’ soft-key once. The 4-digit database location ID is then displayed on the fourth line of the LCD display.
Issue: AB
Page 7a.3
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
Each 795x Slave device is allocated one of the two lists. This is a user-selection and is made when defining slaves whilst setting up the 795x Master device. Once lists are programmed, peer-to-peer operations are commenced on the 795x Master by a selecting an “Enable” option (‘soft-command’) through a menu data page. For each correctly listed parameter, a value is then read from the database, incorporated into a MODBUS ‘write’ command message and transmitted from the 795x Master device to the database on designated 795x Slave devices. All peer-to-peer lists, in use, are processed in full during a single machine cycle. This is repeated once every cycle until peer-to-peer operations are stopped by a “disable” ‘soft-command’. In a network of two 795x Flow Computers – a Master device and a Slave device, the Master is able to detect all failures to communicate with the slave and it raises a system alarm. With one slave, every MODBUS (‘write’) command message is explicitly addressed and that solicits a response from that slave. The absence of a response after a period (of retries) is how the Master detects a failure3. In a network of multiple slaves, MODBUS ‘write’ command messages use an all-slave broadcast address, which does not solicit any response and, therefore, the Master does not detect a communication failure. In this case, the system alarm is not raised. When the system alarm can not be cleared without it re-appearing during the next machine cycle, there are continuous communication failures. It is advisable to temporarily halt peer-to-peer operations, clear all related alarms and investigate (and correct) the difficulty before resuming.
Figure 2: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS232 Arrangement MODBUS Commands
795x MODBUS Master Device
Logical Link
LIST ONE
DATABASE
P1
RS-232 LINK
P2
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 1
LIST TWO
Figure 3: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS485 Arrangement
795x MODBUS Master Device
P3
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 1
P2
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 2
P3
DATABASE
795x MODBUS Slave Device 3
LIST ONE
DATABASE
P2
RS-485 LINK
LIST TWO
MODBUS Commands
3
Logical Link
This type of failure is normally the symptom of a faulty/unsuitable cable, incorrect set-up of communication parameters or the absence of a physical connection to a MODBUS network.
Page 7a.4
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
7a.2.2 Configuring and activation instructions Follow these instructions to configure and activate peer-to-peer communications…
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 4 connections is in Chapter 7. Several peer-to-peer arrangements are shown on page 7a.4.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS master device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select the menu for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network (2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some localised menu searching is required.
CONNECTING MORE THAN ONE SERIAL PORT TO THE A PEER-TO-PEER MODBUS NETWORK WILL CAUSE UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS
Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Menu Data *
Instructions and Comments
Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 P Modbus word order *** Port Modbus mode P MODB slave addr *** P Modbus features P long reg access ***
Select the option with “Modbus master” as the description Select a rate that is agreed for the 795x Master device and all the slaves devices Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network) Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable (wiring) supports “CTS/RTS” Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** Not applicable to the 795x Master device Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices. Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it. Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it. Choose either single register or multiple register formatted MODBUS commands
P MODB precision ***
Choose a precision option that is agreed for the Master and all the slaves devices
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network *** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
(2d) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to peer”> (2e) Program the peer-to-peer lists Menus: Peer List One:
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports before establishing the physical connections.
Issue: AB
Page 7a.5
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
INSTRUCTIONS
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
parameter,
Instructions and Comments Select the option with “Peer” as the description.
Select the serial port that is connected to same the network as the slave Use “0” if there are multiple slaves. Otherwise, use the address of the slave Not applicable to the 795x but may be needed by protocol listening devices Use a precision option that is the same as the 795x MODBUS Master Select the option that corresponds to one of the two peer-to-peer lists
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** Abbreviations: “Slv” = Slave, “func” = Function, “no” = number
3.
Program each remaining 795x to be a MODBUS slave device (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (3b) Select a menu that corresponds to the serial port that is connected to the RS-485 network (3c) Set-up basic communications parameters… Menu Data * Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format *** Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485
Instructions and Comments Select the option with “Modbus slave” as the description Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
P Modbus word order ***
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port Modbus mode
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
P MODB slave addr ***
Edit a value that does not conflict with other MODBUS network devices
P Modbus features ***
Not applicable to peer-to-peer operations
P long reg access ***
Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
P MODB precision ***
Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network *** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
4. Start peer-to-peer communications at the 795x Master device (4a) Navigate to: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”> (4b) Locate the menu data page with “Peer enable” on-screen (4c) Select the “Enable” soft-command (option) Once enabled, it is advisable to stop (deactivate) peer-to-peer communications prior to adjusting the communications set-up. Once changes have been made, re-enable the peer-to-peer function with step 4.
(End of instructions)
Page 7a.6
Issue: AB
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘B’)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM 7b.1
What is the purpose if this addendum? This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for HSL - High Speed List – communications over a MODBUS protocol network. To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this) The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (‘V’) key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen. Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”. Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen. Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”. Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level. Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
Page 7b.2
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION 7B.2
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
FEATURE: COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETER DATA USING HIGH-SPEED LISTS What to do here: x x x x
An overview is in Section 7b.2.1…………..…………………………….. Page 7b.2 A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7b.2.2………..……... Page 7b.9 A guided example in Section 7b.2.3……………………..…...………… Page 7b.12 Wonderware compatibility notes are in Section 7b.3………….……….. Page 7b.18
7b.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE? This feature is typically used when a MODBUS Master device 1 must get parameter data from a 795x series Flow Computer, where both are attached to the same MODBUS protocol network. High-speed list communications facilitate the quick collection and transmission of data from up to 300 usernominated parameters. This is achieved by using just a small quantity of MODBUS protocol messages. It would otherwise require an exchange of hundreds of messages. The 795x Flow Computer also helps by collecting all the data of nominated (listed) parameters from its’ database and keeping it ‘local’. This activity is completed during every machine cycle. Keeping parameter data ‘locally’ allows faster data access, allowing the 795x to service requests from a Master device as quickly as possible. Hence, the term of ‘high-speed lists’. There are two aspects to high-speed list communications: x x
the MODBUS protocol (network arrangements, communication parameters and message exchanges) a list of parameters (i.e. 795x database locations) and
Read about each aspect in the sections that follow this overview and then look at the setting-up instructions and the guided example. USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL In MODBUS protocol terms, the MODBUS Master device is likely to be a supervisory system. The Master device is responsible for acquiring parameter data through an exchange of MODBUS protocol messages with one ore more a MODBUS networked slave devices. The 795x Flow Computer is the MODBUS slave device, supporting RS-485 and RS-232 signalling standards. When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature… A Master device can request parameter data from one 795x slave device. The two MODBUS devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting RS-232 Standard. (See Figure 1 on page 7b.3) When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature… A Master device can request parameter data from one or more 795x slaves. The 795x MODBUS slave devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting the RS-485 Standard. (See Figure 2 on page 7b.4) Figure 1: High Speed List Overview (RS-232 Example) Read/Write Database Operations
795x MODBUS Slave Device High Speed List One
MODBUS Master Device
(Virtual Slave 2)
DATABASE
MODBUS Messages
P1
RS-232 LINK
P2
APPLICATION
High Speed List Two (Virtual Slave 3)
1
Direction of flow (HSL Data)
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between 795x Flow Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer Lists” feature.
Issue: AB
Page 7b.3
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Figure 2: High Speed List Overview (RS-485 Example)
MODBUS Master Device
Read/Write Operations
MODBUS Messages
APPLICATION Direction of flow (HSL Data) Serial Port
High Speed List 1
High Speed List 1
(Virtual Slave '2')
(Virtual Slave '2')
795x MODBUS Slave Device
DATABASE
P2
RS-485 Link
795x MODBUS Slave Device
DATABASE
P3
High Speed List 2
High Speed List 2
(Virtual Slave '3')
(Virtual Slave '3')
Figure 3: High Speed List Activity Within 795x Slave Devices
HIGH SPEED LIST ONE 795x MODBUS Slave Device LIST ONE
1 Loc ID: 0661
2 Loc ID: 0662
3 Loc ID: 0000
50 Loc ID: 0000
V S
V S
V S
V S
450.015 Live
448.011 Live
-
-
Copying Activity Every Cycle
DATABASE
LIST TWO
Loc ID: 0661
Loc ID: 0662
Loc ID: 0663
V S
V S
V S
450.015 Live
448.011 Live
-
795X DATABASE
Figure 4: Parameter List Block Organisation
HIGH-SPEED LIST ONE Indicated Volume flow rate Gross Volume flow rate
BLOCK A (Location IDs)
661 662 (Off) (Off)
01 02 03
50
BLOCK B (Location IDs)
0718 0595 1548
01
(Off)
50
02 03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Page 7b.4
HIGH SPEED LIST TWO
BLOCK C (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
(Off)
50
02 03
Prime Dynamic Viscosity Prime Kinematic Viscosity
BLOCK D (Location IDs)
2048 2111 (Off) (Off)
01 02 03
50
BLOCK E (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
(Off)
50
02 03
BLOCK F (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
(Off)
50
02 03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
THE HIGH-SPEED PARAMETER LIST On 795x slaves there are two individual lists 2 for nominating the parameters – labelled as “High-speed List 1” and “High Speed List 2” within the communications area of the menu system. Each list has the capacity for nominating up to 150 parameters, organised into three blocks of 50 parameters. Figure 4 on page7b.4 illustrates the three block structure for both lists. The figure shows that blocks are set-up on an individual basis. Parameters are nominated using their own unique database location identification (ID) number. Each entry in a block has a dedicated menu data page for editing in a location ID. The parameter list is primarily for the 795x slave device to extract data of specific parameters from its’ database during every machine cycle. All extracted data is stored ‘locally’ for faster and more efficient data access. It is then accessible only to a Master device by means of MODBUS ‘read’ command messages. Figure 3 on page 7b.4 illustrates the process. MODBUS ‘read’ command messages must be addressed to either virtual slave ‘2’ or virtual slave ‘3’ through any MODBUS slave configured port. Virtual slave addressing is explained in Chapter 7.
MODBUS Address
Information Available
Virtual Slave ‘2’
High-speed List One
Virtual Slave ‘3’
High-speed List Two
The register map at each virtual slave is initially in a pre-set format but it can be individually re-organised to suit applications on the Master device. There are several basic styles available for selection. Follow the links in Table 1 to get a graphical overview of default register maps for each basic style. You will also get to see how the blocks of a parameter list are linked to a register map.
Table 1: Links to graphical overviews of high-speed lists and register maps Styles
Graphical Representation
Old Style (Legacy) *
See Figure 5 on page 7b.6
Grouped
See Figure 6 on page 7b.7
Ungrouped
See Figure 7 on page 7b.8
* As found in 795x software released before the year 2000
2
These lists are wholly independent of the peer-to-peer lists that are set-up on a 795x MODBUS Master device.
Issue: AB
Page 7b.5
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Figure 5: Default Register Mappings for "Old Style" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped Start Register = 0 2051 - 10000 are unused
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
1
Values 50
10001
Location IDs
00 - 10 d 51 nuse u e r a
10050
20001
20050
1050
Location IDs 11050
Types and Sizes 21050
31001
Status 30050
40001
Values
21001
Types and Sizes
30001
1001 11001
Status 31050
41001
Full Attributes
Full Attributes
40050
22001 32001 42001
Values 2050
Location IDs 12050
Types and Sizes 22050
Status 32050
Full Attributes
41050
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
Block A
HIGH-SPEED LISTS VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
0 2001 200 d 1e 105 unus e r 12001 a
Block B
42050
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS Block D
2051 - 10000 are unused
1
Values 50
10001
Location IDs 20001 30001
0 100 51 - nused u are
10050
Types and Sizes 20050
Status 30050
40001
Block F
Full Attributes
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP) 1001
Values 11001
Location IDs 21001 31001
11050 21050
Status 31050
41001
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
2001 00 - 20 d 051 use 1050 1 re un 12001 a
Types and Sizes
Full Attributes 40050
Page 7b.6
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK D BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP) HSL-2 Grouped Start Register = 0
Block E
22001 32001
Values 2050
Location IDs 12050
Types and Sizes 22050
Status 32050
42001
Full Attributes 41050
42050
BLOCK D PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 6: Default Register Mappings for "Grouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped Start Register = 0
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) 0
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) 50
100
Values
Values 49
150
200
199
Status 499
600
Location IDs 249
350
Full Attributes
Types and Sizes 399
500
Status 549
650
Full Attributes
649
550 700
449
Status 599
Full Attributes
699
749
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
Block A
HIGH-SPEED LISTS VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
299
400
Types and Sizes 349
149
250
Location IDs
Types and Sizes 450
Values 99
Location IDs 300
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP)
Block B
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS Block D
HSL-2 Grouped Start Register = 0
Block E
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'E' S ECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
0
50
Values
450 600
Values 99
200
Location IDs 300
100
Values 49
150
Types and Sizes 349
Status 499
Full Attributes
350 500 650
149
250
Location IDs 199
Location IDs 249
Types and Sizes 399
Status 549
Full Attributes
649
Issue: AB
Block F
400 550 700
299
Types and Sizes 449
Status 599
Full Attributes
699
749
BLOCK D PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
Page 7b.7
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Figure 7: Default Register Mappings for "Ungrouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped Start Register = 0
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
0
250
500
Values
Values 49
50
300
Location IDs
Status 199
200
349
Full Attributes
Types and Sizes 399
400
Status 449
450
Full Attributes
249
650 700
649
Status 699
Full Attributes
499
749
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
Block A
HIGH-SPEED LISTS VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
599
600
Types and Sizes 149
150
Location IDs
350
Types and Sizes
549
550
Location IDs 99
100
Values 299
Block B
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS Block D
HSL-2 Grouped Start Register = 0
Block E
Block F
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER M AP)
BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
0
250
Values
150 200
Values 299
300
Location IDs 100
500
Values 49
50
99
Types and Sizes 149
Status 199
Full Attributes
350 400 450
549
550
Location IDs
Location IDs 349
Types and Sizes 399
Status 449
Full Attributes
249
Page 7b.8
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
600 650 700
599
Types and Sizes 649
Status 699
Full Attributes
499
749
BLOCK D PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F PARAMETER LIST
01 02
01 02
01 02
50
50
50
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
7b.2.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions Follow these instructions to configure and activate high-speed list communications:
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 3 connections is in Chapter 7.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select the menu that is appropriate for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network (2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some localised menu searching is required. Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Menu Data *
Instructions and Comments
Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 P Modbus word order *** Port Modbus mode P MODB slave addr *** P Modbus features P long reg access *** P MODB precision ***
Select the option with “Modbus slave” as the description Select a rate that is agreed for the Master device and all the 795x slaves devices Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network) Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable (wiring) supports “CTS/RTS” Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** Select an option that is compatible with the Master device Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices. Program the base address of this slave Select an option that includes “L1”/“List1” for HSL-1 and “L2”/“List2” for HSL-2 Choose to accept either the single or multiple register MODBUS command format Select a precision option that is compatible with the Master device
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network *** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
3. Program High Speed List ‘1’ (if applicable) (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus slave”> (3b) Select the menu that is appropriate for HSL-1 (3c) Program the configuration parameters for HSL-1, as guided in Menu Data List 2 Menu Data List 2: HSL-1 Configuration Parameters (Part One) Menu Data (as displayed)
Instructions and Comments
List 1 word order
x This selection overrides the serial port setting
List 1 block layout
x Select default register map organisation: “Old Style”, “Grouped” or “Ungrouped” *
L1 grouped start reg
x Program the number of the first register space for the complete register map **
* See pages 7b.6, 7b.7 and 7b.8 for a graphical view of the default register map for each selectable style
(3d) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block A’ (if applicable) Note: This step does not apply when the “Old Style” (legacy) register map layout is chosen in step 3c Table 2 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the existing register map in ‘Block A’. Alongside the descriptors are default settings for every selectable block layout style. 3
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports before establishing the physical connections.
Issue: AB
Page 7b.9
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is unsuitable for the application on the Master device. Table 2: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block A Menu Data (as displayed)
Default Start Registers (“Old Style” mapping)
Default Start Registers (“Grouped” mapping)
Default Start Registers (“Ungrouped” mapping)
L1A vals start reg L1A locs start reg L1A types start reg L1A status start reg
1 10001 20001 30001
0 150 300 450
0 50 100 150
L1A attrs start reg
40001
600
200
Note: Also see Table 3 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3e) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block B’ (if applicable) Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c Table 3 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the present register map of ‘Block B’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable block layout style. Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is unsuitable for the application on the Master device. Table 3: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block B Menu Data * (as displayed)
Default Start Registers (“Old Style” map)
Default Start Registers (“Grouped” map)
Default Start Registers (“Ungrouped” map)
L1B vals start reg
1001
50
250
L1B locs start reg L1B types start reg
11001 21001
200 350
300 350
L1B status start reg L1B attrs start reg
31001 41001
500 650
400 450
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3f) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block C’ (if applicable) Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c Table 4 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the present register map of ‘Block C’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable block layout style. Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is unsuitable for the application on the Master device. Table 4: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block C Menu Data * (as displayed)
Default Start Registers (“Old Style” map)
Default Start Registers (“Grouped” map)
Default Start Registers (“Ungrouped” map)
L1C vals start reg
2001
100
500
L1C locs start reg L1C types start reg L1C status start reg
12001 22001 32001
250 400 550
550 600 650
L1C attrs start reg
42001
700
700
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 3 for the default settings of other HSL-1 Blocks
Page 7b.10
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
(3g) Program the high-speed list with the location ID of each parameter to be made available to the Master Menu Data List 3 lists the descriptors of the menu data pages for programming the ‘Block A’ partition with location IDs of up to 50 parameters. The menu data pages are easily located within the 795x menu system under the <“Block A”> sub-menu. Menu Data List 3 : ‘BLOCK A’ Parameter Entries 1–50 Menu Data (as displayed)
Purpose
DBM list 1A ptr 1 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 1
DBM list 1A ptr 2 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 2
:
:
DBM list1A ptr 50 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 50
* Abbreviation: “ptr” = pointer (a programming term)
The menu data pages for programming entries in ‘Block B’ and ‘Block C’ are easily located within the menu system under the <“Block B”> and <“Block C”> sub-menus. It is good practice to start with ‘Block A’ before progressing to ‘Block B’. Likewise, start with ‘Block B’ before progressing to ‘Block C’. It is not necessary to fully utilise a block before using another. When programming in location identification numbers (IDs), it is very important to use the first available (unused) entry and to not leave gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list. (See Figure 8)
Figure 8: Correct and Incorrect Programmed Parameter Lists
HIGH SPEED LIST '1'
HIGH SPEED LIST '1'
(Programmed Correctly) BLOCK A (Location IDs) "Indicated Volume Rate" "Gross Volume Rate"
661 662 (Off) (Off)
01
BLOCK B (Location IDs)
03
(Off) (Off) (Off)
01
50
(Off)
50
03
0718 0595 1548
01
50
(Off)
02
(Programmed Incorrectly)
02
BLOCK A (Location IDs)
BLOCK C (Location IDs)
02 03
"Indicated Volume Rate" "Gross Volume Rate"
(Off) = Unused Entry
661 (Off) 662 (Off)
01
BLOCK B (Location IDs)
01
03
50
(Off)
50
03
50
(Off)
02
BLOCK C (Location IDs)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
0718 (Off) 0595
01 02
02 03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Programming in a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded with a “** ERROR **” message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
4. Program High Speed List ‘2’ (if it is to be used ) Repeat steps 3a to 3g but this time it is for configuring HSL-2.
(End of instructions)
Issue: AB
Page 7b.11
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
GUIDED EXAMPLE
7b.2.3 Guided Example: Accessing a HSL over a MODBUS network This section is a practical guide to collecting parameter data from a 795x MODBUS Slave through the high-speed list feature. For this guided example, High-speed List ‘1’ (HSL-1) has been used.
What to do here:
1. Review the 795x slave configuration Menu Data List 4 and Menu Data List 5, both on page 7b.13, show configuration details for this guided example. These checklists should be used in conjunction with the “Instructions” section on page 7b.9. MODBUS feature settings for the serial port have been chosen especially to obtain the MODBUS message sequences that are shown later. For a full list of configuration parameters for serial communications, please refer to the “Instructions” section on page 7b.9. For the purpose of this guided example, instructions assume that the Master device is already set-up.
2. Review the MODBUS message sequences MODBUS message sequences aim to show the best approach to accessing high-speed list parameter data through a MODBUS register map at a virtual slave address. For this guided example, the “Old Style” default register map has been used. Every example features an objective, an action and a result… Objective(s) For an example, the objective could be to read a value from two listed parameters. Action(s) Actions consist of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device. Expected replies from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values. Table 5 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the message. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. There may be a reference to additional information.
3. Experiment Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements
Table 5 : Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences Abbreviation
Meaning
Slv.
Virtual slave address. It is 0x03 for this guided example.
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt
Number of registers requested
Reg. ID
MOBUS register number
DC
Page 7b.12
Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
The Data
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
GUIDED EXAMPLE
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Menu Data List 4: HSL-1 Set-up for Guided Example Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Comment
List 1 word order List 1 block layout L1 grouped start reg DBM list 1A ptr 1 DBM list 1A ptr 2 DBM list 1A ptr 3 DBM list 1B ptr 1 DBM list 1B ptr 2 DBM list 1B ptr 3 DBM list 1B ptr 4 DBM list 1B ptr 5 DBM list 1C ptr 1
“Modbus default” “Old-style” 0 0661 0662 0000 0773 0772 0779 0778 0000 0000
The register map for this example is shown in Figure 9. ID is for Indicated Volume flow rate ID is for Gross Volume flow rate ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block A ID is for integer part of the Indicate Volume flow total ID is for fractional part of the Indicate Volume total ID is for integer part of the Gross Volume flow total ID is for fractional part of the Gross Volume flow total ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block B ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block C
Notes: 1. Metering totals are stored in the database in two parts. There is one database location for the integer part and one database location for the fractional part. They are usually not displayed within the menu system. When communicating totals over MODBUS, transmit both the integer and fractional values. All totals displayed within the menu system are also database locations. However, they are not suitable for transmission. 2. Abbreviations: “L1” = ‘High-speed List 1’, “reg” = register, “DBM” = Database Manager, “ptr” = pointer 3.
Location identification numbers (IDs) and descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later software release
Menu Data List 5: Serial Port Set-up for Guided Example Menu Data *
Value/Option
Comms port owner P Modbus word order Port Modbus mode P MODB slave addr P Modbus features P long reg access P MODB precision
“Modbus slave” Modbus default “RTU” 1 “Alarm+List1+List2” “Single register” “Single”
Comments
x x x x
This is the base slave address Enables virtual slaves 1, 2 and 3 Request 1 register per parameter Require 32-bit floating-point values
* Location descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later software release
Figure 9: Register Map for Guided Example 1 HIGH-SPEED LISTS
HIGH-SPEED LIST HSL BLOCKS
HSL ONE Block A
HSL TWO
Block C
HSL-1 BLOCK A
HSL 1 BLOCK B
HSL 1 BLOCK C
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS (REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (REGISTER MAP)
1
Values 50
10001
Location IDs 20001 30001 40001
10050
Types and Sizes 20050
Status 30050
Full Attributes 40050
Issue: AB
Block B
1001 00 d - 10 51 nuse u e r 11001 a 21001 31001 41001
Values Location IDs
2001 00 - 20 d 051 use 1050 1 re un 12001 a 11050
Types and Sizes 21050
Status 31050
Full Attributes 41050
22001 32001 42001
Values 2050
Location IDs 12050
Types and Sizes 22050
Status 32050
Full Attributes 42050
Page 7b.13
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
GUIDED EXAMPLE
MODBUS MESSAGE SEQUENCES: 4 All transmit and receive sequences , shown here, demonstrate use of default word ordering, single precision (32-bit) data representation and ‘single register’ formatted commands. Transmitted messages are addressed to the second virtual slave (base slave address + 2) for access to the “Old style” default register map of High-speed List 1. (1a)
Objective: Read values from all of the parameters listed in High-speed List One (HSL-1) Action 1 of 3: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’) 3 Values expected in the reply are 3600.125 and 3546.123, both in base units of m /hour. Transmit Meaning
03
03
00
01
00
02
94
29
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive Meaning
03
03
08
45
61
02
00
45
5D
A1
F8
D7
88
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Data
Chk
sum
Result: x 45610200 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3600.125 (in base units of m3/hour) x 455DA1F8 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3546.123 m3/hour Note: When using the single register mode, the number of registers to be read is the same as the number of parameters to be read from the associated block. This happens to be two for ‘Block A’ in this example.
Action 2 of 3: Read four registers starting from MODBUS register 1001 (Values Section, ‘Block B’) Transmit Meaning
03
03
03
E9
00
04
94
5B
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk.
sum
Receive Meaning
03
03
10
46
18
3C
00
3F
19
0A
B1
46
15
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Receive Meaning
F4
00
3E
E3
40
94
24
24
Data
…
The
Data
…
…
Chk.
Sum
Result: 1st. Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction) x 46183C00 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9743 (in base units of m3/hour) x 3F190AB1 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.59781936 (in base units of m3/hour) nd 2 . Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction) 3 x 4615F400 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9597 (in base units of m /hour) x 3EE34094 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.44385207 (in base units of m3/hour)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for volume categorised data.
Action 3 of 3: Read 1 register starting from MODBUS register 2001 (Values Section, ‘Block C’) Transmit Meaning
03
03
07
D1
00
01
D4
A5
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive Meaning
03
83
02
61
31
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
Chk
sum
Result: Response indicates that there are no parameters listed in ‘Block C’ 4
The MODBUS message sequences were all tested using the direct communication feature of Mobrey’s free-of-charge “FC-Config” software utility. You can find it on the Mobrey web site at www.Mobrey.com
Page 7b.14
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS (1b)
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Objective: Write new fixed values to the two known parameters listed under ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One Block A Entry 1
Decimal Value (Before Update)
Decimal Value (After Update)
Block A Entry 2
Decimal Value (Before Update)
Decimal Value (After Update)
IV rate
0
3664
GV rate
0
3712
Abbreviations: “IV” = Indicated Volume, “GV” = Gross Volume
Action 1 of 1: Write values to two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’) x 45650000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3664 x 45680000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3712 Transmit
03
10
00
01
00
02
08
45
65
00
00
45
68
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
…
The
Data
…
The
Transmit
00
4C
7E
Meaning
Data
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
10
00
01
00
02
11
EA
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Result: x Indicated Volume and Gross Volume rates are updated with new fixed values. Notes: 3 x The new parameter values are expected by the slave device to be in base measurement units of m /hour. To find out the base units for other parameter categories, turn to Chapter 9.
(2a)
Objective: Read the location IDs of the first three ‘entry’ configuration parameters of Block B Block A Entry 1
Loc. ID
Block A Entry 2
Loc. ID
Block A Entry 3
Loc. ID
DBM list 1B ptr 1
2459
DBM list 1B ptr 2
2460
DBM list 1B ptr 3
2461
Action 1 of 1: Read three registers starting from MODBUS register 11001 (Loc. IDs Section, ‘Block B’) Transmit
03
03
2A
F9
00
03
DC
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
06
09
9B
09
9C
09
9D
59
1B
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
data
…
The
Data
…
Chk
sum
Result: x 099B is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2459 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 1”> x 099C is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 2”> x 099D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 3”> Note: 2AF9 (Reg. ID) is the hexadecimal representation for 11001
Issue: AB
Page 7b.15
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
GUIDED EXAMPLE (2b)
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Objective: Add an entry to ‘High-speed List 1’ via the parameter list of Block C Action 1 of 1: Write the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”> into the database location of <”DBM list1C ptr 1”> (ID: 2509) x 09CC is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2508 – the MODBUS address for <”DBM list1C ptr 1”> x 029D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 0669 – the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”> Transmit
01
10
09
CC
00
01
02
02
9D
EE
55
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
Chk
Sum
Receive
01
10
09
CC
00
01
C2
6A
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Note: x At present, the remote manipulation of a parameter list is achieved through the register map for the 795x database (at the base slave address). See Chapter 7 for further examples of accessing the database.
(3a)
Objective: Read data type and size of a value from all parameters listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 20001 (Types Section, ‘Block A’) Transmit
03
03
4E
21
00
02
82
CB
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
04
07
04
07
04
9A
B5
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
…
Chk
Sum
Result: x 0704: “07” = 32-bit floating-point data type, “04” = 4 bytes for representing the value Note: x See Table 7 on page 7b.17 when interpreting other codes for the data type and size
(4a)
Objective: Read value status from each parameter listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 30001 (Status Section, ‘Block A’) Transmit
03
03
75
31
00
02
8E
2A
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
04
00
01
00
00
88
33
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
…
…
Chk
Sum
Result: There are four bytes of parameter data returned: 0x0001 and 0x0002 x x
0x0001 = “Set” value status 0x0000 = “Live” value status
Note: For the interpretation of other codes, refer to Table 6 on page 7b.17.
Page 7b.16
Issue: AB
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Table 6: Codes for all returned states Value *
State Return
0x0000
x
Live
0x0001
x
Set
0x0002
x
Fail
0x0003
x
Fallback
0x00FF
x
No state
* All values in this table are hexadecimal numbers
Table 7: Interpreting Data from Type and Size Requests Database Location Type x x x x x x x x x x x x
Character Unsigned 8-bit integer Unsigned 16-bit integer Signed 16-bit integer Unsigned 32-bit integer Signed 32-bit integer 32-bit floating-point number 64-bit floating-point number Character String Multiple-choice (List) Option Location pointer Time and date
Size (Bytes) *
Type (Code)
2 2 2 2 4 4 4 8 22 2 2 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
* All values in this column are decimal numbers
Issue: AB
Page 7b.17
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Software Version 2510, Issue 4.00 (or higher)
WONDERWARE COMPATIBILITY NOTES 7b.3
Using Wonderware’s Modbus I/O Server With High-Speed Lists Background The MODBUS specification glances over the concept of different address ranges containing different data types (and only those types in that range), and therefore using different MODBUS command numbers to manipulate the data. The specification goes on to say that ‘It is perfectly acceptable, and very common, to regard all four tables as overlaying one another, if this is the most natural interpretation on the target machine in question’. While individual manufacturers have mostly banded their data somewhat, but in smaller bands that do not fit this ‘four-table’ approach, Wonderware’s software has stuck to the separate address range method rigidly. For some individual manufacturers it has knowledge of, it has allowed them to specify their own arrangements, and will honour them; without that, you must use absolute addressing, ® which relies on the different command numbers for different ranges. Because Solartron flow computers only support commands 3 and 16 covering the whole range of 0 – 65535, absolute addressing cannot be used; up until now, none of the other manufacturers’ implementations could be used either.
Now With the flexibility of the new high-speed lists, it is now possible to get most important data by simulating one of the other manufacturers. In the future, Wonderware will support Mobrey’s 795x Series directly. For now, here is how you can read floating-point data types and long integers (totals in their most accurate representation) using Wonderware:
1. Configure the communications parameters on the 795x
2. Configure Wonderware’s Modbus I/O server: (2a) Configure the “Topic Definition” - choose a name such as “Solar2510L1” (2b) Select the MODBUS slave address - the base address + 2 (for high-speed list 1) (2c) Select “Omni” as the ‘Slave device type” – Omni’s arrangement is the only one currently which can be used with the 795x series (2d) Repeat for 2a – 2c for ‘High-speed List 2’ (if applicable) You should now be able to use the I/O server via, for example, In Touch.
Page 7b.18
Issue: AB
16-BIT COMMUNICATIONS (GOULD LIST) (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM C)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C 16-bit Communications (Gould List) 7C.1 Overview Chapter 7C is a guide to the software support for 16-bit only MODBUS protocol communications, which utilises the Gould List in this 795x menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/
16-bits (Word)
=
1 Byte
1 Byte
=
8 bits
8 bits
Figure 1: 16-bits Note: For MODBUS network topologies and terminal connections, refer to main Chapter 7.
7C.1.1
Groundwork On the 795x Flow Computer, integer and floating-point values of parameters (locations) are represented by 16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits, depending on the data type of the value – see Table 1 and Figure 2 (below). Note: Data representation theory is outside the scope of this guide – refer to a data communications book.
32-bits (2 Words)
=
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
64-bits (4 Words)
=
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
16-bits (Word)
Figure 2: 32-bits and 64-bits
16-bit communications is unsuitable for accessing a value that is a character string (11x16-bits) or a value that is a time and date (8x16-bits) – they are therefore not included in Table 1 or this guide. Table 1: 795x Data types Data Type
Size
Unsigned 8-bit integer
16-bits
x
Unsigned 16-bit integer
16-bits
x
Signed 16-bit integer
16-bits
x
x
Unsigned 32-bit integer
32-bits
x
Signed 32-bit integer
32-bits
x
32-bit floating point number *
32-bits
x
64-bit floating point number *
64-bits
x
Multiple-choice (List) Option
16-bits
Location pointer
16-bits
x
* Floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on serial port option.
1
2
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between 795x Flow Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer” communications feature.
16 binary bits e.g. 01010101 01010101
Page 7C.2
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.2
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
795x 16-bit communication features 795x 16-bit communications allows a MODBUS Master to: x
read a 16-bit value – the full value – from a 16-bit parameter (location) – Multiple Register Access
x
read a 16-bit value from any 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Mult. Reg. Access
x
read a full value from a 32-bit of 64-bit parameter (location) – Single Register Access
x
3 write a 16-bit value – the full value – to a 16-bit parameter (location) – Multiple Register Access
x
write a 16-bit value to any 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Mult. Reg. Access
x
write a full value to a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Single Register Access
The ‘16-bit value’ may be scaled (x10, x100 or x1000) before transmission to the MODBUS Master and descaled (y10, y100 or y1000) before being saved to an application parameter (location). This optional feature is explained in Section 7C.1.9. In addition, serial port parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications – see Section 7C.1.13 for details of their effect.
7C.1.3
16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access Figure 3 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit segments. When using Multiple Register Access, each segment is a Gould Register that can be individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List.
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bit Parameter (Database Location)
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
Gould Register
Gould Register
64-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 3: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access It follows then that the Gould Register access for a 32-bit (or 64-bit) parameter is slightly different to accessing a 16-bit parameter. In Figure 4, a 16-bit value is written, as a full value, to the only 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 16-bit parameter. Similarly, a whole value can be read from the same Gould Register.
MODBUS Master
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
Application
16-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Figure 4: Accessing the full value of a 16-bit parameter in one step 3
The 795x will prevent writing to parameters (locations) dedicated to incremental totals, such as the Corrected Volume flow total.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.3
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
In Figure 5, a 16-bit value is read from the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 32-bit parameter. A further message (request) is required to read to the second 16-bit segment (Gould Register). With values from both segments retrieved, the full value can be assembled by the MODBUS Master. The same principle applies to 64-bit parameters, except there are four of the 16-bit segments. Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 795x Gould List is set-up appropriately. MODBUS Master
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value (Read first 16-bit segment)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Application
MODBUS Master
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value (Read final 16-bit segment)
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
Gould Register
Gould Register
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Application
Figure 5: Accessing a full value of a 32-bit parameter in two steps
7C.1.4
16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access Figure 6 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit segments. When using Single Register Access, all 16-bit segments – the full value – equate to one Gould Register that can be individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List. Therefore, reading a Gould Register will retrieve the full value, irrespective of the parameter data type. Similarly, a full value can be written to the Gould Register. Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 795x Gould List is set-up appropriately.
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bit Parameter (Database Location)
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
16-bits (1 Word)
32-bit Parameter (Database Location)
16-bits (1 Word) Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word)
64-bit Parameter (Database Location)
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 6: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access
Page 7C.4
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.5
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List On the 795x Flow Computer, the Gould List comprises menu entries for nominating up to 50 Gould Registers. Each list entry requires user-entered details, which include: x x x x
a user-nominated address for the Gould Register (e.g. 40001) the unique 4-digit location identification number of the associated parameter (e.g. Loc ID: 0144) Word Offset – 0, 1, 2 or 3 – for selecting a 16-bit segment of the parameter value (if applicable) Scaling factor – x10, x100, x1000 or none – for scaling/de-scaling the 16-bit data being exchanged
The 795x Gould List can be set-up for Multiple Register Access or Single Register (or a mixture if using more than one serial port.) Figure 7 shows an example 795x Gould List set-up for Multiple Register Access. There are 3 entries populated with user-entered details. Gould List entries 1 and 2 are set-up for accessing the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40001) and final 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40002) of a 32-bit parameter (location), perhaps a flow rate. Since the full value of parameter 0144 is represented in 32-bits, the Word Offset option must be used to select which 16-bit segment is associated with the nominated Gould Register address. Word Offset 0 selects first 16-bit segment. Word Offset 1 selects the final 16-bit segment. (Word Offset 2 and 3 are applicable only for a 64-bit parameter.) Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing a 16-bit parameter, but there is a deliberate mistake. The Word Offset is 1, which is incorrect since there is no second 16-bit segment in a 16-bit parameter. Likewise, Word Offsets 2 and 3 would also be incorrect as there are no third and fourth segments. To correct the error, Word Offset 0 must be selected. Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory default settings. Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 795x Gould List – do not skip entries in the 795x Gould List. GOULD LIST
1
DATABASE
Gould Reg:
40001
Location ID:
0144
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
No scaling
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
Location ID: 0144
DATABASE
GOULD LIST
2
Gould Reg:
40002
Location ID:
0144
Word Offset:
1
Scaling: 3
459.21 32-bit
No scaling
Gould Reg:
50001
Location ID:
1429
Word Offset:
1
Scaling:
Value Data Size
No scaling
Location ID: 1429 Value Data Size
50 Gould Reg:
0
Location ID:
Off
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
0 16-bit
No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 7: 795x Gould List (Multiple Register Access)
(May 2003)
Page 7C.5
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Figure 8 shows an example 795x Gould List set-up for Single Register Access. Again, there are 3 entries populated with user-entered details. Gould List entry 1 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40001. Since the full value of parameter 0144 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0. Gould List entry 2 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40002. Again, since the full value of parameter 0167 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0. Since Gould Register 40001 and 40002 have addresses in sequence and are in consecutive entries, they can both be read at the same time. Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing the full value – a single 16-bit segment – of Gould Register 50001. Again, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0. Gould Register 40002 and 50001 are in consecutive entries but the addresses are not in sequence; they cannot both be read at the same time. Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory defaults. Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 795x Gould List – do not skip entries in the 795x Gould List.
GOULD LIST
1
DATABASE
Gould Reg:
40001
Location ID:
0144
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
No scaling
Location ID: 0144 Value
459.21
Data Size
32-bit
795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
DATABASE
GOULD LIST
2
Gould Reg:
40002
Location ID:
0167
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
No scaling
Location ID: 0167 Value
3
Data Size
Gould Reg:
50001
Location ID:
1429
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
2359.54 32-bit
No scaling Location ID: 1429 Value
50 Gould Reg:
Data Size
Location ID:
Off
Word Offset:
0
Scaling:
0
0 16-bit
No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 8: 795x Gould List (Single Register Access)
Page 7C.6
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.6
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List: Gould Register Addressing The address of a Gould Register can be edited to be any number in the range 0 to 65535 (0x0000 to 0xFFFF), as long as it is unique in the Gould List. Attempts to enter an address outside this range will be responded to with an “** ERROR **” message, onscreen for a few seconds, and the original setting is then restored. When accessing more than one Gould Register at a time, the user-entered addresses must be in sequence (e.g. 1300, 1301, etc) and in consecutive entries in the Gould List. When accessing one Gould Register at a time, the addresses of consecutive entries in the Gould List do not have to be in sequence (e.g. 1300, 1400, etc.)
7C.1.7
Gould List: Parameters (Locations) To find the unique identification number of a parameter (location), navigate to the parameter screen and press the A-key to display the number.
7C.1.8
Gould List: Word Offset Word Offset settings in the Gould List are only applicable when using Multiple Register Access (rather than using Single Register Access). With Multiple Register Access, each Gould Register equates to a 16-bit segment of data. Therefore, you select the segment that will equate to the register. Word Offset 0 The Gould Register is mapped to the only 16-bit segment of a 16-bit parameter value or it is mapped to the first 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value. Word Offset 1 The Gould Register is mapped to the second 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value. Word Offset 2 The Gould Register is mapped to the third 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value. Word Offset 3 The Gould Register is mapped to the fourth 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value. Examples can be found in Section 7C.3. Note: With Single Register Access, each Gould Register equates to the whole value (all 16-bit segments).
7C.1.9
Gould List: Scaling Factor The scaling factor, 10, 100 or 1000, is effective only when accessing floating-point values. If selected for a Gould Register, the factor is applied, therefore converting it into a whole number (integer) before or transmitted or vice versa if being saved. If no scaling factor is to be applied, select “No Scaling” – this is the factory default for each Gould List entry. The purpose of this feature is for systems that cannot handle float conversions – they may ask for temperature x 100 (as an integer). You cannot get scaled values as a floating-point value. Practical examples can be found in Section 7C.3.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.7
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.1.10 MODBUS Message Exchanges The MODBUS Master can access more than one Gould Registers in one request. To access the registers, it must transmit a read or write MODBUS protocol message addressed to the 795x MODBUS slave. The slave will then reply with a MODBUS protocol message. Note: Write messages can be broadcast to all 795x MODBUS slaves with a MODBUS slave address of 0. Gould registers can be accessed through any serial port configured to be a MODBUS slave and the Gould List access is enabled by the port MODBUS feature parameter. (Full configuration details are in Section 7C.2.)
7C.1.11 Read Message Format (Single or Multiple Gould Register Access) Figure 9 shows the MODBUS function 03 command format. Practical examples, showing other Read messages and responses, can found in Section 7C.3. Slave Address
Function
G. Reg. (H.O.)
G. Reg. (L.O.)
# Of Reg. (H.O.)
# Of Reg. (L.O.)
EC
LRC
06
03
9C
41
00
02
X
X
Figure 9: MODBUS message for reading from Gould Registers 40001 and 40002 Slave Address – On the 795x, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default) Function – 03 (0x03) is the function code for MODBUS read messages. G. Reg. – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal) # of Reg. – Specify number of Gould Registers to be read, e.g. 0002 (Decimal and Hexadecimal) EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
7C.1.12 Write Message Format (Single or Multiple Gould Register Access) Figure 10 shows the MODBUS function 16 command format. Practical examples, showing other Write messages and responses, can found in Section 7C.3.
Slave Add.
Funct.
G. Reg. (H.O.)
G. Reg. (L.O.)
06
10
9C
41
Quantity
00
02
Byte Count 04
16-bit data
(H.O.)
(L.O.)
16-bit data
(H.O.)
(L.O.)
EC
LRC
X
X
Figure 10: MODBUS message for writing to Gould Registers 40001 and 40002 Slave Address – On the 795x, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default) Function – 16 (0x10) is the function code for MODBUS write messages. Gould Register – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal) Quantity – Specify number of Gould Registers to be write to, e.g. 2 for 40001 (0x9C41) and 40002 (0x9C42) Byte Count – Specify number of bytes of data e.g. 0x02 for a 16-bit value, 0x04 for two 16-bit values, etc. 16-bit data – Up to fifty 16-bit IEEE values, dependent on Quantity field EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
Page 7C.8
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.1.13 Serial port parameters (locations) Each serial port has parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications.
Default Order
Word Swap
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
42 C2
3F 0D
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
3F 0D
42 C2
DOUBLE PRECISION
Default Order
Word Swap
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
WORD '3' (16 Bits)
WORD '4' (16 Bits)
40 58
47 E1
9B 90
EA 9E
WORD '4' (16 Bits)
WORD '3' (16 Bits)
WORD '2' (16 Bits)
WORD '1' (16 Bits)
EA 9E
9B 90
47 E1
40 58
Figure 11: Word Ordering Examples
(May 2003)
Page 7C.9
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions Follow these instructions to configure and activate 16-bit communications on the 795x Flow Computer: 1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers and MODBUS Maste device are already interconnected to form a 4 MODBUS network. (Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring is in the main Chapter 7.) 2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the MODBUS network. (2c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 2. (Some localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.) 3. Configure entries in the Gould List (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”MODBus slave”> (3b) Select this menu: <“Gould list”> (3c) Configure each list entry, as guided in Table 3. Start with configuring Entry 1, then configure Entry 2, and so forth. Avoid skipping an entry, since the list is terminated by a location ID of 0. (End of instructions) The MODBUS Master can read and write to the Gould Registers.
4
To avoid the risk of flow computer restarts, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports before establishing the physical connections.
Page 7C.10
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Table 2: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Parameter * (Database Location) Comms port owner Port Baud rate Port char format Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 *** Port Modbus mode P Modbus word order
Instructions and Comments Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus slave”.
Factory Default Setting “MODBUS slave”
Select a rate that will be the same for the MODBUS Master device and all 795x MODBUS slave devices. Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network). If unsure, keep the factory default.
“19200” “8 bits none 1 stop”
Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable supports “CTS/RTS”. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
“None”
Select signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
“RS 232”
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices. (If unsure, keep the factory default.) Select an option that is compatible with the Master device. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
P MODB slave add
Edit the Base Slave Address of this slave.
P Modbus features
Select the multiple-choice option that includes “Gou“ (Gould)
P long reg access
Choose single or multiple Gould Register access.
“RTU” “Modbus default” 1 “None” “Multiple registers”
P MODB total format
Select how total values are to be transmitted – either 32-bit integers or as a single/double-precision floating-point value.
“32-bit integer”
P MODB precision
Select the accuracy of all floating-point values for this serial port: single-precision (32-bits) or double-precision (64-bits).
“Single”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port. ** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”. *** Parameter is not applicable to Serial Port One since it is for RS-232 devices only. Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
Table 3: Gould List Entry Parameters (Locations) Parameter * (Database Location) List1 Gould reg List1 mapped loc **
Instructions and Comments Enter a numeric address for the Gould Register e.g. 40001. Enter the unique identification number (Loc ID) of the parameter (location) to be mapped to the Gould Register.
List1 Word Offset
If using multiple register access and mapped parameter has a 32-bit/64-bit value, select the 16-bit segment of the value to be accessed.
List1 scale factor
If the 16-bit data is a floating-point number, it can be scaled into an integer (x10, x100 or x1000) just before transmission to the MODBUS Master. Similarly, it can be de-scaled before saving it.
Factory Default Setting 0 Off “Word Offset 0”
“No scaling”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the list entry. ** Entering a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded to with a “** ERROR **” message appearing briefly, and the original setting is then restored. Abbreviation used: “reg” = register, “loc” = location
(May 2003)
Page 7C.11
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3 Guided Examples This section is a practical guide to accessing Gould Registers of a 795x MODBUS Slave through the Gould List feature. What to do here: 1.
Ensure that the 795x Flow Computer is suitably configured as guided in Section 7C.2.
2.
Follow examples from Table 4 or Table 5. In the examples, MODBUS message sequences aim to show the how to read from Gould Registers and write to Gould Registers. Every example features an objective, an action and a result Objective(s) For an example, the objective could be to read a 16-bit parameter value. Action(s) Actions consist of one or more MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device. Expected responses from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values. Table 6 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to distinguish the important elements of the message. Result This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. Note: Values are communicated in base units, which may not be the same as the displayed units – see Table 7.
3.
Experiment Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements.
Table 4 : Summary of examples (reading from Gould Registers) Example Number
Totals format
Precision
Word Order
Register Access
Scaling
Access Beyond Value
Consecutive Registers
Page
1
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
14
2
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
No
15
3
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
Yes
Yes
16
4
X
Single
Default
Multiple
x100
No
Yes
17
5
X
Single
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
18
6
X
Double
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
19
7
X
Double
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
20
8
Integer
Single
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
21
9
Integer
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
22
10
Fl. point
Double
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
23
Table 5: Summary of examples (writing to Grould Registers) Example Number
Totals format
Precision
Word Order
Register Access
Scaling
Access Beyond Value
Consecutive Registers
Page
1
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
24
2
X
Single
Default
Multiple
None
No
Yes
25
3
X
Single
Default
Single
None
No
Yes
26
4
X
Single
Default
Multiple
x100
No
Yes
27
5
X
Single
Default
Single
x100
No
Yes
28
Page 7C.12
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Table 6: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Response Sequences Abbreviation Slv.
Meaning Base Slave Address +5. It is 0x06 for the examples.
Err.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn.
Function code. E.g. 03 = Read Gould Register(s)
Reg. Cnt
Quantity of Gould Registers
Reg. ID
Gould Register number
D.C.
Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
Data
Data byte
EC & LRC
Calculated checksum, which is two bytes at the end
Table 7: Base units of measurement Category
(May 2003)
Base units
Temperature
Deg. C
Pressure
bar abs
Differential pressure
mbar
Density
kg/m
Frequency
Ps
3
Fraction
Time
seconds
Flow factor
pulse/m
Volume total
m
Base volume total
std m
3
3
Mass Total
kg
Energy Total
MJ
3
Mass rate
g/min
Volume rate
m3/hour
Energy rate
MJ/hour
Energy value (mass)
MJ/kg
Energy value (volume)
MJ/m3
Base volume rate
Std m3/hour
Length
m
Dynamic viscosity
cP
Absolute zero
Deg.C
Velocity
m/s
Orifice Coeffient
PPM/Deg.C
Page 7C.13
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.1
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 1 Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves reading two Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to get the two lots of 16-bit data. Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 D.C.
42 Data
0C Data
00 Data
00 Data
58 EC
88 LRC
Result x 420C0000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 420C is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300 and 0000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301
Page 7C.14
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.2
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 2 Note: This is an error response example, which is a variation of Example 1. Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers No
This is similar to example 1, except Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive entries in the Gould List. Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 795x Flow Computer.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Multiple Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 40001 = 0144 (Corrected volume flow rate) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
83 Fn.
02 D.C.
71 Chk
30 sum
Result x An error reponse (code 83) is given since Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.15
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.3
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 3 Note: This is an error response example, which is a variation of Example 1. Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value Yes
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This is similar to Example 1, except there is an attempt to read beyond Gould Register 1300 and 1301 by using the Word Offset 2 option and Word Offset 3 option. Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 795x Flow Computer, since the parameter does not have a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 2” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 3” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response
06
83
02
71
30
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
EC
LRC
Result x
Page 7C.16
An error response (code 83) is given since parameter does not have a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.4
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 4 Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling Yes
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example, which is a variation of Example 1, involves reading scaled (x100) values from two Gould Registers 1300 and 1301.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “Int (value x 100)”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “Int (value x 100)”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
02
85
74
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 D.C.
00 Data
00 Data
0D Data
AC Data
88 EC
1E LRC
Result x 00000DAC is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3500.0 (in base units of qC)
(May 2003)
Page 7C.17
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.5
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 5 Objectives: x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666), a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value.
x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666) and Corrected Volume Rate (loc. ID: 0144), which both have 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point values. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly, and unlike previous examples, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get the full value (all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves: x Reading the whole temperature value from a single Gould Register – Action 1 x Reading whole values of temperature and flow rate from two consecutive Gould Registers – Action 2 Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, single-precision. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
19 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
54 EC
B6 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 DC
42 Data
0C Data
00 Data
00 Data
58 EC
88 LRC
Result x The data, 420C0000, is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35) x 0000 is the final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0) Action 2 Read Gould Registers 1305 and 1306 Transmit
06
03
05
19
00
02
54
B6
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
04 DC
42 Data
0C Data
00 Data
00 Data
42 Data
20 Data
00 Data
00 Data
D3 EC
F8 LRC
Result x The data, 420C0000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part. 35); the 0000 that follows final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0) x The data, 42200000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour) x 4220 is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1306; the 0000 is the other segment
Page 7C.18
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.6
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 6 Objective: Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) which has a 64-bit (double-precision) floatingpoint value. Totals format X
Precision Double
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Scaling None
Access Beyond Value No
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves reading four Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to get four lots of 16-bit data. Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access and doubleprecision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1302 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 2” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 4:
= 1303 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 3” = “No scaling”
Action Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 Transmit
06
03
05
14
00
04
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 D.C.
40 Data
41 Data
80 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
EC
LRC
Result x 404180000000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 4041 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300, 8000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301, and so forth.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.19
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.7
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 7 Objectives: x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666), a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
x
Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666) and Corrected Volume Rate (loc. ID: 0144), which both have 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point values. Totals format X
Precision Double
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly for this example, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all four 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves: x Reading the whole temperature value from one Gould Register – Action 1 x Reading whole values of temperature and flow rate from two consecutive Gould Registers – Action 2 Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, double-precision. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
19 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
54 EC
B6 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 DC
40 Data
41 Data
80 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
C5 EC
57 LRC
Result x 4041 8000 0000 0000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x The first 8 bytes of data, 4041 8000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35) x The last 8 bytes of data, 0000 0000, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0) Action 2: Read Gould Registers 1305 and 1306 Transmit
06
03
05
19
00
02
14
B7
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
10 DC
40 Data
41 Data
80 Data
00 Data
00 Data
Response Meaning
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
60 EC
99 LRC
00 Data
00 Data
00 Data
40 Data
44 Data
Result x 4041 8000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC) x 4042 0000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour)
Page 7C.20
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.8
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Gould List Read Access: Example 8 Objectives: x
Read Indicated Volume total in 32-bit integer format. Totals format Integer
Word Order Default
Precision X
Register Access Multiple
Scaling None
Access Beyond Value No
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly for this example, Multiple Register Access is used – more than one Gould Register is required to get a full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is required. This example involves reading two whole integer values, requiring four Gould Registers. Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1 and Multiple Register Access. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1400 = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) * = “Word Offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1401 = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) * = “Word Offset 1” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1402 = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) * = “Word Offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 4:
= 1403 = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) * = “Word Offset 1” = “No scaling”
* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory. Action 1: Read Gould Registers 1400 - 1403 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
78 ID
00 Reg.
04 Cnt.
C5 EC
6B LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
10 DC
45 Data
09 Data
A0 Data
00 Data
3F Data
7D Data
0B Data
5C Data
51 EC
09 LRC
Result x x x x
3 4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m ) The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0) 3 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m ) The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for volumetric values.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.21
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.9
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Gould List Read Access: Example 9 Objectives: x
Read Indicated Volume total in 32-bit integer format. Totals format Integer
Word Order Default
Precision X
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves reading two whole integer values from two Gould Registers. Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1 and Single Register Access. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1400 = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) * = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1401 = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) * = “No scaling”
* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory. Action 1: Read whole value from Gould Registers 1400 and 1401 Transmit Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
78 ID
00 Reg.
02 Cnt.
45 EC
69 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 DC
45 Data
09 Data
A0 Data
00 Data
3F Data
7D Data
0B Data
5C Data
51 EC
09 LRC
Result x x x x
4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m3) The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0) 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m3) The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value) read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for the value.
Page 7C.22
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.10 Gould List Read Access: Example 10 Objectives: x
Read Indicated Volume total (Loc. ID: 0167) as a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value. Totals format Fl. Point
Precision Double
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Scaling None
Access Beyond Value No
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all four 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves reading the whole double-precision value from one Gould Register. Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, double-precision. Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
05 Reg.
78 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
05 EC
68 LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
03 Fn.
08 DC
40 Data
A7 Data
4F Data
14 Data
44 Data
35 Data
79 Data
DD Data
84 EC
52 LRC
Result x x x
3
40A7 4F14 4435 79DD is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2983.54 (in base units of m ) The first 8 bytes of data, 40A7 4F14, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2983) The last 8 bytes of data, 4435 79DD, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value) read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the fractional part to 8 decimal places)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display format for the value.
(May 2003)
Page 7C.23
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.11 Gould List Write Access: Example 1 Objective: Write 35.5 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) floatingpoint value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves writing to two consecutive Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to write two separate 16-bit values (35 and 5). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Write “35” (420E, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1300. Write “5” (0000, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1301 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
02
04
42
0E
00
00
A3
CF
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
00 Reg.
02 Cnt.
00 EC
B7 LRC
Result x
Page 7C.24
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.12 Gould List Write Access: Example 2 Objectives: 1. Write 50.2 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. 3 2. Write 3600.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This example involves writing to four consecutive Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to write four 16-bit values (50, 2, 3600 and 0). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0666 (Meter temperature) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 3:
= 1302 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 0” = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 4:
= 1303 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Action Write “50” (4248 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300 and “2” (CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301 Write “360” (43B4 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1302 and “0” (0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1303 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
04
08
42
48
CC
CD
43
B4
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
00 Reg.
04 Cnt.
80 EC
B5 LRC
Transmit
00
00
E9
1E
Meaning
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
Result x
(May 2003)
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 4 (0x04) indicate success.
Page 7C.25
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.13 Gould List Write Access: Example 3 Objectives: 1. Write 50.2 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. 3 2. Write 3600.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling None
Consecutive Registers Yes
This is a variation of Example 2. Importantly, Single Register Access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect. This example involves writing whole single-precision values to two Gould Registers.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
06
10
05
14
00
02
08
42
48
CC
CD
43
B4
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
00 Reg.
02 Cnt.
00 EC
B7 LRC
Transmit
00
00
09
01
Meaning
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
Result x
Page 7C.26
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7C.3.14 Gould List Write Access: Example 4 Objectives: 3 1. Write 36000.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Multiple
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling x100
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Multiple Register Access is to be used, two Gould Registers are required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. two 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is required. This example involves writing whole single-precision values – 36000.0 and 0.0 – to two Gould Registers.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Multiple Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
= 1300 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 0” = “Int (value x 100)”
Gould List Entry 2:
= 1301 = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate) = “Word offset 1” = “No scaling”
Actions 1. Write “36000.0” (470C in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1300 2. Write “0.0” (A000 in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1301 Transmit
06
10
05
14
00
02
04
47
0C
A0
00
7A
C3
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response
06
10
05
14
00
02
00
B7
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
EC
LRC
Result x
(May 2003)
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 02 (0x02) indicates success.
Page 7C.27
Chapter 7C: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7C.3.15 Gould List Write Access: Example 5 Objectives: 3 1. Write 36000.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value. Totals format X
Precision Single
Word Order Default
Register Access Single
Access Beyond Value No
Scaling x100
Consecutive Registers Yes
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Single Register Access is to be used, only one Gould Register is required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is not used. This example involves writing a whole single-precision value, 36000.0, to a Gould Register.
Serial Port Configuration Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Single Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Configuration Gould List Entry 1:
06
10
05
14
00
01
04
47
0C
A0
00
7A
F0
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
D.C.
Data
Data
Data
Data
EC
LRC
Response Meaning
06 Slv.
10 Fn.
05 Reg.
14 ID
00 Reg.
01 Cnt.
40 EC
B6 LRC
Result x
Page 7C.28
Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 0001 (0x01) indicates success.
(May 2003)
‘INTELLIGENT TRANSMITTER’ MONITOR (CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM D)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D ‘Intelligent’ Transmitter Monitor 7D.1 Overview Chapter 7D is a guide to accessing process variables and diagnostic data from an ‘intelligent’ transmitter. The transmitter must have a communication port that supports RS-485 MODBUS® communications. Data read or written by the 795x Flow Computer can be in integer or floating-point format. When a floatingpoint value is read, it can be ‘forwarded’ to user-specified target parameter (database location). In addition to this forwarding process, a floating-point value can be automatically re-scaled into alternative units. ® The monitoring feature operates with ‘intelligent’ transmitters, such as the Micro Motion Series 2000 (multivariable) digital transmitter (liquid) and Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter (gas). ® In the case of the Micro Motion digital transmitter, it may require some pre-configuring. This is explained in Section 7D.2, along with a step-by-step procedure.
7D.1.1
Transmitter Monitor features Features: x
Monitor on/off selection switch
x
Polling method selection
x
Polling interval selection
x
Up to 32 registers for accessing 16-bit integer data of transmitter variables (and other data)
x
Up to 16 registers for accessing floating-point data of transmitter variables (and other data)
x
Forwarding of floating-point data to target parameters (database locations) with optional re-scaling *
x
Support for accessing registers in Message Blocks, as used by Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter
x
Input alarm, “Modb fail slv” raised upon occurrence of communication error or time-out ** * An Input alarm, “Modb bad target”, is raised if target parameter is not in fixed list of parameters (Table 1, page 7D-4). ** The alarm message includes slave identification number (1-16) and activity (“R” – read failed or “W” – write failed).
7D.1.2
Where is the Transmitter Monitor in the 795x menu system? Figure 1 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu, and includes the keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu. Apart from this menu, basic details of a 795x serial port must also be configured. The menus for this task are located in the COMMUNICATIONS menu. Note: The full setting-up procedure is in Section 7D.3.
x3
Configure
a x5
Other parameters
a
Communications
b
Modbus master
c
Transmitter monitor
a
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 2510 at time of publication.
Figure 1: Navigation to the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu
Page 7D-2
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
7D.1.3
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
What is in the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu? Figure 2 shows a map of the menu and gives a briefing on the main elements. A more detailed explanation of each element follows the diagram, pages 7D-3 to 7D-6. Note: The full setting-up procedure is included in Section 7D.3.
Polling menu leading to screens for configuring poll method and polling interval.
Monitor on/off selection screen.
Poll method Poll interval
Monitor enable Disable Transmitter Monitor menu
Enable/disable Polling Registers Message blocks
b d
a
Further menus for detailing up to 32 Registers to handle variables with integer values.
c
a
Message Message Message Message x7
Message Message Message Message
block block block block
block block block block
1 2 3 4
29 30 31 32
Int registers Float registers b
x7
Further menus for detailing up to 16 Registers to handle variables with floating-point values.
Message blocks menu leading to screens for detailing up to 32 message blocks.
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 2510 at time of publication.
Figure 2: TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu map
Monitor On/Off Switch options are “Enable” or “Disable”. x
“Enable” – switches the Monitor on
x
“Disable” – switches the Monitor off
Monitor Polling Polling method options are “Optmize” (factory default) or “1 poll/reg”: x
“Optmize” – monitor will read registers at successive addresses in single poll
x
“1 poll/reg” – monitor will read a single register at a time, working through listed registers one-by-one
The factory default setting for the interval between polling is 2.0 seconds. This can be edited to be any period you require in whatever time units are selectable (seconds, minutes, hours, etc). If a value of 0.0 is entered, the polling is constant, but could affect cycle times.
(May 2003)
Page 7D-3
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Integer Register List Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail as follows: x
Value – If “Live”, integer value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
x
Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7D.1.4)
x
Register address – Enter full MODBUS register address of the transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
x
Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7D-5 for details)
x
Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7D-5 for details)
Note: Forwarding and re-scaling support is not offered for integer values.
Floating-point Register List Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail as follows: x
Value – If “Live”, raw value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
x
Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7D.1.4)
x
Register address – Enter the full MODBUS register address of a transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
x
Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7D-5 for details)
x
Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7D-5 for details)
x
Target location – Enter location ID of parameter (Table 1), to which is forwarded the raw/post-scaled value
x
Unit – Enter a code from Table 2 to identify units of Value. (If not listed, ignore and use Scale factor)
x
Scaling factor – If needed, enter a multiplier factor to scale the raw value into base units for forwarding. If Value is in units that are not listed in Table 2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, use Scaling factor to re-scale the forwarded value into base units. The setting for Unit is then ignored. If Value is in units that are listed in Table 2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, select only the correct unit code for Unit and ensure that Scaling factor is set to 0.
Table 1: Allowed target parameters (database locations) Parameter
Location ID
Line temperature
720
Line pressure
594
Prover inlet temperature
730
Prover outlet temperature
739
Prover inlet pressure
604
Prover outlet pressure
613
Density A temperature
749
Density B temperature
759
Header pressure
1543
Base density
354
Density A
288
Density B
306
Note: Attempts to enter any other location ID for Target Location will result in an input alarm, “MODB bad target”.
Page 7D-4
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
Table 2: Codes for Unit parameter Code
Temperature
Pressure
Density
0
“Deg.C” (B)
“bar abs” (B)
“g/cc”
1
“Deg.F”
“Pa abs”
“g/litre”
2
“Kelvin”
“kPa abs”
g/m3”
3
“Ohms”
“MPa abs”
“kg/cc”
4
“Deg.R”
“psia”
“kg/litre”
5
(No units)
“kg/cm2 abs”
“kg/m3” (B)
6
(No units)
“bar gauge”
“tonnes/m3”
7
(No units)
“Pa gauge”
“oz/in3”
8
(No units)
“kPA gauge”
“oz/ft3”
9
(No units)
“MPa gauge”
“oz/barrel”
10
(No units)
“psig”
“oz/gallon (UK)”
11
(No units)
“kg/c2 gauge”
“oz/gallon (US)” “lb/in3”
12
(No units)
(No units)
13
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/ft3”
14
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/barrel”
15
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/gallon (UK)”
16
(No units)
(No units)
“lb/gallon (US)”
17
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/ft3”
18
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/barrel”
19
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/gallon (UK”
20
(No units)
(No units)
“tons/gallon (US)”
(B) = Base units
Message Block List The Daniel Senior Sonic™ transmitter is different to the Micro Motion® transmitter because it has registers grouped into blocks. In the operation manual for models 3400/3410/3420 (April 1998), there are 32 blocks of registers. Each block has a particular purpose and features multiple registers. For example, there is a Message Block 12 that has registers 350 - 398 for reading 48 calculation results, all floating-point values. On the 795x Flow Computer, the 795x Message Block List will allow read or write access to any part of any Message Block on the Daniel transmitter. Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail an access: x
Start register – address of first register in Daniel Message Block (e.g. 350, for Message Block 12)
x
Byte size – enter size of Daniel Message Block in bytes: ((End register - Start register +1) x 2)
x
Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value
As an example, consider reading register 392 (flow rate) from Daniel Message Block 12. The details to set-up on the 795x Flow Computer are as follows: 1. Edit an entry in the Floating-point Register List x
Value – Ensure status is “Live” to see raw flow rate value from transmitter. *
x
Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7D.1.4)
x
Register address – Not applicable when accessing Daniel Message Blocks.
x
Message block – Select “Message Block 12”
x
Byte offset – Select register to be accessed, 392, by entering an offset = (392 - 350) x 2 = 84
x
Target location – Not applicable for this example.
x
Unit – Not applicable for this example.
x
Scaling factor – Not applicable for this example. * When a value is “Set”, the value is written to the register. However, if the register is read-only, as in this case, the Daniel transmitter will accept it but the register value will simply not be changed.
(May 2003)
Page 7D-5
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
2. Edit entry (record) 12 of Message Block List x
Start register – enter a value of 350
x
Byte size – enter size of message block in bytes = [398 - 350 + 1) x 2] = 98
x
Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value (see note below)
The correct setting for Number of items will depend on the configuration of the 795x serial port and the transmitter, in respect of data type and data size (16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits) of the value involved. When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and single-precision (32-bit) floating-point values, enter a value of 2 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value. When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and double-precision (64-bit) floating-point values, enter a value of 4 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value. When the 795x serial port is configured for single-register access, simply enter a value of 1.
7D.1.4
How to set-up a Slave Device record A part of setting up the Transmitter Monitor is selecting a Slave Device record. The Slave Device record informs the 795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Master) of what MODBUS slave it is going to be talking to and what communication settings it requires. Figure 3 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the SLAVE DEVICES menu, with the keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu. With the 795x Flow Computer acting as the MODBUS Master, as in this case, a MODBUS Slave Device record must be detailed as follows: x
Device function – Select “Transmitter” option.
x
Port number – Select the 795x serial port connected to the transmitter.
x
Slave device address – Enter numerical MODBUS address of the transmitter.
x
Word ordering – Keep “Modbus default” (factory default), unless transmitter requires Word swap.
x
Precision – Select “single” if accessing floating-point values that are 32-bit or “double” if 64-bit.
x
Slave MODBUS commands – Select ‘Offset’ or ‘Full’ addressing method, as appropriate for transmitter.
x
Other record details are not applicable.
Note: The setting-up procedure is included in Section 7D.3.
x3
Configure
a x5
Other parameters
a
Communications
b
Modbus master
c
Slave devices
c
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 2510 at time of publication.
Figure 3: Navigation to the SLAVE DEVICES menu Page 7D-6
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
7D.2 Preparing a Micro Motion® digital transmitter The following procedure is for preparing a Micro Motion® digital transmitter, Series 2000 multivariable, for ® MODBUS digital communications with the 795x Flow Computer. This procedure requires a serial cable, a RS232/RS485 converter and Micro Motion’s ProLink II TM transmitter configuration software on a PC. Note: Installation, operation, maintenance, etc. and safety instructions for the transmitter are outside the scope of this supplement and Flow Computer literature. For these details, refer to product literature of the transmitter. In addition, PC requirements for running ProLink II TM are outside the scope of this supplement and Flow Computer literature. Since the Series 2000 transmitter has a universal service port that supports other communication ® protocols, it must be configured to enable RS-485 MODBUS communications. In addition to enabling this protocol, the baud rate must be changed from 38400 to 19200. (The minimum for the transmitter is 1200.) Procedure: 1.
Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, interconnect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to terminals 7 and 8 on the transmitter via the converter. RS485 Converter Pin No: 2 7
MicroMotion Transmitter Terminal No: 7 8 TM
2.
Start the program ProLink II
3.
Using Prolink II, establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu
4.
Using ProLink II, configure the communication port of the transmitter To do this: x x x x
Select the menu
Protocol: Select “Modbus RTU” Parity: Select “None” Baud Rate: Select “19200” Stop Bits: Select “1”
(May 2003)
Page 7D-7
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
TM
5.
Terminate the program ProLink II
6.
Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, connect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to terminals 5 and 6 on the transmitter. RS485 Converter Pin No. 2 7
7.
MicroMotion Transmitter Terminal No. 6 5
TM
Using Prolink II , establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu
8.
Using Prolink II , ensure process variables (e.g. Density) can be viewed through the menu
9.
Terminate the program ProLink II TM.
Page 7D-8
(May 2003)
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
7D.3 Configuring the 795x Flow Computer Follow these instructions to configure and activate the Monitor on the 795x Flow Computer: 1. Using a suitable cable, connect a 795x serial port to the transmitter. Note: For details of the 795x serial ports that support RS485, refer to main Chapter 7. Serial Port Pin No. (Rx/Tx+) (Rx/Tx-)
Micro Motion® Transmitter Terminal No. 5 6
2. Program the 795x Flow Computer to be a MODBUS Master device (2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”> (2b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the transmitter. (2c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 3. (Some localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.) (2d) Navigate to: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”> (2e) Configure the parameters, as shown in Table 4. (2f) Navigate to this sub-menu: <”Slave devices”> (2g) Select a Device menu (e.g. <”Device 1>) (2h) Configure the parameters, as shown in Table 5. 3. Program and activate the Monitor on the 795x Flow Computer (3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Transmitter monitor”> (3b) Configure the <Mon poll method> and <Mon poll interval> parameters. (3c) Navigate to the MESSAGE BLOCK menu (if applicable to transmitter) (3d) Select the first available message block menu (e.g. MESSAGE BLOCK 1 menu) (3e) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7D-5 (3f) Repeat Steps 3c to 3e for all other message blocks to be detailed (3g) Navigate to the INT REGISTERS menu (if applicable) (3h) Select the first available register menu (e.g. INT REGISTER 1 menu) (3i) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7D-4 (3j) Repeat Steps 3g to 3i for all other integer registers to be detailed (3k) Navigate to the FLOAT REGISTERS menu (if applicable) (3l) Select the first available register menu (e.g. FLOAT REGISTER 1 menu) (3m) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7D-4 (3n) Repeat Steps 3k to 3m for all other integer registers to be detailed (3o) Configure <Monitor enable> parameter to show “Enable” (End of instructions)
(May 2003)
Page 7D-9
Chapter 7D: Intelligent Instrument Monitor
Software Version 25x0, Issue 4.20 (or higher)
Table 3: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters Parameter * (Database Location) Comms port owner Port Baud rate
Factory Default Setting
Instructions and Comments Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus master”.
“MODBUS slave”
Keep the factory default, unless transmitter using lower baud rates.
Port char format
Keep the factory default, unless transmitter using another format.
Port handshaking Port RS232 / 485 ***
“19200” “8 bits none 1 stop”
Keep the factory default setting.
“None”
Select the RS485 signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
“RS 232”
Port Modbus mode
Keep the factory default setting.
“RTU”
P Modbus word order
Keep the factory default setting.
“Modbus default”
P MODB slave add
(Not applicable)
1
P Modbus features
(Not applicable)
P long reg access
Keep the factory default setting, unless using single-register access.
“None” “Multiple registers”
P MODB total format
(Not applicable)
“32-bit integer”
P MODB precision
(Not applicable)
“Single”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port. ** A 795x may perform unexpected ‘restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”. *** Parameter is not applicable to serial ports that support RS-232 only. Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
Table 4: MODBUS Master details Parameter (Database Location) Length of timeout
Factory Default Setting
Instructions and Comments Keep the factory default setting.
“0.5 second”
Keep the factory default setting. *
No of retries
“3 retries”
* If attempts to communicate with a slave are unsuccessful and exceed the maximum retries, an input alarm, “Modb failed slv”, is raised. The number of the slave 1 - 16 is given in the alarm message together with “R” (read failed) or “W” (write failed). Abbreviation used here: “No” = number
Table 5: Slave device details Parameter * (Database Location) Slave device func
Factory Default Setting
Instructions and Comments Select “Transmitter” from the multiple-choice list.
“None”
Slv device port no
Select the 795x serial port that is connected to the transmitter.
Slv device address
Edit the numeric MODBUS address of the transmitter.
Device word swap
Keep the factory default, unless transmitter requires Word swap
Device precision Slv modb commands
Keep the factory default, unless floating-point value is 64-bit. ®
Select “3,4, 16 addr offset” option for a Micro Motion Transmitter **
“Comms port 1” 0 “Modbus default” “Single” “3, 16 full addr”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the slave device being detailed. ** The “offset” option applies where transmitters automatically add an offset (e.g. 40000) to get a register address specified in a received MODBUS request. For transmitters that do not do this and require a full address, keep the factory default. Abbreviations used: “func” = function, “Slv” = Slave, “no” = number, “modb” = Modbus
Page 7D-10
(May 2003)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8. Alarms and Events 8.1 Alarms 8.1.1 Alarm types The types of alarms which are detected and recorded are: System alarms, caused by one or more of: x x x x x
Power failure Battery low (if a battery is fitted) Watchdog RAM checksum failure ROM checksum failure.
Input alarms, caused by one or more of: x x x
Failure of analogue inputs Failure of density transducers Incorrect data has been entered.
Limit alarms, caused by one or more of: x x
Limits which you have set Limits defined by the system.
These always result in two alarms - one when the change first happens and another when the system returns to its normal state.
8.1.2 Alarm indicators The 795x has three LED indicators (one each for Input, System and Limit Alarms) to show alarm status. Ö Each alarm indicator can be in one of three states: Off
The system is working normally.
Flashing
An alarm has been received but has not yet accepted.
On
been
All alarms has been accepted but not yet cleared. The conditions which caused the alarms in the first place may still exist.
SYSTEM ALARM
INPUT ALARM
LIMIT ALARM
Alarm indicators on the front panel
8.1.3 How alarms are received and stored When a new alarm is received, the appropriate indicator LED on the front panel starts flashing. If the indicator is already flashing because of a previous alarm, it continues to do so. If the indicator is already ON (steady), it starts to flash. Information about alarms is stored in two logs: x
The Alarm Status Display
This gives: (1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Alarm Log (2) an indication of the current status of the system.
x
The Historical Alarm Log
This contains an individual entry for every alarm stored in the log.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.1
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
The Historical Alarm Log can store up to 30 entries. When a new alarm is received, one of two things can happen: If the Historical Alarm Log is NOT full : An entry for the new alarm is simply added to the list. If the Historical Alarm Log is full : It depends on how the system is set up: Either (1) the oldest entry is deleted and the new one is added to the top of the list, or (2) the new alarm is discarded. In either case, the Status Display is updated automatically.
8.1.4 Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log Press the INFORMATION button If you want to examine the Alarm Status Display or the Historical Alarm Log. x
To bring up the Alarm Status Display, select the Alarm Summary option.
x
To bring up the first entry in the Historical Alarm Log, select the Alarm History option.
Figure 8.1.1: How to get to the alarm log
a
V
Alarm Summary Alarm History Event Summary Event History
The Alarm Status Display
b c
a
d
V
Summary: System Input Limit
Live New 03 04 00 00 00 04
(Typical display)
b c d
The Historical Alarm Log a b c
V
(Typical entry)
d
To other entries (if any) in the Historical Alarm Log
8.1.5 What the Alarm Status Display tells you A typical Alarm Status Display is shown in the Figure 8.1.1. The display lists, for each type of alarm (System, Input or Limit), the number of alarms which are live and new. x x
New alarms are alarms which have been received but not yet accepted. Live alarms are alarms which refer to conditions which are still active.
An example of a live alarm is when there is a fault in the system. This produces two alarms - one when the fault first occurs (‘ON’) and the second when it is put right (‘Off’). If only the first alarm of the pair has been received, the alarm is said to be live because the condition still exists.
Page 8.2
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
The number of live alarms tells you how many faults are still active. If you look at the Historical Alarm Log this tells you more about these faults.
8.1.6 What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you The diagram, below, shows the function of the relevant keys, and what is on the display. Figure 8.1.2: A typical entry in the log
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one. Alarm is either ‘ON’ (fault occurrence) or ‘OFF’ (fault cured). Type of alarm. Indicates alarm not accepted. Accept this alarm. Extra identifier to qualify the alarm description. Clear this alarm entry Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised. Identifies a metering-run (stream) (This feature is not applicable to single-stream software) 10. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one. 11. Scroll DOWN through the entries. 12. Description of alarm. 13. Scroll UP through the alarm entries. 14. Clear all alarm entries.
Each alarm has its own entry in the Historical Alarm Log which tells you: x
Type of alarm Whether it is a System alarm, Input alarm or Limit alarm and if the alarm is ‘on’ or ‘off’.
x
Extra identifier for the alarm This is not always shown for every entry but, where it is shown, it could be one of the following: x
A digit
This indicates the channel number on which the fault occurred.
x
A letter
H and L are for high and low Limit alarms, S is for a step alarm.
x
Date and time The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
x
Acceptance indication This is only shown for those entries which have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the indicator disappears.
x
Other entries indication An up-arrow symbol shows that there are entries before the present one, a down-arrow symbol shows that there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it is last, there is no down-arrow.
x
Description of the alarm This is an abbreviated description of the alarm and should be sufficient to help you trace the cause of the problem. A full list of all alarm messages and what they mean, are listed on page 8.3.
8.1.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log To clear all the alarm entries in the Historical log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical Alarm Log, zeroes the entries in the Status Display and sets all LED indicators to OFF.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.3
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.8 User-defined Alarms There are several types of user-defined alarms :User-defined Alarms
1st page
User Alarm Type 1: ‘Measurement’ Limit Alarm
8.4
User Alarm Type 2: ‘Comparison’ limit alarm
8.5
8.1.8.1 User Alarm Type 1: ‘Measurement’ Limit Alarm Two user limit alarms (nominated as ‘X’ and ‘Y’) are available for monitoring values of any parameters that do not have low/high alarm limits. Configuring involves:
1. Editing the identification number of the parameter (menu page) to be monitored by the 795x. 2. Editing values for the high and low limits. IMPORTANT NOTICE Mobrey recommend using the 795x set-up Wizard, “Alarms”, when configuring these alarms. Wizards are described in Chapter 10.
x
Configuration task (“Limit Alarm X” or “Limit Alarm Y”) Follow these instructions if you want to configure without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to the menu page of the parameter to be monitored and then press the ‘a’ soft-key once to display the parameter identification (ID) number. Make a note of that number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”> 3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.1 Table 8.1.1: User Limit Alarm Parameters Parameter *
Instructions and Comments
User alarm ptr.
x
Edit the value to be the ID number of the parameter to be monitored. The number will be replaced with the associated data name if the parameter exists. Note: Default setting is 0000 (“Off”) - not in use
User alarm HI lmt
x
‘Set’ the maximum allowed value for the selected parameter.
User alarm LO lmt
x
‘Set’ the minimum allowed value of the selected parameter.
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination.
x
Summary The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms is shown in this menu: <“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”>. Alarms ‘X’ and ‘Y’ each have a dedicated digit: ‘0’ = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted ‘1’ = Alarm active
Page 8.4
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.8.2 User Alarm Type 2: ‘Comparison’ limit alarm Two user comparison alarms (nominated as ‘A’ and ‘B’) are available for comparing values of two parameters and raising an alarm when the difference is outside a ‘Set’ limit. Configuring involves:
1. Editing the identification numbers of the two parameters to be monitored 2. Editing a value for the comparison limit
IMPORTANT NOTICE Mobrey recommend using the 795x set-up Wizard, “Alarms”, when configuring these alarms. Wizards are described in Chapter 10.
x
Configuration task (“Comparison Alarm A” or “Comparison Alarm B”) Follow these instructions if you want to configure without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to the menu pages of the two parameters to be compared. Use the ‘a’ soft-key to display the parameter identification (ID) number. Make a note of each ID number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”> 3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.2
Table 8.1.2: User Comparison Alarm Parameters Parameter *
Instructions and Comments x
Edit the value with the ID number of the first parameter to be used in the comparison. The number will be replaced with the associated parameter name (if the parameter exists). Note: Default setting is 0000 (“Off”) - not in use
x
Edit the value line with in the ID number of the second parameter to be used in the comparison. The number will be replaced with the associated parameter name (if parameter exists).
Comp alarm ptr1
Comp alarm ptr2
Note: Default setting is “Off”. (i.e. not in use) x Comp alarm limit
‘Set’ the maximum allowed difference between values of the two parameters without needing to raise an alarm. Note: Default limit is 0 – feature is switched off
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination
x
Summary The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are shown in this menu:<“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”> Alarms ‘A’ and ‘B’ each have a dedicated digit: ‘0’ = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted ‘1’ = Alarm active
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.5
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.9 Alarm Logger Output (ALO) Status Outputs 1 to 5 are dedicated to indicating the presence of active alarms. By default, the ALO is enabled and pre-configured as shown in Table 8.1.3. Table 8.1.3: ALO Default Set-up Digital Output
Default Function
Status Output 1
x
Indicate System Alarms only
Status Output 2
x
Indicate Limit Alarms only *
Status Output 3
x
Indicate Input Alarms only
Status Output 4
x
Indicate User Limit Alarm ‘X’
Status Output 5
x
Indicate User Limit Alarm ‘Y’
* User Comaprison Alarms ‘A’ and ‘B’ are also indicated
ALO Re-configuration Options ALO use of the first three Status Outputs can be re-configured at any time by changing the selected alarm grouping. Parameters for making a change are found within the menu system. To change the alarm grouping…
1. 2.
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”Alarms”>/<”Alarm logger”> Locate parameters as identified in Table 8.1.4 and change the alarm grouping option to suit your requirements. Available options are summarised in Table 8.1.5. Table 8.1.4: ALO Configuration Parameters Parameter (as displayed)
Purpose of Configuration Parameter
Alarm output 1
x
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 1
Alarm output 2
x
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 2
Alarm output 3
x
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 3
Table 8.1.5: Alarm Grouping Options Option
Purpose of option
None
x
Do not indicate presence of any alarms *
System
x
Indicate System alarms only
Input
x
Indicate Input alarms only
Limit
x
Indicate Limit alarms only
Any
x
Include System, Input and Limit alarms.
System Input
x
Indicate System alarms and Input alarms
System Limit
x
Indicate System alarms and Limit alarms
Input Limit
x
Indicate Input alarms and Limit alarms
* This does not free up the digital (status) output for another function
Notes: 1. For further information on Digital (Status) Outputs, refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix ‘C’. 2. The presence of active User-defined Comparison Alarms (‘A’, ‘B’, etc.) are indicated by Status Outputs nominated to include Limit Alarms.
Page 8.6
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.1.10 Alarm Message List * Alarm can be cleared immediately Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
4x5 Oil dens fail
Input
Oil density (by 4x5 referral) can not be calculated. Check all associated parameters. Extra Message Character: “P” = Prime measurement, “M” = Metering measurement
5167 orif dia lmt
Limit
Orifice diameter is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
5167 pipe dia lmt
Limit
Pipe diameter is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Alarm total limit
Limit
Alarm condition total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
API Oil dens fail
Input
Oil density (by API referral) can not be calculated. Check all associated parameters. Extra Message Character: “P” = Prime measurement, “M” = Metering measurement
Archive format *
System
Archive formatting operation unsuccessful. Check all size associated parameters.
Archive too small *
System
Insufficient space for archiving. Check all size associated parameters.
Base BSW limit
Limit
BSW % at base conditions is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Base den API fail
Input
API referral calculation for base density was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11. Extra Message Character: “F” = Forward referral stage, “R” =Reverse referral stage
Base dens limit
Limit
The Base Density measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Battery failed
System
What the “ON” alarm message means
Configuration has been lost. Replace the battery as instructed in Chapter 14.
Battery low
System
Brooks:10 run lmt *
Limit
Maximum number of prove runs restored to 10 runs - the maximum allowed for Brooks Compact Proving
BSW comp limit
Limit
(A#B) The calculated difference between BSW measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Comparison limit
Limit
General user-defined limit alarm. Extra Message Character: “A” = User Alarm ‘A’, “B” = User Alarm ‘B’
Database corrupt *
System
Corruption occurred but has been fixed automatically. Always seen when software has just been installed. Check all configured parameters If seen at any other time.
DBM bad chksum *
System
There has been an unrecoverable memory checksum failure. The Flow Computer will need to be re-configured. Extra Message Character: ‘V’ = Volatile (RAM), ‘N’ = Non-volatile (FRAM)
DBM bad triple *
System
Corruption of the database in a memory area occurred but there has been an automatic recovery. (‘0’ is often seen after installing new release of same software version) Extra Message Character: ‘0’ = RAM copy, ‘1’=1st. non-volatile memory copy, ‘2’=2nd. Non-volatile memory copy, ‘3’ = Padding, ‘!’ = Beyond repair / Re-configure Flow Computer
Dens 4x5 fail
Input
Metering Density by 4x5 matrix referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Dens API fail
Input
Metering Density by API referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Density cal fail
System
Dens comp limit
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Limit
Replace the battery as instructed in Chapter 14. (Configuration is safe for moment)
Calibration of Time Period Input unsuccessful. Extra Message Character: = Time Period Input ‘1’, “2” = Time Period Input ‘2’, etc.
“1”
(A#B) The calculated difference between density measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Page 8.7
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…)
* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
Dens press limit
Limit
‘Density loop’ pressure measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Dens temp A limit
Limit
‘Density loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘A’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Dens temp B limit
Limit
‘Density loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘B’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Dens txdr calc
Input
A density (transducer) measurement channel value has a “Fail” status. Check the physical connections with the transducer and use the “Health check” menu to monitor the associated Time Period Input. Extra Message Character: “A” = Density ‘A’, “B” = Density ‘B’
Dens txdr limit
Limit
The prime density measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Diff press limit
Limit
Differential pressure measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
What the “ON” alarm message means
DLG list non-real *
Input
Archive parameter lists only allow parameters with floating-point values.
Dynamic visc calc
Input
A dynamic viscosity measurement channel value has a “Fail” status. Check the physical connections with the transducer and use the “Health check” menu to monitor the associated Time Period Input. Extra Message Character: “A” = Dynamic Viscosity ‘A’, “B” = Dynamic viscosity ‘B’
Dyn visc compare
Limit
(A#B) The calculated difference between measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Dyn visc limit
Limit
Dynamic viscosity measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Gross std vol lmt
Limit
Gross Standard Volume flow rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Gross vol limit
Limit
Gross Volume flow rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
GSV total limit
Limit
Gross Std. Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
GV total limit
Limit
Gross Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
HART input fail
Input
A HART Input parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving information from a HART protocol transmitter. Check the HART network loop connection and monitor the HART Input using the “Health Check” menu. Extra Message Character: “1” = HART Input ‘1’, “2” = HART Input ‘2’, … , “8” = HART Input ‘8’
HSL addr conflict
System
Ind std vol limit
Limit
Indicated Standard Volume flow rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
ISO5167 beta lmt
Limit
Beta ratio is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard.
ISO5167 ReD limit
Limit
Reynolds number is outside a limit as defined in the chosen ISO 5167 Standard.
ISV total limit
Limit
Indicated Standard Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
Page 8.8
High Speed List address conflict due to a HSL block overlapping. Extra Message Character: “A” = Block ‘A’, “B” = Block ‘B’, … , “F” = Block ‘F’
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…)
* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
IV total limit
Limit
Indicated Volume flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
Kin visc compare
Limit
(A#B) The calculated difference between measurement channels (‘A’ & ‘B’) is beyond the programmed (SET) comparison limit.
Kin visc limit
Limit
Kinematic viscosity measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
mA input cal fail
Input
Calibration of mA (Analogue) Input unsuccessful. Extra Message Character: = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
mA input failed
Input
mA input no cal
System
What the “ON” alarm message means
“1”
An Analogue Input channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving valid signals from a loop-powered transmitter. Check physical connections and monitor the input using the “Health Check” menu. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’ Analogue Input not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
“1”
mA out cal fail
System
Calibration of mA (Analogue) Output unsuccessful. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Output ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Output ‘2’, etc.
mA output failed
Output
An Analogue Output channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. There is a hardware problem with the Flow Computer. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Output ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Output ‘2’, etc.
mA output no cal
System
Analogue Output not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Output ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Output ‘2’, etc.
Mass limit
Limit
Mass rate is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Mass total limit
Limit
Mass flow total has reached the programmed (SET) rollover-to-zero limit. Extra Message Character: none = Normal mode (main) total, “M” =Maintenance mode total, “T”/ “B” = Batch total
Mass water% limit
Limit
Percentage of ‘water’ in oil/water mix (by mass) is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Meter BSW limit
Limit
BSW % at metering conditions is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Meter press limit
Limit
The metering pressure measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Meter temp limit
Limit
The metering temperature measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
MODB slave clash
System
Serial Port configuration conflicts with the configuration of another port Extra Message Character: “1” = Serial Port ‘1’, “2” = Serial Port ‘2’, etc.
Oil SG limit
Limit
Specific gravity of the metered oil is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Orif ISO5167 lmt
Limit
The ISO 5167 Standard calculation was unsuccessful. Check all Orifice System parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Peer target fail
System
PID input error
Input
Peer-to-peer communication failed. Extra Message Character: <MODBUS Slave device number> Set-up problem. Check the indicated PID configuration parameter. Extra Message Character: “I” = PID Input parameter value must be a floating-point number “S” = PID Setpoint parameter value must be a floating-point number.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.9
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…) Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
Power fail *
System
Prime BSW limit
Limit
Prover abort
* Alarm can be cleared immediately What the “ON” alarm message means
The Flow Computer has been without electrical power for a period of time. Examine the date and time stamp of the “ON” and “OFF” messages for the outage period. The prime BSW measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit Proving session stopped. Extra Message Character: “I” = Initialisation problem, “I” = Pre-run problem, ”L” = Leak detected “c” = All prove runs completed, “S” = Stream information missing ”s” = Stabilisation not achieved, “p” = Target Plenum pressure is outside alarm limits
Prover in press
Limit
The pressure at the Prover inlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover in temp
Limit
The temperature measurement value for fluid at the Prover inlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover limit
Limit
Proving parameter out of limits. Extra Message Character: “F” = Flow rate, “T” = Temperature, “P” = Pressure, “M” = Meter factor “e” = Proving Error (Missing Pulses)
Prover out temp
Limit
The temperature measurement value for fluid at the Prover outlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover out press
Limit
The pressure at the Prover outlet valve is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Prover timeout
Limit
‘Displacer’ failed to reach a detector switch within a programmed (SET) time limit. Extra Message Character: “S” = Start sensor, “E” = End sensor
Prt input failed
Input
An Analogue Input channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving valid signals from a RTD/PRT field transmitter. Check physical connections and monitor the input using the “Health Check” menu. Extra Message Character: “1” = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
Prt no cal
System
Analogue Input not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: = Analogue Input ‘1’, “2” = Analogue Input ‘2’, … , “a” = Analogue Input ‘10’
“1”
Pulse out limit
Limit
Qty batch overrun
System
Batch has overrun by an amount that has exceeded a ‘programmed (SET) limit.
Qty batch running
System
An attempt has been made to start a different type of batch whilst a quantity-based batch is in progress. Extra Message Character: ”T” = Timed batch, “M” = Manual triggered batch
Qty batch start
System
Quantity batch could not be started. Extra Message Character: “F” = Flow not halted. There must be no flow before starting Flow Delivery Control, “R” = Quantity batch already running
Retro calc fail
System
Retrospective calculation attempted but was unsuccessful Extra Message Character: ”F” = Batch archive empty or record not found, “U” = Update to existing record failed, “W” = Unable to write new record to batch archive
SG limit
Limit
Specific gravity measurement is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
SpEqu1 calc fail
Input
Incorrect set-up of Special Equation ‘1’ has caused it to fail.
SpEqu2 calc fail
Input
Incorrect set-up of Special Equation ‘2’ has caused it to fail.
Page 8.10
The frequency of pulses issued through a Pulse Output has reached the maximum rate. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Alarm Message List continued…)
* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm Message
Alarm Type
StdVol water% lmt
Limit
% of ‘water’ in oil/water mix (by standard volume) is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Strainer blocked *
Input
Blockage detected (by Live Input). Check Strainer.
Timeperiod failed
Input
A Periodic Time Input channel parameter (location) page has a “Fail” status. The Flow Computer is not presently receiving frequency signals from a transmitter. Check physical connections and monitor the input using the “Health Check” menu.
What the “ON” alarm message means
Extra Message Character: “1” = Time Period Input ‘1’, “2” = Time Period Input ‘2’, etc. Timeperiod glitch *
Input
A series of anomalous transmitter readings has occurred. Adjust the setting of the glitch filter parameter that is associated with the Density or Viscosity transducer.
Timeperiod no cal
System
Periodic Time Input not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Time Period Input ‘1’, “2” = Time Period Input ‘2’, etc.
Turb err-dev calc
Input
An ‘error percentage’ could not be obtained from the linearisation of a calibration curve. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
Turb freq limit
Limit
A calculated pulse frequency has exceeded the programmed (SET) upper limit Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
Turb K-factor err
Input
A ‘K Factor’ could not be obtained from the linearisation of a calibration curve profile. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
Turb limit failed
Limit
Missing pulse count has exceeded a programmed (SET) upper limit.
Turb pcent failed
Input
The percentage of missing pulses in respect of counted pulses during a cycle has exceeded a programmed (SET) upper limit.
Extra Message Character: “1” = Pulse Input ‘1’, “2” = Pulse Input ‘2’, etc.
Extra Message Character: “1” = Pulse Input ‘1’, “2” = Pulse Input ‘2’, etc. Turbine no cal
System
Turb visc curve
Input
A ‘K Factor’ could not be obtained from the linearisation of a calibration curve profile. Extra Message Character: “M” = Main Turbine (wired to Pulse Input ‘1’)
User alarm
Limit
General user-defined limit alarm. Extra Message Character: “X” = User Alarm ‘X’, “Y” = User Alarm ‘Y’
Valve failed
Input
No response from a valve controller. Extra Message Character: “1” = Prover Inlet, “2” = Prover Outlet, “3” = Stream Block, “4” = 4-way Diverter
Valve timeout
Input
No response from a valve controller within expected time limit. Extra Message Character: “1” = Prover Inlet, “2” = Prover Outlet, “3” = Stream Block, “4” = 4-way Diverter
Visc 4x5 fail
Input
Metering Kinematic Viscosity by 4x5 matrix referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Visc ASTM fail
Input
Metering Kinematic Viscosity by ASTM D341 referral calculation was unsuccessful. Check all associated configurable parameters using reference pages in Chapter 11.
Visc dens calc
Input
A ‘Viscosity loop’ density measurement channel value has a “Fail” status. Check the physical connections with the Viscosity transducer and configuration parameters. Use the “Health check” facility menu to monitor the associated Time Period Input. Extra Message Character: “A” = Viscosity Loop Density ‘A’, “B” = Viscosity Loop Density ‘B’
Visc density
Input
The prime ‘Viscosity Loop’ measurement value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit
Visc temp A limit
Limit
‘Viscosity loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘A’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
Visc temp B limit
Limit
‘Viscosity loop’ fluid temperature measurement channel ‘B’ value is outside a programmed (SET) limit. Extra Message Character: “H” = High limit, “L” = Low limit, “S” = Step limit
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
A Pulse (Turbine) Input is not calibrated. Contact Mobrey for advice. Extra Message Character: “1” = Pulse Input ‘1’, “2” = Pulse Input ‘2’, etc.
Page 8.11
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.2 Events 8.2.1 Introduction to 795X events The 795X keeps a record of important system changes in an Event Log. This is very similar, in concept, to the alarm log, but the nature of the information kept is different. Event details that can be viewed in the event log: x x
Changes to the status of pre-determined† data that affects calculations Changes to the value of data pre-determined data that affects calculations.
Event details that can be seen only in a printout of the event log: x x
Messages from hardware diagnostics Download of a configuration completed.
8.2.2 Event indicators Unlike alarms, there are no event indicators on the front panel of the 795x.
8.2.3 How events are received and stored Information about events is stored in two logs: x
Event Status Display
This gives: (1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Event Log (2) an indication of the current status of the system.
x
Historical Event Log
This contains an individual entry for every event stored in the log.
There is enough room, in the historical event log, to store up to 150 event records. When a new event is received, one of two things can happen: If the event log is NOT full : A new event record is simply added If the event log is full : The event configuration data, Event full action, has two options, “Replace” and “Ignore”, for determining how to deal with a new event when the event log is full. (See Table 8.2.1)
Table 8.2.1: Event Full Action - Available Options <Event full action> Option Replace Ignore
Purpose of Option Always overwrite the oldest event in the event log Always discard a new event when the event log is full
Note: The default action is “Replace”
†
This can not be changed. The list of auditable data is fixed.
Page 8.12
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.2.4 Examining the Event Summary and the Event Log Press the INFORMATION button If you want to examine the Event Status Display or the Historical Event Log. x
To bring up the Event Status Display, select the Event Summary option.
x
To bring up the first entry in the Historical Event Log, select the Event History option. Figure 8.2.1: How to get to the event log
The Event Status Display a
V
Alarm Summary Alarm History Event Summary Event History
a b c d
V
Summary: Act Live Auto 003 004 User 150 150 Periodic 000 000
(Typical display)
b c d
The Historical Event Log a b c
V
(Typical entry)
d
To other entries (if any) in the Historical Event Log
8.2.5 What the Event Status Display tells you A typical Status Display is shown in the diagram (below). It lists, for each type of event (Auto, User or Periodic) the numbers of alarms which are active and live. x x
Active events are events which have been received but not yet accepted. Live events are events which refer to conditions which are still active.
The number of live events tells you how many of them are still active. If you look at the Historical Event Log this tells you more about these events.
8.2.6 What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you Figure 8.2.2 shows the function of the relevant keys, and what is on the display. Figure 8.2.2: A typical entry in the Historical Event Log
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Key to figure: 1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one. 2. Location identifier. 3. Type of event. 4. Indicates alarm not accepted. 5. Accept this alarm. 6. Event description. 7. Clear this alarm entry 8. Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised. 9. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one. 10. Scroll DOWN through the entries. 11. Scroll UP through the alarm entries. 12. Clear all alarm entries.
Page 8.13
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
Each event has its own entry in the Historical Event Log which tells you: x
Type of event Whether it is Auto, User or Periodic and on or off. Type
x
What it means
Auto
Changes made by the 795x application software.
User
Changes made by the keypad or done over serial communications.
Periodic
This event type is not used at present.
Date and time The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
x
Acceptance indication This is only shown for those entries which have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the indicator disappears.
x
Other entries indication An up-arrow shows that there are entries before the present one, a down-arrow shows that there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it is last, there is no down-arrow.
x
Description of the event This is an abbreviated description of the event but should be sufficient to help you trace the reason for it. A full alarm message listing starts on page 8.7.
x
Old value and new value Pressing the RIGHT-ARROW key displays another screen with the old and new values of data (Figure 8.2.3). Press the LEFT-ARROW (or the RIGHT-ARROW) key for the previous display to re-appear.
Figure 8.2.3: Old value and new value screen
8.2.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log To clear all the event entries in the Historical Event log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical Event Log and zeroes the entries in the Event Status Display.
Page 8.14
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3 Enhanced Auditing There is an optional enhanced auditing facility for recording user initiated changes to the 795x Flow Computer software parameters that have an influence on the metering results. This enhanced feature is the result of an essential requirement from North Sea Practices and the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI). This feature allows a 795x series Flow Computer to continuously monitor and report on changes to existing SET values, changes to option selections and changes to several parameter attributes (value status and individual audit control settings). The facility will report changes by recording Audit User Events and Audit System Alarms that will enable the back-calculation of fiscal values and account for changes that have occurred.
8.3.1 Audit User Events All generated events are stored in the Historical Event Log, as fully explained in Section 8.2. Audit events are either sub-classed as “USER” triggered or “AUTO” triggered. An example of a “USER” event is the act of manually changing a software parameter status to be “SET” instead of “LIVE”. An example of an “AUTO” triggered event is the 795x automatically changing a software parameter status to “Fail” when a live input source fails. Every event has a date and time for the occurrence, an on-screen location descriptor and a summary of the change. This information is divided into four pages, as seen in Figure 8.3.1. Use the ARROW keys, as shown, to navigate around the pages. To enable Audit User Events… x x x x x
Naviage to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”> Locate the parameter page with “Attribute display” Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list Locate the parameter page with “Audit inactive locs” Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list Figure 8.3.1: Example of Audit Event pages from Historical Log
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.15
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.2 Audit System Alarms All generated alarms are stored in the Historical Alarm Log, as fully explained in Section 8.1. Auditing Control alarms are sub-classed as “SYSTEM” alarms. An Audit Control alarm is normally raised whenever the value status attribute of a parameter is changed to “Set”. This alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “ON” on the first display line. A subsequent value status change, from “SET” to “LIVE”, to “FB” or to “FAIL” will then raise a matching system alarm. That matching alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “OFF” on the first display line. To enable Audit System Alarms… x
Naviage to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
x
Locate the parameter page with “Attribute display”
x
Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list
x
Locate the parameter page with “Audit active locs”
x
Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list Figure 8.3.2: Example of Audit System Alarm pages from Historical Log
Figure 8.3.3 shows how the Audit Control alarm message can appear in one of two optional formats. To change format… x
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
x
Locate the parameter page with “DB loc alarm text” as the descriptor
x
Select an option descriptor from the multiple-choice list
x
Any change is activated for the next 795x machine cycle
Figure 8.3.3: Optional Formats for Alarm Control Message
Page 8.16
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.3 Audit Control Attributes Each 795x Flow Computer software parameter has two independent, programmable attributes for adjusting how the auditing of it operates. Adjustments can be determined either by the 795X (in automatic mode) or by the user (in manual mode). Select a method by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Auditing attrib ctrl”> parameter page, located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameter”> menu.
By default, Audit Control attributes are not accessible in the menu system. To make them accesible, follow these steps: x x x
Naviage to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”> Locate the menu data page with “Attribute display” Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list
Note: This action also automatically enables the auditing control functions (if not already enabled by the software parameters
Figure 8.3.4 shows where to find Audit Control attributes. Navigate to any parameter page and then use the DOWN-ARROW and UP-ARROW key switch between pages.
Figure 8.3.4: Typical parameter page showing all attributes
(1) Auditing Alarm Suppression Control (2) Auditing Event Suppression Control (3) Security Level required for editing
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.17
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
The programmable attributes are:
1. Auditing Event Suppression Control (Audit/No Audit) When the automatic mode is in use… Critical “USER” events, such as a “LIVE” to “SET” status change, are never suppressed. They always appear in the Historical Event Log. Less critical “USER” events, such as a valve command selection, can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Audit”. However, be aware that the 795x Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Event Suppression Control” section on the next page. Note: An “AUTO” (795X triggered) event is never suppressed. When the default manual mode is in use… A “USER” event can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Audit”.
2. Auditing Alarm Suppression Control (Alarm/No Alarm) When the automatic mode is in use… The “SET” audit alarm can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Alarm”. However, be aware that the 795x Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Alarm Suppression Control” section on the next page. When the default manual mode is in use… The “SET” audit alarm can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Alarm”.
There is a third attribute on the same page, which can also be edited. This is the security level (e.g. “Engineer”) that is required to make changes to the software paramater. The parameter <"Secure all locations"> results in the required security level of all parameters being set to programmer, except those that are “super user”.
Security levels are as explained in Chapter 11. The exception to this is the “Super User” security level, which is not selectable and is not attainable by anyone apart from the 795x Flow Computer itself. Note: The existing setting for each Audit Control attribute is displayed within the menu system and is also available for retrieval by an external Modbus networked device. (See Chapter 7)
Page 8.18
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.4 Audit Event Suppression Control: Automatic Mode Under automatic mode, adjustments to the setting of the Audit Event Suppression Control attribute are in accordance with a built-in logic table. Table 8.3.1 shows: (a) the impact on the “Audit” or “No Audit” setting when using the front panel keyboard (or Modbus protocol communications) to manipulate the value status of a software parameter. (b) when a “USER” event is generated as the result of a user initiated action. (c) when an “AUTO” event is generated as the result of a 795X initiated action. Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Attribute control”> parameter page, located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.3.1: Logic for 795X changes to attribute settings and if events are recorded Value Status Change
Attribute Setting (Before Change)
Attribute Setting (After Change)
USER Event on change?
AUTO Event on change?
Live to Set
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Live to Set
Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Live to FB
No Audit
No Audit
No
Yes
Notes?
Live to FB
Audit
Audit
No
Yes
Live to Fail
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Alarm raised instead Alarm raised instead
Live to Fail
Audit
Audit
No
No
Fail to Set
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Fail to Set
Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Fail to Live
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Alarm raised instead
Fail to Live
Audit
Audit
No
No
Alarm raised instead
FB to Set
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
FB to Set
Audit
Audit
Yes
No
FB to Live
No Audit
No Audit
No
Yes
FB to Live
Audit
Audit
No
Yes
Set to Live
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Set to Live
Audit
No Audit
Yes
No
Set to Fail
No Audit
No Audit
No
No
Set to Fail
Audit
No Audit
Yes
No
Set to FB
No Audit
No Audit
No
Yes
Set to FB
Audit
No Audit
Yes
Yes
Read Table Note A
Table Notes: A
A “USER” event is generated for a “SET” to “LIVE” action by the user. An “AUTO” event is generated for the “Live” to “FB” action by the 795X.
B
Selecting an alternative unit of measurement (for display) is recorded as a “USER” event even with a “No Audit” setting.
C
An event is recorded for all user initiated changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting. Table 8.3.2 shows if an event is logged when a user makes changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting without changing the value or value status.
D
Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”
E
Changing a ‘Set’ value to another ‘Set’ value is always recorded as a “USER” event. Table 8.3.3 shows if an event is recorded when the value status (e.g. “SET”) is not changed but the value does change or an option is selected from a multiple-choice list.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.19
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
Table 8.3.2: Logic for recording an event when the attribute setting is changed Value Status
Attribute Setting (Before)
Attribute Setting (After)
USER Event on change?
AUTO Event on change?
(Any) (Any)
No Audit
Audit
Yes
No
Audit
No Audit
Yes
No
Table 8.3.3: Logic for recording events when a value/option selection changes Value Status
Action to trigger an event
Attribute Setting
USER Event on change?
AUTO Event on change?
Set
Edit new value
Audit
Yes
No
Set
Edit new value
No Audit
Yes
No
Live
Value fluctuates
Audit
No
No
Live
Value fluctuates
No Audit
No
No
FB
FB value edited
Audit
No
No
FB
FB value edited
No Audit
No
No
Fail
Value fluctuates
Audit
No
No
Fail
Value fluctuates
No Audit
No
No
(None)
Select new option
Audit
No
No
(None)
Select new option
No Audit
No
No
Key:- FB = Fallback state
Page 8.20
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events
8.3.5 Audit Alarm Suppression Control: Automatic Mode Under automatic mode, adjustments to the setting of the Audit Alarm Suppression Control attribute are in accordance with a built-in decision table. Table 8.3.4 shows: (a)
the impact on the “Alarm” or “No Alarm” setting when using the front panel keyboard (or a Modbus protocol command) to manipulate the value status.
(b)
when an “ON” flagged SYSTEM alarm is raised as the result of a user initiated action.
(c)
when an “OFF” flagged SYSTEM alarm is raised as the result of a user initiated action.
Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Attribute control”> parameter page, located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.3.4: Logic for 795X changes to attribute settings and if an alarm is recorded Attribue Setting (Before Change)
Attribute Setting (After Change)
Alarm raised on change?
Live to Set
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live to Set
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
Live to FB
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live to FB
Alarm
Alarm
No
Live to Fail
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live to Fail
Alarm
Alarm
No
Fail to Set
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Fail to Set
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
Fail to Live
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Fail to Live
Alarm
Alarm
No
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
Value Status
FB to Set
Notes?
Read Note B
Read Note B
FB to Set
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
FB to Live
No Alarm
No Alarm
No
FB to Live
Alarm
Alarm
No
Set to Live
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Set to Live
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (OFF)
Read Note A
Set to Fail
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Read Note C
Set to Fail
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (OFF)
Read Note A
Set to FB
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Set to FB
Alarm
Alarm
Yes (OFF)
Read Note B
Read Note A
Table Notes: A
The 795x will also raise a matching “ON” alarm if one does not already exist in the Historical Alarm Log. This is normal and allows the system alarm to be cleared in the normal manner.
B
The 795x will raise a matching “OFF” alarm if the Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting is then changed to “No Alarm”. This is matching alarm is normal and allows the system alarm to be cleared in the normal manner.
C
The 795x will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “ON” flag.
D
The 795x will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “OFF” flag. This alarm can be cleared in the normal manner.
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Page 8.21
Chapter 8 Alarms and Events (Table Notes continued…) E
Table 8.3.5 shows what happens when changes are made to the Audit Alarm Suppression Control attribute setting without changing the value or (value) status. Table 8.3.5: Logic for determining if an alarm is generated when the “Alarm” or “No “Alarm” setting is changed Value Status
Attribute: Alarm (Before)
Attribute: Alarm (After)
Alarm Raised?
Set Set
No Alarm
Alarm
Yes (ON)
Alarm
No Alarm
Fail
Yes (OFF)
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Fail
Alarm
No Alarm
No
FB
No Alarm
Alarm
No
FB
Alarm
No Alarm
No
Live
No Alarm
Alarm
No
Live
Alarm
No Alarm
No
F
Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”.
G
A “USER” classed event is generated for all user initiated changes to the “No Alarm” or “Alarm” setting. Table 8.3.6 shows if an event will appear in the Historical Event Log when a user makes changes to the Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting without changing the value or value status. Table 8.3.6: Logic for determining if an event is generated when the “Alarm” or “No alarm” setting is changed
Page 8.22
Value Status
Audit Event Control Setting
Audit Alarm Ctrl Setting (Before)
Audit Alarm Ctrl Setting (After)
USER Event on change?
(Any)
Audit
No Alarm
Alarm
Yes
(Any)
Audit
Alarm
No Alarm
Yes
(Any)
No Audit
No Alarm
Alarm
No
(Any)
No Audit
Alarm
No Alarm
No
795x 2510 (Ch08/BB)
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.
Additional facilities
9.1
Feature: Archiving
9.1.1
Introduction The 795x series can perform data logging to generate historical records – archives - of parameter data. The archived data can be retrieved on-demand and displayed within the menu system. It can also be printed out as a report and retrieved by MODBUS (protocol) networked devices. Values from user-selected parameters can be statistically prepared (e.g. average, maximum, etc.) according to user requirements. Statistical results are recorded at intervals that are defined by the type of data logging. Each logging type has a separate archive with a 20-parameter capacity and the ability to keep statistics from the past. There are five types of data logging available:
1. Interval Statistical results are automatically recorded in an “Interval Log” archive at a user-selected time-span. An interval can be as short as a 795X machine cycle or as long as twelve hours. A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first interval.
2. Daily Statistical results are automatically recorded in a “Daily Log” archive at the same time each day (i.e. 24-hour intervals). A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first 24-hour period.
3. Manual Statistical results are recorded in a “Manual Log” archive only when triggered manually from the front panel or over serial communications. The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of data logging.
4. Alarm Statistical results are recorded in an “Alarm Snapshot Log” archive whenever an alarm is raised or is removed. (This is separate from the Alarm History log). The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of data logging.
5. Batch Transaction Batching data is automatically recorded in a “batch” archive every time a transaction is completed. This type of archiving does not need any configuring apart from adjustments to the archive size. Chapter 18 is dedicated to Batching. Note that the “Statistical information” section (starting on page 9.2) and “configuring details” section (starting on page 9.8) do not apply to batch transaction archiving. All the types can operate in parallel if required. The size of an archive is finite but flexible enough to allow re-sizing by hand. Re-sizing actions cause all previously recorded values to be lost forever and should be done prior to data logging commencing. Archives can be selectively viewed on screen and printed out as a report. Printouts of reports can also occur automatically after new statistical results have been archived. Associated parameters (database locations) can be manipulated or retrieved by MODBUS networked device.
Important notice! The two sections that follow should be read and understood before embarking on the configuration task. It is also advisable to try out at least one of the worked examples.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.1
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.2
Statistical Information The following statistical options are available you…
1.
Average This calculates the average of a parameter value sampled every 795X machine cycle. The resulting average is ready for whenever it is to be recorded to an archive.
2.
Difference This calculates the difference between the latest sampled parameter value and the result that was last copied to an archive. A result is ready for whenever it is to be recorded to an archive.
3.
Maximum This results in the largest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being copied to an archive.
4.
Minimum This results in the smallest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being copied to an archive.
5.
None This results in the very latest sampled parameter value being copied to an archive.
9.1.3
Analysis of an archive This section explains: x x
archive space and how it can change how new statistical data is added to an archive
Archive space and how it changes Each archive has a default amount of memory space in the 795x. The initial amount is the same for each archive. Dimensions for archive memory space are in terms of depth and width. x
Depth
Depth corresponds to the quantity of parameter values that can be kept.
x
Width
Width corresponds to the total number of bytes required to store a single value from every nominated parameter. (See Table 9.1.1)
Table 9.1.1: Bytes Required for all Database Location Types Width (bytes)
Data Type
1
Selection code for an option descriptor in a multiple-choice list
4
A database location without a status attribute (i.e. Set or Free) where the value (e.g. 1.25) is automatically generated by a measurement task. This does not include totals.
5
A data location with a status attribute (i.e. Set or Free) where the value (e.g. 1.25) may be generated by a measurement task.
8
Totals only. For example, Indicated Volume Flow Total
16
Dates and/or times.
21
Text only.
Available memory space for increasing the size of an archive can be viewed by pressing the PRINT MENU key and then selecting the menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”>/<“Spare arch. memory”>. It is very important to carefully plan the set-up of all archive space before data logging commences. Otherwise, be prepared for inevitable data loss when making changes or setting up other archives at a later stage.
Page 9.2
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Archive space can be change as follows: Action
Effects on associated archive
Extent of data loss
Parameter added to nomination list
Width increases. Depth decreases to compensate.
Associated archive
Parameter removed from list.
Width decreases. Depth increases to compensate.
Associated archive
Space increase granted
Depth increases.
All archives
This is best illustrated in the following sequence of diagrams involving one archive:(2) Archive after adding another parameter:-
(1) Archive with an initial depth of 8 and a list with 1 defined parameter:-
Parameter 2 = Time and date
Parameter 1 = Line temperature Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1 Width=4
Statistic entry 2
Parameter 2
Width=4
Width=16
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 3 :
Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1
:
Depth = 5
Statistic entry 3
Depth = 8
:
:
Statistic entry 7
:
:
:
Statistic entry 5
Statistic entry 8
The last available record
The last available record
Diagram notes: (a) Parameters shown here are defined with a data location number. An archive can have a maximum of 20 parameters. (b) The width value of a parameter is dependent on the type of data location. It is not displayed. (c) Depth is affected by the total width of parameters. Depth will therefore vary from the example shown here.
(3) Archive after requesting room to allow 9 entries for each parameter. Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 1 Statistic entry 1
Width=20
Statistic entry 2 :
Width=4
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 3 :
(4) Archive after removing parameter 2 from list
Statistic entry 3 :
:
:
Depth=9
Depth=9
:
:
Statistic entry 7
Statistic entry 8
Statistic entry 8
Statistic entry 9
Statistic entry 9
The last available record The last available record
Adding new statistics to an archive Several questions can be asked about adding new statistics to an archive… Q1. How are they inserted? Q2. What happens when all records of statistic results are full? The answers to these questions are provided in the exaples that follow.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.3
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
(a) Fixed time-span data logging This is described with two sequences of diagrams. Sequence 1: Archive is not full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to an empty archive. Notice how older statistics are pushed downwards.
Fixed time-span of data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
T1 = 8s
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T2 = 8s
Record: (1)14.53 (2)1.0130
T3 = 8s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T4 = 8s
T5
Diagram notes: (a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span. "Daily" type logging operates in the same way except T1=24 hours, T2=24 hours, etc. (b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined.
(1) Archive state after 8 seconds Newest and oldest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
:
Statistic entry 1
(d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation. (e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
Statistic entry 2 Statistic entry 3 :
:
(f) Data logging continues beyond T5 until disabled.
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
(2) Archive state after 24 seconds Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
14.53
1.0130
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
:
:
:
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
Page 9.4
Oldest statistic at present
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Sequence 2: Archive is full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have to be lost to make space for new statistics. Fixed time-span data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
T1 = 8s
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T2 = 8s
Record: (1)14.53 (2)1.0130
T3 = 8s
Record: (1)14.51 (2)1.0130
T4 = 8s
Record: (1)15.0 (2)1.0129
T5 = 8s
Record: (1)15.1 (2)1.0128
T6 = 8s
Record: (1)15.2 (2)1.0127
T7 = 8s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T8 = 8s
T9
(1) Archive state after 48 seconds Diagram notes:
Newest statistic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.51
1.0130
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
Statistic entry 6
(b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined. (d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation.
Oldest statisitic at present
The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
(2) Archive state after 56 seconds Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.2
1.0127
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.50
1.0133
:
:
Statistic entry 6
The last possible record for a statisitc
795x Op Man/DB
14.55 is now lost
(f) Data logging continues beyond T9 until disabled.
1.0132 is now lost
Page 9.5
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
(b) Variable time-span data logging This is described with two sequences of diagrams. Sequence 1: Archive is not full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to an empty archive. Notice how older statistics are pushed downwards. Variable time-span data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T1 = 8s
T2 = 16s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T3 = ?s
T4
Diagram notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is shown here with two completed timespans. Third time-span is unknown until an alarm is raised (or cleared) or logging is next triggered manually by a user. (b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined.
(1) Archive state after 8 seconds Newest and oldest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 1
(d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation. (e) T0 is when this data logging first began.
Statistic entry 2 Statistic entry 3 :
:
:
:
:
(f) Data logging continues beyond T4 until disabled.
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc with this archive
(2) Archive state after 24 seconds Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
:
:
Statistic entry 3 :
:
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
Page 9.6
Oldest statistic at present
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Sequence 2: Archive is full This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have to be lost to make space for new statistics. Variable time-span data logging and archiving Record: (1)14.55 (2)1.0132
1 second samples
T0
T1 = 6s
Record: (1)14.50 (2)1.0133
T2= 7s
Record: (1)14.53 (2)1.0130
T3 = 9s
Record: (1)14.51 (2)1.0130
T4 = 5s
T5 = 8s
Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.51
1.0130
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
:
Statistic entry 6
T6 = 12s
Record: (1)15.2 (2)1.0127
T7 = 8s
Record: (1)? (2)?
T8 = ?s
T9
(a) "Alarm" and "Manual" type data logging are both represented with multiple variable time-spans. (b) 1 sampled value taken every second from each defined parameter. (Assume cycle time is 1 second for this). (c) Parameter 3 is not defined. (d) Recorded values shown here are not the result of a specific statistical calculation.
Oldest statisitic at present
The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
Record: (1)15.1 (2)1.0128
Diagram notes:
(1) Archive state after 48 seconds
:
Record: (1)15.0 (2)1.0129
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
(2) Archive state after 56 seconds Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.2
1.0127
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
:
:
:
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
:
:
Statistic entry 6 The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive
795x Op Man/DB
14.55 is now lost
(f) Data logging to archive continues beyond T9 until disabled.
1.0132 is now lost
Page 9.7
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.4
Configuration details Use the following table to find the instructions for configuring an archiving activity. It is advisable to try out an example before embarking on the configuration task. Configuration task
1st. Page
x
Interval Archiving
9.9
x
Daily Archiving
9.10
x
Manual Archiving
9.11
x
Alarm (snapshot) Archiving
9.12
x
Re-sizing of archives
9.13
Note: Batch archiving does not require any configuring because it is automatically ready for any transactions that take place. Only re-sizing of the archive needs to considered, as guided in Section 9.1.3.
Page 9.8
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Configuration task: “Interval logging” Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list, (ii) ‘Set’ a start date/time, (iii) ‘Set’ a fixed interval and (iv) enable this data logging type. Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 1. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Interval log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (a) (b) (c)
5.
Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.1 for further guidance) Repeat (4b) with the next entry until all parameters have been nominated.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.2.
Menu Data List 9.1.1: First Entry Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose
Int list loc 1
x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
Int list action 1
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “Int” = Interval, “loc” = location
Menu Data List 9.1.2: Configuration Parameter Checklist of Interval Archiving Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose
Interval start time
x
‘Set’ the date and time for start of the first interval period.
Interval time
x
Select the interval frequency.
Interval log/print
x
Options: (1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (2) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Interval Archiving Notes: 1. The interval type of data logging operates independently of the other types. 2. Intervals are always synchronised to the 795x calendar clock. For example, a 10-second interval will first occur on the minute rollover and then re-occur every multiple of 10 seconds. An interval start time that is not divisible by the interval will effectively be delayed to the next multiple of the interval. 3. Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
1
The location identification of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.9
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Configuration task: “Daily” logging details Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list, (ii) ‘Set’ a start date/time and (iii) enable this data logging type Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 2. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (4a) Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. (4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.3 for further guidance) (4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.4.
Menu Data List 9.1.3: Daily Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List Menu Data * (as displayed)
Daily list loc 1 Daily list action 1
Purpose of Parameter x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “Loc” = Location
Menu Data List 9.1.4: Daily Archive Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Daily start time
x
‘Set’ the date and time for commencement of the first 24 hour period
Daily report
x
Options: (3) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (4) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Daily Archive Notes: A Daily type data logging can operate independently of the others.
2
B
A period that falls within an adjustment for daylight saving will be 24 +/- 1 hour.
C
Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Page 9.10
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Configuration task: “Manual” logging details Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list and (ii) enable this data logging type Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 3. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (4a) Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. (4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.5 for further guidance) (4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.6.
Menu Data List 9.1.5: Manual Trigger Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Manual snap loc 1
x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
Manual snap act 1
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “snap” = snapshot, “loc” = location, “act” = action
Menu Data List 9.1.6: Manual Trigger Archive Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed) Manual log/print
Purpose of Parameter x
Options: (1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (2) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Manual Trigger Archive Notes: A The trigger for manual type data logging is activated by selecting a soft-command at the menu data page with “Trigger manual log” as the parameter label. It is found under: <“Archives”>/<“Trigger manual log”>.
3
B
Manual type data logging operates independently of the others.
C
Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.11
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Configuration task: “Alarm” (snapshot) logging details Objectives: (i) Set-up a parameter list and (ii) enable this data logging type Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 4. The identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived (4a) Browse through the “Configure list” sub-menu to locate the ‘pointer’ and ‘action’ menu data pages. (4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function. (See Menu Data List 9.1.7 for further guidance) (4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.8.
Menu Data List 9.1.7: Alarm Triggered Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List Menu Data * (as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Alarm snap loc 1
x
Nominate ‘parameter 1’ with a database location ID
Alarm snap action 1
x
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from ‘parameter 1’. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions) * Abbreviations: “snap” = snapshot, “loc” = location
Menu Data List 9.1.8: Alarm Triggered Archive Configuration Parameters Menu Data * (as displayed)
Log/print on alarm
Purpose of Parameter x
Options: (1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated (2) “Log data only” - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving (3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Alarm-Trigger Archive Notes: A Alarm type data logging can operate independently of the others. B Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
4
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Page 9.12
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.5
Re-sizing Archive Space
Important notices! 1. Adding a parameter to a data logging list causes all recorded statistics to be immediately lost from the associated target archive. Other archives are not affected by this. 2. Removing a parameter from a data logging list causes all recorded data to be immediately lost from the associated target archive. Other archives are not affected by this. 3. Increasing or decreasing space will result in all recorded data being lost from all archives.
Re-size Instructions:
1. Press the PRINT-MENU key 2. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”> 3. Check how much spare archive memory is available Note: If the spare archive memory is reported as 0 bytes and archiving has not been in use, format the archives and then re-check the reported value
4. Re-size archives according to your requirements x
The following are ‘re-size’ menus:(1) “Alarm log” – Alarm Trigger Archive re-sizing (2) “Manual log” – Manual Trigger Archive re-sizing (3) “Daily log” – Daily Archive resizing (4) “Interval log” – Interval Archive resizing (5) “Transactions log” – Batch Archive re-sizing
Each ‘re-size’ menu features two menu data pages. One menu data page is for requesting an increase or decrease to the depth – i.e. the maximum number of values per parameter that can be presently stored in the associated archive. The other menu data page shows the maximum number allowed at present. To request more space for an archive… (4a) ‘Set’ a new value in the appropriate ‘request’ parameter (4b) Confirm the request for more space by selecting the "Format” soft-command (option descriptor) through the menu data page with “Format all archives”. Warning!
795x Op Man/DB
Increasing or decreasing space will cause all recorded values to be lost from all archives. Use the ‘max snaphot’ menu data page to check on the result of a request.
Page 9.13
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.6
Operation details (Reporting) Operations involve selective viewing and printing out of the archives.
Viewing Archives Recorded values can be viewed on the 795x display. No configuration is required for this feature. Follow the self-contained instructions that are provided below.
How to view the Interval Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Interval trig log”> 2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many values (per parameter) are available from previous elapsed intervals.
3. There are menu data pages (database locations) for displaying a previously recorded value for every listed (nominated) parameter. For example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the “Intvl snap value 1” menu data location. By default, the most recently recorded values from the last interval can be seen. The “Select snapshot” menu option is for selecting another elapsed interval. For example, snapshot ‘1’ is for showing the oldest interval of recorded values. Selecting a ‘snapshot’ that does not yet exist will always cause all the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” option.
How to view the Daily Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Daily log”> 2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many values (per parameter) are available from previous 24-hour periods.
3. There are menu data pages (database locations) for displaying a previously recorded value for every listed (nominated) parameter. For example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the “Daily snap value 1” menu data page. By default, only the most recently recorded values from the previous 24-hour period can be seen. Use the “Select snapshot” menu option to select another 24 hour period. For example, snapshot ‘1’ is for showing the very first 24-hour period of recorded values. Selecting a snapshot (i.e. 24-hour period) that does not yet exist will always cause all the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” option.
How to view the Manual Trigger Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Manual log”> 2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many recorded values (per parameter) are available.
3. There are menu areas for viewing previously recorded values for each listed parameter. Look for the numerous “Snap item value” sub-menus. By default, only the most recently recorded values from the last trigger can be seen. Use the “Select snapshot” menu option to select and display recorded values from previous triggers. For example, edit a value of 1 to retrieve the oldest snapshot. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will cause all of the most recent recorded statistics to be re-displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” menu option.
Page 9.14
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
How to view the Alarm Trigger Archive
1.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Alarm log”>
2.
Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu option. The menu data page shows how many recorded values (per parameter) are available.
3.
There are a number of menu data pages for viewing previously recorded values for all listed parameters. Look for the numerous “Snap item value” sub-menus. By default, only the recorded values since the last alarm can be seen. The “Select snapshot” menu option is for selecting and displaying recorded values from previous new alarm occurrences. For example, editing a value of ‘1’ will select the oldest set of values. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will always cause the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4.
The date and time, of when the presently displayed values were recorded, can be seen by selecting “View snapshot time” option.
How to view the Batch Archive
1.
Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Transaction log”>
2.
Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the <“Num snaps stored”> menu option. The menu data page shows how many batch transactions were recorded.
3.
There are a number of menu data pages for viewing previously recorded values for all listed parameters. Look for the numerous “Snap item value” sub-menus. By default, recorded values since the last alarm can be seen. The “Select snapshot” menu option is for selecting and displaying recorded values from previous batch transactions. For example, editing a value of ‘1’ will select the oldest set of values. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will always cause the most recent recorded statistics to be selected and then displayed
Printing Archives (through a configured serial port) Archives can printed out in several ways:
1.
Method: On-demand (1a) From outside the <“Archives”> menu This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU soft-key and then select the “Print report” menu option. Now choose a report by selecting from the multiple-choice of options. Option (as displayed)
Purpose of option
Interval log
x
Printout the ‘Interval’ archive as a report.
Daily log
x
Printout the ‘Daily’ archive as a report.
Manual log
x
Printout ‘Manual’ archive as a report.
Alarm log
x
Printout ‘Alarm’ (Snapshot) archive as a report.
(1b) From inside the <“Archives”> menu This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU soft-key and then the follow instructions. Instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”> 2. Select a menu that is name-associated with the archive 3. Select the “Print snapshot” menu option 4. Select the “Print” soft-command option (value)
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.15
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
2.
Method: Automatic Printed Report Archiving can be configured to automatically printout a report whenever data is archived. Interval archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Interval log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Daily archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Manual archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Alarm archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Alarm log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option Batch archive instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Transaction log”>/<”Enable”> 2. Select the “Log and print data” option
All methods require a Serial Communications Port to be set-up for printing. Printouts are transmitted through the serial port that is configured exclusively for connection to a printer.
Page 9.16
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.1.7
GUIDED EXAMPLES OF ARCHIVING Guided Example 1 Objective: (i) Set-up 795x to record the average of line pressure measurements on a daily basis This guided example involves configuring the “Daily log” archive to record (snapshot) the average of all pressure readings during a 24-hour period. It is assumed that the measurement task is already set-up. Instructions:
1. Add the parameter to the “Daily log” archive list (1a) (1b) (1c) (1d) (1e) (1f)
Press the PRINT-MENU soft-key Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Configure list”>/<“Entry 1”> Select the “Pointer” menu option – this displays a menu data page with “Daily list loc 1” Press the ‘b’ soft-key and then type in the database location ID for the pressure parameter Confirm the edited location ID by pressing the ENTER soft-key Select the <“Action”> menu and then change the menu data page option selection to “Averaging”
2. ‘Set’ an initial date and time (2a) Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“start time”> (2b) Press the ‘b’ soft-key and then edit a date and time for the commencement of the first 24-hour period Notes: x The 795X date and time is displayed within menu system. Look inside this menu: <”Time”> x A date of ‘zero’ is the same as specifying the present calendar date. x A time of ‘zero’ is the same as specifying the present time.
3. Activate the data logging activity (3a) Select menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Enable / Disable”> (3b) Choose an option as guided in the table Option (as displayed)
Purpose of option
Log data only
x
Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. No printed report following archive
Log and print data
x
Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. Print a report following archive. *
* A serial port should be configured for connection to a ‘printer’
4. Check on the data logging after 24 hours Results are best viewed on a connected printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program. Alternatively, results can be viewed within the menu system. (4a) Select the menu: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Daily log”> (4b) Select various menu data pages… Menu Data Page (as displayed)
795x Op Man/DB
Purpose
Num daily snapshots
x
The number of snapshots per parameter inside the “Daily log” archive.
Daily snap, 0=latest
x
View selection: 0 = recent snap, 1 = oldest snap, 2 = 2nd oldest snap, etc.
Daily snap value 1
x
Selected view of a value from the parameter listed under “Entry 1”.
Daily snapshot time
x
Shows the date and time of the last daily snapshot.
Page 9.17
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.2
Feature: PID Control Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) is a control algorithm for efficiently attaining and then maintaining a LIVE measurement parameter at a user-supplied target (or ‘set-point’) value. PID control is available for controlling one measurement parameter.
WARNING! EXPERT KNOWLEDGE OF PID IS ESSENTIAL TO MAKE USE OF THIS FEATURE 9.2.1
Overview Closed-loop PID Control The implemented PID algorithm will continuously check on the difference between a target (‘set-point’) measurement value and the latest LIVE value of a nominated measurement. Whenever the difference is unacceptable, an adjustment – to narrow the difference - is derived from a three-term equation, as seen below. A calculated adjustment value – or PID output value - is checked against any enabled safeguards before being made available in a database location. Once the PID output value is freely available, it can be transmitted to an external system through any analogue output. That action should result a process change to narrow the difference. This routine is repeated every cycle until the difference is within acceptable limits.
i § · §K · K c * ¨e i T * K i e k ¨ d ¸ * e i e i 1 ¸ ¨ ¸ © T ¹ © ¹ k 0
m i
Proportional Term
¦
Integral Term
Deriviative Term
Where: m i
= Control output (for steering measurement towards a set-point) {Menu Data: <“PID Output”>}
Kc
= Proportional gain factor {Menu Data: <“PID Gain”>}
Ki
= Integral time constant (‘Reset’ rate) {Menu Data: <“PID Integral act”>}
Kd
= Derivative time constant {Menu Data: <“PID Derivative act”>}
e i
= Difference between set-point and measurement (i.e. the ‘error’) at cycle i {No Menu Data Page}
e i 1 = Difference between set-point and measurement (i.e. the ‘error’) from previous cycle {No Menu Data Page} e k
= The error over k cycles for 0 d k d i {No Menu Data Page}
T
= Elapsed time since measurement value last sampled for PID algorithm {No Menu Data Page}
Notes:
(1) Variables K c , K i and K d can be edited through pages within the 795x menu system. (2) In practice, the first order difference term, (e(i) - e(i-1)), is very susceptible to noise problems. In most practical systems this term is replaced by the more stable, higher order equation: 'e = ( e(i) + 3*e(i-1) - 3*e(i-2) - e(i-3) ) / 6
Page 9.18
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Open-loop PID Control With this method, the aim is for the PID output value itself to be driven towards a user-supplied target (set-point) output value. The measurement ‘set-point’ has no purpose.
Whenever there is a calculated difference, an adjustment – to narrow the difference - is derived from the threeterm equation seen earlier. However, the calculated ‘error’ terms are based on the difference between the “LIVE” PID output value and a “SET” target (user) PID output value. The calculated adjustment value – PID output value - is checked against two safeguards before being made available in a database location. Once the PID output value is freely available, it can be transmitted to an external system through any analogue output. That action should result a process change to gradually narrow the difference. This routine is repeated every cycle until the difference is within acceptable limits.
9.2.2
Configuration details Instructions:
1.
2.
3.
Set-up the “LIVE” measurement that is to be controlled x
All the configuration reference pages for measurements are located in Chapter 11.
x
Ensure that the location identification number 5 of the measurement (to be controlled) is noted
Set-up PID control x
Review the schematic (Figure 9.2.1) in conjunction with the associated parameters (Menu Data List 9.2.1)
x
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”PID Control”> and then work through all the associated parameters, setting values and selecting options as necessary.
x
Check on the idle system time to see if the cycle time needs to be increased. [MENU: <”Time”>]
Configure a live analogue output to transmit a PID output value During every machine cycle, the analogue output will need to transmit a PID output value to whatever external system can initiate a process change (e.g. a valve controller increasing flow). The PID output value is either: x
an adjustment for the “LIVE” measurement to reach a target (set-point) measurement value or
x
an adjustment for the PID output value itself to reach a target (set-point) value, also indirectly affecting the “LIVE” measurement. [Note: The measurement set-point is not used in this case]
A guide to the analogue output parameters and settings is listed in Menu Data List 9.2.2 (on page 9.20)
Figure 9.2.1: PID Control - Schematic of Blocks and Parameters Status check decides the set-point used
SETPOINT (for PID output) 16 4
SETPOINT (for measurement)
2
"LIVE" MEASUREMENT
1
OR
Calculate 'Error'
5
6
PID Algorithm
3 8
5
7
10 PID Output
11
12
ARW Limit Check
13 PID Output
14
Check Ramp Limit
"LIVE" Adjustment Value (%)
15
mA Output
9
This number can be found by examining the ‘.man’ text file that is present on the media of Mobrey’s free FC-Config PC tool. The ‘.man’ file is unique for every software release. Contact Mobrey if you require a copy of the file and/or FC-Config. Alternatively, locate the data page within the menu system and then use the ‘a’-key to toggle the display of the number on or off.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.19
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Menu Data List 9.2.1: PID Control Parameters Menu Data (as displayed)
Index
Default Setting
-
PID Enable
1
PID Setpoint ptr
2 3 4
PID Error type
5
PID Gain
0.0
6
PID Integral act
0.0
7
PID Deriviative act
0.0
8
PID Range max
0.0
Notes?
“Disable” (“PID Setpoint”)
A
PID Setpoint
0.0
(A)
PID Input ptr
0000 (“Off”)
B
“Single error”
C
9
PID Range min
10
PID ARW
11 12
0.0 “Disable”
D
PID ARW HI limit
0.0 (%)
(D)
PID ARW LO limit
0.0 (%)
(D)
13
PID Ramp limit
14
PID Ramp Gradient
“Ramp limit off”
E
5.0 (%)
(E)
15
PID Output *
0.0
F:1, G
16
PID User Output *
0.0
F:2, G
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List 9.2.2: Analogue Output '1' Parameters (Guide for PID Control Set-up) Menu Data (as displayed)
Example Value or Option Setting
mA output 1 ptr list
“User”
mA 1 param val @100%
(<”PID Range max”> Value)
x
See Menu Data List 9.2.1
mA 1 param val @0%
(<”PID Range min”> Value)
x
See Menu Data List 9.2.1
mA output 1 type
(4-20mA or 0-20mA)
x
Select suitable mA range
mA output 1 source
(<”PID Output”>)
x
ID for <”PID Output”>
mA output 1 value *
(LIVE Value)
x
Values from <”PID Output”>
Comments x
Essential option
Analogue Output ‘1’ has been used here as a guide to setting-up
Notes: (for Menu Data List 9.2.1) A By default, this configuration parameter is usually programmed with the database location ID of the parameter <“PID Setpoint”>. However, any database location with a floating-point value could be identified - programmed in - as the parameter supplying the set-point (target) value. An input alarm is raised if the ‘value’ of the identified ‘set-point’ parameter is not a floating-point value. PID control is then temporarily deactivated until the alarm is clearable when a more suitable parameter is identified. B
This configuration parameter must be programmed with the database location ID of the measurement parameter that is to be controlled. It must be a parameter with a floating-point value. An input alarm is raised if the ‘value’ attribute of the measurement parameter is not a floating-point data type. PID is then temporarily deactivated until the alarm is clearable when a suitable parameter is identified.
Page 9.20
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities (Notes continued…) C
The “Simple Error” option will calculate the ‘error’ as simply the difference between the setpoint value and the measurement value. However, the “Complex Error” option will provide a more stable ‘error’ value. The error is derived from the following expression: 'e = (e(i) + 3*e(i-1) - 3*e(i-2) - e(i-3) ) / 6
D
Safeguard feature. See Section 9.2.4 on page 9.21.
E
Safeguard feature. See Section 9.2.3 on page 9.21.
F:1 For the closed-loop method you must change the status of <”PID Output”> and <”PID User Output”> to both be “Live”. Calculated adjustment values will then be displayed by both parameters. F:2 For the open-loop method you need to SET a value for the <”PID User Output”> parameter. The status of the <”PID Output”> parameter must be “LIVE”. G
Set-up any analogue output to transmit a value of the <”PID Output”> parameter. This database location ID is 1288. Configure the analogue output to utilise the ‘user parameter’ option. Refer to Chapter 11 for applicable configuration reference pages. Analogue output connections are as guided in Chapter 2.
9.2.3
Ramp-limit Safeguard Many systems implement a limiter on the maximum rate of change to the PID output value. This has a similar effect to an engine rev-limiting device. However, this PID safeguard prevents physical devices from being damaged through unnecessary adjustments. The ramp-limit is specified in degrees, representing the angle the output makes with the horizontal on a graph. The time axis resolution is therefore critical to the significance of this parameter. A limit of zero degrees would make output ramping impossible and a limit of 90 degrees or greater would allow maximum ramping. With the open-loop PID control method, the ramp-limit checks are mandatory and are applied every cycle. However, programming a zero degree angle will inhibit this safeguard.
PID Ouput (%)
Figure 9.2.2: Ramp-Limit safeguard illustration
Y
X2< Y
X1
X1< Y
X2
Time
PID Output (Tangent)
Ramp Limit Gradient
Y
PID Output (Angle) Xn
9.2.4
Ramp Limit (Angle) Y
Anti-Reset-Windup Safeguard Practical systems stop the summation of error terms if the PID output value is outside a user-specified boundary. This limiting of the error summation is commonly referred to as Anti-reset-windup (ARW). When ARW is enabled, ARW limiting is applied to every output value from the PID calculation before it is saved in the 795x database. The ARW limit boundary is specified as a low and high percentage of the full-scale (maximum) PID output value. With the open-loop PID control method, the ARW boundary checks are mandatory and are applied every cycle. However, a zero percent boundary will inhibit ARW limiting. Figure 9.2.3 demonstrates ARW in action, complemented with example settings as shown in Table 9.2.1.
795x Op Man/DB
Page 9.21
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Figure 9.2.3: Anti-reset-windup (ARW) in action PID OUTPUT varying as process changes
Process change (e.g. pump fixed)
ARW is limiting output % (e.g. minimum flow) 100
LOW
PID OUTPUT (%)
90
HIGH
ARW Boundary
ARW Boundary
HIGH
Process change (e.g. Pump failure) ARW is limiting output % (e.g. maximum flow)
5
LOW
0
TIME
Table 9.2.1: ARW Associated Parameters Menu Data ** (as displayed)
Example Setting
PID Range max
100.0
x
The maximum – full-scale - PID output value
PID Range min
0.0
x
The minimum allowed PID output value
PID ARW
“Enable”
x
Activate ARW boundary checking
PID ARW HI limit
100.0 (%)
x
% of
Comment
PID ARW LO limit
0.0 (%)
x
% of
PID Output *
(“Live” Value)
x
“LIVE” Adjustment value (%) for the mA output
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
** Parameters are located within this menu: <”Configure”>/<”PID control”>
Page 9.22
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9.3
Selecting units and data formats You can select the units which it displays the data, as well as the formats in which the data is displayed. You can choose the units and formats for: x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Volume flow rate Volume flow total Standard volume flow rate Standard volume flow total Mass flow rate Mass flow total Density Temperature Pressure ‘K’ factor Time period Kinematic viscosity Base kinematic viscosity Dynamic viscosity
A full list of the units (metric and imperial) is given at the end of this chapter. Note that, if you change the units, the values are converted automatically to reflect the change.
9.4
Parameter Alarm Limits You can set limits for some parameters so that an alarm is generated if the limits are exceeded. There are four types of limit: x
High limit:
The highest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated.
x
Low limit:
The lowest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated.
x
Step limit:
The greatest allowable step between successive values before an alarm is generated.
x
Comparison limit:
The greatest allowable step between values from two or more channels without an alarm
The parameters, and the types of limit that you can set for them, are: x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Mass flow rate: Gross volume flow rate: Net volume flow rate: Sediment and Water Meter density: Density ‘A’ & ‘B’ Base density Meter temperature: Meter pressure: Prover Inlet temperature Prover outlet pressure Prover Inlet pressure Prover outlet temperature Alarm X and Y: Alarm ‘A’ and ‘B’ Indic. Std. volume flow rate: Gross Std. volume flow rate:
795x Op Man/DB
high and low high and low high and low high and low high, low and step Comparison high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low high and low. Comparison high and low high and low
Page 9.23
Chapter 9 Additional facilities x x x
9.5
Turbine frequency Dynamic viscosity Kinematic viscosity
high High, low and comparison High and low
Fallback values and modes A fallback value is used as a temporary substitute for a parameter if a live input (i.e., the transducer, transmitter or wiring), which is normally used to calculate the parameter, should fail. A fallback must have one of the following modes: x
None
The system uses whatever value is available for the parameter regardless of whether or not the live input has failed.
x
Last good value
The system uses, for the parameter, the last value prior to failure.
x
Fixed value
The system uses whatever fixed value you have specified for the fallback.
You can set fallback values for:
9.6
x
Metering density
x
Base density
x
Metering temperature
x
Prover inlet temperature
x
Prover outlet temperature
x
Prover inlet pressure
x
Prover outlet pressure
x
Metering pressure
x
Densitometer pressure
x
Sediment & Water percentage
Units which the 795X can display The 795X can display data values with many different units of measurement, as listed in Table 9.6.1 on page 9.25. However, when communicating with other devices, the data is always sent using the base units. In Table 9.6.1, the following definitions are used: x
Base units
x x
The 795X transmits all data in base units (when using a MODBUS link). Data values in the 795X database are stored in base units for calculations.
x
Default units:
x
Units which the 795X displays unless you choose an alternative.
x
Other units:
x
Units which you can choose instead of the default.
Note that many of the abbreviations used in the tables are defined in the glossary.
Page 9.24
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 9 Additional facilities Table 9.6.1: Supported units of measurement
Parameter Category
Base units (Comms. & Calculations)
Default units (on-screen)
Temperature
Deg. C
Deg. C
Deg. F
Kelvin
Ohms
bar abs
Pa abs psia kPa guage kg/cm2
KPa abs bar guage MPa guage
MPa abs Pa guage psig
m3 x E3 ft3 barrel cc
m3 x E6 100ft3 gallon (UK) litres
in3 MM ft3 gallon (US)
Std m3 x E3 Std ft3 Std barrel Norm cc Norm m3 x E3 Norm ft3 Norm barrel Std cc tonne oz g
Std m3 x E6 Std 100ft3 Std gallon (UK) Norm litres Norm m3 x E6 Norm 100ft3 Norm gallon (UK) Std litres ktonne lb
Std. in3 Std MM ft3 Std gallon (US) Norm m3 Norm in3 Norm MM ft3 Norm gallon (US)
tonnes/m3 oz/barrel lb/in3 lb/gallon (UK) tons/barrel g/cc kg/cc
oz/in3 oz/gallon (UK) lb/ft3 lb/gallon (US) tons/gallon(UK) g/litre
oz/ft3 oz/gallon (US) lb/barrel tons/ft3 tons/gallon (US) g/m3 kg/cm2
Pressure
Volume
bar abs
m3
m3
Standard Volume
Std m3
Std m3
Mass (Total)
kg
kg
Density
kg/m3
kg/m3
3
3
Base density
kg/m
kg/m
Time
s (seconds)
s (seconds)
Frequency
Hz
Hz
‘K’ Factor
pulse/m3
pulses/m3
Dynamic Viscosity
cP
cP
Kinematic Viscosity
cSt
cSt
Base Kinematic Viscosity
cSt
cSt
Other units available for on-screen (as displayed)
kg/litre
As density min us kHz pulse m/s
hour ms pulse/ns pulse/s
day
pulse/in3 litre/pulse ft3/pulse Pa.s Reyn mm2/s ft2/s mm2/s in2/s
pulse/ft3 m3/pulse pulse/cc kgf.s/m2 slug/fts cm2/s
cc/pulse in3/pulse pulse/litre P lbf.s/ft2 m2/s
cm2/s ft2/s
m2/s
Mass rate
kg/hour
kg/hour
Mass units / time units
Volume rate
m3/hour
m3/hour
Volume units / time units
Standard volume rate
m3/hour
m3/hour
Volume units / time units
795x Op Man/DB
Mtonne ton
pulse u/s pulse/min
Page 9.25
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
Page 9.26
795x Op Man/DB
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
10. Configuring using Wizards 10.1 Introduction to Wizards Mobrey recommends that you use software Wizards to configure the 795x for your installation. Wizards are easy to use facilities that will take a user through all the data locations and decisions that are required to satisfy the requirements of a measurement task. There are individual wizards available for each measurement task. For example there is a “Pressure” wizard for configuring line pressure and atmospheric pressure. To fully configure a 795X, it is very likely that several measurement tasks are required and, therefore, several wizards will need to be used. It is often more efficient to use a “full set-up” wizard. This wizard can guide users through setting up more than measurement task. Section 10.3 has a “Quick-view” guide (table) for finding out what wizards are available and what can be achieved with them. Section 10.4 features a special wizard for selecting a standard for units of measurement.
10.2 Using Wizards Although wizards are easy to use, some preparation is still required. Use the following check-list to prepare. Ensure that: x
All physical connections to the rear panel have been completed. If this is not the case, refer to Chapter 2 (Getting Started) and Chapter 3 (About the 795X) for details of supported connections.
x
Front panel keyboard buttons and the menu system are familiar. Chapters 5 and 6 are provided to assist with this. It might be a good idea to bookmark the summary of keys in Chapter 5 for quick reference.
x
Identification numbers of important result data are written down. These numbers will be required for configuring facilities such as analogue outputs. There are two ways to find out data location numbers:
1
(1)
Examine the “.man” file that is supplied on the FC-Config1 media or
(2)
Locate the data within the menu system and then press the ‘a’ key to display the unique identification number on line 4. (Pressing the ‘a’-key toggles the number display on or off.)
x
Calibration certificates (and supporting data sheets) for all field instrumentation are available.
x
there is a comprehensive list of all the 795x input and output connections that are being used and a list of the measurement tasks that are required.
A free PC utility developed by Mobrey. Available on request.
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Page 10.1
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
Starting a Wizard from the front panel is easy. Follow these instructions: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key. Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears. Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option. Step 4: Press the ‘a’-key twice so that “Setup Wizard” appears on line one of the display. Do not worry about what line two is presently displaying. Step 4: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the wizard selection process. Step 5: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available wizards (on line two). Step 6: Press the ENTER key twice to select and then start a wizard that was named is on-screen. Once a Wizard is started, follow the prompts to supply the information it asks for and then, if necessary, use Chapter 11 and the menu system to edit the resulting configuration to match your exact needs. Wizard interactions involve several keys: a, b, c ,d keys
Answer a question (e.g. “Yes” or “No”) or used for normal data location editing
ENTER key
Confirm a selection or edited setting (e.g. new value), move on to next prompt
< key
Go back to a previous important decision prompt.
After completing a Wizard, the screen with “Setup Wizard” re-appears. Further wizards can then be selected in the same way as before. Note that it is not necessary for the “None” option to be selected before proceeding to other 795X work.
Page 10.2
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
10.3 Quick-view Guide (Set-up Wizards) Wizards
Measurement Tasks
Comments
Full Setup
x
Multiple measurement tasks
Skip the tasks that are not applicable.
Flow meter
x x
Frequency (Turbine Flow) ‘Meter factor’ and ‘K factor’
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Flow rate
x x x x x
Gross Volume flow rate Indicated Standard Volume flow rate Gross Standard Volume flow rate Nett Standard Volume flow rate Mass rate
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Txdr density
x x x
Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Prime Transducer Density
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Base Density
x
Base density (API or 4x5 Matrix Referral)
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Meter Density
x
Meter Density
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Txdr viscosity
x
Transducer Viscosity
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Referred viscosity
x
Referred Viscosity
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Specific gravity
x
Specific Gravity
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Temperature
x x x
Meter temperature Density temperature ‘A’ Density temperature ‘B’
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Pressure
x
Metering-run Pressure
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Sediment & Water
x
BSW Percentage
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Special calc.
x
Special Equation Type 1
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Analog outputs
x
mA signal outputs
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Pulse outputs
x
Pulse outputs
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Alarms
x
User alarms
Chapter 8 is about alarms.
Multi view
x
Multi-page multi-view (key display)
See Chapter 11 for measurement details
Communications
x x x
Printer Modbus Slave Modbus Master
Chapter 7 is a full guide to 7950/7951 Communications
Prover
x
Prover and Proving Details
See Chapters 16A and 16B for proving support
PID setup
x
PID Controls
Refer to Chapter 9
Batch setup
x
Batching transactions
Refer to Chapter 18
HART inputs
x
Live inputs from SMART type transmitters
Chapter 17 is a full guide to HART support
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Page 10.3
Chapter 10 Configuring by using Wizards
Strainer input
x
Strainer input
See Chapters 16A and 16B.
Retro batch calc
x
Retrosepective batch calculation
Refer to Chapter 18
Reset
x
Full reset
Use this with caution!!
Initialise
x
Clear all user programming to defaults
Use this with caution!!
10.4 Units Wizard Selection Follow these instructions to select a standard for the units of measurement: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key. Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears. Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option. Step 4: Press the blue key that is alongside this description: “Units wizard”‘ Step 5: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the selection process. Step 6: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available options (see map below). Step 7: Press the ENTER key twice to select the standard that is named is on-screen.
Units wizard (Selection) Choose option Metric Imperial SI
Choosing this will not do anything. Use scroll up/down keys to move through the wizard options. "Metric" "Imperial"
Exit Wizard
"SI"
Units Wizard Selection
Page 10.4
795x 2510 (Ch10/CD)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11. Configuring without using Wizards 11.1
What does this Chapter tell me? This Chapter is a configuration reference for those who are reasonably experienced with configuring a 795x series computer. It is also useful for those who provide technical support. It is primarily organised for a structured approach to configuring - the live inputs, the calculations and the live outputs - after the first power-on with V2510 software installed. For those of you in a support role, a ‘quick-find’ index is provided. Use the index to find the reference pages required for configuring or trouble-shooting a measurement task. If you are not experienced, return to Chapter 10 (Wizards) unless directed here by someone providing support. Not all features are covered in this Chapter. For example, configuring for HART communications and for flowmeter proving is a complex task and therefore kept in separate chapters. There are additional features in Chapters 7, 8, 9 and 18.
Quick-find Index........................................... 11.2 A structured approach to configuring........... 11.3 Reference Page Conventions...................... 11.5 Reference information................................. 11.6+
Rounding Compliance Statement Liquid Flow Computer software complies with the API standard for rounding down the floating-point values of live density and base density referral measurements. The rounding procedure is also applied to all inputs to the referral calculations (e.g. temperature) and auxiliary outputs from the referral calculations (e.g. CTL). Relevant sections in the standard are API 12.2 and API 11.1 VOL X.
By default, rounding is inactive. It can be activated for the next cycle by navigating to the
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.1
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.2
Quick-find Index Use Table 11.2.1 to quickly find the pages that are of interest.
Table 11.2.1: Quick-Find Index Category
Flow Metering System
x x x x x x
Analogue Inputs (mA and RTD/PT100) Digital (Status) Inputs Pulse Inputs Turbine/PD Orifice (GP) Coriolis
11.06 11.07 11.08 11.09 11.16 11.28
Totalising
x
Metering-run Totals
11.31
Viscosity Measurement System
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
‘Density Loop’ Fluid Temperature ‘Viscosity Loop’ Fluid temperature Meter Fluid Temperature ‘Density Loop’ Pressure Meter Pressure Header Density API referral (header Î base and base Î run) 4x5 referral (header Î base and base Î run) Known fluid meter density (GPA, IUPAC, etc.) Known fluid base density (GPA, IUPAC, etc.) Specific gravity Degrees API Special Equation Header ‘viscosity loop’ density Header viscosity Referred viscosity
11.33 11.34 11.35 11.36 11.37 11.38 11.44 11.45 11.46 11.47 11.48 11.48 11.49 11.50 11.52 11.55
BS&W
x
Prime selected Header BS&W analyser channels
11.57
Net Oil/Water
x x x
Percentages of oil (by volumes and mass) Percentages of ‘water’ (by volumes & mass) Net flow rates and totals (for oil and ‘water’)
11.59 11.59 11.65
Interface Detection
x x
Product detection system Product totals
11.74
7950/7951 Security
x x x x x
Analogue Outputs Digital (Status) Outputs Pulse Outputs Passwords and security levels Security level fallback
11.79
Multi-view
x
Multi-view display
11.82
Live Inputs
Temperature
Pressure
Density Measurement System
Live Outputs
Page 11.2
1st. Page
Measurement Task
11.73 11.77 11.78
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.3
A structured approach to configuring Preparation will help ensure that configuration work progresses smoothly. At this stage, it is expected that all the connections have already been made to the 795x Flow Computer. If possible, check on this by asking the relevant authority. Familiarity with the front panel keyboard and menu system is also expected. Work through the preparation and configuration stages that are listed below.
11.3.1 Preparation stage 1. Ensure that all of the information needed is at hand:x
A plan of the pipeline layout.
x
A summary of instrumentation connected to the 795x Flow Computer, providing inputs or expecting outputs. Include the type of logical connections made to the rear panel of the 795x Flow Computer. (e.g. “a mA type pressure transmitter wired to analogue input 3”)
x
Calibration certificates of connected instrumentation
x
Operational data (e.g. minimum and maximum flow rates)
x
A summary of core measurements to be set-up (e.g. flow rates, flow totals, density, etc.) (It may be useful to look in Chapter 3 and browse through this Chapter).
x
Identification numbers of data that is important (This is only for configuring multi-page multi-view and analogue outputs that can require the input of a location number).
x
A plan of what is required from additional features (e.g. Batching, Archiving, etc.) (It may be useful to look in Chapter 9 and browse through this Chapter).
2. Read the information on conventions used. 3. Browse through the rest of this Chapter and see how the reference pages are organised. (End of preparation stage)
11.3.2 Configuration stage 1. Get the 795x Flow Computer into the Programmer security level. (Turn the security key to the far right or type in the “Programmer” password to change security level). 2. Set the display contrast, display formats and the system cycle time. x
Display contrast may be quite dim when first powering on the 795x Flow Computer with new software. Look in the <“configure”>/<“Additional features”> menu for the appropriate menu and then change the setting to suit the environment.
x
Display formats are important when decimal places of results are critical. They are categorised under general headings (e.g. temperature, pressure, etc.). Look in the <“configure”>/<“Additional features”> menu for the appropriate menu and then change the settings if the defaults are not appropriate. Units of measurement can be changed also.
x
The machine cycle time is dependent on how much work the 795x Flow Computer is performing. Examine the idle cycle time indicator in the <“Health Check”> menu to see if the cycle time needs to be increased or decreased.
DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS UNDER THE CALIBRATION MENUS. SETTINGS ARE MADE BY SPECIALIST CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AT THE FACTORY.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.3
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
3. Configure the live (transmitter) inputs to get raw readings from instrumentation. x x
HART Inputs Analogue Inputs
All reference information is in Chapter 17. Turn to page 11.6
4. Set-up the calculation processes. Pulse inputs, flowmeter details, flow rates, sediment & water, flow totals, temperature, pressure, density, specific gravity, degrees API, viscosity, Batching and special equation type one. 5. Configure the live outputs. x x
Analogue Outputs Pulse Outputs
Turn to page 11.73 Turn to page 11.78
6. Multi-view Multi-page display (User key 1) 7. Alarms and Events (All reference information is in Chapter 8) 8. Serial communications ports (All reference information is in Chapter 7) 9. Set-up 795x Flow Computer security Set passwords for security levels and set-up the optional security fallback feature. (If not using the security key, change to the Engineer security level for the remainder of the configuration work). (End of configuration stage)
Page 11.4
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.4
Reference Page Conventions Most reference pages consist of: x x x x
A short bullet-point list of measurements that can be set-up A drawing of the process showing key blocks and how data interacts Menu references A list of menu data associated with the process drawing
Other reference pages consist of a brief explanation but no diagram. Menu references and a list of menu data are always present. Menu reference notation A notation has been used as a much shorter method of explaining how to move from the present menu to another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps: Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen. Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”. Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen. Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”. Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level. Note: Menus may vary to other software versions and releases.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.5
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.5 ANALOGUE INPUTS Features:
(Note: Rear panel pin connection information is located in Chapter 2)
Analogue Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) and 7951 (D-Type or Klippon) without option board 6 x RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) x mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) Analogue Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) with option board 6 x RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) x mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 10) Analogue Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) and 7951 (Klippon) with option board 6 x RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4) x mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 8) What to do: This reference page will assist when configuring basic data for all analogue channels that are being used. After each analogue channel is set-up, check that a “Live” reading - a percentage by default - is being displayed by the corresponding menu data page. A “Fail” status indicates an absent or failed transmitter. Later reference pages will expect all instrumentation to be already wired to the 795x and expect there to be a live reading. Configuring a measurement task will then involve setting range (scaling) information and selecting the appropriate analogue channel as the source.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Analog inputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Analog inputs”>
Menu Data list:
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Analogue Channel (and signal types)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Analogue Input 1 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA)
Input channel 1 * Analog input1 type mA input 1 ave type Input channel 2 * Analog input2 type mA input 2 ave type Input channel 3 * Analog input3 type mA input 3 ave type Input channel 4 * Analog input4 type mA input 4 ave type Input channel 5 * Analog input5 type mA input 5 ave type
Analogue Input 2 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA) Analogue Input 3 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA) Analogue Input 4 1 (RTD/PT100 or mA) Analogue Input 5 (mA only)
Analogue Channel (and signal types) Analogue Input 6 (mA only) Analogue Input 7 (mA only) Analogue Input 8 (mA only) Analogue Input 9 (mA only) Analogue Input 10 (mA only)
Menu Data (as displayed) Input channel 6 * Analog input6 type mA input 6 ave type Input channel 7 * Analog input7 type mA input 7 ave type Input channel 8 * Analog input8 type mA input 8 ave type Input channel 9 * Analog input9 type mA input 9 ave type Input channel 10 * Analog input10 type mA input 10 ave type
Abbreviation used: "ave" = average
1
There is a DIP switch block on the processor board for deciding if this is a mA-type input or a RTD/PT100-type input.
Page 11.6
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.6 DIGITAL INPUTS Features:
(Note: Rear panel pin connection information is located in Chapter 2)
Digital Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) x Status input channels 1 to 8 Digital Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) x Status input channels 1 to 8 (without option board 6 fitted) or x Status input channels 1 to 16 (with option board 6 fitted) Digital Inputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) x Status input channels 1 to 6 What to do: This reference page will assist when configuring parameters for all the Status Input channels that are being used. No digital inputs have a default function. However, they can be allocated a function when setting up proving related functions and/or when requiring any of the following: Remote Print
Transmit a current report through a serial port that is configured for connection to a printer. Selection of the input is made using menu data: <”Remote print Din”>
Maintenance-mode
Attempt a switch to “maintenance-mode” from the “normal” mode. Selection of the input is made using menu data: <”Maint mode req Din”>. (To succeed in changing mode, this function requires the Flow Computer to be in a “Flow Stop” state).
In the <“Health Check”> menu there is a Status Input sub-menu. It contains a menu data page with a series of digits on the second display line. Each digit indicates the present state of an individual input.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Status inputs”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“IO physical alloc”> and (3) <”Health check”>/<"Inputs">/<”Status inputs”> Menu Data List: Digital In Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6
Menu Data (as displayed) DIN 1 logic level DIN 1 mode level DIN 2 logic level DIN 2 mode level DIN 3 logic level DIN 3 mode level DIN 4 logic level DIN 4 mode level DIN 5 logic level DIN 5 mode level DIN 6 logic level DIN 6 mode level
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Digital In Channel 7 8 9 10 11 12
Menu Data (as displayed) DIN 7 logic level DIN 7 mode level DIN 8 logic level DIN 8 mode level DIN 9 logic level DIN 9 mode level DIN10 logic level DIN10 mode level DIN11 logic level DIN11 mode level DIN12 logic level DIN12 mode level
Digital In Channel 13 14 15 16
Menu Data (as displayed) DIN13 logic level DIN13 mode level DIN14 logic level DIN14 mode level DIN15 logic level DIN15 mode level DIN16 logic level DIN16 mode level
Abbreviation used: "DIN" = Digital Input
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.7
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.7 PULSE INPUTS Features:
(Note: Rear panel pin connection information is located in Chapter 2)
7950 (Klippon): x Pulse Input 1 – for use by a pulse based volumetric flowmeter 7951 (Klippon): x Pulse Input 1 – for use by a pulse based volumetric flowmeter 7951 (D-Type): x Pulse Input 1 – for use by a pulse based volumetric flowmeter x Pulse Input 2 – for use by Master Meter Proving feature What to do: Use this reference page to configure the basic live input data for any of the channels. The reference pages for configuring further flow metering details will expect the instrumentation to be already wired to the 7950/7951 and expect the “Live” pulse frequency. Master Meter Proving is described in Chapter 16. After each channel is set-up, check on the pulse frequency that is being indicated by the <”Flow meter frequency”> parameter. Use the Health Check menu to view other diagnostic information such as a missing pulse counter. Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Inputs”>/<“Pulsed flow inputs”> (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flow meter”>/<”Turbine/PD details”> (3) <“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>/<“Pulse inputs”> Menu Data List:
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Pulse Channel (and allocation)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse Input 1 (Flowmeter)
Flow meter frequency * PIN 1 input type PIN 1 error limit Pulse input 1 value Err Pulse ip 1 value PIN 1 sample time
Notes?
Pulse Channel (and allocation)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse Input 2 (Master Meter)
Prover turb freq * PIN 2 input type PIN 2 error limit Pulse input 2 value Err Pulse ip 2 value PIN 2 sample time
B A C
Notes? B A C
Abbreviation used: "PIN" = Pulse Input Notes: A
The programmed error limit for missed pulses is not applicable unless there are dual pickup pulse trains being received by the Flow Computer.
B
The pulse frequency is calculated using the following equation: P Using: F t Where: F is the pulse frequency P
is the number of pulses accumulated over elapsed time ‘t’ {Health Check parameter is <Err Pulse ip N value> where ‘N’ identifies the pulse input}
t
is the elapsed time (in seconds) since the previous pulse count was used in this calculation. {Health Check parameter is
Each live pulse input is read every 100ms. Accumulated pulses are then displayed every machine cycle. C
Counter for missing (error) pulses during the present machine cycle. There is also a totaliser for accumulating the number of missing pulses from each cycle.
Page 11.8
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.8 TURBINE/PD FLOW Measurements and Features Supported: x x
Indicated Volume and Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point 4 x Flowmeter calibration curve options Figure 11.8-1: Turbine/PD Flow Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>
Menu Data (as displayed) Flow meter frequency * Turb freq HI lmt Flow stop threshold Meter curve type Meter curve points Error% / Kfactor 1 : : : Error% / Kfactor 10 Flow/freq 1 : : Flow/freq 10 Curve1 K at Q1 : : : Curve1 K at Q10 Curve2 K at Q1 : : : Curve2 K at Q10 Curve3 K at Q1 : : : Curve3 K at Q10
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
Index
A
56 : 65 66 : 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 n 82 83 84 : 95 96 97
B
Menu Data (as displayed) Curve4 K at Q1 : : : Curve4 K at Q10 Frequency Q1 : : Frequency Q10 Curve 1 visc LO lmt Curve 2 visc LO lmt Curve 3 visc LO lmt Curve 4 visc LO lmt Curve 4 visc HI lmt Hysteresis Meter kinematic visc * Turb curve selected Polynomial degree Polynomial coeff a0 : : : Polynomial coeff a10 Flowmeter K factor * Indicated vol rate *
Notes?
(B)
Page 11.9
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TURBINE/PD FLOW
CONFIGURATION
(Menu data list continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed) Meter factor * Gross volume rate * Gross vol HI lmt
98 99 100
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
Index
(B)
101 102 -
D
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes: A Refer to Section 11.7 on page 11.8 for details of configuring this parameter. B
Notes?
Gross vol LO lmt Rate flowstop action Flow meter
D C
(X) – Indirectly mentioned in note
There are four turbine calibration options supported: (1) “Turbine correction” (Default) A ‘K-factor’ is linearised, once every machine cycle, from a user-programmable calibration curve. The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is a single SET value. They may then be updated by a proving session, by product detection or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see Figure 11.8-2 on page 11.10. (2) “Turbine conversion” The ‘Meter Factor’ (MF) is calculated, once every machine cycle, by a relative error (percentage) correction process. The ‘K-factor’ is a single SET value. They may then be updated by a proving session, by product detection or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see page 11.11. (3) “4 x (K v Freq)” (Viscosity Corrected Flow) A ‘K-factor’ is interpolated, once every machine cycle, from one of four programmable calibration curves. Curve selection is determined by the present viscosity range. The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is a SET value. Also, see Figure 11.8-3 on page 11.11 (4) “UCC polynomial” (Viscosity Corrected Flow) The ‘K-factor’ is a single SET value. A ‘Meter Factor” (MF) is calculated, once every machine cycle, using the polynomial equation from Section 3.3.3.2 of the ISO 4124:1994(E) International Standard. Parameters to be programmed into the Flow Computer are the pre-generated factors (a0, a1, etc.) for an established curve fit and the polynomial degree. (Viscosity measurements must also be set-up). This method is for when using some turbines, such as helecoidal two-blade turbine meters, to meter multiproduct oils or meter products where large viscosity variations can occur. Full details of the method are provided in the ISO 4124:1994(E) International Standard. Proving sessions can overwrite either a ‘Meter Factor’ value or the ‘K-factor’ value. It is dependent on how proving is configured and if the prove session is successful. Product detection can also overwrite a ‘Meter Factor’ (MF) value and/or the ‘K-factor’ value – see page 11.74.
C
By default, the Flow Computer calculates and displays live flow rates under a ‘Flow stop’ condition, even when there is negligible flow. However, displayed rates can be forced to zero by selecting the option descriptor with “Zero flow rates”. (Calculations using a flow rate value as an input will always get zero values during ‘Flow stop’)
D
Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ limits programmed (SET) with a zero value if an alarm limit check is not required.
Figure 11.8-2: ‘K Factor’ v Pulse Frequency Calibration Curve Figure 11.8-2 shows an example of a calibration curve profile with 4 points programmed. The lowest frequency on curve is point (F1, Kf1). This point corresponds to the <“Flow/freq 1”> menu data page value and the <“Error% / Kfactor 1“> menu data page value respectively. Highest frequency on curve is point (F4, Kf4). This point corresponds to <“Flow/freq 4”>, <“Error% / Kfactor 4“>. Point (FM, Kfm) corresponds to a live pulse frequency and a resulting ‘K Factor’. Page 11.10
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
TURBINE/PD FLOW
Figure 11.8-3: 4 x ‘K- factor’ v Pulse Frequency Calibration Curves (Viscosity Corrected Flow)
Quad curve profiles. A curve is selected by checking the metering-run kinematic viscosity value against range limits for each curve. Lowest frequency on curve 1 is point (F1, Kf1). This corresponds to <“Frequency Q1”> menu data and <“Curve 1 K at Q1”> menu data respectively. Highest frequency on curve 1 is point (F5, Kf5). This corresponds to <“Frequency Q5”> menu data and <“Curve 1 K at Q5”> menu data respectively. Point (FM, Kfm) corresponds to a live pulse frequency and a resulting ‘K Factor’ from the selected curve.
For the purpose of this example, C3 is the selected curve with the Meter Kinematic Viscosity value falling in the appropriate range for that curve. The Flow Computer re-checks the range every machine cycle. Hysteresis can be used with the viscosity ranges to avoid frequent switching between two curves.
‘Meter Factor’ from Flow versus Error Percentage Calibration Curve Turbines are supplied with a calibration certificate that describes the actual flow rates against percentage error in readings by a test meter. Table 11.8.1: Example of Certificate Data Flow rate (m3/h) Error %
400 0.11
280 0.17
160 0.06
100 -0.24
The raw data on the certificate has to be turned into turbine corrected values by the Flow Computer. To do this, a single curve profile must be set-up in the following way: Menu Data (as displayed) Meter curve type Meter curve points Flow/freq 1 Flow/freq 2 Flow/freq 3 Flow/freq 4 Error% / Kfactor 1 Error% / Kfactor 2 Error% / Kfactor 3 Error% / Kfactor 4
Value or Option “Turbine conversion” “4 curve points” 100 160 280 400 -0.24 0.06 0.17 0.11
Please note that this is an example and that only data from the calibration certificate of the turbine should be entered into the Flow Computer.
Turbine corrected values are not displayed within the menu system but the calculations used are as follows:
Vt
§ Va * E a ¨¨ © 100
· ¸¸ Va ¹
Et
Vt * Va * 100 Va
Where: Vt
= Corrected volume from test turbine
Va
= Actual volume (e.g. 100 from the above data)
Et
= Corrected percentage error in test turbine reading
Ea
= Actual error in Vt reading (e.g. -0.24 from the above data)
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.11
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TURBINE/PD FLOW
CONFIGURATION
The calculations use the SET curve profile data to get a modified curve. Table 11.8.2: Example Modified Curve with Turbine Corrected Values Flow rate (m3/h) Error %
400.44 0.1098
280.476 0.1697
160.096 0.05996
99.76 -0.241
With a ‘Live’ (or SET) indicated volume flow rate an error percentage can be linearised from the modified curve. The error percentage is then used to adjust the present ‘Meter Factor’ value.
Page 11.12
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
ADDITIONAL FLOW RATES
Measurements and Features Supported:
x x x
Indicated standard volume flow rate at the metering point Gross standard volume flow rate at the metering point Mass flow rate at the metering point Figure 11.8-4: Additional Turbine Flow Rates Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (2) <“Flow rates”>, (3) <“Density”> and (4) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
97 98 99 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
Menu Data (as displayed)
Indicated vol rate * Meter factor * Gross volume rate * Rate flowstop action CTL CPL Meter density * Base density value * Dens calc sel VCF * CCF *
Notes?
A
Index
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118
Menu Data (as displayed)
Ind std vol rate * Ind std vol HI lmt Ind std vol LO lmt Gross std vol rate * Gross std vol HI lmt Gross std vol LO lmt Mass rate * Mass rate HI limit Mass rate LO limit
Notes?
B B B B B B
Notes: A By default, the Flow Computer calculates and displays actual live flow rates under a ‘Flow stop’ condition, even when there is negligible flow. However, displayed rates can be forced to zero by selecting the option descriptor with “Zero flow rates”. (Calculations using a flow rate value as an input will always get zero values during ‘Flow stop’) B
Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ limits programmed (SET) with a zero value if an alarm limit check on the associated rate is not required.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.13
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TURBINE/PD FLOW METERING
EQUATION LIST
Equation List: Equation TU#1: Indicated Volume flow rate
· ¸ * 3600 ¸ ¹
Using:
QIV
§ f = ¨¨ ©Kf
Where:
QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {Menu Data: <”Indicated vol rate”>}
f
= Flowmeter (pulse) frequency (pulse/sec)…...…. {Menu Data: <”Flow meter frequency”>}
Kf
= ‘K factor’ (pulses per m3)…………..…………….. {Menu Data: <”Flowmeter K factor”>}
Equation TU#2: Gross Volume flow rate
Using:
QGV
= QIV * MF
Where:
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate (m3/hour)………....…… {Menu Data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {See Equation TU#1}
MF
= Meter Factor………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter factor”>}
Equation TU#3: Volume Correction Factor
Using:
VCF
= CTL * CPL ........………….…………….………..... (API)
Or:
VCF
§ U = ¨¨ © UB
Where:
VCF
= Volume correction factor…………………...……. {Menu Data: <”VCF”>}
CTL
= API temperature correction factor…….…..……. {Menu Data: <”CTL”>}
CPL
= API pressure correction factor……..……………. {Menu Data: <”CPL”>}
And:
U UB
· ¸ ...................…….………………………...... (4x5) ¸ ¹
= Fluid density at a metering-point…….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>} = Fluid density at base conditions….….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Base density value”>}
(Note: The equation choice is linked to the selected method for density referral)
Equation TU#4: Combined Correction Factor
Using:
CCF
= CTL * CPL * MF …………………...…………....... (API)
Or:
CCF
· § U = ¨¨ * MF ¸¸ .......………………………………....... (4x5) U ¹ © B
Where:
VCF
= Volume correction factor…………………...……. {Menu Data: <”CCF”>}
CTL
= API temperature correction factor…….…..……. {Menu Data: <”CTL”>}
CPL
= API pressure correction factor……..……………. {Menu Data: <”CPL”>}
MF
= Meter Factor………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter factor”>}
And:
U UB
= Fluid density at a metering-point…….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>} = Fluid density at base conditions….….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Base density value”>}
(Note: The equation choice is linked to the selected method for density referral)
Page 11.14
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
TURBINE/PD FLOW METERING
(Equation List continued…) Equation TU#5: Indicated Standard Volume flow rate
Using:
QISV
= QIV * VCF
Where:
QISV
= Indicated Standard Volume flow rate…...……… {Menu Data: <”Ind std vol rate”>}
QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {See Equation TU#1}
VCF
= Volume correction factor…………………...……. {See Equation TU#3}
Equation TU#6: Gross Standard Volume flow rate
Using:
QGSV = QIV * CCF
Where:
QGSV = Gross Standard Volume flow rate……….……… {Menu Data: <”Gross std vol rate”>} QIV
= Indicated Volume flow rate (m3/hour)….….…… {See Equation TU#1}
CCF
= Combined correction factor…………………..…. {See Equation TU#4}
Equation TU#7: Mass flow rate
Using:
QM
= QGV * U
Where:
QM
= Mass flow rate (kg/hour)……………...………….. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate (m3/hour)………....…… {See Equation TU#2}
U
= Fluid density at a metering-point…….…….....… {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.15
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.9 ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1 2) Measurements and Features Supported: x Prime Selected Differential Pressure – across the flowmeter x Mass Rate at the metering point - from ISO 5167-1 (this page), HART Input (Page 11.18) or AGA 3 (Page 11.17) x Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point – turn to page 11.18
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter inputs”>/<“Orifice”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (5) <“Density”>/<”Meter run density”>, (6) <“Pressure”>/<”Meter run pressure”>, (7) <”Temperature”>/<“Meter run temperature”> and (8) <“Health check”>/<”Flow meter details”>/<”Orifice”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Menu Data (as displayed) Flow meter DP cell 1 input src DP cell 2 input src DP cell 3 input src DP cell 4 input src DP cell 5 input src Diff press HI 100% Diff press HI 0% Diff press MED 100% Diff press MED 0% Diff press LO 100% Diff press LO 0% Diff press config Diff press HI switch Diff press LO switch Diff press cal error Diff press cal time DP deviation limit DP input alarms Diff press range Diff press HI lmt DP flow stop limit Diff press FB type Diff press FB value Diff press value * Orifice type
Notes? A A A A A
B C C D D E F G
Menu(2)
Index 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 t P -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Orif pipe diameter Orifice diameter Header dynamic visc * Orifice isentropic Pipe expans coeff Orif expans coeff Orifice cal temp Orif tapping code Venturi type Orif discharge coeff Orif expandability Orif vel of approach Reynolds number Orif corr pipe dia Corr orif diameter Orifice beta Pressure loss Pressure ratio Mass rate K factor Meter density * Mass rate * Orif mass flow calc Meter temperature * Meter pressure * Rate flowstop action Flow status
L
J J J
H
I I
Notes are on page 11.19. 2
Standards used: ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd.1:1998(E). Refer to the Standard for details of restrictions.
Page 11.16
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (AGA 3 3) Measurements and Features Supported:
x x x
Prime Selected Differential Pressure across the flowmeter Mass Rate at the metering point - from AGA 3 or from ISO 5167 (Page 11.16) or from a HART Input (Page 11.18) Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point - See Page 11.18 Figure 11.9-1: Orifice Flow (AGA 3) Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter inputs”>/<“Orifice”> (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (5) <“Density”>/<”Meter run density”>, (6) <“Pressure”>/<”Meter pressure”> (7) <”Temperature”>/<“Meter run temperature”> and (8) <“Health check”>/<”Flow meter details”>/<”Orifice/PD”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Menu Data (as displayed)
Flow meter DP cell 1 input src DP cell 2 input src DP cell 3 input src DP cell 4 input src DP cell 5 input src Diff press HI 100% Diff press HI 0% Diff press MED 100% Diff press MED 0% Diff press LO 100% Diff press LO 0% Diff press config Diff press HI switch Diff press LO switch Diff press cal error Diff press cal time DP deviation limit DP input alarms Diff press range Diff press HI lmt DP flow stop limit Diff press FB type Diff press FB value Diff press value *
Notes?
A A A A A
B C C D D E F G
Index
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 t P -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Orif pipe diameter Orifice diameter Header dynamic visc * Orifice isentropic Pipe expans coeff Orif expans coeff Orifice cal temp Orif tapping code Orif discharge coeff Orif expandability Orif vel of approach Reynolds number Orif corr pipe dia Corr orif diameter Orifice beta Orif mass K factor Meter density * Mass rate * Orif mass flow calc Meter temperature * Meter pressure * Rate flowstop actions Flow status
Notes?
L
J K J
H
I I
Menu(2)
Notes are on page 11.19.
3
Standard used: AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition). Refer to the Standard for details of restrictions.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.17
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (HART) Measurements Supported:
x x
Mass Rate at the metering point - from a HART Input or from ISO 5167 (Page 11.16) or from AGA 3 (Page 11.17) Gross Volume flow rate at the metering point
Figure 11.9-2: Orifice Flow (HART) Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> (2) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”> (3) <”Base density/SG”>/<”Base density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
-
Flow meter
7
Mass rate *
1
Mass rate HART chl
8
Rate flowstop action
I
2
Orif mass flow calc
9
Gross volume rate *
**
3
Mass rate HI limit
UBase
Base density value *
4
Mass rate LO limit
-
5
Mass rate FB type
6
Mass rate FB value
Notes are on page 11.19.
I
Flow status
** See “Extra Information” Section
Extra Information:
Calculation: Gross Volume flow rate Use:
QGV
Where: QGV Qm
§ ¨ Qm =¨ ¨U © Meter
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
= Gross Volume flow rate..……….. {Menu Data: <”Gross volume rate”>} = Mass flow rate……………………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
U Meter = Metering density…………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
Page 11.18
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART) Notes: (for “Orifice Flow Metering” pages) A
By default, every 'P measurement channel is configured to use the transmitter wired to Analogue Input ‘1’. Reconfigure 'P measurement channels to use other live inputs by editing the source selection menu data. A cell can be connected to any available analogue input or even attached to a HART network loop. If using HART, any unique HART (protocol) address can be given to a cell. (Refer to Chapter 17 for HART coverage) Do not be concerned about the effect of an unused cell input without a “None” option descriptor selected. A selected configuration - cell arrangement - code informs the 795x of the cell inputs to read and processed.
B
Table 11.9.1 shows a selection of configuration codes (option descriptors) for the more likely ‘pay’ and ‘check’ cell arrangements. Other combinations involving 5 cells can be selected. Table 11.9.1: Selection Codes, Cell Arrangements and Pressure Range Switching Configuration Code
Range Selection?
H=DP:1
‘Pay’ Cell #1 - always the primary - covers a high pressure range.
No
H=DP:12
‘Pay’ Cell #1 and ‘Check’ Cell #2 cover exactly the same high range.
No
H=DP:1 L=DP:2
‘Pay’ Cell #1 covers the high range. ‘Pay’ Cell #2 covers the low range.
Yes
H=DP:12 L=DP:3 H=DP1 M=DP2 L=DP3 H=DP:12 L=DP:34 H=DP:1p23 L=DP:4p5
C
Cell Arrangement
Cell #1 (‘Pay’) and Cell #2 (‘Check’) cover exactly the same high range. Cell #3 (‘Pay’) covers the low pressure range. Cell #1 (‘Pay’) used for high pressure range. Cell #2 (‘Pay’) used for medium range. Cell #3 (‘Pay’) used for low pressure range. Cells #1 (‘Pay’) and #2 (‘Check’) cover the high pressure range. Cells #3 (‘Pay’) and #4 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range. Cells #1 (‘Pay’), #2 (‘Check’) and #3 (‘Check’) cover the high range. Cells #4 (‘Pay’) and #5 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
‘LO switch’ is a low point marker in terms of a percentage 4 of the presently selected pressure range. A 795x calculated DP value, resulting from this programmed (SET) percentage, is the boundary at which primary use of a ‘pay’ DP Cell is automatically switched to another ‘pay’ DP Cell with a lower range. This switch will provide measurements that are more accurate. ‘HI Switch’ is a high point marker in terms of a percentage of the presently selected pressure range. A 795x calculated DP value, resulting from this programmed (SET) percentage, is the boundary at which primary use of a ‘pay’ DP Cell is automatically switched to another ‘pay’ DP Cell with a higher range. This switch will provide measurements that are more accurate.
D
Optional feature: ‘Calibration error’ (i.e. limit) Checks. x
<“Diff press cal error“> is the alarm limit for the maximum difference in differential pressure measurements between a selected (prime) DP Cell and the next suitable (prime) DP Cell. An alarm is raised if the limit is exceeded for longer than a period as SET by <“Diff press cal time”>. (Not enabled when limit is SET to 0).
E
Deviation refers to difference in differential pressure measurements between ‘Master’ (or ‘Pay’) DP Cell and any ‘Check’ DP Cells.
F
Automatic selection of a ‘higher’ range DP Cell can cause a mA input failure alarm to be raised even though the transmitter has not actually failed. The cause of this alarm is the mA signal from a ‘lower’ range cell exceeding 111% of the 20mA analogue input range as the cell continues to measure beyond it’s effective range. This alarm condition remains until the lower range cell is re-selected. <“DP inputs alarm”> gives the option of suppressing the alarm under this particular situation. By default, there is no suppression.
G
Identifies the range - low, medium or high - of the selected primary ‘pay’ DP Cell. (Read-only data value).
H
The “Reynolds Number” calculation is iterative and requires a previous value for the mass flow rate. This is the reason for showing the mass rate by an Orifice calculation block.
4
Alternative units, such as particles per million, may be shown on-screen.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.19
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART) Notes continued… I
The <“Flow status”> page is located within the INFORMATION soft-key menu. It shows if the Flow Computer considers there to be either normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe. x
Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“DP flow stop limit”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. <“Flow status”> will show “Flow stopped”. However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”> menu data.
x
In the case of an Orifice System, the DP value must be greater than the setting of <“DP flow stop limit”> for normal flow. <“Flow status”> will then show “Flowing”.
J
Support for the use of other primary DP devices is made possible with the ability to programme (SET) values for the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient. For this software feature, these values can be programmed (SET) to a known value only by using the “Flow Meter” Wizard.
K
The liquid expansibility factor has a fixed value of 1.
L
See “Prime Viscosity” reference pages, starting on page 11.52.
Page 11.20
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS Equation List: The equations that follow are common to both ISO 5167-1:1991, ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 and AGA 3 standards unless otherwise stated. Refer to the appropriate Standard for information on any restrictions not listed here.
Support for the use of other primary DP devices is made possible with the ability to ‘Set’ values for the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient. For this software feature, these values can be programmed (SET) to a known value only by using the “Flow Meter” Wizard. Equation OR#1: Mass flow rate The mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
Using:
§ GP · Qm = K * ¨ * U ¸ * 3600 © 1000 ¹
Where: Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)...……….............................. {Menu Data: <“Mass rate”>} K
= Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor............…..……….................... {See Equation OR#2}
GP
= Differential pressure measurement (in mbar)…….….... {Menu Data: <“Diff press value”>}
U
= Density of measured fluid.........................……….......... {Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
Equation OR#2: Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor
Using:
K
Where: K
= C * E * H * d2 * N1 = Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor.................……….................... {Menu Data: <“Orif mass k factor”>}
C E
= Discharge coefficient..........................………................ {See equations OR#9a to OR#9d} = Velocity of approach factor.......................…….…......... {See Equation OR#5}
H
= Liquid expansibility factor = 1...................……….......... {Menu Data: <”Orif expandability”>}
d'
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.....………..... {See Equation OR#3a}
N1
= S*
S
= 3.141592654.........................................………............. {Actual constant used}
2 * 10 5 * 1000 = 0.0003512407367 ……….. 4
{Actual constant used}
Equation OR#3: Correction for area expansion of the orifice and pipe
Using:
d'
Where: d'
Using:
>
@
= d * 1 t t c * Eo * 10 6 …………….……………..….
OR#3a
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion……….......... {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>}
d
= Orifice diameter at calibration temperature ‘tc’……….... {Menu Data: <“Corr orif diameter”}
t
= Temperature at the metering-run..................………..... {Menu Data: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc
= Orifice calibration temperature....................………....... {Menu Data: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
Eo
= Orifice expansion coefficient.......................………....... {Menu Data: <“Orif expans coeff”>}
D'
= D * 1 t t c * EP * 10 6 ………………………..……..
Where: D'
>
@
OR#3b
= Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion........……..….... {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>}
D
= Pipe diameter at calibration temperature ‘toc’..….…..... {Menu Data: <“Orifice diameter”>}
t
= Temperature at the metering-run.................……..…..... {Menu Data: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc
= Orifice plate calibration temperature...........………........ {Menu Data: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
EP
= Pipe expansion coefficient.........………......................... {Menu Data: <“Pipe expans coeff”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.21
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS (Equation List continued…) Equation OR#4: Diameter ratio
d' D'
Uses:
E
=
Where:
E
= Beta ratio (no units)…………………….………………. {Menu Data: <“Orifice beta”>}
d'
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion………........ {Menu Data: <“Corr orif diameter”>}
D'
= Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion......…….….... {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>}
Equation OR#5: Velocity of approach factor
1 2
Using:
E
= 1 E4
Where:
E
= Velocity of approach factor..............…………............. {Menu Data: <“Orif vel of approach”>}
E
= Diameter ratio........................................…………....... {See Equation OR#4}
Equation OR#6a: (ISO 5167) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient
Using:
Red
§ Q · § 4 * 106 ·¸ = ¨ m ¸*¨ © 3600 ¹ ¨© S * D'*P ¸¹
Where:
Red
= Reynolds number............………….......................... {Menu Data: <“Reynolds number”>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate from previous cycle….…................. {See Equation OR#1}
S
= 3.141592654...................................………….......... {Actual constant used}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)………....... {See Equation OR#3b}
P
= Dynamic viscosity................………......................... {Menu Data: <“Meter dynamic visc”>}
Equation OR#6b: (AGA3) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient
Using:
Red
§ Q · § 4 * 106 ·¸ = N2 * ¨ m ¸ * ¨ © 3600 ¹ ¨© D'*P ¸¹
Where:
Red
= Reynolds number....................………...................... {Menu Data: <“Reynolds number”>}
N2
= 1273239.5.....................................………................ {Actual constant used}
Qm
= Mass flow rate from previous cycle…...................... {See Equation OR#1}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)………....... {See Equation OR#3b}
P
= Dynamic viscosity...................................………...... {Menu Data: <“Meter dynamic visc”>}
Equation OR#7a: STOLZ (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for Orifice Plate
x Basic Equation Component Use:
C1
Where: C1
E
§ 106 · ¸ = 0.5959 0.312 * E2.1 0.184 * E8 0.0029 * E2.5 * ¨ ¨ Red ¸ © ¹ = Basic equation component
0.75
= Diameter ratio......................…………......................... {See Equation OR#4}
R ed = Reynolds number.............................………................ {See Equation OR#6a}
Page 11.22
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS (Equation List continued…)
x For Corner Tappings only Use:
C
= C1
Where: C C1
x
For D and D/2 tappings only Use:
C
Where: C
x
= C1 0.039 * E4 * 1 E4
0.015839 * E 1
3
= Discharge coefficient...........………......................... {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
C1
= Basic equation component...........………................ {See above}
E
= Diameter ratio...................………............................ {See Equation OR#4}
For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is larger than 58.62mm Use:
C
Where: C
x
= Discharge coefficient...................……….................... {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>} = The basic equation component........………............... {See above}
= C1 0.039 * E4 * 1 E4
1
§ 0.85598 3 · ¨ *E ¸ D' © ¹
= Discharge coefficient..................……….................. {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
C1
= Basic equation component.............………............... {See above}
E
= Diameter ratio..............................………................. {See Equation OR#4}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)..…..……... {See Equation OR#3b}
For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is less than or equal to 58.62mm Use:
§ 2.286 4 · C = C1 ¨ * E ¸ * 1 E4 © D' ¹
1
§ 0.85598 3 · ¨ *E ¸ D' © ¹
Where: C = Discharge coefficient.....……….................................. {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>} C1 = Basic equation component.......………....................... {See above}
E = Diameter ratio.................................……....…….......... {See Equation OR#4} D' = Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)……..…....... {See Equation OR#3b} Equation OR#7b: (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for a Venturi tube
C = 0.984 when there is an ‘as cast’ convergent section where: 100mm d D t 800mm 0.3 d E t 0.75 2 * 105 d Red t 2 * 106 C = 0.995 when there is a machined convergent section where: 50mm d D t 250mm 0.4 d E t 0.75 2 * 105 d Red t 1 * 106 C =0.985 when there is a rough welded sheet iron convergent section where:200mm d D t 1200mm 0.4 d E t 0.7 2 * 105 d Red t 1 * 106
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.23
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS Equation OR#7c: (AGA3) Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate
Refer to part 4 of AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition) for details of the Reader-Harris/Gallagher equation.
Equation OR#7d: (ISO 5167-1:1998) Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate
Equation Terms and Menu Data:
C
= Discharge coefficient……………………………………...………… {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
D'
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion).....……………….……... {See Equation OR#3b}
E
= Diameter ratio....................……………………............................. {See Equation OR#4}
R ed = Reynolds number..........................……………………................. {See Equation OR#7a}
Refer to section 8.3.2.1 of the ISO 5167-1:1991(E)/Amd.1:1998(E) Standard for details of the ReaderHarris/Gallagher equation.
Equation OR#8: Pressure ratio
P2 P1
Use:
PR =
Where:
PR = Pressure ratio...............................…………............... {Menu Data: <“Pressure ratio”>} P1
= Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)...…..……...... {No Menu Data}
= P PLoss * 10 3 P2
= Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar).……...…... {No Menu Data} = P1 GP
And:
P
= Pressure measured at the metering-run……...…....... {Menu Data: <“Meter pressure”>}
PLoss = Pressure loss (in Bar)..........………..…...................... {Menu Data: <“Pressure loss”>} = GP * 1.3 1.25 * E
Equation OR9: Gross Volume flow rate
Use:
QGV
§ ¨ Qm =¨ ¨U © Meter
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
Where:
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate..………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Gross vol rate”>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate…………………………..………………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
UMeter = Metering density……………………………...…………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
Page 11.24
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE V-CONE EQUATIONS Listed equations OVC#1 to OVC#5 are formulated from the standard flow equations as published by McCrometer, the V-Cone manufacturer. The remaining equations (OVC#6 to OVC#9) are provided for completeness and comply with the ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 Standards. Equation OVC#1: Mass flow rate The mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
Using:
Qm =
S * 4
§
· * E2 ¸ ¸ * GP * Cf * H * 3600 * Fa 4 ¸ © 1 E ¹
2 * g * U * ¨¨¨ D c
2
Where: Q m = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............……......……........... {Menu Data: <“Mass rate”>} gc
= Dimensional conversion constant = 1…….………...….. {Actual constant used}
U
= Density of measured fluid (in Kg/m3).........………..........{Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
D
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected…..…….. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
E
= Meter beta (diameter) ratio (no units)……...………..… {See Equation OVC#4b}
GP
= Differential pressure measurement (in Pa)…….…….... {Menu Data: <“Diff press value”>}
Cf
= Flow coefficient of the meter (no units)…………...……. {Menu Data: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
H
= Liquid expansibility factor = 1 (no units)…......……....... {Actual constant used}
Fa
= Meter thermal expansion factor…………………...…….. {See Equation OVC#2}
Note: The flow coefficient is not calculated when using a V-Cone meter. It is necessary to locate Cf on the calibration certificate and then ‘Set’ a value. Equation OVC#2: Thermal expansion factor (Fa) If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are the same…
Use:
Fa
Where: Fa
= 1 2 * DPE * t 528 ……………….……….……..……. OVC#2a = Meter thermal expansion factor………..…….………….. {No Menu Data}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Menu Data} t
= Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)….……… {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>}
If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same… 2
Use:
Fa
Where: Fa
1 4 2
D' *E' * 1 E ……………..…………………….. OVC#2b = 1 E' D * E 2
1 4 2
2
2
= Meter thermal expansion factor………..………...……… {No Menu Data}
D'
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..…. {See Equation OVC#4a}
D
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected…..…….. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
E'
= Beta ratio, corrected dimensions (no units)…….……… {See Equation OVC#3a}
E
= Beta ratio, uncorrected dimensions (no units)…...….… {See Equation OVC#3b}
Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio 1
Use:
E'
Where: E'
ª § d'2 ·º 2 = «1 ¨ 2 ¸» ………………….………..………………….. OVC#3a «¬ ¨© D' ¸¹»¼
= Meter beta ratio (no units)………….….……….………... {Menu Data: <“Orifice beta”>}
d'
= Cone outside diameter, corrected for expansion…...…{See Equation OVC#4b}
D'
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..….{See Equation OVC#4a}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.25
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE V-CONE EQUATIONS (Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio) 1
Use:
ª § d2 ·º 2 = «1 ¨ 2 ¸» ………………………………..……....………OVC#3b «¬ ¨© D ¸¹»¼
E
Where: E
= Meter beta ratio (no units)……….…………….……….... {No Menu Data}
d
= Cone outside diameter, uncorrected for expansion…... {Menu Data: <“Orifice diameter”>}
D
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion……... {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
Equation OVC#4: Corrections for thermal expansion of V-Cone If the expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same…
Use:
= D D * D * t tc ……………………..………….…….. OVC#4a
D'
Where: D' D
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……....… {Menu Data: <“Orif corr pipe dia”>} = Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Menu Data}
Use:
t tc
= Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)………….. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>} = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)..………. {Menu Data: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
d'
= d d * D * t t c ………………………..………...…….. OVC#4b
Where: d' d
= Cone outer diameter, corrected for expansion….…..… {Menu Data: <“Corr orif diameter”>} = Cone outer diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Menu Data: <“Orifice diameter”>}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Menu Data}
t tc
= Operating temperature(in degrees Rankine)……….….. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>} = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)…..……. {Menu Data: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
Equation OVC#5: Velocity of approach
Use:
E
§ 4 * QV = ¨¨ 2 © S*D
· ¸¸ ¹
Where:
E
= Velocity of approach factor………………….….……… {Menu Data: <”Orif vel of approach”>}
D
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
And:
§Q · Q V = ¨¨ m ¸¸ * 3600 © U ¹
Where:
Q V = Volume rate (in m3/second)…………………………….{No Menu Data} Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)……………………………. {See Equation OVC#1} U
= Density of measured fluid (in Kg/m3).........…...…........{Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
Equation OVC#6: Reynolds number
D * E * U
Use:
Red =
Where:
Red = Reynolds number……………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Reynolds number”>} E
Page 11.26
P
= Velocity of approach factor………………………..…… {See Equation OVC#5}
D
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Menu Data: <“Pipe diameter”>}
P
= Dynamic viscosity………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Meter dynamic visc”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
ORIFICE V-CONE EQUATIONS Equation OVC#7: Pressure ratio
P2 P1
Use:
PR =
Where:
PR = Pressure ratio...............................…………............... {Menu Data: <“Pressure ratio”>} P1
= Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)...…..……...... {No Menu Data}
= P PLoss * 10 3 P2
= Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar).……...…... {No Menu Data} = P1 GP
And:
P
= Pressure measured at the metering-run……...…....... {Menu Data: <“Meter pressure”>}
PLoss = Pressure loss (in Bar)..........………..…...................... {Menu Data: <“Pressure loss”>} = GP * 1.3 1.25 * E
Equation OVC#8: Mass rate ‘K factor’ Qm
Using:
K
=
Where:
K
= Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor........................…...……....... {Menu Data: <“Mass rate k factor”>}
GP * U
Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............……...…............... {Menu Data: <“Mass rate”>} GP
= Differential pressure (in Bar).......………….………..... {Menu Data: <“Diff pressure value”>}
U
= Density of measured fluid (in Kg/m3).......………........ {Menu Data: <“Meter density”>}
Equation OR9: Gross Volume flow rate
Using:
§ ¨ Qm QGV = ¨ ¨U © Meter
Where: QGV Qm
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
= Gross Volume flow rate..………………………………..{Menu Data: <”Gross vol rate”>} = Mass flow rate…………………………..………………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
UMeter = Metering density……………………………...…………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.27
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.10 CORIOLIS FLOW METERING Measurements and Features Supported:
x x x
Mass flow rate - from a Coriolis mass flowmeter or mA/Hart Input Gross Volume flow rate Gross Standard Volume flow rate
Note: When a Coriolis meter is configured to output a frequency representing volume rather than mass, you must use the Turbine/PD Flow metering support.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Flow meter”>/<”Coriolis meter”> (3) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (4) <”Flow rates”>, (5) <“Density”>/<”Meter run density”> (6) <”Density”>/<”Base density”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
24
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
-
Flow meter type
1
Mass rate input type
E
:
2
Mass rate HART chl
A
33
Error% / Kfactor 10
3
Mass rate 0% value
34
Flowmeter K factor *
4
Mass rate 100% value
35
Meter factor *
5
HART mass rate fact
B
36
Ind Mass Rate HI lmt
C C
Error% / Kfactor 1 :
:
:
6
Mass rate HI limit
C
37
Ind Mass Rate LO lmt
7
Mass rate LO limit
C
38
Indicated mass rate
8
Mass rate *
39
Meter density *
9
Meter freq HI limit
40
Gross vol HI lmt
C
10
Flow stop threshold
41
Gross vol LO lmt
C
11
Meter freq *
12
Meter curve type
13
Meter curve points
14 :
23
Flow/freq 1 :
Flow/freq 10
G
42
Gross vol rate *
43
Gross std vol HI lmt
C
44
Gross std vol LO lmt
C
45
Gross std vol rate *
46
CCF *
47
Base density *
48
Flow rate action
D (D) F
Notes are listed on the next page
Page 11.28
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
CORIOLIS FLOW METERING
Notes: Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. A Analogue Input…..….…… Turn to reference page 11.6 HART Input……….……….Turn to Chapter 17 B
This factor location is for converting the Flow Computer scaled mass rate value into units of Kg per hour. By default, the factor has a value of 1.00; this setting assumes that the flowmeter converted the measured mass rate from units of Kg per hour into a mA value.
C
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
D
See “Volume Correction Factor” references in the Equation List section. [MENU(3)]
E
A Coriolis mass flow meter is a resonating tube device that will distort proportionately to the rate of fluid mass flowing through it. The relationship of mass flow to the distortion for the meter is characterised to produce a k-factor in pulse/mass or mass/pulse units. The signal output will generally be in the form of a pulse frequency signal, although a current 4-20mA output may also be available. The Coriolis meter may also be configured to output a signal representative of volume. In this case the flow computer will handle the meter signal output in the same way as a single pulse input turbine signal. Unlike turbine signals ‘error checking’, (IP252), will not be carried out on the mass flow input signal. However, similar to the turbine linearisation, the flow computer allows the user to define a mass flow linearisation curve across a flow range. The curve will define the error deviation against flow or K-factor against frequency in terms of mass units. The linearisation calculation will automatically account for mass or volume type units based on the meter type selected by the user during configuration.
F
By default, the 7955 calculates, for display purposes only, the actual live flow rates under a ‘Flow stopped’ condition, even when there is negligible flow. However, display can be forced to show zero flow by selecting the multiple-choice option with “Zero flow rates”. (Calculations using a flow rate will always use a zero value during a “Flow Stop” condition)
G
There following calibration curve options for Coriolis flow metering are supported: (1) Conversion (K v Hz) A ‘K-factor’ is interpolated, once during every machine cycle, from a user-programmable calibration curve. The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is a fixed (SET) value. A SET MF value can still be updated by a proving session, by product detection, or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see Figure 11.8-2 on page 11.10. (2) Correction (% v flow”) (Default Option) The ‘Meter factor’ (MF) is calculated, once during every machine cycle, by a relative error (percentage) correction process. The ‘K-factor’ is a fixed (SET) value. They may then be updated by a proving session, by product detection or by a MODBUS networked device. Also, see page 11.11. Proving sessions can overwrite either a ‘Meter factor’ value or the ‘K factor’ value. It is dependent on how proving is configured and if the prove session is successful. (See Chapter 16) Product detection can also overwrite a ‘Meter factor’ (MF) value and/or the ‘K factor’ value.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.29
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CORIOLIS FLOW METERING
EQUATION LIST
Equation List: Equation CFM#1: Gross Volume flow rate
Using:
QGV
§ ¨ Qm =¨ ¨U © Meter
Where:
QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate…….……….……….. {Menu Data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate……………………...…………. {Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
· ¸ ¸ ¸ ¹
UMeter = Metering density………………...……………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>}
Equation CFM#2: Gross Standard Volume
Using:
QGSV = QGV * VCF
Where:
QSGV = Gross Standard Volume flow rate...……….. {Menu Data: <”Gross std vol rate”>} QGV
= Gross Volume flow rate..…………………….. {See Equation CFM#1}
VCF = Volume Correction Factor…………….…….. {See Equation CFM#3}
Equation CFM#3: Volume Correction Factor The equation used is dependent on the selected method for density referral - API Standard or 4x5 Matrix
Using:
VCF = CTL * CPL …………………………….…….... (API)
Or:
§U VCF = ¨¨ Meter © UBase
Where:
VCF = Volume Correction Factor…………….…….. {Menu Data: <”VCF”>}
· ¸ ...……………………………........... (4x5) ¸ ¹
CTL
= Correction for temperature effects on fluid… {Menu Data: <”CTL”>}
CPL
= Correction for pressure effects on fluid…… {Menu Data: <”CPL”>}
UMeter = Metering density………………...……………. {Menu Data: <”Meter density”>} UBase = Base density…………………….……………. {Menu Data: <”Base density value”>}
Page 11.30
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.11 TOTALISERS 7950/7951 totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over counter: Flow Total............... 5 x flow rate based totals for a metering-point. Each total is enabled by configuring the associated meter-run flow rate. Alarm Total……...… 1 x user total for a metering-point. This is for totalling of either a flow rate or missing pulses from a dual pickup flowmeter. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm. Error Pulse Total…. 1 x error pulse total for a metering-point. This is for totalling of missing pulses from a dual pickup flowmeter. This totaliser function is permanently enabled.
Further separation of a total is made by the flow computer mode: x
Normal mode (Standard) total This total is frozen whilst flow computer is in maintenance mode.
x
Maintenance mode total This total is frozen whilst the flow computer is in the normal operating mode.
Figure 11.11-1: Totaliser Blocks and Parameters
Extra Information: (1) For information on configuring pulse output channels, turn to page 11.78. (2) Net Oil and Net ‘Water’ totalisers are shown on page 11.65. Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisation”>/<”Standard”> (2) <”Flow rates”> (3) <“Flow totals”>/<”Meter run totals”> (4) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> (5) INFORMATION (‘i’-key) Menu
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data Lists: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Indicated vol rate *
Gross volume rate *
Ind volume total Ind vol increment Ind vol rollover Ind vol inhibit Maint IV total Maint IV inc
Gross vol total Gross vol inc Gross vol rollover Gross vol inhibit Maint GV total Maint GV inc
Ind std vol rate * Ind std vol total Ind std vol inc Ind std vol roll Ind std vol inhibit Maint ISV total Maint ISV inc
Gross std vol rate * Gross std vol total Gross std vol inc Gross std vol roll Gross std vol inh Maint GSV total Maint GSV inc
Mass rate * Mass total Mass increment Mass rollover Mass inhibit
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
8 9 10 11 12 13
Alarm total src ptr Alarm increment Alarm total Alarm rollover Err pulse ip 1 value Main turb errors
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Notes?
Index
E C B B
14 15 16 17 -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Main turb err roll Maint turb error Maint turb err inc Operating mode Flow status Flow meter
?
A
C D
Maint mass total
Maint mass inc Notes?
C
G (A)
Page 11.31
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
TOTALISERS
CONFIGURATION
Notes: A
Indicated Volume measurements are not available when Orifice metering is selected.
B
Missing (or error) pulses are not counted unless the volumetric pulse flowmeter has dual pick-ups wired to the Flow Computer and the pulse input channel is configured accordingly.
C
By default, rollover (to zero) limits are pre-set to a very large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limits are sufficient for the metering application.
D
This optional totaliser parameter is for freezing the flow total whilst there is an active alarm. Also, read note E.
E
The alarm totaliser can be configured to continue totalling of a single parameter whilst there is an active alarm.
F
An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle. (a) Orifice or Coriolis Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu. (b) Turbine Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’ – the period that pulses were accumulated for calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value is available for viewing within the <”Health check”> feature menu. Editing an increment value has no effect.
G
There are two flow computer modes to be aware of: 1. Normal-mode In this mode, a standard total (e.g. “Ind volume total”) can increment. The corresponding maintenance-mode total (e.g. “Maint IV total”) will never increment. 2. Maintenance-mode In this mode, a maintenance-mode total can increment. The corresponding standard total will never increment. A mode can be selected only when the flow computer is in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state. For information on how the flow computer can be in a ‘flow stopped’ state, refer to the <”Flow status”> menu data notes on the flow metering pages: Turbine Flow.….. Page 11.9 Orifice Flow…..... Page 11.16 Coriolis Flow.….. Page 11.28
Page 11.32
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.12 PRIME ‘DENSITY LOOP’ FLUID TEMPERATURE Measurements Supported:
x x x
(Also, see page 11.38 for use of these measurements)
‘Density loop’ fluid temperature ‘A’ ‘Density’ loop fluid temperature ‘B’ Prime selected ‘density loop’ fluid temperature Figure 11.12-1: Prime ‘Density Loop’ Temperature Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Temperature”>/<“Densitometer temp”>, (2) <“Temperature”>/<“Dens temperature”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Header dens”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Menu Data (as displayed)
Dens temp A source Dens temp A @ 100% Dens temp A @ 0% Dens temp A HI lmt Dens temp A LO lmt Dens temp A FB type Dens temp A FB val Dens temp A offset Density A temp * Dens temp B source Dens temp B @ 100% Dens temp B @ 0%
Notes?
Index
A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B B C C D
Menu Data (as displayed)
Dens temp B HI limit Dens temp B LO limit Dens tempB FB type Dens tempB FB val Dens temp B offset Density B temp * Header txdr dens sel Prime dens temp * Prime dens temp FB
Notes?
B B C C D E, (F) (F) F
Notes: (X) – indirect reference in note X A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the value of the associated measurement.
C
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
D
Optional parameter for on-line correction to the LIVE associated measurement
E
See “Density” pages for use of this configuration parameter.
F Fallback value replaces the LIVE prime value when the prime density selection process (page 11.38) results in the fallback condition. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.33
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.13 PRIME ‘VISCOSITY LOOP’ FLUID TEMPERATURE Measurements Supported:
x x
(Also, see page 11.52 for use of these measurements)
‘Viscosity loop’ fluid temperature ‘A’ and temperature ‘B’ Prime ‘viscosity loop’ fluid temperature Figure 11.13-1: Prime 'Viscosity Loop' Temperature Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List:
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Temperature”>/<“Viscometer temp”>, (2) <“Temperature”>/<“Visc temperature”> and (3) <“Configure”>/<“Viscosity”>/<“Header viscosity”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Menu Data (as displayed)
Visc A temp source Visc A temp @ 100% Visc A temp @ 0% Visc A temp high lmt Visc A temp low lmt Visc A temp step lmt Visc A temp FB type Visc A temp FB value Visc A temp offset Visc A temperature * Visc B temp source Visc B temp @ 100%
Notes?
Index
A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B B C D D
A
Menu Data (as displayed)
Visc B temp @ 0% Visc B temp high lmt Visc B temp low lmt Visc B temp step lmt Visc B temp FB type Visc B temp FB value Visc B temp offset Visc B temperature * Header visc select Prime visc temp * Prime visc temp FB
Notes?
B B C D D
F, (G) (G) G
Notes: A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
E
Optional parameter for on-line correction to the LIVE associated measurement
F
See “Viscosity” reference pages for use of this configuration parameter.
G
Fallback value replaces the LIVE prime value when the prime viscosity selection process (page 11.38) results in a fallback condition.
Page 11.34
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.14 METER TEMPERATURE Measurement Supported:
x
(Also, see pages 11.44 - 45 for use of meter temperature)
Fluid temperature at the metering point Figure 11.14-1: Metering Temperature Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Temperature”>/<“Meter temperature”> and (2) <“Temperature”>/<“Meter run temp”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
A
6
Meter temp LO limit
B
7
Meter temp step lmt
C
1
Meter temp input chl
2
Meter temp @ 100%
3
Meter temp @ 0%
8
Meter temp FB type
D
4
Meter temp offset
E
9
Meter temp FB value
D
5
Meter temp HI limit
B
10
Meter temperature *
Notes: A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limit with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle.
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
E
Optional parameter for on-line correction to the LIVE associated measurement
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.35
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.15 ‘DENSITY LOOP’ PRESSURE Measurement Supported:
x
‘Density loop’ pressure Figure 11.15-1: 'Density Loop' Pressure Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Pressure”>/<“Header pressure”> and (2) <“Pressure”>/<“Dens pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
A
6
Dens press step lmt
1
Density pressure src
2
Dens press 100% val
7
Dens press FB type
3
Dens press 0% val
8
Dens press FB val
4
Dens press HI lmt
B
9
Density pressure *
5
Dens press LO lmt
B
Notes?
C D (D)
Notes: A Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
Page 11.36
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.16 METER PRESSURE Measurement Supported:
x
Pressure at the metering point Figure 11.16-1: Metering Pressure Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Pressure”>/<“Meter run pressure”> and (2) <“Pressure”>/<“Meter run pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
A
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
1
Meter press source
6
Meter press step lmt
C
2
Meter press 100% val
7
Meter press FB type
D
3
Meter press 0% val
8
Meter press FB val
4
Meter press HI lmt
B
9
Meter pressure *
5
Meter press LO lmt
B
(D)
Notes: Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. A Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 17 B
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
C
Optional alarm limit. Program it with a zero value to avoid a limit alarm check on the difference between two values of the associated parameter. Comparison values are from the present cycle and the previous cycle.
D
Optional fallback facility for the associated measurement
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.37
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.17 HEADER DENSITY Measurements Supported:
x x x
(Note: These measurements are also available when measuring viscosity)
Density ‘A’ – from a liquid density transducer or a 7827 5 viscosity analyser) Density ‘B’ – from a liquid density transducer, a 7827 viscosity analyser, a mA Input or a HART Input Prime selected density – from Density ‘A’ or ‘B’ or Fallback facility)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Time period inputs”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<“Header dens”> and (4) <“Density”>/<“Header density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1a 1b 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 1 * Time period input 1b * Time period 1 type Dens 1 glitch limit Dens meter 1 K0 Dens meter 1 K1 Dens meter 1 K2 Density 1 correct Dens meter 1 K18 Dens meter 1 K19 Dens meter 1 K20a Dens meter 1 K20b Dens meter 1 K21a Dens meter 1 K21b Dens meter 1 type Dens meter 1 VOS Dens meter 1 offset Dens meter 1 factor Density A value * Header den comp lmt Density B calc sel
Notes?
Index
A A A
21a 21b 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
C
C
B
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 2 * Time period input 2b * Time period 2 type Dens 2 glitch limit Dens meter 2 K0 Dens meter 2 K1 Dens meter 2 K2 Density 2 correct Dens meter 2 K18 Dens meter 2 K19 Dens meter 2 K20a Dens meter 2 K20b Dens meter 2 K21a Dens meter 2 K21b Dens meter 2 type Dens meter 2 VOS Dens meter 2 offset Dens meter 2 factor DensB Ain/HART src Density B @ 100% Density B @ 100%
Notes?
C
C
F
The Mobrey 7827 does not measure fluid density as accurately as a Mobrey 783x or 784x liquid density transducer. Density measurements from a 7827 also require a correction for viscosity effects if the fluid viscosity exceeds 100cP.
Page 11.38
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
HEADER DENSITY
(Menu data list continued…) Index
41 42 43 44 45 46
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Density B value * Header txdr dens sel Density HI limit Density LO limit Header dens FB type Header dens FB val
Index
47 48
D E E
tA tB PDensity
Menu Data (as displayed)
Header density * Head analog dens * Density A temp * Density B temp * Density pressure *
Notes?
G
Notes: A The “Density” option (value) is for when the density ‘A’ measurement involves a liquid density transducer. Live transducer values will appear in the <“Time period Input 1”> menu data page (location).
The “7827” option (value) is for when the density ‘A’ measurement involves a Mobrey 7827 viscosity analyser. Live 7827 values will appear in the <“Time Period Input 1b”> menu data page (location) instead of the <“Time Period Input 1”> menu data page (location). (Chapter 2 features time period input and analogue input rear panel connections) B
This alarm limit checking can be switched off by setting a large enough density value that will always greater than the difference between density ‘A’ and density ‘B’ measurements.
C
Various combinations of corrections to density can be selected, as shown in Table 11.17.1. Table 11.17.2 then shows the availability of selected corrections when using different types of transducer.
D
Select a logic table to be used by the Flow Computer to perform prime header density channel re-selection. (For details, turn to the “Prime Header Density Re-selection Procedure” section on page 11.37)
E
High and low alarm limits are applied to the selected prime density value. These limits are not checked when both limits are programmed (SET) to zero.
F
Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live input channel has been completed. Analogue Input….…… Turn to page 11.6 HART Input……………Turn to Chapter 16
G
This measurement can be used by the Product Detection feature. (See “Interface Detection” page 11.74) Table 11.17.1: Menu data option descriptors for selecting corrections Option Descriptor (as displayed)
Correction: Temperature
Correction: Pressure
Correction: VOS
Correction: Viscosity
None
U
U
U
U
Temp
9
U
U
U
Press
U
9
U
U
VOS
U
U
9
U
Temp press
9
9
U
U
Temp VOS
9
U
9
U
Press VOS
U
9
9
U
Temp press VOS
9
9
9
U
Table 11.17.2: Availability of Corrections to Density (by transducer) Transducer Type
Temperature Effects
Pressure Effects
Viscosity Effects
VOS Effects
7827
9
U
U
U 9 9
783x/784x
9
9
U
1762
9
9
U
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.39
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
HEADER DENSITY
CONFIGURATION
Prime Header Density Re-Selection Procedure In the event of a density input channel (e.g. density ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the Flow Computer will perform a re-selection procedure for obtaining a prime density value from an alternative source. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected logic decision table to determine where now to get the prime value. Table 11.17.3: Logic table for the “Automatic A” configuration option. (Density ‘A’ is preferred) Key: Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ A#B (Comp) Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Density A = Density ‘A’, Out of Limit Out of Limit Out of Limit InputFailed InputFailed Selected B = Density ‘B’, Yes Yes Yes No No FB FB = Fallback Yes Yes No No No A Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 11.17.4: Logic table for the “Density A” configuration option Ö
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Density ‘A’ Out of Limit No No Yes Yes
B B A A B A FB FB B B B FB B B FB A FB A FB A FB A FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB
Notes: 1. The “Automatic B” configuration option uses the same logic table except Density ‘B’ is the preferred channel.
This preference reverses the A and B selection in the last column of this table. 2. “Out of limit” columns 1 and 2 are concerned with the HI or LO alarm limits. 3. “Input failed” columns are concerned with ‘Live’ inputs.
Density ‘A’ Input Failed No Yes No Yes
Prime Density Selected A FB FB FB
Key: - A = Density ‘A’, B = Density ‘B’, FB = Fallback Table 11.17.5: Logic table for the “Density B” configuration option Ö
Density ‘B’ Out of Limit No No Yes Yes
Density ‘B’ Input Failed No Yes No Yes
Prime Density Selected B FB FB FB
Key: - A = Density ‘A’, B = Density ‘B’, FB = Fallback
Page 11.40
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
HEADER DENSITY
Density Equation List (Menu data listed is for channel ‘A’. Menu data for channel ‘B’ is shown in the menu data listed on page 11.38)
IMPORTANT NOTICE Density measurements from a Mobrey 7827 are supported. However, the density corrections for viscosity effects and VOS effects are not yet available in software version 2510. The viscosity effect correction is normally required for fluids with a viscosity that exceeds 100cP. For further information on these corrections, refer to the 7827 Technical Manual.
Equation DE#1a: Uncorrected density from a Mobrey 783x/784x liquid density transducer
Using:
Uu
= K 0 K1*W K 2*W2
Where:
Uu
= Density (uncorrected)………………………………………. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K 0 = Transducer calibration factor K0…………………………… Menu Data: <”Density1 K0”> K1
= Transducer calibration factor K1…………………………… Menu Data: <”Density1 K1”>
K 2 = Transducer calibration factor K2…………………………… Menu Data: <”Density1 K2”> W
= Periodic time from transducer (Ps)………………………... Menu Data: <”Time Period Input 1”>
Equation DE#1b: Uncorrected density from a Mobrey 7827 liquid viscosity transducer
Using:
Uu
= K 0 K1*WB K 2*WB2
Where:
Uu
= Density (uncorrected)………………………………………. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K 0 = Transducer calibration factor K0…………………………... Menu Data: <”Density1 K0”> K1
= Transducer calibration factor K1………………….……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K1”>
K 2 = Transducer calibration factor K2….……………………...... Menu Data: <”Density1 K2”> W B = Periodic time from transducer (Ps)………………………... Menu Data: <”Time Period Input 1b”>
Equation DE#2: Density corrected for temperature effects This equation corrects a density measurement for the temperature effect on the metalwork of the transducer when operated away from the calibration temperature.
Using:
Ut
= Uu * >1 K18 * t tb K19 * t tb @
Where:
Ut
= New density (temperature corrected)…………….…….… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
Uu
= Density without temperature correction…………………... Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K 18 = Transducer calibration factor K18………………………..... Menu Data: <”Density1 K18”> K 19 = Transducer calibration factor K19…….……………………. Menu Data: <”Density1 K19”> t = ‘Density loop’ temperature…………..………………….…. Menu Data: <”Density A temp”> tb = Transducer calibration temperature (always 20qC)...…… (Not displayed in menu)
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.41
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
HEADER DENSITY
EQUATION LIST
Note: Menu data listed is for channel ‘A’. Menu data for channel ‘B’ is shown in the menu data listed on page 11.38 Equation DE#3: Density corrected for pressure effects This equation corrects a density measurement for the pressure effect on the metalwork of the transducer when operated away from the calibration pressure.
Using:
UP
= U * 1 K 20 * P Pb K 21 * P Pb
Where:
UP
= New density (pressure corrected)…….………………… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
U
= Density without pressure correction……………..…...… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
P
= ‘Density loop’ pressure…………….……………….……. Menu Data: <”Header dens press”>
Pb
= Transducer calibration pressure (always 1 bar Abs.).… (Not displayed in menu)
K 20
= K 20 A K 20B * P PB ……………………...…………… (Not displayed in menu)
K 21
= K 21A K 21B * P PB …………………………………… (Not displayed in menu)
And:
Where:
K 20 A = Transducer calibration factor K20A……………..……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K20a”> K 20B = Transducer calibration factor K20B……………..……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K20b”> K 21A = Transducer calibration factor K21A……………..……….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K21a”> K 21B
= Transducer calibration factor K21B………………..…….. Menu Data: <”Density1 K21b”>
Equation DE#4: Density corrected for VOS effects [NOT AVAILABLE TO 7827 USERS] This equation corrects a density measurement for the VOS effect of the measured liquid compared to the VOS effect on the calibration liquid at the same conditions.
Using:
2· § § ¨ ¨ K vos ·¸ ¸ 1 ¨¨ ¨ W * VOS ¸ ¸¸ C¹ © ¹ Uv = U * © 2· § § · K ¨ ¨ vos ¸ ¸ ¨¨1 ¨ W * VOS ¸ ¸¸ A ¹ © ¹ ©
Where:
Uv
= New density with VOS correction………..……………… Menu Data: <”Density A”>
U
= Density without VOS correction………..……………….. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
W
= Periodic time from transducer (Ps)……………………... Menu Data: <”Time Period Input 1”>
VOS A
= VOS (velocity of sound) of measured liquid…………… Menu Data: <” Density1 VOS”>
VOSC
= VOS (velocity of sound) of calibration liquid.………….. See Equation DE#5
K vos
= Value automatically selected from a built-in table…….. (Not displayed in menu)
Table 11.17.6: KVOS values for Equation DE#4
Page 11.42
Transducer
KVOS
1762
28500
7830/7840
35900
7835/7845
19800
7826
67800
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
HEADER DENSITY
Note: Menu data listed is for channel ‘A’. Menu data for channel ‘B’ is shown in the menu data listed on page 11.38
Equation DE#5: VOS (velocity of sound) effects of calibration fluid This equation is for generating a factor for the VOS effect on the calibration liquid under present flow conditions. It is used in association with Equation DE#4.
Using:
VOSC = K vos1 K vos2 * U K vos3 * U2 K vos 4 * U3
Where:
VOSC = New VOS (velocity of sound) of calibration fluid……….... (Not displayed in menu) U
= Density without VOS correction……………………..……. Menu Data: <”Density A”>
K vos1 = Value from column 2 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu) K vos2 = Value from column 3 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu) K vos3 = Value from column 4 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu) K vos 4 = Value from column 5 of Table 11.17.1………….………… (Not displayed in menu)
Table 11.17.1: KVOS values for Equation DE#5 Transducer
KVOS1
KVOS2
KVOS3
KVOS4
1762
1157
0
0
0.000000343
7830/7840
214.91
0.15941
0.0025398
-0.0000014169
7835/7845
214.91
0.15941
0.0025398
-0.0000014169
7826
230.915
0.126713
0.00255082
-0.0000014164
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.43
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.18 API REFERRED DENSITY (Note: The alternative density referral method is on page 11.45)
Measurements Supported:
x x
Base density by API referral calculation Meter density direct from prime density or by API referral calculation
(1) General Crude Oil (2) General Products (3) User-defined K0, K1
API Standard Compliance API Std 2540, Chapter 11.1 Tables 23A & 24A, 53A & 54A (SG range is 0.6610 to 1.076) API Std 2540, Chapter 11.1 Tables 23B & 24B, 53B & 54B (SG range is 0.6535 to 1.076) API Std 2540, Chapter 11.1 Tables 24C, 54C Figure 11.18-1: API Referred Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Menu Data (as displayed)
Header density * Dens calc sel Dens Base temp cond Base press value Equilibrium press API product select API range select API User K0 API User K1 Base density value * CTLd CPLd API alpha d->b API compress F d->b
Notes?
Index
E D
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
CTL CPL API compress F b->m API alpha b->m Meter dens/visc sel Meter density * Base dens HI limit Base dens LO limit Meter temperature * Prime dens temp * Density pressure * Meter pressure *
C
A B
Notes: A
See “Prime Density Loop Fluid Temperature” reference pages, starting with page 11.33
B
See “Density Loop Pressure” reference pages, starting with page 11.36
C
Select the “Calculation” option descriptor unless your intention is to by-pass the referral calculations
D
This parameter allows the selection of a density referral standard. (Select the “API” option). [MENU(2)]
E
Referral calculations require prime density to be within the range of 350 to 1074 Kg/m3
Page 11.44
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.19 4X5 MATRIX REFERRED DENSITY (Note: The alternative density referral method is on page 11.44)
Measurements Supported:
x x
Base density by Mobrey referral calculation Meter density direct from prime density or by Mobrey referral calculation Figure 11.19-1: 4x5 Matrix Referred Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Menu Data (as displayed)
Header density * Dens calc sel Density matrix T0 Density matrix T1 Density matrix T2 Density matrix T3 Density matrix T4 Density matrix R00 Density matrix R01 Density matrix R02 Density matrix R03 Density matrix R10 Density matrix R11 Density matrix R12 Density matrix R13 Density matrix R20 Density matrix R21 Density matrix R22 Density matrix R23 Density matrix R30
Notes?
D
Index
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Density matrix R31 Density matrix R32 Density matrix R33 Density matrix R40 Density matrix R41 Density matrix R42 Density matrix R43 Density K40 Density K41 Base density value * Base dens HI limit Base dens LO limit Meter dens/visc sel Meter density * Dens Base temp cond Base press value Meter temperature * Prime dens temp * Density pressure * Meter pressure *
C
A B
Notes: A See “Prime Density Loop Fluid Temperature” reference pages, starting with page 11.33. B
See “Density Loop Pressure” reference pages, starting with page 11.36.
C
Select the “Calculation” option descriptor unless your intention is to by-pass the referral calculations.
D
This parameter allows the selection of a density referral standard. (Select the “4x5 Matrix” option). [MENU(2)]
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.45
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.20 METER DENSITY OF KNOWN FLUID Measurements Supported:
x
(For the equivalent meter density measurement, see the next page)
Base Density of a known fluid by referral calculation Standards Compliance NGL/LPG Ethylene Ethylene Propylene
GPA Technical Publication TP25, Tables 24E & 23E IUPAC API 2565 Chapter 11.3.2.1 API 2565 Chapter 11.3.3.2
(SG range is 0.495 to 0.637)
Figure 11.20-1: Known Fluid Base Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
(E)
7
Equilibrium press
1
Header dens *
2
Meter dens/visc sel
C
8
Base dens method
3
Base temperature
MENU(5)
9
Base dens HI limit
4
Base press value
MENU(6)
10
Base dens LO limit
5
Prime dens temp *
A
11
Base density value *
6
Density pressure *
B
Notes?
MENU(6) D
Notes: A
Observed temperature. See configuration reference page 11.33
B
Observed pressure. See configuration reference page 11.36
C
Select the “Calculation” option (value) unless there is a need to by-pass the density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
D
Select a referral calculation for each metering-point. [MENU(2)]
E
API (Std 2540) referral is performed for a generalised product where the Header density is within the range of 3 350 to 1074 Kg/m . (Header density information starts on page 11.38).
Page 11.46
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.21 BASE DENSITY OF KNOWN FLUID Measurements supported:
x
(For the equivalent base density measurement, see previous page)
Meter Density of a known fluid - direct from Header or by referral calculation Standards Compliance NGL/LPG Ethylene Ethylene Propylene
GPA Technical Publication TP25, Tables 24E & 23E IUPAC API 2565 Chapter 11.3.2.1 API 2565 Chapter 11.3.3.2
(SG range is 0.495 to 0.637)
Figure 11.21-1: Meter Density - Known Fluid - Blocks and Parameters (1x4x1)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (3) <“Density”>, (4) <“Base density”> (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
1
Base density *
(E)
6
Meter pressure *
B
2
Dens Base temp cond
MENU(5)
7
Base dens method
D
3
Base press value
MENU(6)
8
Meter dens/visc sel
C
4
Equilibrium press
MENU(6)
9
Meter density *
5
Meter temperature *
A
Notes: A
Observed temperature. See configuration reference page 11.33.
B
Observed pressure. See configuration reference page 11.36.
C
Select the “Calculation” option (value) when using density referral calculation.
D
Select a referral calculation for each metering-point. [MENU(2)]
E
API (Std 2540) referral is performed for a generalised product where the Header density is within the range of 350 to 1074 Kg/m3. (Base density information starts on page 11.46)
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.47
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.22 SPECIFIC GRAVITY / DEGREES API Measurement Supported:
x
Specific gravity for the measured fluid Equation DE#6: Specific gravity of measured fluid UBase U Water
Using:
SG
=
Where:
SG
= Specific gravity of measured fluid
UBase
= Base density of measured fluid
U Water = Base density of water
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Specific gravity”> and (2) <“Density”>/<”Base density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
1
Base density value *
A
4
SG HI limit
C
2
Water density (SG) *
B
5
SG LO limit
C
3
SG value *
Notes: A
Turn to pages 11.44 - 45 for base density measurement support.
B
Turn to “Net Oil/Net Water” reference pages for details.
C
Optional alarm limits for specific gravity values.
Measurement Supported:
x
Degrees API for measured fluid Equation DE#7: Degrees API for measured fluid
141.5 131.5 SG
Using:
API $ =
Where:
API $ = Degrees API SG = Specific gravity
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Density”><”Degrees API”> and (2) <“Configure”>/<“Specific gravity”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1
Menu Data (as displayed)
Degrees API *
Notes?
Index
2
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
SG value *
Notes: (Nothing Applicable)
Page 11.48
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.23 SPECIAL EQUATIONS Feature:
x
Special Equation Type One
Although this special equation can be used for any purpose, the typical application is for calculating, for example, Degrees Brix for non-linear products. Equation SPE#1: Special Equation Type One
Using:
R
Where:
§ a * b X * c ) · ¸ A B¨ ¨ d* e Y * f ¸ © ¹
A, B
=
Constants
a-f
=
Pointers
X. Y
=
Constants
R
=
Result
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Special equations”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Term
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Term
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
R
Special equation 1 *
N/A
General constant 1
C
A
Special eq 1 const A
N/A
General constant 2
C
B
Special eq 1 const B
N/A
General constant 3
C
X
Special eq 1 const X
N/A
General constant 4
C
Y
Special eq 1 const Y
a
Special eq 1 ptr a
B
b
Special eq 1 ptr b
B
c
Special eq 1 ptr c
B
d
Special eq 1 ptr d
B
e
Special eq 1 ptr e
B
f
Special eq 1 ptr f
B
Special eq 1 name
A
N/A Notes: A
A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to give the calculation a meaningful name. Changing the default text will alter the on-screen description of the menu data for term R.
B
Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term. Identification numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then pressing the ‘a’-key. Re-press the ‘a’-key to remove the number from the display. With this type of menu data the word “off” is seen when not in use.
C
There is a collection of unused data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided for defining constants that could be identified as equation terms ‘a’, ‘b’, etc.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.49
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.24 HEADER ‘VISCOSITY LOOP’ DENSITY Measurements Supported:
(Note: These measurements are available only when measuring viscosity)
‘Viscosity loop’ Fluid Density ‘A’ (direct from a Mobrey 7827 6 viscosity analyser) ‘Viscosity loop’ Fluid Density ‘B’ (direct from a Mobrey 7827 viscosity analyser) Header ‘viscosity loop’ density (from density ‘A’ or ‘B’ or fallback)
x x x
Figure 11.24-1: Viscosity Density Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>/<”Viscometer 3”>/<”Density data”> and <”Viscometer 4”>/<”Density data”> (2) <“Health check”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Time period inputs”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Header visc dens”>, (4) <“Density”>, (5) <“Temperature”> and (6) <“Pressure”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 tA (Visc) 25
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 3b * Visc meter A K0 Visc meter A K1 Visc meter A K2 Visc meter A correct Visc meter A K18 Visc meter A K19 Density3 txdr type Visc meter A VOS Visc meter A offset Visc meter A factor Visc A Density * Visc A temperature * Header visc select
Notes?
Index
A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 TB (Visc) 26
E
D
C
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 4b * Visc meter B K0 Visc meter B K1 Visc meter B K2 Visc meter B correct Visc meter B K18 Visc meter B K19 Density4 txdr type Visc meter B VOS Visc meter B offset Visc meter B factor Visc B Density * Visc B temperature * Visc header density *
Notes?
B
E
D
Notes: A Live periodic time values, representing fluid density, from a connected Mobrey 7827 viscosity transducer appear in the <“Time Period Input 3b”> menu data page (location) instead of <“Time Period Input 3”>. B
Live periodic time values, representing fluid density, from a connected Mobrey 7827 viscosity transducer appear in the <“Time Period Input 4b”> menu data page (location) instead of <“Time Period Input 4”>.
C
This parameter is also used when configuring the prime selection of header viscosity measurements. [MENU(3)] Refer to Table 11.24.3 on page 11.51 for the selection logic of header ‘viscosity loop’ density.
D
Optional correction to density. A value for the VOS effect has to be programmed into the Flow Computer. For information about velocity of sound effects on fluid density measurements, refer to the handbook supplied with the transducer.
6
The Mobrey 7827 does not measure fluid density as accurately as a 783x or 784x liquid density transducer. Density measurements from a 7827 may require a correction for viscosity effects if the fluid viscosity is in excess of 100cP.
Page 11.50
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
HEADER ‘VISCOSITY LOOP’ DENSITY
(Notes continued…) E
Various combinations of corrections to density can be selected and applied, as shown in Table 11.24.1. Table 11.24.2 then shows the suitability of corrections when using the 7827. Table 11.24.1: Viscosity Loop Density Correction Options Option Descriptor (as displayed)
Correction: Temperature
Correction: VOS
Correction: Pressure
Correction: Viscosity
None
U
U
U
U
Temp
9
U
U
U
Press
U
U
U
U
VOS
U
9
U
U
Temp press
9
U
U
U U
Temp VOS
9
9
U
Press VOS
U
9
U
U
Temp press VOS
9
9
U
U
Table 11.24.2: Applicable Corrections to Density from a 7827 Transducer Type
Temperature Effects
Viscosity Effects
VOS Effects
7827
9
U
U
Table 11.24.3: Logic table for Prime Viscosity Density Selection Prime Selection: Header Viscosity *
Visc Density ‘A’ Live Input Fail ?
Visc Density ‘B’ Live Input Fail ?
Header ‘Viscosity Loop’ Density
“Viscosity A”
No
No
C
“Viscosity A”
No
Yes
C
“Viscosity A”
Yes
No
FAIL
“Viscosity A”
Yes
Yes
FAIL
“Viscosity B”
No
No
D
“Viscosity B”
No
Yes
FAIL
“Viscosity B”
Yes
No
D
“Viscosity B”
Yes
Yes
FAIL
Fallback
No
No
FB
Fallback
No
Yes
FB
Fallback
Yes
No
FB
Yes
Yes
FB
Fallback
“C” = Density ‘C’ (Viscosity density channel ‘A’) “D” = Density ‘D’ (Viscosity density channel ‘B’) “FAIL” = No Alternative Source FB = Fallback * Monitor selection by viewing <”Header Dyn visc sel”> menu data page
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.51
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.25 HEADER VISCOSITY Measurements:
x x
(Note: These measurements are also available whilst measuring ‘viscosity loop’ density)
Dynamic Viscosity ‘A’ & ‘B’, Header dynamic viscosity Kinematic Viscosity ‘A’ & ‘B’, Header kinematic viscosity Figure 11.25-1: Header Viscosity Blocks and Parameters
Menu Data List: (1) <“Health Check”>/<“Inputs”>/<”Time period inputs”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>, (3) <“Configure”>/<“Viscosity”>/<”Header viscosity”>, (4) <“Viscosity”>/<”Header viscosity”> Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Page 11.52
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 3 * Time period input 3b * Q factor visc A * Visc A calib ranges Visc A ultra-low V0 Visc A ultra-low V1 Visc A ultra-low V2 Visc A u-low scale Visc A low V0 Visc A low V1 Visc A low V2 Visc A low scale Visc A medium V0 Visc A medium V1 Visc A medium V2 Visc A medium scale Visc A high V0 Visc A high V1 Visc A high V2 Visc A high scale Visc A Hysteresis Visc A ultra-low lmt Visc A UL-L switch Visc A L-M switch Visc A M-H switch Visc A high range Dynamic visc A * Visc A current range Visc glitch filter
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
B
Index
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Menu Data (as displayed)
Time period input 4 * Time period input 4b * Q factor visc B * Visc B calib ranges Visc B ultra-low V0 Visc B ultra-low V1 Visc B ultra-low V2 Visc B u-low scale Visc B low V0 Visc B low V1 Visc B low V2 Visc B low scale Visc B medium V0 Visc B medium V1 Visc B medium V2 Visc B medium scale Visc B high V0 Visc B high V1 Visc B high V2 Visc B high scale Visc B Hysteresis Visc B U-low limit Visc B UL-L switch Visc B L-M switch Visc B M-H switch Visc B high range Dynamic visc B * Visc B current range Dyn visc comp limit
Notes?
B
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
HEADER VISCOSITY
(Menu Data List continued…) Index
59 60 61 62 63 64 65
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
66 67 68 69 70 71 72
Dyn visc HI limit Dyn visc LO limit Kin visc HI limit Kin visc LO limit Viscosity FB type Dyn visc FB value Kin visc FB value
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Visc header density * Kinematic visc A * Kinematic visc B * Header visc select Header kin visc * Header dynamic visc * Header Dyn visc sel
A
Notes: The selected option also controls the prime selection of a ‘viscosity loop’ density measurement channel. A B
A brief guide to the Hysteresis mechanism is shown below.
Hysteresis Guide The Flow Computer can use hysteresis to select a calibrated range for the transducer; even if programmed ranges have some overlap. Range identification, even without use of hysteresis, allows the Flow Computer to use the most appropriate set of factors for calculations.
The V0, V1 and V2 factors for each calibrated range are found on the transducer certificate. For further information on calibration ranges, refer to the Technical Manual that was supplied with the transducer. Hysteresis also avoids continuous switching between calibration ranges when the dynamic viscosity is fluctuating around a calibration range boundary. Example: Calibration Range Identification Consider 1% hysteresis with Viscosity Transducer ‘A’ calibrated for low, medium and high ranges. Work through the numbered calculations with reference to the diagram and table of configuration details associated with hysteresis.
Dynamic Viscosity (cP) No Calibration Range (Fail) SA SB
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Visc A ultra-low lmt
1 cP
Ref.
Calculated Boundary Values
-
-
Visc A UL-L switch
10 cP
SD
9.9 cP, 10.1 cP
Visc A L-M switch
100 cP
SC
99 cP, 101 cP
Visc A M-H switch
1000 cP
SB
990 cP, 1010 cP
12500 cP
SA
-
low, med,high
-
-
1%
-
-
Visc A high range Visc A calib ranges Visc A hysteresis
High Range A1
Hysteresis Band
B1
Medium Range SC
A2
Calculated Hysteresis Points
Hysteresis Band B2 Low Range
SD
No Calibration Range (Fail)
A
Hysteresis · § Zone High * ¨ 1 ¸ © 100 ¹
B
Hysteresis · § Zone Low * ¨ 1 ¸ © 100 ¹
Calculations: 1
Hysteresis boundary point calculations for switching between the medium and high calibration ranges.
A1
1 · § S B * ¨1 ¸ © 100 ¹
B1
1 · § S B * ¨1 ¸ 100 © ¹
A1
1000 * 0.99
B1
1000 * (1.01)
A1
990
B1
1010
Results x Switch to high range from medium range at just over 1010 cP. x Switch to medium range from high range at just under 990 cP. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.53
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION 2
HEADER VISCOSITY
Hysteresis point calculations for switching between medium and low viscosity calibration ranges.
A2
1 · § SC * ¨1 ¸ 100 ¹ ©
B2
1 · § SC * ¨1 ¸ 100 © ¹
A2
100 * 0.99
B2
100 * 1.01
A2
99
B2
101
ResultsSwitch to medium range from low range at just over 101 cP. x Switch to low range from medium range at just under 99 cP. 3
Hysteresis point calculations for changes switching low and ultra-low viscosity calibration ranges: Without an ultra-low calibration range set-up, dynamic viscosity ‘A’ data shows “Fail” on the status line when the calculated value goes below 9.9 cP. The low range remains selected. Once a fail status is shown, dynamic viscosity ‘A’ must go above 10.1 cP to become “Live”.
4
Hysteresis point calculations for changes around the upper limit of the high viscosity calibration range: The dynamic viscosity ‘A’ menu data shows “Fail” on the status line when the calculated value goes above the high limit - 12,500 cP in the example. The high range remains selected. Once a “fail” status is shown, the dynamic viscosity ‘A’ measurement value must fall below the high limit (12,500 cP) to become “Live” again.
Viscosity Equation List: (Note: Menu data shown is for the viscosity measurement channel ‘A’. For channel ‘B’ parameters, see page 11.52)
Equation VISC#1: Quality factor from a Mobrey 7827 liquid viscosity analyser For an example, menu data shown is for viscosity analyser 1.
Using:
1
Q =
ª§ W «¨ A «¨© W B ¬ Where:
· ¸¸ ¹
0.5
§W ¨¨ B © WA
· ¸¸ ¹
0.5 º
» » ¼
Q
= Quality factor of transducer (no units)….……...……... {Menu Data: <”Q factor visc A”>}
WA
= Time period ‘A’ of 7827 (Ps)………..….….….……...… {Menu Data: <”Time period input 3”>}
WB
= Time period ‘B’ of 7827 (Ps)………..….…….……..…. {Menu Data: <”Time period input 3b”>}
Equation VISC#2: Fluid dynamic viscosity
1 · § 1 · § V0 ¨ V1* 2 ¸ ¨ V2* 4 ¸ Q ¹ © Q ¹ ©
Using:
K
=
Where:
K
= Fluid dynamic viscosity (cP)…………………………….{Menu Data: <”Dynamic visc A”>}
V0 = 7827 calibration factor V0……..…………...…………… {Menu Data:
= Quality factor (no units)…………………..…..………... {Menu Data: <”Q factor visc A”>} * The Flow Computer automatically uses values for V0, V1 and V2 from a selected calibrated range.
Page 11.54
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.26 VISCOSITY REFERRAL Measurements Supported:
x
x
Kinematic viscosity of fluid at base conditions
Kinematic viscosity of measured fluid at the metering point
Figure 11.26-1: Viscosity Referral Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Viscosity”>/<”Referred viscosity”> and <”Base kin viscosity”>, (2) <“Viscosity”>/<”Header viscosity”> (3) <”Temperature”> and (4) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Meter run density”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index 70 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
Menu Data (as displayed) Header kin visc * Prime visc temp * Meter temperature * Visc Base temp cond Absolute zero ASTM temperature T1 ASTM viscosity @T1 ASTM temperature T2 ASTM viscosity @T2 ASTM curve1 T1 ASTM curve1 T2 ASTM curve1 visc @ T1 ASTM curve1 visc @ T2 ASTM curve2 T1 ASTM curve2 T2 ASTM curve2 visc @ T1 ASTM curve2 visc @ T2 ASTM curve3 T1 ASTM curve3 T2 ASTM curve3 visc @ T1 ASTM curve3 visc @ T2 ASTM curve4 T1 ASTM curve4 T2 ASTM curve4 visc @ T1 ASTM curve4 visc @ T2
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Notes?
Index
A D E
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121
B
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
4x5 curve temp T0 4x5 curve temp T1 4x5 curve temp T2 4x5 curve temp T3 4x5 curve temp T4 4x5 curve1 visc @T0 4x5 curve1 visc @T1 4x5 curve1 visc @T2 4x5 curve1 visc @T3 4x5 curve1 visc @T4 4x5 curve2 visc @T0 4x5 curve2 visc @T1 4x5 curve2 visc @T2 4x5 curve2 visc @T3 4x5 curve2 visc @T4 4x5 curve3 visc @T0 4x5 curve3 visc @T1 4x5 curve3 visc @T2 4x5 curve3 visc @T3 4x5 curve3 visc @T4 4x5 curve4 visc @T0 4x5 curve4 visc @T1 4x5 curve4 visc @T2 4x5 curve4 visc @T3 4x5 curve4 visc @T4
Page 11.55
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
VISCOSITY REFERRAL
CONFIGURATION
(Menu Data List continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
122
Visc referral method
123
Meter dens/visc sel
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
124
Base kinematic visc *
C
125
Meter kinematic visc *
Notes?
Notes: Value must exceed 2 cSt for the referral calculation to be performed correctly. Turn to page 11.52 for full A information on configuring this viscosity measurement. B
This parameter value is pre-set to -273.150 (qC). [MENU(3)]
C
Choose the “Calculation” option when you require a referral of Header Viscosity to metering and/or base conditions. The alternative option, “Transducer”, is for when meter kinematic viscosity is to be the same as Header viscosity. [MENU(4)] Warning! This parameter has a direct affect on the density referrals.
D
Turn to page 11.34 for full configuration information. [MENU(3)]
E
Turn to page 11.35 for full configuration information. [MENU(3)]
Page 11.56
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.27 BASE SEDIMENT & WATER MEASUREMENTS (As used in “Net Oil/Net Water Measurements”)
Measurements Supported:
x x x
BSW Analyser Input ‘A’ - from a mA Input BSW Analyser Input ‘B’ - from a mA Input Header BSW Analyser Input Figure 11.27-1: BS&W Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List:
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>/<”Header BSW”>/<”Head BSW analyser”> (2) <“Sediment & Water”>/<”Header BSW”>/ <”Head BSW analyser”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
A
9
Header BSW comp limit
D
1
BSW A input chl
2
BSW A pcent @ 100%
10
Header BSW select
B
3
BSW A pcent @ 0%
11
Header BSW HI limit
C
4
BSW A value *
12
Header BSW LO limit
C
5
BSW B input chl
13
BSW FB type
6
BSW B pcent @ 100%
14
BSW FB value
7
BSW B pcent @ 0%
15
Header BSW analyser *
8
BSW B value *
16
Header BSW selected
A
MENU(2)
Notes: Ensure that the basic configuration information of the live mA input channel has been completed. (Page 11.6.) A B
Nominate a logic decision table to be used by the Flow Computer whenever performing a prime measurement selection. (Also, see page 11.60)
C
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
D
Optional alarm limit. Programme it with a zero value to avoid a comparison of the two BSW measurement channels.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.57
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
BASE SEDIMENT & WATER MEASUREMENTS
CONFIGURATION
PRIME SELECTION PROCEDURE In the event of a BSW measurement channel (‘A’ or ‘B’) failing or returning to a live state, the Flow Computer immediately attempts to select an alternative measurement channel for the prime value. The selection procedure simply involves evaluating a user-nominated logic decision table, resulting in a new prime selection.
Table 11.27.1: "Auto BSW A" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
A A B FB A A B FB
Table 11.27.2: "Auto BSW B" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
B A B FB B A B FB
Table 11.27.3: "BSW A" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
A A FB FB A A FB FB
Table 11.27.4: "BSW B" Option Logic Table for Prime BSW
Page 11.58
A#B (Comp) Out of Limit
BSW ‘A’ Input Failed
BSW ‘B’ Input Failed
Prime Selection
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
B FB B FB B FB B FB
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.28 NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS Oil/Water Mix Calculations: The “BSW Input Present” Method
(Turn to pages 11.61 and 11.63 for other options)
OPTION ONE is suitable when: (a) there is a mA type field transmitter providing percentage of ‘water’ (Base Sediment and Water) values, (b) the density of the ‘water’ at base conditions is calculated by the Flow Computer, (c) the density of the oil at base conditions is a known fixed value and (d) the density of the mixture is measured Prime (Indicated) Measurements: x % of oil by volume (calculated) x % of ‘water’ by volume (Live or fixed value) x Density of oil and density of water (calculated) x % of oil by mass (calculated) x % of ‘water’ by mass (calculated) Base Measurements: x Density of oil at base conditions (fixed value) x Density of water at base conditions (calculated)
Metering (Line) Measurements: x Base Sediment and Water percentage (calculated) x % of oil by gross volume (calculated) x % of water by gross volume (calculated) x % of oil by standard volume (calculated) x % of water by standard volume (calculated) x Density of oil at metering conditions (calculated) x Density of water at metering conditions (calculated)
Figure 11.28-1: Net Oil/ Water Calculations (“BSW Input Present” option)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Net oil/water dens”> (3) <”Configure”>/<”Base density”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”> and (5) <“Temperature”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Menu Data (as displayed)
Perform net calcs Net calcs type Header BSW analyser * Header volume oil% Header BSW% Base density oil Dens calc sel Prime density oil * Line density oil * Header density * Prime density water * Water dens const A Water dens const B
Notes?
Index
A B E, J MENU(1)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
C
D E
Menu Data (as displayed)
Base den water (net) * Line density water * Mass water% * Mass oil% * BSW mass% LO limit BSW mass% HI limit Meter BSW% * Meter volume oil% Meter BSW LO limit Meter BSW HI limit Std volume oil% Std volume water% * BSW std vol% LO lmt
Notes?
E E E H H E H H
H
See next page for continued menu data list and applicable notes. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.59
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS (Menu Data List continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
OPTION ONE * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
25
BSW std vol% HI lmt
H
27
Meter temperature *
26
Prime dens temp *
F
28
Dens Base temp cond
Notes?
G
Notes: By default, net flow calculations are not enabled. [MENU(4)] A B
Ensure that the “Water dens calc” multiple-choice option descriptor is selected. [MENU(4)]
C
Changing the selection of the referral method will also directly affect the configuration for the Meter Density and Base Density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
D
Refer to “Header Density” reference pages for details of configuring to get live values. (Page 11.38)
E
The Flow Computer does not differentiate between pure water, a water based solution or water with an impurity.
F
Refer to the “Density Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.33)
G
Refer to the “Meter Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.35)
H
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
I
A fixed value must be programmed (SET) into the Flow Computer. [MENU(2)]
J
Refer to Section 11.27 reference pages for details of configuring this live measurement.
Page 11.60
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
OPTION TWO
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS
Oil/Water Mix Calculations: The “BSW Calculated” Method
(Turn to pages 11.59 and 11.63 for other options)
OPTION TWO is suitable when: (a) the percentage of ‘water’ (Base Sediment and Water) is not provided by a mA transmitter but is calculated, (b) the density of the ‘water’ at base conditions is a known fixed value, (c) the density of the oil at metering-run conditions is a known fixed value and (d) the density of the mixture is measured Prime (Indicated) Measurements: x % of ‘water’ by volume (calculated) x % of oil by volume (calculated) x Density of the oil (calculated) x Density of the water (calculated) x % of oil by mass (calculated) x % of water by mass (fixed value)
Metering (Line) Measurements: x Base Sediment and Water percentage (calculated) x % of oil by gross volume (calculated) x % of water by gross volume (fixed or calculated) x % of oil by standard volume (calculated) x % of water by standard volume (fixed/ or calculated) x Density of oil at line conditions (fixed or calculated)
Base Measurements: x Density of oil at base conditions (fixed value) and Density of water at base conditions (fixed value) Figure 11.28-2: Net Oil/Water Calculations (“BSW Calculated” option)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Net oil/water dens”>, (3) <”Configure”>/<”Base density”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”> and (5) <“Temperature”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Menu Data (as displayed)
Perform net calcs Net calcs type Base density oil Dens calc sel Line density oil * Prime density oil * Header density* Base den water (net) * Water dens const A Water dens const B
Notes?
Index
A B C D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E C, F
Menu Data (as displayed)
Prime density water * Header volume oil% Header BSW% Prime BSW LO limit Prime BSW HI limit Line density water * Mass oil% Mass water% BSW mass% LO limit BSW mass% HI limit
Notes?
F F I I F
I I
See next page for continued menu data list and associated notes.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.61
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS (Menu Data List continued…) Index
19 20 21 22 23 24
Menu Data (as displayed)
Meter BSW% Meter volume oil% Meter BSW LO limit Meter BSW HI limit Std volume water% Std volume oil%
OPTION TWO * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Notes?
Index
F
25 26 27 28 29
I I
F
Menu Data (as displayed)
BSW std vol% LO lmt BSW std vol% HI lmt Prime dens temp * Meter temperature * Dens Base temp cond
Notes? I I
G H
Notes: By default, net flow calculations are not enabled. [MENU(4)] A B
Ensure that the “BSW calculated” multiple-choice option descriptor is selected. [MENU(4)]
C
A fixed value must be programmed into the 795X.
D
Changing the selection of the referral method will also directly affect the configuration for the Meter Density and Base Density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
E
Refer to “Header Density” reference pages for details of configuring to get live values. (Page 11.38)
F
The Flow Computer does not differentiate between pure water, a water based solution or water with an impurity.
G
Refer to the “Density Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.33)
H
Refer to the “Meter Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.35)
I
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement.
Page 11.62
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
OPTION THREE
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS
Oil/Water Mix Calculations: “Missing Oil Base Density” option
(Turn to pages 11.57 and 11.61 for other options)
OPTION THREE is suitable when: (a) there is a mA type field transmitter providing percentage of ‘water’ (Base Sediment and Water) values, (b) the density of the oil at base conditions is calculated by the Flow Computer, (c) the density of the ‘water’ at base conditions is a known fixed value and (d) the density of the oil/water mix is measured Prime (Indicated) Measurements:
Metering (Line) Measurements:
x x x x x
x x x x x x
% of oil by volume (calculated) % of ‘water’ by volume (Live or fixed value) Density of oil and density of water (calculated) % of oil by mass (calculated) % of ‘water’ by mass (calculated)
Base Measurements: x Density of oil at base conditions (calculated) x Density of water at base conditions (fixed value)
% of oil by gross volume (calculated) % of ‘water’ by gross volume (calculated) % of oil by standard volume (calculated) % of water by standard volume (calculated) Density of oil at metering conditions (calculated) Density of water at metering conditions (calculated)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Sediment & Water”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Density”>/<”Net oil/water dens”>, (3) <”Configure”>/<”Base density”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”> and (5) <“Temperature”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Menu Data (as displayed)
Perform net calcs Net calcs type Header BSW analyser * Header volume oil% Header BSW% Base density oil Dens calc sel Prime density oil * Line density oil * Header density* Prime density water * Water dens const A Water dens const B
Notes?
Index
A B E, J
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C
D E
Menu Data (as displayed)
Base den water (net) * Line density water * Mass water% * Mass oil% * BSW mass% LO limit BSW mass% HI limit Meter BSW% * Meter volume oil% Meter BSW LO limit Meter BSW HI limit Std volume oil% Std volume water% * BSW std vol% LO lmt
Notes?
I ,E E E H H E H H
H
See next page for continued menu data list and associated notes. 7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.63
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET WATER MEASUREMENTS (Menu Data List continued…) Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
OPTION THREE * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
25
BSW std vol% HI lmt
H
27
Meter temperature *
26
Prime dens temp *
F
28
Dens Base temp cond
Notes?
G
Notes: By default, net flow calculations are not enabled. [MENU(4)] A B
Ensure that the “Oil dens calc” multiple-choice option (descriptor) is selected. [MENU(4)]
C
Changing the selection of the referral method will also directly affect the configuration for the Meter Density and Base Density referral calculations. [MENU(3)]
D
Refer to “Header Density” reference pages for details of configuring to get live values. (Page 11.38)
E
The Flow Computer does not differentiate between pure water, a water based solution or water with an impurity
F
Refer to the “Density Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.33)
G
Refer to the “Meter Temperature“ reference pages for details of this measurement. (Page 11.35)
H
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement
I
A fixed value must be programmed into the Flow Computer
J
Refer to Section 11.27 reference pages for details of configuring this live measurement. (See page 11.57)
Page 11.64
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.29 NET OIL /NET ‘WATER’ FLOW RATES AND TOTALS Measurements Supported:
x x x
Net ‘Water’ Volume flow rate and totals Net ‘Water’ Standard Volume flow rate and totals Net ‘Water’ Mass flow rate and totals
x x x
Net Oil Volume flow rate and totals Net Oil Standard Volume flow rate and totals Net Oil Mass flow rate and totals Note: Ensure that Net Oil/Net Water Measurements, Flow Rates and Flow Totals are already configured.
Figure 11.29-1: Net ‘Water’ Flow Rates and Metering-run Totals
Figure 11.29-2: Net Oil Flow Rates and Metering-run Totals
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.65
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL /NET ‘WATER’ FLOW RATES AND TOTALS Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>/<”Net oil/water rate”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisation”>/<”Standard”>, (3) <“Health check”>/<”Totals”>, (4) <“Flow totals”>/<”Net oil & Water”> and (5) <”Sediment & water”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Menu Data (as displayed)
Meter BSW% * Gross volume rate * Water vol rate * Water volume roll Water volume inhibit Water volume inc Water volume total Maint NV water inc Maint NV water total Line density water * Base den water (net) * Water std vol rate * Water std vol roll Water std vol inhib Water std vol inc Water std vol total Maint NSV water inc Maint NSV water totl Water mass rate * Water mass roll Water mass inhibit Water mass inc Water mass total Maint NM water inc Maint NM water total Operating mode Rate flowstop action Meter volume oil% Oil vol rate *
Notes?
C B A B A
C B A B A C B A B A D
Index
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 -
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Oil vol HI limit Oil vol LO limit Oil volume roll Oil vol inhibit Oil volume inc Oil volume total Maint NV oil inc Maint NV oil total Line density oil * Base density oil * Oil std vol rate * Oil std vol HI limit Oil std vol LO limit Oil std vol roll Oil std vol inhibit Oil std vol inc Oil std vol total Maint NSV oil inc Maint NSV oil total Oil mass rate * Oil mass HI limit Oil mass LO limit Oil mass roll Oil mass inhibit Oil mass inc Oil mass total Maint NM oil inc Maint NM oil total Flow status
E E C B A B A
E E C B A B A E E C B A B A D
Notes: A A total is the integration of a specific parameter value (e.g. metering-run flow rate) over a period of time. The Flow Computer updates a total with an increment value every cycle - See Note B. [MENU(4)] B
An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle. [MENU(3)] (a) Orifice or Coriolis Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu. (b) Turbine Flow The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’ – the period that pulses were accumulated for calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value is available for viewing within the <”Health check”> feature menu. Editing an increment value has no effect.
C
By default, rollover (to zero) limits are SET to a very large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is sufficient for the metering application. [MENU(2)]
Page 11.66
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ FLOW RATES AND TOTALS D
There are two Flow Computer modes to be aware of… 1. Normal mode In this mode, a main total, e.g. <”Water volume total”>, can increment. The twinned maintenance-mode total, e.g. <”Maint NV water total”>, will never increment. 2. Maintenance mode In this mode, a maintenance-mode total, e.g. <”Maint NV water total”>, can increment. The twinned normalmode total, e.g. <”Water volume total”>, will never increment. A mode can be selected only when the Flow Computer is in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state. See flow metering reference pages for parameters involved in establishing a ‘Flow stopped’ state. [INFORMATION (SOFT-KEY) MENU]
E
Optional HI and LO alarm limits. Programming the limits with a zero value will avoid maximum and minimum alarm limit checks on the associated measurement. [MENU(1)]
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.67
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
EQUATION LIST
(Note: Listed equations do not conform to a Standard unless otherwise stated)
Net oil and water equations:
Equation NC#1: Net Oil Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NVOil
Where: NVOil
= Q GV *
Oil%Line 100
= Net Oil Volume flow rate…………………….……..………. {Menu data: <”Oil vol rate”>}
Q GV
= Gross Volume flow rate……………………….………….… {Menu data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
Oil%Line
= Percentage of oil at the metering point ………….……..... {See Equation NC#7b}
Equation NC#2: Net ‘Water’ Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NVWater
Where: NVWater Q GV
= Q GV *
Water %Line 100
= Net Oil Volume flow rate………………………..……... {Menu data: <”Water vol rate”>} = Gross Volume flow rate……………………….…….…. {Menu data: <”Gross volume rate”>}
Water %Line = Percentage of water in mix at the metering point….... {See Equation NC#8c}
Equation NC#3: Net Oil Standard Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NSVOil
Where: NSVOil
= NVOil *
ULine Oil UBase Oil
= Net Oil Standard Volume flow rate………..…..………….. {Menu data: <”Oil std vol rate”>}
NVOil
= Net Oil Volume flow rate………..……....…………...…….. {See Equation NC#1 on page 11.68}
ULine Oil Base U Oil
= Density of the oil at the metering point….……......……… {Menu data: <”Line density oil”>} = Density of the oil at base conditions……………. ……..... {Menu data: <”Base density oil”>}
Equation NC#4: Net ‘Water’ Standard Volume Flow Rate
Using:
NSVWater = NVWater *
ULine Water UBase Water
Where: NSVWater = Net ‘Water’ Standard Volume flow rate….…..…..………. {Menu data: <”Water std vol rate”>} NVWater
= Net ‘Water’ Volume flow rate………..……..……...…….... {See Equation NC#2 on page 11.68}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point……....……… {See Equation NC#9c on page 11.71}
UBase Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions …………..…..... {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71}
Equation NC#5: Net oil Mass Flow Rate
Using:
NMOil = NVOil * ULine Oil
Where: NMOil = Net oil mass flow rate……………….…………………………… {Menu Data: <”Oil mass rate”>} NVOil = Net Oil Volume flow rate…………….………………………….. {See Equation NC#1 on page 11.68} ULine = Density of the oil at the metering point…..…….……………… {Menu data: <”Line density oil”>} Oil
Page 11.68
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
Equation NC#6: Net Water Mass Flow Rate At the metering point:
Using:
NM Water = NVWater * ULine Water
Where: NM Water = Net water mass flow rate……….……………………..…… {Menu Data: <”Water mass rate”>} NVWater
= Net ‘water’ volume flow rate…..…………………….…….. {See Equation NC#2 on page 68}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point…..…..……… {See Equation NC#9c on page 11.71}
Equation NC#7: Percentage of oil by volume Prime Input:
Using:
Oil%Prime
= (100 - Water %Head )………………………..………. NC#7a
Where: Oil%Prime
= Indicated percentage of oil in mix…….………….…. {Menu data: <”Header volume oil%”>}
Water %Prime
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ in mix,………….….. {See Equation NC#8 on page 11.69}
At the metering point:
Using:
Oil%Line
Where: Oil%Line
= (100 - Water %Line )…………………………..……….. NC#7b = Percentage of oil in mix at the metering point….….… {Menu data: <”Meter volume oil%”>}
Water %Line = Percentage of ‘water’ in mix at the metering point….. {See Equation NC#8c on page 11.70}
Equation NC#8: Percentage of ‘water’ by volume Note: This measurement is also known as BSW - ‘Base Sediment and Water’. Prime Input:
Equation NC#8a is applicable when either the “Water dens calc” option or the “Oil dens calc” option is selected. Using:
Water %Prime
Where: Water %Prime
§ BSW %Max BSW %Min · = ¨¨ * BSW %Raw ¸¸ BSW %Min ...NC#8a 100 © ¹
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ in mix.…….……….. {Menu Data: <”Header BSW%”>}
BSW %Raw
= Reading from transmitter……………...…………….. {Menu Data: <”BS&W value”>}
BSW %Max
= Maximum percentage from transmitter…………….. {Menu Data: <”BS&W pcent @ 100%”>}
BSW %Min
= Minimum percentage from transmitter…...………… {Menu Data: <”BS&W pcent @ 0%”>}
Equation NC#8b is applicable when the “BSW Calculated” option is selected. Using:
Water %Prime
Where: Water %Prime
=
U U
Prime Mix Prime Water
UPrime Oil UPrime Oil
* 100 …………………………..…… NC#8b
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ flowing…………….. {Menu Data: <”Header BSW%”>}
UPrime Mix
= Indicated density of the oil/water mixture……..……. {Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>} **
UPrime Oil
= Indicated density of the oil………...…………………. {Menu Data: <”Prime density oil”>} *
UHead Water
= Indicated density of the ‘water’……...……….…….... {See Equation NC#9 on page 11.70}
* This is a SET (fixed) value when using the “BSW Calculated” option. For other options, see Equation NC#16 on page 11.72. ** Refer to “Density” reference pages for information on configuring this parameter.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.69
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS Net oil and water equations continued…
EQUATION LIST
(Listed equations do not conform to a Standard unless otherwise stated)
(Equation NC#8 continued…) Note: This measurement is also known as ‘Base Sediment and Water’. At the metering point:
Using:
Water %Line
Where: Water %Line
And:
Where:
=
U U
Prime Mix Line Water
ULine Oil ULine Oil
* 100 …………..………..…….….….… NC#8c
= Percentage of ‘water’ flowing at the metering point ... {Menu Data: <”Meter BSW%”>}
ULine Oil
= Density of the oil at the metering point ……….……… {Menu Data: <”Line density oil”>}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point ……….…. {See Equation NC#9c on page 11.71}
UPrime Mix
=
Line 100 * ULine Oil * U Water
100 * U Mass% Line Oil
Oil
Line * ULine Oil Mass% Oil * U Water
ULine Oil
= Density of the oil at the metering point.……..….….…. {Menu Data: <”Line density oil”>}
ULine Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point…..………. {Menu Data: <”Line density water”>}
Mass% Oil
= Percentage of oil (by mass) at the metering point ..… {See Equation NC#11 on page 11.71}
Equation NC#9: Water Density Prime Input:
Equation NC#9a is applicable when either the “Water dens calc” option or the “Oil dens calc” option is selected. Using:
UPrime Water =
100 * U
Prime Mix
UPrime Oil
Water %Head
U
Prime …………………………….....… NC#9a Oil
Where: UPrime Water = Indicated density of the ‘water’…………..…………….….…….. {Menu Data: <”Prime density water”>} UPrime Mix = Indicated density of the oil/water mixture…………….….……… {Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>} UPrime = Indicated density of the oil……………………………………….. {See Equation NC#16 on page 11.72} Oil
Equation NC#9b is applicable when the “BSW Calculated” option is selected. Using:
Base UPrime Water = U Water A * Gt B * Gt * Gt ……………………………….… NC#9b
Where: UPrime Water = Indicated density of the ‘water’…………..………………….. {Menu Data: <”Prime density water”>} UBase Water = Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions…………………… {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71} A = Water density constant ‘A’………………………..………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const A”>} B = Water density constant ‘B’………………………..………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const B”>} Gt = t Prime t base
And: Where:
t Prime = Temperature of the oil/water mixture at the ‘density loop’…{Menu Data: <”Prime dens temp”>} t Base = Temperature of the oil/water mixture at base conditions.... {Menu Data: <”Dens Base temp cond”>}
Page 11.70
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
EQUATION LIST
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
Net oil and water equations continued… (Listed equations do not conform to a Standard unless otherwise stated)
(Equation NC#9 ‘Water’ Density continued…) At the metering point:
Using:
Base ULine Water = U Water A * Gt B * Gt * Gt …………………..………...…… NC#9c
Where: ULine Water = Density of the ‘water’ at the metering point…..…………….. {Menu Data: <”Line density water”>} UBase Water = Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions…………………… {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71} A = ‘Water’ density constant ‘A’…………………..….………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const A”>} B = ‘Water’ density constant ‘B’……………………...………….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const B”>} And: Where:
Gt = t Line t base t Line = Temperature of the oil/water mixture at a Metering-Run…. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>} t Base = Base temperature…………………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Dens Base temp cond”>}
At base conditions:
Equation NC#9d is applicable when the “Water dens calc” option is selected. (Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions must be a SET (fixed) value if not using the “Water dens calc” option) Using:
Prime UBase Water = U Water A * Gt B * Gt * Gt ………………………..……
NC#9d
Where: UBase Water = Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions..………………….. {Menu Data: <”Base den water (net)”>} UPrime Water = Indicated density of the ‘water’.……………………………… {See Equation NC#9a or NC#9b} A = ‘Water’ density constant ‘A’…………………….……………. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const A”>} B = ‘Water’ density constant ‘B’…………………….……………. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const B”>} And: Where:
Gt = t Prime t base t Prime = Prime temperature of the oil/water mixture………..………. {Menu Data: <”Prime dens temp”>} t Base = Base temperature…………………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Dens Base temp cond”>}
Equation NC#10: Percentage of mass (‘water’)
Using: Where:
* 100
Prime UPrime UPrime Water * U Mix Oil
Mass% Water
=
Mass% Water
= Percentage of ‘water’ (by mass) flowing…………. {Menu Data: <”Mass water%”>}
ULine Mix
*
UPrime Water
UPrime Oil
UPrime Water
= Indicated density of the ‘water’…………….……… {See Equation NC#9a or NC#9b}
UPrime Mix
= Indicated density of the oil/water mixture….…….. {Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>}
UPrime Oil
= Density of the oil mixture at the Header…..……… {Menu Data: <”Prime density oil”>}
Equation NC#11: Percentage of mass (‘oil’)
Using:
Mass% Oil
= 100 Mass% Water
Where:
Mass% Oil
= Percentage of mass for oil flowing in system..……{Menu Data: <”Mass oil%”>}
Mass% Water
= Percentage of mass for ‘water’ flowing…………… {See Equation NC#10 on page 11.71}
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.71
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
NET OIL/NET ‘WATER’ MEASUREMENTS
EQUATION LIST
Equation NC#12: Percentage of standard volume (‘water’) 100
Using:
StdVol% Water
Where:
StdVol% Water
§ § Mass% · § ·· UBase ¨ Oil ¸ ¨ Water ¸¸ 1 ¨¨ * ¨ ¸ Base ¨ Mass% Water ¸ ¸¸ ¨ U Oil ¹¹ ¹ © ©© = Percentage of the ‘water’ (by Standard Volume).. {Menu Data: <”Std volume water%”>}
Mass% Oil
= Percentage of the oil (by Mass)…………………… {See Equation NC#11 on page 11.71}
Mass% Water
= Percentage of the ‘water’ (by Mass).…………….. {See Equation NC#10 on page 11.71}
=
UBase Oil
= Density of the oil at base conditions…………....... {Menu data: <”Base density oil”>}
UBase Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions …………{See Equation NC#9d}
Equation NC#13: Percentage of standard volume (oil)
Using:
StdVol% Oil
= 100 StdVol% Water
Where:
StdVol% Oil
= Percentage of the oil (by Standard Volume)……. {Menu Data: <”Std volume oil%”>}
StdVol% Water
= Percentage of the ‘water’ (by Standard Volume).. {See Equation NC#12 on page 11.72}
Equation NC#14: Specific gravity for the oil
Using:
SG Oil
§ UBase = ¨ Oil ¨ U Base © Water
Where:
SG Oil
= Specific gravity for the oil………………………….. {Menu data: <”Oil specific gravity”>}
UBase Oil
= Density of the oil at base conditions…………....... {Menu data: <”Base density oil”>}
UBase Water
= Density of the ‘water’ at base conditions ………… {See Equation NC#9d on page 11.71}
· ¸ ¸ ¹
Equation NC#15: Degrees API (oil)
Using:
API$Oil
§ 141.5 · ¸ 131.5 = ¨¨ ¸ © SG Oil ¹
Where:
API$Oil
= Degrees API for the oil………………………………{Menu Data: <”Oil degrees API”>}
SG Oil
= Specific gravity for the oil……………………...……{See Equation NC#14 }
Equation NC#16: Oil Density Calculation (prime) This calculation is applicable when the “Oil dens calc” option is selected. All other options use a SET (fixed) value for the indication density of the oil (in a mixture).
U
Prime Mix
UPrime Water * 100 UPrime Water 100 BSW %
Using:
UPrime Oil
=
Where:
UPrime Oil
= Indicated oil density……………..…………..……….{Menu Data: <”Prime density oil ”>}
UPrime Mix
= Indicated density of the oil/water mixture………….{Menu Data: <”Prime txdr density”>} *
UPrime Water
= Indicated density of the ‘water’…………….……… {See Equation NC#9a}
Water %Prime
Page 11.72
= Indicated percentage of ‘water’ in mix.…….…...... {Menu Data: <”Header BSW%”>} * Refer to “Density” reference pages for information on configuring this parameter.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.30 LIVE ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Feature:
x
Analogue Outputs supported by the 7950 and 7951: mA output channels 1 to 4 (without option card) or mA output channels 1 to 8 (with option card)
What to do: Use this reference page to find out how to configure the analogue output channels that are to transmit values to external devices once every machine cycle. By default, no parameters are pre-allocated to the analogue outputs. After configuring, check that a satisfactory live reading is displayed by the <mA output value> menu data page. Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Outputs”>/<“mA outputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/ <”Outputs”>/<“mA outputs”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Analogue Channel (and signal types)
Analogue Output 1 (mA only)
Analogue Output 2 (mA only)
Analogue Output 3 (mA only)
Analogue Output 4 (mA only)
Menu Data (as displayed)
mA output 1 value * mA output 1 ptr list mA 1 param val @100% mA 1 param val @0% mA output 1 type mA output 1 filter mA output 1 source mA output 2 value * mA output 2 ptr list mA 2 param val @100% mA 2 param val @0% mA output 2 type mA output 2 filter mA output 2 source mA output 3 value * mA output 3 ptr list mA 3 param val @100% mA 3 param val @0% mA output 3 type mA output 3 filter mA output 3 source mA output 4 value * mA output 4 ptr list mA 4 param val @100% mA 4 param val @0% mA output 4 type mA output 4 filter mA output 4 source
Analogue Channel (and signal types)
Analogue Output 5 ** (mA only)
Analogue Output 6 ** (mA only)
Analogue Output 7 ** (mA only)
Analogue Output 8 ** (mA only)
Menu Data (as displayed)
mA output 5 value * mA output 5 ptr list mA 5 param val @100% mA 5 param val @@ 0% mA output 5 type mA output 5 filter mA output 5 source mA output 6 value * mA output 6 ptr list mA 6 param val @100% mA 6 param val @0% mA output 6 type mA output 6 filter mA output 6 source mA output 7 value * mA output 7 ptr list mA 7 param val @100% mA 7 param val @0% mA output 7 type mA output 7 filter mA output 7 source mA output 8 value * mA output 8 ptr list mA 8 param val @100% mA 8 param val @0% mA output 8 type mA output 8 filter mA output 8 source
Note: ** Requires option card to be fitted and <”Available channels”> parameter edited to show a value of “8” A The <mA output source> menu data is for selecting a parameter that is not readily available with the normal <mA output ptr list> menu data. It is necessary to select the “USER” option descriptor for <mA output ptr list> and then program <mA output source> with the parameter’s unique identification number.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.73
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.31 INTERFACE DETECTION Features:
x x
Product Detection (using measurement zoning – Meter run density, Base density, SG, Header mA density or qAPI) Product Totals (Gross Volume, Gross Standard Volume and Mass totals for up to 20 products) Figure 11.31-1: Interface Detection Blocks and Parameters
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Product Detect”>, (2) <“Density”>, (3) <“Flow rates”>, (4) <“Flow totals”>/<“Product totals”> * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
1
Meter run density *
17
Prod1 dens Txdr FB
2
Base density *
18
Product time delay
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SG Value * Head analog dens * Degrees API * Product zone type Band hysteresis Product 1 name Product 1 Band HI Product 1 Band LO Prod1 MF Prod1 K factor Prod1 dens calc sel Prod1 API product Prod1 API range Prod1 Prime dens FB
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Current Product ID * Product totalisation Gross vol rate * Product 1 GV total Gross std vol rate * Product 1 GSV total Mass rate * Product 1 Mass total Non-Band product ID Product auto config Reset totalisers Meter curve type
B I A A A A, E, F A, E, F A, E A, E A, E A, E
Notes? A, E C D D D D G H (E)
Notes: A maximum of 20 product profiles can be defined. To illustrate, the Menu Data listed above (8 – 17) is the A profile for product one. Profiles of other products are not shown in the schematic or list for reasons of clarity. Each product profile has a corresponding set of product totals – see Menu Data items 22, 24 and 26. B
This is for fluid density measurements from a mA-type field transmitter at the header. Values are used as advanced notification of a product change. (Also, see note ‘C’ and configuration details on page 11.38)
C
This is a programmable period for allowing a product change at header instrumentation to reach the metering point. Product switching should not occur until the fluid reaches the metering point. (Also, see note ‘B’)
D
Product totalising can be switched on and off with this parameter. If switched off, increments for product totals are discarded. If switched on, the Flow Computer will calculate increments and then update the appropriate set of product totals.
Page 11.74
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION E
INTERFACE DETECTION
This data is a part of the Automatic Product Configuration feature. The programmed (SET) value can be copied to the relevant prime parameter whenever the product is detected. For example, the value for <“Prod1 MF”> would overwrite the value of the <“Meter factor”> parameter as soon as Product #1 is detected, but only if the ‘Meter Factor’ is not being linearised. Similarly, the value for <“Prod1 K factor”> would overwrite the value of the <“Flowmeter K Factor”> parameter as soon as Product #1 is detected, but only if the ‘K-factor’ is not being linearised. (N.B. See earlier flow metering pages for use of <“Meter Factor”> and <“Flowmeter K Factor”>)
F
Retrospective total calculations can be performed to compensate for changes to the ‘Meter Factor’ or the ‘K-factor’. Specify the volume to be considered when correcting totals.
G
One set of product totals can be allocated to all fluids that are outside the defined product bands. High and low band data in the selected product profile are not applied.
H
Enables or prevents the overwriting of parameters with ‘override’ values from the profile of a detected product. (Also, see note ‘E’)
I
Selecting a new zone type will automatically re-select the appropriate base units of measurement for data listed in all 20 product profiles.
Example: Density zoning with 4 defined products (i.e. 4 back-to-back bands)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Reference in Picture
Product 1 Band High
DF
Product 1 Band Low
DE
Product 2 Band High
DE
Product 2 Band Low
DD
Product 3 Band High
DD
Product 3 Band Low
DC
Product 4 Band High
DA
Product 4 Band Low
D0
x
Product 1 totals increment between time T1 and T2.
x
Product 2 totals increment between time T2 and T3.
x
Product 3 totals increment between time T3 and T4.
x
Product 4 totals do not increment.
x
“Non-product” totals increment between times T0 to T1 and T4 to TN.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.75
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
INTERFACE DETECTION
CONFIGURATION
Example: Using Hysteresis
Hysteresis overcomes the difficulties when product bands overlap.
Menu Data (as displayed)
Figure Ref.
SET Value
Hysteresis Calc. Value
Product 1 Band High
DA
1000
1010.00
Product 1 Band Low
DB
795
802.95
Product 2 Band High
DB
795
787.05
Product 2 Band Low
DC
595
600.95
-
1%
-
Band hysteresis
1. Hysteresis point calculations when product one is current detected product:
x x x
A1
1 · § D A * ¨1 ¸ 100 ¹ ©
B1
1 · § DB * ¨1 ¸ © 100 ¹
A1
1000 * 0.999
B1
790 * 1.01
A1
990.0
B1
802.95
Switch (up) to product 1 from product 2 at just over 802.95 Kg/m3. Switch (up) to non-product takes place at just over 1010 Kg/m3. Switch (down) to product 1 from non-product is at exactly 1000 Kg/m3. (The 990 Kg/m3 point is ignored)
2. Hysteresis band calculations when product two is current detected product:
x
A2
1 · § DB * ¨1 ¸ 100 ¹ ©
B2
1 · § D C * ¨1 ¸ 100 © ¹
A2
795 * 0.99
B2
595 * 1.01
A2
787.05
B2
600.95
Switch (down) to product 2 from product 1 at just under 787.05 Kg/m3.
Page 11.76
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.32 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Features:
x
Digital Outputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) Status output channels 1 to 8
x
Digital Outputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) Status output channels 1 to 8 (without option board 6 fitted) or Status output channels 1 to 16 (with option board 6 fitted)
x
Digital Outputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) Status output channels 1 to 6
What to do: This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the Status Output channels that are being used. Later tasks will expect this menu data to be already configured.
By default, several Status Outputs are reserved for the Alarm Logger Output feature. (See Chapter 8) The remaining outputs are available for use as listed in Chapter 3. In the <“Health Check”> menu there is a Status Output sub-menu. It contains a menu data page with a series of nd. digits on the 2 display line. Each digit indicates the present state of an individual output. Ö
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<”Outputs”>/<“Status outputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<”Outputs”>/<“Status outputs”>
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data List: Status O/P Channel
Menu Data (as displayed)
Status O/P Channel
Menu Data (as displayed)
Status O/P Channel
Menu Data (as displayed)
1 2 3 4
Status out 1 logic Status out 2 logic Status out 3 logic Status out 4 logic
7 8 9 10
Status out 7 logic Status out 8 logic Status out 9 logic Status out 10 logic
13 14 15 16
Status out 13 logic Status out 14 logic Status out 15 logic Status out 16 logic
5 6
Status out 5 logic Status out 6 logic
11 12
Status out 11 logic Status out 12 logic
General Note: Digital Outputs 1 to 3 are permanently reserved for use by the Alarm Logger Output feature seen in Chapter 8. A This is why there is a permanent “XXX” seen in the first three digits of <“Status out [1-16]”>.
Digital Outputs 4 to 16 are not pre-allocated to a Flow Computer feature. They are mainly used by the support for flowmeter proving, as guided in Chapter 16
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.77
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.33 LIVE PULSE OUTPUTS Features:
x
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon) Pulse Output channels 1 to 3
x
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) Pulse Output channels 1 to 5
x
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) Pulse Output channels 1 to 3
What to do: Use this page to configure basic information for the pulse output channels. A channel can be set-up to transmit each increment to a normal mode total as a pulse train, suitable for an external counter.
The individual pulse has a significance that equates to a certain mass or volume in the units of measurement already selected for the rate. As an example, consider a flow total increasing at a steady rate of one gallon every second and significance that is programmed with a value of six, representing six gallons. This would result in a single pulse being transmitted every 6 seconds.
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Outputs”>/<”Pulse outputs”>
Menu Data List:
** Channel is available on a 7951 with the D-Type rear panel
Pulse Output Channel Pulse Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse output 1 src Pulse output 1 sig Pulse output 2 src Pulse output 2 sig Pulse output 3 src Pulse output 3 sig
Pulse Output Channel Pulse Output 4 ** Pulse Output 5 **
Menu Data (as displayed)
Pulse output 4 src Pulse output 4 sig Pulse output 5 src Pulse output 4 sig
General Notes: A
By default, parameters are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs.
B
If the pulse frequency exceeds 10Hz (10 complete pulses per second), a ‘reservoir’ is used to keep a count of the excess. Always SET a large enough pulse significance to avoid this occurring; if there is an excess, increase the significance value and wait for things to calm down again. Alternatively, all reservoirs can be cleared immediately by selecting the “Clear” command through the <“Clear pulse outputs”> parameter.
C
Pulses are transmitted at evenly calculated intervals within the ‘window’ of a machine cycle. As the actual machine cycle time always varies, the calculated interval between pulses will vary even when the value from the Pulse Output Source (e.g. a flow rate) has not changed – see Figure 11.33-1. 0.525s
1.05 Seconds (Actual Cycle Time)
0.6s
1.2 Seconds (Actual Cycle Time)
Figure 11.33-1: Examples of pulse output distribution (for two machine cycles)
Page 11.78
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.34 PASSWORDS AND SECURITY This sub-section explains how the 795x can set-up to restrict access to facilities. Securable and non-secure modes: The Flow Computer can work in a non-secure or securable mode. In non-secure mode, anyone can have access to any of the facilities. In securable mode, access to facilities can be protected by passwords. Changing security mode: 7950 instrument only If you want the 7950 in securable mode, set the DIP switch on the Connector/Power Supply board to SECURABLE (if you didn’t do this when you installed the instrument).
Figure 11.34-1: Where to find the security DIP switch on the 7950
Changing security mode: 7951 instrument only In the 7951 and 7955 instruments, you change the security mode by using the key switch on the front of the instrument. The instruments are normally securable but, when you insert the key and turn it clockwise, this changes the mode to non-secure. You can only withdraw the key in the vertical (securable) position.
Figure 11.34-2: The security lock on the 7951 instrument LED
LOCK
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.79
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
PASSWORDS AND SECURITY Passwords and Security Levels A password system restricts access to its facilities to those people with certain levels of authority. There are four levels of Flow Computer security:
x x x x
Calibration Engineer Operator World
(also referred to as the “Programmer” security level)
(anyone other than those listed above).
The table below lists what facilities each of these groups can access. Access levels, and what they can have access to Facilities available Calibration
Engineer
Operator
World
Programmable parameters except security codes
YES
YES
All data or functions which don’t affect results of calculations
NO
Security codes
YES
NO
NO
NO
Programming facilities
YES
YES
NO
NO
Calibration facilities
YES
NO
NO
NO
How the security LED appears
RED flashing
RED
ORANGE
GREEN
Setting or changing a password (security level code) 1. Firstly, use the routine <“Enter Password”> menu data page for entering the password to change to the required “Calibration” (Programmer) security level. 2. From this menu, make a selection appropriate for the password (Programmer, Engineer, Operator or World) you want to define or change, then type in a password of up to 20 characters. You can clear an existing password by pressing the CLR key. You can also have the same password for more than one security level. This would give you access to the facilities of all the levels covered by that password.
Feature: Keyboard Security Fallback (Optional) The present security level for information access through the keyboard can be automatically changed to “World” access after a user-defined period has elapsed without use of the keyboard. Use of the keyboard during that period causes the ‘lockout’ timer to be re-started. Security level changes can still be made at any time in the normal way (as explained earlier) but they will re-start the timer.
By default, this security feature is not active. To activate, the length of time for the period must be programmed (SET) to a value more than zero. Passwords to change security level are as already defined. x
Configuration task: Enable keyboard security fallback Follow these instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“User interface”> 2. Locate the “Security timeout” menu data page and then programme (SET) a value for the time-out period. It is not advisable to programme a time of less than 15 seconds. (End of configuration task)
To de-activate this feature, programme (SET) the “Security timeout” parameter with a value of zero.
Page 11.80
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
PASSWORDS AND SECURITY Feature: Communications Security Fallback (Optional) Virtual slave access through the serial port can be blocked after a period has elapsed without use. Writing a communications password to database location 3187 is then the only way to un-block the serial port. Using the serial communication link during the period causes the ‘lockout’ timer to be re-started.
By default, this feature is not active. To activate it, the length of time must be programmed (SET) to a value of more than zero. A communications password should be also programmed rather than keep the default one. x
Configuration task: Enable communications security fallback Follow these instructions: 1. Change security level to “Calibration” (i.e. flashing red security LED) 2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“Communications”> 3. Locate the <“Comms secure timeout”> menu data page and then programme (SET) a value for the time-out. 4. (Optional) Locate the <“Comms password”> menu data page and then programme a new password. (End of configuration task)
To de-activate this feature, SET the value of the <“Comms secure timeout”> parameter to zero.
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.81
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11.35 MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW What is Multi-View? Multi-View (often referred to as the “User Display”) is a single-key activated display that you can define to show whatever information you want. It consists of one or more pages with the four lines on each page comprising of either or both of:
x x
Text (such as the name of a parameter), at the left of the line. A value for a parameter, at the right of the line.
You can change the configuration of a Multi-View display whenever you wish. An example of a typical multi-view display is shown below. How to get into Multi-view To see the first Multi-view display page, press the MULTI-VIEW key (i.e. the TOP blank key). A multi-view display page looks like the example below.
Figure 11.35-1: A typical Multiview display
Use the DOWN-ARROW key to page down through other multi-view displays. The message “Invalid MultiView Page” appears to indicate that no further pages are defined. Use the UP-ARROW to reverse through the display pages. Configuring Multi-view Follow this procedure for configuring Multi-view: Step 1: Decide what text you want to display You almost certainly want each line of the Multiview display to show the name (possibly in an abbreviated form) of a parameter whose value you want to display. Bear in mind that:
x
Text cannot exceed 11 characters.
x
The display leaves a space between the text and value.
x
The value is displayed as a number without any units. You may wish to include the units as part of the text.
Step 2: Find the location IDs of the parameters 1. In the menu system, find the parameter you want. 2. Press the ‘a’-key to display the location identification number. 3. Note down that number. 4. Repeat this for the other parameters.
Page 11.82
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
CONFIGURATION
MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
Step 3: Open the Multi-view configuration menu Look for the Multi-view configuration data within the following menu: <“Configure”>/<“Multi-view”> Step 4: Entering the text and location ID for each line 1. Select whichever page (1 - 5) you want to configure. 2. Select whichever line (1 - 4) you want to configure. 3. Enter the text you require. 4. Enter the parameter (location ID) you require. Note that after the location ID is entered, the display changes to show the name of the parameter. Step 5: Set the text width The text width is the number of characters you want the text to occupy. If you want to set the text width:
1. Go to the Text width menu. 2. Edit the value
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Page 11.83
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
Page 11.84
7950/51 2510 Op Man (Ch11/DC)
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12. Routine operation (Data Maps) 12.1
Viewing the data The diagrams on the following pages show that part of the menu structure which you use to carry out routine tasks such as checking results or changing units of measurement.
12.1.1
Data Map: Flow rates and totals…………………………………… 12.2
12.1.2
Data Map: Density, Base density and Specific Gravity….…….12.3
12.1.3
Data Map: Viscosity………………………………………….……….. 12.4
12.1.4
Data Map: Temperature and pressure……………………………. 12.5
12.1.5
Data Map: Smaller topics…………………………….…...…………. 12.6
795x Op Man/BD
Page 12.1
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.1
Data Map: Flow rates and totals
Flow rates and total have the following menu structure for routine work: Main Menu Flow rates o
Flow totals o
Page 12.2
Level #2
Level #3
Indicated vol rate
o
Indicated vol rate
Gross volume rate
o
Gross volume rate
Ind std vol rate
o
Ind std vol rate
Gross std vol rate
o
Gross std vol rate
Mass rate
o
Mass rate
Net oil/water rate
o
Level #4
Oil vol rate o
Oil vol rate
Oil std vol rate o
Oil std vol rate
Oil mass rate o
Oil mass rate
Water vol rate o
Water vol rate
Water std vol rate o
Water std vol rate
Water mass rate o
Water mass rate
VCF
o
VCF
CCF
o
CCF
Ind volume total
o
Ind volume total
Gross volume total
o
Gross vol total
Ind std vol total
o
Ind std vol total
Gross std vol total
o
Gross std vol total
Mass total
o
Mass total
Net oil & water
o
Oil vol total o
Oil vol total
Oil std vol total o
Oil std vol total
Oil mass total o
Oil mass total
Water vol total o
Water vol total
Water std vol total o
Water std vol total
Water mass total o
Water mass total
Alarm total
o
Alarm total
Turbine errors
o
Main turb Errors
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.2
Data Map: Density, Base density and Specific Gravity
Density, Base density and Specific Gravity have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu Density o
Level #1 Prime density
o
Prime txdr density
Prime dens select
o
Prime den selected
Meter density
o
Meter density
Densitometer
o
Prime txdr density
Viscometer
API referral
o
o
o
Prime txdr density
Selected density
o
Prime den selected
Density A
o
Density A value
Density B
o
Density B value
Visc prime density
o
Visc prime density
Selected viscomtr
o
Prime Dyn visc sel
Visc A density
o
Density C value
Visc B density
o
Density D value
Compress F
o
API compress F b->m
Alpha
o
API alpha b->m
CTL
o
CTL
CPL
o
CPL
o
Degrees API
o
Net oil/water dens
o
Base oil density
o
Base density oil
Base water density
o
Base den water (net)
Prime oil density
o
Base density
o
Specific gravity
o
Prime oil density
Prime water dens
o
Prime density water
Meter oil dens
o
Line density oil
Meter water dens
o
Line density water
Oil SG
o
Oil specific gravity
Oil degrees API
o
Oil degrees API
Prime dens HI lmt
o
Density HI limit
Prime dens LO lmt
o
Density LO limit
Base density value
o
SG Value
Water density
o
Water density (SG)
API referral
o
Compress F
o
API compress F d->b
o
Alpha
o
API alpha d->b
o
CTL
o
CTLd
o
CPL
o
CPLd
o
Base dens limits
o
Base dens HI limit
o
Base dens LO limit
o
SG HI limit
o
SG LO limit
o
Limits
o
795x Op Man/BD
Level #3
Degrees API
Prime dens limits
Base density / SGo
Level #2
SG limits
o
Page 12.3
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.3
Data Map: Viscosity
Viscosity measurements have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu Viscosity o
Level #1 Prime viscosity
Selected viscomtr
Level #2 o o
Viscosity A
Viscosity B
Page 12.4
Level #3
Dynamic
o
Prime dynamic visc
Kinematic
o
Prime kinematic visc
Dynamic
o
Dynamic visc A
Kinematic
o
Kinematic visc A
Q factor
o
Q factor visc 3
Range
o
Visc 3 current range
Dynamic
Prime dyn visc sel
o
Dynamic visc B
Kinematic
o
Kinematic visc B
Q factor
o
Q factor visc 4
Range
o
Visc 4 current range
Meter kin viscosity
o
Meter kinematic visc
o
Base kin viscosity
o
Base kinematic visc
o
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.4
Data Map: Temperature and pressure
Temperature and pressure measurements have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu
Level #1
Temperature o
Level #2
Meter temperature o
Meter temperature
Dens temperature o
Prime dens temp
o
Prime dens temp
Density A temp
o
Density A temp
Density B temp
o
Density B temp
Prime visc temp
o
Prime visc temp
Visc temperature o
Prover temperatureo
Selected viscomtr
o
Prime Dyn visc sel
Visc A temperature
o
Visc A temperature
Visc B temperature
o
Visc B temperature
Prover inlet temp
o
Prover inlet temp
Prover outlet temp
o
Prover outlet temp
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Base temperature o
Base temperature
Absolute zero o
Absolute zero
Limits o
Meter temperature
Step limit
o
Density A temp
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Density B temp
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Prover inlet temp Prover outlet temp Viscosity temp A
Viscosity temp B
Pressure
o
Meter pressure o
Meter pressure
Dens pressure o
Density pressure
o o
o
Base pressure o
Base press value
Equilibrium press o
Equilibrium press
Prover pressure o
Prover inlet press
o
Limits o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Step limit
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Step limit
o
Prover inlet press
Prover out press
o
Prover outlet press
Prv plenum press
o
Plenum press value
Meter pressure
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Step limit
o
Prover Inlet press Prover out press
795x Op Man/BD
Level #3
o o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
High limit
o
Low limit
o
Page 12.5
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.1.5
Data Map: Smaller topics
Smaller topics have the following menu structure for routine work:
Main Menu
Level #1
Special equations o
Special eq 1 value
Sediment & Water o
Prime BSW
Level #2 Special equation 1 o
Prime BSW%
o
Prime BSW%
o
Prime volume Oil%
o
Prime volume oil%
o
Prime BSW analyser
o
Prime BSW limits Base BSW
Meter run BSW
o
Prime BSW value
o
BSW prime selected
o
BSW A value
o
BSW B value
o
Prime BSW HI limit
o
Prime BSW LO limit
o
Mass water%
o
Mass water%
Mass oil%
o
Mass oil%
Water mass% limits
o
Water mass% HI lmt
o
Water mass% LO lmt
o
Std vol water%
o
Std vol oil%
o
Std volume oil%
o
Water SVol% HI lmt
o
Water SVol% LO lmt
o
Water std vol% lmt
Std volume water%
Meter BSW%
o
Meter BSW%
Meter volume oil%
o
Meter volume oil%
Meter BSW limit
o
Meter BSW HI limit
o
Meter BSW LO limit
o
Meter CSW
o
Meter CSW% Password
o
Enter password
Time
o
Time and date
o
Time and date
Set cycle time
o
Target cycle time
Actual cycle time
o
Actual cycle time
System idle time
o
Idle cycle time
Page 12.6
Level #3
o
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.2
Checking the performance of the 795x machine If you want to check that the external connections are working properly, the
the name of the input or output the value of the data the units for the data whether the data is live or set
If the data is live but the value appears to be unusually high or low, this may be because the external connection is not working properly.
12.2.1
Data Map: Health check
The
Level #1 Inputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Level #2 o
Analog inputs
Level #3 o
Analog input 1
o
Analog input 2
o
:
Time period inputs
Flow meter inputs
o
:
o
mA input 10
:
o
Time period input 1
o
Time period input 2
o
Time period input 3
o
Time period input 4
o
7827 period I/P 1b
o
7827 period I/P 2b
o
7827 period I/P 3b
o
7827 period I/P 4b
o
Turbine
o
o o
Status in [1-16]
o
Pulse inputs
o
Pulse input 1
o
Pulse input 2
o
HART board status
o
HART 1 value
o
HART 2 value
o
o
:
mA outputs
o
795x Op Man/BD
o
: o
Status
o
DP value
o
mA Output 1
o
mA Output 2
o
: Status outputs
:
HART 8 value Strainer input
o
o
Status inputs
HART inputs
Outputs
Orifice
:
:
o
mA Output 8
o
Status out [1-16]
Page 12.7
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps) Health Check Menu Structure Main Menu
(Part 2 of 2) Level #1
Level #2
Flow meter details
Turbine
Orifice
Totals
o
Standard increment
Maintenance
User Alarms
Page 12.8
o
Level #3 o
o
o
o
Flow meter freq
o
Meter factor
o
K factor
o
Pulse error count
o
Beta
o
Discharge coeff
o
Expand factor
o
Vel of approach
o
Reynolds number
o
Corr pipe diameter
o
Corr orif diameter
o
Press loss value
o
Mass rate K factor
o
Pressure ratio
o
Ind vol total
o
Gross volume total
o
Ind std vol total
o
Gross std vol total
o
Mass total
o
Net oil & water
o
Turbine errors
o
Alarm total
o
Totals
o
Increments
o
Alarm state: ABXY
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12.3
Printed reports This section explains how a member of the 795x series can print a variety of sytem reports.
12.3.1
Types of report There are a variety of printed reports to choose from. Report name (as displayed)
Content of report
Current report
This shows settings and values of up to 20 data locations that have been set-up in a user-defined list. (Refer to Chapter 9 for a guide to this report)
Alarm report
Contents of the Historical Alarm Log and attributes of up to 20 user-nominated parameters.
Event report
Contents of the Historical Event Log and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters.
Config report
Application configuration details and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters.
Current QTR
Current batch transaction record and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters. (See “Batching” in Chapter 18)
Previous QTR
Previous batch transaction record and attributes of up to 10 user-nominated parameters. (See “Batching” in Chapter 18)
Prover report
General Proving Session Report. (See Chapter 16 for a sample print-out)
Brooks prove rpts Alarm log Manual log Daily log Interval log
Brooks Compact Proving Session Report The “Alarm” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving) The “Manual” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving) The “Daily” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving) The “Interval” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving)
Reports can be enhanced to include header and footer information. (See PRINT MENUs: <”Header & footer”> and <”Define reports”>)
12.3.2
Printing a report Reports have to be printed out individually. Each print request involves selecting a report name (description) from a fixed list of all reports. The contents of that report is then transmitted through a serial communications port that has been set-up for connection to an ASCII compatible output device. The “World” security level prevents everyone from requesting a report to be printed. However, all other security levels can be used to request any of the reports that are listed above. To find out about how to change security level, refer to the “Password and Security” section in Chapter 11.
How to print a report using the front panel keyboard Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that at least one serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program. (Note: The set-up on the output device outside the scope of this Operating Manual)
2. Press the PRINT MENU key 3. Navigate to this menu: <“Print report”> 4. Edit the option (value) to be one of the report descriptions from the fixed list 5. Watch the report appear either on the ASCII output device. 795x Op Man/BD
Page 12.9
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
How to print a report by other methods Method #1: ‘Remote’ Print via MODBUS A MODBUS networked device can directly manipulate database locations of the 795x machine. With this method, a MODBUS ‘write’ command message can be used to write a report identification code to the parameter <”Print”>. The identified report is then be transmitted as normal.
Chapter 7 features worked examples of supported MODBUS commands that can be very easily adapted for this purpose. It will be necessary to know the location number of “Print Report” for part of the command sequence. This can be done by pressing the PRINT MENU key, searching the menu structure and then, once found, pressing the ‘a’ soft-key.
Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that a serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program. (Note: The set-up on the output device outside the scope of this Operating Manual)
2. Transmit a MODBUS write command to the 795x machine. Report Identification Codes are as shown Table 12.3.1.
3. Watch the report appear either on the ASCII output device.
Table 12.3.1: Report Selection Codes Value
Page 12.10
Report Selected
0
"None"
1
"Current report"
2
"Alarm report"
3
"Event report"
4
"Config report"
5
"Current QTR"
6
"Previous QTR"
7
"Prover report"
8
“Brooks prove rpts”
9
"Alarm log"
10
"Manual log"
11
"Daily log"
12
"Interval log"
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
(How to print a report by other methods continued…) Method #2: ‘Remote’ Print via Digital (Status) Input By default, Status Input 4 can be used by an external system to request a printout of the “Current” report. Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that a serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program (Note: The set-up on the output device outside the scope of this Operating Manual)
2. Ensure that the Status Input 4 is suitably wired to the external system that will activate it It is possible to modify attributes of a digital (status) input: (a) Logic sense: Choose between “Positive Logic” (default) or “Negative Logic” (b) Mode: Choose between “Non latched” (default) or “Latched” Configuration parameters are under: <“Configure”>/<”Inputs”>/<“Status Inputs”> (or similar)
3. Test by activating the digital (status) input. It is possible to allocate this remote print function to another digital (status) input but care is needed to avoid clashes with the prover requirements (See Chapter 16) and the digital input allocated to selecting maintenance-mode. (Menu: <“Configure”>/
12.3.3
Some typical reports (a) “Current” report with two user-nominated parameters
CURRENT REPORT ================ Report printing time: 21/02/2000 15:26:29 Tag number
HB5X2510
Software Version
2510 Iss 4.00
Indicated vol rate
200.000 m3/hour SET
Ind volume total
4039565.849
m3
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
(b) “Alarm” report with one alarm
ALARM LOGGER REPORT ====================== Report printing time: 21/02/2000 15:28:00 Tag number
HB5X2510
Software Version
2510 Iss 4.00
21/02/2000 13:30:31 OFF * Power fail SYSTEM 20/02/2000 17:17:39 ON * Power fail SYSTEM ******************** END OF REPORT ********************
795x Op Man/BD
Page 12.11
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
(c) “Event” report with two events
EVENT LOG REPORT ================ Report printing time: 21/02/2000 15:43:44 Event List: ---------14/02/2000 16:46:25 USER, Input channel 1 * New: 0.000 % SET Old: 25.000 % SET 14/02/2000 16:45:30 USER, BSW pcent @ 100% * New: 100.000 % Old: 0.000 % ---------Tag number
HB5X2510
Software Version
2510 Iss 4.00
Power fail time
20/02/2000 17:17:39
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
12.4
Giving your 795x instrument a tag number If you have more than one 795x you may want to give each instrument a tag number so that, in printed reports for example, you know which one the report refers to. To allocate an identifier…
1. Select the
Page 12.12
795x Op Man/BD
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13. Routine maintenance and fault finding 13.1 Cleaning the instrument You can use a cloth or sponge and water clean the outside of the instrument. Do not use caustic cleaning agents or abrasive materials.
13.2 Fault finding Although the instrument is designed to be extremely reliable it is possible that faults may arise at some time or another. The fault-finding charts show the most likely faults and explain how to trace their causes and put them right. If you cannot cure a fault yourself, contact your supplier or the manufacturers for help. NOTE:
This chapter does not deal with faults caused by incorrect configuration of the instrument. If you want to find out more about configuration, refer to Chapters 10 and 11.
Using the Health Check The 795x Health Check facility provides a method of displaying a variety of measurement parameters, including time period inputs, analogue inputs and status inputs and outputs. This can be used as a diagnostic aid if the system seems to be faulty.
795x (CH13 /BC)
Page 13.1
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
PROBLEM: A reading from a transmitter is not displayed
Has it ever been displayed ?
NO
Check the field wiring against the wiring schedule
Is the transmitter's field wiring correct ?
Wire the transmitter up according to the wiring schedule
YES
YES
The field wiring is faulty
Is the transmitter receiving power from the 795x ?
NO
NO
795x's Connector/ Power Supply Board is probably faulty
Change the Connector Board
NO
The transmitter or its configuration is probably faulty
Refer to the transmitter's manual for more information.
NO
Correct the configuration
Replace the field wiring to the transmitter
YES
Is the transmitter sending current to the 795x ?
YES Is the 795x configured correctly ?
YES The 795x's input circuit is probably faulty
Replace the 795x's Connector/Power Supply Board
Fault-finding chart 1: No reading from a transmitter
Page 13.2
795x (CH13 /BC)
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
Take great care during this procedure because the power supply must be ON when you carry it out.
PROBLEM: The display is blank
Is the power to the 795x ON ?
NO Turn the power ON
YES
Has the fuse in the 795x blown ?
YES
NO
Adjust the voltage so that it is within spec
YES
NO
Is the security LED on the 795x lit ?
Is the 795x's supply voltage within spec ?
NO
Replace the fuse by one of the correct rating
795x's Connector/ Power Supply Board is probably faulty
Replace the 795x's Connector/Power Supply Board
The 795x's Display Module is probably faulty
Replace the 795x's Display Module
YES
Fault-finding chart 2: The display is blank
795x (CH13 /BC)
Page 13.3
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
Page 13.4
795x (CH13 /BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14. Removal and replacement of parts 14.1 Front panel assembly Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
1. Referring to the diagram, undo the six captive screws which attach the front panel assembly to the case. Lift the assembly away to the limits of its connecting cables.
Top of 7950
Ribbon cable connectors (2 off)
Microprocessor board
Display
Keyboard
Captive fixing screws (6 off)
Removing the front panel assembly
2.
Release the two connectors and unplug the ribbon cables from the back of the assembly. The assembly is now free.
3. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal. Note that the ribbon cable to the connector board must be routed so that it does not come into contact with the circuit board otherwise there may be electrical interference. A suggested method for routing the cable is shown in the diagram below.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.1
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
Side view of 7950 Suggested routing for the ribbon cable to the connector board
Page 14.2
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.2 Display Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
1. Remove the Front panel assembly as explained in Section 14.1. 2. Undo and remove the six pan-head screws and crinkle washers which secure the microprocessor board to the front panel assembly. Lift the microprocessor board away to the limits of the cables. 3. Disconnect the keyboard cable and display cable Keyboard cable connector
SIDE VIEW
Display fixing nuts (4 off)
Display cable connector
Microprocessor board fixing screws (6 off)
SIDE VIEW
Display
Keyboard
Captive fixing screws (6 off)
Removing the display 4. Undo and remove the four nuts and washers which secure the display to the assembly. Lift the display away and unplug the ribbon cable. The display is now free. 5. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.3
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.3 Connector board Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
1. Remove the front panel assembly as described in Section 14.1. 2. Undo the four screws which secure the terminal cover. Lift the terminal cover away. connector board fixing screws (4 off)
Front panel assembly
Screen fixing screws (2 off) Screen Front panel fixing screws (6 off)
Terminal cover
Connector board
Terminal cover fixing screws (4 off)
Removing the connector board
3. Undo and remove the two screws which fix the screen into position. Slide the screen forwards out of its location. 4. Undo and remove the four screws and washers which fix the connector board to the case (note that one of these secures the earth lead). Remove the connector board from the case. 5. Replace all components in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14.4
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.4 Microprocessor board Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
While carrying out this procedure you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to protect the instrument against static shock.
Keyboard cable connector
SIDE VIEW
Display cable connector
Microprocessor board fixing screws (6 off)
SIDE VIEW
Display
Keyboard
Captive fixing screws (6 off)
Removing the microprocessor board
1. Remove the front panel assembly as described in Section 14.1. 2. Undo and remove the six pan-head screws and crinkle washers which secure the microprocessor board to the front panel assembly. Withdraw the board to the limits of the ribbon cables. 3. Unplug the two ribbon cables from the circuit board. The microprocessor board is now free. 4. Replace all components in the reverse order of removal.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.5
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.5 Screen and RFI conductive strips Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding. RFI screening is provided by: x
A conductive rubber strip compressed between the back of the connector board and the instrument housing.
x
A conductive strip on the front of the connector board. This item is part of the circuit board itself and cannot be removed.
x
A metal screen which presses on to the conducting strip on the front of the connector board and is attached by two screws to the instrument housing. The screen divides the top and bottom of the housing.
x
A conductive rubber strip around the edge of the instrument housing, behind the front panel assembly.
NOTE:
These components are essential if the instrument is to comply with CE approval. They must be replaced if they are damaged. Do not remove them under any other circumstances.
Note that the silicon tubing inside the terminal cover and gland plate are not conductive and are not part of the RFI screening. Remove the screen and conductive strips as follows: 1. Remove the front panel assembly as described in Section 14.1. 2. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location inside the front edge of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 3. Remove the connector board as described in Section 14.3. You have to remove the screen as part of this operation. 4. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location across the back of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 5. Replace all items in the reverse order of their removal but note the following:
Page 14.6
x
Before re-fitting the seal behind the front panel assembly, apply a small amount of Loctite clear silicon adhesive to the groove.
x
Do not apply adhesive to the strip across the back of the signal converter.
x
Do not stretch either of the conducting strips when re-fitting them.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
Removable conductive strip (around inside of front panel)
Front panel assembly Connector board Front panel fixing screws (6)
Screen fixing screws (2)
Non-removable conductive strip
Removable conductive strip
Terminal cover Screen Terminal cover fixing screws (4)
RFI screen and conductive strips
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.7
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.6 Terminal cover seal Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
NOTE:
This seal is essential if the instrument is to achieve IP and Nema ratings. They must be replaced if they are damaged. Do not remove it under any other circumstances.
S
solartron instrumen ts
7
8
4
5
1
2
9
a
6
V b
V
3
c
+/-
0 d
CLR
EXP
1 2
LINK 1
Terminal cover seal
Removing the terminal cover seal
1. Undo and remove the four screws around the edge of the terminal cover. Lift the cover away. 2. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location inside the front edge of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 3. When re-fitting the seal (or when fitting a new one) apply about 12 beads of Loctite silicone clear adhesive into the groove, then push the seal into the groove. Take care not to stretch the seal.
Page 14.8
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.7 Gland plate seal Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
1. Undo and remove the six screws around the edge of the terminal cover. Lift the cover away. 2. Use a small screwdriver to prise one end of the strip of conducting rubber gently out of its location inside the front edge of the housing. Pull the whole strip free. 3. When re-fitting the seal (or when fitting a new one) apply about 12 beads of Loctite silicone clear adhesive into the groove, then push the seal into the groove. Take care not to stretch the seal.
Gland plate seal
Removing the gland plate seal
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.9
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.8 Fuses Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
1. Make sure that the power supply is off. 2. Undo and remove the four screws which secure the terminal cover, then remove the terminal cover.
Fuse for plug PL1 (mains)
Fuse for plug PL2 (D.C.)
LINK 1
PL1 (mains)
PL2 (D.C.)
Fuse holders on the connector board
4. The fuses are located in holders on the connector board. Use a small screwdriver to undo the cap on the fuse-holder, then remove the cap together with the fuse. 5. Pull the fuse out of the cap and insert another one of the correct rating. 6. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14.10
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14.9 Back-up battery Electricity is dangerous and can kill. Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding. 1. Ensure that the unit is disconnected from all power supplies. 2. Ensure that a new CR2430 battery and a thin edged, non-conductive implement are within easy reach. 3. Undo the six captive screws which attach the front panel assembly to the case. 4. Carefully lift the front panel assembly away from the case. 5. Undo the yellow and green Earth lead from the panel. Do not undo the connecting ribbon cables. 6. Locate the back-up battery on the Processor Board.
Ribbon cable
Battery holder
Part of Processor Board
Clip/contact
Battery
7. Referring to the diagram [in Section 14.9], use a non-conductive implement to gently lever the battery upwards from near the rear of the clip. As soon as the battery lifts up a small amount, gently ease the battery in a horizontal direction away from the holder and the clip. Keep the battery in contact with the clip.
DO NOT LIFT UP THE CLIP MORE THAN NECESSARY TO MOVE THE BATTERY. 8. Keep the battery in contact with the clip until you are prepared to insert a new one. When the clip loses contact with the battery, there is a maximum of 10 seconds before all configuration and database information is lost. 9. Once prepared, remove existing battery and then slide the new one under the clip and into the holder observing the polarity symbols. Complete this action within 10 seconds. 10. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
7950 (CH14/BC)
Page 14.11
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
Page 14.12
7950 (CH14/BC)
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
15. Assembly drawing and parts list 15.1 What the drawing and parts list tell you The drawing and parts list show those parts of the 7950 which you can obtain as spares. To identify an item: 1. Find the item on the appropriate assembly drawing 2. Note the Item Number by the side of it. 3. look up the Item Number on the parts list. The parts list tells you: x x x
the Part Number for the item a description of the item the quantity of the item that appears on the drawing.
15.2 How to obtain spare parts You can obtain spare parts from the supplier from whom you bought the instrument or from the manufacturers (Mobrey). In either case, you must state on your order:
7950 (CH15/AD)
x
your name, address and telephone or fax number
x
a description of the parts you want
x
the part numbers of the items you are ordering
x
the quantity of each item.
Page 15.1
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
See Note 3
6 off each
11
10
8
17
2
+
15
2 off each 10
1
8
3 5
4 2 off each 10
8
14
12 7
8
9 6
4 off each
10
8
4 off each
13
+ 15
See Note 3
16
NOTES
10
8
6 off each
13
+ 15
See Note 3
1. The diagram is not to scale. 2. Some features have been omitted for clarity. 3. Apply a small amount of Loctite silicon adhesive (Item 15) to the items indicated.
Diagram for identifying and ordering spares
Page 15.2
7950 (CH15/AD)
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
Item no.
Part number
Description
Quantity
1
79503700
Housing
1
2
79500200
Front panel assembly
1
3
79501203
Display assembly
1
4
79500502
Microprocessor board assembly (with CR2430 Lithium battery.)
1
5
79500501
Connector board assembly
1
6
79503705
Screen
1
7
412011280
Spacer 3.6mm ID x 9.5mm long
4
8
411129010
M3 crinkle washer
4+6+2+2+4
9
410031010
M3 hexagonal nut
4
10
406803060
M3 x 6 pan head screw
6+2+2+4
11
79503710
Key panel seal
1
12
79503701
Terminal cover
1
13
429501050
Silicone tubing, 3.0mm OD
1.5m
14
429502300
Nickel/silicone tubing 3.2mm OD
0.3m
15
830005650
Loctite silicon adhesive, clear
as required
16
79503703
Gland plate
1
17
79503708
15-way flexible cable
1
7950 (CH15/AD)
Page 15.3
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
Page 15.4
7950 (CH15/AD)
Chapter 16 Liquid Flowmeter Proving
16. Flowmeter Proving This feature is not supported by the 7950 Flow Computer.
795- Op Man/AA
Page 16.1
Chapter 16 Liquid Flowmeter Proving
Page 16.2
7950 Op Man/AA
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17. HART, SMART and the 7950 17.1 What this Chapter tells you This Chapter is a comprehensive guide for understanding how the 7950 can be set-up for digital communications with “SMART” † type field transmitters.
Important Notice This Chapter is only relevant to 7950’s with the “HART” add-on board installed. Contact Mobrey for up-to-date details of 7950 upgrade options.
17.2 Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7950 A special add-on board‡ is installed inside the 7950 before this facility is enabled. This board provides all the necessary hardware and firmware support for the 7950 to communicate as a Current Input Device (Primary Master) on two separate networks (two-wire 4-20mA loops) of “SMART” field transmitters (Slaves).
Warning!! Each network loop must have no more than five “SMART” field transmitters connected at any one time. Exceeding this number will damage add-on boards. The following “safe area only” diagram shows two HART network loops with the maximum number of “SMART” field transmitters connected. In practice, far fewer transmitters are used. Take note of the warnings - above and below. Section 17.3 has details of external wiring involving the 7950. T1
a HART 1 Value 0.125 Live
T2
T3
T4
T5
T4
T5
HART Channel 1
b
HART Channel 2
c d
T1
T2
T3
Warning!! Connecting up “SMART” transducers has to be done with great care. Poweringup more than one ‘point-to-point’ configured transmitter on a HART network loop can produce an electrical current (20mA per transmitter) that can damage the 7950.
†
‡
A “SMART” transmitter is said to be intelligent because it contains a microprocessor that provides extra functionality. This may take various forms, such as on-board calculations, handling multiple sensors, combining types of measurement, measurement integrity indicators, and so forth. “SMART” is also used for the ability to re-use existing field wiring. Mobrey part number is 79507
7950 Op Man/AB
Page 17.1
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
The communications standard for each network loop is the HART§ Protocol**. A full technical discussion of this standard is outside the scope of this operating manual. There is a detailed discussion of the HART protocol in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”. However, particularly important aspects involving the 7950 are covered in later section as they are needed. Application Software is able to request data from dynamic variables that are kept and maintained by a “SMART” transmitter. These dynamic variables can be thought of as being very much like 7950 type data locations. Four dynamic variables per “SMART” field transmitter can be requested. A total of eight dynamic variables can be input to the 7950. Configuration details concentrate on setting up the 7950 to obtain up to eight (the maximum) measurement values.
795x HART Inputs
HART Transmitter
HART Transmitter
Variables
Variables
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Third
Third
Fourth
Fourth
Address = 1
Address = 9
HART 1 HART 2
HART network loop 1 HART 3 HART 4 HART 5 HART 6
§
HART network loop 2
HART 7
HART Transmitter
HART Transmitter
HART 8
Variables
Variables
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Third
Third
Fourth
Fourth
Address = 1
Address = 8
This is an acronym for “Highway Addressable Remote Transducer”. HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication foundation.
**
Implementation conforms to revision 5.5 of the HART protocol specification.
Page 17.2
7950 Op Man/AB
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17.3 Connecting the 7950 to a HART network loop This section covers installation issues for analogue input wiring involving the 7950. 17.3.1
7950 Electrical connections and impedance requirements HART connections use analogue inputs 5 and 6 for HART network loops 1 and 2 respectively. The HART add-on board provides the hardware support for these two additional analogue inputs.
795x 24V d.c. (Isolated supply)
+
"SMART" Field Transmitter
Analogue input Signal +
Active impedance
Note: To ensure reliable operation, it is good practice to ground the 0V d.c. isolated supply at one point.
100 Ohms
Analogue input Signal 0V d.c. (Isolated supply)
“SMART” Analogue input on the HART add-on board (Internally powered)
Every analogue input on the 795x utilises a internal 100: current sense resistor. The circuitry for the “SMART” analogue inputs (on the HART add-on board) use a 100: current sense resistor in series with an active impedance. The total impedance is then sufficient for reliable operations at HART signal frequencies, while minimising the d.c. voltage drop across the 795x terminals. This allows a sufficient voltage at the field transmitter even when powered through I.S. Barriers (or Isolators).
Parameter notes: 1. At d.c., the voltage drop at the maximum current of 22mA is 3.4V 2. Minimum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 330: 3. Maximum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 480:
HART network loop 1 (Analogue input 5): Pin function 24V d.c. (isolated supply) Analogue input signal + Analogue input signal 0V d.c. (isolated supply)
7950 Op Man/AB
Klippon Pin no. PL14/1 PL14/2 PL14/3 PL14/4
Klippon Pin Designation Analogue power + Analogue input 5 + Analogue input 5 Analogue power -
Page 17.3
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
HART network loop 2 (Analogue input 6): Pin function 24V d.c. (isolated supply) Analogue input signal + Analogue input signal 0V d.c. (isolated supply) 17.3.2
Klippon Pin no. PL14/5 PL14/6 PL14/7 PL14/8
Klippon Pin Designation Analogue power + Analogue input 6 + Analogue input 6 Analogue power -
Frequency-shift keying The HART protocol uses the American “Bell 202” standard frequency-shift keying (F.S.K.) method to mask a digital signal on to analogue wiring.
Important Notice The “HART” add-on board can be used with the “Extra I/O” add-on board at the same time. This combination provides 2 off Analogue inputs 5 and 6. However, the F.S.K. signal produces random errors on the analogue signal which affect the normal accuracy (See Appendix ‘C’). Mobrey strongly recommend that analogue inputs, being used for HART loop inputs, should only be used for HART communications.
17.3.3
Cable choice and the 65Ps rule There is a standard “65Ps” rule that determines the maximum length of cable that can be used for reliable operation of the HART network loop . Step 1: Add up all the resistance in the network loop. x 7950 current sense resistance - this is equivalent to 350: with the HART add-on board. x I.S. Barrier or Isolator x Cable Step 2: Find out the total cable capacitance Step 3: Multiply the total resistance by the total cable capacitance. The resulting value must be less than 65Ps. Mobrey can provide multi-pair cable that has a maximum capacitance of 115 pF/m. The following table shows the recommended maximum cable lengths for typical HART network loops with this cable. No. of slaves 1 1 1 2 2
Page 17.4
Loop resistance No Barrier 150: 300: No Barrier 150:
Max. Cable length 1171m 884m 713m 1136m 846m
7950 Op Man/AB
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950 (Table continued from previous page) No. of slaves 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
Loop resistance 300: No Barrier 150: 300: No Barrier 150: 300: No Barrier
Max. Cable length 673m 1101m 807m 633m 1067m 769m 593m
150:
1032m 730m
300:
553m
Table notes: 1. Cable length calculations take into account the 350: resistance from a 7950 with the HART Board. 2. It is assumed that a 150: I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 185: 3. It is assumed that a 300: I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 340: A discussion of cable choices can be found in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”.
Important Notice: Field transmitters in hazardous areas Always follow wiring instructions provided by manufacturers of the field transmitters.
7950 Op Man/AB
Page 17.5
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17.4 Configuring the 7950 to use a HART network loop Two methods are provided for configuring with the key-pad (on the front panel). Do not use the second method unless you are experienced with configuration using the menus. 17.4.1
Configuring by using the software wizard (Recommended) This sub-section covers step-by-step instructions for using a software wizard to configure a 7950 that has the following set-up: Example 1 x A HART network loop with one “SMART” static pressure field transmitter is attached to analogue input 5. The objectives of this example are: - to set a multi-drop address - get static pressure from the fourth dynamic variable (on the transmitter) into the first HART data location dedicated to holding input values - allocate the first HART data location to the Line pressure calculation Go to the wizard selection menu
1. Press the MENU key so that page 1 of the main menu appears. 2. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until the “Configure” main menu option is displayed. 3. Press the ‘d’ key to select the “Configure” option 4. Press the ‘a’ key twice.
Select the Hart inputs wizard
5. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through a list of wizards. 6. Press the ‘b’ key when “Hart inputs” appears on the display.
Select the 7950 “HART” data location
7. Press the ‘d’ key to answer “yes” to the prompt.
Choose the HART network loop
8. HART 1 PhyLinkNo is set to “HART link 1” by default. This example involves HART network loop 1 (aka HART link 1) so there is no need to change the setting. However, If anything other than “HART link 1” is shown: x Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options. x Press the ‘b’ key when “HART link 1” is displayed. 9. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Choose the address of the “Field transmitter”
10. Press the ‘b’ key 11. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “HART address 5” is shown. 12. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 13. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Page 17.6
7950 Op Man/AB
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
Choose the fourth dynamic variable
14. Press the ‘b’ key 15. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “Fourth variable” is shown. 16. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 17. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Choose the type of dynamic variable
18. Press the ‘b’ key 19. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “Static press (G)” is shown. 20. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 21. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Put the field transmitter on-line
22. Press the ‘b’ key 23. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “On line” is shown. 24. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection 25. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Monitor the response from issuing the online/off-line command,
26. Watch the response message. It should cycle from “None” to “Configured” in less than a minute. Note : The response “SMART error” may appear if there is there is a problem with the HART network loop. 27. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Change status to get live values from the field transmitter
28. Press the ‘d’ key 29. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until “Live” is shown. 30. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection. Live static pressure values (gauge units) should now be displayed. 31. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Skip remaining questions
32. Press the ‘c’ key to answer “no” to the prompt. 33. Repeat step 32 until the “Hart inputs” wizard is completed.
Allocate the HART data input location`
34. Use the “Pressure” wizard to make data location HART value 5 the source for the Line pressure calculation. Note: During the “Pressure” wizard, Line press input chl should be set to “HART input 5”
7950 Op Man/AB
Page 17.7
Chapter 17 HART, SMART and the 7950
17.5 Post configuration - viewing HART data This sub-section provides a complete check-list of all the data locations associated with checking information returning from HART network loops. Task 1 : Checking the results Step 1: Find this menu : <“Health check”>/<”HART Inputs”> Step 2: Look at data shown in this check-list Data name (as displayed)
Instructions
HART 1 value HART 2 value : : : HART 7 value HART 8 value HART software ver HART no. of phy links HART status
Values from sixteen dynamic variables
HART board firmware identification. This shows the number of HART network loops. Default setting is “None” This shows a digit for each of the HART data location inputs: Digit = ‘0’ - Input is not configured (not in use) Digit = ‘1’ - Input is configured (in use) Digit = ‘2’ - Input configuration failed due to an error Default state is 00000000
17.6 SMART units of measurement Support is provided for a sub-set of the SMART units of measurement Temperature 1. Deg.C. 2. Deg.F 3. Kelvin
Density 1. g/cc 2. g/m3 3. lb/gallon (UK) 4. lb/ft3 5. Kg/litre 6. g/litre 7. lb/in3
Pressure 1. In WG 2. mm WG 3. Bar 4. mBar 5. Pa 6. MPa 7. In HG
Mass rate 1. g/sec 2. g/Min 3. h/Hour 4. Kg/sec 5. Kg/Min 6. Kg/day 7. Tonnes/Min 8. Tonnes/Hour 9. Tonnes/Day 10. Lb/sec 11. Lb/Hour 12. Lb/Day
Note : Data values received in un-supported measurement units are displayed without units of measurement - line 3 of the display is blank. However, calculations that use this data always assume the default units of measurement. For temperature data, this would be “Deg.C”.
Page 17.8
7950 Op Man/AB
18. BATCHING (TRANSACTIONS) This chapter explores the 795x support for Standard Batch Operations and optional Retrospective Calculations.
18.1 Standard Batch Operations Batch operations comprise transactions and recording of product transfers and conditions over a defined period. The records kept are the current transaction in progress and the previous (last) completed transaction. Additionally, the transaction can be archived. Both the current and previous records may be printed out on-demand or automatically on transaction completion. The archived transaction maybe viewed or printed later when required. These records are called ‘Batch Transaction Records’ but may sometimes be referred to as ‘Quantity Transaction Records’ (QTR) and typically contain the normal totalisers, start/stop time/date and conditions, together with weighted averages.
18.1.1
Batch Operation Types The Flow Computer offers 4 types of batch operation: (1) Daily This type of batch commences at a programmed (SET) hour – known as the contract hour. The duration is 24 hours at all times, unless the calendar clock is adjusted. Batches are back-to-back and therefore have to be halted on-demand by a menu-based soft-command selection. (2) Timed This type of batch commences when a programmed (SET) date and time matches that of the Flow Computer calendar clock. Time is the primary parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a batch is a fixed, user-programmed period. Batches are always back-to-back and have to be halted on-demand by a menu-based soft-command selection or by the BOTTOM-BLANK front panel key. (3) Manual Trigger This type of batch is started by selecting a menu ‘soft-command’. User- intervention is the essential parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a batch is therefore entirely dependent on when the “Halt” soft-command is selected. Batches are not back-to-back unless softcommands are issued in quick succession. Alternatively, the BOTTOM-BLANK front panel key can start and stop a batch. (4) Programmed Quantity This type of batch is more sophisticated than previous types. A chain of 6 back-to-back batches can be set-up, each batch with parameters for programming the quantity to deliver, optional delivery rate, and start method. The chain can be linked such that it is continuously repeated. An individual quantity-based batch transaction can commence either by: (i)
menu-based soft-command selection,
(ii)
starting at a pre-set date and time or
(iii) starting immediately after being enabled. This type is more sophisticated than the previously mentioned types. A chain of 6 back-to-back batches can be set-up, each batch with parameters for programming the quantity to deliver, the optional delivery rate and start method. The chain can be linked such that it is continuously repeated. Product flow is the essential parameter for completing a batch. The batch is complete when a pre-set quantity of the measured product has been delivered – quantity is in terms of mass flow, gross volume flow or net volume flow.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.1
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
Simple flow control is available by means of automatically opening and closing a stream block valve at the start and end of a quantity batch. The subject of “Valve Control and Monitoring” is dealt with in Chapter 16 – some configuration is required. An alternative option is for the 795x series Flow Computer to continuously control the rate of product flow, thus giving a more precise delivery of the product during each batch transaction. Flow Delivery Control (FDC) features an auto-configured PID algorithm that can manipulate a proportionally controlled valve 1. After a flow-controlled batch is underway, the user can adjust the deliverable quantity, abort batches, or pause/resume the batch. System alarms flag events, such as completion or approaching end of batch.
Table 18.1.1: Availability of Optional Features Batch Type
Pause/Resume?
Qty Adjustment?
Over-spill limit?
Daily
No
No
No
Timed
No
No
No
Manual
No
No
No
Quantity (FDC)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Quantity (w/o FDC)
No
No
No
Abbreviation used: “FDC” = Flow Delivery Control, “w/o” = without
1
The Flow Control Valve is expected to be independent of the valves used during a proving session.
18.2
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.2
Batch Operation Parameter Reference This section is a reference for all the parameters associated with batch transaction operations. Figure 18.1.1: Batching Operation Parameters Points To Observe 1.
Only one type of batch operation can operate at any one time. A batch type is exclusively selected at that moment of being enabling by a menu-based soft-command e.g. “Run”. This action also halts an existing batch transaction.
2.
There are menu system areas for viewing the records of the previous and current batch transactions. (Menu: <“Batching”>)
3. The transaction record of a completed batch is automatically archived. (See “Archiving” section in Chapter 9)
Menu Navigation List: (1) <“Configure”>/<“Batching”> and (2) <“Batching”> Menu Data List (1 of 2): Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Menu Data (as displayed) Batch start time Timed batch duration Batch time enable Manual batch enable Qty unit-type select Qty batch enable Qty batch pause Batch status Batch qty delivered Batch qty remaining Starting program ID Current program ID Batch manual trigger Adjust batch qty Modified batch qty Prog1 quantity Prog1 flow rate Prog1 start type Prog1 start time Prog1 name Prog1 next program Qty overrun limit PID flow control
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
H, J H, J A H, I, J G E E
K L (L)
D F (E),M, Q
Associated notes follow the next menu data list.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Index 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 -
Menu Data (as displayed) Flow ramp limit Trickle flow rate Meter run max flow Daily contract hour Daily batch enable Batch auto print Meter density * Base density * Degrees API * Meter factor * Flowmeter K factor * BS&W value * CTL CPL Meter temperature * Meter pressure * Base density oil Degrees API oil Meter kinematic visc * Flow status Operating mode
Notes? (M) (M) (M) H, J L
(F) B
(X) - Mentioned in note X
18.3
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Menu Data List (2 of 2): Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
* shows data that can be “Live” or “Set” Notes?
CURRENT BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD
42a 43a 44a 45a 46a 47a 48a 49a 50a 51a 52a 53a 54a 55a 56a 57a 58a 59a 60a 61a 62a 63a 64a 65a 66a 67a 68a 69a 70a 71a 72a 73a 74a 75a 76a 77a 78a 79a 80a 81a 82a 83a 84a 85a 86a 87a 88a 89a 90a 91a 92a 93a 94a 95a 96a 97a 98a 99a 100a 101a 102a 103a
Batch ticket number Batch status Product name Program name Batch start time Start meter temp Start meter press Start meter dens Start IV total Start GV total Start ISV total Start GSV total Start mass total Start NV oil total Start NSV oil total Start NM oil total Start NV water total Start NSV water tot Start NM water total Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Oil vol total Oil std vol total Oil mass total Water vol total Water std vol total Water mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors Current IV total Current GV total Current ISV total Current GSV total Current mass total Current NV oil total Current NSV oil tot Current NM oil total Current NV water tot Current NSV water total Current NM water tot Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Current date/time Current meter temp Current meter pres Current meter dens
O R C: 7 C: 2 C: 3 C: 8 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C:11 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 1 C: 2 C: 3 C: 8 C: 9 C:10 C:12 C:11 C:11 C: 5 C: 5 C: 4 C: 4 C: 6 C: 6 C: 7 C: 1 C: 2 C: 8
Index
Menu Data (as displayed)
Notes?
PREVIOUS BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD
42b 43b 44b 45b 46b 47b 48b 49b 50b 51b 52b 53b 54b 55b 56b 57b 58b 59b 60b 61b 62b 63b 64b 65b 66b 67b 68b 69b 70b 71b 72b 73b 74b 75b 76b 77b 78b 79b 80b 81b 82b 83b 84b 85b 86b 87b 88b 89b 90b 91b 92b 93b 94b 95b 96b 97b 98b 99b 100b 101b 102b 103b
Batch ticket number Batch status Product name Program name Batch start time Start meter temp Start meter press Start meter dens Start IV total Start GV total Start ISV total Start GSV total Start mass total Start NV oil total Start NSV oil total Start NM oil total Start NV water total Start NSV water tot Start NM water total Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Oil vol total Oil std vol total Oil mass total Water vol total Water std vol total Water mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors Close IV total Close GV total Close ISV total Close GSV total Close mass total Close NV oil total Close NSV oil tot Close NM oil total Close NV water tot Close NSV water total Close NM water tot Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Batch end date/time Batch end meter temp Batch end meter pres Batch end meter dens
O
“IV” = Indicated Volume, “ISV” = Indicated Standard Volume, “GV” = Gross Volume, “GSV” = Gross Standard Volume, “NV” = Net Volume, “NSV” = Net Standard Volume, “NM” = Net Mass, “av” = average, “dens” = density, “pres” = pressure
18.4
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Notes: A
By default, gross volume is the selected unit of measurement for monitoring product flow during a quantitybased batch transaction. Alternative units of measurement for selection are net volume and mass.
B
Batch transactions require the 795x Flow Computer to be operating in “Normal” mode. [‘i’ soft-key menu]
C:
Use Table 18.1.2 to help identify the initial data source for batch transaction record parameters
Table 18.1.2: Batch Transaction Record - Parameter Source Reference Ref. No.
Source Category
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Normal mode (Main/Standard) total Metering Temperature Metering Pressure API Referral % Water (by Standard Volume) Net Oil/’Water’ Calculations 795x Calendar Clock Metering density Base density API Degrees Flow Metering Viscosity
D
This is for chaining one batch transaction program to another batch transaction program. The “None” option is for ending the chain.
E
Due to the mechanics of batching, the delivered quantity may exceed the pre-set quantity. However, this over-spill can be minimised by using the Flow Delivery Control option. Over-spill is not filtered out of batch records. (Also, see Note F) Over-spill due to 795x Flow Computer timing is minimised to the delay from the method of recording values at some time during a machine cycle.
F
Limit alarm threshold for monitoring the over-spill of a batch. An over-spill outside the (upper) limit will raise a “Qty batch overrun” alarm. It can be cleared when there the batch is completed and there is a ‘flow stop’ state. This alarm limit check will not operate unless Flow Delivery Control is active and the programmed threshold is greater than zero. (Also, see Note E)
G
Pause and resume controls are available when running a quantity-based batch transaction with active Flow Delivery Control. The “pause” ‘soft-command’ allows a live adjustment to the deliverable quantity. Adjustments take effect immediately upon resumption of the batch. (See Table 18.1.1 for availability of other batch features)
H
Activating another batch type will immediately terminate all existing batch activities. There are termination exceptions: x
A quantity batch cannot be stopped without using the “halt” ‘soft-command’ (of <“Qty batch enable”>). Otherwise, attempts to enable another batch type will fail and result in a “Qty batch running” INFO class system alarm. This INFO alarm can be accepted and cleared at any time.
x
A quantity batch (with active Flow Delivery Control) cannot be enabled unless the Flow Computer is in a ‘flow stopped’ state. Otherwise, attempts will fail and result in a “Qty batch start F” INFO class system alarm. This alarm can be accepted and cleared at any time.
I
A quantity batch with a manual trigger must first be enabled with <“Qty batch enable”> and then triggered by <“Batch manual trigger”>. Further triggering may be needed if other chained programs use a manual start.
J
Terminating a running batch will leave both current and previous batch records with identical values until a new batch is started.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.5
Chapter 18 Batch Operations K
Target flow rate for achieving the “maintain” state during a quantity batch. This parameter is not applicable unless using the FDC (Flow Delivery Control) feature. (See Table 18.1.1 for availability of FDC)
L
Enable or prevent an automatic printout of the batch report immediately on completion of a batch. A serial communication port will need to be configured for a connection to an ASCII compatible printer.
M
A quantity type batch can use the 795x software based PID algorithm to manipulate a proportional valve and therefore control the product delivery rate. The “PID” option for this parameter will auto-configure most PID parameters apart from the gain, the integral and the derivative. (See “PID” reference pages in Chapter 9) Associated Flow Delivery Control Parameters: x
<“Trickle flow rate”>
This will specify the minimum flow rate for the automated closing stage of a batch. A default value of 0 forces the 795X to assume the ‘trickle’ is 2% of the value programmed (SET) for <“Meter run max flow “>.
x
<“Flow ramp limit”>
This will override the limit that appears within the PID configuration menu.
x
<“Meter run max flow”>
This is a capping limit for the rate of flow.
The “Simple open & close” option for this parameter will cause the Flow Computer to open both the Stream Block Valve and the Flow Control Valve at the start of a batch, and close them both at the end of the batch. With this option there is no control over the product delivery rate. The “Off” option for this parameter is for when the Flow Computer does not control valves. N
Pause a quantity-based batch, SET a new deliverable quantity and then resume the batch. (Requires FDC.)
O
This parameter cannot be reset to zero on-demand but will rollover to zero after exceeding 4.95 billion.
P
Weighted averaging uses the Gross Volume flow rate.
Q
If using PID Control (Flow Delivery Control) or the ‘simple open and close’ method, it is necessary for the Flow Computer to auto-control valves. Set-up details are as guided in the “Valve Control and Monitoring” section of Chapter 16. It is also necessary to select a pre-built map of status I/O assignments – maps are listed in Chapter 16. To check on and select an I/O assignment: x x
R
18.6
Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Prover”>/<”Common prv details”>. Locate the <prover I/O assignment> (or similar) parameter and edit as necessary.
For details, turn to the “Interface Detection” reference pages in Chapter 11.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.3
Guided Example 1: Manual Trigger Type Batch This example demonstrates how a manually triggered type is configured, commenced by a menu-based ‘soft-command’ and completed on-demand by another ‘soft-command’. Adapt the example to be applicable to your installation. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.2 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows single-shot batches, each varying in duration and, consequently, the quantity delivered. They are totally unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. The Flow Computer does not control product flow. Figure 18.1.2: Manual Triggered Batch Type
Operation Events:
1 Flow rate increases independently of Flow Computer. 2 Operator uses the “Run” soft-command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B1 starts immediately, with the batch status changing to “In progress”
3 Batch B1 continues and product flow remains stable until ‘Tank A’ approaches full capacity. 4 Flow rate decreases independently of Flow Computer. 5 Batch B1 completes when the operator selects the “Halt” soft-command. The batch status then changes from “In progress” to “Complete”.
6 Batch B2 does not start yet. There is a wait until ‘Tank B’ is ready. 7 Flow rate increases independently of Flow Computer. 8 Operator uses the “Run” soft-command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B2 starts immediately, with the batch status changing to “In progress”
9 Batch B2 continues and product flow remains stable until ‘Tank B’ approaches full capacity. 10 Flow rate decreases independently of Flow Computer. 11 Batch B2 completes when the operator selects the “Halt” soft-command. Associated Parameter List:
(The menu navigation list is on page 18.3)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Comment
Manual batch enable *
“Run”
x
Soft-command for enabling and triggering batch
Batch status **
(See “Operation Events”)
x
Useful for monitoring the batch operation.
* “Halt” option is the soft-command for completing a batch and also deselecting the batch type ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.7
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.4
Guided Example 2: Timed Batches This example demonstrates how the timed batch type is configured, commenced at a programmed date and time, and halted on-demand. Adapt the example to be applicable to your installation. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.3 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows a series of back-to-back batches, each programmed to last 300 seconds. The first batch commences - triggers - when the 795x calendar clock matches a programmed (SET) date and time, “12-03-2002 08:00:00”. Timed batch operations are totally unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. Batch Bn is interrupted 200 seconds after starting, following the selection of a “halt” soft-command. Figure 18.1.3: Timed Batches
Operation Events:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Configure associated parameters in the order as listed in the table below. Wait for the 795x calendar clock to match the trigger date and time. Trigger occurs on 12th March 2002 at 8 o’clock in the morning. Batch B1 starts immediately. Batch B1 completes after 300 seconds and batch B2 starts immediately. Batch B2 completes after a further 300 seconds and batch B3 starts immediately. Batch B3 completes after a further 300 seconds. Batches continue … Later on, batch Bn starts. After 200 seconds, the “halt” soft-command is selected. Batch Bn ends immediately but it is still considered to be complete - the batch status shows “complete”.
10 To resume this timed batch operation, program a new date and time, adjust the duration if necessary and then re-select the “Run” soft-command.
Associated Parameter List:
(The menu navigation list is on page 18.3)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Timed batch duration
300.0 (s)
x
300 seconds per batch.
Batch time enable
“Run”
x
Soft-command for enabling the timed batch type.
Batch start time *
12-03-2002 08:00:00
x
Trigger for 1st.batch is 12th March 2002 at 8am.
Batch status **
In Progress Ù Compete
x
Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
Comment
st
* “00-00-0000 00:00:00” = Start 1 batch immediately after editing duration and using “Run” soft-command ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
Configuration Option: The date element of <”Batch start time“> is optional. It can be “00-00-00” if commencing with the first batch on the present day. The time element must always be specified since “00:00:00” is midnight.
18.8
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.5
Guided Example 3: Quantity Batch with FDC - Single Program Loop This example demonstrates how a quantity batch program can be chained to itself such that it is continually repeated until halted on-demand. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.4 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows the same quantity batch program (BP1) repeated twice. Batch program BP1 is configured with various details (see Table 18.1.3), including a requirement to start the batch transaction with a soft-command. The first batch transaction is started by the “Run” (manual trigger) soft-command whilst the Flow Computer is in a ‘flow stopped state’. Flow Delivery Control is then responsible for delivering the pre-set quantity, with minimal over-spill, and ending the batch. The duration of this batch transaction can vary and this is due to varying flow conditions. After the first batch transaction is complete, quantity-type batching remains enabled. The subsequent batch transaction (batch program BP1) is triggered manually by the operator at a convenient time. The batch can be repeated any number of times until the “halt” (enable/disable) soft-command is selected, when no more quantity batching is needed. Directly associated parameters are listed in Table 18.1.3 on page 18.10. All other parameters, such as the Gross Volume flow rate, are identifiable from the reference information in Section 18.1.2. Figure 18.1.4: Quantity Batch with FDC - Repeated Program
Operation Events:
1 Quantity batch operation type enabled when the “Run” (enable/disable) soft-command is selected. 2 Flow is reduced by some means - on-line or off-line valve control - and falls below the programmed (SET) ‘flow stop’ threshold. The Flow Computer is then in a ‘flow stopped’ state.
3 4 5 6 7
The first batch (BP1) starts immediately when the “Run” (manual trigger) soft-command is selected. Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (in batch program ‘1’) Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until 98% of the pre-set quantity is delivered Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to match the programmed trickle rate (in batch program ‘1’) Batch stops when all the pre-set quantity is delivered. Quantity batch status displays “Idle”.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.9
Chapter 18 Batch Operations (Operation Events continued…)
8 9 10 11 12 13
The second batch (BP1) starts immediately when the “Run” (manual trigger) soft-command is selected. Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (in batch program ‘1’). Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until 98% of the pre-set quantity is delivered. Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to match the programmed trickle rate (in batch program ‘1’). Batch stops when all the pre-set quantity is delivered. Quantity type batching is deactivated (disabled) by selecting a “halt” (enable/disable) soft-command.
Table 18.1.3: Directly Associated Parameter List (of Example 3) Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Qty unit-type select
(Any “volume” option)
x
Either “Gross Volume” or “Net Volume”
PID flow control
“PID”
x
Activate Flow Delivery Control (FDC)
Flow ramp limit
100%
x
FDC Parameter: 100% = Allow any ramp-up rate
Trickle flow rate
120 m3/hour
x
FDC Parameter: Minimum flow rate for end of batch.
Meter run max flow
400 m3/hour
x
FDC Parameter: Maximum flow rate at any time
Oty overrun limit
0 m3
x
0 = No over-spill limit check
Starting program ID
“Program 1”
x
Chain begins with Batch Program ‘1’
Prog1 quantity
1000 m3
x
Deliverable quantity excluding adjustments and over-spill.
Prog1 flow rate
200 m3/hour
x
Target rate to be maintained by FDC for majority of batch.
Prog1 start type
“Manual start”
x
Manual trigger required.
Prog1 name
“Test Prog 1”
x
Free-form text of up to 20 characters.
Prog1 next program
“Program 1”
x
Chain ends with Batch Program ‘1’. This forms the loop.
Qty batch enable
“Run”
x
Enable the batch operation type. (1st. batch requires trigger)
Batch manual trigger *
“Run”
x
The Trigger for each programmed manual batch
Batch status **
In Progress Ù Compete
x
Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
Batch status ***
(See Operation Events)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty delivered
(Increasing as delivered)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty remaining
(Decreasing as delivered)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Comment
* ‘Halt’ option is the soft-command for stopping the program loop ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
18.10
*** Viewed from within the “Batching” configuration menu
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.6
Guided Example 4: Quantity Batch with FDC - Pause and Resume Controls This example demonstrates how a batch can be paused for a period and then resumed. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.5 gives a graphical overview of this example. It shows a single-shot quantity batch (BP2) that is paused mid-way for a period of time ‘tI’ and then resumed until the pre-set quantity is delivered. Batch program BP1 is configured with various details (see Table 18.1.4), including a requirement to start the batch transaction with a soft-command. The duration of this batch transaction can vary due to varying flow conditions. Directly associated parameters are listed in Table 18.1.4 on page 18.12. All other parameters, such as the Gross Volume flow rate, are identifiable from the reference information in Section 18.1.2.
Figure 18.1.5: Quantity Type Batch with FDC - Pause/Resume Control
Operating Events:
1 Quantity batch operation type enabled when the ‘Run’ (enable/disable) soft-command is selected 2 Flow is reduced by some means - on-line or off-line valve control - and falls below the programmed (SET) ‘flow stop’ threshold. The 795x Flow Computer is then in a ‘flow stopped’ state
3 Batch BP2 starts immediately when the ‘Run’ (manual trigger) soft-command is selected 4 Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (from batch program ‘2’) 5 Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until the ‘Pause’ soft-command is selected 6 Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to achieve a ‘flow stopped’ state 7 Batch BP2 resumes when the ‘Resume’ soft-command is selected 8 Flow Delivery Control increases flow to match the programmed target rate (of batch program ‘2’) 9 Flow Delivery Control maintains flow at the target rate until 98% of the pre-set quantity is delivered 10 Flow Delivery Control decreases flow to match the programmed trickle rate (of batch program ‘2’) 11 Batch BP2 stops when all the pre-set quantity is delivered 12 Quantity type batching is deactivated (disabled) by selecting a ‘halt’ (enable/disable) soft-command
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.11
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Table 18.1.4: Directly Associated Parameters (for Example 4) Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Qty unit-type select
(Any “volume” option)
x
Either Gross Volume or Net Volume units of measurement
PID flow control
“PID”
x
Activate Flow Delivery Control (FDC)
Flow ramp limit
100%
x
FDC Parameter: 100% = Allow any ramp-up rate
Trickle flow rate
120 m3/hour
x
FDC Parameter: Minimum flow rate for end of batch.
3
Comment
Meter run max flow
500 m /hour
x
FDC Parameter: Maximum flow rate at any time
Oty overrun limit
0 m3
x
0 = No over-spill limit check
Starting program ID
“Program 2”
x
Chain begins with Batch Program ‘1’
Prog2 quantity
1500 m3
x
Deliverable quantity excluding adjustments and over-spill
Prog2 flow rate
400 m3/hour
x
Target rate to be maintained by FDC for majority of batch
Prog2 start type
“Manual start”
x
Manual trigger required
Prog2 name
“Test Prog 2”
x
Free-form text of up to 20 characters
Prog2 next program
“None”
x
No more links in this batch program chain
Qty batch enable
“Run”
x
Soft-command for enabling the quantity batch type
Batch manual trigger *
“Run”
x
The trigger soft-command for a programmed manual batch
Qty batch enable
“Pause” Ù “Resume”
x
Pause/Resume soft-commands for mid-way through batch
Batch status **
“In Progress” Ù “Compete”
x
Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
Batch status ***
(See Figure 18.1.5)
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty delivered
0 Ö 1500 + Over-spill
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
Batch qty remaining
1500 Ö 0
x
Useful for monitoring the quantity batch operation
* “Halt” option is the soft-command for stopping the program loop ** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record
18.12
*** Viewed from within the “Batching” configuration menu
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.7
Guided Example 5: Daily Batch This example demonstrates how the daily batch operates. What to do: Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and associated parameter list for this example. Overview: Figure 18.1.6 gives a graphical overview of this example. It shows two back-to-back batches, each batch lasting 24 hours. The first 24-hour batch B1 commences - triggers - when the “Run” soft-command is selected. The batch operation is totally unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. Batch B1 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. The second batch B2 then commences automatically. Batch B2 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. However, this time a “Halt” soft-command is selected by the operator and prevents more batches. Figure 18.1.6: Daily Batch
Operation Events:
1 Flow rate is controlled independently of Flow Computer. 2 Operator uses the “Run” soft-command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B1 starts immediately, with the batch status changing to “In progress”
3 4 5 6. 7.
Batch B1 continues and product flow remains stable until 24 hours have elapsed. Batch B2 commences immediately without any operator intervention. Batch B2 completes after 24 hours have elapsed. Operator selects the “Halt” soft-command at the same time that the batch completes. The batch status then changes from “In progress” to “Complete”.
Associated Parameter List:
(The menu navigation list is on page 18.3)
Menu Data (as displayed)
Value/Option
Daily contract hour
“0800”
x
Select “0800” as contract hour.
Control
“Run”
x
Soft-command for starting the 24-hour batches.
Control
“Halt”
x
Soft-command for stopping the 24-hour batches
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Comment
18.13
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.1.8
Printing Batch Reports Batch reports can output by using one of several methods:
1. Method: On-demand This feature requires no configuration apart from setting up an RS232C port, as guided in Chapter 7. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU key and then select the “Print report” menu option. Now choose a report by selecting from the multiple-choice options. Table 18.1.5 shows the relevant options for the batch reports. The report format can be seen on pages 18.15 and 18.16. Table 18.1.5: Descriptors for Printed Batch Reports Option (as displayed)
Purpose of option
“Current batch”
x
Printout the “Current” batch (transaction) record in a report format
“Previous batch”
x
Printout the “Previous” batch (transaction) record in a report format
2. Method: Automatic Printed Report The Flow Computer can be configured to automatically printout a report on completion of a batch transaction. Activation instructions: 1. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”><”Batching”>/<”Batch report print”> 2. Select the “On” option All methods require a RS232C communications port to be set-up for connection to a printer or other ASCII compatible output device. Printed reports are transmitted in an ASCII format through the port configured exclusively for this type of connection. When a batch report is first printed, it is stamped with “ORIGINAL”. All subsequent printouts of the same report will be stamped with “DUPLICATE”. However, the “current” batch report is stamped with “DUPLICATE” only if the report values have not changed.
18.14
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
Figure 18.1.7: "Current Batch" Printed Report BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD ======================== Operators signature: ............. Report printing time: XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX Original/duplicate XXXXXXXXX Tag number Batch ticket number Batch revision Previous revision
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X X
Batch status Product name Program name
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Batch base temp Batch base pressure Batch equilib press
X.XXX Deg.C X.XXX bar abs X.XXX bar abs
Batch open/close parameters --------------------------Batch start time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Current date/time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Start meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Current meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Start meter press X.XXX bar abs Current meter pres X.XXX bar abs Start meter dens X.XXX g/cc Current meter dens X.XXX g/cc Batch open/close Cumulative Totals ---------------------------------Start IV total X.XXX m3 Current IV total X.XXX m3 Start GV total X.XXX m3 Current GV total X.XXX m3 Start ISV total X.XXX std m3 Current ISV total X.XXX std m3 Start GSV total X.XXX std m3 Current GSV total X.XXX std m3 Start mass total X.XXX kg Current mass total X.XXX kg Batch Totals -----------Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
m3 m3 std m3 std m3 kg
Quantity Batch Details ---------------------Batch program ID XXXXXXXXXX Batch request qty X.XXX m3 Modified batch qty X.XXX m3 Weighted Averages ----------------Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av CCF Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Batch av water bdens
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Deg.C bar abs kg/m3 kg/m3 cSt pulse/m3
% % kg/m3 kg/m3
Alarm Counts -----------Alarms during batch X If alarm count is not zero, refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.15
Chapter 18 Batch Operations Figure 18.1.8: "Previous Batch" Printed Report BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD ======================== Operators signature: ............. Report printing time: XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX Original/duplicate XXXXXXXXX Tag number Batch ticket number Batch revision Previous revision
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X X
Batch status Product name Program name
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Batch base temp Batch base press Batch equilib press
X.XXX Deg.C X.XXX bar abs X.XXX bar abs
Batch open/close parameters --------------------------Batch start time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Batch end date/time XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX Start meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Batch end meter temp X.XXX Deg.C Start meter press X.XXX bar abs Batch end meter pres X.XXX bar abs Start meter dens X.XXX g/cc Batch end meter dens X.XXX g/cc Batch open/close Cumulative Totals ---------------------------------Start IV total X.XXX m3 Close IV total X.XXX m3 Start GV total X.XXX m3 Close GV total X.XXX m3 Start ISV total X.XXX std m3 Close ISV total X.XXX std m3 Start GSV total X.XXX std m3 Close GSV total X.XXX std m3 Start mass total X.XXX kg Close mass total X.XXX kg Batch Totals -----------Ind vol total Gross vol total Ind std vol total Gross std vol total Mass total Alarm total Flowmeter errors
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Quantity Batch Details ---------------------Batch program ID Batch request qty Modified batch qty
XXXXXXXXXX X.XXX X.XXX
Weighted Averages ----------------Batch av temp Batch av press Batch av meter dens Batch av base dens Batch av degrees API Batch av kine visc Batch av MF Batch av K factor Batch av CTL Batch av CPL Batch av CCF Batch av base BS&W Batch av BS&W Batch av CSW Batch av oil bdens Batch av oil deg API Batch av water bdens
X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
m3 m3 std m3 std m3 kg
Deg.C bar abs kg/m3 kg/m3 cSt pulse/m3
% % kg/m3 kg/m3
Alarm Counts -----------Alarms during batch X If alarm count is not zero, refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
18.16
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.2 Retrospective Batch Total Calculations The 795x Flow Computer can re-calculate batch totals by applying updated values of key parameters. It then transmits a report through an appropriately configured serial port.
IMPORTANT It is advisable to first concentrate on the configuration and operation of standard batching (Section 18.1) and archiving (Chapter 9) before using any of the retrospective calculation options.
18.2.1
OVERVIEW Retrospective calculations can use new user-supplied values of key parameters to re-calculate the batch totals and update data of any archived batch record. An archived batch record is located, updated with new batch totals and re-archived. A revision number is included in the batch record for distinguishing it from the original batch record. This type of update is activated by selecting a “Yes” soft-command. (See Section 18.2.2 on page 18.18) Alternatively, retrospective calculations can be performed whilst a batch is in progress. In this case, the update can be activated by answering the acceptance prompt following a successful proving session. Batch totals in the current batch (transaction) record are then updated using a new ‘K factor’ or ‘Meter factor’ from the session. No other update parameters are considered. On completion of the batch, the current batch record is archived, as the original, in the normal way. (See Section 18.2.3 on page 18.20) Table 18.2.1 has a full list of update parameters for supplying new values. Not all update parameters can be applied together. For example, where both the ‘K’ factor and ‘Meter factor’ update parameters have both been edited, the retrospective calculations apply only the most recently edited update parameter. Update parameters are applied in a fixed order as shown in Table 18.2.2. The “Quantity Transaction Record” printed report is an output of the revised batch record. It does not explicitly indicate differences between the original batch record and the revised batch record. Samples can be seen in Section 0, starting on page 18.14. Automatic printing of the batch report can be deactivated by navigating the menu data page with <”Batch auto print”> and then selecting the “Off” option
Table 18.2.1: Update Parameters of Retrospective Calculation UPDATE PARAMETER
DIRECT IMPACT OF UPDATE
CONDITION OF USE FOR UPDATE
Meter factor
x
Gross Volume flow rate
x
Newer value than the ‘K Factor’ update value
K factor
x
Indicated Volume flow rate
x
Newer value than the ‘MF’ update value
%Water (std vol) *
x
Net ‘Oil’/’Water’ calculations
x
Net ‘Oil’/’Water’ calculations must be enabled
Base density *
x
Degrees API
x
Newer value than qAPI update value
Degrees API *
x
Base density
x
Newer value than Base density update value
* Not used when performing retrospective calculations whilst a batch is in progress
Table 18.2.2: Priorities for Applying Update Parameters ORDER OF APPLICATION
UPDATE PARAMETER
1st.
<“Meter factor”> or <“K factor”> *
nd
2 .
<”BSW base”>
3rd.
<”Base density”> or <”Degrees API”> *
* See Table 18.2.1 for explanation of parameter choice 795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.17
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.2.2
USING RETROSPECTIVE CALCULATIONS (ON ARCHIVED BATCH RECORDS) This sub-section is an instructional guide to using retrospective calculations on any archived batch (transaction) record. Instructions assume that a batch has already been completed and archived. It is useful if a serial port is configured for and then connected to an ASCII compatible printer or PC running terminal software.
Activation Instructions:
1
Navigate to this menu data page: <”Password”>/<”Enter password”> and then enter the password for the “Engineer” security level. (See Chapter 11 for reference pages on security levels and passwords)
2
Navigate to this menu: <”Batching”>/<”Retro calculations”>/<”Select batch”>
3
Select an archived batch (transaction) record: (a) Nominate a primary search-key type….………….…… {Menu data page: <”Selection type”>} This is for the auto-location of an archived batch record. Options are either searching the batch archive by ticket number or by archive record number (b) Edit a value for the primary search-key…...…………... {Menu data page: <”Batch ID”>} Identify a sub-set of archived batch records by entering either an existing ticket number or an archived record number, as appropriate for the nominated primary search-key type (c) Edit a value for the secondary search-key………...….. {Menu data page: <”Batch revision”>} Reduce the sub-set to a single archived batch record by editing a revision number that is a match for one of the archived batch records. Use zero if requiring the original (unmodified) batch record Searches are automatically performed after editing the revision number and after editing the ticket/batch record reference number. Failed searches result in an INFO SYSTEM alarm being raised, which can be accepted and cleared from the Historical Alarm Log at any time.
4
Verify that the archived batch (transaction) record to be updated has been located At present, it is necessary to look in the Batch (Transaction) Archive menu system area… (a) Press the PRINT MENU key (b) Navigate to this menu: <”Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Transaction log”>/<”View snapshot”> (c) Browse through the displayed data to see if it is the correct batch record (d) Return to Step 2 if the batch record has not been located.
5
Program values into the update parameters (a) Press the MAIN MENU key (b) Navigate to this menu: <”Batching”>/<”Retro calculations”>/<”Retro values”> (c) Work through the list of update parameters in Table 18.2.3. Ignore the update parameters that are not relevant to your configuration or are of no interest. Table 18.2.3: Check-list for Batch Update Parameters UPDATE PARAMETER
MENU DATA (AS DISPLAYED)
‘Meter factor’ or ‘K factor’
<”Meter factor”> or <”K factor”>
% Water (by Std. Volume)
<”BSW base”>
Base density or qAPI
<”Base density”> or <”Degrees API”>
Note: Some localised menu searching is required
Note: Retrospective calculations are not performed unless a minimum of one update parameter has been edited since Step 2. Initial values for the update parameters are automatically copied from the auto-located archived batch record. 18.18
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
(Instructions continued…)
6
Select the scope of the retrospective calculation (a)
7
Locate the menu data page with “Retro calc type” as the descriptor
(b)
Select the option with either “All of batch” or “Part of batch”
(c)
When the “part of batch” option is selected, navigate to the menu data page with “Retro calc qty type”. Edit a quantity to establish the scope of all updates.
Activate the retrospective calculation (a)
Locate the menu data page with “Recalculate” as the descriptor
(b)
Select the option with “Yes”.
Calculations are performed quickly and are normally completed within one machine cycle. The batch (transaction) record is updated with revised values and then re-archived with the same ticket/archive record reference number and a new revision number.
8
View the modified batch transaction record Options: (a)
View from Batch (Transaction) Archive menu system area x x x
(b)
Press the PRINT MENU key Navigate to: <”Archives”>/<”View / print logs”>/<”Transaction log”>/<”View snapshot”> Browse through the displayed data to see if it is the correct batch record
View from printed report
(End of Activation Instructions)
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
18.19
Chapter 18 Batch Operations
18.2.3
USING RETROSPECTIVE CALCULATIONS (ON THE CURRENT BATCH RECORD) This is a guide to activating retrospective calculations on near completion of a successful proving session, whilst a batch is still in progress.
Activation Instructions: The following instructions assume that a successful prove session has occurred and a new factor has just been accepted for use in subsequent fiscal flow calculations…
1 Figure 18.2.9 shows the screen prompt that follows acceptance of a new ‘K factor’ or ‘Meter factor’. This is the opportunity to perform retrospective calculations with the newly accepted flow factor. (a) Press a blue, lettered key that is alongside the option you require. Use Table 18.2.4 to decide which option to select. Figure 18.2.9: "Apply to Batch?" Screen
Table 18.2.4: "Apply to Batch?" Options Option
Purpose of Option
No
Do not perform retrospective calculations - continue with Step 3
Part
Re-calculate recent part of flow for all current batch total retrospectively - continue with Step 2
All
Re-calculate all product flow for each current batch total retrospectively - continue with Step 3
2 Figure 18.2.10 shows the prompt that appears after selecting the “Part” (‘c’ key) option from Step One. Specify the ‘part of batch’ as a quantity in the units of measurement displayed. This will be a value in either volumetric or mass units, depending on the configuration for quantity-type batch operations. (a)
Press the ‘c’ key to start the editing process
(b)
Edit a value using the numeric keypad
(c)
Press the ‘c’ key to confirm the edited value. Figure 18.2.10: "Enter batch quantity to adjust" screen
3 Continue with the prompts until the menu system re-appears. Retrospective calculations then take place (if activated by Step 1) instantly and are completed within one machine cycle, therefore having a negligible effect on the live batch transaction recording. 18.20
795x 2510 (Ch18/AC)
Appendix A Glossary
Appendix A Glossary
A ADC
See Analogue to digital converter
Address
A number which uniquely identifies a location.
Alarm
An indicator which shows when a failure has occurred. Alarms are classified as System, Input or Limit.
API
American Petroleum Institute
Analogue input
An input where information is received in analogue form.
Analogue output
An output from which information is transmitted in analogue form.
Analogue to digital converter
A circuit that converts analogue voltages or currents into digital (usually binary) numbers which can then be processed by computers. The digital signal gives the amplitude of the analogue signal at a particular instant. See also Digital to analogue converter.
AUI
Short for Attachment Unit Interface, the portion of the Ethernet standard that specifies how a cable is to be connected to a transceiver that plugs into a 15-pin socket
B Bar
5 2 A unit of pressure. 1 bar = 10 Nm .
Base condition
Base or Standard Conditions give the volume which would have been transferred if the temperature were at a pre-defined figure. The actual values for base temperature and pressure vary from country to country.
Base density
Density of a fluid measured under base conditions.
British Thermal Unit
The energy required to raise the temperature of one pound of water through one degree Fahrenheit.
BTU
See British Thermal Unit.
C Calibrate
795x (APPX-A/AE)
To assess the performance of an item of equipment against that of another one whose accuracy is known.
Page A.1
Appendix A Glossary
Calibration certificate
Each transducer is calibrated before it leaves the factory. The details (together with the transducer’s serial number) are recorded on a Calibration Certificate.
Calibration constant
Among the information given on the calibration certificate are some constants (unique to that transducer) which compare the transducer’s actual performance against a standard. The signal converter must know these constants before it can calculate accurate results. The constants are designated: K0, K1, K2, and so on.
Calorific value
The energy content of a substance (usually a gas).
Chassis earth
In a large installation where the chassis and instrumentation are earthed separately, this is the “dirty” earth to which instrument chassis are connected.
Checksum
In data transmission, a checksum is a number which is added to a string of data and whose value is related to that data. It is used to check that the data has been transmitted accurately.
Connector
The part of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one device to another. Most connectors are either male (containing one or more exposed pins) or female (containing holes in which the male connector can be inserted).
Configuration
1. The setting up of an instrument (by entering data, setting fallback values, setting alarms, and so on) so that it works according to your requirements. 2. The method by which transducers and other inputs and outputs are physically connected to the 7950 Signal Converter
Conventional pipe prover
This has a volume between detectors that permits a minimum accumulation of 10,000 direct (unaltered) pulses from the meter under test.
Covimat
A rotational viscometer produced by Mobrey.
Crystal factor
A multiplying factor which accounts for the difference between the actual frequency of a particular crystal and its theoretical frequency.
CV
See Calorific value
D DAC
See Digital to analogue converter
Damping
Suppressing the oscillations in a vibrating body or medium.
Degree API
Used in the petroleum industry to describe the density of petroleum products. A degree API is given by: o 141.5/(SG at 60 F) - 131.5
Values lie within the range -1 to +101, the larger the number the lighter the oil.
Page A.2
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix A Glossary
Degree Baume
A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Degree Brix
A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Density
The measured density of the fluid in a pipeline.
Differential pressure
The difference in pressure at two points in a pipeline.
Digital to analogue converter
A circuit that converts digital signals into analogue equivalents. See also Analogue to digital converter.
Download
To send data or programs to another (usually subsidiary) instrument. (Opposite of Upload).
DP
See Differential pressure
E EMC
Electro-Mechanical Compatibility
Event
A change in the system operation. Events may be caused by the user (such as setting a parameter or changing the security) or by alarms (if, for example, a fallback is invoked when the system fails).
External connection
A generic term which covers: inputs, outputs, power supplies and serial communications; in short, anything connected to the 7950.
F Fallback mode
A description of the system when it is using a Fallback value.
Fallback value
A value used as a temporary substitute for a parameter when a live input which is used to calculate the parameter fails.
Flow computer
An instrument which monitors flow rates and densities of gases and liquids. It does this by communicating with transmitters such as pressure, temperature, level, flow, density and analytical instruments. These measurements are then corrected for temperature, pressure and velocity of sound.
FS
Full scale.
Full composition
The composition of a gas used in calculating energy and compressibility.
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Page A.3
Appendix A Glossary
H Hazardous area
An area where there is a risk of fire or explosion.
Health check
a check that all inputs and devices connected to the 795x are operating normally.
Hg
The chemical symbol for the element Mercury.
Historical log
A log of every alarm received by the 795x.
Hub
A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are commonly used to connect segments of a LAN. A hub contains multiple ports. When a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets. A passive hub serves simply as a conduit for the data, enabling it to go from one device (or segment) to another. So-called intelligent hubs include additional features that enables an administrator to monitor the traffic passing through the hub and to configure each port in the hub. Intelligent hubs are also called manageable hubs.
I Instrumentation earth
In a large installation where the instrumentation and chassis are earthed separately, this is the “clean” earth to which the instrumentation is connected.
Interrogate
To ask another part of a system to supply information.
J J
See Joule.
Joule
2 The unit of work. 1J = 1N/m .
Jumper
A metal bridge that closes an electrical circuit. Typically, a jumper consists of a plastic plug that fits over a pair of protruding pins. Jumpers are sometimes used to configure add-on (option) boards. By placing a jumper plug over a different set of pins, you can change a board's parameters.
K K-factor
The K-factor relates the output from a flow meter to a specific set of units. For volume output meters such as turbines, it is often quoted as pulses per meter cubed.
Kinematic viscosity
The ratio of the dynamic viscosity of a fluid to its density.
Page A.4
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix A Glossary
L LED
See Light-emitting diode.
Light-emitting diode
A diode which light up when current flows through it. LED’s are usually used as indicator lights on instruments.
Limit
Limits are upper and lower values between which a measured parameter is expected to be. If the parameter is outside these limits, it can trigger an alarm if you have set the system to do so.
Live
A value is live if it can be altered automatically as a result of some internal calculation or transducer input. (See also: Set.)
Location
An area of computer memory where data is stored. Information can be written to it from the keyboard, a remote computer, or automatically by the sensors.
Location ID
A number which uniquely identifies a location.
M Mass flow rate
The rate at which a given mass of fluid flows through a transducer.
MAU
Short for Media Access Unit, an Ethernet transceiver
MODBUS/TCP
MODBUS/TCP is a variant of the MODBUS family of simple, vendorneutral communication protocols intended for supervision and control of automation equipment. Specifically, it covers the use of MODBUS messaging in an ‘Intranet’ or ‘Internet’ environment using the TCP/IP protocols. The most common use of the protocols at this time are for Ethernet attachment of PLC’s, I/O modules, and ‘gateways’ to other simple field buses or I/O networks.
Mode
The operational state of the instrument.
Monitor
To keep a constant check on the status of a system or process.
Multiples of numbers
T M m
Multiview
A user-defined display which can show up to four lines of information of your choice. Typically, each line comprises text (such as a parameter name) and a value for the parameter.
tera mega milli
12
10 106 -3 10
G k P
giga kilo micro
109 103 -6 10
P Pa
795x (APPX-A/AE)
See Pascal.
Page A.5
Appendix A Glossary
2
Pascal
The unit of force. 1 Pa = 1N/m
Percent mass
The percentage that the mass of a substance has compared to the total mass for a mixture of substances of which it is a part.
Periodic time
The duration of one cycle of a wave-form, equal to the inverse of the frequency.
Platinum resistance thermometer
A highly-accurate thermometer, based around a coil of very pure platinum wire, which is extremely stable over time. It can be used instead of an analogue input to the signal converter or flow computer.
POST
See Power-on self test.
Power-on self test
A standard routine which an item of equipment goes through when it is powered up to make sure that it is operating correctly. The progress of the test is usually shown on the instrument display.
Protect ground
Another name for Chassis earth.
PRT
See Platinum resistance thermometer.
Pressure
The measured pressure of the fluid in the pipeline.
Primary variable
A variable (such as time or distance) which is directly measured.
psi
Pounds per square inch. Imperial units of pressure.
Pulse output
An output of single pulses, sent to equipment such as pulse summators or electro-mechanical totalizers.
PV
See Primary variable
R Radio frequency interference
Interference from sources which transmit at radio frequencies; that is, frequencies in the range of about 100kHz to about 300GHz.
Reynolds number
A dimensionless constant given by Where:
Re
vl
Q
Uvl P
v
= fluid viscosity L = length Q = kinematic viscosity U = density
RFI
See Radio frequency interference
RS-232
An international standard for serial data transmission. It specifies voltage levels, timing and control.
Page A.6
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix A Glossary
S Saybolt viscosity
A viscosity measured using methods developed by the Saybolt company. It is obtained by timing how long the fluid takes to flow out of a cup through a hole of known size. The viscosity is expressed in units of time.
Security code
A code or password which a user must key in before being allowed access to all or part of a system.
Sensor
Another name for a transducer.
Set
A value is SET if it is keyed in by the user and does not change unless the user changes it. (See also: Live.)
Set-up routine
A procedure for setting up or configuring a system.
SG
See Specific gravity
Signal converter
A device which converts one signal into another. Its main use is in quality measurement systems such as brewing where the output is used by a control or monitoring system.
Specific gravity
The mass per unit volume of a fluid.
Standard condition
See Base condition
Status
The condition of part of a system; for example, whether it is on, off, and so on.
Status display
A display which summarises the contents of the Historical log and gives an indication of the current status of the system.
T TCP/IP
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, the suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones being TCP and IP. TCP/IP is built into the UNIX operating system and is used by the Internet, making it the de facto standard for transmitting data over networks. Even network operating systems that have their own protocols, such as Netware, also support TCP/IP.
Temperature
The measured temperature of the fluid in the pipeline.
Temperature correction
Mobrey transducers are designed to work at 20°C. A correction must be applied when working at other temperatures.
Text descriptor
Text which you can enter into the signal converter. Typically, this is a parameter name when you configure Multiview.
Therm
Unit of heat. 1 therm is the heat required to raise 1000 pounds of water through 100°F.
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Page A.7
Appendix A Glossary
Transducer
A device which converts a physical quantity (such as temperature or pressure) to a voltage or some other electrical quantity that can be measured and analysed.
U Upload
To receive data or programs from another instrument. (Opposite of Download).
V Viscosity
In a liquid, the resistance to that force which tends to make the liquid flow.
Volume flow rate
The rate at which a given volume of fluid flows through the system.
VOS
Velocity of Sound
W Wizard
One of the “standard” configurations whch you can select instead of configuring the 795x from scratch. You can edit the resulting configuration to meet your requirements.
Wobbe index
A measure of the amount of heat released by a gas burner of constant orifice. It indicates the quality of the gas and is given by the expression
VU
1 2
Where:
V
= the gross calorific value in BTU per cubic foot at STP
U = specific gravity.
Page A.8
795x (APPX-A/AE)
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
795x (APPX-B /AC)
Page B.1
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.2
795x (APPX-B /AC)
795x (APPX-B /AC)
Name
External connections Type
Wiring schedule
Connector & pin no.
Pin Pin
Barrier Connector & pin no.
795x Instrument Wiring colour
Signal
Comments
Sheet of
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.3
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.4
795x (APPX-B /AC)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950 C.1
C.2
What this Appendix contains x
List of different types of connections you can make to 7950
x
Technical Specification
x
Connection diagrams and tables
x
Earthing arrangements
External connections You can make the following types of external connections to the 7950: x
x
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Analogue
Inputs from devices which monitor continuously changing parameters and transmit analogue signals. These include: x
PRTs (PT100)
x
temperature transducers (0/4-20mA)
x
pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
x
differential pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
x
viscosity transducers (E.g. Solartron Covimat (0/420mA)
x
calorimeters (0/4-20mA).
Pulse
Inputs from devices which transmit information as pulses. For example, a turbine (or positive displacement) flowmeter.
Time period
Inputs from devices where the frequency of the transmitted signal is related to the parameter being measured. These include: x
density transducers (Solartron 7835 or 7826)
x
base density transducers
x
viscosity transducers (Solartron 7827).
Status
One of two levels, to show the state of some part of the system, such as whether a valve is open or closed.
Analogue
Outputs from the signal converter to those devices (such as chart recorders) which require analogue outputs (0/4-20mA).
Pulse
For equipment such as pulse summators or electromechanical totalizers (open collector).
Status
Outputs to equipment whose status is to be changed as, for example, an output which opens or closes a valve (open drain).
Page C.1
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
x
x
Page C.2
For receiving and sending information to other devices linked to 7950. These include:
Serial communications
Power supplies
x
Printers
x
Host computers
x
Master or slave 7950s, chromatographs, etc.
Inputs
a.c and d.c.
Outputs
d.c. only. These provide power within the 7950 and to some other external devices such as transducers.
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.3
Maximum number of external connections The table below lists the maximum number of external connections which you can make to a single 7950.
Type of connection
Maximum number Standard
Additional with Option card
Klippon
Klippon
Analogue
4
4
Pulse
1
0
Time period
4
0
Status
8
0
Analogue
4
4
Pulse
3
0
Status
8
0
RS232
2
0
RS232/485
1
0
Inputs
Outputs
Serial communications
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Page C.3
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.4
Specification
General Environmental
EMC
Operating temperature
0 to +50 deg. C
Storage temperature
-20 to +70 deg. C
Relative humidity
Up to 90% non-condensing
Vibration
Instrument subjected to resonance frequencies ranging from 10Hz to 200Hz at 1g over a 10 hour period
Bump
BS 2011 test Eb
Emissions
EN 50081-1: 1992 (Light industrial environment)
Immunity
EN 50082-2: 1995 (Industrial environment)
Safety
BS EN 61010-1 (1993)
Enclosure
NEMA4X IP65
Dimensions
Height
320mm
Width
300mm
Depth
130mm
Weight
4.5kg approx.
External connections
Type
Page C.4
Klippon multi-way connector system for all signals - located in a cabling compartment. The compartment uses a gland plate for cable access.
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Inputs Analogue
Pulse
Time period
Status
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
4-20mA input accuracy
o o ±0.008% of full scale at 25 C ± 0.001%/ C
4-20mA input resolution
Better than 4 parts per million
PT100 accuracy
o o o ±0.05ºC ±0.01 C/ C (for -50 to 170 C)
PT100 resolution
Better than 0.02ºC
PT100 energisation
<1mA average (Meets BS1904 & IEC751, <1mW in the PT100)
Long term drift
<20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours, subsequently far less
Quantity
4 off, each selectable as PT100 or 4-20mA
Scan time
60ms per channel
Options
Option card for additional 4-20mA inputs: Klippon-type rear panel: 4 off
Frequency range
DC to 5kHz (dual pulse train) or 10kHz (single pulse train); minimum pulse width 125Ps
Input trigger level
0.5V or 2.0V RMS (1.2V or 4.0V p-p) (software configurable)
Quantity
1 (software configurable as single or dual pulse turbine)
Options
None
Range
100ms to 5000ms
Accuracy
±30nS
Resolution
2ns at 1kHz for 1-second sample
Input trigger level
0.5V or 2.0V (software selectable)
Quantity
4
Options
None
Type
Polled
Trigger voltage
5V to 24V. Opto-isolated
Poll period
Maximum 250ms
Quantity
Klippon-type rear panel: 6 off D-type rear panel: 16 off
Options
None
Page C.5
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Outputs Analogue
Base board device accuracy (12-bit)
±0.075% of full scale (24mA)
Base board device resolution
1 part in 3500
Long term drift
<20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours, subsequently far less
Quantity
4
Update time
0.1s minimum, software dependent
Options
Option card for an extra 4 x 16-bit devices
Special Notice
1. The maximum load impedance that the analogue outputs can drive is 1K Ohms. This must include any barrier impedance and the load itself.
±0.0075%/ oC
2. Analogue outputs are “Active Loops”. (Active loops are powered by the device providing the current output. “Passive loops” are powered externally, usually by the device receiving the current) Pulse
Status
Prover interface (can be used as extra status inputs)
Page C.6
Output type
Open-collector Darlington drivers
Maximum current
200mA per output at 24V with maximum 50% duty
Maximum frequency
10Hz
Quantity
3
Options
None
Type
Output 1 uses relay (24V DC / 30V AC @ 250mA maximume), all other open drain (100mA each @ 24V)
Update rate
Software controlled
Quantity
8
Options
None
Type
Fleeting contact ball detectors
Minimum pulse width for detection
10mS
Quantity
2
Options
None
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Communications Serial communications
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
SMART transmitter communications
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Number of loops
None on base board
Options
2 loops of Rosemount HART using analogue inputs 5 and 6
Hardware facilities Keyboard interface
Display
Real-time clock
Battery monitor
Alarm annunciation
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Number of keys
30
Key scan time
2ms
Debounce
14ms
Options
None
Number of lines
4
Characters per line
20
Backlight
LED, continuously powered
Contrast
software selectable, temperature compensated
Options
None
Accuracy
Better than 1 second per day
Power
Replaceable Lithium button cell
Options
None
Type
ADC, indicates battery condition
Options
None
Quantity
3 (one each for Input, System or Limit alarms)
Type
Red LED
Operation
Flash indicates new alarm condition. Steady indicates accepted alarm.
Options
None
Page C.7
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Security
Options
1. DIP Switch in connection area 2. Software code Bi-colour LED on the front panel: 1. RED: Not secured 2. GREEN: Secured 3. ORANGE: Part-secured None
Program storage
1 Mbyte FLASH, field upgradeable
Data storage
768 Byte battery-backed. Lithium battery (CR2430) life is typically 2 years if instrument is un-powered, and 5 years if powered.
Mechanisms Indicator
Memory
16kB FRAM non-volatile store for calibration data Options
None
Power Supplies DC Input
21V-30V dc. 25W maximum
AC Input
90V-265V ac. 45-65Hz 25W maximum
Output
Page C.8
General instrumentation energisation
1 x 24V nominal at 400mA
Turbine energisation
Switchable voltages of 8V or 16V, current limited to 60mA
DAC energisation
Isolated 25V output at 200mA
Options
None
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.5
Connections 1
PL1 3 1
PL2 4 1
PL3
10 1
PL4
10 1
PL5
10
L N E
Status input 1 Status input 2 Status input 3 Status input 4 Status input 5 Status input 6 Status input 7 Status input 8 Status input common Status input common
1
PL6
E E OV +24V Tx 1 Rx 1 Common Protect Ground Tx 2 Rx 2 Common Rts 2 Cts 2 Protect Ground
10
1
PL11
10
1 Status output 2 Status output 3 Status output 4 Status output 5 Status output 6 Status output 7 Status output 8 Status output common Status output common
PL7
Tx 3 Rx 3 Common Rts 3 Cts 3 Rx/Tx 3a Rx/Tx 3b Protect Ground Ground Ground
10
Turbine A power + Turbine A input + Turbine A input Turbine A power Turbine B power + Turbine B input + Turbine B input Turbine B power Ground Ground
1
PL8
NO Alarm Common Alarm NC Alarm Pulse output +ve Pulse output 1 Pulse output 2 Pulse output 3 Pulse output common Ground Ground
10
Density 1 power + Density 1 input + Density 1 input Density 1 power Density 2 power + Density 2 input + Density 2 input Density 2 power Ground Ground
1
PL9
10
1
PL12
10 1
PL13
10 1
PL14
10
Density 3 power + Density 3 input + Density 3 input Density 3 power -
1
Density 4 power + Density 4 input + Density 4 input Density 4 power Ground Ground
PL10
10
1
PL15
10
Analogue output 1 Analogue output 2 Analogue output 3 Analogue output 4 Analogue output 5 Analogue output 6 Analogue output 7 Analogue output 8 Analogue output common Analogue output common PRT 1 power + PRT 1 signal + PRT 1 signal PRT 1 power PRT 2 power + PRT 2 signal + PRT 2 signal PRT 2 power Ground Ground PRT 3 power + PRT 3 signal + PRT 3 signal PRT 3 power PRT 4 power + PRT 4 signal + PRT 4 signal PRT 4 power Ground Ground Analogue power + Analogue input 5 + Analogue input 5 Analogue power Analogue power + Analogue input 6 + Analogue input 6 Analogue power Ground Ground Analogue power + Analogue input 7 + Analogue input 7 Analogue power Analogue power + Analogue input 8 + Analogue input 8 Analogue power Ground Ground
Part of the connector board
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 3 PL1
Pin 4 PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
PL7
PL8
Pin 10 PL9 PL10 PL11 PL12 PL13 PL14 PL15
7950 connections
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Page C.9
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
C.6 Earthing In addition to earthing the chassis, (described in Chapter 5), you may have to make extra earth connections in some cases, depending on the installation requirements. The types of connection can be split into three groups, each of which has different earthing requirements. The groups are: Group 1 (non-isolated power supply):
Serial communications ports Pulse outputs Status outputs
Group 2 (isolated power supply):
Status inputs
Group 3 (isolated power supply):
Analogue inputs Frequency inputs Analogue outputs
The diagrams on the next two pages shows you how to earth the external connections.
Page C.10
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
PL15
10 Analogue power -
PL14
10 Analogue power -
PL13
Analogue inputs
10 PRT power -
Group 3 Connect external earths as you require.
10
PL12
PRT power -
PL10
10 Density 4 power Density 3 power -
PL9
10 Density 2 power -
Frequency inputs
Density 1 power -
PL8
Internal isolated supply
10 Turbine B power Turbine A power -
Internal isolated supply
PL11
Analogue outputs
10
Group 2 10
Opto-isolator common only
PL7
10
Status output common
Status outputs
10
Pulse output common
Pulse outputs
Group 1 Chassis and instrumentation are earthed together unless you cut Link 1.
Status inputs
PL6
10
Opto-isolator common only. No earthing is required.
PL5
Protect ground
PL4
10 Common
Protect ground
PL3
Serial communications ports
10 Common
Link 1
Chassis earth
PL1 E N L
Earth stud
Power supplies
PL2
AC power
E E 0V +24V
DC power
Earthing arrangements for the 7950
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Page C.11
Appendix C Technical data for the 7950
Earthing requirements for group 1 connections only In general, the earthing arrangements are different for large and small installations. (A small installation may possibly consist of just one instrument.) x
If the 7950 is part of a large installation with separate earths for chassis and instrumentation: In this case you may (depending on the overall system requirements) earth the 7950 chassis and instrumentation separately by cutting the link on the connector board.
x
If the 7950 is on its own or in a small installation with one common earth for chassis and instrumentation: In this case you must leave the link intact so that the chassis and instrumentation are earthed to the same point. LINK 1
LINK 1
Where to find the link on the connector board
Earthing requirements for group 2 connections only The status inputs do not have to be earthed because the circuitry contains only opto-electrical components.
Earthing requirements for group 3 connections only These depend on what sort of installation you have and the environment in which it operates. You therefore have to decide what earthing arrangements you need. It is likely that this group has to be earthed at a zener barrier earth. For further information, refer to the documentation for the external devices which are connected to the installation.
Page C.12
7950 (Appx-C/BI)
Appendix D Units and conversion factors
Appendix D Units and conversion factors The figures in the following table are taken from BS 350: Part 1: March 1974. Parameter Length
Mass
Density
Imperial units
Metric equivalent
1 inch
25.4 mm
1 foot
0.3048 m
1 lb
0.45359237 kg
1 ton
1016.05 kg
1 lb/ft3
16.0185 kg/m3
1 lb/gal
99.7763 kg/m3
1 lb/US gal
119.826 kg/m3
2
Pressure
1 lb/in
68.9476 mbar
1 atm
1.013250 bar
1 MPa
10 bar 10-5 bar
1 N/m o
1 mm Hg (0 )
1.33322 x 10-3 bar
1 in Hg (0o)
33.8639 x 10-3 bar
1 in3
16.8371 cm3
1 ft Volume or capacity
Volume flow
Mass flow
Energy
Temperature
3
0.0283168 m3
1 gal
4.54609 dm3
1 US gal
3.78541 dm3
1 US barrel
0.158987 m3
1 ft3/min
40.776 m3/day
1 gal/min
6.5463 m3/day
1 lb/hr
10.886 kg/day
1 ton/hr
1016.05 kg/hr
1 BTU
1.05506 kJ
1 kWh
3.6 MJ
1 therm
105.506 MJ
o
(1.8 x oC) + 32
F
0.1 Pa s
1P Viscosity (dynamic)
Viscosity (kinematic)
795x (APPX-D /AC)
2
1 lbf/(ft s) or 1 pdl s/ft
1.48816 Pa s
1 slug/(ft s) or 1 lbf s/ft2
47.8803 Pa s
1 St
2 1 cm /s
1 ft2/s
9.29030 dm2/s
Page D.1
Appendix D Units and conversion factors
Page D.2
795x (APPX-D /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
Appendix E Data tables E.1 The tables Note: The equations used to derive these tables are given in Section E.2.
Density/temperature relationship of crude oil Density (kg/m3)
Temp.(°C) 60
738.91
765.06
791.94
817.15
843.11
869.01
894.86
920.87
946.46
55
742.96
768.98
794.93
820.83
846.68
872.48
898.24
923.95
949.63
50
747.00
772.89
798.72
824.51
850.25
875.94
901.80
927.23
952.82
45
751.03
776.79
802.50
828.17
853.81
879.40
904.96
930.50
956.00
40
755.05
780.68
806.27
831.83
857.36
882.85
908.32
933.76
959.18
35
759.06
784.57
810.04
835.48
860.90
886.30
911.67
937.02
962.36
30
763.06
788.44
813.79
839.12
864.44
889.73
915.01
940.28
965.53
25
767.05
792.30
817.54
842.76
867.97
893.16
918.35
943.52
968.89
20
771.03
796.18
821.27
846.38
871.49
896.59
921.68
946.77
971.85
15.556
774.56
799.57
824.59
849.60
874.61
899.62
924.63
949.64
974.65
15
775.00
800.00
825.00
850.00
875.00
900.00
925.00
950.00
975.00
10
778.95
803.83
828.72
853.61
878.50
903.41
928.32
953.23
978.15
5
782.90
807.65
832.42
857.20
882.00
906.81
931.62
958.45
981.29
0
786.83
811.46
836.12
860.79
885.49
910.21
934.92
959.66
984.42
Density/temperature relationship of refined products Density (kg/m3)
Temp.(°C) 60
605.51
657.32
708.88
766.17
817.90
868.47
918.99
969.45
1019.87
55
610.59
662.12
713.50
769.97
821.49
872.00
922.46
972.87
1023.24
50
615.51
666.91
718.11
773.75
825.08
875.53
925.92
976.28
1026.60
45
620.49
671.68
722.71
777.53
828.67
879.04
929.38
979.69
1029.96
40
625.45
676.44
727.29
781.30
832.24
882.56
932.84
983.09
1033.32
35
630.40
681.18
731.86
785.86
835.81
886.06
938.28
986.48
1038.67
30
635.33
685.92
736.42
788.81
839.37
889.56
939.72
989.87
1040.01
25
640.24
690.63
740.96
792.55
842.92
893.04
943.16
993.26
1043.35
20
645.13
695.32
745.49
796.28
846.46
896.53
846.58
996.63
1046.68
15.556
649.46
699.48
749.50
799.59
849.61
899.61
949.62
999.63
1049.63
15
650.00
700.00
750.00
800.00
850.00
900.00
950.00
1000.00
1050.00
10
654.85
704.66
754.50
803.71
853.53
903.47
953.41
1003.36
1053.32
5
659.67
709.30
758.97
807.41
857.04
906.92
956.81
1006.72
1056.63
0
664.47
713.92
763.44
811.10
860.55
910.37
960.20
1010.07
1059.93
The two tables above are derived from equations in the Revised Petroleum Measurement Tables (IP 200, ASTM D1250, API 2540 and ISO R91 Addendum 1).
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Page E.1
Appendix E Data tables
Platinum resistance law (To DIN 43 760) °C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
°C
Ohms
-220
10.41
-120
52.04
-20
92.13
80
130.89
180
168.47
-210
14.36
-110
56.13
-10
96.07
90
134.70
190
172.16
-200
18.53
-100
60.20
0
100.00
100
138.50
200
175.8
-190
22.78
-90
64.25
10
103.90
110
142.28
220
183.17
-180
27.05
-80
68.28
20
107.79
120
146.06
240
190.46
-170
31.28
-70
72.29
30
111.67
130
149.82
260
197.70
-160
35.48
-60
76.28
40
115.54
140
153.57
280
204.88
-150
39.65
-50
80.25
50
119.40
150
157.32
-140
43.80
-40
84.71
60
123.24
160
161.05
-130
47.93
-30
88.17
70
127.07
170
164.76
3
Density of ambient air (in kg/m ) at a relative humidity of 50% Air Pressure
Air Temperature (°C)
(mb)
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
900 930
1.122 1.159
1.105 1.142
1.089 1.125
1.073 1.109
1.057 1.092
1.041 1.076
1.025 1.060
960
1.197
1.179
1.162
1.145
1.128
1.111
1.094
990
1.234
1.216
1.198
1.180
1.163
1.146
1.129
1020
1.271
1.253
1.234
1.216
1.199
1.181
1.163
3
Density of pure water (in kg/m to ITS - 90 Temperature Scale) Temp °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0
999.840 999.940 999.972 999.940 999.848 999.699 999.497 999.244 998.943 998.595
20
998.203 997.769 997.295 996.782 996.231 995.645 995.024 994.369 993.681 992.962
40
992.212 991.432 990.623 989.786 988.922 988.030 987.113 986.169 985.201 984.208
60
983.191 982.150 981.086 980.000 978.890 977.759 976.607 975.432 974.237 973.021
80
971.785 970.528 969.252 967.955 966.640 965.305 963.950 962.577 961.185 959.774
100
958.345
Page E.2
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
Velocity of Sound in Liquids The values for a selection of fluids are given below. You can obtain further details from reference books such as Tables of Physical and Chemical Constants and some Mathematical Functions by G W C Kaye and T H Laby. Liquid
Temperature (t °C)
Velocity of Sound ( c ) ms-1)
Acetic acid Acetone Amyl acetate Aniline Benzine
20 20 29 20 20
1173 1190 1173 1656 1320
Rate of Change ( Gc / Gt ms-1K1 ) ----4.5 ----4.0 -5.0
Blood (horse)
37
1571
----
Butyl acetate
30
1172
-3.2
Carbon disulphide
25
1142
----
Carbon tetrachloride
20
940
-3.0
Chlorine
20
850
-3.8
Chlorobenzene
20
1290
-4.3
Chloroform
20
990
-3.3
Ethanol amide
25
1724
-3.4
Ethyl acetate
30
1133
-3.9
Ethyl alcohol
20
1162
-3.6
Formic acid
20
1360
-3.5
Heptane
20
1160
-4.5
n-Hexane
30
1060
----
Kerosene
25
1315
-3.6
Menthol
50
1271
----
Methyl acetate
30
1131
-3.7
Methyl alcohol
20
1121
-3.5
Methylene Chloride
25
1070
----
Nitrogen
-189
745
-10.6
Nonane
20
1248
----
Oil (castor)
19
1500
-4.1
Oil (olive)
22
1440
-2.8
Octane
20
1197
----
Oxygen
-186
950
-6.9
n-Pentane
20
1044
-4.2
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Page E.3
Appendix E Data tables
n-Propyl acetate
26
1182
----
Toluene
20
1044
-4.2
Turpentine
25
1225
----
Water (distilled)
10
1447.2
----
20
1482.3
----
30
1509.1
----
50
1542.5
----
-4
1430.2
----
00
1449.5
----
05
1471.1
----
15
1507.1
----
25
1534.7
----
22
1352
----
Water (sea)
o-Xylene
Page E.4
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
E.2. Equations used to derive data tables
Density/temperature relationship The density/temperature relationship is:
Ut
U 15 exp> D 15 ' t 1 0.8D 15 ' t @
where:
Ut
= density at line temperature t°C (kg/m3)
U 15
= density at base temperature 15°C (kg/m3)
't
= t°C -15°C (i.e. t - base temperature)
D 15
= tangent thermal expansion coefficient per °C at base temperature 15°C
Tangent thermal expansion coefficient The tangent thermal expansion coefficient differs for each of the major groups of hydrocarbons. It is obtained from the equation:
K 0 K1U15
D 15
U152
where K 0 and K1 are API factors which are obtained from the table: Density Range
Product
K0
K1
3
(kg/m ) Crude Oil
771 - 981
613.97226
0.00000
Gasolines
654 - 779
346.42278
0.43884
Kerosines
779 - 839
594.54180
0.00000
Fuel Oils
839 - 1075
186.96960
0.48618
Product compressibility The definition of compressibility used to develop the table in Section 1 of the IP Petroleum measurement Manual is the isothermal secant compressibility, defined by the equation:
E
795x (APPX-E /AC)
1 ª wV1 wV2 º « » V0 ¬ P1 P2 ¼ T
Page E.5
Appendix E Data tables
where
V0
= isothermal secant compressibility at t t T = volume of liquid at atmospheric pressure
wV1
= change in volume from
V0 to V1
wV2
= change in volume from
V0 to V2
V1 & V2
= volumes at pressures P1 and P2 , respectively
P1 & P2
= gauge pressure readings (Bar)
E
For practical purposes, when the liquid volume changes from
V0 to V1 as the gauge pressure
changes from zero (atmospheric) to P1 , the above equation is simplified to:
E
1 ª wV1 º « » V0 ¬ P1 ¼ T
ISO Document TC 28/SC3/N248, (Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use) gives the following equations relating E to the compressibility data:
log e C
1.38315 0.00343804T 3.02909 log e U 0.0161654T log e U
and
E
C u 10 6 u bar 1
where:
T
= oil temperature in °C
r
= oil density in kg/litre at 15°C
The new equation (from the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 11.2.1M) gives (after converting to units of kg/m and bar):
4
E 10 e where:
§ 0.87096 u106 4 .2092 u t u103 · ¨ 1.62080 0.00021592 u t ¸ U 215 U 215 © ¹
bar 1
T
= temperature in °C
r15
= density (in kg/m3) at 15°C and at atmospheric pressure
This equation is valid for the density range of 638 kg/m3 to 1074 kg/m3. For a density range of 350 kg/m3 to 637 kg/m3 refer to Chapter 11.2.2M in the API Manual.
Page E.6
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix E Data tables
Velocity of sound in liquids The velocity of sound in dilational waves in unbound fluids is given by: 1
c
E a U 2
where:
795x (APPX-E /AC)
c
= velocity of sound
Ea U
= adiabatic compressibility = density
Page E.7
Appendix E Data tables
Page E.8
795x (APPX-E /AC)
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Appendix F Calculations and theory Liquid viscosity measurement This is obtained from the equation:
K
V V · § V ¨ V0 12 24 ¸ © Q Q ¹
Where:
K
=
Fluid dynamic viscosity (cP)
V
=
Viscosity scaling factor
V0
=
Viscosity coefficient from calibration certificate
V1
=
Viscosity coefficient from calibration certificate
V2
=
Viscosity coefficient from calibration certificate
Q
=
Transducer quality factor
Kinematic viscosity This is obtained from the equation:
Q
K V
u
Where:
K
U
u 1000 u U
Q K
=
Kinematic viscosity
=
Fluid dynamic viscosity (cP)
V K
=
Viscosity scaling factor
=
Density scaling factor
U
=
Line density
Saybolt viscosity This is obtained from the equation:
S. V .
ª
>1.0 0.000061 t 100 @ u «4.6324Q «¬
Where:
795x Op Man / BB
º 1.0 0.03264Q » 3930.2 262.7Q 23.97Q 2 1.646Q 3 u 10 5 »¼
t
=
Temperature in oF
Q
=
Kinematic viscosity in cSt.
Page F.1
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Liquid density This is obtained from the equation:
U
K
0
Where:
K1W B K 2 W B 2
U
=
Uncorrected density (kg/m3
K0
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K1
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K2
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
WB
=
Periodic time B (PS)
Correction for operating temperatures other than 20oC This is obtained from the equation:
Ut
U>1 K18 t 20 @ K19 t 20
Where:
U
=
Uncorrected density (kg/m3
U1
=
Density corrected for temperature
K18
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K19
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
t
=
Line temperature in oC
Correction for high fluid viscosity This is obtained from the equation:
UQ
Where:
Page F.2
ª
K
K º
U t « K 20 212 224 » Q Q ¼ ¬ UQ
=
Density corrected for viscosity
Ut
=
Density corrected for temperature
K 20
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K 21
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
K 22
=
Density coefficient from calibration certificate
Q
=
Averaged quality factor of transducer.
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Density/temperature relationship Correction factors in the revised API-ASTM-IP petroleum measurement tables are based on the equation:
Ut U 15
>
@
exp D 15 ' t 1 0.8D 15 ' t
Where:
Ut
=
Density at line temperature toC
U 15
=
Density at base temperature 15oC
't
=
Line temperature-base temperature
D 15
=
Tangent thermal expansion coefficient per oC at base temperature 15oC
The tangent thermal coefficient differs for each of the major groups of hydrocarbons. It is obtained from the equation:
K 0 K1 u U 15
D5
U 2
15
Where:
D 15
=
Density at line temperature toC
U 15
=
Density at base temperature 15oC
K0
=
API factor
K1
=
API factor
Density/pressure relationship Isothermal secant compressibility is defined by the equation:
E
1 § GV1 · ¸ ¨ V0 © P1 ¹
Where:
E
=
Isothermal secant compressibility at temperature toC
GV1
=
Change of volume from V0 to V1
P1
=
Gauge pressure reading (P-1.103) bars
The correlation equation for E from the available compressibility data is:
log e C Where:
1.38315 0.00343804t 3.02909 log e U 0.0161654t log e U
E
=
Cx10-5 bar
t
=
Temperature in oC
U
=
U15
= oil density at 15oC (kg/litre).
1000 795x Op Man / BB
Page F.3
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Special calculation equation 1 The equation is:
R
ª a b Xc A B« «¬ d e Y f
Where:
º » »¼
R A, B a- f
=
Extra functions result
=
Constants
=
Pointers
X, Y
=
Constants
Special calculation equation 2 The equation is:
R
e
A Bt Ct 2
Where:
R A , B ,C
=
Result of special calculation 2
=
Constants
t
=
Pointer
Special calculation equation 4 The equation is: V 50
ª § t 273.155 · º ½ 19.2 ®33.5 log10 * log10 K av 0.85 «A log10 * ¨ ¸ ¾ © 50 273.155 ¹ »¼ ¿ ¬ ¯
>
Where:
Vt
t
=
Line temperature
K av
=
Average kinematic viscosity
A
=
User-defined constant (it has a default value of 118)
ª« V3350. 5E º» ½ »° °° ««10 »° ¼ ¬ 10 ¾ 0.85 ® ° ° °¿ °¯
Where:
Page F.4
@
E
=
User-defined constant
Vt
=
Viscosity at temperature t
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Dynamic Viscosity The dynamic viscosity ( K ) of a Newtonian fluid is given by:
K W u dv / dr
W = shearing stress between two planes parallel with the direction of flow
where:
dv / dr = velocity gradient at right angles to the direction of flow.
The dimensions of dynamic viscosity are M L-1 T-1 and the SI unit is Pascal seconds (Pa s).
Dynamic Viscosity The kinematic viscosity ( Q ) is the ratio of the dynamic viscosity to the density
U
The dimensions of kinematic viscosity are L2 T-1 and the SI unit is square metres per second (m2/s).
795x Op Man / BB
Page F.5
Appendix F Calculations and theory
Page F.6
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
795x (APPX-G/AE)
Page G.1
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
Page G.2
795x (APPX-G/AE)
Operating Manual
Solartron® 7950 Flow Computer
Mobrey Measurement 158 Edinburgh Avenue, Slough, Berks, UK, SL1 4UE T +44 (0) 1753 756600 F +44 (0) 1753 823589 [email protected] www.mobrey.com Mobrey SA-NV Mobrey GmbH Mobrey SA Mobrey sp z o o Mobrey AB
Belgium Deutschland France Polska Sverige
tel: 02/465 3879 tel: 0211/99 808-0 tel: 01 30 17 40 80 tel: 022 871 7865 tel: 08-725 01 00
© 1997 - 2006, Mobrey. The right is reserved to amend details given in this publication without notice.
HB502510 Status B April 2006
Related Documents
Operating Manual
June 2020 9
Operating Manual
June 2020 6
Operating Manual
June 2020 6
Operating Manual
June 2020 7
Ft23 Operating Manual
November 2019 19